Skip to main content

Full text of "1993-1994 West Chester University Undergraduate Course Catalog"

See other formats 


WEST  CHESTER  UNIVERSITY 


West  Chester  University 


West  Chester  University 

Undergraduate  Catalog 

1993-1994 


Communications  Directory 

MAH-ING  ADDRESS:        West  Chester  University 
West  Chester,  PA  19383 

TELEPHONES:  Dial  436  plus  number  in  parentheses.  For 

offices  not  shown  here,  call  the  University 

Information  Center:  (215)  436-1000. 
Academic  Advising  Director  of  Academic  Advising,  Lawrence 

Center  (3505) 
Academic  Development    Director  of  Academic  Development 
Program  Program,  Lawrence  Center  (3505) 

Admissions/Under-  Director  of  Admissions,  100  West 

graduate  Catalogs  Rosedale  Avenue  (3411) 

Affirmative  Action  Office  of  Affirmative  Action,  Lawrence 

Center  (2433) 
Billing/Payments  Office  of  the  Bursar,  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center 

(2552) 
Bookstore  Student  Services  Inc.,  Sykes  Union 

Building  (2242) 
Careers/Placement  Director  of  Career  Development  Center, 

Lawrence  Center  (2501) 
Continuing  Education      Dean  of  University  College,  Elsie  O.  Bull 

Center  (3550) 

Director  of  Adult,  Evening,  and  Alternative 

Studies,  Ebie  O.  Bull  Center  (3550) 

Director,  Center  of  Business,  Industry,  and 

Government,  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center  (3550) 
Counseling  Counseling  Center,  Lawrence  Center 

(2301) 
Financial  Aid/  Director  of  Financial  Aid,  Elsie  O.  Bull 

Work  Study  Center  (2627) 

Graduate  Studies/  Dean  of  Graduate  Studies  and  Sponsored 

Catalogs  Research,  Old  Library  (2943) 

Housing  Residence  Life,  Sykes  Union  Building 

(3307) 
Police  Public  Safety  Depanment,  Peoples 

Maintenance  Building  (3311) 
Public  Relations  Director  of  University  Relations,  Smith 

House  (3383) 
Student  Activities  and      Student  Programming  Dept./Student 
University  Events  Activities  Council,  Sykes  Union  Building 

(2983)  or  Sykes  Information  Desk  (2984) 
Student  Services  Inc.        Sykes  Union  Building  (2955) 
Scheduling'Registration    University  Registrar,  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center 

(3541) 
Summer  Sessions  Office  of  the  Registrar,  Elsie  O.  Bull 

Center  (2230) 
Teacher  Certification        Teacher  Certification  Office,  Recitation 

Hall  (2426) 

Accreditarion 

West  Chester  University  is  accredited  by  The  Middle  States  Associa- 
tion of  Colleges  and  Secondary  Schools,  The  National  Council  for 
Accreditation  of  Teacher  Education,  The  National  Athletic  Training 
Association,  The  National  Association  of  Schools  of  Music,  The 
Council  on  Social  Work  Education  (baccalaureate  level).  The 
National  League  for  Nursing,  The  Society  for  Public  Health  Educa- 
tion, The  American  Chemical  Society,  The  Commission  on  Accred- 
itation in  Clinical  Chemistry,  and  the  Joint  Review  Committee  for 
Respiratory  Therapy  Education.  West  Chester  University  has  been 


given  program  approval  by  the  Department  of  Education  of  the 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  for  the  certification  of  teachers. 

Nondiscrimination/Affimiative  Action  Policy 

West  Chester  University  is  committed  to  providing  leadership  in 
extending  equal  opportunities  to  all  individuals.  Accordingly,  the 
University  will  continue  to  make  every  effon  to  provide  these  rights 
to  all  persons  regardless  of  race,  color,  religious  creed,  sexual  orien- 
tation, handicap,  ancestry,  national  origin,  union  membership,  age, 
or  sex.  This  policy  applies  to  all  members  of  the  University  commu- 
nity including  students,  faculty,  staff,  and  administrators.  It  also 
applies  to  all  applicants  for  admission  or  employment  and  all  par- 
ticipants in  University-sponsored  activities. 

This  policy  is  in  compliance  viath  federal  and  state  laws,  includ- 
ing Titles  VI  and  VII  of  the  Civil  Rights  Act  of  1964,  Title  LX  of  the 
Educational  Amendment  of  1972,  Section  504  of  the  Rehabilitation 
Act  of  1973,  Americans  with  DisabiUties  Act  of  1990,  and  Executive 
Order  of  the  Governor  of  Pennsylvania. 

Any  individual  having  suggestions,  problenis,  complaints,  or 
grievances  with  regard  to  equal  opportunity  or  affirmative  action  is 
encouraged  to  contact  the  director  of  affirmative  action,  104 
Lawrence  Center  (215)  436-2433. 

Sexual  Harassment  Policy 

West  Chester  University  is  committed  to  equality  of  opportunity 
and  freedom  firom  discrimination  for  all  its  students  and  employees. 
Based  on  this  commitment  and  the  recognition  that  sexual  harass- 
ment is  a  form  of  discrimination,  which  is  of  a  growing  concern  to 
the  higher  education  community,  the  University  provides  the  follow- 
ing policy: 

Harassment  on  the  basis  of  sex  is  a  violation  of  Tide  VII  of 
the  U.S.  Civil  Rights  Act,  Title  K  of  the  Educational  Amend- 
ments of  1972,  and  of  the  Pennsylvania  Human  Relations  Act. 
Because  West  Chester  University  is  committed  to  establishing 
an  environment  free  from  discrimination  and  harassment,  sex- 
ual harassment  will  not  be  tolerated  in  any  form.  Upon  official 
filing  of  a  complaint,  immediate  investigation  will  be  made  cul- 
minating in  appropriate  corrective  action  where  warranted, 
which  may  include  termination  of  the  relationship  with  the 
University. 

Sexual  harassment  is  defined  as  unwelcome  sexual  advances, 
requests  for  sexual  favors,  and  other  verbal  or  physical  conduct 
of  a  sexual  nature  occurring  when: 

1.  submission  of  such  conduct  is  made  either  explicitly  or 
implicitly  a  term  or  condition  of  an  individual's  employ- 
ment, or  of  a  student's  academic  status  or  treatment; 

2.  submission  to  or  rejection  of  such  conduct  by  an  individual 
is  used  as  the  basis  for  academic  or  employment  decisions 
affecting  such  an  individual,  or 

3.  such  conduct  creates  an  intimidating,  hostile,  or  offensive 
living,  working  or  academic  environment  to  a  reasonable 
person. 

A  complete  copy  of  the  University's  Sexual  Harassment  Policy 
document,  inclusive  of  the  investigatory  procedures,  may  be 
obtained  from  the  Office  of  Affirmative  Action. 

Individuals  who  believe  themselves  to  be  the  victims  of  sexual 
harassment,  or  who  have  questions  about  the  University's  policy  on 
this  matter  should  contact  the  director  of  affirmative  action,  104 
Lawrence  Center  (215)  436-2433. 

The  provisions  of  this  catalog  are  not  to  be  regarded  as  an  irre- 
vocable contract  between  the  student  and  the  University.  West 
Chester  University  reserves  the  right  to  change  any  provisions  or 
requirements  at  any  time. 


u 


Contents 


Communications  Directory 11 

Introducing  West  Chester    3 

Campus  and  Facilities 4 

Admission  to  West  Chester    6 

Fees  and  Expenses    8 

Financial  Aid 11 

Student  Affairs 18 

Academic  Affairs 29 

Degree  Requirements 34 

Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 39 

Structure  of  the  University 50 

Undergraduate  Programs  at  West  Chester    51 

Programs  of  Study  and  Course  Offerings 52 

College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 53 

Depanment  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology    53 

Department  of  Art    55 

Depanment  of  Biology 58 

Department  of  Chemistry    61 

Department  of  Communication  Studies    63 

Department  of  English    65 

Department  of  Foreign  Languages    69 

Depanment  of  Geology  and  Astronomy    74 

Depanment  of  History    77 

Interdisciplinary  Programs     79 

American  Studies  Program 79 

Comparative  Literature  Studies  Program    80 

Ethnic  Studies  Program 81 

Latin-American  Studies  Program 82 

Linguistics  Program     82 

Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  Program    83 

Russian  Studies  Program 83 

Women's  Studies  Program 84 

Liberal  Studies  Program    85 

Depanment  of  Mathematics 

and  Computer  Science    86 

Department  of  Philosophy 89 

Depanment  of  Physics  and 

Pre-Engineering  Program 91 

Pre-Medical  Program .  92 

Depanment  of  Psychology 93 

Depanment  of  Theatre  Arts 95 

School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 97 

Depanment  of  Accounting    97 

Depanment  of  Criminal  Justice    98 


Department  of  Economics 99 

Department  of  Geography  and  Planning 101 

Department  of  Management 103 

Department  of  Marketing    104 

Department  of  Political  Science 105 

Political  Science/  Public 

Administration  Programs    107 

Department  of  Social  Work 108 

School  of  Education 110 

Department  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading    ...   110 
Depanment  of  Counselor,  Secondary, 

and  Professional  Education 112 

Environmental  Education  Program 113 

Depanment  of  Instructional  Media 114 

Social  Studies  Program 115 

Depanment  of  Special  Education 116 

Teaching  Certification  Programs 117 

School  of  Health  Sciences 119 

Department  of  Communicative  Disorders    119 

Depanment  of  Health 120 

Department  of  Nursing 123 

Department  of  Physical  Education    125 

Department  of  Sports  Medicine 130 

School  of  Music    132 

Department  of  Music  Education 134 

Department  of  Music  History 134 

Department  of  Instrumental  Music 135 

Department  of  Keyboard  Music    136 

Department  of  Music  Theory 

and  Composition    137 

Department  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 138 

Academic  Services  Division 139 

Department  of  Educational  Services 139 

Military  Science  Program  (Army  ROTC)  . 139 

Air  Force  ROTC  Program    140 

Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 141 

Administration 142 

Faculty    143 

Academic  Calendar 156 

University  Policy  for  Storm  Closings 156 

Campus  Map    157 

Borough  Map 158 

Chester  County  Map 159 

Index 160 


Introducing  West  Chester 


Quality  educarion  at  a  reasonable  price 
.  .  .  this  is  the  goal  of  West  Chester 
University,  the  second  largest  of  the  14 
institutions  of  higher  learning  that 
compose  the  State  System  of  Higher 
Education  of  the  Commonwealth  of 
Pennsylvania.  A  comprehensive  and 
multipurpose  university,  West  Chester 
serves  individuals  of  all  ages  with  a 
variety  of  programs  to  fill  their  educa- 
tional needs. 

West  Chester  offers  degrees  in  the  arts 
and  sciences,  teacher  training  and  cer- 
tification, advanced  study  preparation 
in  fields  such  as  medicine  and  law, 
education  for  specific  professions,  and 
continuing  education.  See  page  51  for 
a  complete  listing  of  undergraduate 
degree  programs. 
Total  enrollment  at  West  Chester 
includes  more  than  10,000  undergrad- 
uate students  and  about  2,000  graduate 
students.  While  most  undergraduates 
are  recent  high  school  graduates  pre- 
paring for  career  objectives,  many  oth- 
ers are  older  individuals,  including  vet- 
erans and  homemakers,  who  either 
never  before  had  the  opportunity  for  a 
college  education  or  whose  schooling 
was  interrupted. 

Most  students  are  residents  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, but  students  from  other  states 
and  foreign  countries  are  welcome. 
West  Chester's  student  body  represents 
a  cross  section  of  many  ethnic,  racial, 
and  religious  groups  and  includes  stu- 
dents from  all  economic  levels. 

Like  the  world  around  it.  West  Chester 
University  is  constantly  changing  and 
growing.  The  school  continues  to 
broaden  and  modify  the  nature  and 
number  of  its  programs  to  reflect  the 
needs  of  its  students  in  their  endeavor 
to  prepare  themselves  for  success  and 
fulfillment  in  life. 

Missions  of  the  University 

The  missions  of  the  University  include 
instruction,  research,  and  community 
service.  Initially  it  is  emphasized  that 
these  missions  and  their  concomitant 
goals  are  interrelated.  The  scholarship 
and  creative  development  that  faculty 
members  experience  in  their  profes- 
sional fields  are  important  prerequisites 
for  university-level  teaching  in  the 


1990s.  The  faculty  that  engages  its  stu- 
dents in  the  process  of  discovery  and 
in  community  service  gives  them 
hands-on  experience  that  represents 
the  active  learning  and  commitment 
that  is  teaching  and  learning  at  its  best. 

This  combination  of  missions,  common 
to  all  comprehensive  universities,  helps 
students  to  fulfill  themselves  as  indi- 
viduals and  as  members  of  society. 
This  is  accomplished  by  providing 
opportunities  for  personal  growth 
through  intellectual,  cultural,  and  aes- 
thetic stimulation;  specific  career  train- 
ing; advanced  involvement  in  the  aca- 
demic process;  research  and  creative 
activities;  and  public  service.  An 
emphasis  on  student  involvement  and 
on  faculty  interaction  with  students 
distinguishes  West  Chester  from 
research  institutions  and  identifies  it 
with  the  tradition  of  institutions  com- 
mitted both  to  the  creation  and  sharing 
of  knowledge  and  aesthetics.  It  also 
distinguishes  West  Chester  University 
fi-om  higher  educational  institutions 
that  emphasize  teaching  with  little  or 
no  support  for  the  creation  of  new 
knowledge  and  aesthetics.  We  are  com- 
mitted to  the  successful  integration  of 
teaching,  scholarship,  and  service. 

The  University  seeks  to  insure  that 
there  is  diversity  within  its  work  force 
and  student  body  in  compliance  with 
its  commitment  to  affirmative  action 
and  equal  opportunity.  It  clearly 
includes  in  its  mission  the  provision  of 
access  to  higher  education  for  a  wide 
variety  of  the  commonwealth's  citizens, 
including  those  from  disadvantaged 
academic  or  financial  circumstances. 
The  University  places  panicular  value 
on  academic  freedom  and  human 
diversity.  It  seeks  to  develop  an  envi- 
ronment characterized  by  intellectual 
honesty,  scholarship,  mutual  respect, 
and  service  to  the  academic  and  larger 
communities. 

The  University's  comprehensive  mis- 
sions, and  the  means  of  accomplishing 
them,  have  developed  from  the 
University's  specific  legal  mandate  and 
its  traditions  of  educational  service,  as 
well  as  fi-om  the  changing  needs  of 
society  and  the  nature  of  academe. 


The  Frederick  Douglass  Society 

Drawing  its  content  from  our  campus 
history  of  social  consciousness  and  its 
structure  from  a  variety  of  models  in 
public  life,  the  Frederick  Douglass 
Society  of  West  Chester  University  is 
the  organization  of  black  professional 
and  nonprofessional  staff  at  West 
Chester.  Named  in  1983  for  one  of  the 
19th  century's  most  distinguished 
advocates  of  human  freedom,  the  orga- 
nization is  oriented  toward  self-help 
and  improvement  by  offering  a  collec- 
tive voice  in  the  affairs  of  the  Univer- 
sity. Its  programs  also  aim  to  stimulate 
other  groups  on  campus  to  enrich  our 
climate.  The  society  annually  raises 
money  for  scholarship  funds,  in  order 
to  increase  the  economic  options  avail- 
able to  the  student  body  generally  and 
to  blacks  and  other  ethnic  groups  as 
well.  It  also  seeks,  by  the  example  of 
Douglass,  to  promote  an  intellectual 
standard  that  is  not  only  grounded  in 
excellence  but  profoundly  rooted  in 
the  pubUc  mission  of  higher  education. 

Institute  for  Women 

The  Institute  for  Women  is  an  inde- 
pendent body  designed  to  represent  the 
interests  of  women  on  the  campus.  It 
serves  as  the  parent  organization  for 
the  Women's  Center,  the  Women's 
Studies  Program,  and  the  Tide  DC  and 
Sex  Discrimination  Board.  The  institute 
is  headed  by  a  director  and  a  Board  of 
Directors. 

The  institute  sponsors  a  number  of 
activities  to  enhance  the  self-esteem 
and  career  success  of  women  at  the 
University:  the  Woman-in-Residence 
Program,  Grace  Cochran  Research  on 
Women  Award,  Visiting  Professor  Pro- 
gram, Graduate  Grant  and  Endowed 
Book  Funds.  The  institute  prepares 
periodic  reports  on  the  status  of 
women  at  the  University  and  has  also 
secured  Charlotte  W  Newcombe 
Scholarship  Grants  for  mature  or 
second-career  women.  The  Institute  for 
Women  is  located  in  211  Main  Hall. 
For  more  information  call  (215)  436- 
2464/2122. 

History  of  the  University 

Although  its  founding  year  is  1871,  the 
University  in  fact  has  deeper  roots 


Campus  and  Facilities 


tracing  from  West  Chester  Academy,  a 
private,  state-aided  school  that  existed 
from  1812  to  1869.  The  academy 
enjoyed  strong  support  from  the  highly 
intellectual  Chester  County  Cabinet  of 
the  Natural  Sciences  of  the  pre-Civil 
War  decades.  It  was  recognized  as  one 
of  Pennsylvania's  leading  preparatory 
schools,  and  its  experience  in  teacher 
training  laid  the  groundwork  for  the 
normal  school  years  that  were  to  fol- 
low. 

As  the  state  began  to  take  increasing 
responsibility  for  public  education,  the 
academy  was  transformed  into  West 
Chester  State  Normal  School,  still  pri- 
vately owned  but  state  certified.  The 
normal  school  admitted  its  first  class, 
consisting  of  160  students,  on  Septem- 
ber 25,  1871.  In  1913,  West  Chester 
became  the  first  of  the  normal  schools 
to  be  owned  outright  by  the  Common- 
wealth. 

West  Chester  became  West  Chester 
State  Teachers  College  in  1927  when 
Pennsylvania  initiated  a  four-year  pro- 
gram of  teacher  education.  In  1960,  as 
the  Commonwealth  paved  the  way  for 
liberal  arts  programs  in  its  college  sys- 
tem. West  Chester  was  renamed  West 
Chester  State  College,  and  two  years 
later  introduced  the  liberal  arts  pro- 
gram that  turned  the  one-time  acad- 
emy into  a  comprehensive  college. 
In  recognition  of  the  historic  merit  of 
the  campus,  in  1981  the  West  Chester 
State  College  Quadrangle  Historic  Dis- 
trict was  placed  on  the  National  Regis- 
ter of  Historic  Places.  The  buildings 
included  in  this  historic  district  are 


Philips  Memorial  Hall,  Ruby  Jones 
Hall,  Recitation  Hall,  and  the  Old 
Library.  Except  for  Philips,  these  build- 
ings are  all  constructed  of  native 
Chester  County  serpentine  stone. 
West  Chester  State  passed  another 
major  milestone  with  passage  of  the 
State  System  of  Higher  Education  bill. 
West  Chester  and  the  other  12  state 
colleges  became  universities  in  the 
State  System  of  Higher  Education  on 
July  1,  1983.  Along  with  its  new  name 
—  West  Chester  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania of  the  State  System  of  Higher 
Education  —  the  institution  acquired  a 
new  system  of  governance  and  the 
opportunity  to  expand  its  degree  pro- 
grams. 

Location  of  the  University 

West  Chester  University  is  in  West 
Chester,  a  town  that  has  been  the  seat 
of  government  in  Chester  County  since 
1786.  With  a  population  of  about 
20,000,  the  borough  is  small  enough  to 
have  the  pleasant  aspects  of  a  tree- 
shaded  American  town,  large  enough 
to  contain  essential  services  and  the 
substance  of  a  vigorous  community, 
and  old  enough  to  give  the  student 
exposure  to  America's  early  history. 
Students  can  walk  to  West  Chester's 
many  churches.  The  town  has  excel- 
lent stores  and  a  fine  hospital. 
West  Chester  was  setded  in  the  early 
18th  century,  principally  by  members 
of  the  Society  of  Friends.  In  the  heart 
of  town  is  its  courthouse,  a  classical 
revival  building  designed  in  the  1840s 
by  Thomas  U.  Walter,  one  of  the  archi- 


tects for  the  Capitol  in  Washington, 
D.C. 

West  Chester  today  is  part  of  the  rap- 
idly growing  suburban  complex  sur- 
rounding Philadelphia  and  offers  inter- 
esting opportunities  for  the  study  of 
local,  county,  and  regional  government 
in  a  period  of  change  and  growth. 
Philadelphia  is  25  miles  to  the  east  and 
Wilmington  17  miles  to  the  south,  put- 
ting the  libraries,  museums,  and  other 
cultural  and  historical  resources  of 
both  cities  in  easy  reach.  Valley  Forge, 
the  Brandywine  Battlefield,  Longwood 
Gardens,  and  other  historical  attrac- 
tions are  near  West  Chester.  New  York 
and  Washington  are  easily  accessible 
by  car  or  train. 

How  to  Reach  West  Chester 

The  Borough  of  West  Chester  can  be 
accessed  from  all  directions  both  by 
car  and  public  transportauon.  Route  3, 
the  West  Chester  Pike,  leads  directly 
into  town  from  center-city  Philadel- 
phia. From  the  Pennsylvania  Turnpike, 
motorists  traveling  west  should  take 
Route  202  south  from  the  Valley  Forge 
Interchange  while  those  traveling  east 
can  arrive  via  Route  100  south  from 
the  Downingtown  Interchange.  From 
the  south.  Route  202  from  Wilmington 
and  Routes  100  and  52  from  U.S. 
Route  1  all  lead  to  West  Chester. 
Public  transportation  is  available  from 
Philadelphia  and  other  nearby  commu- 
nities. 

Information  on  public  transportation 
and  carpooling  is  available  in  Sykes 
Union  Building,  436-2984. 


Campus  and  Facilities 


Description  of  the  Campus 

West  Chester  University's  campus  is  a 
unique  mixture  of  19th  century,  colle- 
giate Gothic,  and  contemporary  archi- 
tectural styles  that  complement  each 
other  to  create  a  stately,  yet  beautiful, 
atmosphere.  Fifty-six  buildings,  com- 
prising over  2.1  million  square  feet,  are 
distinctly  landscaped  within  388  acres 
of  roUing  countryside,  making  the 
campus  one  of  the  aesthetic  treasures 
of  Southeastern  Pennsylvania. 
North  Campus,  an  expansion  of  the 
original  campus,  occupies  97  acres  at 
the  southern  boundaries  of  the  Bor- 


ough of  West  Chester.  The  Nonh 
Campus  contains  the  Quad  area,  which 
is  surrounded  by  the  University's  old- 
est buildings  —  Philips  Memorial,  Reci- 
tation Hall,  Anderson  Hall,  Ruby  Jones 
Hall,  and  Old  Library— three  of  which 
are  constructed  of  the  green-hued  ser- 
pentine stone  that  has  given  West 
Chester  a  unique  character  for  many 
decades.  The  University  also  is  known 
for  the  magnificent  old  trees  that  grace 
the  campus. 

An  extensive  building  program  from 
1966  to  1976  produced  several  major 
facilities  and  utilities  that  equip  the 


University  well  for  the  needs  of  mod- 
em education.  The  Elsie  O.  Bull  Cen- 
ter, the  Francis  Harvey  Green  Library, 
Mitchell  Hall  (Fine  Arts),  Main  Hall 
(Humanities),  Earl  F.  Sykes  Union 
Building,  and  the  Schmucker  Science 
Center  were  major  additions,  along 
with  six  high-rise  residence  halls  that 
span  the  western  side  of  North  Cam- 
pus. Ground  breaking  will  begin  soon 
for  major  additions  to  Sykes  Union 
Building  and  the  Science  Center. 
South  Campus,  which  came  into  full 
use  in  1970,  is  a  291-acre  expanse  of 
the  gently  rolling  countryside  of 


Campus  and  Facilities 


Chester  County.  Located  on  South 
New  Street  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
south  of  the  original  campus,  South 
Campus  includes  the  massive  Health 
and  Physical  Education  Center,  which 
has  won  national  acclaim  for  the  qual- 
ity and  extent  of  its  teaching,  perfor- 
mance, and  research  facilities.  John  A. 
Farrell  Stadium,  playing  and  practice 
fields,  and  tennis  courts  surround  the 
center.  An  11 -building  apartment  com- 
plex, to  provide  housing  for  500 
upperclassmen,  will  be  completed  in 
summer  1993.  Also  at  South  Campus 
is  the  100-acre  Robert  B.  Gordon  Natu- 
ral Area,  which  includes  woodlands, 
fields,  and  a  streamside  habitat.  This 
area  has  been  conserved  as  a  resource 
for  the  natural  sciences. 

Information  Services 

Information  Services  provides  comput- 
ing resources  for  a  wide  variety  of 
users,  both  academic  and  administra- 
tive. Many  of  the  University's  adminis- 
trative functions,  such  as  registration, 
grade  reporting,  and  billing  depend 
heavily  on  the  campus-wide  transac- 
tion processing  system  that  provides 
centralized  access  to  University  data 
from  workstations  located  throughout 
the  campus. 

More  importandy,  computing  is  a  vital 
instructional  and  research  tool.  Infor- 
mation Services  offers  students  and 
faculty  a  wide  range  of  computing 
resources,  from  mainframe  to  micro- 
computers, printers,  plotters,  graphics 
workstations,  digitizers,  and  optical 
scanners.  Many  of  these  facilities  are 
available  at  various  campus  locations, 
but  the  Academic  Computing  Center 
on  the  third  floor,  F.  H.  Green  Library, 
serves  as  a  focal  point  for  instructional 
computing  activity.  A  valid  WCU  Iden- 
tification (ID)  card  is  required  to  use 
the  Academic  Computing  Center.  For 
further  information  contact  the  Aca- 
demic Computing  Center  at  215-436- 
3349. 

Computing  facilities  throughout  the 
campus  are  joined  by  the  Mainframe 
Network  and  the  Information  Services 
Network.  The  Mainframe  Network  pro- 
vides medium-speed  access  to  comput- 
ers from  workstations  on  campus.  The 
Mainframe  Network  provides  electronic 
mail  capabilities  for  all  campus  work- 
stations, connection  to  SSHEnet/ 
PREPnet/Intemet,  Bitnet,  and  access  to 
the  University's  main  library  catalogs. 


The  Information  Services  Network 
(ISN)  provides  high-speed  access  to 
software  applications  (programming 
languages,  spreadsheets,  word  proces- 
sors, faculty  developed  programs,  etc.) 
and  electronic  communication  capabili- 
ties to  workstations.  This  network  and 
its  facilities  will  be  undergoing  expan- 
sion during  the  1993-94  year.  Student 
laboratory  facilities  are  available  in  the 
Academic  Computing  Center  and  in 
each  of  the  eight  residence  halls. 
Students  interested  in  acquiring  a 
working  knowledge  of  several  com- 
monly used  software  packages  are 
encouraged  to  enroll  in  the  introduc- 
tory computing  course,  CSC  101, 
offered  by  the  Department  of  Mathe- 
matics and  Computer  Science. 
Major  hardware  facilities  include  an 
IBM  4381  mainframe,  numerous 
BanyatiA'ine  file  servers,  and  IBM, 
Macintosh,  Apple,  Zenith,  NeXT,  and 
DEC  workstations.  Letter-quality  laser 
printers  are  also  available  for  student 
use. 

Information  Services  is  located  in  107 
Elsie  O.  Bull  Center,  215-436-2828. 

Darlington  Herbarium 

The  Darlington  Herbarium,  housed  in 
Schmucker  Science  Center,  is  one  of 
the  most  highly  regarded  historical 
collections  of  dried  plant  specimens  in 
the  East.  Among  the  20,000  specimens 
are  plants  collected  by  such  famous 
explorers  and  botanists  as  Captain 
John  Fremont,  Thomas  Nuttall,  Sir 
William  Hooker,  C.S.  Rafinesque,  and 
George  Englemann.  More  than  200 
collectors  from  America's  formative 
years  of  1820  to  1850  are  represented. 
The  herbarium  was  the  work  of  Dr. 
William  Darlington  (1782-1863),  a 
member  of  the  West  Chester  Cabinet 
of  Science.  Dr.  Darlington  was  eminent 
in  West  Chester  as  a  physician,  educa- 
tor, banker,  businessman,  historian, 
and  botanist.  His  plants,  however,  were 
his  first  love.  A  state  park  has  been 
established  in  northern  California  to 
preserve  a  rare  species  of  insecti- 
vorous plant  named  in  his  honor  — 
Darlingtonia. 

Robert  B.  Gordon  Natural  Area 
for  Environmental  Studies 

The  University  has  conserved  100  acres 
of  natural  woodland  and  field  and 
stream-side  habitat  located  on  South 
Campus  and  uses  it  for  several  kinds 


of  outdoor  studies  in  the  natural  sci- 
ences. Dedicated  in  1973,  the  area  was 
named  for  Robert  B.  Gordon,  faculty 
member  and  chairperson  of  the  Uni- 
versity's Department  of  Science  from 
1938  to  1963. 

Francis  Harvey  Green  Library 

The  Francis  Harvey  Green  Library  pro- 
vides an  excellent  environment  for 
study  and  research.  The  six-story  facil- 
ity has  the  capacity  to  house  500,000 
books.  It  is  fiimished  with  a  variety  of 
seating  areas  including  individual  study 
carrels,  faculty  and  graduate  lounges, 
computer  lab  facilities,  group  studies, 
seminar  rooms,  and  general  reading 
areas. 

The  library  has  an  increasingly  impor- 
tant role  in  both  teaching  and  research 
with  its  growing  collection  of  nearly 
one-half  million  volumes  and  subscrip- 
tions to  nearly  3,000  journals.  Aug- 
menting this  general  collection  with 
more  than  350,000  titles  is  the 
micromedia  collection  including  books, 
periodicals,  newspapers,  and  doctoral 
dissertations  along  with  the  facilities  to 
read  this  material.  The  total  resources 
of  nearly  850,000  volumes  compare 
favorably  with  other  major  public  and 
private  research  libraries  in  West 
Chester's  geographic  area. 
Additional  noteworthy  collections  can 
be  found  in  the  library  complex.  An 
extensive  holding  of  courses  of  study 
and  textbooks,  and  a  variety  of  audio- 
visual materials  and  equipment  are 
held  in  the  instructional  materials  cen- 
ter. Also  available  are  separate  collec- 
tions for  children's  literature,  govern- 
ment documents,  and  maps.  The 
library  is  a  selective  depository  for  gov- 
ernment documents  and  maps. 
The  Special  Collections  Room  holds 
the  Chester  County  Collection  of  sci- 
entific and  historical  books;  the  Nor- 
mal Collection,  publications  by  West 
Chester  University  faculty  and  alumni; 
the  Ehinger  Collection  (historical 
books  on  physical  education);  the  Biog- 
raphies of  the  Signers  of  the  Declaration 
of  Independence  by  John  Sanderson;  and 
the  Shakespeare  Folios.  The  Philips 
Collection  of  Autographed  books  is 
housed  in  a  specially  designed  room  in 
the  Philips  Memorial  Building. 
West  Chester  students  may  take  advan- 
tage of  the  library's  many  services, 
such  as  reference,  computerized 
on-line  literature  searching,  CD  ROM 
databases,  interlibrary  loan,  and 


Admission  to  West  Chester 


photoduplication.  The  library's  inte- 
grated automated  system  provides  stu- 
dents and  faculty  access  to  the  library's 
holdings  via  computer  terminals.  The 
on-line  catalog  may  be  searched  at  ter- 
minals located  throughout  the  library 
and  at  remote  terminals  elsewhere  on 
and  off  campus.  To  add  to  the  cultural 
enrichment  of  the  college  community, 
the  library  schedules  informative  dis- 
plays and  art  exhibits  throughout  the 
year. 

Music  Library 

The  Music  Library  is  part  of  the  Uni- 
versity library.  Located  in  Swope  Hall, 
it  houses  an  extensive  collection  of 
music,  one  of  the  largest  of  its  kind  in 
the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 
Its  rapidly  growing  holdings  include 
more  than  27,000  scores  (historical 
editions,  collected  works,  opera,  key- 
board, and  vocal  and  instrumental 
music)  and  more  than  24,000  record- 
ings (classical,  folk,  nonwestem,  and 
popular).  Listening  facilities  for  40  per- 
sons are  available  within  the  library. 

Art  Collections 

The  University's  permanent  art  collec- 
tion is  made  up  primarily  of  gifts  from 


interested  art  patrons,  senior  class  pur- 
chases, and  gifts  firom  alumni.  The  Stu- 
dent Services  Inc.  (SSI)  permanent  art 
collection  is  on  display  at  the  Francis 
Harvey  Green  Library,  Philips  Memo- 
rial, and  the  new  SSI  An  Gallery  in  the 
Sykes  Student  Union.  The  SSI  collec- 
tion consists  of  a  number  of  important 
works,  such  as  the  water  color,  Andress 
Place  by  Andrew  Wyeth. 


Historical  Properties 

Among  a  number  of  historical 
properties  that  came  to  the  University 
through  the  Chester  County 
Cabinet  of  Natural  Sciences,  a 
scientific  society  of  the  early  19th 
century,  are  the  Anthony  'Wayne  Let- 
ters, which  include  letters  to  "Wayne 
fi-om  George  'Washington,  Benedict 
Arnold,  and  others.  The  University  also 
owns  a  grandfather's  clock  that 
belonged  to  Benjamin  Franklin  and 
Anthony  Wayne's  telescope,  both  of 
which  came  from  the  Chester  County 
Cabinet.  The  Chester  Count)'  Cabinet 
and  the  West  Chester  Academy  merged 
to  form  the  nucleus  of  the  present  Uni- 
versity. 


Center  for  Governmental  and 
Community  Affairs 

Established  in  1979,  with  offices  in 
Ruby  Jones  Hall,  the  center  is  a  cam- 
pus service  to  local  governmental  and 
community  organizations  for  research, 
faculty  services,  workshop  sponsorship, 
intern  placements,  and  resource  mate- 
rials. Center  activities  focus  on  facili- 
tating community/campus  interchange 
in  furthering  the  use  of  University 
resources  to  solve  governmental  and 
community  problems. 

Speech  and  Hearing  Clinic 

The  Speech  and  Hearing  Clinic  is 
located  at  201  Carter  Drive  (across 
Matlack  Street  from  the  Bull  Center 
parking  lot).  The  clinic  is  operated  by 
the  Department  of  Communicative  Dis- 
orders as  a  teaching  and  training  facil- 
ity for  its  undergraduate  and  graduate 
students.  The  clinic  provides  diagnostic 
and  therapeutic  services  for  persons 
with  speech,  language,  and  hearing 
problems.  These  services  are  provided 
free  of  charge  to  West  Chester  Univer- 
sity students,  faculty,  and  staff,  and  to 
students  enrolled  at  Cheyney  Univer- 
sity. A  fee  is  charged  to  others  who 
wish  to  use  the  services  of  the  clinic. 


Admission  to  West  Chester 


West  Chester  University  evaluates 
its  applicants  on  the  basis  of 
scholarship,  character,  and  potential 
for  achievement  in  the  programs  to 
which  they  apply.  The  University 
operates  on  a  modified  rolling 
admissions  policy,  whereby 
applicants  with  the  strongest 
academic  credentials  are  given 
priority  processing  and  notified  as 
quickly  as  possible  of  their  status. 
Other  applicants  are  evaluated  as 
their  files  become  complete  and  may 
have  final  decisions  deferred  until 
later  in  the  processing  cycle, 
depending  upon  their  individual 
academic  profile.  All  decisions  are 
communicated  to  applicants  in 
writing.  Qualified  students  of  any  age 
from  all  racial,  religious,  ethnic,  and 
socio-economic  backgrounds  are 
welcome  at  West  Chester.  Studies  may 
be  pursued  on  a  full-  or  part-time 
basis. 


General  Requirements  for 
Admission  of  Freshmen 

L  Graduation,  with  satisfactory  schol- 
arship, from  an  approved  secondary 
school  or  approval  by  the  Creden- 
tials Evaluation  Division  of  the 
Pennsylvania  Department  of  Educa- 
tion. 

2.  Either  a  satisfactory  score  on  the 
Scholastic  Aptitude  Test  (SAT)  of 
the  College  Entrance  Examination 
Board  (CEEB)  or  satisfactory  scores 
on  the  tests  given  in  the  American 
College  Testing  Program  (ACT). 
Applicants  who  graduated  from 
high  school  more  than  five  years 
ago  do  not  need  to  submit  test 
scores. 

How  and  When  to  Apply  for 
Freshman  Admission 

For  application  materials  please  write 
or  call  the  Office  of  Admissions,  West 


Chester  University,  West  Chester,  PA 
19383  (215)  436-3411. 
Freshman  applicants  for  the  fall 
semester  are  urged  to  begin  the 
application  process  early  in  their  senior 
year  of  high  school,  preferably  by 
November  15,  despite  the 
recommended  May  1  deadline. 
Apphcants  for  spring  semester  should 
complete  an  appUcadon  by  October  1 . 
However,  if  enrollment  limits  are  met 
before  these  dates,  admissions  will  be 
closed. 

Candidates  will  receive  notification 
from  the  director  of  admissions  as 
soon  as  possible  after  decisions  are 
reached. 

Freshman  applicants  who  are  denied 
admission  on  the  basis  of  academics 
will  not  be  permitted  to  enroll  through 
University  College  but  will  be  encour- 
aged to  consider  a  junior  or  commu- 
nity college  as  an  alternative. 


Admission  to  West  Chester 


Policy  on  Early  Admission 

In  exceptional  circumstances,  students 
with  superior  academic  qualifications 
and  unusually  mature  personal  devel- 
opment are  admitted  as  freshmen  upon 
completing  their  junior  year  of  second- 
ary school.  Students  who,  in  the  opin- 
ion of  their  guidance  counselors,  war- 
rant consideration  for  early  admission 
may  obtain  more  information  from  the 
director  of  admissions.  Early  admission 
applications  should  be  submitted  in 
accordance  with  deadlines  recom- 
mended for  freshmen. 

Arranging  for  Tests 

Information  about  CEEB  or  ACT  may 
be  obtained  from  high  school  guidance 
counselors.  It  is  the  student's  responsi- 
bility to  ensure  that  all  required  test 
scores  are  forwarded  to  the  Office  of 
Admissions. 

Transfer  Students 

Individuals  who  have  been  enrolled  in 
any  postsecondary  institution  after  grad- 
uation from  high  school  and/or  have 
attended  West  Chester  University  on  a 
nondegree  basis  must  apply  as  transfer 
students.  Applicants  whose  secondary 
school  credentials  would  not  warrant 
admissions  consideration  as  freshmen 
must  complete  the  equivalent  of  one 
full  academic  year  prior  to  attempting  a 
transfer.  A  minimum  cumulative  Grade 
Point  Average  (GPA)  of  2.00  is  required 
for  transfer  consideration.  However,  the 
University's  modified  rolling  admissions 
policy  gives  priority  to  applicants  with 
the  strongest  academic  credentials.  In 
addition,  some  academic  departments 
have  established  prerequisite  course 
work  and  specific  Grade  Point  Average 
requirements  for  admission.  Specific 
information  may  be  obtained  fi^om  the 
Office  of  Admissions. 
Transfer  applicants  for  the  fall  semester 
should  begin  the  application  process 
early  in  the  preceding  spring  semester, 
preferably  by  February  1 ,  despite  the 
recommended  May  1  deadline.  Spring 
semester  applications  should  be  com- 
pleted by  October  1 .  If  enrollment  lim- 
its are  met  before  these  dates,  admis- 
sions will  be  closed. 

Application  Procedures  for 
Students  Transferring  from  an 
Accredited  Institution 

1.  File  an  application,  available  from 
the  Office  of  Admissions. 


2.  See  that  the  director  of  admissions 
receives: 

a.  An  official  transcript  from  all 
institutions  attended.  If  prelimi- 
nary (incomplete)  transcripts  are 
submitted,  the  student  must  see 
that  final  transcripts  are  filed 
later. 

b.  Mid-term  grades,  if  the  student 
is  currently  enrolled  elsewhere 
and  is  applying  to  West  Chester 
for  the  following  semester. 

3.  If  a  student  has  completed  less  than 
30  semester  hours  of  credit,  he  or 
she  must  supply  SAT  or  ACT  scores 
and  a  high  school  transcript. 

If  a  student  is  accepted,  admission  is 
contingent  upon  successful  completion 
of  current  course  work  with  at  least  a 
C  average  as  documented  by  tran- 
scripts of  all  work  attempted  or  com- 
pleted. 

Transfer  students  should  read  "Mainte- 
nance of  Academic  Standards"  in  the 
"Academic  Policies  and  Procedures " 
section  of  this  catalog. 
Transcripts  will  be  evaluated  in  accor- 
dance with  the  policies  of  the  depart- 
ment to  which  the  student  seeks 
admission.  After  the  student  has  been 
admitted,  he  or  she  should  work  out 
an  acceptable  program  of  study  in 
close  consultation  with  an  adviser  in 
the  major  department. 
Transfer  applicants  who  are  denied 
admission  on  the  basis  of  academics 
will  not  be  permitted  to  enroll  through 
University  College  without  the  express 
approval  of  the  Office  of  Admissions. 
Such  approval  may  be  rendered  in  the 
event  of  extenuating  circumstances  and 
only  under  certain  agreed-upon  condi- 
tions in  accordance  with  University 
policy. 

University  Policies  for  Students 
Transferring  from  a 
Nonaccredited  Institution 

Applicants  from  collegiate  institutions 
(including  community  colleges  and 
junior  colleges)  that  are  noc  accredited 
by  one  of  the  six  regional  associations 
in  the  United  States  will  be  considered 
for  admission  if  the  apphcant's  cumu- 
lative index  is  2.00  (C)  or  better. 
The  evaluation  of  courses  listed  on 
transcripts  from  an  institution  not 
accredited  by  one  of  the  six  regional 
associations  will  be  made  by  the  stu- 
dent's major  department  in  consulta- 
tion with  the  faculty  dean  and  traiisfer 


credit  analyst.  All  evaluations  are  sub- 
ject to  review  by  the  provost  and  aca- 
demic vice  president. 

International  Students 

Students  from  foreign  countries  may 
be  considered  for  degree  admission  if, 
in  addition  to  satisfying  the  general 
requirements,  they  also  demonstrate 
proficiency  in  English.  Standardized 
test  scores  from  one  of  the  following 
must  be  submitted  with  the  applica- 
tion: Test  of  English  as  a  Foreign  Lan- 
guage (TOEFL),  Scholastic  Aptitude 
Test  (SAT),  or  American  College  Test 
(ACT).  Non-native  English  speakers 
are  encouraged  to  submit  the  TOEFL; 
a  minimum  score  of  550  is  required. 
International  students  are  admitted 
only  for  the  fall  semester  each  year  and 
applications  must  be  submitted  to  the 
Office  of  Admissions  by  May  1 . 
Accepted  students  must  be  able  to  ver- 
ify their  ability  to  fully  meet  all  educa- 
tional and  living  expenses  before  a  U.S. 
Immigration  Form  (1-20)  can  be  issued 
and  admission  to  West  Chester  final- 
ized. Because  of  the  amount  of  time  it 
takes  for  a  student  visa  to  be  secured, 
international  applicants  are  encouraged 
to  complete  the  admissions  process 
well  in  advance  of  the  May  1  deadline. 

Insurance  Requirements  for 
International  Students 

International  students  at  West  Chester 
University  are  required  to  carry  ade- 
quate health  and  accident  insurance. 
Insurance  must  be  effective  for  all  peri- 
ods of  rime  the  student  has  been 
authorized  to  be  in  the  United  States 
by  an  immigration  document  issued  by 
West  Chester  University. 
Health  and  accident  insurance  policies 
must  be  purchased  through  a  company 
that  sells  insurance  in  the  United  States. 
West  Chester  University  has  set  mini- 
mum coverage  standards  which  must  be 
met  by  all  insurance  policies.  Informa- 
tion about  the  minimum  standards  are 
available  at  the  Center  for  International 
Programs  Office,  436-3515. 
To  assure  compliance  with  the  insur- 
ance requirement,  all  international  stu- 
dents must  come  to  the  Center  for 
International  Programs  by  September 
15  of  each  academic  year.  There  stu- 
dents may  obtain  information  as  to  the 
amount  of  insurance  required  and  the 
means  of  obtaining  coverage  to  meet 
the  insurance  requirement. 


Fees  and  Expenses 


Physical  Examination 
Requirements 

Applicants  are  not  asked  to  submit  a 
report  of  medical  history  until  they 
have  been  accepted  for  admission. 
Upon  acceptance,  they  will  receive  a 
form  for  the  necessary  health  examina- 
tion, which  should  be  completed  by  a 
physician  and  returned  to  the  Univer- 
sity Health  Center  as  soon  as  possible. 

Students  with  Disabilities 

West  Chester  University  will  make 
every  effort  to  assure  students  with 
disabilities  access  to  all  classes  required 
for  their  program  of  study  and  will 
endeavor  to  remove  all  obstacles  to  a 
fulfilling,  comprehensive  university 
experience. 

The  Office  of  the  Assistant  Vice- 
President  for  Academic  Affairs  should 
be  advised  of  any  disabilities  to  arrange 
suitable  accommodations.  Additional 
information  may  be  obtained  by  calling 
(215)  436-3416. 

Second  Baccalaureate  Degree 

An  individual  may  pursue  a  second  bac- 
calaureate degree  at  West  Chester  Uni- 
versity' after  earning  the  first  bacca- 


laureate degree  either  at  West  Chester 
or  another  institution.  Such  an  individ- 
ual must  apply  for  admission  through 
the  Office  of  Admissions  as  a  transfer 
student. 


Admission  of  College  Graduates 
Seeking  Certification 

College  graduates  who  wish  to  obtain 
teaching  certification  should  consult 
with  the  Certffication  Office  in  the 
School  of  Education,  436-2426. 

Readmission  of  Former 
Students 

Students  who  have  withdrawn  from,  or 
who  for  other  reasons  have  not  matric- 
ulated at,  West  Chester  for  two  or 
more  consecutive  semesters  are  classi- 
fied as  "inactive"  and  must  request  an 
application  for  readmission  from  the 
Office  of  Admissions.  After  an  absence 
of  only  one  semester,  students  wishing 
to  return  should  contact  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  and  their  department 
advisers.  Those  who  have  attended  any 
institutions  of  higher  learning  since 
leaving  West  Chester  must  request 
those  institutions  to  forward  transcripts 


of  their  records  to  the  Office  of  Admis- 
sions, West  Chester  University,  West 
Chester,  PA  19383. 
Readmitted  students  are  bound  by  the 
requirements  in  the  major,  minor, 
and  cognate  areas  at  the  time  of 
readmission,  except  where  permission  is 
granted  by  the  respective  department. 
Students  intending  to  enroll  in  student 
teaching  in  the  first  semester  of 
readmission  must  file  an  application 
for  student  teaching  with  the  individ- 
ual departments  at  least  four  months 
before  their  expected  readmission.  See 
also  "Student  Teaching"  in  the  section 
entided  "Academic  Affairs." 
All  readmission  applications,  including 
all  supporting  documents,  are  to  be 
filed  by  August  1  for  the  fall  semester 
and  December  1  for  the  spring  semes- 
ter. 

Office  of  Admissions  Staff 

Marsha  Haug  — Director  of  Admissions 
Fran  Cubberley  — Associate  Director 
Eileen  Merlin— Assistant  Director 
Joseph  Bradley— Assistant  Director 
Kathy  Hein  — Assistant  Director 
Jule  Thomas— Assistant  Director 
Linda  Hoffman  Delack  — Assistant 
Director 


Fees  and  Expenses 


Special  Note:  The  fees  listed  below  reflect 
charges  at  press  time.  For  up-to-date 
information  on  fees  at  any  given  time, 
contact  the  Office  of  the  Bursar  (215) 
436-2552. 

Fees  and  expenses  are  subject  to  change 
viithout  notice.  Fees  shown  here  are  in 
effect  for  the  academic  year  1992-93, 
unless  otherwise  noted. 

Changes  for  1993-94,  if  approved,  would 
occur  after  the  printing  of  this  catalog. 

Unless  otherwise  specified,  fees  may  be 
paid  by  Visa,  MasterCard,  check,  or 
money  order  made  payable  to  West 
Chester  University.  The  cancelled  check, 
money  order  record,  or  charge  card  bill- 
ing serves  as  a  receipt. 

Undergraduate  Tuition  for  Legal 
Residents  of  Pennsylvania 

Full-time  students  (between  12-18 
credits)  $1,414.00  per  semester 


Part-time  students  (11  credits  or  less), 

or  per  credit  for  each  credit 

over  18  $118.00  per  credit 

Undergraduate  Tuition  for 
Out-of-State  Students 

Full-time  students  (between  12-18 
credits)  $3,061.00  per  semester 

Part-time  students  (11  credits  or  less), 
or  per  credit  for  each  credit 
over  18  $255.00  per  credit 

Community  Center  Fee* 

The  community  center  fee  is  a  manda- 
tory charge  for  the  use  of  Sykes  Stu- 
dent Union  Building. 
1-6  credits  $  5.00  per  semester 

7  -  9  credits  $10.00  per  semester 

10  credits  or  more  $20.00  per  semester 


•Effective  faU  1993 


Health  Center  Fee 

The  health  center  fee  is  a  mandatory 
charge  for  the  use  of  the  University 
Health  Center. 
Full-time  students  only  (12  credits 

or  more)  $35.00  per  semester 

Part-time  students  (11  credits 

or  less)  $14.00  per  semester 

Student  Services,  Inc.  (SSI)  Fee 

The  SSI  fee  is  a  mandatory  charge  to 
fund  student  activities,  services,  clubs, 
and  sports. 
Full  time  (12  credits  or  more) 

$65.00  per  semester 
Part  time  (11  credits  or  less) 

$20.00  per  semester 

Educational  Services  Fee 

The  educational  services  fee  is  a  man- 
datory charge  for  all  students.  The  fee 
is  charged  in  lieu  of  specific  depart- 
ment charges. 


Fees  and  Expenses 


Full  time  (12  credits  or  more) 

$100.00  per  semester 
Part  time  (1 1  credits  or  less) 

$40.00  per  semester 

Housing  Fee* 

North  Campus  Residence  Halls  — This 
fee  entitles  the  student  to  occupancy  of 
a  standard  double  room  in  any  North 
Campus  residence  hall  with  one  room- 
mate. 
Per  student         $1,242.00  per  semester 

South  Campus  Apartment  Complex— 
This  fee  entitles  the  student  to  occu- 
pancy of  a  four-  or  five-person  apart- 
ment with  the  following  bedroom 
occupancy: 

Single  occupancy  bedroom 
(per  student)       $1,545.00  per  semester 
Double  occupancy  bedroom 
(per  student)       $1,395.00  per  semester 

Students  in  the  North  Campus  resi- 
dence halls  losing  their  roommates 
who  do  not  have  another  roommate 
assigned  to  them  will  be  assigned  a 
roommate,  relocated,  or  charged  a  pri- 
vate room  fee  of  $39.00  per  week  for 
every  week  that  they  occupy  the  room 
alone.  These  options  are  usually  only 
available  during  the  spring  semester. 

Meal  Fee* 

Plan  1:     M-Variable  Program 

$752.00  per  semester 

(Mandatory  for  students  in  the  North 
Campus  residence  halls) 
This  convenient  program  entitles  resi- 
dent, off-campus,  and  commuter  stu- 
dents to  any  14  out  of  the  19  meals 
served  Monday  through  Sunday  and 
includes  a  flexible  fund  of  $100.00. 
The  flexible  fund  aspect  of  the 
14-variable  board  plan  gives  students 
the  flexibihty  of  making  up  to  $100.00 
in  purchases  at  any  dining  service  loca- 
tion. Students  may  add  to  their  flexible 
fund  account  at  any  time  in  $25.00 
increments. 
With  flexible  funds  students  can: 

•  Supplement  meal  entitlements 

•  Treat  friends  or  family  members  to 
meals 

•  For  a  late  night  snack,  have  a  fi-eshly 
made  ITZA  PIZZA  delivered  to  the 
residence  hall 

•  Purchase  items  from  the  Conve- 
nience Store 


•Effective  fall  1993 


Plan  2:     Flexible  Fund  Program 
This  program  is  designed  for  South 
Campus  apartment  complex,  off- 
campus,  and  commuter  students,  fac- 
ulty, and  staff.  A  minimum  of  $100.00 
can  be  placed  in  a  flexible  fund 
account  that  can  be  accessed  by  an  ID 
card.  The  program  can  be  used  in  the 
Lawrence  Food  Court,  Take  Out,  Con- 
venience Store,  or  in  the  Sykes  Ram's 
Head  Deli.  Faculty  and  staff  may  use 
their  flex  dollars  in  the  University  Club 
as  well.  With  this  program,  there  is  no 
need  to  carry  cash  for  meals.  The  flexi- 
ble fund  may  be  increased  by  $25.00 
increments  at  any  time  during  the 
semester. 
Plan  3:     10-Variable  Program 

$640.00  per  semester 

This  plan  is  designed  for  those  South 
Campus  apartment  complex,  off- 
campus,  and  commuter  students  who 
do  not  want  the  burden  of  shopping, 
cooking,  and  cleaning  up  during  the 
busy  school  week.  This  plan  entides 
participants  to  10  out  of  the  19  meals 
served  Monday  through  Sunday  and 
includes  a  flexible  fund  of  $50.00  that 
can  be  used  as  described  in  Plan  1. 
Plan  4:    5-Variable  Program 

$465.00  per  semester 

This  plan  is  designed  for  South  Cam- 
pus apartment  complex,  off-campus, 
and  commuter  students  who  wish  to 
have  the  convenience  of  meals  on  cam- 
pus. This  plan  entides  participants  to 
five  out  of  the  19  meals  served  Monday 
through  Sunday  and  includes  a  flexible 
fund  of  $50.00  that  can  be  used  as 
described  in  Plan  1. 
For  those  students  in  residence  halls, 
the  meal  plan  cost  has  already  been 
included  in  the  University  billing. 
South  Campus  apartment  complex, 
off-campus,  and  commuter  students 
can  sign  up  for  one  of  these  meal  plans 
by  applying  at  the  Office  of  the  Bursar 
in  the  E.O.  Bufl  Center. 
Any  flexible  funds  left  at  the  end  of  the 
first  semester  will  transfer  to  the  sec- 
ond semester  ONLY  if  the  meal  con- 
tract is  renewed. 

Any  flexible  funds  remaining  at  the 
end  of  the  second  semester  will  be  for- 
feited. 

How  the  Meal  Plan  Works 
A  West  Chester  University  identifica- 
tion card  will  be  encoded  to  access  a 
student's  dining  service  account. 
A  meal  or  flexible  funds  will  be 
deducted  from  the  balance  automati- 


cally when  the  card  is  presented  to  the 
cashier. 

This  identification  card  will  serve  as  a 
ticket  to  the  offerings  at  Lawrence 
Food  Court,  Take  Out,  Convenience 
Store,  and  Sykes  Ram's  Head  Deli. 
Lose  or  Stolen  ID  Cards 
Lost  or  stolen  cards  should  be  reported 
immediately  in  person  to  the  Informa- 
tion Systems  Office  in  order  to  pre- 
vent someone  from  misusing  the  lost 
ID.  A  temporary  ID  can  be  purchased 
at  this  time  for  $5.00.  (This  fee  is 
refunded  if  it  is  the  first  time  the  stu- 
dent is  getting  a  temporary  card  and 
the  temporary  card  is  returned  before 
its  expiration  date.)  Office  hours  are 
Monday  through  Friday,  8  a.m.  to  6 
p.m.  The  Information  Systems  Office  is 
located  at  Lawrence  Center  (215)  436- 
3129. 

Student  Union  Expansion  Fee 

The  Sykes  Student  Union  building  will 
be  undergoing  a  major  expansion  in 
the  near  fuiture  that  will  double  the 
square  footage  of  space  available  for 
student  groups  and  activities.  Pennsyl- 
vania law  requires  that  expenses  asso- 
ciated with  student  union  buildings  be 
financed  through  fees  charged  to  the 
users.  The  most  equitable  method  of 
implementing  this  fee  is  to  phase  it  in 
by  class  year  beginning  with  the  fall 
1991  semester.  The  fee  implementation 
schedule  is  as  follows: 

Undergraduates  Full  Time  Pan  Time  Summer 

Class  of  1995  55,00  20.00  10.00 

Beginning  with  the  fall  1994  semester, 
all  students  will  be  paying  the  entire 
full-time,  part-time,  or  summer  rate. 

International  Student  Services 
Fee 

International  students  are  assessed  a 
fee  of  $25.00  per  semester  to  support 
the  services  provided  to  them  by  the 
International  Program  Office. 

Payment  of  Fees 

Each  semester,  students  have  three 
opportunities  to  schedule  for  classes 
and  pay  their  bills. 

(1)  Students  may  schedule  during 
the  main  scheduling  period,  which 
is  held  during  the  prior  semester.  A 
bill  will  be  mailed  to  these  students 
four  to  six  weeks  before  the  semes- 
ter begins.  The  bill  must  be  paid  in 
full  by  the  due  date.  Students  who 
are  receiving  approved  financial  aid 


jl      Fees  and  Expenses 


awards  that  fully  cover  or  exceed 
the  amount  of  their  bills  do  not 
have  to  pay,  but  they  must  submit 
to  the  Office  of  the  Bursar  a  full 
Financial  Aid  Waiver  Form,  which 
will  be  enclosed  with  their  bills. 
Students  who  cannot  pay  their  bills 
in  full  by  the  due  date  may  apply 
for  deferred  payment  (see  "Deferred 
Payment  Policy"  below). 

(2)  Students  who  do  not  schedule 
prior  to  the  mail  payment  deadlines 
may  schedule  and  pay  in  person 
prior  to  the  start  of  the  semester.  In 
this  instance,  payment  must  be 
made  at  the  time  of  scheduhng;  no 
bill  will  be  sent  in  the  mail. 

(3)  Students  who  do  not  take 
advantage  of  either  of  these  schedul- 
ing opportunities,  or  who  fail  to  pay 
their  bills  as  outlined  above,  must 
attend  late  registration.  Students  at 
late  registration  will  be  expected  to 
pay  their  bills  at  the  time  that  they 
schedule. 

Failure  to  meet  the  payment  deadlines 
as  set  forth  above  could  result  in  can- 
cellation of  the  student's  schedule.  In 
order  to  have  the  schedule  reinstated, 
the  student  would  have  to  pay  his  or 
her  bill  in  full  as  well  as  a  $35.00  late 
registration  fee. 

Students  who  owe  money  to  the  Uni- 
versity' will  not  be  able  to  schedule  for 
future  semesters,  will  not  receive  tran- 
scripts, and  will  not  be  cleared  for 
graduation.  The  University  may  also,  at 
its  discretion,  invoke  any  other  penalty' 
appropriate  for  a  particular  case  in 
which  money  is  owed  to  the  Univer- 
sity. 

Deferred  Payment  Policy 

The  University  extends  deferred  pay- 
ment privileges  to  all  students  who  are 
in  good  financial  standing  and  have 
not  defaulted  on  a  previous  payment 
plan.  The  fee  charged  for  this  service  is 
$50.00  annually.  For  more  information 
about  the  plan  offered,  contact  the 
Office  of  the  Bursar  at  (215)  436-2552. 

Uncollectible  Check  Policy 

A  fee  of  $25.00  is  charged  for  any 
check  returned  to  the  University  for 
insufficient  funds,  stopped  payment,  or 
closed  account.  The  University  may,  at 
its  discretion,  charge  this  fee  ifor  any 
check  returned  to  it  for  any  other  rea- 
son. 

The  check  will  be  returned  to  the  stu- 
dent upon  its  replacement  through 


cash,  cashier's  check,  MasterCard, 
VISA,  or  money  order.  Students  who 
have  two  or  more  checks  returned 
against  their  accounts  will  no  longer  be 
able  to  make  payment  by  personal 
check;  all  future  payments  must  be 
made  by  cash,  certified  check, 
MasterCard,  VISA,  or  money  order. 

Refund  Policy 

All  requests  for  refunds  for  dropped  or 
cancelled  courses,  or  for  withdrawals, 
must  be  made  in  writing  or  in  person 
to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  Refunds 
are  not  automatic;  it  is  the  student's 
responsibility  to  initiate  a  refund 
request. 

Individual  fees  will  be  refiinded 
according  to  the  policies  described 
below. 

Tuition  —in  full  prior  to  the  first  day 
of  the  semester;  after  the  first  day  of 
the  semester,  refunds  are  as  follows; 


1st  or 

2nd  weeks  of  class 
3rd  week  of  class 
4th  week  of  class 
5th  week  of  class 


80%  refund 
70%  refiand 
60%  refijnd 
50%  refund 


After  fifth  week  of  class     No  refund 
The  SSI  fee  will  be  prorated  if  the  stu- 
dent withdraws  from  the  University. 
Fees  are  not  adjusted  if  the  student 
goes  from  full  time  to  part  time. 
Students  who  are  in  their  first  term  of 
enrollment  at  WCU  and  who  have 
received  federal  financial  aid  will 
receive  prorated  refunds  based  on  fed- 
erally mandated  requirements.  The 
refund  policy  does  not  affect  the 
timeline  for  W,  WP,  and  WF  grades 
as  described  under  "Withdrawing 
From  a  Course"  (see  page  40). 
Housing  Fee  —  in  full  prior  to  the  first 
day  of  the  semester;  after  the  first  day 
of  the  semester,  prorated  refunds  are 
made  on  an  individual  basis  through 
the  Office  of  Residence  Life. 
Meals  Fee  — in  full  prior  to  the  first 
day  of  the  semester;  after  the  first  day 
of  the  semester,  prorated  refunds  are 
made  on  an  individual  basis  through 
the  Office  of  Residence  Life  for  resi- 
dent students,  and  through  the  Office 
of  the  Bursar  for  commuter  students. 

Community  Center,  Health  Center, 
and  Educational  Services  Fees  —  in  full 
prior  to  the  first  day  of  the  semester  or 
for  cancelled  courses;  nonrefundable 
after  the  first  day  of  the  semester  for 
dropped  courses  or  withdrawals. 


Appeals  concerning  the  refund  policy 
are  made  to  the  University  registrar. 
Further  appeals,  if  necessary,  may  be 
made  to  the  Appeals  Committee. 

Other  Fees 

Application  Fee.  $25.00  is  charged  to 
all  prospective  students  for  the  pro- 
cessing of  their  applications  to  the 
University.  The  fee  is  nonrefundable 
and  is  not  credited  to  the  student's 
account. 

Acceptance  Fee.  $100.00  is  paid  by  all 
newly  accepted  and  readmitted  stu- 
dents as  proof  of  intention  to  enroll  at 
the  University.  It  is  credited  against  the 
student's  tuition  and  is  nonrefundable 
if  the  student  decides  not  to  attend. 
Housing  Deposit.  $100.00  is  charged 
to  all  new  and  returning  students  who 
wish  to  live  in  the  residence  halls.  It  is 
credited  against  the  student's  housing 
fee  and  is  nonrefundable  if  the  student 
decides  not  to  live  on  campus. 

Late  Registration  Fee.  $35.00  is 
charged  to  all  students  who  schedule 
and  pay  at  late  registration  and  to  all 
students  who  pay  their  bills  after  the 
deadline  set  for  those  bills.  This  fee  is 
nonrefundable. 

Credit  by  Examination  Fee.  A  charge 
is  made  to  all  students  who  register  for 
a  Credit  by  Examination  through  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  Each  examina- 
tion scheduled  costs  $25.00. 
Portfolio  Assessment  Fee.  Equal  to 
50%  of  the  per  credit  hour  rate,  this 
fee  is  charged  to  have  a  faculty  mem- 
ber assess  a  student's  prior  knowledge 
in  a  particular  course. 

Course  Audit  Fee.  Students  who  audit 
courses  pay  the  same  fees  as  students 
taking  the  courses  for  a  letter  grade. 
Damage  Fee.  Students  are  charged  for 
damage  or  loss  of  University  property. 
This  fee  varies,  depending  on  the 
extent  of  the  damage. 
Identification  Card  Fees.  The  Univer- 
sity charges  a  $2.00  fee  to  issue  an 
identification  card  to  each  full-  or  pan- 
time  student.  If  this  card  is  lost,  stolen, 
or  damaged,  the  student  will  be 
charged  $5.00  for  a  replacement  card. 
This  fee  is  payable  at  the  Student  Ser- 
vices, Inc.  Office. 

Nondegree  Student  Application  Fee. 
Nondegree  students  are  charged  a  one- 
time $15  initial  processing  fee. 
Parking  Fees.  The  University  charges  a 
nonrefundable  parking  fee  to  students 


Financial  Aid 


who  are  eligible  to  purchase  a  decal  to 
use  University  parking  lots.  The  fol- 
lowing fees  have  been  approved: 
Effective  Rate 

Fall  1993  $20.00 

Registration  forms  are  available  at  the 
Depanment  of  Public  Safety.  A  viola- 
tion of  University  parking  regulations 
is  charged  $5.00  per  issued  ticket. 

Music  Instrument  Rental  Fees.*  Each 
student  renting  a  musical  instrument 
for  a  semester  is  charged  $20.00  per 
instrument.  Ever)'  student  using  a  pipe 
organ  for  practice  for  one  period  each 
weekday  is  charged  $36.00  per  semes- 
ter. 

Lost  Key  Replacement.  Students  who 


lose  the  key  to  their  dormitory  room 
are  charged  a  nonrefundable  fee  of 
$25.00  to  replace  the  lock. 

Transcript  Fee.  The  fee  for  transcripts 
is  $3.00  per  copy.  Transcript  request 
forms  are  available  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  Immediate  transcripts  are 
$5.00  per  request. 

Commencement  Fee.*  The  University 
charges  $45.00  to  all  students  enrolled 
in  a  degree  program  who  will  have 
fulfilled  their  degree  requirements  by 
the  end  of  the  semester.  This  fee  is 
paid  after  the  student  completes  a 
Graduation  Application  Form  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar  and  is  approved 
for  graduation. 


Placement  Credentials  Fee.  This 
$10.00  charge  covers  the  cost  of 
registration,  development,  and  updat- 
ing a  student's  credentials  file  in 
the  Career  Development  Center.  The 
fee  entitles  the  student  to  five  mailings 
of  credentials,  as  well  as  a  personal 
copy. 

Fees  for  Health  and  Physical  Educa- 
tion Majors.  Students  in  the  B.S. 
degree  programs  in  health  and  ph}'sical 
education  must  purchase  uniforms  at 
the  University  Bookstore.  All  students 
must  be  in  proper  uniform  for  activity 
classes. 


•Effective  fall  1993 


Financial  Aid 


The  financial  aid  program  at  West 
Chester  University  provides  financial 
assistance  and  counseling  to  students 
who  can  benefit  from  further  educa- 
tion, but  who  cannot  obtain  it  without 
such  assistance.  Financial  aid  consists 
of  gift  aid  in  the  form  of  scholarships 
or  grants,  and  self-help  aid  in  the  form 
of  employment  or  loans.  The  main 
responsibility  for  meeting  educational 
expenses  rests  with  students  and  their 
famihes.  Financial  aid  is  a  supplement 
to  family  contribution  and  is  to  be 
used  for  educational  expenses. 
Eligibilit)'  for  financial  aid,  with  the 
exception  of  some  private  scholarships 
and  the  Parent  Loan  Program,  is  based 
on  demonstrated  financial  need.  Family 
income,  assets,  and  family  size  influence 
a  student's  demonstrated  financial  need. 
All  documents,  correspondence,  and 
conversations  among  the  applicants, 
their  families,  and  the  Office  of  Finan- 
cial Aid  are  confidential  and  entitled  to 
the  protection  ordinarily  arising  from  a 
counseling  relationship. 
In  order  to  receive  financial  aid,  the  stu- 
dent must: 

1 .  Be  accepted  for  admission  as  a  de- 
gree student  enrolling  at  West 
Chester  University,  or,  in  the  case  of 
a  student  already  attending  the  Uni- 
versity, be  enrolled  and  making  sat- 
isfactory academic  progress  as  a  de- 
gree student.  See  the  section  entitled 
"Satisfactory  Academic  Progress  Pol- 
icy for  Financial  Aid"  for  a  more 


detailed  explanation  of  this  require- 
ment. 

2.  Submit  a  Free  Application  for  Fed- 
eral Student  Aid  to  the  Pennsylva- 
nia Higher  Education  Assistance 
Agency  (PHEAA)  in  Harrisburg, 
Pennsylvania,  before  March  15  for 
priority  consideration.  All  students, 
regardless  of  state  residency  status, 
must  complete  this  form  in  order  to 
be  considered  for  financial  aid  at 
West  Chester  University.  This  appli- 
cation will  be  used  to  determine 
demonstrated  financial  need  for  the 
student.  All  students  are  encouraged 
to  complete  this  application. 

3.  Submit,  in  the  case  of  a  transfer  stu- 
dent, a  Financial  Aid  Transcript 
from  all  previously  attended  postsec- 
ondary  educational  institutions.  This 
transcript  may  be  obtained  through 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid.  Submit 
this  transcript  even  if  no  aid  was 
received  at  those  institutions. 

4.  Apply  for  the  state  grant  program  in 
his  or  her  state  of  legal  residence. 
Pennsylvania  residents  should  file  a 
PHEAA  Aid  Information  Request 
form. 

5.  Submit  any  other  requested  docu- 
mentation concerning  financial  and 
family  circumstances  that  may  be 
requested  by  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid,  or  any  agency  that  administers 
financial  assistance  programs. 
Financial  aid  applicants  may  be 
required  to  submit  copies  of  their 


IRS  forms,  andy'or  their  parents' 
forms,  or  various  other  income- 
related  documents. 
Submission  of  the  above  does  not  auto- 
matically entitle  a  student  to  receive 
financial  aid.  The  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  follows  the  regulations  established 
by  the  federal  government  in  awarding 
aid.  Aid  applicants  are  ranked  accord- 
ing to  unmet  need  (based  on  budget, 
federal  and  state  grants,  and  expected 
family  contribution),  and  available 
funds  are  offered  to  the  neediest  stu- 
dents first.  Students  must  apply  for 
financial  aid  each  academic  year. 
Unless  otherwise  specified,  requests  for 
scholarships,  grants,  loans,  and  employ- 
ment opportunities  described  in  this 
catalog  should  be  made  to  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid.  Application  forms  for 
state  and  federal  grants  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid  at  West 
Chester  Universit)'  and  from  the  offices 
of  most  high  school  guidance  counse- 
lors. Questions  concerning  financial  aid 
may  be  directed  to  the  Office  of  Finan- 
cial Aid,  138  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center,  West 
Chester  University,  West  Chester,  PA 
19383,  215-436-2627.  Office  hours  are 
from  8:30  a.m.  to  4  p.m.,  Monday 
through  Friday. 

Satisfactory  Academic  Progress 
Policy  for  Financial  Aid 

Each  student  will  be  reviewed  for  satis- 
factory academic  progress  annually 
after  the  spring  semester.  A  student 


Financial  Aid 


must  meet  the  following  requirements 
in  order  to  continue  to  receive  Title  IV 
financial  aid: 

1 .  Successfully  complete  the  minimum 
number  of  credits  during  the  prior  aca- 
demic year  as  shown  below: 

Credits  Minimum  Success- 

Attempted  fully  Completed 

Per  Semester  Per  Semester 

12  or  more  12 

9  to  11.5  9 

6  to  8.5  6 

Fewer  than  6  All 

2.  Have  a  cumulative  grade  point  aver- 
age (GPA)  of  at  least  2.00  by  the  end 
of  the  student's  second  academic  year 
of  attendance. 

A  student  who  is  not  making  satisfac- 
tory' academic  progress  at  the  time  of 
the  annual  review  will  be  evaluated 
again  after  the  summer  and  fall  semes- 
ters. 

Credits  earned  during  the  summer  fol- 
lowing an  academic  year  will  be  used 
to  make  up  a  credit  deficit  during  the 
review  for  financial  aid  satisfactory  aca- 
demic progress.  The  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  reviews  the  "official  permission  of 
the  University  to  enroll  or  continue 
enrollment  as  a  degree  student" 
requirement  at  the  begiruiing  of  each 
semester. 

In  other  words,  if  the  student  moves 
from  "degree"  to  "nondegree"  between 
the  fall  and  spring  semesters,  the  stu- 
dent will  not  be  maintaining  satisfac- 
tory academic  progress,  and  spring 
financial  aid  will  be  rescinded.  This 
panicular  rule  is  NOT  appealable. 
Courses  taken  at  other  institutions  will 
be  used  in  the  determination  of  satis- 
factory progress  only  if  they  are 
accepted  for  transfer  to  West  Chester 
and  count  towards  the  student's 
degree.  The  student  is  responsible  for 
submitting  transcripts  and  evaluations 
to  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
In  addition  to  the  above  requirements, 
students  will  be  expected  to  complete 
their  four-year  undergraduate  degree 
programs  within  five  years.  Therefore, 
full-time  undergraduates  may  receive 
up  to,  but  not  more  than,  10  semesters 
of  aid.  Students  enrolled  on  a  pan-time 
basis  may  receive  the  prorated  equiva- 
lent of  10  full-time  semesters  of  aid. 
For  additional  information  about  this, 
contact  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
Failure  to  maintain  satisfactory  aca- 
demic progress  according  to  these 
standards  will  result  in  the  loss  of 


Federal  Title  IV  financial  aid  for  at 
least  one  semester,  or  until  such  time 
as  the  student  is  again  maintaining 
satisfactory  academic  progress. 

DEFINITIONS: 

CREDITS  ATTEMPTED:  Credits  for 
which  a  grade  of  A"^,  A,  A",  B"^,  B, 
B",C"',  C,  C",  D^,  D,  D~,  F,  P, 'W, 
Y,  WF,  'WP,  I,  or  NG  has  been 
received. 

SUCCESSFULLY  COMPLETED 
CREDITS:  Credits  for  which  a  grade  of 
A"",  A,  A",  B"",  B,  B~,  C"",  C,  C", 
D"^,  D,  D~,  or  P  has  been  received. 
Grades  of  NG,  AU,  CRE,  'W,  WP,  "WF, 
and  I  do  not  count  as  successfully 
completed  credits. 

FEDERAL  TITLE  IV  FINANCIAL  AID: 
Federal  Pell  Grant,  Federal  Stafford 
Loan  (FSL),  Federal  Parent  Loan  for 
Undergraduate  Students  (Federal 
PLUS),  Federal  Supplemental  Loan  for 
Students  (Federal  SLS),  Federal  Work- 
Study  (FWS),  Federal  Perkins  Loan, 
and  Federal  Supplemental  Educational 
Opportunity  Grant  (FSEOG). 
APPEALS  TO  THE  SATISFACTORY 
ACADEMIC  PROGRESS  REQUIRE- 
MENTS: 

Appeals  to  the  satisfactory  academic 
progress  requirements  must  be  made  in 
writing,  requesting  and  fully  explaining 
the  reasons  for  the  appeal.  The  Appeals 
Committee  may  request  a  personal 
interview  with  the  student.  The  deci- 
sion of  the  Appeals  Committee  will  be 
based  on  the  merits  of  the  appeal  and 
will  be  final.  Appeals,  when  granted, 
will  be  for  ONE  SEMESTER  ONLY. 
Students  who  are  granted  appeals  will 
be  reviewed  for  the  maintenance  of 
satisfactory  academic  progress  at  the 
end  of  the  "appeal "  semester,  with 
progress  determined  by  the  credits 
attempted  and  earned  during  the 
appeal  semester.  In  most  circum- 
stances, only  ONE  appeal  will  be 
granted  during  the  course  of  the  stu- 
dent's academic  career  at  West 
Chester.  An  appeal  must  be  filed  by 
the  end  of  the  drop/add  period  of  the 
semester  for  which  the  appeal  is 
requested. 

The  Federal  Title  FV  satisfactory  aca- 
demic progress  policy  also  applies  to 
state  grant  (not  PHEAA)  programs  that 
include  the  maintenance  of  progress  as 
an  eligibility  requirement. 
PHEAA  STATE  GRANT  SATISFAC- 
TORY ACADEMIC  PROGRESS  IS  DIF- 
FERENT FROM  FEDERAL  TITLE  IV 


FINANCIAL  AID  SATISFACTORY 
ACADEMIC  PROGRESS.  IT  IS 
DEFINED  AS  SUCCESSFULLY  COM- 
PLETING A  MINIMUM  OF  24  CRED- 
ITS FOR  EACH  TWO  SEMESTERS  OF 
PHEAA  STATE  GRANT  AID 
RECEI-VED  AND  IS  ESTABLISHED  BY 
PHEAA. 

Academic  Level  Requirements 
for  FSIVPLUS/FSLS 

In  addition  to  maintaining  satisfactory 
academic  progress,  a  loan  recipient  is 
required  to  advance  to  the  next  aca- 
demic level  for  each  level  of  loan  bor- 
rowed in  the  FSL,  PLUS,  or  FSLS  pro- 
grams. Academic  levels  for 
undergraduates  are  defined  as; 

Undergraduate 

Credits  Earned  Level 

0-31.5  1 


32  -  63.5 
64  -  95.5 
96  or  more 


2 
3 


'Withdrawal/Enrollment  Change 
and  Aid 

Students  who  officially  withdraw  or 
change  their  enrollment  status  may  be 
entided  to  a  refund  of  certain  fees, 
according  to  West  Chester  University's 
policy.  (See  section  entided  "Fees  and 
Expenses.")  If  that  student  has  been 
awarded  financial  aid  for  the  semester 
in  which  the  withdrawal  or  enrollment 
change  occurs,  a  portion  of  the  refund 
will  be  recumed  to  financial  aid  program 
funds. 

Financial  aid  refunds  due  to  withdraw- 
als or  enrollment  changes  are  pro- 
cessed in  accordance  with  federal, 
state,  and  awarding  agency  guidelines 
and  regulations.  A  student  considering 
withdrawal  or  an  enrollment  status 
change  should  consult  with  the  Office 
of  Financial  Aid  to  determine  the 
impact  of  that  action  on  current  and 
future  financial  aid. 

Student  Consumer  Rights  and 
Responsibilities 

You  have  the  right  to  ask  a  school: 

1.  The  names  of  its  accrediting  orga- 
nizations. 

2.  About  its  programs;  its  instruc- 
tional, laboratory,  and  other  physi- 
cal facihties;  and  its  faculty. 

3.  'What  the  cost  of  attending  is  and 
what  its  policies  are  on  refunds  to 
students  who  drop  out. 


Financial  Aid 


4.  What  financial  assistance  is  avail- 
able, including  information  on  all 
federal,  state,  local,  private,  and 
institutional  financial  aid  pro- 
grams. 

5.  What  the  procedures  and  dead- 
lines are  for  submitting  applica- 
tions for  each  available  financial 
aid  program. 

6.  What  criteria  it  uses  to  select 
financial  aid  recipients. 

7.  How  it  determines  your  financial 
need.  This  process  includes  how 
costs  for  tuition  and  fees,  room 
and  board,  travel,  books  and  sup- 
plies, personal  and  miscellaneous 
expenses,  etc.  are  considered  in 
your  budget.  It  also  includes  what 
resources  (such  as  parental  contri- 
bution, other  financial  aid,  your 
assets,  etc.)  are  considered  in  the 
calculation  of  your  need. 

8.  If  you  have  a  loan,  what  the  inter- 
est rate  is,  the  total  amount  that 
must  be  repaid,  the  length  of  time 
you  have  to  repay  the  loan,  when 
payments  are  to  begin,  and  any 
cancellation  and  deferment  provi- 
sions that  apply. 

9.  If  you  are  offered  a  work  study 
job,  what  kind  of  job  it  is,  what 
hours  you  must  work,  what  your 
duties  will  be,  what  the  rate  of  pay 
will  be,  and  how  and  when  you 
will  be  paid. 

10.  To  reconsider  your  aid  package,  if 
you  believe  a  mistake  has  been 
made. 

1 1 .  How  the  school  determines 
whether  you  are  making  satisfac- 
tory academic  progress,  and  what 
happens  if  you  are  not. 

12.  What  special  faciHties  and  services 
are  available  to  the  disabled. 

You  have  the  responsibility  to; 

1 .  Review  and  consider  all  informa- 
tion about  a  school's  program 
before  you  enroll. 

2.  Pay  special  attention  to  your  appli- 
cation for  student  financial  aid, 
complete  it  accurately,  and  submit 
it  on  time  to  the  right  place. 
Errors  can  delay  your  receipt  of 
financial  aid. 

3.  Provide  all  additional  documenta- 
tion, verification,  corrections, 
and/or  new  information  requested 
by  either  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  or  the  agency  to  which  you 
submitted  your  application. 


4.  Read  and  understand  all  forms 
that  you  are  asked  to  sign  and 
keep  copies  of  them. 

5.  Accept  responsibility  for  the  prom- 
issory note  and  all  other  agree- 
ments that  you  sign. 

6.  If  you  have  a  loan,  notify  the 
lender  of  changes  in  your  name, 
address,  or  enrollment  status. 

7.  Perform  in  a  satisfactory  manner 
the  work  that  is  agreed  upon  in 
accepting  a  college  work  study 
job. 

8.  Know  and  comply  with  the  dead- 
lines for  application  for  aid. 

9.  Know  and  comply  with  your 
school's  refund  procedures. 

THE  FOLLO'WING  IS  A  BRIEF 
DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  FINANCIAL 
AID  PROGRAMS  AVAILABLE  AT 
WEST  CHESTER  UNIVERSriT. 

Federal  Work  Study  Program 

Federal  work  study  is  an  employment 
program  that  allows  students  to  work 
part  time  on  campus.  Application  is 
made  through  the  Free  Application  for 
Federal  Federal  Student  Aid.  The  pri- 
ority deadline  is  March  15. 

Federal  Perkins  Loan  Program 

The  Federal  Perkins  Loan  Program  is 
administered  by  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  for  students  who  demonstrate 
financial  need.  The  cumulative  limit 
for  borrowing  as  an  undergraduate  stu- 
dent is  $15,000  ($3,000  per  year).  The 
cumulative  limit  for  borrowing  as  a 
graduate  student  and  undergraduate 
student  is  $30,000.  The  interest  rate  is 
5  percent  and  begins  to  accrue  when 
repayment  commences  —  nine  months 
after  the  student  terminates  his  or  her 
education.  There  are  deferment  privi- 
leges for  students  who  enter  the  armed 
services.  Peace  Corps,  or  VISTA  after 
graduation.  There  are  cancellation  priv- 
ileges for  special  education  teachers 
and  teachers  in  certain  school  districts. 
Application  is  made  through  the  Free 
Application  for  Federal  Student  Aid. 
Priority  deadline  is  March  15. 

Federal  Stafford  Loan  Program 

This  loan  program,  formerly  the  Guar- 
anteed Student  Loan  Program,  operates 
with  the  cooperation  of  private  lenders 
(banks,  credit  unions,  etc.).  Students 
must  demonstrate  financial  need  for  a 


subsidized  loan.  Annual  loan  limits  are 
$2,625  for  first-year  students,  $3,500 
for  second-year  students,  and  $5,500 
for  undergraduate  students  who  have 
completed  two  years.  The  cumulative 
limit  for  undergraduates  is  $23,000. 
The  academic  level  maximum  amounts 
are  noc  guaranteed.  The  loan  amount  is 
influenced  by  the  receipt  of  other  aid. 
The  interest  rate  for  first-time  borrow- 
ers is  variable,  not  to  exceed  9  percent. 
It  begins  to  accrue  when  repayment 
commences  —  six  months  after  the  stu- 
dent terminates  his  or  her  education  or 
drops  below  half-time  status.  There  are 
deferment  privileges  for  students  who 
enter  the  Peace  Corps,  ACTION  pro- 
grams, or  the  Commissioned  Corps  of 
the  Public  Health  Service.  Applications 
are  secured  at  the  lending  institution. 
Students  should  allow  10  weeks  for 
processing  and  apply  by  May  3 1 . 
Funds  for  first-year  students  may  not 
be  disbursed  until  30  days  after  the 
start  of  the  semester.  The  Federal 
Stafford  Loan  application  and  the  Free 
Application  for  Federal  Student  Aid 
must  be  filed. 

Federal  Parent  Loan  for 
Undergraduate  Students  (PLUS) 

The  Federal  PLUS  program  operates 
through  private  lenders.  Parents  may 
borrow  up  to  the  cost  of  education 
minus  other  aid  for  each  dependent 
student  attending  a  postsecondai}'  edu- 
cational institution  for  each  academic 
level.  The  interest  rate  is  variable,  not 
to  exceed  10  percent,  and  repayment 
commences  60  days  after  disbursement 
of  the  loan  funds.  Applications  are 
secured  at  lending  institutions. 

Federal  Supplemental  Loans  for 
Students  (Federal  SLS) 

The  Federal  SLS  program  operates 
through  private  lenders.  Independent 
undergraduate  students  may  borrow  up 
to  $4,000  per  academic  year  for  the 
first  two  years  and  up  to  $5,000  per 
academic  year  for  students  who  have 
completed  two  years,  with  a  cumula- 
tive limit  of  $23,000.  These  loan  Hmits 
DO  NOT  include  amounts  borrowed 
under  the  Federal  Stafford  Loan  or 
Federal  PLUS  programs.  The  maximum 
interest  rate  is  1 1  percent,  the  repay- 
ment period  begins  on  the  day  the  loan 
is  disbursed,  and  repayment  may  be 
extended  over  a  10-year  period.  This 
loan  requires  a  credit-worthy 


Financial  Aid 


coapplicant.  Applications  are  available 
at  lending  institutions. 

Short-Term  Emergency  Loan 

Students  in  need  of  funds  to  cover  un- 
usual or  emergency  education  expenses 
may  contact  the  Office  of  the  Bursar 
concerning  the  Short-Term  Emergency 
Loan  Program.  The  maximum  loan  is 
$200. 

Federal  Pell  Grant 

This  is  the  federal  grant  program.  All 
students  are  encouraged  to  apply  for  a 
Federal  Pell  Grant.  Students  receive 
notification  of  eligibility  in  the  form  of 
a  Student  Aid  Report  that  must  be  sub- 
mined  to  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
The  maximum  award  is  $2,300  per 
year.  Interested  students  must  file  the 
Free  Application  for  Federal  Student 
Aid.  Deadline  is  May  1  of  the  current 
academic  year. 

Federal  Supplemental 
Educational  Opportunity  Grant 
(FSEOG) 

The  FSEOG  program  is  federally 
funded  and  administered  by  the  Office 
of  Financial  Aid.  A  student  must  dem- 
onstrate financial  need  and  be  an 
undergraduate.  Students  must  file  the 
Free  Application  for  Federal  Student 
Aid.  Deadline  is  March  15. 

State  Grants 

PENNSYLVANIA  HIGHER  EDUCA- 
TION ASSISTANCE  AGENCY 
(PHEAA)  GRANT.  The  Commonwealth 
of  Pennsylvania,  through  PHEAA, 
makes  state  grants  available  to  students 
who  demonstrate  financial  need,  are 
full-time  undergraduates,  and  are 
Pennsylvania  residents.  PHEAA 
requires  that  students  successfully 
complete  at  least  24  credits  each  aca- 
demic year  in  which  a  PHEAA  Grant 
is  received.  Students  must  file  the 
Pennsylvania  State  Grant  and  Federal 
Student  Aid  application.  Deadline  is 
May  1. 

The  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 
has  entered  into  reciprocal  agreements 
with  the  following  adjacent  states:  Del- 
aware, West  Virginia,  Ohio,  and  Mary- 
land. Residents  of  these  states  who 
wish  to  attend  West  Chester  University 
are  permitted  to  use  state  grants  from 
their  home  states  for  educational 
expenses  at  West  Chester.  Some  other 
states  not  adjacent  to  Pennsylvania 


may  permit  their  residents  to  use  state 
grants  for  attendance  at  West  Chester 
University.  Students  should  contact  the 
agency  for  higher  education  in  their 
states  for  more  information. 

Scholarships  and  Awards 

WEST  CHESTER  UNIVERSITY 
ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP FUND.  A  scholarship  fund  was 
established  by  the  Alumni  Association 
of  West  Chester  University  in  1974  to 
benefit  the  students  of  West  Chester 
University.  The  criteria  for  selection 
are  scholarship,  leadership,  character, 
and  need.  Scholarships  may  be 
awarded  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and 
seniors.  Applications  are  available  from 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid  or  the 
Office  of  Development  and  Alumni 
Relations.  The  awards  are  generally 
made  on  Alumni  Day  each  year  and 
are  applied  to  the  students'  course  fees 
for  the  next  academic  year.  Scholarship 
amounts  vary. 

GERALDINE  DALEY  ANDERSON 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  hind  was  estab- 
lished to  honor  Mrs.  Geraldine  Daly 
Anderson  '34  by  a  gift  from  her  hus- 
band, Robert  S.  Anderson,  M.D.  The 
awards  from  the  fund  are  restricted  to 
physical  education  majors  who  are 
graduates  of  high  schools  in 
Lackawana,  Luzerne,  and  Wyoming 
counties  in  Pennsylvania.  Students  also 
must  have  financial  need  and  demon- 
strate academic  achievement.  Prefer- 
ence will  be  given  to  women  students. 
The  value  of  the  award  varies  but  will 
be  no  less  than  $300.  Applications  may 
be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  Finan- 
cial Aid. 

SANDRA  ALESIA  ATKINS  MEMORIAL 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  is 
awarded  annually  as  a  memorial  to 
Sandra  Alesia  Atkins,  a  member  of  the 
class  of  1981,  to  an  outstanding  music 
student  from  Overbrook  High  School 
in  Philadelphia  who  enrolls  at  West 
Chester  University  as  a  candidate  for 
the  B.S.  degree  in  music  education. 
The  recipient  will  be  selected  by  the 
School  of  Music  upon  recommendation 
of  the  Overbrook  High  School  Music 
Department. 

JUSTO  B.  BRAVO  SCHOLARSHIP  IN 
CHEMISTRY.  This  award  is  available  to 
a  full-time  student  majoring  in  chemis- 
try. Applications  are  made  to  the 
Department  of  Chemistry. 
LAURY  SAMUEL  BROKENSHIRE 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  is 


presented  annually  as  a  memorial  to 
Laury  Brokenshire  '59  by  his  parents, 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  James  R.  Brokenshire  of 
Reading.  It  is  awarded  to  an  outstand- 
ing junior  class  music  student  selected 
by  the  School  of  Music  faculty. 
CAVALCADE  OF  BANDS  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  award  is  sponsored  jointly 
by  the  Cavalcade  of  Bands  Association 
and  the  School  of  Music.  The  recipi- 
ent(s)  must  be  admitted  in  good  stand- 
ing to  the  music  program  at  West 
Chester  University  and  selected  by  the 
director  of  the  winning  band(s)  in  each 
category  of  the  American  and  Yankee 
Conferences.  The  awards  are  deter- 
mined annually.  Normally,  one  student 
from  each  of  the  four  winning  bands 
will  be  selected  to  receive  a  $1,000 
ruitional  scholarship. 
ROBERT  L.  CARL  MEMORIAL  KEY- 
BOARD SCHOLARSHIP.  Two  scholar- 
ships are  awarded  to  freshman  key- 
board majors,  in  honor  of  the  late 
Robert  L.  Carl,  former  chairperson  of 
the  Department  of  Keyboard  Music, 
who  taught  piano  at  the  University 
from  1946  until  1971.  Applications  are 
made  to  the  dean  of  the  School  of 
Music. 

PAUL  E.  CARSON  BAND  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  award  has  been  made  possi- 
ble by  the  generosity  of  Paul  E. 
Carson,  former  chair  of  the  Instrumen- 
tal Department  and  a  member  of  the 
University  faculty  for  28  years.  Schol- 
arships are  awarded  to  incoming  fresh- 
men majoring  in  band  instruments. 
VINCENT  D.  CELENX^NO  MEMO- 
RIAL SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship 
is  awarded  as  a  memorial  to  Dr. 
Vincent  D.  Celentano,  musician,  scien- 
tist, and  Explorer  Committee  member. 
Eligible  freshmen  in  the  School  of 
Music  must  be  affiliated  with  Exploring 
or  the  Senior  Branch  of  Scouting. 
ELVA  L.  BOYER  CHAMBERLIN  '31 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  is 
awarded  to  an  academically  qualified 
student  who  demonstrates  financial 
need,  with  preference  given  to  a  stu- 
dent studying  in  the  field  of  education. 
Awards  are  made  by  the  University 
Scholarship  Committee  based  upon 
recommendations  from  the  director  of 
financial  aid. 

CLASS  OF  1920  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
fund  was  established  by  the  Class  of 
1920  through  a  gift  on  the  occasion  of 
the  class's  65th  reunion.  The  award  is 
made  to  a  student  who  has  completed 
one  year  of  study  at  the  University  or 


Financial  Aid 


to  an  outstanding  freshman.  Docu- 
mented financial  need  and  demon- 
strated leadership  quaUties  are  essen- 
tial. The  amount  will  be  no  less  than 
$500.  Application  forms  are  available 
through  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
CI-ASS  OF  1937  SCHOI^RSHIP.  This 
scholarship  fund  was  established  by 
the  Class  of  1937  as  a  golden  anniver- 
sary gift  to  West  Chester  University  on 
the  50th  reunion  of  the  class.  The 
scholarships  are  awarded  to  entering 
freshmen  based  on  scholarship,  leader- 
ship, character,  and  financial  need.  The 
awards  are  generally  made  on  Alumni 
Day  each  year  and  are  applied  to 
tuition  fees  for  the  academic  year. 
Applications  are  available  from  the 
Office  of  Development  and  Alumni 
Relations  or  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid.  Selection  of  recipients  will  be 
made  by  the  Scholarship  Committee  of 
the  Alumni  Board  of  Directors. 
CLASS  OF  1938  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
fund  was  established  by  the  Class  of 
1938  as  a  Golden  Anniversary  Gift  to 
the  University  at  the  50th  reunion  of 
the  class.  The  award  is  to  be  made  to  a 
student  who  has  successfully  com- 
pleted one  academic  year  at  West 
Chester  and  is  based  on  leadership, 
scholarship,  character,  and  financial 
need.  Application  forms  are  available 
through  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
CLASS  OF  1957  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
fund  was  established  by  the  Class  of 
1957  to  assist  entering  freshmen  with 
demonstrated  exemplary  achievement 
in  mathematics  or  science  and  English. 
Application  forms  are  available  through 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
CLASS  OF  1970  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
fund  was  made  available  through  the 
Class  of  1970  on  the  occasion  of  the 
15th  reunion  of  the  class  in  1985.  The 
award  is  to  be  made  to  a  student  who 
has  demonstrated  academic  achieve- 
ment and  good  University  citizenship. 
The  amount  is  no  less  than  $100. 
Application  forms  are  available  through 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
JOHN  T  COATES  HORN  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  was  established 
in  1987  as  a  memorial  to  John  T 
Coates  by  his  wife  and  daughters.  It  is 
awarded  to  a  talented  incoming  fresh- 
man whose  major  performing  area  is 
the  French  horn. 

GRACE  COCHRAN  RESEARCH  ON 
WOMEN  AWARD.  An  annual  $100 
award  in  each  division,  graduate  and 


undergraduate,  for  the  best  research  on 
women.  The  award,  sponsored  by  the 
Institute  for  Women,  is  given  on 
Research  on  Women  Day  held  in  April 
of  each  year.  Dr.  Cochran,  an  eminent 
teacher  and  scholar,  graduated  from 
the  West  Chester  State  Normal  School 
in  1906. 

TIMOTHY  DAVIDSON  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  is  awarded  to  a  first- 
year  student  based  on  the  recommen- 
dation of  the  Office  of  Admissions. 
PHILLIP  B.  DONLEY  AWARD.  This 
scholarship  was  established  by  the  ath- 
letic training  alumni  and  is  awarded  to 
a  junior  majoring  in  athletic  training. 
The  recipient  will  be  chosen  based  on 
GPA,  clinical  evaluations,  and  service 
(professional,  University,  and  commu- 
nity). 

PAUL  DOUGLAS  TEACHER  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP PROGRAM.  This  program 
offers  awards  of  up  to  $5,000  per  year 
to  students  who  are  pursuing  a  course 
of  study  leading  to  certification  as  a 
teacher  at  the  elementary  or  secondary 
level  and  who  are  willing  to  enter  into 
a  signed  agreement  with  PHEAA  that 
obligates  them  to  teach  two  years  of 
elementary  or  secondary  school  for 
each  year  they  receive  a  scholarship. 
To  be  eligible,  students  must  be  or 
have  been  in  the  top  10  percent  of 
their  high  school  graduating  class. 
Applications  are  available  at  high 
school  guidance  offices  or  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid. 

FREDERICK  DOUGLASS  MINORITY 
STUDENT  SCHOLARSHIP.  Scholar- 
ships are  available  to  minority  students 
who  are  enrolled  full  time.  Applicants 
must  demonstrate  their  ability  to  make 
a  positive  contribution  to  the  Univer- 
sity and/or  community  through  active 
involvement.  Applications  and  guide- 
lines are  available  during  the  spring 
semester  in  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
DR  ROBERT  E.  DRAYER  MEMORL^L 
AWARD.  An  annual  award  for  the 
senior  who  graduates  with  the  most 
distinguished  record  in  history,  in 
memory  of  Dr.  Robert  E.  Drayer,  assis- 
tant professor  of  history,  who  died  in 
1968.  The  Department  of  History 
selects  the  recipient. 
FACUUY  AWARD.  A  certificate  pre- 
sented annually  to  a  graduating  senior 
in  the  Department  of  Nursing  who,  in 
the  opinion  of  the  department  faculty, 
demonstrates  "outstanding  ability  and 
exceptional  commitment  to  profes- 
sional nursing." 


FACULTY  SCHOLARSHIP  FUND. 
Annual  awards  of  $200  each  are  made 
in  May  to  undergraduate  students  on 
the  basis  of  academic  ability  and  finan- 
cial need.  Applications  are  made  to  the 
Faculty  Scholarship  Fund. 
BONNIE  EVANS  FEINBERG  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  scholarship  was  estab- 
lished by  Bonnie  Evans  Feinberg,  a 
member  of  the  class  of  1963,  and  is 
awarded  by  the  University  Scholarship 
Committee  to  an  incoming,  first-year 
student  from  a  middle-class,  multiple- 
sibling  family  who  is  a  solid  "B"  or 
better  student.  The  scholarship  is 
renewable  as  long  as  the  student  main- 
tains a  3.0  GPA. 

WEST  CHESTER  UNIVERSITY  FOUN- 
DATION GRANT  The  West  Chester 
University  Foundation  has  modest 
funds  available  for  grants  to  needy  stu- 
dents. Any  student  who  is  about  to 
complete,  or  has  completed,  his/her 
freshman  year  may  apply.  In  evaluating 
applications,  the  foundation  will  give 
special  attention  to  those  who  are 
active  in  all  facets  of  University  life. 
Each  year,  applications  for  the  fall 
semester  should  be  submitted  by  May 
1,  and  for  the  spring  semester  by 
December  1. 

MELVIN  L.  FREE  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  was  established  by  Melvin 
L.  Free,  a  member  of  the  class  of  1932. 
Recipients  are  selected  by  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid. 

H.  RAYMOND  SR  AND  MAY 
GRAYSON  FRIDAY  MEMORIAL 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  by  Dr.  Raymond  Friday, 
professor  of  vocal  and  choral  music,  in 
memory  of  his  parents.  It  is  awarded 
annually  to  a  freshman  voice  major 
who  is  selected  in  the  spring  semester 
on  the  basis  of  scholarship  and  vocal 
achievement. 

JOHN  J.  FURLOW  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  was  established  in 
1990  by  friends  and  colleagues  of  John 
Furlow  to  provide  financial  assistance 
to  a  junior  or  senior  health  and  physi- 
cal education  major.  The  recipient 
must  have  demonstrated  personal 
growth  and  commitment  to  his/her 
career  and  demonstrated  service  or 
care  to  others  in  this  or  a  related  field. 
Application  procedures  are  available 
through  the  Department  of  Health  and 
Physical  Education  Scholarship  Com- 
mittee. 

MIRLAM  GOTTLIEB  PLA.NO  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  award  has  been  made 


Financial  Aid 


possible  through  the  generosity  of  Mrs. 
Miriam  Gottheb,  who  was  a  member  of 
the  University's  Department  of  Key- 
board Music  faculty  from  1946  until 
her  retirement  in  1975. 
MICHAEL  C.  GREY  AWARD.  This 
award  was  established  in  memory  of 
Michael  C.  Grey  '89  by  Barbara  J. 
Brown,  an  alumnus  and  former  faculty/ 
staff  member. 

EVELYN  H.  HALDEMAN  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  was  established 
by  Evelyn  H.  Haldeman,  a  member  of 
the  class  of  1944.  Awards  are  made  by 
the  University  Scholarship  Committee 
to  students  based  on  need,  above- 
average  scholarship,  and  citizenship. 
HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCA- 
TION SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship 
is  awarded  to  health  and  physical  edu- 
cation majors  who  have  completed  at 
least  one  full  year  of  course  work  at 
the  University.  All  applicants  must 
have  a  GPA  of  3.0  or  higher.  Final 
selection  will  be  based  on  scholarship, 
need,  campus  contribution,  citizenship, 
character,  and  ability  in  specific  areas 
of  the  major  field.  Applications  are 
available  through  the  Department  of 
Health  and  Physical  Education  Scholar- 
ship Committee. 

ANN  JOHNS  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  is  awarded  by  the  Faculty 
Dames  of  West  Chester  University  to 
undergraduate  women  who  are  at  least 
25  years  old  and  enrolled  in  degree 
programs.  Contact  the  Office  of  Finan- 
cial Aid  for  additional  information  and 
application  forms. 

THE  JOHN  GUTSCHER  MEMORL\L 
SCHOLARSHIP  IN  MUSIC  EDUCA- 
TION. This  award,  presented  for  the 
first  time  in  1988,  is  based  on  music 
student  teaching  excellence,  academic 
excellence,  and  financial  need.  The 
award  was  established  by  the  family  of 
John  Gutscher,  a  former  School  of 
Music  faculty  member.  The  student  or 
students  are  selected  by  the  music  stu- 
dent teaching  supervisors  with  the 
approval  of  the  Department  of  Music 
Education. 

SAUL  JACOBS  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  was  established  by  Mrs. 
Lillian  Jacobs  and  Mr.  Albert  Jacobs  in 
memory  of  Saul  Jacobs,  a  member  of 
the  class  of  1933.  The  award  is  given 
to  a  student  with  talent  in  both  cre- 
ative writing  and  tennis.  The  award  is 
made  by  the  University  Scholarship 
Committee  based  on  recommendations 
from  the  director  of  athletics  and  the 


director  of  the  Creative  Writing  Pro- 
gram. 

ARTHUR  E.  JONES  MEMORL\L 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Talent  in  the  choral 
conducting  area  is  the  consideration 
for  this  annual  award  to  a  music  stu- 
dent in  remembrance  of  Dr.  Arthur  E. 
Jones,  former  chair  of  choral  music.  To 
be  eligible,  a  student  must  be  a  junior 
who  has  completed  a  course  in  choral 
conducting.  A  2.00  overall  GPA  and  a 
2.50  music  GPA  are  required.  The 
Department  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 
selects  the  recipient. 
WALKER  HAMILTON,  JR  MEMORIAL 
AWARD.  As  a  memorial  to  Walker 
Hamilton,  Jr.,  an  associate  professor  of 
English  who  died  in  1968,  the  Depart- 
ment of  English  annually  makes  an 
award  to  an  academically  superior 
English  major.  The  recipient  must  have 
completed  three  years  at  West  Chester. 
MARTIN  LUTHER  KING  JR.  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. Contact  the  Black  Student 
Union  for  additional  information  and 
application  forms. 
FRITZ  K  KRUEGER  MEMORLfVL 
VOICE  SCHOLARSHIP.  Two  scholar- 
ships for  fj-eshman  students  who  are 
vocalists  are  awarded  in  honor  of  the 
late  Fritz  K.  Krueger,  who  taught  in 
the  Department  of  Vocal  and  Choral 
Music  from  1961  until  1971.  Applica- 
tions are  made  to  the  dean  of  the 
School  of  Music. 
STANLEY  H.  AND  FLEURETTE 
LANG/NORTHEAST  HIGH  SCHOOL 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  by  the  Northeast  High 
School  Alumni  Association  and  is 
awarded  to  a  Northeast  High  School 
graduate  based  on  high  scholastic 
standing,  class  rank,  SAT  scores,  ser- 
vice to  Northeast  High  School,  good 
character,  school  and  community  citi- 
zenship, and  financial  need.  The  schol- 
arship is  renewable  through  four  years. 
MARTHA  FORD  MclLVAlN  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. These  scholarships  are  awarded 
through  the  Alumni  Association  to  stu- 
dents with  demonstrated  meritorious 
academic  achievement.  Application 
forms  are  available  through  the  Office 
of  Financial  Aid. 

LEWIS  H.  MARSHALL  AWARD.  An 
annual  award  is  made  to  a  senior  in 
the  social  and  behavioral  sciences 
whose  leadership,  professional  promise, 
and  academic  achievement  are  out- 
standing. It  is  made  available  by  the 
Chester  County  Association  of  Town- 


ship Officials,  and  the  awardee  is 
selected  by  a  committee  of  faculty 
selected  from  appropriate  disciplines. 
CHARLES  MAYO  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
award  of  approximately  $250  is  made 
annually  in  memory  of  Dr.  Charles 
Mayo,  a  political  scientist,  who  was 
president  of  West  Chester  University 
from  1974  until  1982.  It  is  made  by 
vote  of  the  political  science  faculty  to 
an  outstanding  junior  or  senior  in  the 
discipline.  Details  are  available  through 
the  Office  of  Political  Science. 
S.  POWELL  MIDDLETON  MEMORL\L 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  is  an  annual 
award  to  a  freshman  music  student  for 
talent  and  achievem.ent  on  an  orches- 
tral instrument.  The  award  honors  the 
former  conductor  of  the  University 
Symphony  Orchestra  who  died  in 
1970. 

DOROTHY  GIVEN  MILLER  AND 
FRANK  WILLL\M  MILLER  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  was  established 
by  Dorothy  Given  Miller,  class  of  1919, 
and  Frank  William  Miller,  class  of 
1920.  Recipients  must  have  success- 
fully completed  one  year  at  the  Univer- 
sity and  demonstrate  academic  achieve- 
ment, leadership,  strength  of  character, 
and  financial  need.  Application  forms 
are  available  from  the  Office  of  Finan- 
cial Aid. 

BOARD  OF  GOVERNORS  SCHOLAR- 
SHIPS. Merit-based  scholarships  avail- 
able to  incoming  freshman  minority 
students.  Awards  are  based  on  the  suc- 
cessful completion  of  an  academic  high 
school  program,  satisfactory  SAT/ACT 
scores,  high  school  rank,  and  academic 
record.  The  Free  Application  for  Fed- 
eral Student  Aid  also  must  be  com- 
pleted. For  additional  information  and 
application  forms,  contact  either  the 
Office  of  Admissions  or  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid. 

LLOYD  C.  MITCHELL  PL\NO 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  in  honor  of  Dr.  Lloyd  C. 
Mitchell  upon  his  retirement  in  1971 
after  35  years'  service  at  the  University, 
including  20  years  as  chair  of  the 
Department  of  Music  and  dean  of  the 
School  of  Music.  It  is  awarded  annu- 
ally to  a  freshman  music  student 
selected  by  a  piano  faculty  jury.  Appli- 
cations are  made  to  the  dean  of  the 
School  of  Music. 

CLIFTON  E.  MORGAN  MEMORL\L 
AW\RD.  Presented  annually  to  a  West 
Chester  student  as  a  memorial  to  a 


Financial  Aid 


member  of  the  Department  of  History, 
who  died  in  1974. 

MICHAEL  MOROCHOKO  MEMORIAL 
PIANO  AWARD.  The  Depanment  of 
Keyboard  Music  presents  a  scholar- 
ship annually  to  an  outstanding  junior 
music  student  majoring  in  piano.  This 
award  is  a  memorial  to  Michael 
Morochoko,  father  of  a  former  student. 
SOPHOMORE  MUSIC  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Three  scholarships  are  given  annually 
to  music  education  sophomores.  Uni- 
versity citizenship  and  musical  perfor- 
mance as  well  as  a  2.00  overall  GPA 
and  a  2.50  music  GPA  are  required. 
Applications  are  made  to  the  dean  of 
the  School  of  Music. 
EDITH  HARMON  PARKER  BLACK 
CAUCUS  ALUMNI  CHAPTER  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  scholarship  was  estab- 
lished through  the  estate  of  Edith 
Harmon  Parker  '33  and  is  awarded  to  a 
student  with  good  academic  standing 
studying  a  discipline  related  to  human 
relations,  with  preference  given  to 
black  students. 

NAnONAL  GUARD  OFFICERS 
SCHOLARSHIP  PROGRAM.  Upon  cer- 
tification by  the  appropriate  National 
Guard  official  as  being  eligible,  stu- 
dents may  register  for  a  given  semester 
by  paying  25  percent  of  tuition  costs 
plus  all  other  fees.  The  University  will 
bill  the  National  Guard  directly  for  the 
remaining  75  percent  of  the  tuition 
charges. 

NEW  JERSEY  ALUMNI  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. The  New  Jersey  Chapter  of  the 
West  Chester  University  Alumni  Asso- 
ciation sponsors  two  annual  $500 
scholarship  awards.  These  awards  are 
available  to  students  who  are  New  Jer- 
sey residents  and  are  funded  by  the 
contributions  of  New  Jersey  alumni. 
Applications  may  be  obtained  through 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid  and  the 
Office  of  Development  and  Alumni 
Relations. 

CHARLOTTE  W  NEWCOMBE  FOUN- 
DATION SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholar- 
ship is  awarded  to  undergraduate 
women  who  are  at  least  25  years  old 
and  enrolled  in  their  junior  or  senior 
years.  Selection  is  based  on  scholastic 
ability,  financial  need,  and  special  life 
circumstances.  Contact  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid  for  additional  informa- 
tion and  application  forms. 
OFF-CAMPUS  STUDENT  ASSOCIA- 
TION SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship 
is  awarded  annually  by  the  Off-Campus 


Student  Association  to  undergraduate 
commuters  who  are  involved  with  off- 
campus  activities. 

THEODORA  PANDEL  MEMORL\L 
PIANO  SCHOLARSHIP.  This  award  is 
presented  through  the  generosity  of 
Praxiteles  Pandel,  associate  professor  of 
piano. 

HILLARY  H.  PARRY  MEMORL\L 
SCHOLARSHIP.  An  annual  award  to  a 
junior  music  student,  granted  for 
scholarship,  citizenship,  and  achieve- 
ment in  vocal  study.  The  scholarship  is 
in  remembrance  of  a  former  teacher  of 
voice.  A  2.00  overall  GPA  and  a  2.50 
music  GPA  are  required. 
PHI  MU  ALPHA,  SINFONL\  POWELL 
MIDDLETON  AWARD.  An  annual 
award  in  memory  of  S.  Powell 
Middleton  is  presented  by  the  Rho 
Sigma  chapter  of  Phi  Mu  Alpha 
Sinfonia  men's  music  fraternity.  It  is 
based  on  outstanding  musicianship, 
scholarship,  and  character.  Applica- 
tions are  made  to  the  dean  of  the 
School  of  Music. 

DEPARTMENT  OF  PHYSICAL  EDU- 
CATION SCHOLARSHIP.  Three  schol- 
arships are  awarded  to  any  sophomore, 
junior,  or  senior  student  in  health  and 
physical  education.  Applicatioiis  are 
made  to  the  chairperson.  Department 
of  Physical  Education. 
PRESSER  SCHOLARSHIP.  This  is  a 
grant  of  $1,000,  consisting  of  $500 
from  the  Theodore  Presser  Foundation 
and  $500  from  the  School  of  Music,  to 
be  applied  toward  tuition  in  a  stu- 
dent's senior  year.  It  is  awarded  by  the 
president  of  the  University  to  the  stu- 
dent majoring  in  music  who  achieved 
the  highest  cumulative  GPA  at  the  end 
of  the  junior  year,  having  completed 
no  less  than  95  credits  at  West  Chester 
University.  During  the  recipient's 
senior  year,  the  student  will  be  known 
as  the  Presser  Scholar,  denoting  a 
reward  for  excellence  with  the  hope 
that  the  award  will  help  the  student 
not  only  financially,  but  also  in  his/her 
future  career. 

S.  ROBERT  AND  JANET  POLIS 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  by  Roben  Polls,  class  of 
1948,  and  Janet  Polls.  Awards  are  made 
at  the  discretion  of  the  University 
Scholarship  Committee. 
■WILLIAM  PYLE  PHILIPS  SCHOLAR- 
SHIPS. Awarded  annually  to  juniors 
and  seniors  who  are  natives  of  Chester 
County  on  the  basis  of  demonstrated 


scholastic  ability.  Funds  are  available 
for  approximately  20  scholarships  to 
cover  the  basic  fee.  Application  forms 
may  be  secured  in  the  Office  of  Finan- 
cial Aid. 

PRESIDENTIAL  SCHOLARSHIP.  These 
merit-based  scholarships  are  awarded 
to  incoming  freshman  students  based 
on  the  successful  completion  of  an  aca- 
demic high  school  program,  SAT  or 
ACT  scores,  high  school  rank,  and  aca- 
demic record.  For  additional  informa- 
tion and  application  forms,  contact  the 
Office  of  Admissions. 
N.  RUTH  REED  HEALTH  DEPART- 
MENT SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholar- 
ship is  sponsored  by  the  West  Chester 
University  Department  of  Health. 
Applicants  must  be  students  at  West 
Chester  University'  (specifically,  under- 
graduate health  majors  with  sopho- 
more academic  status  or  better),  pos- 
sess a  cumulative  Grade  Point  Average 
of  at  least  3.00,  and  demonstrate  high 
moral  character,  positive  personality 
traits,  and  evidence  of  genuine  interest 
and  aptitude  in  working  in  the  health 
field.  For  information  contact  the 
Department  of  Health. 
FRANCIS  J.  REYNOLDS  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  is  awarded  by 
the  Department  of  Chemistry  to  a 
chemistry  major  who  has  successfully 
completed  one  year  at  the  University. 
Applications  are  available  through  the 
Department  of  Chemistry. 
DAVID  M.  SENSENIG  MEMORL\L 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Savings  bonds  in  the 
amount  of  $50  are  given  annually  to 
two  juniors  with  outstanding  ability  in 
mathematics.  Dr.  Sensenig  was  chair  of 
the  Department  of  Mathematics  from 
1895  to  1908.  The  scholarship  fijnd  is 
administered  by  the  Alumni  Associa- 
tion of  West  Chester  University'. 
DR.  AHMAD  H.  SHAMSEDDINE 
MEMORIAL  AWARD.  An  annual  award 
is  given  to  an  outstanding  student  in 
the  field  of  business/economics,  in 
memory  of  Dr.  Ahmad  H.  Shamsed- 
dine,  associate  professor  of  economics, 
who  died  in  1971. 
ANNE  M.  SCHAUB  MEMORIAL 
SCHOLARSHIP.  The  Anne  M.  Schaub 
Memorial  Scholarship  is  awarded 
annually  to  a  second  semester  sopho- 
more women's  health  and  physical 
education  major  student.  The  amount 
of  the  scholarship  is  $300. 
SCHOOL  OF  MUSIC  FRESHMAN 
STRING  SCHOLARSHIP.  Two  scholar- 


Student  Affairs 


ships  are  awarded  to  incoming  fresh- 
man students  who  are  string  majors. 
JANE  ELIZABETH  SHEPPARD 
VOCA17CHORAL  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  award  was  established  in  honor  of 
Jane  E.  Sheppard  upon  her  retirement 
in  May  1987  after  34  years  of  service 
in  the  Department  of  Vocal/Choral 
Music.  The  recipient  of  this  monetary 
award  will  be  selected  on  the  basis  of 
outstanding  participation  in  Vocal/ 
Choral  activities,  which  must  include 
four  semesters  of  Chamber  Choir, 
scholarship,  and  personal  qualifica- 
tions. 

SICO  FOUNDATION  SCHOLARSHIPS. 
Scholarships,  in  a  limited  number,  are 
provided  by  the  SICO  Company  for 
four  years  of  study  at  West  Chester 
University  at  a  rate  of  $1,000  per  year 
($4,000  total  value).  High  school  stu- 
dents qualified  for  college  admission  or 
high  school  graduates  who  have  not 
attended  college  on  a  full-time  basis 
may  compete  for  a  SICO  Foundation 
Scholarship  when  their  legal  residences 
are  located  in  the  state  of  Delaware;  in 
Cecil  County,  Maryland;  or  in  the  fol- 
lowing Pennsylvania  counties:  Adams, 
Berks,  Chester,  Cumberland,  Dauphin, 
Delaware,  Lancaster,  Lebanon,  and 
York.  A  student  attending  the 
Shippensburg,  Boyertown,  Spring-Ford, 
or  Williams  Valley  High  Schools  in 
Pennsylvania,  or  the  Del-Mar  High 
School  in  Delaware  whose  residence  is 
outside  the  aforementioned  area  is  con- 
sidered in  the  SICO  Company  service 
area  and  may  apply  for  a  scholarship. 
No  distinction  is  made  on  the  basis  of 
sex,  race,  or  religious  belief.  Informa- 
tion may  be  secured  from  high  school 
guidance  offices  in  the  above- 
referenced  areas. 
SIGMA  ALPHA  IOTA.  LOIS  ALT 
AWARD.  The  Epsilon  Epsilon  Chapter 


of  this  academic  music  fraternity  for 
women  offers  a  yearly  award  honoring 
Lois  W.  Alt,  a  member  of  the  Depan- 
ment  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music  fac- 
ulty and  cofounder/adviser  of  the  cam- 
pus chapter.  The  award  is  based  on 
University  leadership,  high  musical 
standards,  and  financial  need. 
ROB  SIMON  MEMORLA.L  AWARD. 
This  award  has  been  established  by 
Joseph  and  Janice  Simon,  alumni  of 
the  School  of  Music,  and  the  late 
Dr.  Irving  H.  Cohen,  a  member  of  the 
School  of  Music  faculty  for  many 
years,  in  memory  of  Rob  Simon,  who 
was  a  double  bass  major  at  the  Univer- 
sity. The  competition  is  open  to  double 
bass  majors  during  their  junior  or 
senior  year. 

GREG  SMITH  MEMORIAL  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. An  annual  scholarship  of  $100  is 
presented  by  the  baseball  club  in  mem- 
ory of  a  former  baseball  captain  and 
president  of  the  baseball  club. 
W.  W.  SMITH  CHARITABLE  TRUST 
The  WW  Smith  Charitable  Trust  was 
established  in  1977  under  the  will  of 
William  Wikoff  Smith,  an  important 
supporter  of  educational  opportunity 
in  the  Delaware  Valley.  Established 
through  his  will,  the  W  W.  Smith 
Charitable  Trust  has  carried  on  Smith's 
work.  Funds  from  this  program  are 
used  to  support  students  enrolled  in 
the  Academic  Development  Program  at 
West  Chester  University.  For  additional 
information,  contact  the  director  of  the 
Academic  Development  Program  or  the 
Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
JANE  B.  SWAN  SCHOLARSHIP.  Spon- 
sored by  the  Women's  Institute  of 
West  Chester  University,  a  $100  schol- 
arship is  awarded  annually  to  a  woman 
student  who  is  completing  an  inter- 
rupted education.  Application  forms 


are  available  at  the  Women's  Center 
and  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
DR  CHARLES  S.  SWOPE  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP FOUNDATION.  A  Memorial 
Scholarship  Trust  Foundation  estab- 
lished by  Charles  E.  Swope  and  Rich- 
ard M.  Swope  in  memory  of  Dr.  and 
Mrs.  Charles  S.  Swope.  Dr.  Swope 
served  as  president  of  West  Chester 
University  for  a  quarter  of  a  century. 
Applicants  must  be  full-time  students 
enrolled  in  their  junior  year.  Scholar- 
ships are  $1,000  each;  up  to  15  may  be 
awarded  annually.  Applications  must 
be  filed  on  or  before  April  1 .  Selection 
is  made  during  May  with  scholarships 
commencing  in  September. 
WILKINSON  MUSIC  THEORY 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  is 
awarded  to  a  sophomore  music  student 
during  the  spring  semester  on  the  basis 
of  talent  and  achievement  in  the  areas 
of  music  theory,  ear-training,  and  sight 
singing.  The  scholarship  fund  has  been 
established  by  Dr.  Harry  Wilkinson, 
retired  professor  in  the  Department  of 
Music  Theory  and  Composition. 
WRITING  AWARD.  A  certificate  pre- 
sented annually  to  one  junior  and  one 
senior  nursing  student  who  demon- 
strate "outstanding  writing  ability. "  The 
faculty  of  the  department  selects  the 
recipient. 

RUTH  WALDMAN  ZOLL  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  fund  was  established 
through  the  generosity  of  the  late  Mrs. 
Ruth  Waldman  ZoU  '28.  These  scholar- 
ships are  especially  for  students  who 
have  significant  need.  One  scholarship 
each  year  is  reserved  for  a  student 
entering  the  University  from  a  high 
school  in  Berks  County  where  Mrs. 
ZoU  resided.  Award  amounts  vary  and 
application  forms  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 


Student  Affairs 


The  administration  of  West  Chester 
University  is  committed  to  providing  a 
comprehensive  educational  experience 
for  students.  To  accomplish  this  mis- 
sion, the  Division  of  Student  Affairs 
provides  a  variety  of  services  and  pro- 
grams to  augment  the  classroom  expe- 
rience. The  goal  of  the  division  is  to 
assist  students  in  their  intellectual, 


social,  and  psychological  growth  and  to 
contribute  to  developing  a  campus 
community  where  knowledge,  accep- 
tance, and  social  concerns  are  basic 
values. 

Offices  within  the  Student  Affairs  Divi- 
sion include  Career  Development, 
Children's  Center,  Counseling  and  Psy- 
chological Services,  Greek  Life  and 


Student  Organizations,  Health  Services, 
Intercollegiate  Athletics,  Minority 
Affairs,  Off-Campus  and  Commuter 
Life,  Orientation  and  Parent  Relations, 
P.R.I.D.E.  Student  Development 
Resource  Center,  Recreational  Services, 
Residence  Life  and  Housing,  Student 
Standards,  Sykes  Union,  and  the 
Women's  Center. 


Student  Affairs 


The  administration  believes  that  stu- 
dents should  share  the  responsibility 
for  governing  their  community  and 
should  have  a  voice  in  shaping  the 
objectives  of  the  University.  Through  a 
democratically  constructed  student 
government  and  committee  structure, 
the  administration,  faculty,  and  student 
body  seek  to  work  together  on  behalf 
of  the  general  welfare  of  the  Univer- 
sity. 

Classification  of  Students 

Students  who  attend  West  Chester 
University  are  classified  for  administra- 
tive purposes  into  two  categories. 

(1)  RESIDENT  STUDENTS 
These  students  live  in  housing 
facilities  operated  by  the  Univer- 
sity. Residents  of  North  Campus 
residence  halls  are  required  to  be 
on  the  full  University  meal  plan. 
Those  residents  living  in  the  South 
Campus  apartment  complex  are 
not  required  to  be  on  a  meal  plan; 
however,  they  may  choose  any 
meal  plan  option  if  they  are  inter- 
ested. 

(2)  OFF-CAMPUS  STUDENTS 

This  classification  covers  students 
who  travel  or  commute  to  and 
from  their  legal  residences,  as  well 
as  students  who  live  away  from 
the  homes  of  their  parents  or  legal 
guardians  in  a  dwelling  that  is  not 
supervised  or  approved  by  the 
University. 

Services 

Residence  Life  and  Housing 

The  Office  of  Residence  Life  and  Hous- 
ing is  reponsible  for  creating  and  main- 
taining an  environment  in  each  hous- 
ing facility  that  encourages  academic, 
social,  and  emotional  growth.  Each 
facility  is  staffed  with  trained  personnel 
who  are  available  24  hours  a  day  to 
provide  services,  assistance,  and  a  vari- 
ety of  information.  All  resident  stu- 
dents are  given  and  encouraged  to  read 
the  residential  handbook,  A  Guide  to 
Residence  Hall  Living,  which  contains 
valuable  information  on  all  services, 
policies,  and  responsibilities  pertaining 
to  all  housing  facilities.  During  the 
Sykes  Union  construction  project,  the 
Office  of  Residence  Life  and  Housing 
will  be  located  on  the  second  floor  of 
Wayne  Hall,  436-3307. 


On-Campus  Housing 

The  residence  halls  on  the  North  Cam- 
pus provide  accommodations  for 
approximately  3,100  resident  students 
in  double  occupancy  accommodations. 
In  addition,  the  South  Campus  apart- 
ment complex  houses  almost  500  resi- 
dents in  four-  or  five-person,  fully  fur- 
nished units  with  each  bedroom  having 
either  single  or  double  occupancy.  All 
students  may  be  guaranteed  housing 
for  their  full  four  years. 
Housing  Assignments.  The  Office  of  Res- 
idence Life  and  Housing  makes  the 
housing  assignments  for  all  students 
living  in  all  housing  facilities.  These 
assignments  are  made  without  discrim- 
ination. Only  individuals  of  the  same 
sex  will  be  assigned  as  roommates  or 
in  the  same  apartment  unit.  Each  room 
or  apartment  has  basic  furnishings  for 
comfortable  living,  and  the  students 
may  make  them  more  homelike  with 
their  own  accessory  additions.  During 
orientation,  students  are  informed 
about  the  services  and  equipment  fur- 
nished by  the  University  and  those 
necessities  that  they  must  supply  for 
themselves.  Lounge  and  recreation 
areas,  television,  and  a  variety  of  other 
facilities  and  conveniences  provide  a 
pleasant  setting  for  student  life  in  each 
residence  hall.  Services  are  also  avail- 
able in  a  central  location  in  the  apart- 
ment complex. 

Transfer  Students.  Transfer  students  are 
admitted  both  as  resident  students  and 
as  commuting  students.  Those  transfer 
students  who  desire  on-campus  hous- 
ing should  indicate  this  at  the  time 
they  apply  for  admission  to  the  Univer- 
sity. 

Married  Students.  The  University  has 
no  housing  facilities  for  married  stu- 
dents. Prior  to  registration,  they  will 
need  to  secure  their  own  accommoda- 
tions in  the  community. 
Readmitted  Students.  Students  readmit- 
ted to  the  University  are  eligible  for 
on-campus  housing  unless  a  specific 
disciplinary  sanction  would  prohibit 
such  occupancy.  Interested  students 
should  contact  the  Office  of  Residence 
Life  and  Housing  for  specific  informa- 
tion about  the  application  process. 
Overnight  Guests.  If  accommodations 
are  available,  a  resident  student  may 
have  an  overnight  guest.  Prior  approval 
and  registration  must  be  secured  from 
the  resident  director.  Compliance  with 
policies  and  procedures  regarding  the 


visitation  registration  process  is 
expected  of  all  residents  and  guests. 
Policy  for  Withdrawab.  Resident  stu- 
dents must  vacate  their  residence  hall 
or  apartment  within  24  hours  of  com- 
pleting the  withdrawal  form  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Dining  Accommodations 

Plan  1 

14- Variable  Program:  This  program 
entitles  students  to  any  14  of  the  19 
meals  served  Monday  through  Sunday 
and  includes  a  flexible  fund  of 
$100.00.  This  convenient  program  is 
required  for  all  students  living  in  the 
North  Campus  residence  halls  and  is 
available  to  South  Campus  apartment 
residents  as  well  as  off-campus  and 
commuter  students. 
Plan! 

Flexible  Fund  Program:  This  program 
is  designed  for  off-campus,  commuter, 
or  South  Campus  apartment  students. 
Students  can  place  a  minimum  of 
$100.00  into  a  flexible  fund  account 
that  can  be  accessed  by  a  WCU  ID 
Card.  The  program  can  be  used  in  the 
Food  Court,  Take  Out,  Convenience 
Store,  Bagel  Cart,  or  Ram's  Head  Deli. 
With  this  program,  there  is  no  need  to 
carry  cash  to  purchase  meals.  The  flex- 
ible fund  can  be  increased  in  $25.00 
increments  any  time. 
Plan  3 

10-Variable  Program:  This  plan  is  for 
off-campus,  commuter,  or  South  Cam- 
pus apartment  students  and  entitles  the 
student  to  any  10  of  19  meals  served 
Monday  through  Sunday.  This  plan 
includes  a  flex  fiind  of  $50.00. 
Plan  4 

5-Variable  Program:  This  plan  is  for 
off-campus,  commuter,  or  South  Cam- 
pus apartment  students  and  entitles  the 
student  to  any  five  of  19  meals  served 
Monday  through  Sunday.  This  plan 
includes  a  flex  hind  of  $50.00. 
For  all  meal  plans,  any  flex  fund  dol- 
lars not  used  at  the  end  of  the  fall 
semester  will  be  transferted  to  the 
spring  semester.  Any  flex  fund  dollars 
remaining  at  the  end  of  the  spring 
semester  will  be  forfeited  by  the  stu- 
dent and  will  not  be  refunded.  The 
meal  week  runs  from  Monday  to  Sun- 
day; any  unused  meals  at  the  end  of 
any  week  will  be  forfeited. 
Students  in  North  Campus  residence 
halls  will  have  their  meal  plan  cost 


Student  Affairs 


included  in  their  University  billing. 
Off-campus,  commuter,  and  South 
Campus  apartment  students  can  sign 
up  for  a  meal  plan  by  applying  at  the 
Office  of  the  Bursar  in  the  Ebie  O.  Bull 
Center. 

OfF-Campus  and  Commuter 
Ufe 

The  Office  of  Off-Campus  and  Com- 
muter Life  (OCCL)  is  committed  to 
meeting  the  diverse  needs  of  off- 
campus  and  commuting  students.  The 
responsibilities  of  the  office  include  the 
Off-Campus  Housing  Service,  advising 
the  Off-Campus  Student  Association, 
and  serving  as  a  community  resource 
agent  for  the  University  and  local  gov- 
ernment in  all  areas  related  to  off- 
campus  and  commuting  students. 
Additional  services  provided  to  off- 
campus  students  by  OCCL  include 
landlord/tenant  legal  aid  information 
and  development  of  long-range  plans 
and  research  on  the  profile  and  needs 
of  off-campus  students. 
During  the  Sykes  Union  construction 
project,  the  Office  of  Off-Campus  and 
Commuter  Life  will  be  located  on  the 
second  floor  of  Wayne  Hall,  436-3305. 

Off-Campus  Housing 

Students  who  choose  to  live  in  the 
community  must  secure  their  own  liv- 
ing accommodations.  The  Office  of 
Off-Campus  and  Commuter  Life  will 
assist  students  in  finding  housing  by 
providing  a  variety  of  materials  such  as 
an  up-to-date  listing  of  available  hous- 
ing and  an  apartment  complex  guide. 
As  available  student  rental  units  in  the 
West  Chester  area  are  at  a  premium,  it 
is  recommended  that  students  inter- 
ested in  this  type  of  living  situation 
begin  their  housing  search  as  far  in 
advance  as  possible. 

Bookstore 

The  Student  Services,  Inc.  Bookstore, 
stocks  required  textbooks  and  supply 
items  connected  with  academic  pro- 
grams of  the  University.  In  addition  to 
required  course  materials,  the  book- 
store offers  a  wide  variety  of  merchan- 
dise including  computers,  clothing, 
health  and  beaut)'  items,  cards,  gifts, 
and  reference  and  leisure  reading  mate- 
rials. 

Qualifying  students  may  apply  for  an 
SSI  Bookstore  Charge  in  the  SSI  Busi- 
ness Office.  Payment  can  also  be  made 


using  Visa,  MasterCard,  MAC,  or  by  a 

personal  check  accompanied  by  a  valid 

ID. 

Store  hours: 

Mon.-Thurs.-Fri.  8:15  a.m. -4:15  p.m. 

Tues.-Wed.  8:15  a.m.-6:00  p.m. 

Extended  hours  are  provided  at  the 
beginning  of  each  semester.  The  Book- 
store is  currendy  located  on  the 
ground  floor  of  the  Sykes  Union  Build- 
ing. However,  due  to  the  Sykes  Union 
construction  project,  the  Bookstore 
will  be  relocated  temporarily  to  Peo- 
ples Maintenance  Building  in  Novem- 
ber 1993. 

Bus  Transportation  on  Campus 

The  University  provides  bus  service 
from  University  Avenue  and  Church 
Street  to  South  Campus  (and  return), 
Monday  through  Friday,  during  the 
academic  year.  There  is  no  bus  service 
on  weekends  except  Sunday  from  6:30 
p.m.  to  11  p.m.  and  on  exam  Satur- 
days. Bus  schedules  are  available  at 
information  and  residence  hall  desks. 

Career  Planning  and  Placement 
Services 

The  professional  staff  of  the  Career 
Development  Center  work  directly 
with  students  throughout  their  years  at 
the  University  assisting  in  defining 
career  goab,  relating  academic  prepara- 
tion to  these  goals  and,  eventually, 
helping  in  the  search  for  fulfilling 
occupations.  These  services  are  avail- 
able throughout  the  entire  calendar 
year  in  Lawrence  Center,  second  floor. 
A  career  information  library  is  kept 
current  for  browsing  and  research. 
Graduate  school  catalogs  and  other 
reference  material  are  maintained  for 
students  considering  graduate  school. 
An  interactive  computer  career  guid- 
ance program  is  also  available.  Other 
activities  of  the  Career  Development 
Center  include  seminars,  on-campus 
interviews  with  potential  employers, 
resume  referral,  and  a  job  posting  sys- 
tem. 

A  credential  service  is  provided  for 
graduating  seniors  for  an  additional 
fee. 

The  Career  Development  Center  is 
located  in  106  Lawrence  Center, 
436-2501. 

Children's  Center 

West  Chester  University  students  and 
employees  can  receive  day-care  services 
for  their  children  in  the  on-campus 
Children's  Center. 


Children  participate  in  educational  and 
developmental  programs  while  their 
parents  are  in  class  or  at  work.  The 
center  is  licensed  by  the  Common- 
wealth of  Pennsylvania,  and  all 
required  registration  materials  must  be 
completed  prior  to  a  child's  enrollment 
in  the  center.  The  center  offers  reduced 
rates  to  students  and  multiple-child 
discounts.  The  center  is  located  in 
McCarthy  Hall  on  the  ground  floor. 
For  more  information,  including 
opportunities  for  student  workers  and 
volunteers,  contact  the  Children's  Cen- 
ter at  436-2388  or  the  Women's  Cen- 
ter at  436-2122. 

Counseling  and  Psychological 
Services  Department 

The  Counseling  Center,  a  part  of  the 
Counseling  and  Psychological  Services 
Department,  is  located  on  the  second 
floor  of  Lawrence  Center.  The  Coun- 
seling Center  provides  counseling  ser- 
vices without  charge  to  all  undergradu- 
ate and  graduate  students  at  West 
Chester.  The  faculty  in  the  Counseling 
Center  are  licensed  psychologists  who 
are  experienced  in  working  with  col- 
lege students.  Students  may  discuss 
their  concerns,  feelings,  hopes,  and 
interests  freely  and  in  strict  confidence. 
COUNSELING  SERVICES:  Since  the 
Counseling  Center  provides  services 
for  a  wide  range  of  concerns,  each  stu- 
dent's experience  will  be  tailored  to 
his  or  her  request.  Students  may  want 
to  clarify  their  vocational  or  educa- 
tional choices,  improve  their  interper- 
sonal skills,  or  resolve  personal  con- 
flicts. Their  choice  of  approach  could 
include  one  or  more  of  the  following 
counseling  center  services. 

1 .  Individual  vocational  counseling 
consists  of  a  one-to-one  counseling 
experience  that  focuses  on  the  stu- 
dent's choice  of  major  and  voca- 
tion. Vocational  choice  is  most  solid 
when  it  is  the  outgrowth  of  under- 
standing one's  self  Such  under- 
standing requires  time  and  thought, 
and  involves  the  student  in  identify- 
ing his  or  her  own  style,  values, 
interests,  and  abilities.  Psychological 
testing  as  well  as  discussion  often 
enhances  self-understanding. 

2.  Individual  counseling  for  personal 
problem  solving  consists  of  a  one-to- 
one  counseling  experience  where 
the  focus  is  on  resolving  personal 
conflicts,  conflicts  with  others,  and 
on  improving  the  student's  exper- 


Student  Affairs 


tise  at  making  personally  meaning- 
ful choices.  It  may  also  help  some 
people  avoid  decisions  that  restrict 
their  personal  growth  and  under- 
mine their  well-being. 

3.  Group  counseling  consists  of  a  small 
group  of  peers  with  one  or  more 
counselors.  Such  groups  meet  usu- 
ally once  weekly  to  provide  group 
members  with  constructive  learning 
about  themselves.  Groups  often 
have  a  specific  focus.  Past  groups 
have  focused  upon: 

Elimination  of  self-defeating 

behavior 
Assertiveness  training 
Anxiety  management 
Test  anxiety  reduction 
Eating  disorders 
Career  exploration 
Procrastination  —  how  to 

avoid  it 

4.  Testing  can  be  useful  in 
increasing  self-understanding  and 
can  often  assist  in  the  process  of 
vocational  and  educational  decision 
making.  The  Counseling  Center 
faculty  are  trained  in  the  adminis- 
tration and  interpretation  of  psy- 
chological tests,  and  the  student 
and  his  or  her  counselor  can  decide 
if  testing  might  be  helpful.  Arrange- 
ments also  can  be  made  at  the 
Counseling  Center  for  taking  the 
Graduate  Record  Exam,  the  Gradu- 
ate Management  Aptitude  Test,  and 
the  Miller  Analogies  Test  —  three 
graduate  school  admissions  tests. 

5.  Consultation  Services  are  also  avail- 
able for  staff  and  faculty  members 
of  the  University  community.  Coun- 
seling Center  faculty  can  assist  with 
crises,  program  planning,  and  group 
and  interpersonal  communications, 
as  well  as  referrals  to  other  agen- 
cies. 

For  more  information  call  436-2301. 

Greek  Life  and  Student 
Organizations 

The  Office  of  Greek  Life  and  Student 
Organizations  coordinates  the  Greek 
Life  program  at  West  Chester  Univer- 
sity, which  includes  the  activities  of 
the  four  Greek  Governing  Councils. 
The  Greek  Life  and  Student  Organiza- 
tions Office  also  advises  West  Chester's 
24  national  fraternities  and  sororities 
on  their  service  projects,  community 
activities,  and  rush  and  pledging  pro- 
grams. The  office  registers  all  student 
organizations  at  the  University  and 


provides  leadership  development  pro- 
grams for  student  leaders.  During  the 
Sykes  Union  construction  project,  the 
Office  of  Greek  Life  and  Student  Orga- 
nizations will  be  located  on  the  second 
floor  of  Wayne  Hall,  436-3305. 

Health  Services 

The  University  Health  Center  is  staffed 
with  two  full-time  physicians,  a  certi- 
fied nurse  practitioner,  and  five  regis- 
tered nurses  who  are  available  to  meet 
first-aid  needs  and  to  treat  acute  minor 
illnesses  and  surgical  conditions.  Gyne- 
cological services,  including  testing  for 
pregnancy  and  sexually  transmitted 
diseases,  are  available  as  well.  Contra- 
ceptive counseling  and  routine  exam- 
inations are  available  by  appointment 
only.  The  University  is  not  responsible 
for  any  additional  medical  or  surgical 
services  or  hospitalization. 
All  students  are  required  to  pay  a 
health  service  fee  at  the  beginning  of 
each  semester.  The  fee  covers  office 
visits  and  certain  diagnostic  tests.  Many 
medications  are  available  at  a  nominal 
fee.  Allergy  injections  are  given  free  of 
charge. 

The  University  Health  Center  is  located 
in  the  lower  level  of  Ramsey  Hall,  436- 
2509.  Services  are  available  to  cur- 
rently enrolled  students  only.  When 
school  is  in  session,  the  Health  Center 
is  open  Monday  through  Friday  from  8 
a.m.  to  midnight  and  Saturdays  from 
10  a.m.  to  6  p.m.  during  fall  and 
spring  semesters.  Summer  hours  are 
provided  weekdays  only  from  8  a.m.  to 
4  p.m. 

Insurance  Programs 

Because  of  the  unpredictable  nature  of 
medical  and  surgical  emergencies,  all 
students  are  encouraged  to  be  covered 
by  a  health  insurance  program.  Student 
insurance  plans  are  offered  through  the 
Health  Center.  Information  on  the 
insurance  program  is  mailed  to  stu- 
dents prior  to  registration  or  may  be 
obtained  from  the  University  Health 
Center. 

Insurance  requirements  may  be  man- 
dated by  specific  departments  and/or 
athletic  programs.  Refer  to  the  appro- 
priate section  in  the  catalog  for  further 
information  on  these  requirements. 
Liability  Insurance  Requirement  for 
Students  in  Nursing.  See  the  section 
describing  the  Department  of  Nursing. 


Student  Physical  Examinations 

A  physical  examination  is  required  for 
all  entering  and  transfer  students.  The 
University  Health  Center  reserves  the 
right  to  request  an  annual  physical 
examination  by  the  family  physician 
for  any  student  suffering  from  a 
chronic  illness. 

No  student  will  be  permitted  to  regis- 
ter for  classes  until  a  history  and  phys- 
ical examination  report  is  completed 
and  filed.  These  forms  are  available  at 
the  University  Health  Center  and  are 
mailed  to  students  prior  to  registration. 

Communicable  Diseases 

A  current  physical  examination, 
including  a  report  of  a  negative  tuber- 
culin test  or  chest  X-ray  showing  no 
active  tuberculosis  (TB),  is  mandated 
by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of 
Education  for  all  senior  student  teach- 
ers and  all  junior  or  sophomore  stu- 
dents participating  in  a  field  experience 
in  the  public  schools.  The  TB  test  may 
be  given  fi-ee  of  charge  at  the  Health 
Center. 

All  students  bom  after  1957  must 
show  evidence  of  immunization  involv- 
ing other  communicable  diseases  and 
booster  shots  against  measles.  Guide- 
lines published  by  the  Center  for  Dis- 
ease Control  will  be  adhered  to  and 
revised  as  appropriate  to  protect  the 
health  of  those  in  the  University  com- 
munity. 

Because  of  the  potential  for  transmis- 
sion of  several  infectious  diseases,  all 
students  utilizing  injectable  medicines 
will  be  required  to  show  evidence  of 
satisfactory  disposal  of  needles  and 
syringes.  The  Health  Center  will  pro- 
vide firee  disposal  of  medical  waste. 

Mail  Service 

The  University  has  an  on-campus  post 
office  located  on  the  second  floor  of 
Lawrence  Center.  Commuting  students 
requesting  a  mail  box  must  show  a 
need  for  the  box  by  applying  to  the 
Office  of  Off-Campus  and  Commuter 
Life,  which  will  approve  or  disapprove 
the  mail  box  request.  During  the  Sykes 
Union  construction  project,  the  OfiSce 
of  Off-Campus  and  Commuter  Life  will 
be  located  on  the  second  floor  of 
Wayne  Hall,  436-3305.  Resident  stu- 
dents receive  their  mail  at  their  resi- 
dence halls.  To  ensure  prompt  delivery, 
mail  sent  to  resident  students  should 
show  the  student's  name,  room  num- 


Student  Affairs 


ber,  the  name  of  the  residence  hall, 
and  the  University's  name  and  address 
(West  Chester  University,  West 
Chester,  PA  19383). 

Minority  Affairs 

The  Office  of  Minority  Affairs  is  dedi- 
cated to  the  development  of  multicul- 
tural sensitivity,  understanding,  and 
appreciation  of  diversity  among  stu- 
dents. The  office  develops  and  imple- 
ments comprehensive  programs  aimed 
at  addressing  the  needs  and  concerns 
of  the  minority  student.  It  also  serves 
as  a  consultant  to  other  University 
offices  regarding  minority  students  and 
aids  in  projects  focused  on  improving 
the  general  campus  climate  for  minori- 
ties. 

Orientation  and  Parent 
Relations 

The  Office  of  Orientation  and  Parent 
Relations  is  responsible  for  the  coordi- 
nation of  the  Summer  Orientation  Pro- 
gram, and  the  September  and  January 
Orientation  sessions  for  new  students. 
West  Chester's  Orientation  programs 
(specific  sessions  for  freshman,  trans- 
fer, and  adult  students)  are  designed  to 
introduce  new  students  to  the  Univer- 
sity and  acquaint  them  with  the  aca- 
demic, student  services,  and  social 
aspects  of  college  life.  Attendance  at 
Orientation,  along  with  taking  the  ori- 
entation course  (University  101)  in  the 
fall  semester,  is  a  graduation  require- 
ment. 

Other  responsibihties  of  the  office 
include  coordination  of  Parent  Orienta- 
tion Programs,  the  Parent  Handbook, 
and  the  annual  Family  Day  program  in 
the  fall.  The  1993  Family  Day  program 
will  be  held  on  October  30. 
During  the  Sykes  Union  construction 
project,  the  Office  of  Orientation  and 
Parent  Relations  will  be  located  on  the 
second  floor  of  Wayne  Hall,  436-3305. 

P.R.I. D.E.  Student  Development 
Resource  Center 

Located  in  B-20  Killinger  Hall,  the 
PRIDE  (Promoting  Responsible  Ideas, 
Decisions  and  Experiences)  Student 
Development  Resource  Center  is 
staffed  by  Student  Peer  Educators  who 
are  supervised  by  a  professional  staff 
member.  The  PRIDE  Center  has  as  its 
focus  five  major  areas  of  educational 
programming:  self-esteem  and  values, 
substance  use  and  abuse,  sex  and  sexu- 


ality, wellness  and  diversity.  The  center 
ofiers  a  variety  of  services  to  the  Uni- 
versity community  including  a  library 
of  print,  audio,  and  video  information 
available  for  loan;  programs  and  work- 
shops; consultation  for  students,  fac- 
ulty, and  staff;  support/discussion 
groups;  and  referrals  to  treatment  facil- 
ities when  appropriate.  For  more  infor- 
mation regarding  information  services, 
contact  PRIDE  at  436-3276. 

Public  Safety 

West  Chester  University  is  concerned 
about  the  safety  and  welfare  of  all  cam- 
pus members  and  is  committed  to  pro- 
viding a  safe  and  secure  environment. 
Campus  security  is  the  responsibility  of 
the  University's  Public  Safety  Depart- 
ment, located  in  the  Peoples  Mainte- 
nance Building  at  the  comer  of  Church 
Street  and  University  Avenue. 
Because  no  campus  is  isolated  from 
crime,  the  University  has  developed  a 
series  of  policies  and  procedures  to 
ensure  that  every  possible  precaution- 
ary measure  is  taken  to  protect  mem- 
bers of  the  University  community 
while  they  are  on  campus. 
A  full  explanation  of  the  University's 
security  policies  and  procedures,  as 
well  as  additional  pertinent  informa- 
tion, appears  in  a  publication  called 
"Your  Safety  Is  Our  Concern,"  which  is 
available  from  the  Office  of  Admissions 
and  the  Department  of  Public  Safety. 

Vehicle  Registration 

All  administrators,  faculty,  staff,  eligi- 
ble students,  and  visitors  desiring  to 
use  designated  parking  lots  must  regis- 
ter their  vehicles  with  the  Department 
of  Public  Safety  and  purchase/obtain 
parking  decals.  Resident  students  with 
less  than  63  credits  and  commuter  stu- 
dents with  less  than  25  credits  (as  of 
September  of  the  academic  year  in 
which  they  wish  to  register  a  vehicle) 
are  ineligible  to  park  on  North  Cam- 
pus. The  annual  registration  fee  will  be 
set  by'  the  president  upon  recommen- 
dation of  the  Parking  Committee.  For 
purposes  of  this  document,  "annual"  is 
defined  as  September  1  until  August  31 
of  the  following  year.  Specific  reg- 
istration procedures  will  be  announced 
yearly. 

A  valid,  nonsuspended  operator's 
license  and  vehicle  registration  card(s) 
must  be  presented  at  the  rime  the  vehi- 
cle is  registered.  Any  change  in  the 


vehicle  registration  number  must  be 
reponed  to  the  Department  of  Public 
Saifety  immediately. 
When  you  receive  your  decal,  place  it 
in  your  vehicle  immediately.  Instruc- 
tions on  placement  are  on  the  reverse 
side  of  the  decal. 

Mutilated  or  defaced  decals  must  be 
replaced  for  a  fee  of  $5.00  by  contact- 
ing the  Department  of  Public  Safety. 
The  operation  and  registration  of  a 
vehicle  must  conform  to  Common- 
wealth vehicle  law  and  University  reg- 
ulations. For  complete  information 
regarding  motor  vehicles  and  registra- 
tion, refer  to  the  Motor  Vehicle  Regula- 
tions available  at  Public  Safety. 

Student  Services,  Incorporated 
(SSI) 

Student  Services,  Incorporated  (SSI)  is 
a  not-for-profit  organization  primarily 
designed  to  serve  the  students  of  West 
Chester  University.  The  objective  of 
this  corporation  is  to  initiate,  regulate, 
and  operate  the  financial  matters  of  all 
cocurricular  student  activities.  Such 
activities  include  the  management  of 
the  campus  bookstore,  student  publica- 
tions, student  organizations,  check 
cashing/ticket  service,  the  administra- 
tive aspects  of  the  student  union,  stu- 
dent programming,  intercollegiate  ath- 
letics, athletic  foundations  and  clinics, 
and  the  graduate  student  association. 
In  fiscal  matters  and  in  various  policy- 
making areas,  the  final  authority  rests 
with  the  president  of  the  University. 
The  SSI  Business  Office,  436-2955,  is 
currently  located  in  211  Sykes  Union. 
However,  due  to  the  Sykes  Union  con- 
struction project,  the  SSI  Business 
Office  will  be  relocated  temporarily  to 
Peoples  Maintenance  Building  in 
November  1993. 

Student  Standards 

In  addition  to  providing  a  sound  edu- 
cational environment  for  intellectual 
pursuits.  West  Chester  University  is 
concerned  with  developing  socially 
responsible  citizens,  ensuring  the  wel- 
fare and  freedom  of  all  members  of  the 
University  community,  and  protecting 
individual  rights.  The  University  is 
thus  concerned  with  the  quality  of  stu- 
dent conduct  and  has  adopted  rules 
and  behavioral  standards  for  its  stu- 
dents. These  regulations  are  outlined 
in  the  "Student  Code  of  Conduct"  con- 
tained in  the  Ram 's  Eye  View  Student 


Student  Affairs 


Handbook.  Disciplinary  action  may  be 
imposed  when  a  student  fails  to  recog- 
nize or  violates  the  rights  and  privileges 
of  other  individuals  or  behaves  in  a 
manner  not  consistent  vwth  University 
policies. 

The  "Student  Code  of  Conduct" 
reflects  the  University  community's 
concern  that  high  standards  be  main- 
tained by  students  and  student  organi- 
zations. It  guarantees  due  process  and 
protects  the  individual  freedom  of  the 
student  as  well  as  requiring  his  or  her 
responsibility  for  conduct  violations. 
University  judicial  action  will  be  taken 
in  addition  to  actions  taken  by  civil  or 
criminal  courts.  Students  will  be  sub- 
ject to  University  judicial  action  in 
conjunction  with  citations  or  other 
charges  of  which  the  University 
becomes  aware. 

During  the  Sykes  Union  construction 
project,  the  Student  Standards  Office 
will  be  located  on  the  second  floor  of 
Wayne  Hall,  in  the  Dean  of  Students 
Office,  436-3511. 

Sykes  Union  Building 

The  Earl  F.  Sykes  Union  Building, 
opened  in  1975  as  the  community  cen- 
ter for  West  Chester  University,  offers 
a  wide  range  of  cultural,  social,  educa- 
tional, and  recreational  programs  and 
services.  To  accommodate  student 
needs  a  major  renovation  and  expan- 
sion construction  project  will  begin  in 
June  1993.  This  project  will  expand 
the  current  62,000  square  foot  facility 
to  a  "new"  multipurpose  facility  of 
approximately  100,000  square  feet. 
During  the  Sykes  Union  construction 
project,  both  Wayne  Hall  and  Peoples 
Maintenance  Building  will  be  the  tem- 
porary home  of  Sykes  Union  functions. 
The  second  floor  of  Wayne  Hall  will 
house  the  Student  Affairs  Offices  of  the 
Vice  President,  Dean  of  Students,  Asso- 
ciate Dean  of  Students,  Residence  Life 
and  Housing,  Off-Campus  and  Com- 
muter Life,  Orientation  and  Parent 
Relations,  Greek  Life  and  Student 
Organizations,  Student  Standards  and 
Sykes  Management.  The  second  floor 
also  will  house  the  Sykes  Information 
Center  which  will  serve  as  a  central 
information  center  for  campus.  Reser- 
vations for  meeting  rooms  in  Wayne 
Hall  and  other  campus  locations  will 
be  coordinated  through  the  Informa- 
tion Center.  The  third  floor  of  Wayne 
will  house  the  Departments  of  Student 
Programming  and  Student  Activities 


along  with  approximately  18  student 
clubs  and  organizations  including  the 
WCUR  radio  station,  the  QUAD  news- 
paper, and  the  Student  Government 
Association. 

The  Bookstore,  Ram's  Head  Deli,  and 
Student  Services,  Inc.  Business  Office 
will  be  relocated  to  Peoples  Mainte- 
nance Building  in  November  1993.  For 
information  regarding  Sykes  Union 
functions,  Wayne  Hall  offices,  and  Peo- 
ples Maintenance  Building  operations, 
please  call  the  Sykes  Information  Cen- 
ter at  436-3360  or  436-2984. 

Women's  Center 

The  Women's  Center  addresses  the 
special  concerns  of  all  women,  includ- 
ing the  issues  facing  women  students 
who  enter  West  Chester  University 
from  high  school  or  return  to  college 
after  time  at  home  or  in  the  job  world. 
Located  in  Lawrence  Center  on  the 
second  floor,  the  Women's  Center  pro- 
vides a  lounge  area  for  conversation,  as 
well  as  study;  peer  advising;  support 
and  special  interest  programs  Gectures, 
films,  concerts,  etc.).  For  more  infor- 
mation, including  opportunities  for 
student  volunteers,  call  436-2122. 

Activities 

Student  Activities  on  Campus 

Student  activities  at  West  Chester  Uni- 
versity encompass  a  wide  range  of  cul- 
tural, social,  educational,  and  recre- 
ational programs  for  a  diverse  student 
population, 

The  Department  of  Student  Program- 
ming, under  the  auspices  of  Student 
Services,  Inc.,  takes  a  leadership  role  in 
organizing  and  sponsoring  joint  or 
individual  projects  as  part  of  its  mis- 
sion. One  major  role  centers  on  advi- 
sory relationships  with  the  Student 
Activities  Council  (the  major  program- 
ming organization  on  campus).  Innova- 
tions (a  unique  and  nationally  recog- 
nized nonalcoholic  nightclub  that 
presents  campus  comedians,  DJ  music, 
and  "Top  40"  bands  on  Thursday 
nights),  and  the  University  Contempo- 
rary Issues  Committee  (a  group  that 
concentrates  on  issues-oriented  pro- 
gramming). Current  movies,  area  band 
performances,  national  cultural  enter- 
tainment acts,  lectures  (with  a  special 
emphasis  on  the  "Leadership,  Unity, 
and  Volunteerism  and  Image  Maker" 
programs),  variety  lunchtime  entertain- 


ment, and  special  events  (Welcome 
Week,  Airband,  Winter  Weekend)  are 
all  sponsored  by  the  Student  Program- 
ming and  Student  Activities  Council. 
Homecoming,  Family  Day,  Spring 
Weekend,  and  major  benefit  concerts 
are  additional  special  University  events 
that  unite  many  segments  of  the  cam- 
pus. During  the  Sykes  Union  construc- 
tion project,  the  Student  Programming 
and  Student  Activities  Departments 
will  be  located  on  the  third  floor  of 
Wayne  Hall,  436-2983  or  436-3037. 
Students  can  become  a  vital  force  on 
campus  through  participation  and 
involvement  in  student  organizations 
and  activities.  All  students  have  an 
opportunity  to  attend  campus  events 
and/or  join  an  organization  that  meets 
their  individual  needs.  Leadership  roles 
are  always  available,  so  being  active 
can  become  one  of  the  more  enriching 
experiences  in  student  life.  Becoming 
involved  builds  individual  integrity  and 
a  sense  of  community— two  desirable 
qualities  in  all  aspects  of  life.  Student 
activities  and  organizations  are  the  life- 
blood  of  any  campus  environment,  and 
West  Chester  University  has  many 
such  opportunities. 

Student  Organizations 

Each  November,  an  updated  "Student 
Organizations  Directory"  is  printed  that 
includes  the  names,  addresses,  and 
telephone  numbers  of  all  presidents 
and  advisers  of  more  than  180  campus 
student  organizations.  For  more  infor- 
mation on  WCU  student  organizations, 
contact  the  Office  for  Student  Develop- 
ment, 206  Sykes  Union  Building,  436- 
3305.  The  following  is  the  official  list 
of  all  student  organizations  that  were 
registered  during  the  1992-93  academic 
year: 

Student  Governing/Campus 
Programming  Organizations 

Freshman  Class 

Sophomore  Class 

Junior  Class 

Senior  Class 

Graduate  Student  Association 

Innovations 

Ofif-Campus  Student  Association 

Residence  Hall  Association 

Student  Activities  Council 

Student  Government  Association 

Sykes  Union  Board  of  Governors 

Academic/Professional  Organizations 

Accounting  Society 
Alchemist  Club 


Student  Affairs 


Anderson  Math  Club 

Anthropology  Club  of  WCU 

Art  Association 

Association  for  Childhood  Education 

International 
Association  for  Educating  Children 

in  Mathematics 
Athletic  Training  Club 
Communications  Club 
Computer  Club 
Criminal  Justice  Association  — 

Sigma  Tau  Omicron 
Dance  Production  Workshop 
Darlington  Biological  Society 
Economics  and  Finance  Society 
Forensic  Society 
French  Club 
Geography  Club 
German  Club 
History  Club 

Honors  Student  Association 
Institute  of  Management  Accountants 
Italian  Club 
Law  Society 
Linguistics  Club 
Marketing  Society 
Metamorphose 
National  Student  Speech,  Hearing  and 

Language  Association 
Philosophy  Club 
Political  Science  Club 
Psychology  Club 
Social  Work  Club 
Society  for  the  Advancement  of 

Management 
Society  of  Physics  Students 
Sociology  Club  —  Delta  Alpha  Tau 
Spanish  Club 
Special  Education  Club 
Student  Pennsylvania  State  Education 

Association  (PSEA),  National  Educa- 
tion Association  (NEA) 
Student  Nurses'  Association  of 

Pennsylvania  (SNAP) 
United  States  Institute  of 

Theatre  Technology 
West  Chester  Association  for  the 

Education  of  Young  Children 
WCU  Theatre 

Special  Interest  Organizations 

Black  Student  Union 

Chess  Club 

Disabled  Student  Union 

EARTH  (Environmental  Association  for 

Repairing  the  Habitat) 
Healdi  Club 

El  Milagro  (Latino  Student  Union) 
International  Student  Association 
Lesbian,  Gay,  Bisexual  Association 
National  Student  Exchange  Organization 
Photography  Club 
Pro-Choice 


Recreational  Services 
Semper  Fidelis 
Students  for  Life 
Together  Toward  Peace 
University  Contemporary  Issues 

Committee 
Women's  Center  Club 

Religious  Organizations 

Baptist  Student  Ministry 
Campus  Crusade  for  Christ 
Christians  in  Action 
Collegiate  Christian  Fellowship 
Gospel  Choir 

Hilkl  Jewish  Student  Union 
Inter- Varsity  Christian  Fellowship 
Latter  Day  Saints  Student  Association 
Lutheran  Student  Association 
Muslim  Student  Association 
Newman  Student  Association 
United  Campus  Ministry 
Westminster  College  Fellowship 

Service  Organizations 

The  Abbe  Society 
Alpha  Phi  Omega 
Emergency  Medical  Services 
Friars  Society 
Habitat  for  Humanity 
Phi  Sigma  Pi 
University  Ambassadors 

Greek  Letter  Organizations 
Governing  Councils 

Black  Greek  Council 
Interfratemity  Council 
Inter-Greek  Council 
Order  of  Omega 
Panhellenic  Council 

Fraternities 

Alpha  Chi  Rho 
Alpha  Phi  Alpha 
Iota  Phi  Theta 
Kappa  Alpha  Psi 
Kappa  Delta  Rho 
Omega  Psi  Phi 
Phi  Beta  Sigma 
Phi  Delta  Theta 
Phi  Kappa  Sigma 
Pi  Kappa  Phi 
Sigma  Pi 

Sigma  Phi  Epsilon 
Theta  Chi 
Zeta  Beta  Tau 

Sororities 

Alpha  Kappa  Alpha 
Alpha  Phi 
Alpha  Sigma  Tau 
Alpha  Xi  Delta 


Delta  Phi  Epsilon 
Delta  Zeta 
Phi  Sigma  Sigma 
Sigma  Gamma  Rho 
Zeta  Phi  Beta 
Zeta  Tau  Alpha 

Publications  and  Media  Organizations 

Daedalus 

The  Quad 

The  Serpentine 

WCUR-West  Chester  University  Radio 

WCTV  — West  Chester  Television 

Sports  Clubs 

Equestrian 

Fencing 

Ice  Hockey 

Karate 

Rugby— Men 

Rugby  —  Women 

Skiing 

Sports  Club  Council 

Volleyball  —  Men 

Water  Polo 

Musical  Organizations 

Brass  Ensemble 

Chamber  Choir 

Close  Harmony 

Collegium  Musicum 

Concert  Band 

Concert  Choir 

Criterions  Jazz  Ensemble 

Field  of  View 

Flute  Ensemble 

Guitar  Ensemble 

Kappa  Kappa  Psi 

Marching  Band  —  "Golden  Rams" 

Masterworks  Chorus 

Music  Educator's  National 

Conference -Chapter  21  (PCMEA) 
Opera  Theatre  Ensemble 
Percussion  Ensemble 
Phi  Mu  Alpha  Sinfonia 
Saxophone  Ensemble 
Sigma  Alpha  Iota 
Symphonic  Band 
Symphony  Orchestra 
Tau  Beta  Sigma 
University  Chorale 
Wind  Ensemble 
Women's  Choir 

Honor  Societies 

Anthropology/Sociology— Alpha  Kappa 

Delta 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading  — 

Alpha  Upsilon  Alpha 
Communication  Studies  —  Pi  Kappa 

Delta 
Economics— Alpha  Epsilon 


Student  Affairs 


Education  —  Delta  Kappa  Gamma 
Education  —  Kappa  Delta  Pi 
Education  — Phi  Delta  Kappa 
Educational  Services  — Chi  Alpha 

Epsilon 
English  -  Sigma  Tau  Delta 
Foreign  Languages  — Alpha  Mu  Gamma 
Geography  —  Gamma  Theta  Upsilon 
Geolog>'— Sigma  Gamma  Epsilon 
Health  Science  —  Eta  Sigma  Gamma 
History  — Phi  Alpha  Theta 
Mathematical  Sciences  —  Pi  Mu  Epsilon 
Music  —  Pi  Kappa  Lambda 
Nursing 

Philosophy— Phi  Sigma  Tau 
Physical  Education  -  Phi  Epsilon  Kappa 
Physics  —  Sigma  Pi  Sigma 
Political  Science  —  Pi  Sigma  Alpha 
Psychology— Psi  Chi 
Social  Science  —  Pi  Gamma  Mu 
Social  Work -Phi  Alpha 
Sociology  — Alpha  Kappa  Delta 
Theater  Arts  -  Alpha  Psi  Omega 

The  following  section  provides  a  sam- 
pling of  information  about  some  of  the 
student  groups  on  campus.  For  a  com- 
prehensive listing  of  descriptions,  refer 
to  the  Ram's  Eye  View  Student  Handbook. 

Student  Governing/Campus 
Programming  Organizations 

The  Student  Government  Association 

(SGA)  is  the  legislative  body  that  repre- 
sents the  students  at  West  Chester  Uni- 
versity. Under  guidance  from  the  vice 
president  for  student  affairs,  SGA  repre- 
sents student  opinions  concerning  poli- 
cies and  procedures,  deals  with  issues 
on  campus  that  have  a  direct  effect  on 
students,  and  gives  students  experience 
in  the  processes  of  government.  All  stu- 
dents are  automatically  members  of 
SGA  upon  paying  the  activity  fee  that  is 
included  in  the  tuition  bill. 
The  purpose  of  the  Residence  Hall 
Association  (RHA)  is  to  provide  for 
the  social,  cultural,  and  educational  life 
of  resident  students.  RHA  purchases 
and  maintains  recreational  equipment, 
provides  social  events,  and  aids  the 
residence  life  staff  in  educational  pro- 
gramming, living  conditions,  and  regu- 
lations in  the  residence  halls.  Its  varied 
activities  stem  from  representation  and 
participation  in  the  residence  halls. 
Each  hall  has  a  representative  from 
every  floor  and  a  slate  of  ofificers.  The 
oflFicers  from  every  residence  hall  rep- 
resent their  respective  halls  in  the  Resi- 
dence Hall  Association  General  Assem- 
bly. The  hall  presidents  sit  on  the  RHA 


Board  of  Presidents,  the  decision- 
making body  of  the  organization.  The 
board  then  appoints  an  executive 
director  to  act  as  official  spokesperson 
for  the  organization. 
The  Ofif-Campus  Student  Association 
(OCSA)  is  a  student  organization 
whose  primary  goal  is  the  representa- 
tion of  all  students  living  off  campus. 
OCSA  objectives  include  distributing 
University  information,  designing  edu- 
cational and  social  programming,  and 
developing  positive  community  rela- 
tions. Through  representation  and 
input  to  various  University  committees, 
OCSA  represents  the  ideas  and  con- 
cerns of  all  students  living  in  the  West 
Chester  community  as  well  as  students 
who  commute  to  the  University. 
The  Student  Activities  Council  (SAC) 
is  one  of  the  main  student  program- 
ming organizations  at  West  Chester 
University.  Totally  funded  and  run  by 
students,  SAC  creates  and  programs 
many  of  the  activities  and  events  on 
campus,  such  as  major  movies,  con- 
certs, comedy  events,  and  low-key,  "cof- 
feehouse" entertaiment.  By  using  stu- 
dents' talents  and  energies,  SAC  strives 
to  present  a  wide  variety  of  programs 
that  meet  the  needs  and  interests  of  the 
West  Chester  University  Community. 
SAC  is  comprised  of  six  committees 
and  an  Executive  Board.  Membership  is 
open  to  all  WCU  students  at  any  time. 

Academic/Professional  and 
Special  Interest  Organizations 

Communication  Club.  The  Communi- 
cation Club  provides  opportunities  for 
students  to  learn  about  communication 
as  an  area  of  study,  research,  and 
application  in  an  informal  manner. 
Social  functions,  guest  speakers,  field 
trips  and  conferences  are  provided  in 
conjunction  with  the  Department  of 
Communication  Studies. 
Forensics.  The  University  has  a 
strong  program  in  intramural  and 
intercollegiate  forensics.  Its  Forensic 
Society  is  the  focal  point  for  training  in 
competition  in  debate,  oratory,  extem- 
poraneous speaking,  after-dinner 
speaking,  discussion,  interpretive  read- 
ing, and  other  events. 
University  Theatre.  Excellent  opportu- 
nities for  experience  in  theatre  are 
offered  through  this  student  organiza- 
tion that  functions  in  the  Studio  The- 
atre and  the  Playhouse.  Its  major  pro- 
ductions, drawn  from  the  classics  and 
from  contemporary  drama,  are  out- 


standing events  for  the  University  and 
the  community  as  well.  All  students 
•with  an  interest  in  drama  are  welcome. 
United  States  Institute  of  Theatre 
Technology.  USITT  is  a  national  orga- 
nization which,  through  publications, 
conferences,  and  networking,  helps 
production  and  design  professionals 
keep  in  touch  with  today's  rapidly 
changing  scene. 

Student  Nurses  Association  of  Penn- 
sylvania (SNAP).  One  goal  of  the 
Department  of  Nursing  is  to  encourage 
a  commitment  to  professional  nursing. 
The  SNAP  organization  helps  build 
professional  nursing  interests  and  aids 
in  the  development  of  the  whole  per- 
son through  various  interdisciplinary 
educational  programs  and  services. 
SNAP  is  a  constituent  member  of  the 
National  Student  Nurses'  Association. 
The  Black  Student  Union,  which  was 
formed  in  1971,  is  dedicated  to  the 
creation  of  a  culturally  meaningful 
atmosphere  for  black  students  at  West 
Chester.  Black  Student  Union  member- 
ship is  open  to  all  West  Chester  stu- 
dents, faculty,  and  staff  —  regardless  of 
race,  color,  or  creed  —  who  have  a 
concern  for  the  economic,  political, 
and  social  concerns  of  blacks. 
A  major  purpose  of  the  organization  is 
to  broaden  and  enhance  the  academic 
and  social  lives  of  black  students  at  the 
University.  The  union's  democratically 
structured  constitution  provides  for  an 
executive  board  elected  by  the  mem- 
bership. Membership  in  the  B.S.U.  is 
inclusive  of  all  students  who  are  inter- 
ested, both  graduate  and  undergradu- 
ate. Attendance  at  B.S.U.  functions  are 
generally  open  to  both  student  and 
nonstudent  publics. 

Religious  Organizations 

In  addition  to  the  religious  student 
organizations  previously  listed,  the 
West  Chester  Community  has  a  large 
number  of  churches  and  synagogues 
representing  many  religious  denomina- 
tions. Students  are  always  welcome  at 
those  places  of  worship. 
A  complete  listing  of  student  religious 
and  local  community  organizations  can 
be  found  in  the  "Religious  life  Direc- 
tory," which  is  published  by  the  Reli- 
gious Life  Council  and  the  Division  of 
Student  Affairs.  The  Religious  Life 
Council  also  coordinates  reUgious  pro- 
grams and  activities  on  campus.  For 
more  information  contact  the  Office  for 
Student  Development. 


Student  Affairs 


Service  Organizations 

Alpha  Phi  Omega.  The  Omicron  Upsi- 
lon  chapter  of  this  fraternity,  which  is 
dedicated  to  service  and  leadership 
development,  is  open  to  all  men  of  the 
campus  community.  The  Omicron 
Upsilon  chapter  conducts  many 
service-oriented  activities. 
The  Friars  Society.  The  Friars  Society, 
which  has  been  established  at  West 
Chester  for  many  years,  is  composed  of 
sophomore,  junior,  and  senior  men 
invited  into  the  organization  in  recog- 
nition of  character  and  leadership.  The 
society's  various  service  projects  are 
designed  to  contribute  to  the  good  of 
the  University  community. 
The  Abbe  Society.  The  Abbe  Society  is 
an  honorary  service  society  composed 
of  sophomore,  junior,  and  senior 
women.  The  Abbe  Society  is  dedicated 
to  upholding  the  qualities  of  friend- 
ship, leadership,  and  character  through 
service  to  the  campus  and  community. 
University  Ambassadors.  The  Univer- 
sity Ambassadors  are  a  select  group  of 
student  leaders,  coordinated  by  the 
Office  of  Admissions.  They  promote 
West  Chester  University  among  past, 
present,  and  future  students  by  provid- 
ing weekly  campus  tours  and  repre- 
senting the  University  at  special  events 
such  as  the  Open  Houses,  hosted  by 
the  Office  of  Admissions.  In  concert 
with  the  offices  of  Alumni  Relations 
and  Development,  the  University 
Ambassadors  assist  in  showcasing  the 
University  at  alumni  events  such  as 
Homecoming,  Alumni  Day,  and  class 
reunions.  They  serve  as  liaisons 
between  the  campus  and  community. 
The  West  Chester  University  Emer- 
gency Medical  Services  (EMS)  is  a 
volunteer-run  organization  of  student 
health  professionals  who  enjoy  helping 
people.  A  quick-response  unit  is  main- 
tained to  provide  emergency  medical 
care  to  the  campus  community,  provid- 
ing temporary  emergency  care  24 
hours  a  day  during  the  academic  year. 
The  EMS  also  plays  an  active  role  in 
the  education  of  the  campus  commu- 
nity in  first  aid  and  cardiopulmonary 
resuscitation  (CPR)  techniques.  Neces- 
sary training  is  provided  to  members. 

Greek  Letter  Organizations 

The  University  has  a  system  of  14 
national  fraternities  and  10  national 
sororities,  which  are  listed  on  page  24. 
The  system  is  governed  by  the  Black 


Greek  Council,  the  Interfratemity 
Council,  the  Inter-Greek  Council,  and 
the  Panhellenic  Council.  Since  their 
introduction  in  1969,  the  social  frater- 
nities and  sororities  have  become  an 
integral  part  of  campus  life. 

Publications  and  Media 
Organizations 

The  Quad.  The  student  newspaper  of 
West  Chester  University  is  published 
weekly  by  a  student  staff  with  a  faculty 
member  as  adviser.  In  addition  to  its 
primary  role  in  disseminating  news  of 
campus  events.  The  Quad  also  provides 
students  with  practical  experience  in 
reporting,  editing,  and  photography,  as 
well  as  in  advertising  and  the  business 
side  of  newspaper  publishing.  Students 
interested  in  working  for  The  Quad 
should  contact  the  editor  at  the  news- 
paper office,  436-2793. 
The  Serpentine.  The  yearbook  pro- 
vides a  pictorial  and  written  record  of 
the  year's  activities  at  the  University.  It 
is  edited  by  a  student  staff  with  a  fac- 
ulty adviser.  Positions  on  the  yearbook 
staff  are  always  available  for  incoming 
and  current  students.  The  training  and 
experience  gained  in  photography, 
writing,  layout,  and  administration  is 
useful  in  the  publishing  industry  and 
many  other  careers. 
Station  WCUR.  The  campus  radio  sta- 
tion at  West  Chester  University  offers 
experience  in  all  phjises  of  radio  broad- 
casting, from  on-air  activities,  to  pro- 
duction, to  business  and  advertising. 
Operated  entirely  by  students,  WCUR 
offers  practical  work  opportunities  in  a 
learning  atmosphere.  In  addition  to 
providing  student  members  with  expe- 
rience, WCUR  offers  the  University 
community  a  broad  range  of  music 
styles,  including  progressive  rock,  jazz, 
new  age,  reggae,  and  others,  as  well  as 
the  latest  in  news  from  across  the  cam- 
pus and  the  country. 

Musical  Organizations 

In  conjunction  with  the  regularly 
scheduled  student  and  faculty  recitals, 
the  University  maintains  the  following 
well-developed  musical  organizations 
that  contribute  to  the  wealth  of  fine 
music  on  the  campus. 
Three  University  Bands.  Membership 
in  the  Symphonic  Band,  Concert  Band, 
and  Marching  Band  is  determined  by 
the  student's  qualifications,  regardless 
of  curriculum. 


Chamber  Orchestra.  Membership  in 
this  organization  is  open  to  all  quali- 
fied students. 

Collegium  Musicum.  A  chamber 
ensemble  specializing  in  the  use  of 
authentic  period  instruments  and  per- 
formance techniques  in  the  music  of 
the  Medieval,  Renaissance,  and 
Baroque  eras.  Open  by  audition. 
Wind  Ensemble.  A  band  of  50  to  60 
outstanding  campus  wind  instrumen- 
talists and  percussionists,  the  ensemble 
performs  challenging  music,  with  an 
emphasis  on  contemporary  works. 
Symphony  Orchestra.  Membership  is 
determined  by  the  student's  qualifica- 
tions. 

Instrumental  Ensembles  and  Chamber 
Music  Groups.  Membership  in  these 
groups  is  determined  by  the  student's 
qualifications. 

The  Criterions  and  Statesmen.  Mem- 
bers of  the  University  jazz  bands  are 
selected  by  audition. 

Concert  Choir.  This  mixed  choir  of 
approximately  40  music  students, 
selected  by  audition,  meets  twice  a 
week,  devoting  its  efforts  to  acquiring  a 
fine  technique  of  choral  singing 
through  the  preparation  of  an  exten- 
sive repertoire  for  performance. 
Chamber  Choir.  Members  of  this 
choir,  which  performs  music  of  the 
Renaissance  and  Baroque  periods,  are 
selected  by  audition. 
Masterworks  Chorus.  A  mixed  chorus 
of  music  students.  Open  to  other  mem- 
bers of  the  University  community  by 
audition. 

Opera  Chorus.  The  chorus  is  formed 
through  an  elective  course  devoted  to 
the  training  of  a  choral  group  that  par- 
ticipates in  opera  and  operetta  produc- 
tions. Membership  is  by  audition. 
Phi  Mu  Alpha  Sinfonia.  The  Rho 
Sigma  chapter  of  the  professional 
men's  music  fraternity  was  formed  at 
West  Chester  in  1967.  The  organiza- 
tion seeks  to  advance  the  cause  of 
music  in  America  and  to  foster  the 
welfare  and  brotherhood  of  students  of 
music.  Upon  approval  by  the  brother- 
hood, prospective  members  are  invited 
to  pledge  the  fraternity.  Prospective 
members  must  be  at  least  second 
semester  freshmen. 

Sigma  Alpha  Iota.  The  Epsilon  Epsilon 
chapter  of  this  internationally  incorpo- 
rated, professional  fraternity  for 
women  in  music  was  formed  in  1968. 
The  firatemity  is  dedicated  to  service  in 


Student  Affairs 


the  field  of  music.  Membership,  by 
invitation,  recognizes  scholarship  and 
musicianship.  Members  must  be  in  at 
least  their  second  semester. 
University  Chorale.  A  mixed  chorus 
presenting  a  wide  selection  of  choral 
music.  The  chorale  presents  high- 
school  level  music  as  well  as  more 
advanced  literature.  Open  to  students 
in  other  curricula  through  audition. 
Kappa  Kappa  Psi.  The  band  fraternity, 
Kappa  Kappa  Psi,  was  formed  in  the  fall 
of  1980  to  support  the  band  program. 
KKY  concentrates  on  serving  the  band 
and  School  of  Music  through  fund  rais- 
ing and  service  projects.  Any  member  of 
the  marching  band  or  visual  ensemble 
can  pledge  KKY.  Information  is  posted  in 
Swope  Hall,  the  music  building,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  fall  semester. 
Tau  Beta  Sigma.  The  band  sorority,  Tau 
Beta  Sigma,  was  formed  in  fall  1980  to 
support  the  band  program.  TBS  concen- 
trates on  serving  the  band  and  School 
of  Music  by  means  of  fund  raising  and 
service  projects.  Any  member  of  the 
marching  band  or  visual  ensemble  can 
pledge  TBS.  Information  is  posted  in 
Swope  Hall,  the  music  building,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  fall  semester. 

Honor  Societies 

Alpha  Epsilon.  This  society  is  the  West 
Chester  chapter  of  Omicron  Delta  Epsi- 
lon, an  international  economics  honor 
society,  which  recognizes  high  scholas- 
tic achievement  in  the  field  of  econom- 
ics. Students  must  achieve  a  3.00  aver- 
age and  have  had  1 2  semester  hours  of 
economics  with  a  B  average  to  maintain 
membership  in  the  organization. 
Alpha  Kappa  Delta.  This  international 
honor  society  is  dedicated  to  promot- 
ing interest  in  the  study  of  sociology 
and  sociological  research  that  will  lead 
to  the  improvement  of  the  human  con- 
dition. It  is  open  to  sociology  majors 
and  minors  who  have  completed  four 
sociology  courses  and  have  earned  at 
least  64  semester  hours  of  credit  with  a 
minimum  Grade  Point  Average  of  3.00. 
Alpha  Mu  Gamma.  The  Department  of 
Foreign  Languages  sponsors  a  chapter 
of  this  national  collegiate  foreign  lan- 
guage honor  society,  devoted  to  pro- 
moting the  study  of  foreign  languages 
and  encouraging  cultural  exchange 
with  foreign  students. 
Alpha  Psi  Omega.  This  honorary  fra- 
ternity recognizes  excellence  in  and 
dedication  to  the  theatre  arts.  The 
organization  is  sponsored  by  the 


Department  of  Theatre  Arts,  and  mem- 
bership is  open  to  all  students  regard- 
less of  major. 

Alpha  Upsilon  Alpha.  This  interna- 
tional, specialty  honor  society  repre- 
sents the  field  of  reading  and  language 
arts.  Its  purpose  is  to  recognize  scholar- 
ship, leadership,  and  service  in  the  field 
of  reading  with  emphasis  at  the  under- 
graduate and  graduate  levels.  A  Grade 
Point  Average  of  3.50  is  required. 
Chi  Alpha  Epsilon.  The  Department  of 
Educational  Services  sponsors  this 
honor  society,  founded  at  West  Chester 
University  for  students  admitted  to  the 
Academic  Development  Program.  Its  pri- 
mary purpose  is  to  recognize  academic 
excellence,  promote  unity,  and  foster 
continued  scholarly  accomplishments. 
Eta  Sigma  Gamma.  The  Department  of 
Health  sponsors  the  Beta  Xi  chapter  of 
this  national  professional  honorary  soci- 
ety in  health  science.  Its  purpose  is  to 
elevate  the  standards,  ideals,  competence, 
and  ethics  of  professionally  trained  men 
and  women  in  public  health,  school 
health,  and  environmental  health.  Juniors 
and  seniors  in  these  disciplines  who  have 
demonstrated  high  academic  achievement 
are  eligible  for  membership. 
Gamma  Theta  Upsilon.  The  Gamma 
Eta  chapter  of  this  international,  pro- 
fessional geographical  honorary  society 
was  established  in  1963.  The  organiza- 
tion promotes  professional  interest  in 
geography  and  provides  services  in 
cooperation  with  the  Department  of 
Government  and  Planning. 
Kappa  Delta  Pi.  Kappa  Delta  Pi  is  a 
national  honorary  society  for  junior 
and  senior  students  in  education  who 
excel  in  scholarship,  maintain  high 
personal  standards,  and  are  dedicated 
to  the  teaching  profession. 
Nursing  Honor  Society.  This  honor 
society,  sponsored  by  the  Department 
of  Nursing,  was  chartered  in  1985.  Its 
purposes  are  to  recognize  superior 
achievement,  develop  leadership  quali- 
ties, foster  high  professional  standards, 
encourage  creative  work,  and 
strengthen  commitment  to  the  ideals 
and  purposes  of  the  nursing  profes- 
sion. The  society  is  in  the  process  of 
applying  for  a  charter  chapter  in  Sigma 
Theta  Tau,  the  international  honor 
society  of  nursing. 
Phi  Alpha  Theta.  Organized  in  1968, 
the  Nu  Sigma  chapter  of  this  interna- 
tional honor  society  in  history  is  spon- 
sored by  the  Department  of  History.  Phi 


Alpha  Theta  is  open  to  all  who  have 
completed  12  or  more  semester  hours 
in  history  with  a  minimum  average  of 
3.01  and  have  maintained  at  least  a  3.00 
in  two-thirds  of  their  other  course  work. 
Phi  Delta  Kappa.  This  is  an  interna- 
tional honor  society  in  graduate  educa- 
tion for  men  and  women  who  are 
actively  engaged  in  the  profession  of 
education.  Its  aim  is  to  promote  high 
quality  education  on  all  levels,  particu- 
larly in  publicly  supported  education. 
Results  of  research  are  reported  in  its 
extensive  publications.  The  West  Chester 
University  campus  chapter  includes 
more  than  100  members  from  the  sur- 
rounding area  and  from  the  campus. 
Phi  Epsilon  Kappa.  The  Department  of 
Physical  Education  sponsors  the 
Gamma  Alpha  chapter  of  this  national, 
professional  honor  fraternity  for  stu- 
dents majoring  in  health  and/or  physi- 
cal education.  Phi  Epsilon  Kappa  seeks 
to  advance  the  profession  of  health  and 
physical  education. 
Phi  Sigma  Tau.  The  Department  of 
Philosophy,  sponsors  the  Pennsylvania 
Rho  chapter  of  this  national  honor 
society,  which  recognizes  academic 
excellence  in  philosophy  and  in  gen- 
eral studies.  Membership  is  open  to  all 
students,  regardless  of  major. 
Pi  Gamma  Mu.  This  honor  society  rec- 
ognizes scholarship  in  the  social  sci- 
ences and  encourages  social  service. 
Majors  in  the  social  sciences  who  have 
demonstrated  high  academic  achieve- 
ment may  become  candidates  for  mem- 
bership in  the  Omega  chapter  during 
their  junior  or  senior  years. 
Pi  Kappa  Delta.  A  chapter  of  this 
national  honor  society  for  students  in 
competitive  forensic  activities  was 
established  in  1969.  Pi  Kappa  Delta  is 
an  outgrowth  of  the  Forensic  Society. 
Pi  Kappa  Lambda.  The  primary  objec- 
tives of  this  national  music  honor  soci- 
ety are  the  recognition  and  encourage- 
ment of  a  high  level  of  musical 
achievement  and  academic  scholarship. 
Nominations  and  elections  to  member- 
ship are  the  responsibility  of  the  fac- 
ulty committee  of  the  chapter.  The 
Delta  Sigma  chapter  at  West  Chester 
University  was  established  in  1978. 
Pi  Mu  Epsilon.  This  national  mathe- 
matics society  is  open  to  junior  stu- 
dents who  rank  in  the  upper-third  of 
their  class  and  have  completed  18 
hours  of  mathematics  with  a  minimum 
average  of  3.00.  It  is  also  open  to 


Student  Affairs 


sophomores  who  rank  in  the  top  quar- 
ter of  their  class  and  have  completed 
three  semesters  of  the  calculus 
sequence  with  an  average  of  4.00. 
Pi  Sigma  Alpha.  Organized  in  1983, 
the  Xi  Gamma  chapter  of  Pi  Sigma 
Alpha,  the  national  political  science 
honor  society,  receives  into  member- 
ship students  of  government,  poUtical 
science,  public  administration,  and 
international  relations,  irrespective  of 
their  membership  in  other  honor  soci- 
eties or  organizations,  when  such  stu- 
dents attain  high  standards  of  scholar- 
ship and  academic  distinction  both  in 
political  science  and  in  the  sum  total 
of  their  academic  work. 
Psi  Chi.  A  chapter  of  this  national  honor 
society  in  psychology  is  sponsored  by  the 
Department  of  Psychology.  Membership 
is  by  invitadon,  with  scholarship  as  the 
major  criterion.  Psi  Chi,  under  the  aegis 
of  the  American  Psychological  Associa- 
tion, endeavors  to  advance  the  science  of 
psychology  and  encourages  superior 
scholarship  in  all  academic  fields,  partic- 
ularly in  psychology. 
Sigma  Gamma  Epsilon.  The  Depart- 
ment of  Geology  and  Astronomy  spon- 
sors the  Zeta  Beta  chapter  of  this 
national  honor  society.  The  society  was 
established  to  recognize  scholarship 
and  professionalism  in  the  earth  sci- 
ences. The  Zeta  Beta  chapter  has  as  its 
objectives  the  scholastic  advancement 
of  its  members  and  the  extension  of 
service  to  the  University  and  local 
communities.  Membership  is  open  to 
any  student  who  has  completed  at  least 
12  semester  hours  in  earth  science 
courses  and  has  maintained  a  mini- 
mum 3.00  GPA  in  all  earth  science 
courses  and  an  overall  GPA  of  2.67. 
Sigma  Tau  Delta.  Under  the  sponsor- 
ship of  the  Department  of  English,  a 
chapter  of  Sigma  Tau  Delta,  a  national 
honor  society  for  students  of  English, 
was  established  at  West  Chester  Uni- 
versity in  1977.  The  major  purpose  of 
this  organization  is  to  stimulate  inter- 
est in  all  phases  of  the  study  of  English 
language  and  literature. 

Recreational  Services 

The  Office  of  Recreational  Services 
provides  leisure-time  activities  for  the 
University  community.  Recognizing 
that  the  needs  of  individuals  differ. 
Recreational  Services  provides  activities 
in  six  program  areas. 
The  Intramural  Sports  component 
affords  students,  faculty,  and  staff  the 


opportunity  to  participate  in  individual 
or  team  competitive  activities.  The 
Intramural  Sports  program  promotes 
health,  wellness,  and  physical  fitness, 
as  well  as  encourages  the  worthy  use 
of  leisure.  Regardless  of  ability  level, 
every  individual  can  experience  suc- 
cessful participation  in  a  variety  of 
individual  or  team  athletic  events. 
For  students  who  enjoy  organized  sports 
other  than  varsity  athletics,  the  office 
provides  the  Sports  Club  component. 
This  program  is  provided  for  students 
who  are  either  skilled  athletically  or 
merely  interested  in  participating  in  a 
club  sport  for  sheer  enjoyment  of  the 
activity.  Becoming  a  member  of  a  club 
provides  opportunities  for  instruction, 
coaching,  socialization,  competition,  and 
fun.  Physical  education  majors  receive  a 
sports  credit  through  participation  in  a 
club  program.  Currendy,  West  Chester 
University  provides  nine  Sports  Clubs: 
equestrian,  fencing,  ice  hockey,  karate, 
men's  rugby,  women's  rubgy,  skiing, 
men's  volleyball,  and  water  polo. 
Outdoor  recreational  opportunities  are 
conducted  through  the  Outdoor 
Resource  Center  (ORC).  The  ORC  pro- 
vides a  variety  of  different  trips  and 
one-day  activities  for  students  through- 
out the  year.  We  provide  the  following 
trips  and  activities:  canoeing,  rafting, 
skiing,  camping,  and  spelunking  trips; 
ice  skating  nights;  hiking;  and  horse- 
back riding.  In  addition  to  scheduling 
trips,  the  Outdoor  Resource  Center 
rents  outdoor  recreation  equipment  to 
students,  faculty,  and  staff  for  their  own 
use  or  activities.  The  following  equip- 
ment is  available  for  rental:  canoes, 
backpacking  equipment,  tents,  sleeping 
bags,  camping  equipment,  cross-country 
skis,  and  bicycles.  A  two-week  notice  is 
required  to  rent  any  equipment. 
For  students  who  do  not  wish  to  partici- 
pate in  a  formal  recreational  program,  we 
provide  the  Open  Recreation  component. 
This  component  provides  days,  times, 
and  facilities  in  which  students  may  par- 
ticipate in  an  informal  recreational  activ- 
ity. The  semester  calendar  lists  scheduled 
days  and  times  for  utilizing  the  follow- 
ing: swimming  pools,  weight  rooms, 
indoor  track,  outdoor  tennis  courts,  and 
basketball  gymnasium. 
The  Aerobics  program  is  one  of  our 
most  popular  and  successful  activities. 
Over  800  students,  faculty,  and  staff 
participate  in  21  different  aerobic  ses- 
sions. We  provide  toning  sessions,  low 
and  high  impact  sessions,  and  step  ses- 


sions. We  require  that  all  participants  reg- 
ister for  this  program.  Dates  and  times  are 
listed  on  the  semester  calendar. 
For  more  information  on  any  component 
provided  by  the  Office  of  Recreational 
Semces,  call  436-2131  or  436-3088,  or 
stop  by  Ehinger  Gymnasium,  room  133. 

Intercollegiate  Athletic  Program 

Athletic  activities  are  an  important  part 
of  the  University  experience  —  indeed, 
a  facet  of  education.  The  underlying 
purpose  of  West  Chester's  athletic  pro- 
gram is  the  development  of  enduring 
educational  values.  To  achieve  this,  the 
athletic  programs  provide  a  broad  vari- 
ety of  team  and  individual  sports  for 
women  and  men  students. 
The  women's  intercollegiate  athletic 
programs  include  basketball,  cross- 
country, field  hockey,  gymnastics, 
indoor  track,  lacrosse,  soccer,  Softball, 
swimming  and  diving,  tennis,  track 
and  field,  and  volleyball.  The  men's 
intercollegiate  athletic  programs 
include  baseball,  basketball,  cross- 
country, football,  golf,  indoor  track, 
lacrosse,  soccer,  swimming  and  diving, 
tennis,  and  track  and  field. 
West  Chester  University  is  a  member  of 
the  National  Collegiate  Athletic  Associa- 
tion, Eastern  College  Athletic  Confer- 
ence, Pennsylvania  State  Athletic  Confer- 
ence, and  the  Philadelphia  Association 
for  Intercollegiate  Athletics  for  Women. 
West  Chester's  Health  and  Physical 
Education  Center  and  field  complex, 
Hollinger  Field  House,  and  Farrell  Sta- 
dium afford  excellent  facilities  and 
equipment  for  the  University's  broad 
and  varied  athletic  programs. 

Alumni  Association 

The  West  Chester  University  Alumni 
Association  is  an  organization  of  more 
than  53,000  graduates  of  the  University. 
The  purpose  of  the  Alumni  Association 
is  to  promote  the  interests  of  West 
Chester  University  in  all  areas  of  aca- 
demic, cultural,  and  social  needs,  to 
strengthen  the  Alumni  Association 
through  a  strong  network  of  graduates, 
and  to  increase  the  awareness  of 
alumni  to  the  University's  needs. 
The  Alumni  Association  sponsors  two 
major  events  on  campus  each  year— 
Homecoming  in  the  fall  and  Alumni 
Weekend  in  the  spring.  The  West  Chester 
University  Magazine,  published  quarterly, 
incorporates  RAMPARTS,  providing  all 
alumni  with  information  on  their  class- 
mates and  events  of  interest. 


Academic  Affairs 


West  Chester  University's  undergradu- 
ate programs  include  teaching  certifica- 
tion programs,  local  certificate  pro- 
grams, and  programs  of  study  leading 
to  the  Associate  of  Arts,  Associate  of 
Science,  Bachelor  of  Arts,  Bachelor  of 
Fine  Arts,  Bachelor  of  Music,  Bachelor 
of  Science  in  Education,  Bachelor  of 
Science,  and  Bachelor  of  Science  in 
Nursing.  A  complete  list  of  undergrad- 
uate degree  programs  appears  on  page 
51.  Programs  of  study  at  the  graduate 
level  are  also  available.  These  are  listed 
on  pages  33-34  and  are  described  in 
detail  in  the  Graduate  Catalog. 

Honors  Program 

The  University  provides  to  outstanding 
students  the  opportunity  to  participate 
in  a  challenging  Honors  Program  and 
to  receive  appropriate  recognition 
when  they  complete  the  requirements. 
The  program  comprises  two  tiers:  Hon- 
ors in  General  Education  and  Junior- 
Senior  Honors. 

A  certificate  for  Honors  in  General 
Education  is  awarded  to  a  student  who 
completes  six  of  the  lower-tier  courses. 
These  six  courses  ordinarily  include  at 
least  one  in  the  fine  arts  and  humani- 
ties, one  in  the  natural  sciences  or 
mathematics,  and  one  in  the  social  sci- 
ences. Normally,  not  more  than  one 
course  in  writing  counts  towards  this 
requirement  (usually  English  121)  and 
not  more  than  one  course  in  educa- 
tion. These  honors  courses  are  taken  in 
lieu  of  the  corresponding  general  edu- 
cation courses  required  by  the  Univer- 
sity; they  are  not  additional  require- 
ments. 

Beginning  in  fall  1993  freshmen  in  the 
Honors  Program  will  participate  in  a 
specially  designed,  seven-course  core 
curriculum;  these  courses  usually  will 
carry  General  Education  credit.  Four  of 
these  courses  will  be  offered  in  the 
freshman  year,  and  three  in  the  sopho- 
more year.  Honors  in  General  Educa- 
tion will  be  given  for  these  courses 
with  some  substitutions  also  accepted. 
A  certificate  in  Junior-Senior  Honors  is 
awarded  to  a  student  who  completes 
only  the  upper  tier  of  the  program;  a 
student  who  has  completed  both  tiers 
is  granted  a  certificate  in  University 
Honors.  Requirements  for  the  upper 


tier  consist  of  two  of  the  interdiscipli- 
nary seminars  offered  by  the  program 
itself  and  a  senior  project,  which  is 
usually  done  in  the  student's  major 
field  of  study.  The  seminars  are  usually 
new  each  semester;  recent  topics  have 
included  "Future  Energy  Alternatives," 
"The  Arts  fi-om  1900  to  1920,"  "Death 
and  Dying,"  "Gender,  War,  and  Peace, " 
and  "Elizabethan  England."  Senior 
projects  have  been  of  many  types, 
including  library  research  theses,  com- 
puter programs,  recitals,  and  portfolios 
in  the  arts.  Individual  initiative  is 
encouraged. 

The  program  provides  optional  hous- 
ing in  an  honors  dormitory.  Many 
honors  students,  however,  live  in  other 
campus  dormitories,  in  town,  or  at 
home. 

An  Honors  Council,  which  includes 
both  faculty  and  students,  sets  the  pol- 
icies of  the  program.  A  committee  of 
that  council,  working  with  the  direc- 
tor, determines  the  admission  and 
retention  of  students.  Further  informa- 
tion about  the  Honors  Program  — 
requirements,  offerings,  housing,  and 
the  extracurricular  activities  of  the 
Honors  Student  Association  —  is  avail- 
able fi'om  Dr.  Elizabeth  Larsen,  Direc- 
tor, Honors  Program,  Room  131, 
Francis  Harvey  Green  Library,  West 
Chester  University,  West  Chester,  PA, 
215-436-2996. 

International  Education 

Established  in  1986,  the  Center  for 
International  Programs  is  responsible 
for  coordinating  study  abroad  pro- 
grams, international  faculty  exchanges, 
visitations  by  foreign  scholars,  and 
international  programs  for  the  campus 
and  the  broader  community.  In  addi- 
tion, the  Center  for  International  Pro- 
grams actively  promotes  the  develop- 
ment of  an  international  curriculum, 
facilitates  internships  and  independent 
study  abroad,  and  provides  a  variety  of 
essential  services  for  the  more  than 
300  international  students  from  over 
50  different  nations. 
West  Chester  University  currently 
operates  its  own  study  abroad  pro- 
grams in  the  United  Kingdom  and 
France.  At  the  University  of  Wales  in 
Swansea  and  at  the  University  of  Paul 


Valery  in  Montpellier,  France,  students 
are  encouraged  to  participate  in 
University-sponsored  junior  year 
abroad  programs.  The  University  also 
expects  to  expand  study  abroad  oppor- 
tunities in  the  next  several  years. 
As  expected,  the  Department  of  For- 
eign Languages  contributes  to  the 
development  of  study  abroad  programs 
and  the  internationalization  of  the 
campus.  The  department,  through  its 
highly  acclaimed  Critical  Language 
Program,  regularly  offers  courses  in 
Greek,  Finnish,  Chinese,  Japanese, 
Arabic,  and  several  other  languages,  in 
addition  to  its  regularly  scheduled 
series  of  courses  in  German,  French, 
Spanish,  Italian,  and  Russian. 
Special  summer  study  abroad  opportu- 
nities are  coordinated  through  the 
Center  for  International  Programs. 
These  have  included  classes  in  the  Peo- 
ple's Republic  of  China.  The  Univer- 
sity's Institute  for  British  Studies  cur- 
rendy  offers  summer  courses  at  Oxford 
University,  England,  and  the  School  of 
Music  regularly  offers  a  summer  pro- 
gram in  Salzburg,  Austria.  In  addition, 
the  University  sponsors  a  series  of 
travel-study  programs  to  numerous 
overseas  locations,  including  the 
Galapagos  Islands,  Egypt,  Soviet 
Union,  China,  Kenya,  Australia,  Nepal, 
and  Morocco.  These  programs,  which 
generally  run  from  two  to  three  weeks, 
are  available  to  students  as  well  as  the 
community.  Travel-study  programs  are 
generally  offered  in  the  summer  or  in 
January,  during  the  semester  break. 
International  travel  and  study  opportu- 
nities for  American  and  international 
students  and  for  the  community  are 
expected  to  expand  rapidly  over  the 
next  several  years.  Anyone  interested 
in  taking  advantage  of  study  abroad 
and  travel  opportunities  is  encouraged 
to  contact  the  Center  for  International 
Programs,  102  Old  Library,  for  details 
on  current  program  options,  436-3529. 

National  Student  Exchange 
Program 

West  Chester  is  one  of  approximately 
107  American  colleges  and  universities, 
located  in  such  states  as  Hawaii,  Cali- 
fornia, Alaska,  and  Florida,  which  par- 
ticipates in  the  National  Student 


Academic  Affairs 


Exchange  (NSE)  Program.  The  project 
gives  students  an  opportunity  to  widen 
their  cultural  and  academic  horizons 
through  a  semester  or  a  year  of  study 
in  another  part  of  the  United  States 
without  paying  out-of-state  tuition  fees 
or  incurring  such  complications  as 
credit  transfers.  The  exchange  usually 
takes  place  during  the  sophomore  or 
junior  years  so  that  returning  students 
may  share  their  experiences  with  stu- 
dents on  the  West  Chester  campus.  In 
order  to  qualify  for  the  program,  appli- 
cants must  be  full-time  students  with  a 
2.50  Grade  Point  Average.  The  annual 
recruitment  program  takes  place  dur- 
ing the  fall  semester  and  the  first  part 
of  the  spring  semester,  with  placement 
for  the  following  school  year  occurring 
midway  through  the  spring  semester. 
NSE  information  is  available  at  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar,  E.O.  Bull  Cen- 
ter, 436-3085. 

Pennsylvania  State  System 
Visiting  Student  Program 

Undergraduate  students  enrolled  in  a 
degree  program  who  have  earned  27 
credits  and  are  in  good  academic  stand- 
ing have  the  opponunity  to  enroll  as  a 
visitor  for  a  fall,  spring,  or  summer 
term  at  any  of  the  other  13  Pennsylva- 
nia State  System  of  Higher  Education 
(SSHE)  institutions.  The  program 
allows  students  to  take  advantage  of 
SPECIALIZED  courses,  programs,  or 
experiences  NOT  AVAILABLE  at  the 
home  institution  without  losing 
(home)  institutional  residency.  Ad- 
vance approval  from  both  the  home 
and  the  host  institutions  is  required. 
Visiting  Student  Program  information 
is  available  at  the  Office  of  the  Regis- 
trar, E.  O.  Bull  Center,  436-354L 

Environmental  Programs 

Students  interested  in  pursuing  envi- 
ronmental degree  programs  may 
choose  from  those  identified  below. 
Consult  the  departments  listed  for 
details  on  these  programs. 
Ecology.  Offered  by  the  Department  of 
Biology,  this  program  provides  a  strong 
background  in  field  biology  and  pre- 
pares students  for  careers  as  biologists 
in  environmental  agencies,  industry, 
consulting  firms,  and  similar  organiza- 
tions. 

Environmental  Health  Science.  Offered 
by  the  Department  of  Health,  this  pro- 
gram synthesizes  a  rigorous  scientific 


preparation  with  specialized,  applied 
environmental  courses  on  such  topics 
as  water  and  air  pollution,  hazardous 
wastes,  and  industrial  hygiene  and 
safety.  It  prepares  students  for  careers 
as  environmental  scientists  in  govern- 
ment and  industry. 

Other  nondegree  options  exist  for  stu- 
dents interested  in  environmental 
issues.  Education  majors  may  elect  to 
earn  a  certificate  in  environmental 
education  (see  Department  of  Counse- 
lor, Secondary,  and  Professional  Edu- 
cation), and  geography  majors  may 
emphasize  environmental  planning  as 
part  of  the  B.A.  in  geography  (see 
Department  of  Geography  and  Plan- 
ning). In  addition,  a  wide  range  of 
course  work  for  majors  and  nonmajors 
alike  is  offered  by  the  following  depart- 
ments: Biology;  Chemistry;  Counselor, 
Secondary,  and  Professional  Education; 
Economics;  Geography  and  Planning; 
Geology  and  Astronomy;  Health;  and 
Physics. 

Pre-Professional  Study  and 
Advising 

West  Chester  University  recognizes 
that  some  students  will  select  career 
goals  that  will  require  pursuit  of  aca- 
demic degrees  after  the  baccalaureate, 
either  in  graduate  school  or  at  a  pro- 
fessional school.  Students  with  such 
goals  are  encouraged  to  discuss  them 
with  appropriate  members  of  the  fac- 
ulty. 

Pre-Medical.  Students  interested  in 
graduate  studies  in  one  of  the  health 
professions  (dentistry,  medicine, 
optometry,  or  veterinary  medicine)  are 
encouraged  to  apply  for  admission  to 
the  pre-medical  program,  which  is 
supervised  by  members  of  the  Pre- 
Medical  Committee.  More  information 
about  this  program  can  be  found  under 
the  pre-medical  program  listing  in  the 
section,  "Programs  of  Study  and 
Course  Offerings." 
Pre-Law.  Students  who  are  contem- 
plating going  on  to  law  school  should 
take  part  in  the  pre-law  program  con- 
ducted by  the  University.  Law  schools 
maintain  that,  while  there  is  no  proper 
"pre-law  major,"  students  should 
choose  courses  that  sharpen  their  ana- 
lytical reasoning,  writing,  speaking, 
and  listening  capabilities  in  the 
humanities,  social  sciences,  or  natural 
sciences  (particularly  those  courses 
requiring  research  and  communication 
skills).  Overall  academic  performance 


is  essential;  a  cumulative  average  of  at 
least  3.00  is  required  by  almost  all 
accredited  law  schools. 
Students  interested  in  attending  law 
school  should  contact  Prof.  John  Shea, 
Department  of  Political  Science  and 
director  of  the  pre-law  program  in 
Room  106,  Ruby  Jones  Hall,  early  in 
their  academic  careers.  Students  also 
are  encouraged  to  participate  in  the 
Law  Club. 

Pre-Engineering.  West  Chester  pro- 
vides a  pre-engineering  program  in 
cooperation  with  The  Penns)'lvania 
State  University.  At  the  end  of  five 
years,  a  student  earns  a  B.S.  in  physics 
from  West  Chester  University  and  a 
B.S.  in  engineering  from  The  Pennsyl- 
vania State  University.  Students  nor- 
mally spend  three  years  at  West 
Chester  University  and  two  years  at 
Penn  State  University,  taking  only 
engineering-related  courses.  All  mathe- 
matics, physics,  cognates,  and  general 
education  courses  are  generally  taken 
at  West  Chester  University.  Students 
may  choose  from  14  fields  of  engineer- 
ing listed  in  the  "Physics"  section  of 
this  catalog. 

Pre-Theology.  Pre-seminary  students 
tend  to  major  in  religious  studies 
under  the  auspices  of  the  Department 
of  Philosophy  but  select  courses  from  a 
wide  variety  of  disciplines.  Students 
interested  in  graduate  studies  in  theol- 
ogy and  religious  studies  should  work 
out  their  programs  of  study  with  the 
Department  of  Philosophy. 

Center  for  Academic  Excellence 

The  Center  for  Academic  Excellence 
helps  students  attain  excellence  in 
their  academic  pursuits  through  a  vari- 
ety of  services. 

The  Undeclared  Major  Program  allows 
students  who  have  not  yet  chosen  a 
major  to  explore  their  fields  of  interest 
before  entering  a  degree  program.  Dur- 
ing their  freshman  and  sophomore 
years,  students  are  encouraged  to 
schedule  courses  which  fulfill  the  Gen- 
eral Education  Requirements.  In 
addition  to  the  General  Education 
Requirements,  other  courses  may  be 
scheduled  in  a  wide  range  of  disci- 
plines. Academic  advisers  will  help  the 
students  to  select  and  schedule  appro- 
priate courses. 

Students  should  understand  that  cer- 
tain academic  programs  require  prereq- 
uisites for  further  study.  Completion  of 
such  prerequisites,  if  not  undertaken 


Academic  Affairs 


during  the  period  of  study  as  an  unde- 
clared major,  may  prolong  University 
attendance. 

A  student  may  transfer  into  a  program 
from  undeclared  status  only  if 

1 .  There  is  a  vacancy  in  the  desired 
program, 

2.  The  chairperson  of  that  program 
approves,  and 

3.  A  formal  approved  change  of  curric- 
ulum form  has  been  filed  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar, 

Students  should  inquire  about  program 
vacancies  as  early  as  possible  during 
their  first  year  of  study. 
The  Undeclared  Program  is  adminis- 
tered by  the  Academic  Advising  Center 
located  in  Lawrence  Center,  rooms  105 
and  132. 

The  Academic  Advising  Center  pro- 
vides the  following  services  for  stu- 
dents who  have  not  yet  declared  a 
major: 

Advice  regarding  course  selection 

Assistance  in  establishing 
educational  objectives 

Information  regarding  various 

programs  offered  by  the  University 

Advice  to  students  in  academic 
difficulty 

Referral  to  University  support 
services 

Guidance  in  and  instructions  for 
declaring  a  major 

Interpretation  of  University,  school, 
and  depanment  regulations,  rules, 
and  requirements. 
The  center  also  makes  information 
regarding  University  services  available 
to  late  afternoon  and  evening  students. 
For  more  information  call  436-3505,  or 
visit  rooms  105  and  132,  Lawrence 
Center. 

The  University  Tutoring  Center  offers 
tutoring  free  to  registered  students  at 
the  University.  The  center's  basic  focus 
is  on  assisting  students  not  only  to 
master  course  content,  but  also  to 
become  independent  learners.  Most  of 
the  resources  at  the  center  are  focused 
on  freshmen  and  on  those  students 
enrolled  in  developmental  and  basic 
skills  courses.  Tutoring  is  usually 
offered  in  mathematics,  English,  natu- 
ral sciences,  social  sciences,  and  for- 
eign languages.  Sessions  are  scheduled 
on  an  hourly  basis,  by  appointment 
only,  though  some  drop-in  tutoring  is 
available  in  lower-level  mathematics 
courses.  The  center  is  open  daily  and 
several  evenings  each  week.  Call  436- 


3505  for  more  information  or  visit  the 
center  in  room  105  Lawrence  Center. 
The  Academic  Development  Program 
is  designed  to  provide  an  opportunity 
for  a  college  education  at  West  Chester 
University  to  those  students  who  do 
not  meet  current  admission  require- 
ments but  who  show  a  potential  for 
success  in  college.  Students  admitted 
to  the  program  are  expected  to  take 
advantage  of  the  program  components 
which  have  been  developed  to  enhance 
their  skills  in  reading,  writing,  speak- 
ing, mathematics,  and  critical  thinking, 
as  well  as  to  help  them  in  their  transi- 
tion from  high  school  to  college. 
The  Academic-Development  Program 
comprises  of  a  series  of  required 
courses  supplemented  by  specialized 
tutoring,  counseling,  scheduling,  and 
advising. 

The  program  begins  with  intensive, 
six-week  preparatory  courses  during 
the  summer  which  students  must  com- 
plete to  be  eligible  for  fall  enrollment. 
This  required  course  work  is  credit- 
bearing,  but  credits  earned  for  develop- 
mental courses  in  writing,  mathemat- 
ics, reading,  or  speech  are  not 
applicable  toward  the  accumulation  of 
credits  toward  graduation. 
Students  in  the  program  are  also 
required  to  complete  the  following 
courses:  ENG  120,  ENG  121,  COM 
101,  and  EDR  100,  all  of  which  should 
be  taken  as  soon  as  possible  after  com- 
pletion of  summer  requirements.  All  of 
these  courses  satisfy  University  require- 
ments for  graduation.  Students  will  be 
advised  also  on  the  completion  of  Gen- 
eral Education  Requirements  and,  as 
necessary,  on  the  transition  to  a  major 
course  of  study. 

For  further  information,  please  contact 
Dr.  Peter  T  Kyper,  Director,  Academic 
Development  Program,  105  Lawrence 
Center,  436-3505. 

The  Office  of  Services  for  Students 
with  Disabilities  provides  students  and 
their  families  with  diagnostic  service 
information;  special  course  scheduling; 
adaptive  computer,  cassette  tape,  and 
other  educational  equipment;  assis- 
tance acquiring  Bureau  of  Vocational 
Rehabilitation  (BVR)  financial  support; 
student  support  groups;  and  a  liaison 
to  professors  regarding  classroom 
accommodations  and  other  special 
needs.  Currently,  the  following  build- 
ings are  accessible  to  those  with  physi- 
cal disabilities: 
Main  Hall 


Anderson  Hall 

Francis  Harvey  Green  Library 

Recitation  Hall 

Elsie  O.  Bull  Center 

Ruby  Jones  Hall 

Mitchell  Hall 

McCoy  Center  Classroom  Facility 

Ramsey  Hall 

Schmucker  Science  Center 

South  Campus  Field  House 

Special  Education  Building 

Farrell  Stadium 

Swope  Hall 

Sykes  Union  (from  rear  entrance) 

Sanderson  Hall 

Tyson  Hall 

Goshen  Hall 

Lawrence  Center 

Maintenance  Building 

Hollinger  Field  House 

Ehinger  Gymnasium 

Reynolds  (partial) 

Schmidt  Hall 

Wayne  Hall 

Emil  H.  Messikomer  Hall 
(Office  of  Admissions) 

Philips  Memorial  (Auditorium  and 
first  floor  administrative  offices) 

Exton  Corporate  Center 
For  more  information,  contact  the 
director  of  the  Office  of  Services  for 
Students  with  Disabilities,  253  Francis 
Harvey  Green  Library,  436-2919. 
The  Study  Skills  Project  is  a  one- 
credit,  self-paced,  computer-assisted 
learning  strategies  course  that  helps 
students  gain  proficiency  in  time  man- 
agement as  well  as  study  skills,  such  as 
mastering  a  reading  assignment,  taking 
notes,  and  studying  to  remember.  For 
more  information,  call  Dr.  Mary  Keetz 
at  436-2174. 

The  Writing  Program 

West  Chester  University's  cross- 
disciplinary  Writing  Program  was 
begun  in  1978  as  a  pilot  project 
funded  by  the  National  Endowment  for 
the  Humanities  and  the  Pennsylvania 
State  College  Educational  Trust  Fund 
Building  on  the  skills  developed  in 
English  composition  courses,  the  pro- 
gram is  based  on  the  assumption  that 
writing  is  integral  to  all  academic 
learning  in  liberal  and  professional 
studies.  The  program's  focus  is  there- 
fore not  on  remediation  but  on 
enhancement;  the  University  regards 
writing  as  much  more  than  a  set  of 
basic  language  skills.  The  program  pro- 
vides for: 
(1)  Writing-emphasis  courses  each 

semester  in  traditional  liberal  stud- 


Academic  Affairs 


ies  (for  example,  English  litera- 
ture, history,  anthropology,  sociol- 
ogy, chemistry,  and  physics)  and 
in  professional  studies  (for  exam- 
ple, criminal  justice,  early  child- 
hood education,  nursing,  and  pub- 
lic health) 

(2)  A  general  requirement  that  all  stu- 
dents must  take  three  of  these 
writing-emphasis  courses,  in  addi- 
tion to  English  composition, 
before  their  senior  year 

(3)  In-house  lectures,  seminars,  and 
workshops  on  writing  for  faculty 
members  in  all  disciplines 

The  WCU  Writing  Program  has  been 
recognized  for  its  scope  and  achieve- 
ment by  the  Association  of  American 
Colleges.  It  has  also  sponsored  the 
Pennsylvania  Writing  Project,  an  out- 
reach program  for  teachers  in  local 
schools.  The  Writing  Program  is 
administered  by  a  director  and  a  com- 
mittee of  one  student  and  seven  facult>' 
members  representing  different  fields 
of  study. 

Internships 

A  number  of  depanments  offer  the 
opportunity  for  internships,  field  expe- 
riences, or  practicums  in  which  stu- 
dents may  earn  credit  through  employ- 
ment in  their  field  of  interest. 
Additional  information  is  available 
under  the  various  department  listings 
in  this  catalog  and  firom  the  individual 
departments. 

Three  University-wide  internship 
opportunities  are  open  to  students 
from  any  major:  The  Harrisburg 
Internship  Semester  (THIS)  is  a  full- 
semester,  15-credit  experience  in  Penn- 
sylvania state  government.  It  is  open  to 
any  junior  or  senior  who  has  a  mini- 
mum GPA  of  3.50.  A  stipend  is 
involved.  (See  Depanment  of  Political 
Science,  HBI  400,  401,  402.)  The 
Washington  Center  Internships  are 
15-credit  experiences  with  the  U.S. 
Congress,  Executive  Branch,  interest 
groups  and  lobbies.  The  Pennsylvania 
House  of  Representative  Legislative 
Fellowship  Program,  open  to  all 
junior/senior  students  with  a  minimum 
GPA  of  3.50,  involves  committee  staff 
assignments  in  policy  development  and 
a  stipend.  All  three  programs  are 
administered  by  the  Department  of 
Political  Science. 


Summer  Sessions 

West  Chester  University's  summer  pro- 
gram, among  the  oldest  university- 
sponsored  summer  programs  in  the 
United  States,  has  one  of  the  largest 
enrollments  in  the  State  System  of 
Higher  Education.  More  than  600 
courses,  both  graduate  and  undergrad- 
uate, are  offered,  including  workshops, 
seminars,  and  internships,  as  well  as 
the  usual  classes.  Offerings  are  avail- 
able in  every  department  and  in  inter- 
disciplinary areas. 

Students  from  any  college  or  univer- 
sity, as  well  as  nontraditional  students, 
may  take  courses  for  enjoyment,  per- 
sonal growth,  or  degree  credit.  The 
summer  program  runs  for  12  weeks 
(two,  three-week  sessions  and  one, 
six-week  session),  and  a  student  can 
earn  up  to  12  credits  during  the  sum- 
mer sessions. 

Summer  Session  booklets,  containing 
the  course  schedules  and  registration 
cards,  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office 
of  the  Registrar  (undergraduate)  and 
the  Office  of  Graduate  Studies  and 
Sponsored  Research  (graduate).  For 
more  information  contact  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  at  436-2230  or  the  Office 
of  Graduate  Studies,  436-2943. 

University  College 

The  University  College,  which  was  cre- 
ated in  1985,  focuses  on  the  program- 
matic and  service  needs  of  adult  learn- 
ers. It  works  with  individual  students, 
as  well  as  with  civic,  social,  govern- 
mental, and  corporate  entities  to  iden- 
tify educational  and  training  needs.  It 
responds  to  these  needs  by  offering  a 
varied  program  of  credit  and  non- 
credit  courses,  workshops,  and  semi- 
nars designed  to  meet  the  needs  of 
individual  adults  as  well  as  the  panicu- 
lar  needs  of  business  and  governmental 
organizations.  The  University  College 
is  organized  into  three  centers:  The 
Center  for  Adult,  Evening,  and  Alterna- 
tive Studies;  The  Center  for  Business, 
Industry,  and  Government;  and  The 
Center  for  Community  Education. 
The  Center  for  Adult,  Evening,  and 
Alternative  Studies  coordinates  the 
evening  studies  program  and  all  con- 
tinuing education  credit  courses.  The 
evening  program  offers  basic  courses 
that  meet  the  general  education 
requirements  and  elective  portions  of 
most  four-year  degree  programs.  In 


addition,  students  can  earn  a  bache- 
lor's degree  in  the  evening  in  the  fol- 
lowing areas: 

Accounting 

Chemistry 

Computer  Science 

Criminal  Justice 

Geography  and  Planning 

History 

Liberal  Studies 

Management 

Marketing 

Psychology 
Services  available  to  adult  learners 
include: 

Telephone  Registration 

Academic  Advisin.g 

Tutoring 

Career  Information  and  Guidance 

Daytime  Child  Care 

Personal  and  Family  Counseling 

Financial  Aid 
Many  adult  learners  have  acquired  a 
great  deal  of  knowledge  outside  the 
framework  of  a  formal  institution  of 
higher  education  —  knowledge  which 
may  be  equivalent  to  that  attained  in 
college  courses.  The  Center  for  Adult, 
Evening,  and  Alternative  Studies 
advises  students  on  how  to  earn  col- 
lege credit  for  that  knowledge. 
Available  programs  include: 

Credit  by  Examination 

The  CLEP  Program 

Portfolio  Development  and 
Assessment 
The  Center  for  Adult,  Evening,  and 
Alternative  Studies  coordinates  the  off- 
campus  center  at  Exton,  which  offers 
graduate  and  undergraduate  business, 
liberal  arts,  and  education  courses. 

The  Center  for  Business,  Industry, 
and  Government  (CBIG)  is  an  educa- 
tional resource  office  for  business, 
industry,  and  government.  It  responds 
to  requests  from  the  corporate 
community  for  needs  assessments, 
training  proposals,  referral  services, 
and  more.  It  also  provides  a  variety  of 
services  to  small  businesses,  nonprofit 
organizations,  and  government  agen- 
cies. 

Services  available  to  business,  industry, 
and  government  include: 

"No  charge"  needs  assessments 
Custom-designed  education  and 

training  programs  held  on  site 
Referral  services  for  businesses 

seeking  student  interns,  faculty 

consultants,  job  candidates,  and 

University  information 


Academic  Affairs 


Cosponsorship  of  business  commu- 
nity events 

Short  courses,  seminars,  and  work- 
shops held  on  campus  for  business 
CBIG  can  offer  virtually  any  noncredit 
training  program  requested  in  the 
workplace,  since  it  calls  on  national 
experts  when  University  resources  are 
not  available.  Following  is  a  small  sam- 
ple of  the  broad  selection  of  offerings: 

Management  Skills  for  the  First- 
Time  Supervisor 

Conflict  Management  and  Resolution 

Managing  People 

Communication  Skills  Workshop 

Project  Management 

Finance  and  Accounting  for  the 
Nonfinance  Manager 

Improving  Customer  Service 

Managing  Technical  Organizations 
The  Center  for  Community  Education 
is  responsible  for  all  noncredit  activi- 
ties the  University  offers  to  the  com- 
munity at  large.  The  center  has  a  vari- 
ety of  continuing  education  programs 
for  adults  who  wish  to  continue  their 
education,  but  who  do  not  necessarily 
seek  college  credit.  The  courses,  which 
often  give  students  more  opportunities 
in  the  job  market,  cover  topics  such  as: 

Real  Estate 

Computer  Skills 

Financial  Planning 

Professional  Development 

Family  and  Health  Issues 
The  courses  offered  through  these  cen- 
ters may  carry  undergraduate  or  gradu- 
ate credit,  in-service  credit,  continuing 
education  units,  or  no  credit  at  all. 
The  University  College  also  arranges 
for  the  rental  of  University  facilities  by 
outside  organizations.  Available  areas 
include: 

Classrooms 

Conference  rooms 

Sports  complex 

Training  facilities 
For  information  about  any  of  the  above 
programs,  contact  the  University  Col- 
lege, Room  144,  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center, 
436-3550. 


Veterans  Affairs 

Under  the  provisions  of  Title  38,  West 
Chester  University  is  an  accredited 
university  for  the  education  of  veter- 
ans. The  University  cooperates  with 
the  Veterans  Administration  to  see  that 
honorably  separated  or  discharged  vet- 
erans receive  every  consideration  con- 


sistent with  either  degree  or  nondegree 
admission  standards. 
All  veterans,  certain  dependents  of  dis- 
abled or  deceased  veterans,  and  war 
orphans  who  wish  to  obtain  educational 
benefits  under  the  appropriate  public 
laws  must  register  with  the  ofiRce  of 
Veterans  Afiairs  at  initial  registration. 
Veterans  must  renew  their  registration 
with  this  office  at  the  beginning  of  each 
subsequent  semester  and  each  summer 
session.  The  Veterans  Administration 
requires  students  who  are  veterans  to 
schedule  at  least  12  semester  hours  per 
semester  in  order  to  receive  full  benefits 
under  the  GI  Bill. 
A  representative  of  the  Veterans 
Administration  is  in  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid,  Room  138,  Elsie  O.  Bull 
Center,  counseling  and  acting  as  liai- 
son between  students  and  the  Veterans 
Affairs  Office  in  financial  and  other 
matters. 

Armed  Services  Programs 

Army  Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps 
(ROTC)  is  available  through  a  cross- 
enrollment  agreement  with  Widener 
University.  All  classes  are  conducted 
on  the  campus  of  Widener  University. 
Students  receive  from  1.5  to  3.0  credit 
hours  per  course  (maximum  12  credit 
hours)  towards  their  baccalaureate  pro- 
grams. 

West  Chester  students  also  may  enroll 
in  the  Air  Force  Reserve  Officers' 
Training  Program  (AFROTC)  through 
a  cross-enrollment  agreement  with 
Saint  Joseph's  University.  All  aerospace 
studies  courses  are  held  on  the  Saint 
Joseph's  University  campus. 
The  University,  with  the  approval  of 
the  Council  of  Trustees,  permits  West 
Chester  University  students  enrolled  in 
the  Armed  Services  Reserve  Officer 
Candidate  Program  (ROC)  to  receive 
six  semester  hours  of  baccalaureate 
credit  upon  successful  completion  and 
certification  of  ROC  military  require- 
ments. These  credits  are  classified  as 
free  elective  transfer  credits.  Depending 
on  the  status  of  the  student's  program 
at  the  time  of  ROC  credit  transfer, 
these  credits  will  be  counted  toward, 
or  in  excess  of,  the  128  credits 
required  for  a  baccalaureate  degree. 
ROC  programs  are  contingent  on  suc- 
cessfial  completion  of  a  military  require- 
ment during  vacation  and  the  award  of 
a  college  degree  before  being  granted 
the  service  commission.  The  programs 
cover  the  Navy's  Basic  and  Advanced 


Reserve  Officer  Candidate  courses  (held 
on  the  Villanova  University  campus) 
and  the  Marine  Corps  Junior  and  Senior 
Platoon  Leadership  courses. 

West  Chester  University  students  may 
enroll  in  the  United  States  Marine 
Corps  Platoon  Leaders  Class  as  fresh- 
men, sophomores,  and  juniors.  This 
program  is  open  to  men  and  women. 
All  training  is  done  during  summer 
vacation,  and  reserve  officer  commis- 
sion credits  will  be  counted  upon  suc- 
cessful completion  of  military  require- 
ments and  the  successful  completion  of 
a  University  degree.  Students  interested 
in  the  Platoon  Leaders  Class  should 
contact  the  chair  of  the  Department  of 
Educational  Services  at  West  Chester 
University. 

Graduate  Studies 

West  Chester's  graduate  programs, 
introduced  in  1959,  offer  study  oppor- 
tunities leading  to  Master  of  Education, 
Master  of  Arts,  Master  of  Science  in 
Administration,  Master  of  Business 
Administration,  Master  of  Science,  and 
Master  of  Music  degrees.  West  Chester 
schedules  its  graduate  courses  in  the 
late  afternoon  and  evening  during  the 
fall  and  spring  semesters.  It  is  possible 
to  pursue  full-time  graduate  study  dur- 
ing the  academic  year  and  during  sum- 
mer sessions. 

Administrarion 

M.S.A.  (Concentrations:  Health  Services,  Individ- 
ualized, Leadership  for  Women,  Long-Term 
Care,  Psychology/Personnel,  Public  Adminis- 
tration, Sport  and  Athletic  Administration, 
Training  and  Development,  Urban/Regional 
Planning) 

Cooperative  Certification  in  Administration  with 
Clinical  Chemistry 

Biology 

MA.  Biology 

Business 

M.BA.  (Concentrations:  Accounting,  Economics/ 
Finance,  General  Business,  Management. 
Management  Information  Systems,  Small 
Business  Management) 

Chemistry 

MA.    Physical  Science  (Concentration: 

Chemistry) 
M.Ed.  Chemistry 
M.S.  Chemistry 
MS.     Clinical  Chemistry 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

M.Ed.  Elementary  Education  (Concentrations: 
Creative  Teaching-Learning,  Early  Childhood 
Education,  Elementary  Education,  Gifted 
and  Talented,  Human  Development,  Lan- 
guage Arts,  Reading,  Social  Studies 

Certification  in  Elementary  Education 


Degree  Requirements 


M.Ed.  Reading 

Reading  Specialist  Certification 
Cenificate  of  Adv-anced  Graduate  Study  in  Child- 
hood Studies  and  Reading 

Communication  Studies 

M.A.  Communication  Studies 

Communicative  Disorders 

M.A.  Communicative  Disorders 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 
Professional  Education 

M.Ed.  Elementary  School  Counseling 

M.Ed.  Secondary  School  Counseling 

M.S.  Higher  Education  Counseling 

M.S.  Educational  Research 

Specialist  I  Certificate  in  Counseling  (Elementary 

or  Secondary) 
M.Ed.  Secondary  Education 
Courses  in  Environmental  Education;  Urban 

Education 

Criminal  Justice 

M.S.  Criminal  Justice 

English 

MA.  English 

Foreign  Languages 

MjV       French 
Spanish 


M.A. 

M.Ed. 

M.Ed. 

M.Ed. 

M.Ed. 


French 
German 
Latin 
Spanish 


Geography  and  Planning 

M.A.  Geography 

M.S.  Administration  (Concentration:  Urban/ 
Regional  Planning) 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

MA.  Physical  Science  (Concentration:  Earth  Sci- 
ences) 

Health 

M.Ed.     Health 
M.S.        Health 

M.S.       Administration  (Concentrations:  Health 
Services,  Long-Term  Care) 


History 

MA.       History 
M.Ed.     History 

Instructional  Media 

M.Ed.     Instructional  Media  Education 
M.S.        Iristructional  Media 
Teaching  Certification  for  Instructional  Media 
Education 

Leadership  for  Women 

M.SA.  (Concentration;  Leadership  for  Women) 

Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 

MA.       Mathematics  (Concentrations:  Pure 

Mathematics,  Mathematics  Education) 
M.Ed.     Mathematics 
M.S.       Computer  Science 

Music 

MA.  Music  History  and  Literature 

M.M.  Accompanying 

MM.  Keyboard  Performance 

MM.  Piano  Pedagogy 

M.M.  Instrumental  Performance 

M.M.  Music  Education 

M.M.  Music  Theory  and  Composition 

MM.  Vocal  and  Choral  Performance 

Nursing 

M.S.N.  Community  Health  Nursing 

Philosophy 

MA.  Philosophy 

Physical  Education 

M.S.       Physical  Education 

(Concentrations;  General  Physical  Edu- 
cation, Exercise  and  Sport  Physiology) 

M.SA.    (Concentration:  Sport  and  Athletic 
Administration) 

Physical  Science  (Interdepartmental) 

MA.      Physical  Science  (Concentrations:  Chem- 
istry. Earth  Sciences) 

Political  Science 

M.SA.    (Concentration:  Public  Administration) 


Psychology 

MA.       Clinical  Psychology 

MA.       General  Psychology 

MA.       Industrial'  Organizational  Psychology 

MA.       Group  Psychotherapy/Processes 

(Certification:  Psychodrama) 
M.S.A.    (Concentrations:  Individualized, 

Psychology/Personnel,  Training  and 

Development) 

Public  Administration 

See  Political  Science 

Special  Education 

M.Ed.  Special  Education 
Certification  in  Special  Education 

Teaching  English  as  a  Second 
Language 

MA.  Teaching  English  as  a  Second  Language 

The  foUowng  departments  and 
interdisciplinary  areas  offer  graduate 
courses,  but  no  graduate  degree:  Art, 
Linguistics,  Theatre  Arts,  Women's 
Studies. 

Scholarly  Publications 

College  Literature  is  an  international, 
triannual  journal  of  scholarly  criticism 
dedicated  to  the  needs  of  college/ 
university  teachers  by  providing  them 
with  access  to  innovative  ways  of 
studying  and  teaching  new  bodies  of 
literature  and  experiencing  old  litera- 
tures in  new  ways.  Kostas  Myrsiades  of 
the  Department  of  English  serves  as 
editor. 

Journal  of  the  Hellenic  Diaspora  is  a 
semiannual,  international  scholarly 
review  focusing  on  the  Greek  experi- 
ence of  the  19th  and  20th  centuries, 
published  at  West  Chester  University 
by  Fella  Publishing  Co.  of  New  York. 
Kostas  Myrsiades,  Department  of 
English,  serves  as  editor. 


Degree  Requirements 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE 
BACCALAUREATE  DEGREE 

1.  Satisfactory  completion  of  a  minimum  of  128  semester 
hours  at  or  above  the  100  level,  distributed  as  shown  in 
the  curriculum  for  the  student's  major  field. 

2.  Achievement  of  a  cumulative  Grade  Point  Average  (GPA) 
of  at  least  2.00  (C)  and  an  average  of  at  least  2.00  (C)  in 
the  major  field. 

3.  Attendance  at  West  Chester  University  for  at  least  30 
semester  hours  of  the  degree  program,  normally  the  final 
30  semester  hours  of  the  degree  program. 


4.  Fulfillment  of  any  special  requirements  or  program  com- 
petencies that  are  particular  to  a  department  or  a  school. 

5.  Fulfillment  of  all  financial  obligations  to  the  University, 
including  payment  of  the  graduation  fee,  and  of  all  other 
obligations,  including  the  return  of  University  property. 

6.  Compliance  with  all  academic  requests,  including  filing 
an  application  for  graduation  in  the  Office  of  the  Regis- 
trar. 

NOTES 

All  students  (entering  freshmen  and  transfers)  are  bound  by  the 
catalog  in  the  year  in  which  they  first  enter  for  meeting  general 


Degree  Requirements 


education  requirements.  West  Chester  defines  "enter"  as  the  first 
semester  of  study  as  a  degree  candidate  during  the  fall  or  spring 
semester.  Students  are  bound  by  the  major,  minor,  and  cognate 
requirements  in  the  catalog  at  the  time  they  are  accepted  into 
the  major  or  minor.  If  any  of  the  degree  requirements  change 
while  students  are  matriculating,  they  may,  but  do  not  have  to, 
meet  changed  requirements  after  their  first  semester  of  study  as 
a  declared  major.  In  some  instances,  accrediting  and/or  certifica- 
tion standards  necessitate  the  change  in  major,  minor,  and  cog- 
nate requirements.  In  such  situations,  the  respective  school  or 
college  will  formally  inform  each  student  that  he  or  she  must 
meet  the  new  requirements.  Readmitted  students  are  bound  by 
the  requirements  in  the  major,  minor,  and  cognate  areas  at  the 
time  of  readmission,  except  where  permission  is  granted  by  the 
respective  department. 

Students  are  permitted  to  pursue  dual  majors  under  the  same 
degree  with  the  concurrence  of  the  participating  departments. 
Students  who  do  not  demonstrate  basic  proficiency  in 
English  or  mathematics  may  be  required  to  take  000-level 
courses  as  prerequisites  of  their  degree  programs.  These 
courses  do  nor  count  towards  graduation. 

UNI  101:  The  Student  and  the  University 

A  one-credit  course  in  college  adjustment  and  exploration  is 
taken  as  part  of  the  New  Student  Orientation  Program. 
Graded  on  a  pass/fail  basis,  this  course  is  required  of  all  new 
freshmen  and  of  all  new  transfer  students  who  transfer  fewer 
than  33  credits. 

The  General  Education  Requirements  Common 
to  All  Baccalaureate  Curricula 

A  broad  education  emphasizes  the  enhancement  of  the  basic 
skills  in  English  and  mathematics,  as  well  as  encompasses 
experiences  in  the  humanities,  the  social  and  natural  sci- 
ences, and  the  arts.  At  the  same  time,  it  must  be  versatile 
because  of  the  many  new  courses  and  areas  of  study  that  are 
constantly  becoming  available. 

West  Chester  University's  curriculum  has  been  planned  to 
allow  freedom  of  choice  for  the  student  within  educationally 
sound  limits. 

The  general  education  requirements  that  constitute  the  lib- 
eral arts  core  apply  to  all  fireshmen  entering  West  Chester  in 
June  1980  and  thereafter. 

All  students  should  consult  with  their  advisers  and  their 
departmental  handbooks. 

BACCALAUREATE  GENERAL 
EDUCATION  REQUIREMENTS 

Policy  on  General  Education  Requirements 

Students,  both  those  matriculating  as  freshmen  and  transfer 
students,  who  have  not  completed  the  basic  skills  require- 
ments in  mathematics  and  English  by  the  time  they  have 
earned  64  credits  toward  graduation  must  have  the  permis- 
sion of  the  dean  of  their  school  or  college  (or  his  or  her  de- 
signee) to  schedule  additional  courses.  This  policy  applies  to 
students  entering  in  the  fall  of  1988  and  thereafter. 
A  total  of  50  semester  hours  of  general  education  require- 
ments must  be  completed  for  a  baccalaureate  degree.  Those 
50  credits  are  allocated  among  English  composition,  mathe- 


matics, science,  behavioral  and  social  sciences,  humanities, 
the  arts,  physical  education  or  health,  and  free  electives. 
Credit  requirements  for  each  area  are  provided  in  the  follow- 
ing list.  NOTE;  Except  for  the  nine  free  elective  semester 
hours  under  Category  IV,  courses  taken  to  satisfy  general 
education  requirements  may  not  be  taken  Pass/Fail.  This 
includes  courses  taken  to  satisfy  interdisciplinary  and  writing 
emphasis  general  education  requirements. 
Specific  general  education  courses  may  be  required  by  a 
major  or  minor  program,  but  no  course  may  have  its 
numeric  credits  duplicated  in  any  application.  A  student  may 
use  the  course  from  one  major  to  meet  the  requirements  of 
the  second  major.  In  this  case,  the  adviser  will  work  with 
the  student  to  determine  which  course  (s)  should  be  used  to 
address  any  remaining  credits.  But  in  no  case  may  a  student 
graduate  with  less  than  128  credits.  Students  should  be 
aware  that,  although  general  education  requirements  have 
been  met,  major  degree  requirements  may  necessitate  a  spe- 
cific minimum  performance  level  in  general  education 
courses,  e.g.,  a  grade  of  C-  or  better. 

Examples  of  general  education  courses  which  also  fialfill  pro- 
gram requirements  are:  (1)  ECO  112  is  a  business  and  eco- 
nomics core  requirement  and  also  serves  as  a  second  compo- 
nent in  fulling  a  general  education  requirement;  (2)  BIO  110 
is  a  biology  requirement  and  serves  as  a  general  education 
option. 

Consult  your  major  degree  program  for  guidance. 
I.        Basic  Skills  1 1  semester  hours 

A.  English  Composition  6  semester  hours 
ENG  120,  ENG  121 

Policy  for  placement  in  English  composition 
courses:  Placement  in  the  appropriate  composition 
course  is  determined  by  the  score  on  the  Test  of 
Standard  Written  English  (TSWE).  Students  with 
TSWE  scores  from  58  to  60  are  tentatively  placed 
in  ENG  121;  those  with  scores  from  45  to  57  in 
ENG  120;  those  with  scores  of  44  or  below  in  ENG 
020.  The  Department  of  English  administers  a 
Placement  Confirmation  Essay  during  the  first  week 
of  the  semester  to  confirm  these  placements.  In 
cases  where  the  Placement  Confirmation  Essay  indi- 
cates that  a  student  has  been  misplaced  on  the  basis 
of  the  TSWE,  the  depanment  will  immediately 
transfer  a  student  to  the  appropriate  course.  A  stu- 
dent enrolled  in  ENG  020  must  pass  with  a  grade 
of  C—  or  better  before  he  or  she  enrolls  in  ENG 
120.  Non-native,  English-speaking  students  seeking 
admission  to  ENG  030,  ENG  130,  and  ENG  131 
must  consult  the  English  as  a  Second  Language 
(ESL)  program  staff  for  a  placement  evaluation 
prior  to  registering  for  these  courses.  ENG  130  and 
131  are  comparable  to  ENG  120  and  121  for  non- 
native,  English-speaking  students  only. 
Because  all  students  must  take  and  pass  both  ENG 
120  (130)  and  ENG  121  (131)  to  graduate,  and  no 
substitution  of  other  courses  satisfies  this  require- 
ment, a  student  who  fails  either  of  these  courses 
after  three  attempts  will  be  dismissed  immediately 
followTing  the  third  failure  regardless  of  GPA. 

B.  Mathematics  3  semester  hours 
College-level  mathematics  course  designated  by  the 
student's  major  department. 


Degree  Requirements 


II. 


Policy  for  placement  in  mathematics:  Placement  in 
the  appropriate  mathematics  course  is  determined 
by  the  student's  math  SAT  score  or  performance 
on  the  Mathematics  Placement  Examination 
administered  by  the  Department  of  Mathematics 
and  Computer  Science.  All  entering  freshmen  %vith 
SAT  scores  below  430  must  complete  MAT  000 
with  a  grade  of  C  —  or  better  unless  they  are  an 
early  childhood,  elementary,  or  special  education 
major,  in  which  case  they  take  MAT  001  before 
they  enroll  in  any  other  mathematics  course.  Any 
student,  regardless  of  major,  who  scores  below 
400  on  the  SAT  must  take  MAT  001. 
Students  who  score  below  450  on  the  SAT,  but 
who  take  and  pass  the  departmental  math  place- 
ment test  during  the  summer  orientation,  may 
place  out  of  the  developmental  math  levels  and 
enroll  directly  into  the  college-level  (100)  mathe- 
matics courses. 
C.  Physical  Education  Activity  2  semester  hours 

Students  may,  for  medical  reasons,  petition  to  sub- 
stitute a  health  course  for  the  physical  activity  re- 
quirement. Veterans  are  exempt  from  the  physical 
activity'  requirement.  Only  courses  with  the  PEA 
prefix  meet  the  physical  education  activity  general 
education  requirement  except  for  those  students 
whose  majors  have  obtained  University  approval 
for  PED  courses. 
Distributive  Requirements  27  semester  hours 

(Approved  courses  are  noted  with  a  *  in  the  course 
listings  and  below.)* 

NOTE:  Some  approved  courses  are  two-semester 
courses,  e.g.,  CHE  103-104,  ECO  111-112. 

A.  Science  9  semester  hours 
One  approved  course  in  three  of  the  following 
areas: 

Biology  -  BIO  100  or  BIO  110 

Chemistry  -  CHE  100,  or  CHE  102,  or  CHE 

103-104,  or  CHE  105-106,  or  CHE  107 
Computer  Science  —  CSC  101,  or  CSC  115,  or 

CSC  141 
Earth  Science  -  ESS  101  or  ESS  111 
Physics  -  PHY  100,  or  PHY  130-140, 

or  PHY  170-180 

B.  Behavioral  and  Social  Sciences        9  semester  hours 
One  approved  course  in  each  group  plus  a  third 
course  in  a  discipline  not  previously  selected: 
Group  I 

Anthropology  -  ANT  102  or  ANT  103 
Psychology  -  PSY  100 
Sociology  -  SOC  200  or  SOC  240 
Group  II 

Economics  -  ECO  101  or  ECO  111-112 
Geography  -  GEO  101  or  GEO  103 
Government  -  PSC  100,  or  PSC  121,  or  PSC  213 


'Scudents  may  substitute  an  approved  two-semester,  entry-level  course 
marked  with  a  t  for  a  course  marked  with  a  *.  For  example,  HIS  101-102 
may  be  substituted  for  HIS  100.  Transfer  students  who  have  taken  one-half 
of  a  six-credit  foundation  course  in  a  discipline  may  fulfill  the  appropriate 
distributive  requirement  by  taking  the  other  half  of  this  foundation  course 
at  West  Chester. 


C.  Humanities  9  semester  hours 

One  approved  course  in  each  of  the  following  areas: 
Uterature  -  LIT  165,  CLS  165,  or  CLS  260-261 
History  -  HIS  101  HIS  102,  HIS  150,  or  HIS  151- 
152  (NOTE:  Students  who  took  HIS  100  and  failed 
should  take  HIS  102  for  the  repeat.) 
Philosophy  -  PHI  101  or  PHI  180 
III.     The  Arts  3  semester  hours 

Any  courses  in  the  following  areas:  art,  cinematogra- 
phy, dance,  music,  photography,  and  theatre 
rv.      Free  Electives  9  semester  hours 

Free  electives  are  selected  by  the  student.  They  may  not 
be  used  to  satisfy  major,  core,  cognate,  or  general  educa- 
tion (including  distributive)  requirements. 
All  of  these  free  electives  must  be  at  or  above  the  100 
level. 

All  students  are  encouraged  to  complete  the  above  require- 
ments in  their  first  two  years  at  West  Chester. 

V.  Writing  Emphasis  Courses 

All  students  who  enter  with  fewer  than  40  credits  must 
take  at  least  three  approved  writing  emphasis  courses 
at  West  Chester.  Transfer  students  who  enter  with 
40-70  credits  must  take  two  writing  emphasis  courses. 
Students  who  transfer  more  than  70  credits  must  take 
one  writing  emphasis  course.  ENG  120  and  121  do  not 
count  as  writing  emphasis  courses.  Each  writing 
emphasis  course  may  simultaneously  fulfill  another 
degree  requirement.  Writing  emphasis  courses  may  not 
be  transferred  to  West  Chester. 

VI.  Interdisciplinary  Requirement 

A.  Freshmen  who  entered  the  University  in  fall  1985 
or  later  must  complete  an  approved  interdiscipli- 
nary course.  Transfer  students  who  enter  with  60 
credits  or  more  are  not  required  to  complete  an 
interdisciplinary  course. 

B.  For  students  who  entered  as  freshmen  or  transfers 
between  fall  1985  and  spring  1988,  an  approved 
interdisciplinary  course  may  be  substituted  for  any 
course  in  the  distributive  requirements  or  in  the 
arts  in  the  general  education  requirements. 

HOWEVER 

For  students  who  entered  the  University  beginning 
with  the  1988  fall  semester,  the  process  of  meeting 
the  interdisciplinary  requirement  has  changed. 

C.  The  interdisciplinary  requirement  can  be  fulfilled  at 
one  of  two  levels  —  the  general  education  level  or 
the  upper  level. 

1.  An  approved  general  education  interdisciplinary 
course  (at  the  100-  or  200-level)  may  be  substi- 
tuted for  any  course  in  the  distributive  require- 
ments or  in  the  arts  in  the  general  education 
requirements. 

2.  An  approved  upper-level  interdisciplinary  course 
(at  the  300-  or  400-level)  cannot  be  substituted 
for  general  education  requirements. 

D.  ENG  121,  Effective  Writing  II,  is  a  prerequisite  for 
all  interdisciplinary  requirement  courses. 

E.  Approved  interdisciplinary  courses  are  indicated  by 


Degree  Requirements 


a  pound  sign  (#)  in  the  departmental  course  list- 
ings and  below. 

NOTE:  A  course  may  simultaneously  meet  the  interdiscipli- 
nary and  foreign  culture  cluster  requirements. 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

AMS   200  American  Civilization 

AMS  210  Mass  Media  and  Popular  Culture 

BIO     102  Humans  and  the  Environment 

CLS    201  Classical  Mythology  in  the  20th  Century 

CIS    329  Gender  and  Peace 

CLS    370  Literature,  Medicine,  and  the  Arts 

CLS    371  Law,  Literature,  and  Communication 

ECO  344  American  Economic  Experience 

EFR    220  French  Civilization  (in  English) 

EGE    222  German  Civilization  (in  English) 

EGE    323  Austrian  Civilization,  1848-1938 

E^fV    102  Humans  and  the  Environment 

ERU    209  Soviet  Russian  Culture  (in  English) 

ESP     219  Civilization  of  Spain  (in  English) 

ESP     222  Latin-American  Culture  and  Civilization 

(in  English) 

ESP     324  Puerto  Rican  Language  and  Culture 

ESP     362  Beyond  Columbus 

ESS     102  Humans  and  the  Environment 

GEO   204  Introduction  to  Urban  Studies 

GER   221  German  Civilization  (in  German) 

HIS     302  Modem  India 

HIS     306  Chinese  Civilization 

HIS     308  An  Introduction  to  the  Islamic  World 

HIS     323  Austrian  Civilization 

HIS     329  Gender  and  Peace 

IND    201  Unified  Science  I 

LIN     330  Introduction  to  Meaning 

LIT     162  Literature  of  the  Apocalypse 

LIT     270  Urbanism  and  Modem  Imagination 

LIT     309  Martin  Luther  King 

MHL  201  Form  and  Style  in  the  Arts 

PHI     102  Introduction  to  Religious  Studies 

PHI      1 74  Principles  of  the  Arts 

PHI     330  Introduction  to  Meaning 

PHI     370  Biomedical  Ethics 

PHI     405  Feminist  Theory 

PSC    204  Introduction  to  Urban  Studies 

SCB    210  The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Universe 

SOC    349  Perspectives  on  Mental  Illness 

SSC    200  Introduction  to  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 

SSC    201  Global  Perspectives 

WOS  225  Women  Today  — An  Introduction  to 

Women's  Studies 

WOS  315  Third  World  Women:  Tradition 

and  Change 

WOS  329  Gender  and  Peace 

WOS  405  Feminist  Theory 

NOTE:  These  courses  might  not  be  taught  as  interdiscipli- 
nary courses  every  semester.  Students  should  therefore  check 
the  current  Master  Schedule  for  each  course's  interdiscipli- 
nary status  for  that  semester. 

VII.    Supplementary  General  Education  Requirements 

Students  in  some  programs  have  additional  general 
education  or  cognate  requirements  to  fulfill  in  disci- 
plines related  to  their  major  discipline.  Some  programs 


may  require  a  speech  course.  Students  should  consult 
with  their  major  program  ad\dser  about  the  require- 
ments that  apply  to  them. 

Foreign  Language  and  Culture  Requirements 
for  Bachelor  of  Arts  Degree  Candidates 

A.  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  in  the  following  departments  are 
required  to  complete  the  second  half  of  the  intermediate 
year  of  a  foreign  language: 

Art 

Biology 

English 

Foreign  Languages  (in  a  second  foreign  language) 

Liberal  Studies 

Mathematics 

Physics 
(Freshmen  interested  in  other  B.A.  degree  programs  are  urged 
to  consult  with  their  departmental  advisers  regarding  the  for- 
eign language  requirements  of  the  particular  programs.) 
Students  may  satisfy  the  foreign  language  requirement  by  pre- 
senting evidence  of  preparation  equivalent  to  the  202  level 
either  by  certificate  or  by  examination.  Students  who  are  not 
qualified  to  take  the  202  course  prepare  themselves  by  taking 
the  elementary  (101-102)  and/or  intermediate  (201)  course  or 
courses. 

B.  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  in  other  departments  have  the 
options  of  demonstrating  foreign  language  competence 
through  the  intermediate  level  or  else  demonstrating  for- 
eign language  competence  through  the  Elementary  II 
(102)  level  and  by  taking  three  courses  dealing  with  the 
related  foreign  cultural  area.  Questions  regarding  the  for- 
eign language  requirement  in  these  other  departments 
should  be  addressed  to  their  appropriate  department 
chairpersons.  The  foreign  language  plus  foreign  cultures 
option  is  open  to  freshmen  who  entered  after  May  1980. 

C.  Attention  is  called  to  the  policies  regarding  taking  courses 
out  of  sequence,  pages  40-41.  Testing  and  placement  are 
handled  by  the  Department  of  Foreign  Languages. 

Foreign  Culture  Clusters 

Students  selecting  the  foreign  language  plus  foreign  culture 
option  must  take  three  courses  in  at  least  two  separate  disci- 
plines, except  that  only  one  course  may  be  taken  in  the 
department  or  discipline  in  which  the  student  is  majoring. 
All  three  courses  must  be  selected  from  the  cluster  of 
courses  pertaining  to  the  foreign  culture  area  of  the  language 
studied.  Approved  courses  are  listed  below.  Courses  taken 
for  foreign  cultures  credit  may  not  be  taken  Pass/Fail. 

I.   Classical  Civilization  (Latin  or  Greek) 

Approved  courses:       ARH  382,  ARH  485,  HIS  318, 
HIS  319,  HIS  348,  PHI  270 
II.   France  and  Francophone  Area  (French) 

Approved  courses:       ARH  383,  ARH  385,  EFR  220, 
GEO  303,  HIS  420,  HIS  427, 
HIS  435,  PHI  415,  PSC  342 
III.   Germany  (German) 

Approved  courses:       EGE  222,  EGE  323,  GEO  303, 
HIS  323,  HIS  330,  HIS  420, 
HIS  423,  HIS  435,  PHI  272, 
PHI  273,  PSC  342 


Degree  Requirements 


IV.   Italy  (Italian) 

Approved  courses:       ARH  384,  HIS  426,  PSC  342 
V.   Latin  America  (Spanish  or  Portuguese) 

Approved  courses:       ANT  322,  ANT  362,  CLS  311, 
ESP  219,  ESP  222,  ESP  311, 
ESP  324,  GEO  302,  HIS  315, 
HIS  316,  HIS  317,  PSC  340 
VI.   Russia  and  Eastern  Europe  (Russian  or  an  Eastern 
European  Language) 

Approved  courses:       ARH  405,  ERU  209,  GEO  304, 
HIS  324,  HIS  425,  PSC  246 

NOTE:  A  course  may  simultaneously  meet  the  interdiscipli- 
nary and  culture  cluster  requirements. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  DEGREE  OF 

ASSOCIATE  OF  ARTS 

OR  ASSOCIATE  OF  SCIENCE 

Students  in  the  associate  degree  programs  must  fulfill  the 

following  requirements: 

1 .  Satisfactory  completion  of  a  minimum  of  64  semester 
hours  at  or  above  the  100  level 

2.  Completion  of  the  Associate  of  Arts  or  Associate  of 
Science  General  Education  Component 

3.  Completion  of  an  approved  area  of  concentration 

4.  Achievement  of  a  cumulative  grade  point  average  of  at 
least  2.00  (C)  and  an  average  of  at  least  2.00  (C)  in  the 
area  of  concentration 

5.  Attendance  at  West  Chester  University  for  at  least  30 
semester  hours,  normally  the  last  30  hours,  of  the  degree 
program 

6.  Fulfillment  of  any  special  requirements  or  program  com- 
petencies that  are  particular  to  a  department  or  school 

7.  Fulfillment  of  all  financial  obligations  to  the  University, 
including  payment  of  the  graduation  fee;  and  of  all 
other  obligations,  including  the  return  of  University  prop- 
erty 

8.  Compliance  with  all  academic  requests  including  filing  and 
application  for  graduation  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar 

ASSOCIATE  OF  ARTS  IN 
LIBERAL  STUDIES 

West  Chester  University  offers  an  Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal 
studies  that  can  be  completed  in  two  years  of  full-time  study 
or  the  appropriate  equivalent  of  part-time  study. 
Students  currently  enrolled  in  the  University  who  wish  to 
obtain  an  A.A.  must  declare  their  intention  prior  to  the  com- 
pletion of  50  semester  hours.  A  total  of  64  semester  hours 
must  be  completed  to  earn  this  associate  degree.  The  credits 
are  allocated  among  the  following  areas  of  study: 
The  A.A.  Liberal  Studies  is  being  suspended.  Contact  the 
director  of  Liberal  Studies  for  more  information. 
I.  A.A.  General  Education  Component    38  semester  hours 
A.  THE  PAST  6  semester  hours 

One  course  in  each  of  the  following  disciplines: 
Anthropology  -  ANT  102  or  103 
History  -  HIS  100,  or  HIS  101  and  102 


B.  THE  PRESENT  6  semester  hours 
One  course  in  two  of  the  following  disciplines: 

Economics  -  ECO  101,  or  ECO  111  and  112 
Political  Science/Planning  -  PSC  100,  or  PSC  121, 

or  PSC  213 
Psychology  -  PSY  100 
Sociology  -  SOC  200  or  SOC  240 

C.  THE  IDEAS  OF  CIVILIZATION         6  semester  hours 
One  course  in  each  of  the  following  disciplines: 

Uterature  -  LIT  165,  or  CLS  165,  or  CLS  260  and 

261 
Philosophy  -  PHI  101  or  180 

D.  THE  SCIENCES  6  semester  hours 
One  course  in  two  of  the  following  disciplines: 

Biology  -  BIO  100  or  BIO  110 

Chemistry  -  CHE  100,  or  CHE  102,  or  CHE  103 

and  104,  or  CHE  105  and  106 
Computer  Science  —  CSC  101,  or  CSC  115,  or 

CSC  141 
Earth  Science  (Geology  or  Astronomy)  —  ESS  101 

or  ESS  111 
Physics  -  PHY  100,  or  PHY  130  and  140,  or  PHY 

170  and  180 

E.  THE  ARTS  6  semester  hours 
One  course  in  two  of  the  following  disciplines:  art, 

cinematography,  dance,  music,  photography,  and 
theater 

F.  SKILLS  AREA 

English  Composition*  3  semester  hours 

Mathematics*  3  semester  hours 

Health  or  Physical  Education  2  semester  hours 

II.  Approved  AA.  area  of  concentration  15-21  semester  hours 

III.   Free  electives  5-13  semester  hours 

Approved  Associate  of  Arts  Concentrations 

An  Associate  of  Arts  concentration  generally  consists  of  the 
same  sequence  of  courses  as  a  minor  in  the  subject  when  the 
minor  has  been  approved  as  a  concentration.  See  the  individ- 
ual program  listings  for  specifics. 

The  areas  of  concentrations  approved  for  the  degree  of  Asso- 
ciate of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  include  the  following: 


Anthropology 

Anthropology/Sociology 

Art  History 

Astronomy 

Communication  Studies 

Criminal  Justice 

Developmental  Disabilities 

Earth  Science 

Film  Criticism 

Geology 

History 


Holocaust  Studies 

Literature 

Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 

Philosophy 

Planning  (Geography) 

Political  Science 

Sociology 

Studio  Arts 

Theatre 

Women's  Studies 

Writing 


Students  may  also  develop  an  individualized  concentration  of 
15  to  21  semester  hours  of  courses  selected  under  advise- 
ment. Further  information  about  an  A.A.  in  liberal  studies  is 
available  fi-om  the  Office  of  Liberal  Studies  in  New  Main. 


•On  the  basis  of  proficiency  or  placement  tests,  some  students  may  be 
required  to  take  000-level  courses  in  English  or  mathematics  as  prerequisites 
of  their  degree  programs. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Free  Electives 

In  addition  to  the  requirements  in  the  area  of  concentration, 
candidates  for  the  degree  of  Associate  of  Arts  in  hberal  stud- 
ies have  the  opponunity  to  take  two  or  three  courses  of  their 
own  choosing.  Students  who  contemplate  continuing  in  a 
four-year  program  requiring  competence  in  a  foreign  lan- 
guage are  advised  to  select  courses  that  will  help  them 
achieve  this  competence. 


ASSOCIATE  OF  SCIENCE 

West  Chester  University  offers  the  Associate  of  Science 
degree  in  two  specialized  fields  —  respiratory  therapy  and 
applied  media  technology.  For  detailed  information  on 
these  programs,  see  the  Department  of  Health  (pages  120- 
123)  and  the  Department  of  Instructional  Media  (pages 
114-115). 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


classification  by  University 
Program 

Degree  Candidaces—aW  undergraduates 
admitted  to  a  degree  program  or  to  the 
undeclared  major  by  the  Office  of  Admis- 
sions or  through  approved  internal  trans- 
fer recorded  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 
Nondegree  SfuJents— students  permitted 
to  enroll  part  time  (maximum  nine 
credits)  for  course  work  toward  profes- 
sional development,  personal  growth, 
or  cenification.  Recent  high  school 
graduates  (within  the  previous  two 
years)  are  required  to  meet  the  admis- 
sion standards  of  the  University.  Trans- 
fer students  may  enroll  nondegree  if 
they  have  attempted  less  than  30  cred- 
its and  are  in  good  academic  standing. 
Nondegree  students  may  attempt  a 
maximum  of  18  credits.  Upon  reaching 
18  credits,  students  must  have  a  2.00 
GR\  to  be  eligible  for  admission  to  a 
degree  program  or  to  request  permis- 
sion to  enroll  with  professional  devel- 
opment status. 

Academic  Classification 

The  student's  classification  is  deter- 
mined by  the  number  of  semester 
hours  of  credit  earned  as  follows: 
Freshman      0-31  semester  hours  of 

credit  (inclusive) 
Sophomore    32-63  semester  hours  of 

credit  (inclusive) 
Junior  64-95  semester  hours  of 

credit  (inclusive) 
Senior  96  or  more  semester 

hours  of  credit 
NOTE:  The  cumulative  Grade  Point 
Average  (GR\)  is  computed  from  the 
total  number  of  credits  attempted.  (See 
"Cumulative  Grade  Point  Average,"  page 
43.) 

Academic  Advising 

Under  West  Chester's  advising  pro- 
gram, all  students  have  faculty  advis- 


ers, appointed  through  their  major 
departments,  who  counsel  them  on 
academic  matters  throughout  their 
undergraduate  years.  Students  who 
have  not  yet  declared  a  major  are 
advised  by  the  Academic  Advising  Cen- 
ter in  Lawrence  Center.  The  ultimate 
responsibility  for  satisfying  all  gradua- 
tion requirements  is  the  student's. 

Field  Placement  in  Schools 

West  Chester  University  does  not  place 
students  at  religiously  affiliated  schools 
when  that  placement  results  in  the  stu- 
dent's receiving  academic  credit  (e.g., 
student  teaching).  In  addition,  the 
University  will  make  every  attempt  to 
place  students  first  into  public  (vs. 
private)  schools  for  student  teaching 
and  related  activities.  Further,  students 
will  not  be  assigned  student  teaching 
or  other  related  duties  at  nonsectarian 
private  schools  or  agencies  unless  they 
specifically  request  such  placement. 
Each  request  will  be  considered  indi- 
vidually to  ensure  that  the  private 
entity  does  not  receive  special  benefit 
from  the  arrangement  which  outweighs 
the  benefit  to  the  University  and  its 
students. 

Second  Degrees 

An  individual  may  pursue  a  second 
degree  at  West  Chester  University  after 
earning  the  first  degree  either  at  West 
Chester  or  some  other  institution. 
Such  an  individual  must  apply  for 
admission  through  the  Office  of  Admis- 
sions as  a  transfer  student  and  earn  at 
least  30  hours  on  campus  beyond  the 
requirements  of  the  initial  baccalaure- 
ate program.  All  requirements  for  the 
curriculum  in  which  the  second  degree 
is  earned  must  be  satisfied.  A  given 
course  required  in  both  the  degree  pro- 
grams is  not  repeated  for  the  second 
degree. 


Dual  Degrees 

West  Chester  does  not  permit  a  stu- 
dent to  pursue  two  degrees  simulta- 
neously except  in  the  case  of  the  Asso- 
ciate of  Science  degrees  and  in  the 
five-year  program  in  engineering  in 
cooperation  with  Pennsylvania  State 
University. 

Double  Major 

A  student  may  select  two  majors 
within  the  same  degree.  In  this  case,  a 
student  must  meet  all  of  the  require- 
ments for  both  majors.  The  student 
should  consult  regularly  with  advisers 
firom  both  programs. 

Minor  Fields  of  Study 

Students  may  apply  for  transcript  rec- 
ognition if  they  complete  an  approved 
minor  field  of  study.  To  receive  such 
recognition,  the  student  must  complete 
15  to  21  hours  of  courses  selected  in 
consultation  with  the  minor  program 
adviser.  Also,  beginning  with  students 
entering  in  the  fall  1993  semester,  stu- 
dents must  earn  a  minimum  GPA  of 
2.00  in  courses  taken  for  a  minor  in 
order  to  receive  transcript  recognition 
of  that  minor.  Students  who  have 
enough  flexibility  in  their  major  curric- 
ulum to  fulfill  the  requirements  of  a 
minor  must  fill  out  and  submit  a^ 
Minor  Selection  Application  to  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  To  enroll  in  a 
minor  field  of  study,  students  must 
have  the  permission  of  both  their 
major  and  their  proposed  minor 
departments. 

Minors  available  at  West  Chester  Uni- 
versity include  the  following: 

Accounting 

American  Studies 

Anthropology 

Anthropology/Sociology 

Art  History 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Astronomy 

Athletic  Coaching 

Biology 

Communication  Studies 

Comparative  Literature 

Criminal  Justice 

Dance  (Education/Therapeutic) 

Dance  (Performance) 

Developmental  Disabilities 

Early  Childhood  Education 

Earth  Sciences 

Economics 

Elementary  Education 

Ethnic  Studies 

Film  Criticism 

French 

Geography 

Geography  and  Planning 

Geology 

German 

Health  Science 

History 

Holocaust  Studies 

Instructional  Media 

Italian 

Jazz  Studies 

Journalism 

Latin 

Latin  American  Studies 

Linguistics 

Literature 

Mathematics 

Music 

Organizational  and  Technical 
Writing 

Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 

Philosophy 

Physics 

Political  Science 

Psychology 

Public  Administration 

Religious  Studies 

Russian 

Russian  Studies 

Social  Work 

Sociology 

Spanish 

Studio  Art 

Theatre 

Translation 

Women's  Studies 

Writing 
Specific  course  requirements  may  be 
obtained  from  the  minor  program 
advisers. 

Changing  Majors 

A  student  wishing  to  transfer  from  one 
program  of  study  at  the  University  to 
another  program  must  file  a  Change  of 
Curriculum  form  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  The  student  must  meet  the 


standards  for  admission  to  the  desired 
program  and  must  obtain  written  per- 
mission from  the  department  involved. 
Any  courses  that  were  initially  ac- 
cepted for  transfer  credit  from  another 
college  are  subject  to  re-evaluation  by 
the  department  to  which  the  student 
transfers  internally. 

Student  Class  Load 

A  full-time  class  load  ranges  fi-om  12 
to  18  semester  hours  of  credit.  Credits 
attempted  or  earned  through  the  pro- 
cess of  Credit  by  Examination  are  not 
counted  in  the  student  class  load. 

Overloads 

Students  wishing  to  carry  more  than 
18  credit  hours  per  semester  must 
secure  permission.  Permission  will  not 
be  granted  for  more  than  24  hours. 
The  normal  student  load  for  the  fall 
and  spring  semesters  is  16  hours  per 
semester.  The  normal  student  load  for 
summer  sessions  is  three  hours  for  the 
pre  session,  six  hours  for  the  regular 
session,  and  three  hours  for  the  post 
session.  A  student  will  not  be  allowed 
to  enroll  in  more  than  15  hours  in  any 
one  summer  nor  be  allowed  to  carry 
more  than  one  additional  course  per 
session. 

A  student  should  not  seek  permission 
to  cany  an  overload  if  his  or  her 
cumulative  average  is  below  2.75. 
Permission  for  an  overload  is  granted 
by  the  chairperson  of  the  depanment 
in  which  the  student  is  majoring  and 
the  associate  provost  for  academic 
affairs. 

Adding  a  Course 

Students  may  add  a  course  by  filing  a 
schedule  change  form  in  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  during  the  Drop/Add 
Period.  Students  will  not  be  permitted 
to  add  a  course  after  the  end  of  the 
Add  Period  (sixth  day  of  the  semester). 

Dropping  a  Course 

Students  may  drop  a  course  by  filing  a 
schedule  change  form  in  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  during  the  Drop/Add 
Period,  thereby  receiving  no  grade. 
Students  will  not  be  permitted  to  drop 
a  course  after  the  end  of  the  Drop/Add 
Period  (fifth  day  of  the  semester). 

Withdrawing  From  a  Course 

A  grade  of  W  (Withdraw)  will  be 
entered  on  the  academic  record  of  any 


student  who  withdraws  from  a  course 
between  the  end  of  the  first  week  and 
before  the  end  of  the  fifth  class  week  or 
the  equivalent  in  summer  sessions. 
Students  may  withdraw  from  a  course 
between  the  end  of  the  fifth  class  week 
and  the  end  of  the  tenth  class  week  and 
receive  a  grade  of  WP  (Withdraw  Pass- 
ing) or  WF  (Withdraw  Failing)  from 
their  instructor,  only  if  they  have  a 
compeUing  special  reason  or  emergency. 
A  student  who  is  doing  passing  work 
at  the  time  of  approved  withdrawal 
receives  a  WP,  which  is  not  treated  as 
a  grade.  A  student  who  is  failing 
receives  a  WF,  computed  as  an  F. 
After  the  tenth  week  of  classes,  stu- 
dents will  receive  whatever  grade  the 
professor  assigns  (including  WF  or 
WP)  but  are  not  entitled  to  selectively 
withdraw  from  particular  classes.  How- 
ever, if  the  effective  date  of  official 
withdrawal  is  during  the  last  week  of 
classes,  a  grade  (not  WP  or  WF)  will 
be  assigned  for  that  course. 
STUDENTS  WHO  FAIL  TO  WITH- 
DRAW FROM  OR  DROP  A  COURSE 
OFFICL\LLY  CAN  EXPECT  TO 
RECEIVE  A  GRADE  OF  F  FOR  THE 
COURSE  AND  ARE  FINANCIALLY 
RESPONSIBLE  TO  PAY  FOR  IT 

Withdrawal  From  the 
University 

Students  wishing  to  withdraw  from  the 
University  must  go  to  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  and  follow  the  prescribed  pro- 
cedures. If  illness  or  some  other  emer- 
gency interrupts  the  student's  Univer- 
sity work,  he  or  she  must  notify  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar  at  once.  Unless  a 
student  withdraws  officially,  F  grades 
will  be  recorded  for  unfinished  courses. 

Taking  Courses  Out  of 
Sequence 

Students  may  not  enroll  for  credit  in  a 
more  elementary  course  in  a  sequence 
after  having  satisfactorily  passed  a 
more  advanced  course  in  that 
sequence.  For  example,  a  student  may 
not  enroll  for  credit  in  French  101 
after  having  satisfactorily  passed 
French  201. 

Similarly,  students  who  enroll  in  a 
course  that  requires  less  proficiency 
than  placement  or  proficiency  tests 
indicate  they  possess  may  be  denied 
credit  towards  graduation.  Native 
speakers  of  a  foreign  language  may  not 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


receive  credit  towards  graduation  for 
the  elementary  course  in  that  foreign 
language. 

Pass/Fail  Policy 

1.  All  degree  students  who  are  sopho- 
mores, juniors,  or  seniors  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  at  least  2.00  are 
eligible  to  take  courses  Pass/Fail. 

2.  The  Pass/Fail  privilege  is  limited  to 
one  course  per  semester;  only  free 
electives  may  be  taken  on  a  Pass/ 
Fail  basis.  Free  electives  are  com- 
pleted at  the  choice  of  the  student. 
They  may  not  be  used  to  satisfy 
major,  core,  cognate,  or  general 
education  (including  distributive) 
requirements. 

NOTE;  A  student  may  not  take  an 
interdisciplinary  or  writing  empha- 
sis course  for  Pass/Fail  if  this  course 
is  being  used  to  satisfy  the  general 
education  interdisciplinary  or  writ- 
ing emphasis  requirement. 

3.  A  grade  of  Pass  carries  credit  value 
but  does  not  affect  the  cumulative 
Grade  Point  Average. 

4.  A  grade  of  Fail  is  computed  into 
the  cumulative  Grade  Point  Average. 

5.  After  contracting  for  Pass/Fail,  the 
student  may  not  request  or  accept 
any  grade  other  than  a  P  or  F. 

6.  This  process  must  be  completed  by 
the  end  of  the  eighth  week  of  the 
semester  or  the  equivalent  in  sum- 
mer school.  Forms  are  available  in 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Auditing  Privileges 

Anyone  may  attend  the  University  for 
the  sole  purpose  of  auditing  one  or 
more  courses  by  first  scheduling  for 
the  course,  pacing  the  regular  fee,  and 
then  completing  an  audit  application 
form  available  from  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  Applications  must  be 
returned  by  the  end  of  the  Drop/Add 
Period.  Full-time  students  have  the 
privilege  of  auditing  one  course  per 
semester  without  charge,  provided  they 
obtain  approval  from  the  course 
instructor  and  the  course  does  not  cre- 
ate an  overload  situation.  If  an  over- 
load results,  students  are  assessed  the 
per-credit  rate  for  each  credit  in  excess 
of  18.  Part-time  students  may  audit 
one  course  per  semester,  provided  they 
obtain  the  instructor's  approval,  enroll 
in  the  course  through  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar,  and  pay  the  regular  course 
fee. 


Credit  is  never  given  to  auditors.  After 
the  course  has  commenced,  the  auditor 
status  may  not  be  changed.  The  grade 
of  Audit  (AU)  is  recorded  on  the  stu- 
dent's transcript. 

Credit  by  Examination 

Forms  to  register  for  credit  by  exami- 
nation are  available  from  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar.  A  fee  of  $25  is  charged 
for  each  course.  Credit  by  examination 
is  a  privilege  subject  to  the  following 
conditions: 

1 .  Apphcation  occurs  during  the  Drop/ 
Add  Period. 

2.  The  student  has  a  cumulative  GPA 
of  at  least  2.00. 

3.  The  student  demonstrates  evidence 
of  satisfactory  academic  background 
for  the  course. 

4.  The  student  has  not  already  com- 
pleted a  more  advanced  course  that 
presupposes  knowledge  gained  in 
the  course.  For  example,  credit  by 
examination  cannot  be  given  for 
FRE  101  after  the  student  passed 
FRE  102. 

5.  Credits  attempted  or  earned 
through  the  process  of  credit  by 
examination  are  not  counted  in  the 
student  class  load. 

NOTE:  Students  who  have  taken  a 
course  but  have  not  achieved  a  satis- 
factory grade  may  not  apply  for  credit 
by  examination  for  the  same  course. 

Independent  Study 

Many  departments  offer  an  indepen- 
dent study  course  for  students  with 
demonstrated  ability  and  special  inter- 
ests. This  course  is  appropriate  when  a 
student  has  a  specialized  and  compel- 
ling academic  interest  that  cannot  be 
pursued  within  the  framework  of  a 
regular  course.  The  independent  study 
form  is  available  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar. 

Individualized  Instruction 

Individualized  instruction  is  the  teach- 
ing of  a  regular,  listed  catalog  course 
to  a  single  student.  Individualized 
instruction  is  offered  only  when  the 
University  has  cancelled  or  failed  to 
offer  a  course  according  to  schedule. 
The  individualized  instruction  form  is 
available  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Graduate  Credit 

A  senior  (96  credits  or  more)  pursuing 
a  bachelor's  degree  who  has  an  overall 


Grade  Point  Average  of  3.00,  may,  with 
the  permission  of  the  major  adviser, 
course  professor,  department  chair  of 
the  course,  the  dean  of  graduate  stud- 
ies and  sponsored  research,  and  the 
associate  provost,  enroll  in  up  to  six 
credits  of  graduate-level  course  work. 
The  student  must  be  at  the  senior  level 
with  the  designated  Grade  Point  Aver- 
age at  the  time  the  course  begins. 
If  the  course  is  dual  numbered,  the 
undergraduate  must  take  the 
undergraduate-level  course  and  apply  it 
towards  the  bachelor's  degree.  If  the 
course  is  not  dual  numbered,  but  at 
the  500  level  or  above,  the  course  may 
count  either  as  undergraduate  credit 
towards  the  bachelor's  degree  or  as 
graduate  credit. 

If  the  student  wishes  to  have  the  credits 
count  towards  the  bachelor's  degree,  the 
student  must  submit  a  completed 
"Application  for  an  Undergraduate  Stu- 
dent To  Take  a  Graduate  Course  for 
Undergraduate  Credit."  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  student  wishes  to  have  the 
credits  count  towards  a  graduate  degree, 
he  or  she  must  submit  a  completed 
"Application  for  an  Undergraduate  Stu- 
dent To  Take  a  Graduate  Course  for 
Graduate  Credit."  Both  forms  are  avail- 
able in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  To 
receive  graduate-level  credit,  the  student 
also  must  submit  a  properly  completed 
and  approved  Graduate  School  Admis- 
sions Form  to  the  Office  of  Graduate 
Studies  before  completing  the  appropri- 
ate form. 

Individual  departments  have  the  right 
to  implement  more  stringent  academic 
standards  for  courses  within  their 
departments.  Any  student  not  meeting 
University  or  departmental  standards 
when  the  appropriate  semester  begins 
will  not  be  permitted  to  enroll. 
If  a  course  is  taken  for  undergraduate 
credit,  no  additional  fees  will  be 
required.  If  a  course  is  taken  for  gradu- 
ate credit,  the  student  must  pay  gradu- 
ate tuition  and  applicable  fees  for  that 
course.  A  student  not  carrying  12  hours 
of  undergraduate  credits  will  be  charged 
at  the  appropriate  hourly  tuition  rates 
for  both  the  undergraduate  and  gradu- 
ate credits.  All  other  fees  will  be 
charged  at  the  undergraduate  level. 
No  more  than  six  credits  taken  under 
this  policy  may  be  applied  to  the  mas- 
ter's degree.  Students  may  not  elect  to 
change  between  undergraduate  and 
graduate  credit  after  the  term  or 
semester  has  begun. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Student  Absence  (Cut)  Policy  Student-Athlete  Absence  Policy 


The  student  absence  policy  is  a  gradu- 
ated policy  providing  leniency  to  stu- 
dents (primarily  juniors  and  seniors) 
enrolled  in  300-  and  400-level  courses 
and  restrictions  to  freshmen  and  soph- 
omores in  000-,  100-,  and  200-level 
courses.  The  absence  policy  holds  that 
satisfactory  proficiency  in  course  work 
is  the  student's  responsibility,  as  is 
class  attendance,  but  recognizes  the 
imponance  of  the  professor  in  the  edu- 
cational process. 

The  policy  is  administered  at  the 
student-facult)'  level. 
A  student  enrolled  in  a  000-level 
course  is  not  permitted  any  unexcused 
absences. 

A  student  enrolled  in  a  100-level 
course  is  permitted  to  be  absent  three 
times  or  the  equivalent  for  courses  that 
meet  less  than  three  times  a  week. 
A  student  enrolled  in  a  200-level 
course  is  permitted  to  be  absent  six 
times  or  the  equivalent  for  courses  that 
meet  less  than  three  times  a  week. 
A  student  enrolled  in  a  300-level 
course  is  permitted  to  be  absent  nine 
times  or  the  equivalent  for  courses  that 
meet  less  than  three  times  a  week. 
A  student  enrolled  in  a  400-level  course 
has  no  specific  restrictions.  This  privi- 
lege is  given  to  upperclass  students 
because  of  the  greater  amount  of  indi- 
vidual research  that  is  expected  at  the 
advanced  level.  An  upperclass  student 
taking  a  lower-level  course  must  follow 
the  absence  policy  of  that  course. 
In  the  event  that  the  student  exceeds 
the  number  of  cuts  allowed  for  a 
course,  the  professor  is  permitted  to 
lower  the  final  letter  grade  for  the 
course  by  one  letter  grade,  or  ask  the 
student  to  withdraw  from  the  course 
and  assign  a  WP  or  WF. 
This  policy  does  not  deal  with  special 
circumstances,  such  as  preparation  and 
performance  in  music,  theater,  athlet- 
ics, and  laboratories,  or  professional 
duties,  such  as  practice  teaching. 
Absences  from  these  courses  and 
duties  must  be  considered  on  an  indi- 
vidual basis  by  the  department  and 
professor  responsible  for  the  actual 
event  or  duty. 

On  days  of  an  announced  quiz,  test,  or 
examination,  no  absences  are  permitted 
at  any  course  level. 


Responsibility  for  meeting  academic 
requirements  rests  with  the  student 
athlete.  Initially,  the  student  is 
expected,  where  possible,  to  schedule 
classes  on  day's  and  at  hours  that  do 
not  conflict  with  athletic  schedules. 
However,  if  intercollegiate  sports 
events  unavoidably  necessitate  class 
absences,  the  student-athlete  muse 
make  the  following  preparations  and 
arrangements  with  professors  to  be 
excused  from  class  for  competition. 

1.  Student-athletes  are  expected  to 
notify  their  professors  as  soon  as 
they  know  they  will  be  missing  class 
due  to  an  athletic  contest. 

a.  In  most  cases,  this  can  be  done 
as  soon  as  the  student-athlete 
receives  the  game  schedule  and 
departure  times  for  away  games 
and  the  times  for  home  games 
are  identified.  The  only  excep- 
tion is  for  rescheduled  games.  In 
that  event,  the  student-athlete  is 
required  to  notify  the  professor 
of  a  pending  class  absence  as 
soon  as  the  game  has  been 
rescheduled. 

b.  This  communication  is  to  be 
made  in  writing  by  using  the 
courtesy  absence  form  provided 
by  the  Department  of  Athletics. 

2.  Athletes  are  expected  to  complete 
the  work  required  for  each  class 
and  turn  in  assignments  due  on 
game  days  prior  to  their  due  dates 
unless  other  arrangements  are  made 
with  the  professor. 

3.  If  a  scheduled  contest  is  postponed 
or  cancelled,  the  student  is  expected 
to  go  to  class. 

4.  If  a  test  is  scheduled  on  a  game 
day,  the  student-athlete  will  make 
arrangements  with  the  professor  to 
make  up  the  test. 

5.  Athletes  are  not  excused  from 
classes  for  practice  or  training  room 
treatment  on  nongame  days. 

6.  If  a  student-athlete  reaches  or 
exceeds  the  permissible  number  of 
absences  under  the  University  "Stu- 
dent Absence  Policy "  for  any  course 
while  representing  the  University  in 
athletic  contests,  then  he  or  she  will 
not  be  permitted  to  have  additional 
absences  for  any  other  reasons, 
except  in  cases  of  extreme  emergen- 
cies. 

7.  If  the  student-athletes  follow  these 
procedures,  it  is  hoped  that  their 


professors  will  cooperate  with  the 
Department  of  Athletics  and  its  pro- 
grams and  permit  absences  required 
by  competitive  athletic  events. 

Exemption  from  Final 
Examinations 

Students  who  have  attained  an  A  or  B 
prior  to  the  finals,  have  completed  all 
other  course  requirements,  and  have 
the  instructors'  permission  may  waive 
final  examinations.  This  privilege  is 
subject  to  several  reservations. 

1 .  Any  unit  examinations  given  during 
the  final  examination  period  are  not 
subject  to  this  policy. 

2.  Academic  departments  as  well  as 
faculty  may  adopt  a  policy  exclud- 
ing the  final  examination  exemption 
for  certain  courses. 

3.  Mutual  agreement  between  the  in- 
structor and  the  student  to  waive  the 
final  examination  should  be  deter- 
mined during  the  week  prior  to  the 
beginning  of  the  examination  period. 

The  course  grade  will  be  the  A  or  B 
earned  exclusive  of  a  final  examination 
grade. 

Grade  Reports 

After  each  semester,  a  report  of  each 
student's  semester  grades  is  mailed  to 
the  student's  home  address. 

Grading  System 


Quality 

Percentage 

Grade 

Points 

Equivalents 

IntewTetation 
Excellent 

A  + 

433 

97  or  above 

A 

4.00 

93-96 

A- 

3.67 

90-92 

B  + 

3.33 

87-89 

Superior 

B 

3.00 

83-86 

B- 

267 

80-82 

C  + 

2.33 

77-79 

Average 

C 

2.00 

73-76 

c- 

1.67 

70-72 

D  + 

1J3 

67-69 

Below  Average 

D 

1.00 

63-66 

D- 

0.67 

60-62 

F 

0. 

59  or  lower 

Failure 

NG 

No  Grade 

W 

Withdrawal 

WF 

0. 

59  or  lower 

Withdrawal 

Failing 

Withdrawal 

WP 

Passing 

Y 

Adminisnative 
Withdrawal 

AU 

Audit 

NG  (No  Grade):  given  when  a  student 
fails  to  complete  course  requirements 
by  the  end  of  a  semester.  See  "Grade 
Changes." 

"W  (Withdrawal):  given  when  a  student 
withdraws  from  a  course  between  the 
end  of  the  first  and  the  end  of  the  fifth 
class  week  of  the  semester  or  the 
equivalent  in  summer  sessions  (efifec- 
rive  September  1980). 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


WP  and  WF:  See  "Withdrawing  From 
a  Course,"  page  40. 
Y  (Administrative  Withdrawal):  given 
under  appeal  when  there  is  documen- 
tation that  the  student  never,  in  fact, 
attended  class.  No  refunds  are  associ- 
ated with  this  grade. 

Cumulative  Grade  Point  Average 

The  cumulative  Grade  Point  Average 
(GPA),  sometimes  called  the  cumula- 
tive index,  is  determined  by  dividing 
the  total  quality  points  earned  by  the 
total  credit  hours  attempted.  The  fol- 
lowing example  is  based  on  a  single 
semester: 


Quality 

Quality 

Points 

Points 

Semester 

for 

for 

Hout^ 

Grade 

Grade 

Course 

1st  subjcci 
2nd  suDject 

A 

4 

4x4- 

16 

B 

3 

3x3  - 

9 

3rd  subjeci 

C 

2 

2x3  - 

6 

4th  subject 

D 

1 

1x3- 

3 

5th  subject 

Ts" 

F 

0 

0x2  - 

0 
34 

34  divided  by  15  equals  a  GPA  of  2.27 

All  grades  received  during  a  student's 

enrollment  (except  the  grades  of  WP, 

P,  and  NG,  and  except  when  a  second 

attempt  produces  a  higher  course 

grade)  are  included  in  the  cumulative 

GPA.  Grades  from  other  colleges  are 

excluded. 

If  a  student  repeats  a  course,  in  an 

effort  to  improve  an  F,  D,  C,  or  B 

grade,  he  or  she  must  file  a  Grade 

Replacement  Form  in  the  Office  of  the 

Registrar. 

Once  graduated,  a  student's  grades  and 

GPA  cannot  change. 

Grade  Changes 

A  grade  awarded  other  than  NG  is 
final.  Final  grades  can  be  changed  only 
when  there  is  a  bona  fide  clerical  error. 
ANY  INACCURATE  FINAL  GRADE 
MUST  BE  REPORTED  IN  WRITING 
TO  THE  PROFESSOR  BEFORE  THE 
END  OF  THE  FOURTH  CALENDAR 
WEEK  OF  THE  FOLLOWING  SEMES- 
TER. 

NG  (No  Grade)  is  given  when  a  stu- 
dent fails  to  complete  course  require- 
ments by  the  end  of  a  semester.  If  the 
student  did  not  complete  course 
requirements  because  of  a  valid  reason, 
such  as  a  serious  illness  or  death  in  the 
family,  the  student  may  be  granted 
permission  by  the  professor  to  com- 
plete the  requirement  within  the  first 
nine  weeks  of  the  next  semester. 
A  GRADE  OF  NG  IS  CHANGED  TO 
AN  F  AUTOMATICALLY  IF  THE 


REQUIREMENTS  HAVE  NOT  BEEN 
COMPLETED  BY  THE  END  OF  THE 
NINTH  WEEK  OF  THE  FOLLOWING 
SEMESTER.  (The  instructor  must  file 
a  change  of  an  NG  grade  in  the  Office 
of  the  Registrar  by  the  middle  of  the 
tenth  week  of  the  semester.) 
A  graduating  senior  has  only  30  calen- 
dar days  after  the  end  of  the  term  in 
which  he  or  she  intends  to  graduate  to 
complete  all  degree  requirements, 
including  the  removal  of  NG. 

Grade  Appeals 

Scope  of  the  Policy 

The  Grade  Appeals  Policy  applies  only 
to  questions  of  student  evaluation. 
Since  appeals  involve  questions  of 
judgment,  the  Grade  Appeals  Board 
will  not  recommend  that  a  grade  be 
revised  in  the  student's  favor  unless 
there  is  clear  evidence  that  the  original 
grade  was  based  upon  prejudiced  or 
capricious  judgment,  or  was  inconsis- 
tent with  official  University  policy.  In 
the  case  where  the  grade  was  based  on 
a  charge  of  cheating,  the  Board,  if  it 
upholds  the  charge,  will  recommend  a 
failing  grade  or  expulsion  from  the 
University.  Cheating  includes  but  is 
not  limited  to: 

1.  Plagiarism,  that  is,  copying 
another's  work  or  portions 
thereof  and/or  using  ideas  and 
concepts  of  another  and  present- 
ing them  as  one's  own  vnthout 
giving  proper  credit  to  the 
source; 

2.  Submitting  work  that  has  been 
prepared  by  another  person; 

3.  Using  books  or  other  materials 
without  authorization  while  tak- 
ing examinations; 

4.  Taking  an  examination  for 
another  person,  or  allowing 
another  person  to  take  an  exami- 
nation in  one's  place; 

5.  Copying  from  another's  paper 
during  an  examination  or  allow- 
ing another  person  to  copy  from 
one's  own  and/or 

6.  Unauthorized  access  to  an  exami- 
nation prior  to  administration. 

Procedure 

1 .  (a)  A  student  must  initiate  an 

appeal  in  writing  within  20  class 
days  from  the  date  of  the  deci- 
sion or  action  in  question.  In 
case  of  an  appeal  of  a  final 


grade,  the  appeal  must  be  filed 
no  later  than  the  first  20  class 
days  of  the  term  following  the 
one  in  which  the  grade  was 
received.  This  written  appeal 
should  be  sent  to  the  instructor 
who  awarded  the  grade  in  ques- 
tion. The  appeal  shall  be 
received  by  the  student  and  the 
faculty  members.  They  shall 
mutually  attempt  to  resolve  the 
appeal  within  five  class  days 
from  the  receipt, 
(b)  If  the  appeal  is  bsised  on  an 
interpretation  of  departmental 
or  University  policy,  the  stu- 
dent's academic  adviser  also 
may  be  present  during  the 
review  process.  In  such  case, 
there  shall  also  be  a  limit  of  five 
class  days  in  which  to  resolve 
the  appeal. 

2.  An  appeal  not  resolved  at  Step  1 
shall  be  referred  in  writing  by  the 
student  within  five  class  days  after 
the  completion  of  Step  1  to  the 
chairperson  of  the  department  of 
which  the  course  in  question  is  a 
part.  If  there  is  a  departmental 
appeals  committee,  the  problem 
shall  be  referred  directly  to  it.  The 
department  chairperson  or  the 
departmental  appeals  committee 
shall  normally  submit  a  written 
response  to  the  student  within  10 
class  days  following  receipt  of  the 
written  statement  of  the  problem.  A 
copy  of  this  response  shall  also  be 
provided  to  the  instructor. 

3.  If  no  mutually  satisfactory  decision 
has  been  reached  at  Step  2,  the  stu- 
dent may  submit  a  written  appeal  to 
the  dean  of  the  college  or  school  in 
which  the  problem  originated.  Such 
an  appeal  shall  be  made  within  five 
class  days  following  the  receipt  of 
the  vmtten  response  of  the  depart- 
ment chairperson  or  the  departmen- 
tal appeals  committee.  The  dean 
shall  investigate  the  problem  as  pre- 
sented in  the  vmtten  documenta- 
tion, review  the  recommendation 
and  provide,  in  writing,  a  proposal 
for  the  solution  of  the  problem 
wdthin  10  class  days  following  its 
referral. 

4.  If  the  problem  is  not  mutually 
resolved  by  Step  3,  the  student  may 
file  an  appeal  with  the  Grade 
Appeals  Board  within  five  class  days 
of  the  receipt  of  the  written  pro- 
posal from  the  dean.  The  request 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


for  an  appeal  must  be  submitted  to 
the  associate  provost  or,  if  appropri- 
ate, to  the  dean  of  graduate  studies 
who  will  convene  the  Grade 
Appeals  Board  as  soon  as  possible, 
but  no  later  than  15  class  days  after 
the  receipt  of  the  written  request. 

Grade  Appeals  Board 

1.   Membership 

A.  The  associate  provost  (or,  if 
appropriate,  the  dean  of  gradu- 
ate studies)  serves  as  nonvoting 
chairperson.  If  the  associate  pro- 
vost is  not  available  to  serve,  the 
administration  will  appoint  a 
substitute  mutually  acceptable  to 
the  student  and  the  Association 
of  Pennsylvania  State  College 
and  University  Faculties 
(APSCUF). 

B.  A  faculty  dean  not  involved  in 
the  appeals  process.  A  substitute 
may  be  appointed  as  given  in 
"A"  above. 

C.  Two  faculty  members.  At  the 
beginning  of  each  academic 
year,  the  Office  of  the  Associate 
Provost  shall  randomly  select 
two  full-time  faculty  from  each 
academic  department  in  order  to 
constitute  the  pool.  Two  faculty 
members  from  different  depart- 
ments will  be  selected  randomly 
from  this  pool  for  each  Appeals 
Board. 

D.  Two  undergraduate  students  or, 
if  appropriate,  two  graduate  stu- 
dents appointed  by  the  presi- 
dent of  the  Student  Government 
Association  (SGA). 

2.  Attendance 

A.  The  faculty  member  involved 
may  be  assisted  by  an  adviser,  an 
APSCUF  representative,  or  the 
chairperson  of  the  department  in 
which  the  problem  originated. 

B.  The  student  involved  may  be 
assisted  by  an  adviser.  The 
adviser  may  be  another  student, 
an  administrator,  or  a  faculty 
member. 

C.  Such  witnesses  as  are  called  on 
behalf  of  either  the  faculty 
member  or  the  student. 

D.  Resource  persons  or  expert  wit- 
nesses called  at  the  request  of 
the  board.  In  the  event  that  the 
decision  making  involves 
knowledge  of  the  discipline,  the 
board  shall  be  required  to  uti- 


lize at  least  one  resource  person 
from  the  discipline,  an  expert 
adviser(s)  to  aid  them  in  their 
decision  making. 
3.  Procedure 

A.  Preparation  for  the  Hearing  — 
All  parties  must  be  informed  of 
the  complaint  in  writing  by  the 
chairperson  of  the  Grade  Appeals 
Board  fliereafter  referred  to  as 
"chairperson"),  normally  within 
five  class  days  after  the  receipt  of 
the  complaint.  Copies  of  docu- 
ments and  correspondence  filed 
with  respect  to  the  complaint 
shall  be  provided  to  the  inter- 
ested parties  through  the  chair- 
person. Thereafter,  neither  new 
evidence  nor  new  charges  shall 
be  introduced  before  the  board. 
The  chairperson  shall  notify  in 
writing  the  interested  parties  of 
the  exact  time  and  place  of  the 
hearing  and  shall  provide  exist- 
ing University  and/or  Common- 
wealth policies  relevant  to  the 
appeal  at  least  five  class  days 
before  the  beginning  of  the  pro- 
ceedings. Throughout  these  pro- 
ceedings, the  burden  of  proof 
rests  upon  the  person  bringing 
the  appeal. 

B.  Hearing  Procedure  -  During 
the  hearing,  both  the  faculty 
member  and  the  student  shall  be 
accorded  ample  time  for  state- 
ments, testimony  of  witnesses, 
and  presentation  of  documents. 

C.  Decision  of  the  Appeals  Board 

1.  The  Grade  Appeals  Board 
shall  deliberate  in  executive 
session  and  render  a  decision 
by  majority  vote  within  three 
days  of  the  close  of  the  hear- 
ing. The  chairperson  may 
participate  in  these  delibera- 
tions but  not  vote. 

2.  The  chairperson  shall  notify, 
in  writing,  the  student,  the 
faculty  member,  and  the 
department  in  which  the 
course  in  question  is  located 
of  the  decision  within  three 
class  days  of  the  board's  final 
action.  The  notification  shall 
include  the  basis  upon  which 
the  decision  was  reached. 

4.  Otiier 

A.  A  written  statement  of  the  deci- 
sion and  relevant  materials  shall 
be  placed  in  the  student's  aca- 
demic file. 


B.  A  written  statement  of  the  deci- 
sion and  relevant  materiab  shall 
be  placed  in  the  faculty  mem- 
ber's file  subject  to  the  provi- 
sions of  official  Commonwealth 
policy  governing  personnel  files. 

Notes 

1.  Both  faculty  member  and  student 
are  entided  to  the  right  of  challenge 
for  cause  of  any  member  of  the 
depanment  committee  (if  used)  and 
the  Grade  Appeals  Board  except  the 
chairperson.  In  the  case  of  chal- 
lenge at  the  Appeals  Board  level, 
the  chairperson  shall  adjudicate  the 
challenge.  One  challenge  at  each 
level  is  permitted. 

2.  A  "class  day"  is  defined  as  any  day 
when  classes  are  officially  in  session 
at  West  Chester  University. 

3.  If  the  course  in  which  the  grade 
dispute  occurred  is  offered  under 
the  auspices  of  a  unit  of  the  Univer- 
sity other  than  an  academic  depart- 
ment, the  program  director/ 
coordinator,  head  of  that  unit, 
and/or  the  department  chairperson 
will  function  in  Step  2  of  the  proce- 
dure. In  Step  3,  the  appeal  should 
then  be  made  to  the  associate  pro- 
vost rather  than  the  dean  of  the 
college/school. 

4.  If  the  professor  is  not  on  contract 
or  in  residence  on  the  campus,  he 
or  she  shall  have  the  right  to  defer 
the  procedure  until  his  or  her 
return.  Similarly,  if  the  procedure 
would  normally  occur  during  the 
summer  and  the  student  is  not 
enrolled  in  any  summer  session,  the 
procedure  may  be  deferred  until  the 
fall  semester  at  the  student's 
request. 

Dean's  list 

The  names  of  degree-seeking  students 
who  complete  12  or  more  hours  and 
achieve  a  semester  GPA  of  3.67  or  bet- 
ter are  placed  on  the  Dean's  List, 
which  is  published  at  the  close  of  each 
semester.  Nondegree  students  who 
complete  a  minimum  of  nine  credits, 
have  a  GPA  of  3.67,  and  no  grade 
below  a  "B"  in  die  semester  also  will 
be  recognized  on  the  Dean's  List.  Stu- 
dents who  do  not  want  to  have  their 
names  published  should  notify  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar  at  the  start  of 
the  semester. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Maintenance  of  Academic 
Standards:  Probation  and 
Dismissal 

A  student's  scholastic  standing  at  the 
University  is  indicated  by  his  or  her 
cumulative  Grade  Point  Average  (GPA). 
Three  categories  of  academic  standing 
have  been  established:  good  academic 
standing,  probation,  and  dismissal.  A 
student  remains  in  good  academic 
standing  as  long  as  he  or  she  maintains 
a  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of  2.00  for 
all  work  taken  at  the  University.  Proba- 
tion and  dismissal  are  actions  taken  by 
the  University  when  a  student's  GPA 
falls  below  an  acceptable  level  at  the 
end  of  a  semester  or  a  summer  term. 

Conditions  of  Probation.  Probation  is 
defined  as  a  trial  period  during  which 
a  student  whose  cumulative  average 
has  fallen  below  acceptable  standards 
must  bring  his  or  her  average  up  to 
those  standards  or  be  dismissed  from 
the  University.  The  following  rules 
govern  the  category  of  probation: 

A.  A  student  shall  be  placed  on  proba- 
tion if  he  or  she  has  attempted 

■*   more  than  nine  and  up  to  18 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  less  than  2.00 

■*   more  than  18  but  fewer  than  48 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  from  1.00  to  less 
than  2.00 

■*  at  least  48  but  fewer  than  64 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  from  1.40  to  less 
than  2.00 

*  at  least  64  or  more  semester 
hours  of  work  with  a  cumulative 
GPA  from  1.70  to  less  than  2.00 

B.  Probation  shall  commence  immedi- 
ately at  the  end  of  the  semester  in 
which  the  cumulative  GPA  falls  into 
the  range  described.  A  notice  of 
probation  shall  be  printed  on  the 
student's  transcript,  and  the  student 
shall  be  notified  by  the  University 
that  he  or  she  is  in  danger  of  dis- 
missal. A  student  who  receives 
notice  of  being  placed  on  probation 
shall  immediately  seek  advising, 
tutoring,  and  instruction  in  effective 
study  habits  and  efficient  use  of 
time  —  in  short,  take  every  possible 
measure  to  improve  the  quality  of 
his  or  her  academic  performance. 

C.  A  student  will  be  allowed  to  con- 
tinue on  probation  for  no  more  than 
30  semester  hours  of  work  after 


being  placed  on  probation.  If  the 
GPA  has  not  reached  an  acceptable 
level  by  that  time,  the  student  will 
be  dismissed  from  the  University.  A 
student  is  removed  from  probation 
when  the  cumulative  GPA  rises  to 
2.00  or  above. 

D.  Those  students  who  entered  the 
University  for  the  first  time  begin- 
ning with  the  1989  fall  semester 
and  who  have  been  placed  on  pro- 
bation a  second  time  will  be 
allowed  to  continue  on  probation 
for  no  more  than  15  semester 
hours  of  work  after  being  placed  on 
that  second  probation.  If  the  GPA 
has  not  reached  an  acceptable  level 
by  that  time,  the  student  will  be 
dismissed  from  the  University. 
Thus,  a  student  may  be  on  proba- 
tion no  more  than  twice,  and 
placement  on  probation  for  a  third 
time  will  result  in  immediate  dis- 
missal. 

NOTE:  This  does  not  prevent  individ- 
ual departments  from  requiring  an 
average  higher  than  2.00  as  a  condition 
of  acceptance  or  retention. 

Dismissal  from  the  University 

A.  A  student  shall  be  dismissed  from 
the  University  if  he  or  she  has 
attempted 

*  more  than  18  but  fewer  than  48 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  less  than 
1.00. 

*  at  least  48  but  fewer  than  64 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  less  than 
1.40,  whether  he  or  she  has  pre- 
viously been  placed  on  probation 
or  not. 

■*  at  least  64  or  more  semester 
hours  of  work  with  a  cumulative 
GPA  of  less  than  1.70,  whether 
he  or  she  has  previously  been 
placed  on  probation  or 
not. 
NOTE:  A  student  shall  also  be  dis- 
missed if  he  or  she  fails  to  meet  the 
standards  set  under  paragraph  C  above. 

B.  A  student  may  petition  for  an 
exception  to  a  dismissal  action. 
Petitions  are  available  fi-om  the 
associate  provost. 

C.  Nothing  in  this  policy  shall  be 
taken  to  preclude  the  dismissal  of 
students  for  violations  of  other 
University  policies,  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  those  poli- 
cies. 


Readmission  of  Dismissed  Students 

A.  A  student  dismissed  from  the  Uni- 
versity may  not  take  course  work  at 
the  University  until  he  or  she 
applies  and  is  considered  for 
readmission  by  the  University.  No 
student  will  be  considered  for 
readmission  earlier  than  one  full 
calendar  year  after  the  time  of  dis- 
missal. 

B.  Students  readmitted  to  the  Univer- 
sity must  maintain  a  full  2.00  GPA 
for  each  semester  of  work  following 
readmission  and,  after  the  comple- 
tion of  no  more  than  48  semester 
hours  (or  prior  to  graduation, 
whichever  comes  first),  must  obtain 
an  overall  cumulative  GPA  of  2.00 
for  all  work  taken  at  the  University. 
A  student  who  fails  to  meet  this 
standard  shall  be  dismissed  from 
the  University  a  second  time  and  is 
not  eligible  for  future  readmission. 

Repeating  Courses 

Beginning  with  the  1991  fall  semester, 
the  Repeat  Policy  is  divided  into  two 
sections,  i.e.,  a  policy  covering  reme- 
dial courses  (000-level)  that  do  not 
count  towards  graduation,  and  a  policy 
covering  college-level  courses. 
A.  Policy  covering  remedial  courses 
Students  who  enter  the  University 
beginning  with  the  1991  fall  semes- 
ter may  have  three  attempts  to  pass 
each  remedial  course  (000-level). 
The  repeat  privilege  for  remedial 
courses  will  not  count  vnthin  the 
five-repeat  allotment  for  college 
level  courses.  Credits  for  these 
courses  do  not  count  towards  grad- 
uation but  are  computed  in  the 
cumulative  Grade  Point  Average. 
Students  may  file  two  grade 
replacement  forms,  which  result  in 
eliminating  the  grades  from  the 
first  and  second  attempts.  The 
third  attempt,  however,  will  be  the 
grade  of  record.  Students  must 
pass  the  remedial  basic  skills 
courses  (English  and  mathematics) 
with  a  C-  or  better  before  enrolling 
in  a  more  advanced  course  in  the 
respective  discipline.  Students 
enrolled  in  the  basic  skills  remedial 
course(s)  who  do  not  pass  with  a 
C-  or  better  after  three  attempts 
will  be  permanently  dismissed  from 
the  University  regardless  of  overall 
Grade  Point  Average.  Students 
who  fail  remedial  courses  at  West 
Chester  University  may  not  repeat 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


those  courses  at  another  university 
or  transfer  in  the  college-level 
(100  or  higher)  course. 
B.  Policy  covering  undergraduate 
college-level  courses 
Students  may  repeat  undergraduate 
college-level  courses  to  improve  a 
grade  of  F,  WF,  D,  C,  or  B  (not  A). 
Beginning  with  the  1985  fall  semes- 
ter, 

1.  No  student  may  use  the  repeat 
option  more  than  five  times. 
Use  of  the  option  could,  for 
example,  mean  repeating  five 
DIFFERENT  courses  once  each, 
or  repeating  each  of  two  differ- 
ent courses  twice  (four  repeats) 
and  one  additional  course  once. 

2.  A  single  course  may  not  be 
repeated  more  than  twice. 

3.  Use  of  the  repeat  option  will  be 
counted  whether  or  not  a  grade 
replacement  form  is  filed.  (See 
procedures  for  filing  form.) 

4.  A  student  may  file  a  grade 
replacement  form  only  once  per 
course. 

Students  who  repeat  courses  more 
often  than  the  policy  permits  are  in 
violation  of  the  repeat  policy  and 
will  not  earn  additional  credits  in 
such  courses  towards  their  degree; 
credits  for  courses  beyond  five 
repeats,  or  beyond  two  repeats  for  a 
single  course,  will  be  subtracted  at 
the  time  of  final  clearance  for  grad- 
uation. 
Students  who  fail  college-level  courses 
may  not  repeat  those  courses  at 
another  institution;  college  courses 
repeated  at  another  institution  will  not 
count  toward  a  West  Chester  degree. 
Because  all  students  must  take  and 
pass  both  ENG  120  and  ENG  121  to 
graduate,  a  student  who  fails  either  of 
these  courses  after  three  attempts  will 
be  dismissed  immediately  following  the 
third  failure,  regardless  of  GPA. 

Repeat  Course  Procedure 

The  first  time  a  student  completes  a 
course  for  a  grade  it  is  considered  the 
first  attempt.  The  second  time  a  stu- 
dent completes  a  course  for  a  grade  it 
is  considered  the  second  attempt  and 
the  first  repeat.  The  third  time  a  stu- 
dent completes  a  course  for  a  grade  it 
is  considered  the  third  attempt  and  is 
the  second  repeat.  The  first  time  a 
course  is  repeated,  only  the  second 
grade  is  computed  into  the  GPA.  For 
this  to  occur,  students  should  file  a 


Grade  Replacement  Form  in  the  Office 
of  the  Registrar  at  the  end  of  the 
semester  in  which  they  complete  the 
second  attempt.  However,  forms  must 
be  filed  prior  to  the  time  of  final  grad- 
uation clearance.  If  the  college-level 
course  is  repeated  a  second  time,  both 
the  second  and  third  grades  are  com- 
puted into  the  GPA.  Students  who 
complete  a  course  with  a  fourth 
attempt  or  more  are  in  violation  of  the 
Repeat  Policy. 

Taking  Courses  Off  Campus 

West  Chester  University  students  who 
wish  to  enroll  at  another  institution  and 
have  the  credits  count  towards  a  West 
Chester  degree  must  fill  out  and  turn  in 
a  Permission  to  Take  Courses  Off  Cam- 
pus Form  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar 
prior  to  enrolling  at  the  other  institu- 
tion. Grades  received  in  courses  taken 
at  other  institutions  are  not  calculated 
in  the  West  Chester  cumulative  Grade 
Point  Average;  only  the  credits  may  be 
transferred.  (See  also  "Transfer  of 
Credit"  for  performance  standards  gov- 
erning courses  to  be  counted  toward  a 
West  Chester  degree.)  Students  who 
fail  a  course  at  West  Chester  may  not 
repeat  the  course  at  another  institution 
and  have  the  credits  count  towards  a 
West  Chester  degree. 
If  there  is  doubt  as  to  which  West 
Chester  course  is  equivalent  to  the 
course  to  be  taken  elsewhere,  the  stu- 
dent should  consult  with  the  chairper- 
son of  the  West  Chester  department 
offering  the  course  or  consult  the 
transfer  credit  analyst  in  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar. 

Transfer  of  Credit 

Credit  may  be  granted  for  equivalent 
courses  completed  in  accredited  insti- 
tutions of  higher  education.  Credit  for 
work  completed  at  an  unaccredited 
institution  may  be  granted  on  the  rec- 
ommendation of  the  student's  major 
department  in  consultation  with  the 
school  or  college  dean  and  transfer 
credit  analyst.  (See  also  "Admission  to 
West  Chester.") 

Effective  for  students  who  entered  the 
University  after  September,  1973,  D 
grades  are  accepted  for  transfer  if  the 
credit  is  for  equivalent  courses  within 
the  framework  of  general  requirements 
or  free  electives,  provided  the  trans- 
ferred course  does  not  satisfy  a  major 
field  requirement  as  well. 


D  grades  considered  for  transfer  for  a 
major  program  requirement  are  treated 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  major 
department  treats  D  grades  earned  at 
West  Chester;  that  is,  the  student's 
major  department  may  require  the 
course  to  be  repeated. 
If  the  student  is  required  to  repeat  a 
course  in  which  a  D  was  obtained,  the 
course  originally  considered  for  trans- 
fer will  not  be  accepted  for  any  type  of 
credit. 

Likewise,  if  a  student  changes  his  or 
her  major,  D  grades  originally 
approved  for  transfer  will  be  re-evalu- 
ated by  the  new  major  department. 
IN  ORDER  TO  RECEIVE  FULL 
CREDIT  FOR  COURSES  TAKEN 
ELSEWHERE  AND  FOR 
PROFICIENCIES  DEMONSTRATED 
ON  ADVANCED  PLACEMENT  OR 
COLLEGE  LEVEL  EXAMINATION 
PROGRAM  (CLEP)  EXAMINAnONS, 
THE  TRANSFER  STUDENT  SHOULD 
HAVE  THIS  WORK  EVALUATED 
PRIOR  TO  ENROLLING  IN  ANY 
POTENTIALLY  EQUIVALENT 
COURSE  AT  WEST  CHESTER. 

Policy  on  Correspondence 
Courses 

The  University  does  not  allow  credit 
for  courses  taken  through  correspon- 
dence. 

Advanced  Placement  Program 

Courses  taken  under  the  Advanced 
Placement  Program  offered  by  the  Col- 
lege Entrance  Examination  Board  may 
be  applied  toward  advanced  placement 
in  the  University  and/or  toward  credit 
requirements  for  graduation.  The  Uni- 
versity recognizes  the  grade  of  3.00  or 
above  as  acceptable. 

College  Level  Examination 
Program  (CLEP) 

West  Chester  University  encourages 
the  nontraditional  student  to  use  CLEP 
subject  examinations,  especially  if  he 
or  she  has  not  yet  applied  for  admis- 
sion to  West  Chester  University.  While 
a  nontraditional  student  may  utilize 
CLEP  exams  after  gaining  admission  to 
WCU,  the  student  is  urged  to  examine 
carefully  the  merits  of  the  credit-by- 
examination  option  for  individual 
courses  offered  by  the  University.  Tra- 
ditional students  (those  who  are  admit- 
ted immediately  after  high  school) 
should  take  advantage  of  advanced 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


placement  or  credit-by-examination 
options  available  at  West  Chester  Uni- 
versity. 

West  Chester  University  accepts  Sub- 
ject Examinations  in  which  the  score  is 
greater  than  the  50th  percentile. 
Course  credit  is  given  only  where  the 
Subject  Examination  can  be  applied  to 
specific  courses  offered,  most  com- 
monly in  the  general  requirements  pro- 
gram or  in  free  electives.  Those  inter- 
ested should  become  familiar  with  the 
subject  areas  included  in  such  pro- 
grams of  general  study.  Courses  are 
accepted  as  degree  credit  only;  while 
no  grade  is  recorded,  a  specific  number 
of  credit  hours  is  recorded. 

West  Chester  does  NOT  accept  the 
General  Examination  of  CLEP. 

Requirements  for  Graduation 

A  student  is  recommended  for  gradua- 
tion upon  the  satisfactory  completion 
of  a  minimum  of  128  semester  hours 
and  upon  fulfillment  of  all  categories 
of  the  requirements  for  his  or  her 
degree.  A  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of 
2.00  (C)  is  required  for  graduation. 
Specific  programs,  in  accordance  with 
University  procedures,  may  set  other 
higher  standards.  Degree  requirements 
are  detailed  under  the  heading  of  the 
subject  field.  See  also  "Requirements 
for  the  Baccalaureate  Degree."  A  stu- 
dent must  file  for  graduation  no  later 
than  the  beginning  of  the  semester  in 
which  he  or  she  will  complete  the 
requirements. 

Any  senior  who  does  not  complete  all 
degree  requirements  within  30  calen- 
dar days  of  the  end  of  the  term  in 
which  he  or  she  intends  to  graduate 
must  pay  the  diploma  fee  again  before 
an  updated  diploma  will  be  issued. 
Such  a  student,  however,  does  have 
the  right  to  request  a  letter  from  the 
University  confirming  his  or  her  gradu- 
ation after  all  requirements  have  been 
satisfactorily  completed. 

Resident  Credit  Requirement 

To  qualify  for  graduation,  a  student 
must  take  at  least  30  semester  hours  of 
credit  at  West  Chester.  Normally  the 
student  will  take  the  last  30  semester 
hours  at  West  Chester. 

Required  Notice  of  Intention  to 
Graduate 

Students  intending  to  graduate  in  May 
or  August  must  come  to  the  Office  of 


the  Registrar  and  give  notice  of  inten- 
tion to  graduate  no  later  than  February 
1.  August  graduates  may  participate  in 
the  May  Commencement  exercises  if 
they  file  their  notices  of  intention  to 
graduate  by  February  1.  Students 
intending  to  graduate  in  December 
must  give  such  notice  no  later  than 
October  1.  The  baccalaureate  degree 
will  not  be  granted  unless  this  require- 
ment is  met. 

After  submitting  this  notice,  the  stu- 
dent will  receive  a  cap  and  gown  order 
form  and  a  bill  for  the  graduation  fee. 
He  or  she  also  will  specify  how  his  or 
her  name  should  be  shown  on  the 
diploma  and  commencement  program. 
Unless  the  deadline  is  met,  ic  will  be 
impossible  for  the  University  to  order  a 
diploma,  place  the  name  on  the  forth- 
coming Commencement  program,  or  have 
the  transcript  reflect  the  appropriate  date 
of  graduation.  For  this  reason,  all  stu- 
dents are  urged  to  review  their  records 
of  progress  towards  graduation  with 
their  adviser  and  to  file  for  graduation 
two  semesters  prior  to  the  date  of  grad- 
uation. 

Graduation  Honors 

Graduation  honors  are  awarded  as  fol- 
lows: 

Cumulative  GPA 

3.25  -  3.49 

3.50  -  3.74 

3.75  -  4.00 


cum  laude 
magna  cum  laude 
summa  cum  laude 


The  Honors  List  for  Commencement  is 
based  on  the  mid-semester,  nonfinal 
GPA.  A  transfer  student  must  have 
completed  64  hours  at  West  Chester 
University  prior  to  that  time  to  be  so 
recognized.  Those  who  do  not  attain 
honors  distinctions  until  the  end  of 
their  final  semester,  or  those  transfer 
students  with  honor  distinction  who 
do  not  complete  64  hours  until  the 
end  of  the  final  semester,  will  have 
recognition  of  their  achievement  on 
their  final  transcripts,  where  all  honors 
distinctions  are  recorded. 

Transcripts 

Requests  for  official  transcripts  are 
made  by  writing  to  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar,  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center.  The  fee 
is  $3  for  each  transcript.  Immediate 
transcripts  are  $5  upon  request. 
Checks,  payable  to  West  Chester  Uni- 
versity, must  accompany  either 
request. 


Directory  Information  —  Rights 
and  Privacy  Act  of  1974 

West  Chester  University  from  time  to 
time  makes  public  certain  kinds  of 
information  about  students,  such  as 
the  names  of  those  who  receive  schol- 
arships, who  hold  offices,  or  who  are 
members  of  athletic  teams.  Various 
kinds  of  campus  directories  are  pub- 
lished throughout  the  year  to  help 
members  of  the  University  community 
locate  and  communicate  with  each 
other.  The  commencement  programs 
publish  the  names  of  those  who  have 
received  degrees  during  the  year. 
The  Family  Educational  Rights  and 
Privacy  Act  of  1974  defines  the  term 
"directory  information"  to  include  the 
following  categories  of  information:  the 
student's  name,  address,  telephone 
number,  date  and  place  of  birth,  major 
field  of  study,  participation  in  officially 
recognized  activities  and  sports,  weight 
and  height  of  members  of  athletic 
teams,  date  of  attendance,  degrees  and 
awards  received,  and  the  most  recent 
previous  educational  agency  or  institu- 
tion attended  by  the  student.  The  Uni- 
versity will  limit  information  that  is 
made  public  to  categories  such  as  these 
but  will  not  necessarily  publish  all 
such  information  in  every  listing. 
Undergraduate  students  who  do  not 
wish  to  have  any  or  all  of  such  direc- 
tory information  published  without 
their  prior  consent  must  file  notice  in 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  Graduate 
students  must  file  notice  in  the  Office 
of  Graduate  Studies  and  Sponsored 
Research.  The  student  must  bring  a 
signed,  dated  statement  specifying 
items  not  to  be  published  to  the  appro- 
priate office  within  the  first  15  calen- 
dar days  after  the  beginning  of  the  fall 
and  spring  semesters. 

Student  Name  Changes 

Any  student  wishing  to  change  his/her 
name  from  that  currently  on  record 
must  provide  legal  documentation  sup- 
porting the  change.  This  must  be  the 
original  or  a  notarized  photocopy  of  a 
court-generated  document,  such  as  a 
marriage  license,  court  order,  divorce 
decree,  etc.  A  driver's  license  is  not 
adequate.  Requests  for  name  changes 
received  through  the  mail  will  be 
acknowledged  by  letter. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Exemption  from  Academic 
Policies 

Students  may  file  a  petition  available 
from  the  school  and  college  deans  for 
exemption  from  academic  policies. 

The  Family  Educational  Rights 
and  Privacy  Act 

The  Family  Educational  Rights  and 
Privacy  Act  of  1974,  as  amended,  is  a 
federal  law  which  states  (a)  that  a  writ- 
ten institutional  policy  must  be  estab- 
lished and  (b)  that  a  statement  of 
adopted  procedures  covering  the  pri- 
vacy rights  of  students  be  made  avail- 
able. The  law  provides  that  the  institu- 
tion will  maintain  the  confidentiality  of 
student  education  records. 
West  Chester  University  accords  all 
rights  under  the  law  to  students  who 
are  in  attendance  at  the  University,  and 
in  certain  instances  to  the  parents  of 
dependent  students,  as  defined  in  Sec- 
tion 152  of  the  Internal  Revenue  Code 
of  1954.  Basically,  a  dependent  student 
is  a  student  whose  parents(s)  provides 
more  than  half  of  his/her  support. 
Generally,  the  University  does  not  pro- 
vide information  to  parents  because  of 
this  act.  However,  exceptions  are  made 
if 

1.)  the  student  must  give  the  parents 
written  consent,  if  the  student  is 
independent;  or 
2.)  the  parents  must  provide  a  certi- 
fied copy  of  their  most  recent  Fed- 
eral Income  Tax  Form  reflecting 
dependency  status  of  the  son/ 
daughter  which  must  be  on  file  in 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar 
No  one  outside  the  institution  shall 
have  access  to,  nor  will  the  institution 
disclose,  any  information  from  stu- 
dents' education  records  without  the 
students'  written  consent  except  to  per- 
sonnel within  the  institution,  to  offi- 
cials of  other  institutions  in  which  stu- 
dents seek  to  enroll,  to  persons  or 
organizations  providing  students  finan- 
cial aid,  to  accrediting  agencies  carry- 
ing out  their  accreditation  function,  to 
persons  in  compliance  with  a  judicial 
order,  a  valid  subpoena,  and  to  persons 
in  an  emergency  in  order  to  protect 
the  health  or  safety  of  students  or 
other  persons.  All  these  exceptions  are 
permitted  under  the  act. 
Within  the  West  Chester  University 
community,  only  those  members,  indi- 
vidually or  collectively,  acting  on  the 
student's  educational  interest  are 


allowed  access  to  student  education 
records.  These  members  include,  with- 
out limitation,  personnel  in  the  offices 
of  the  Registrar,  Comptroller,  Financial 
Aid,  Admissions,  and  academic  person- 
nel within  the  limitations  of  their  need 
to  know. 

At  its  discretion  the  institution  may 
provide  directory  information  in  accor- 
dance with  the  provisions  of  the  act  to 
include:  student  name,  address,  tele- 
phone number,  date  and  place  of  birth, 
major  field  of  study,  dates  of  atten- 
dance, degrees  and  awards  received, 
the  most  recent  previous  educational 
agency  or  institution  attended  by  the 
student,  participation  in  officially  rec- 
ognized activities  and  sports,  and 
weight  and  height  of  members  of  ath- 
letic teams.  Students  may  withhold 
directory  information  by  notifying  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar  in  writing 
within  15  calendar  days  after  the 
beginning  of  each  fall  semester. 
Requests  for  nondisclosure  will  be 
honored  by  the  institution  for  only  one 
academic  year;  therefore,  authorization 
to  withhold  directory  information  must 
be  filled  annually  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar. 

The  law  provides  students  with  the 
right  to  inspect  and  review  information 
contained  in  their  education  records,  to 
challenge  the  contents  of  their  educa- 
tion records,  to  have  a  hearing  if  the 
outcome  of  the  challenge  is  unsatisfac- 
tory, and  to  submit  explanatory  state- 
ments for  inclusion  in  their  files  if  the 
decisions  of  the  hearing  panels  are 
unacceptable.  The  University  Registrar 
at  West  Chester  University  has  been 
designated  by  the  institution  to  coordi- 
nate the  inspection  and  review  proce- 
dures for  student  education  records, 
which  include  admissions,  personal, 
and  academic.  Students  wishing  to 
review  their  education  records  must 
make  written  requests  to  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  listing  the  item  or  items 
of  interest.  Only  records  covered  by 
the  act  will  be  made  available  within 
45  days  of  the  request.  Students  may 
have  copies  made  of  their  records  with 
certain  exceptions,  or  a  copy  of  the 
academic  record  for  which  a  financial 
hold  exists.  These  copies  will  be  made 
at  the  students'  expense  at  prevailing 
rates  which  are  listed  in  the  current 
catalog.  Education  records  do  not 
include  records  of  instructional, 
administrative,  and  educational  person- 
nel which  are  the  sole  possession  of 


the  maker  and  are  not  accessible  or 
revealed  to  any  individual  except  a 
temporary  substitute,  records  of  the 
law  enforcement  unit,  student  health 
records,  employment  records,  or 
alumni  records.  Health  records,  how- 
ever, may  be  reviewed  by  physicians  of 
the  students'  choosing. 
Students  may  not  inspect  and  review 
the  following  as  outlined  by  the  act: 
financial  information  submitted  by 
their  parents,  confidential  letters  and 
recommendations  associated  with 
admissions,  employment  or  job  place- 
ment, or  honors  to  which  they  have 
waived  their  rights  of  inspection  and 
review;  or  education  records  contain- 
ing information  about  more  than  one 
student,  in  which  case  the  institution 
will  permit  access  only  to  that  part  of 
the  record  which  pertains  to  the 
inquiring  student.  The  institution  is 
not  required  to  permit  students  to 
inspect  and  review  confidential  letters 
and  recommendations  placed  in  their 
files  prior  to  January  1,  1975,  provided 
those  letters  were  collected  under 
established  policies  of  confidentiality 
and  were  used  only  for  the  purposes 
for  which  they  were  collected. 
Students  who  believe  that  their  educa- 
tion records  contain  information  that  is 
inaccurate  or  misleading,  or  is  other- 
wise in  violation  of  their  privacy  or 
other  rights,  may  discuss  their  prob- 
lems informally  with  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  If  the  decisions  are  in  agree- 
ment with  the  students'  requests,  the 
appropriate  records  will  be  amended.  If 
not,  the  students  will  be  notified 
within  a  reasonable  amount  of  time 
that  the  records  will  not  be  amended, 
and  they  will  be  informed  by  the  Office 
of  the  Registrar  of  their  right  to  a  for- 
mal hearing.  Student  requests  for  a 
formal  hearing  must  be  made  in  writ- 
ing to  the  associate  provost  who, 
within  a  reasonable  period  of  time  after 
receiving  such  request,  will  inform  stu- 
dents of  the  date,  place,  and  time  of 
the  hearing.  Students  may  present  evi- 
dence relevant  to  the  issues  raised  and 
may  be  assisted  or  represented  at  the 
hearings  by  one  or  more  persons  of 
their  choice,  including  attorneys,  at  the 
students'  expense.  The  hearing  panels 
which  will  adjudicate  such  challenges 
will  be  the  individuals  designated  by 
the  University. 

Decisions  of  the  hearing  panels  will  be 
final,  will  be  based  solely  on  the  evi- 
dence presented  at  the  hearing,  and 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


will  consist  of  written  statements 
summarizing  the  evidence  and  stating 
the  reasons  for  the  decisions,  and  will 
be  delivered  to  all  parties  concerned. 
Their  education  records  will  be  cor- 
rected or  amended  in  accordance  with 
the  decisions  of  the  hearing  panels,  if 
the  decisions  are  in  favor  of  the  stu- 
dent. If  the  decisions  are  unsatis- 
factory to  the  student,  the  student 
may  place  with  the  education  record 
statements  commenting  on  the  infor- 
mation in  the  records,  or  statements 
setting  forth  any  reasons  for  disagree- 
ing with  the  decisions  of  the  hearing 
panels.  The  statements  will  be  placed 


in  the  education  records,  maintained  as 
pan  of  the  students'  records,  and 
released  whenever  the  records  in  ques- 
tion are  disclosed. 

Students  who  believe  adjudications  of 
their  challenges  were  unfair  or  not  in 
keeping  with  the  provisions  of  the  act 
may  request,  in  writing,  assistance 
from  the  president  of  the  institution  to 
aid  them  in  filing  complaints  with 
The  Family  Educational  Rights  and 
Privacy  Act  Office  (FERPA),  Depan- 
ment  of  Education,  Room  4074, 
Switzer  Building,  Washington  D.C. 
20202. 


Revisions  and  clarifications  will  be 
published  as  experience  with  the  law 
and  the  institution's  policy  warrants. 

This  policy  has  been  adopted  in 
accordance  with  the  Family 
Educational  Rights  and  Privacy 
Act,  20  U.S.C.  1232(g),  and  the 
regulations  promulgated  thereunder 
at  34  C.F.R.  99.1  er  seq.,  and  that  ref- 
erence should  be  made  to  that  statute 
and  regulations  for  additional  informa- 
tion. 

Please  contact  the  Office  of  the  Regis- 
trar with  any  questions. 


Structure  of  the  University 


COLLEGE  OF  ARTS  AND  SCIENCES 

Richard  H.  Wells,  Dean 

Anthropology  and  Geology  and  Astronomy 

Sociology  History 

Art  Mathematics  and  Computer 

Biology  Science 

Chemistry  Philosophy 

Communication  Studies  Physics 

English  Psychology 

Foreign  Languages  Theatre  Arts 


SCHOOL  OF  BUSINESS  AND  PUBUC  AFFAIRS 

Christopher  M.  Fiorentino,  Dean 

Accounting  Management 

Criminal  Justice  Marketing 

Economics  Political  Science 

Geography  and  Planning  Social  Work 


SCHOOL  OF  EDUCATION 

Michael  L.  Hanes,  Dean 

Childhood  Studies  and  Instructional  Media 

Reading  Special  Education 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 
Professional  Education 


SCHOOL  OF  HEAITH  SCIENCES 

Roger  W.  Mustalish,  Interim  Dean 

Communicative  Disorders       Physical  Education 
Health  Sports  Medicine 

Nursing 


SCHOOL  OF  MUSIC 

Sterling  E.  Murray,  Interim  Dean 

Instrumental  Music  Music  Theory  and 

Keyboard  Music  Composition 

Music  Education  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

Music  History  and  Literature 


ACADEMIC  SERVICES  DIVISION 

Vivian  Nix-Early,  Assistant  Vice-President  for  Academic  ASairs 

Educational  Services 
Undeclared  Major  Program 
Military  Science 


Undergraduate  Programs  at  West  Chester 


Students  may  enroll  at  West  Chester  University  in  programs  leading  to  the  following  degrees  or  certificates: 


Associate  of  Arts  (AA) 
Associate  of  Science  (AS) 
Bachelor  of  Arts  (BA) 
Bachelor  of  Fine  Arts  (BFA) 


Bachelor  of  Music  (BM) 
Bachelor  of  Science  (BS) 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education 
(BSED) 


Bachelor  of  Science  in  Nursing  (BSN) 
Local  Certificate  (CERTIF) 
Teaching  Certificate  (TCHG  CERT) 


Accounting  BS 
American  Studies  BA 
Anthropology  BA 
Anthropology-Sociology  BA 
Applied  Media  Technology  AS 
Art  BA,  BFA 

Athletic  Training  BS,  CERTIF 
Biology  BA,  BS,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Biology:  Cell  and  Molecular,  Ecology, 

Microbiology,  BS 
Business  Management  BS 
Chemistry  BS,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 
Chemistry-Biology  BS 
Chemistry-Biology  (Pre-Medical)  BS 
Chemistry-Geology  BS 
Clinical  Chemistry  BS 
Communication  Studies  BA 
Communication  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 
Communicative  Disorders  BA 
Comparative  Literature  BA 
Computer  and  Information  Sciences 

BS 
Criminal  Justice  BS 
Driver-Safety  Education  TCHG  CERT 
Early  Childhood  Education  BSED, 

TCHG  CERT 
Earth  Science  BS,  TCHG  CERT 
Earth-Space  Science  BSED 
Economics  BA,  BS 
Elementary  Education  BSED,  TCHG 

CERT 


PROGRAM  SUMMARY 

English  (see  Literature)  BSED,  TCHG 

CERT 
Environmental  Education  TCHG 

CERT 

Ethnic  Studies  CERTIF 

Forensic  Chemistry  BS 

French  BA,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Geography  BA 

German  BA,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Health  and  Physical  Education  BS, 
TCHG  CERT 

Health  and  Physical  Education- 
Physical  Fitness  BS 

Health  and  Physical  Education- 
Student  Designed  BS 

Health  Education  BS,  TCHG  CERT 

Health  Sciences  BS 

History  BA 

Jazz  Studies  and  Contemporary  Media 

BM 
Latin  BA,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 
Latin-American  Studies  CERTIF 
Liberal  Studies  AA,  BA,  BS 
Literature  BA 
Marketing  BS 

Mathematics  BA,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 
Mathematics-Computer  Science  BA 
Music  Composition  BM 
Music  Education  BS,  TCHG  CERT 
Music  History  BM 
Music  Performance  BM 


Music  Theory  BM 

Nursing  BSN 

Philosophy  BA 

PhUosophy-Religious 
Studies  BA 

Physics  BS,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Physics-Engineering  BS 

Political  Science-International  Rela- 
tions BA 

Political  Science-Public  Administra- 
tion BA 

Psychology  BA 

Psychology:  Cognitive  Rehabilitation 
BA 

Public  Health  BS 

Public  Health:  Environmental  BS 

Public  Health/Nutrition  BS 

Respiratory  Care  AS 

Russian  BA,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Russian  Studies  CERTIF 

Secondary  Education  (See  individual 
concentration)  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Social  Studies  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Social  Work  BA 

Sociology  BA 

Spanish  BA,  BSED,  TCHG  CERT 

Special  Education  BSED,  TCHG 
CERT 

Speech  Correction  BSED,  TCHG 
CERT 

Studio  Arts  BFA 

Theatre  Arts  BA 


Programs  of  Study  and  Course  Offerings 


Guide  to  the  Catalog 

Depanments  are  arranged  alphabeti- 
cally within  the  college  or  school  hous- 
ing them  (see  list  on  page  50).  Inter- 
disciplinary programs  are  listed  with 
the  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences. 
Special  programs  that  are  administered 
by  the  Academic  Services  Division  are 
presented  last. 

Students  may  obtain  a  typical  sequence 
of  courses  for  any  program  from  the 
office  specified  in  this  catalog. 
Please  note  that  all  courses,  course 
descriptions,  course  sequences,  and 
course  substitutions  are  subject  to 
change.  Current  information  is  avail- 
able from  the  appropriate  department 
chair,  dean,  or  program  coordinator. 

Guide  to  Course  Prefixes 

Many  program  descriptions  in  this  cat- 
alog refer  to  courses  offered  by  other 
depanments  using  a  course  abbrevia- 
tion called  a  prefix.  In  addition,  some 
course  prefixes  do  not  use  the  logical 
initials  of  the  courses  to  which  they 
refer  (e.g.,  CLT  is  used  to  indicate 
instrumental  music  courses).  To  assist 
in  locating  the  department  or  program 
which  uses  each  prefix,  the  following 
guide  to  course  prefixes  is  provided. 

PREFIX    DEPARTMENT/PROGRAM 

ACB  Instrumental  Music 

ACC  Accounting 

AC?  Instrumental  Music 

ACS  Instrumental  Music 

ACW  Instrumental  Music 

ADM  Administration,  Leadership  for 

Women 

AEB  Instrumental  Music 

AEO  Instrumental  Music 

AER  Educational  Services 

AES  Instrumental  Music 

AJZ  Instrumental  Music 

AIC  Instrumental  Music 

AIM  Instrumental  Music 

ALC  Instrumental  Music 

AMC  Instrumental  Music 

AMS  American  Studies 

ANT  Anthropology  and  Sociology 

ARH  Art 

ART  Art 

BAR  Instrumental  Music 

BAS  Instrumental  Music 

BIL  Biology 

BIO  Biology 

BIA  Marketing 

BSN  Instrumental  Music 


CHE 
CHO 
CLS 

CIT 
COM 

CRJ 
CRL 
CRW 
CSC 

ECE 
ECO 
EDA 
EDC 

EDE 
EDF 

EDM 
EDO 

EDP 

EDR 
EDS 

EDX 

EFR 

EGE 

ERU 

ENG 

ESP 

ESL 

ESS 

FIN 

FLM 

FLU 

FRE 

FRH 

GEO 

GER 

GRE 

GTR 

HAR 

HBI 

HEA 

HEB 

HIS 

HON 

HPE 

HRP 

IND 

INS 

ITA 

JBR 

JRN 

JST 

JWW 

KEN 

LAN 

LAT 


Chemistry 

LEN 

English 

Vocal/Choral  Music 

UN 

Foreign  Languages 

Comparative  Literature  Studies, 

LIT 

English 

English 

MAK 

Keyboard  Music 

Instrumental  Music 

MAT 

Mathematics  and  Computer 

Communication  Studies 

Science 

(previously  SPC) 

MGT 

Management 

Criminal  Justice 

MHL 

Music  History 

Chemistry 

MIS 

Marketing 

English 

MKT 

Marketing 

Mathematics  and  Computer 

MSI 

Educational  Services 

Science 

MTC 

Music  Theory  and  Composition 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

Mit 

Mathematics  and  Computer 

Economics 

Science 

Special  Education 

MTL 

Mathematics  and  Computer 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

Science 

Professional  Education 

MUE 

Music  Education 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

MWI 

Music  Theory  and  Composition 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

MWP 

Keyboard  Music 

Professional  Education 

NSG 

Nursing 

Instructional  Media 

NSL 

Nursing 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

OBO 

Instrumental  Music 

Professional  Education 

ORG 

Keyboard  Music 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

PAD 

Political  Science 

Professional  Education 

PEA 

Physical  Education 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

PED 

Physical  Education 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

PEL 

Physical  Education 

Professional  Education 

PER 

Instrumental  Music 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

PHI 

Philosophy 

Professional  Education 

PHL 

Physics 

Foreign  Languages 

PHR 

Physics 

Foreign  Languages 

PHS 

Physics 

Foreign  Languages 

PHY 

Physics  and  Pre-Engineering 

English 

PIA 

Keyboard  Music 

Foreign  Languages 

POR 

Foreign  Languages 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

PSC 

Political  Science 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

PSY 

Psychology 

Economics 

RES 

Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

English 

Professional  Education 

Instrumental  Miisic 

RUS 

Foreign  Languages 

Foreign  Languages 

SAX 

Instrumental  Music 

Instrumental  Music 

SCB 

Biology  (Pre-Med) 

Geography  and  Planning 

sec 

Chemistry 

Foreign  Languages 

SCE 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

Foreign  Languages 

SOC 

Anthropology  and  Sociology 

Instrumental  Music 

SPA 

Foreign  Languages 

Keyboard  Music 

SPP 

Communicative  Disorders 

Pohtical  Science 

SSC 

Social  Studies,  Ethnic  Studies, 

Health 

Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 

Foreign  I  anguages 

STA 

Mathematics  and  Computer 

History 

Science 

Honors  Program 

SWO 

Social  Work 

Physical  Education 

TBA 

Instrumental  Music 

Instrumental  Music 

THA 

Theatre  Arts 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

IPI 

Instrumental  Music 

Instrumental  Music 

TRB 

Instrumental  Music 

Foreign  Languages 

UNI 

Educational  Services 

Instrumental  Music 

VCL 

Instrumental  Music 

English 

VLA 

Instrumental  Music 

Instrumental  Music 

VLN 

Instrumental  Music 

Instrumental  Music 

VOC 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

Keyboard  Music 

vol 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

Foreign  Languages 

WCJ 

Educational  Services 

Foreign  Languages 

wos 

Women's  Studies 

College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Richard  H.  Wells,  Dean 


Department  of  Anthropology  and 
Sociology 

Leigh  S.  Shaffer,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Becker,  Greisman,  Keith,  Shaffer,  Stoller 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Luck,  Murphy, 
Freeman-Witthoft 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Berger,  Cowen,  Morales 

The  Depanment  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology  offers  three 
programs  leading  to  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  and,  in 
cooperation  with  the  faculty  of  teacher  education,  a  program 
leading  to  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education. 

L  The  B.A.  in  ANTHROPOLOGY  focuses  on  human  biological 
evolution;  on  the  origin,  development  and  integration  of  human 
cultures;  and  on  the  interrelationship  of  biological  and  cultural 
factors  in  the  etiology  of  human  behavior. 

2.  The  BA.  in  SOCIOLOGY  focuses  on  understanding  the  processes 
involved  in  the  creation,  maintenance,  and  evolution  of  social 
structure,  and  on  the  impact  of  diverse  structural  forms  on 
individual  behavior. 

3.  The  B.A.  in  ANTHROPOLOGY-SOCIOLOGY  focuses  on  die 
interdisciplinary  study  of  social  anthropology/comparative 
sociology,  drawing  on  offerings  in  both  sociology  and 
anthropology  to  develop  an  analytic  understanding  of  the 
dialectic  of  social  structure  and  culture. 

4.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  SOCIAL  STUDIES  is  for  students 
interested  in  pursuing  a  concentration  in  anthropology  or 
sociology  while  earning  state  certification  to  teach  secondary 
school  social  studies. 

Majors  in  the  three  BA.  programs  should  consult  the  appro- 
priate depanment  handbook  and  their  adviser  for  current 
requirements.  Students  planning  to  major  in  one  of  these 
programs  are  advised  to  take  ANT  102  and  SOC  200  no  later 
than  their  sophomore  year.  Application  for  admission  is 
made  on  forms  available  from  the  department  office. 
Students  planning  to  pursue  the  B.S.  in  Education  in  social 
studies  should  consult  during  the  freshman  year  with  both 
their  adviser  in  this  department  and  their  professional  stud- 
ies adviser  in  secondary  education. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  BjV.  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement  0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Limited  electives  chosen  under  advisement         18  semester  hours 

4.  Major  Requirements  60  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  ANTHROPOLOGY 

1.  Required  Core  Courses 

ANT  101  or  310,  103,  and  495  (ANT  102 
under  social  science  core) 

2.  Specialization  Requirements 

Four  to  seven  courses  in  anthropology 

3.  Cognate  Requirements 

LIN  230;  additional  courses  outside  of 
anthropology  approved  by  the  student's 
adviser 

4.  Free  Electives 


9  semester  hours 


12-21  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


15-24  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  SOCIOLOGY 

1.  Required  Core  Courses 
SOC  300,  321,  322,  and  492 

2.  Specialization  Requirements 

Any  six  advanced  courses  in  sociology 

3.  Career  Preparation  Sequence 

Five  nonsociology  courses  approved  by  the 
student's  adviser 

4.  Free  Electives 


12  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


15-24  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  ANTHROPOLOGY-SOCIOLOGY 


1.  Anthropology-Sociology  Core  Courses 
ANT  341  and  SOC  322 

2.  Anthropology 
Two  topical  and  two  area  courses  in  ethnology, 
selected  in  consultation  with  the  student's 
adviser 

3.  Sociology 
One  methodology  and  three  topical  (institu- 
tional or  theoretical)  courses,  selected  in 
consultation  with  the  student's  adviser 

4.  Seminar 
ANT  490 

5.  Cognates 
Four  courses  selected  in  consultation  with 
the  student's  adviser 

6.  Free  Electives 


6  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 

12  semester  hours 

3  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 

15  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCAnON  -  SOCL\L  STUDIES: 
CONCENTRAnON  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY  OR  SOCIOLOGY 

Students  interested  in  teaching  secondary  school  social  studies  may 
pursue  a  concentration  in  anthropology  or  sociology  while  earning 
state  certification  and  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education.  See  the 
description  under  "Social  Studies;  B.S.  in  Education." 

Minor  Programs 

Students  may  minor  in  any  of  the  three  following  programs.  A  min- 
imum of  18  semester  hours  is  required.  Elective  courses  are 
selected  in  consultation  with  the  student's  minor  adviser.  Students 
may  take  any  of  these  minors  as  a  concentration  in  the  Associate  of 
Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  Bach- 
elor of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies  general  degree 
program. 

Anthropology  Minor 

1 .  Required  Courses  9  semester  hours 
ANT  102,  eidier  ANT  101  or  103,  and  one 

400-level  course  in  anthropology 

2.  Elective  Courses  9  semester  hours 
Three  other  courses  in  anthropology 

Sociology  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses  9  semester  hours 
SOC  200,  300,  and  322 

2.  Elective  Courses  9  semester  hours 
Three  other  courses  in  sociology 


12  semester  hours 


Anthropology-Sociology  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses 
ANT  102  and  341,  and  SOC  200  and  341 

2.  Elective  Courses  6  semester  hours 
Two  other  courses  in  either  anthropology  or  sociology 


Department  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

Symbol:  ANT 

PRIMARILY  FOR  FRESHMEN  AND 

SOPHOMORES 

101     Introduction  to  Anthropology:  Biological 

(3)  Fundamentals  of  human  biology,  evolution, 
and  the  prehistoric  development  of  culture. 
Offered  in  spring  of  odd-numbered  years. 
*102     Introduction  to  Anthropology:  Cultural 
(3)  Comparative  anaybis  of  culture  systems. 
Offered  in  fall,  spring,  and  summer. 
*103     Introduction  to  Anthropology:  Archaeol- 
ogy (3)  Interpretation  of  culture  through  analysis 
of  archaeological  remains.  Offered  in  spring  of 
even-numbered  years,  and  in  summer. 
1 13    Archaeological  Field  Techniques  (3)  Imple- 
mentation of  archaeological  principles  and  theory 
In  laboratory  and  field  studies.  PREREQ  OR 
CONCURRENT;  ANT  103.  Offered  in  summer. 
120     Cultures  of  Ethnic  Groups  in  America  (3) 
Survey  of  the  cuhural  history  and  traditions  of 
ethnic  groups  in  America.  Offered  in  fall  of  odd- 
numbered  years. 

FOR  SOPHOMORES  AND 
UPPERCLASSMEN 

202    World  Ethnology  (3)  Survey  of  the  social 
organization,  belief  systems,  and  cultures  of 
selected  peoples.  PREREQ:  ANT  102  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor.  Offered  in  spring  of  erven- 
numbered  years. 

260    Artifacts  and  Culture  (3)  (See  also  HIS 
353.)  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

♦  280     Practicum  in  Museum  Techniques  I  (3) 
Exploration  of  techniques  of  cataloging,  conserv- 
mg  objects,  and  of  designing  and  setting  up 
exhibits.  Involvement  in  actual  museum  work. 
PREREQ:  ANT  102  or  permission  of  instructor. 
Offered  in  fall  of  odd-numbered  years. 

FOR  UPPERCLASSMEN 

A.  BIOLOGICAL  ANTHROPOLOGY 

310     Human  Paleontology  (3)  Evolutionary 
thought;  origin  and  antiquity  of  the  primates; 
fossil  man  and  living  races.  (Some  background 
in  biology  recommended.) 

B.  ETHNOLOGY:  AREA  COURSES 

320  American  Indian  (3)  Ethnology  of  North 
.-Simerica.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

321  American  Indian  Today  (3)  Native  Ameri- 
cans in  contemporary  Anglo-America.  PREREQ: 
ANT  102  or  permission  of  instructor.  Offered  in 
spring  of  odd-numbered  years,  and  in  summer. 
'322     Ethnology  of  Central  America  (3)  Survey 
of  the  modem  cultures  of  Central  America:  rela- 
tionships to  ancient  peoples;  the  process  of  mod- 
ernization in  this  area.  PREREQ:  ANT  102 

326  Cultures  and  Peoples  of  Sub-Saharan 
Africa  (3)  Examination  of  the  cultures  and  soci- 
eties of  Black  Africa.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

327  Cultures  and  Peoples  of  India  (3)  (See 
also  HIS  302.)  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

♦  329     Problems  in  Ethnology  (3)  Survey  of 
the  ethnographic  Uterature  pertaining  to  specific 
geographic  regions.  Area  of  focus  to  be 
announced  in  advance.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

C.  ETHNOLOGY:  TOPICAL  COURSES 

340  Folklore  in  Society  (3)  Survey  of  basic 
American  folklore  genres.  Emphasis  on  folklore  as 
process,  tradition,  and  as  an  element  of  culture. 

341  Social  Organization  (3)  Study  of  social 
groups,  their  structure,  and  functioning. 
PREREQ:  ANT  102. 


342  Political  Anthropology  (3)  Analysis  of 
tribal  and  peasant  political  systems.  PREREQ: 
ANT  102. 

343  Economic  Anthropology  (3)  Analysis  of 
tribal  and  peasant  economic  systems.  PREREQ: 
ANT  102. 

344  Magic,  ReUgion,  and  Witchcraft  (3)  An 
analysis  of  supematuralistic  ideology  and  ritual 
in  both  tribal  and  civil  society.  PREREQ:  ANT 
102. 

345  Culture  and  Personality  (3)  Study  of  the 
relationship  between  culture  systems  and  person- 
ality. PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

346  Culture  Change  (3)  Empirical  and  theoret- 
ical study  of  culture  change.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 
350     Primitive  Art  (3)  (See  also  ARH  350). 
PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

D.  ARCHAEOLOGY 
360     Historical  Archaeology  (3)  Historical 
research  through  archaeology.  Chester  County  is 
emphasized  through  local  research  projects. 
PREREQ  OR  CONCURRENT:  ANT  103. 
'362     Archaeology  of  Central  America  (3)  The 
archaeological  record  of  Central  America,  cover- 
ing the  significant  features  of  each  culture  area 
from  modem  Mexico  to  Panama.  PREREQ:  ANT 
103. 

ADVANCED  AND  SENIOR  COURSES 

380  Unguage  and  Culture  (3)  (also  UN  380) 
See  UN  380. 

381  Sociolinguistics  (3)  (also  UN  381)  The 
study  of  the  use  of  language  in  society  and  in 
educational  settings;  social  dialects;  language  pol- 
icy; Black  English.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

383     Structuralism:  From  Chaos  to  Order  in 
the  World  of  Ideas  (3)  This  course  is  a  general 
survey  of  structuralist  theory  as  it  relates  to  lin- 
guistics, anthropology,  psychology,  and  Utera- 
ture. The  goal  of  the  course  is  to  demonstrate 
how  structuralism  is  a  theoretical  orientation  in 
the  social  sciences  and  the  humanities  that 
attempts  to  transform  the  chaos  of  appearances 
into  order  of  reaUty  in  the  world  of  ideas. 

♦  405    Topical  Seminar  in  Anthropology  (3) 
Selected  topics  in  the  subdisciplines  of  anthro- 
pology. Topics  announced  in  advance.  Juniors 
and  seniors  only. 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  Anthropology 
(1-3)  Special  research  projects,  reports,  and 
readings  in  anthropology.  Juniors  and  seniors 
only.  PREREQ:  Permission  of  department  chair- 
person. 

459     History  of  Ethnological  Theory  (3)  Devel- 
opment of  ethnological  theory  with  emphasis  on 
the  nature  of  explanation  in  ethnology.  PREREQ: 
Six  hours  in  ethnology  and  junior  or  senior 
standing. 

490     Seminar  in  Social  Anthropology  (3)  His- 
tory and  theory  of  social  anthropology.  PREREQ: 
Six  hours  in  ethnology  and  six  hours  in  sociol- 
ogy. Seniors  only. 

495  Senior  Seminar  in  Anthropology  (3)  Dis- 
cussion and  supervised  research  designed  to  inte- 
grate conceptual  and  methodological  skills.  The 
research  paper  for  the  seminar  must  be  accept- 
able as  a  required  departmental  senior  research 
paper.  Senior  anthropology  majors  only. 

SOCIOLOGY 

Symbol:  SOC 

PRIMARILY  FOR  FRESHMEN  AND 
SOPHOMORES 


♦200     Introduction  to  Sociology  (3)  Fundamen- 
tals of  the  sociological  perspective  on  human 
behavior.  Offered  in  fall,  spring,  and  summer. 
*240     Sociology  of  the  Family  (3)  Comparative, 
historical,  and  cross-cultural  analysis  of  the  fam- 
ily institution.  Offered  in  fall,  spring,  and  sum- 
mer. 

PRIMARILY  FOR  SOCIOLOGY  MAJORS 
AND  OTHER  UPPERCLASSMEN 

300     Sociological  Theory  (3)  Histoncal  develop- 
ment of  the  sociological  perspective  on  human 
behavior,  with  emphasis  on  the  perennial  issues 
in  sociological  explanation.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 
302     Sociology  of  Everyday  Life  (3)  How  peo- 
ple interact  in  everyday  settings,  examined  from 
the  dramaturgical  perspectives  of  Goffman, 
Douglas,  Burke,  and  others.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

321  Statistics  in  Sociological  Research  (3)  The 
application  of  statistical  methods  to  sociological 
hypothesis  testing.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

322  Methods  of  Sociological  Research  (3)  The 
logic  of  social  research.  Fundamentals  of 
research  design,  data  collection  and  reduction, 
and  nonstatistical  analysis.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 
333     Self  and  Society  (3)  A  symbolic  intera- 
ctionist  perspective  on  social  psychology  which 
focuses  on  the  self  in  social  interaction. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

335     Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities  (3)  Analy- 
sis of  the  implications  of  racial  differences,  the 
factors  affecting  prejudice  and  discrimination, 
and  structural  aspects  of  group  conthcts. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

341  Social  Inequality  (3)  Analysis  of  inequali- 
ties in  wealth,  power,  and  prestige  in  contempo- 
rary societies.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

342  Urban  Sociology  (3)  A  descriptive  study  of 
the  form  and  development  of  the  urban  commu- 
nity with  respect  to  demographic  structure,  spa- 
tial and  temporal  patterns,  and  functional  organi- 
zation. PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

343  Sociology  of  Organizations  (3)  Analysis  of 
large-scale,  formal  organizations  with  emphasis 
on  bureaucracy  as  the  dominant  form  of  social 
organization  in  the  West.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

344  Sociology  of  Religion  (3)  Theoretical  anal- 
ysis of  social  functions  of  religion,  the  history 
and  internal  structure  of  religious  institutions, 
and  their  relationship  to  other  institutions. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

345  Sociology  of  Education  (3)  Sociological 
dimensions  of  educational  institutions.  PREREQ: 
SOC  200. 

346  Sociology  of  Gender  (3)  Analysis  and  eval- 
uation of  sociological  research  on  sex  roles. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

#349     Perspectives  on  Mental  Illness  (3)  An 
interdisciplinary  examination  of  mental 
disorders  —  their  definition,  cause,  and  treat- 
ment. PREREQ:  SOC  200 

350  Sociology  of  Mental  Illness  (3)  A  socio- 
logical perspective  on  mental  disorders. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

351  Deviance  (3)  Causes  and  consequences  of 
the  constmction  and  violation  of  social  norms. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

352  Criminology  (3)  Sociological  analysis  of 
the  definition,  distribution,  and  causes  of  crime, 
and  of  social  response  to  it.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

*  Culture  Cluster 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Department  of  Art 


353    Juvenile  Delinquency  (3)  Theories  of 
delinquency;  evaluation  of  programs  for  its  pre- 
vention and  control.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

360  Sociology  of  Culture  (3)  Analysis  of  the 
major  social  movements  that  have  shaped  the 
character  and  future  of  modem  man.  PREREQ: 
SOC  200. 

361  Sociology  of  Medicine  (3)  A  sociological 
perspective  on  health,  illness,  and  medical  care. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

362  Sexuality  in  Society  (3)  The  social  dimen- 
sions of  human  sexuaUty.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

364     Sociology  of  Aging  (3)  An  examination  of 
the  problems,  adaptations,  and  contributions  of 
the  aging  population.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

369     Social  Movements  (3)  An  introduction  to 
the  study  of  social  movements,  both  historical 
and  contemporary.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 


370  Social  Problems  (3)  Analysis  of  current 
social  disorders:  urban  unrest,  racial  tension, 
poverty,  addictions,  crime,  and  mental  illness. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

371  Applied  Social  Change  (3)  Strategy  and 
tactics  of  planning  and  guiding  change  in  small 
and  large-scale  social  systems.  PREREQ:  SOC 
200. 

376  Sociology  of  War  and  Peace  (3)  Explora- 
tion of  the  relationship  between  social  structure 
and  war.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

377  Clinical  Sociology  (3)  Analysis  and  evalua- 
tion of  therapeutic  applications  of  sociology  in 
group  and  individual  settings.  PREREQ:  SOC 
200. 

401     Social  Change  (3)  Critique  of  the  leading 
models  of  social  order  and  change;  analysis  of 
major  transformation  in  Western  civilization. 
PREREQ:  SOC  200. 


402     Career  Internship  in  Sociology  (6)  Field 
experience  in  agencies  involved  in  social  change. 
PREREQ:  SOC  371,  or  permission  of  the  instruc- 
tor 

410     Issues  in  Sociological  Thought  (3)  Analy- 
sis of  several  of  the  key  philosophical  issues 
underlying  sociological  thought.  PREREQ:  SOC 
300,  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

♦  490     Independent  Studies  in  Sociology  (1-3) 
Individual  research  projects,  reports,  and/or  read- 
ings. Seniors  only.  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
department  chairperson. 

♦  491     Topical  Seminar  in  Sociology  (3)  Spe- 
cial topics  in  theory  or  methodology.  Topics 
aimounced  in  advance.  Admission  by  permission 
of  instructor.  Juniors  and  seniors  only. 

492     Senior  Seminar  in  Sociology  (3)  Prepara- 
tion of  senior  research  paper.  Senior  sociology 
majors  only. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Art 

LinwoodJ.  White,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Sermas,  Weidner 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Lasuchin,  Simmendinger,  White 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Baker,  Blake,  HoUon,  Schiff, 

Stieber,  Usher 
The  undergraduate  programs  offered  by  the  Department  of 
Art  give  students  the  opportunity  to  achieve  competence  in 
studio  art,  theory,  and  the  history  of  art,  taking  into  consid- 
eration both  personal  and  vocational  needs.  Each  student's 
advising  reflects  an  effort  to  relate  the  general  requirements 
to  an  subjects. 

In  addition  to  the  formal  programs  listed  below,  alternative 
courses  of  study  may  be  planned  in  conjunction  with  other 
departments.  Students  are  encouraged  to  make  connections 
between  art  and  other  subjects  where  appropriate  to  achieve 
vocational  and  personal  advancement  after  consultation  with 
the  student's  adviser. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  ART 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Language  Requirement  (See  special  note 
below.) 

3.  Art  Department  Program  Requirements 
(select  one  track) 

A.  Studio  Art  I  sequence  (prepares  student  for 
graduate  study  and/or  personaVvocational 
competence) 

(1)  Studio  Foundation  (ART  106,  111 
112,  206,  220,  and  221) 

(2)  Art  History,  under  advisement 

(3)  Other  Studio  (Elect  from  studio 
offerings.) 

(4)  Senior  show  required 

TOTAL 


51  semester 
0-15  semester 


hours 
hours 


18  semester  hours 


12  semester 
36  semester 


hours 
hours 


66  semester  hours 


B.  Studio  Art  11  sequence  (provides  a  basic 
concentration  with  the  option  of  a  second, 
preprofessional  concentration) 

(1)  Studio  Foundation  (ART  106,  111, 
and  220) 

(2)  Art  History,  under  advisement 

(3)  Other  Studio  (Elect  from  studio 
offerings.  See  special  note  below.) 


9  semester  hours 

12  semester  hours 
15  semester  hours 


(4)  Preprofessional  concentration  — 
courses  to  be  selected  from  another 
discipline  (elementary  education,  spe- 
cial education,  business,  foreign  area 
studies,  or  others  under  advisement) 

(5)  Senior  show  required 

TOT\L 


27  semester  hours 


63  semester  hours 


NOTE:  The  foreign  language  requirement  for  Studio  I  is  two  semes- 
ters with  three  foreign  area  study  courses.  For  Studio  II  and  Art 
History,  the  requirement  is  to  meet  the  level  of  Intermediate  II, 
202. 

Studio  majors  are  advised  to  consider  concentration  emphasis  in 
general  categories  of  two-dimensional,  three-dimensional,  or  inter- 
media, or,  if  the  subject  area  permits,  a  more  specialized  concentra- 
tion in  single  or  limited  media. 

BACHELOR  OF  FINE  ARTS  -  STUDIO  ARTS 

The  Bachelor  of  Fine  Arts  is  regarded  as  the  initial  professional 
degree  in  art  by  the  National  Association  of  Schook  of  Art.  Its 
primary  emphasis  is  on  the  development  of  skills,  concepts,  and 
sensitivities  important  to  the  professional  artist.  Concentration  in  a 
major  professional  area  begins  only  upon  satisfactory  completion  of 
the  foundation  requirements  and  the  approval  of  the  faculty  adviser. 

1.  General  Requirement,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

2.  Art  Department  Program  Requirements* 

A.  Foundation  Requirements 

(1)  Smdio  Art  (ART  106,  111,  112,  206,     30  semester  hours 
216,  217,  220,  221,  222,  and  211, 

241,  231  or  347) 

(2)  Art  History  (ARH  103  and  104  and        12  semester  hours 
two  courses  under  advisement) 

B.  Professional  Specializations 
Professional  specialization  begins  in  the 
junior  year  when  the  student  selects  and  has 
been  accepted  in  one  of  the  following  areas: 

(1)  Drawing  and  Painting  (ART  226,  227, 
245,  306,  307,  316,  317,  and  320) 

(2)  Graphic  Design  (ART  211,  212,  310, 
311,  312,  490,  491,  and  499) 

(3)  Printmaking  (ART  241,  242,  243,  244, 
341,  342,  343,  and  344) 

(4)  Sculpture  and  Crafts  (a  selection  of  eight 
courses  from  ART  231,  232,  266,  321, 


24  semester  hours 


•Student  must  maintain  a  grade  of  C  in  all  major  subjects. 


Department  of  Art 


TOTAL 


24  semester  hours 
18  semester  hours 

84  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


322,  325,  331,  332,  335,  347,  348, 
and  409) 
(5)  General  Studio 
C.  An  Electives  (to  be  selected  under 
advisement) 

Minor  in  Studio  Art 

1.  Required  Courses 
ART  106  (Beginning  Drawing),  ART  HI 
(Basic  Design,  2-D),  and  ART  220 
(Basic  Design,  3-D) 

2.  Minor  Specialization 
The  student,  under  advisement,  may  select  a 
minor  specialization  so  that  the  emphasis  is  on 
one  of  these  groups:  drawing  and  painting, 
graphic  design,  printmaldng,  sculpture,  or  crafts. 

TOTAL  18  semester  hours 

Minor  in  Art  History 

This  program  provides  alternative  tracks  to  satisfy  a  variety  of 
emphases  to  which  an  history  may  be  appUed.  These  include  both 
vocational  and  liberal  arts  interests,  which  range  from  a  highly 
structured  sequence  to  a  self-designed  sequence. 
A.  An  History  Survey  18  semester  hours 

Structured  sequence  of  courses  designed  to  provide 
an  in-depth  comprehensive  core  of  Western  art 
development.  Recommended  as  an  important  cultural 


component  to  the  study  of  history,  literature, 
performing  arts,  anthropology,  sociology,  and 
psychology.  (The  IB  semester  hours  include 
ARH  382,  383,  384,  385,  386,  and  either  350  or  381.) 


B.  Art  History  and  Its  Interlaces 
According  to  interest  or  possible  vocational 
application,  this  program  provides  an  opportunity 
to  explore  either  the  various  historical  periods/styles 
of  an  or  the  interfaces  of  art  history  with  studio 
an,  American  studies,  and  other  cognate  areas. 


18  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


1.  Student  must  complete  the  required  courses 
ARH  103  and  104 

2.  Student  must  also  take  two  upper-level 
an  history  courses 

3.  Student  must  take,  under  advisement  — 

a.  Any  two  studio  courses 

b.  Any  two  American  studies  courses 

c.  Any  two  other  an  history  courses 

d.  Any  two  cognate  courses  from  other 
disciplines 

e.  Any  combination  of  the  above 

Either  of  these  minors  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students 
in  the  Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the 
minors  in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  hberal 
studies  general  degree  program. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ART 

Symbol:  ART 

105  Art  Workshop  (3)  An  an  workshop  for 
nonart  majors.  Exploration  of  an  materials  and 
techniques. 

106  Beginning  Drawing  (3)  Drawing  from 
direct  observation  and  an  introduction  to  ideas 
of  perception  and  interpretation.  Use  of  a  variety 
of  media. 

111  Basic  Design  (2-Dimensional  Design)  (3) 
Developing  a  visual  vocabulary  by  experimenting 
with  shape,  space,  light,  color,  and  texture  in  a 
variety  of  media. 

112  Color  and  Design  (2-Dimensional  Design) 
(3)  Extensive  study  of  color  theory  and  its  appli- 
cation to  a  variety  of  fine  and  industrial  arts 
projects. 

113  Computer  Art  I  (3)  Introduction  to  com- 
puter an  is  designed  to  provide  students  of 
graphics  and  fine  arts  with  the  skills  necessary  to 
utilize  the  computer  as  a  graphics  tool,  enabling 
students  to  incorporate  computer  art  technology 
into  their  work. 

206     Intermediate  Drawing  (3)  Work  in  a  vari- 
ety of  media  and  methods  designed  to  develop 
"aggressive  seeing."  Emphasis  on  the  exploration 
of  line  as  boundary  to  describe  form  and  space, 
as  gesture,  as  calligraphy,  and  for  expressive 
qualities  as  a  tool  for  working  in  other  media. 
PREREQ:  ART  106 

210  Typography  I  (3)  An  introduction  to  the 
use  of  type  as  a  basic  element  of  graphic  com- 
munication; the  use  of  different  type  faces  to 
communicate  visually  desired  effects,  typeform, 
type  indication,  type  spacing,  comp  lettering,  and 
basic  design  with  t>'pe  for  layouts  and 
comprehensives.  Offered  in  fall. 

211  Graphic  Design  I:  Lettering  and  Layout 
(3)  Exploration  of  design  principles  through  use 
of  lettering  and  typographic  forms  as  source 
material  for  solving  problems  in  communication 
of  ideas.  Practical  approach  to  use  of  drafting 
tools  and  graphic  materials  and  basic  paste-up 


procedures.  Color  separation  and  over-printing 
methods,  preparation  of  mechanicals  for  produc- 
tion purposes,  and  means  of  reproduction. 

212  Graphic  Design  II:  Graphic  Concepts  (3) 
Continuation  of  ART  211  with  emphasis  on 
expressive  possibilities  of  lettering  and  typogra- 
phy. Further  study  of  production  methods  and 
use  of  silk  screen  techniques  as  means  of  repro- 
duction. PREREQ:  ART  211,  242.  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

213  Computer  Art  II  (3)  An  advanced  study  of 
the  computer  as  a  design  tool.  The  computer  will 
be  used  to  incorporate  typography  and  graphic 
design  solutions  utilizing  page  layout  software. 

216  Beginning  Painting  (3)  An  introduction  to 
the  basic  materials  and  techniques  of  the  painter 
with  emphasis  on  color. 

217  Intermediate  Painting  (3)  The  course 
seeks  to  provide  a  workshop  atmosphere  in 
which  the  student  is  given  the  opportunity  to 
explore  the  potential  of  the  painting  media.  Use 
of  standard  materials  of  paint,  brushes,  and  can- 
vas is  required. 

220  Fumdamentak  of  3-Dimensional  Design  (3) 
An  introduction  to  the  theories,  processes,  and  ele- 
ments of  perception  and  visual  design  in  a  three- 
dimensional  situation.  Problems  will  be  geared  to 
problem  solving  rather  than  object  making. 

221  Advanced  3-Dimensional  Design  (3)  Solv- 
ing problems  of  relating  visual  elements  to 
volumetric  forms  in  space  by  experimenting  with 
various  materiab. 

222  Beginning  Sculpture  (3)  An  introduction 
to  the  basic  fundamentals  of  sculpture,  including 
concepts  of  design,  knowledge  of  tools  and  tech- 
niques, and  materials  and  processes.  Project 
assignments  to  be  rendered  in  clay,  plaster, 
wood,  and  stone. 

226  Water  Color  I  (3)  An  introduction  to  the 
basic  tools  and  techniques  of  the  water-color 
painter.  Emphasis  upon  transparent  water  color. 

227  Water  Color  II  (3)  Advanced  problems  in 
water  color,  gouache,  tempera,  and  mixed  media. 


231  Ceramics  I:  Basic  Techniques  (3)  Intro- 
duction to  the  basic  techniques  of  ceramics. 
Hand  and  wheel  methods  of  construction; 
knowledge  of  cby  bodies,  firing,  and  glazing. 

232  Ceramics  U:  Intermediate  Techniques  (3) 
Fundamental  methods  of  creating  clay  forms  on 
the  wheel.  Experimentation  with  clay  bodies, 
glazes,  and  Idln  operation.  Design  is  stressed. 

241  Printmaking:  Introduction  of  Relief 
Printmaldng  (3)  An  introduction  to  the  medium 
of  printmaking:  linoleum  cuts,  woodcuts,  and 
colorgraphs. 

242  Printmaking:  Introduction  to  Silk-Screen 
Printmaking  (3)  An  exploration  of  the  basic 
techniques  of  silk-screen  printing.  Emphasis  on 
color  and  design. 

243  Printmaking:  Intermediate  Relief 
Printmaking  (3)  Continuation  of  ART  241, 
emphasizing  expressive  possible  techniques  and 
their  combination  with  other  print  media. 
PREREQ:  ART  241.  or  permission  of  instructor. 

244  Printmaking:  Intermediate  Silk-Screen 
Printmaking  (3)  Continuation  of  ART  242, 
emphasizing  expressive  possibilities  of  various 
silk-screen  techniques  and  their  combination 
witii  odier  print  media.  PREREQ:  ART  242,  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

245  Architectural  Drawing  (3)  Studio  experi- 
ences in  layout;  preparation  of  plans  and  eleva- 
tions, presentations  (renderings),  and  architec- 
tural lettering.  Use  of  mechanical  drawing  toob 
to  help  students  express  steps  that  occur  from 
design  to  realization  of  a  structure. 

251  An  in  the  Elementary  School  (3)  Work- 
shop and  seminar  providing  experience  with  a 
wide  variety  of  media  appropriate  for  use  with 
children.  Investigation  into  the  philosophy  and 
psychology  of  children's  art. 
"263  Art  as  Therapy  (3)  Exploration  of  the 
potential  of  an  activities  as  therapy  in  work 


I  Culture  Cluster 


Department  of  Art 


with  physically  or  emotionally  handicapped  indi- 
viduals in  either  educational  or  therapeutic 
milieu. 

266     Introduction  to  Crafts  (3)  An  introduction 
to  varied  materials  with  an  emphasis  on  craft 
and  design  as  a  form  of  expression.  Applicable  to 
teaching  and  recreation  use.  Media  to  include 
clay,  fibers,  glass,  and  metals. 

306  Drawing  HI:  Life  Drawing  (3)  An  explora- 
tion of  the  abstract  dynamics  of  figure  drawing 
with  particular  apphcation  of  anatomical  struc- 
ture to  expressive  design.  PREREQ:  ART  106 
and  206. 

307  Drawing  IV  (3-6)  Individualized  instruc- 
tion in  increasingly  complex  formal  and  expres- 
sive problems  in  drawing. 

310  Graphic  Design:  Trademark  and  Logotype 
(3)  Experimentation  with  designing  trademark 
and  logotype  symbols  in  single  and  multipattem 
images  as  applied  to  a  variety  of  advertising 
media  for  private  and  public  agencies.  PREREQ: 
ART  211  and  242,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

311  Graphic  Design:  Independent  Project  (3) 
Individualized  instruction  in  design  problems  at 
an  advanced  level. 

312  Graphic  Design  IV:  3-Dimensional  Graph- 
ics (3)  Problems  in  advanced  design;  the  applica- 
tion of  previous  studies  in  design  to  specific 
projects.  PREREQ:  ART  211  and  242,  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor. 

316  Advanced  Painting  (3)  Emphasis  on 
advanced  problems  in  painting  in  a  variety  of 
techniques.  Individual  expression  is  encouraged. 

317  Painting:  Studio  Problems  (3)  Concentra- 
tion on  individual  work  and  professional  compe- 
tence. Group  critiques  and  discussions. 

318  Painting  from  Landscape:  Independent 
Project  (3)  Individualized  landscape  painting 
course  requiring  the  student  to  paint  on  location 
in  the  Delaware  Valley. 

319  Painting  From  Masters:  Independent 
Project  (3)  Introduces  the  student  artist  to  tech- 
niques and  styles  by  painting  from  master  works. 

320  Painting:  Independent  Projects  (3)  The 
development  of  a  personal  style  is  explored 
through  a  theme  and  its  variation.  Discipline  and 
self-criticism  are  realized  through  a  series  of  cri- 
tiques and  evaluations. 

321  Intermediate  Sculpture  (3)  More  advanced 
problems  in  sculpture  with  emphasis  on  individ- 
ual exploration  of  form,  structure,  and  process. 
Independent  project  to  be  rendered  in  choice  of 
materials,  including  clay,  plaster,  wood,  and 
stone. 

322  Advanced  Scuplture  (3)  Continued  explo- 
ration and  development  of  individual  form  and 
process  awareness  through  involvement  with 
modeling,  casting,  fabrication,  and  assemblages. 
In  addition  to  clay,  wood,  stone,  and  plaster, 
metals  and  plastics  will  be  utilized. 

323  Abstract  Painting  (3)  A  studio  exploration 
of  the  fundamental  principles  of  abstract  paint- 
ing. 

325     Sculpture:  Independent  Projects  (3)  Indi- 
vidualized instruction  in  advanced  sculpture. 
Preparation  for  senior  show. 

331  Ceramics  III:  Advanced  Techniques  (3) 
An  advanced  course  to  develop  craftsmanship 
and  to  explore  clay  as  a  means  of  individual 
expression. 

332  Ceramics:  Studio  Problems  (3)  Work  at 
an  advanced  level  in  specialized  ceramic  tech- 
niques. 

335     Ceramics:  Independent  Projects  (3)  Indi- 
vidualized instruction  as  well  as  research  and 
study  in  ceramic  design. 
341     Printmaking:  Introduction  to  Intaglio 
Printmaking  (3)  IntagUo  techniques,  etching,  dry 
point,  acquatint,  and  engraving. 


342  Printmaking:  Introduction  to  Lithography 
(3)  Fundamentab  of  stone  and  plate  lithography. 

343  Printmaking:  Intermediate  Etching  (3) 
Continuation  of  341  with  emphasis  on  expres- 
sive qualities  of  the  medium  and  its  possible 
combination  with  other  print  media.  PREREQ: 
ART  341,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

344  Printmaking:  Intermediate  Lithography 
(3)  Continuation  of  ART  342  with  emphasis  on 
expressive  qualities  of  the  medium  and  its  possi- 
ble combination  with  other  print  media. 
PREREQ:  ART  342,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

345  Printmaking:  Independent  Projects  (3)  In- 
depth,  individualized  instruction  in  a  selected 
printmaking  medium. 

347  Crafts:  Weaving  I  (3)  Basic  techniques  of 
weaving  are  explored  with  emphasis  on  fabric 
design  and  craftsmanship. 

348  Crafts:  Weaving  II  (3)  Provides  an  oppor- 
tunity for  the  weaver  to  further  explore  and 
develop  skills  as  a  designer.  Emphasis  is  placed 
on  the  interrelationship  between  functional 
materials  and  design  processes. 

349  Crafts:  Weaving  III  (3)  Resolving 
advanced  weaving  problems  in  individual 
projects.  Harnessing  the  student's  creative  nature 
for  practical  apphcation. 

359     Resources  in  Art  Education  (3)  The  use  of 
cultural  and  community  resources  in  the  schools 
with  an  emphasis  on  the  teaching  of  an  appreci- 
ation. 

♦  409    Weaving:  Independent  Projects  (3) 
Individualized  instruction  and  project  assign- 
ments. 

410     Independent  Study  (3)  The  opponunity 
for  a  student  to  work  on  an  individual  snidio 
problem.  Only  to  be  taken  under  advisement  and 
according  to  departmental  policies. 
450    Art-Graphic  Design  Internship  (3)  Inte- 
gration of  classroom  study  and  lab  work  with 
specific  planned  periods  of  learning  through  job 
experience.  The  course  is  based  on  an  individual- 
ized, student-oriented,  learning  contract. 

♦  455  Introduction  to  Multimedia  (3)  A  work- 
shop for  students  with  background  in  the  studio 
arts.  To  be  taken  under  advisement. 

490  Graphic  Design  V  (3)  To  resolve  visual 
communication  problems  of  a  diverse  nature  by 
graphic  means,  using  elements  of  typography 
symbols,  and  pictorial  images,  including  photog- 
raphy. PREREQ:  ART  211,  212,  310,  and  312,  or 
by  special  permission  of  instructor. 

491  Graphic  Design  VI  (3)  Continuation  of 
studies  outlined  in  Graphic  Design  V,  and  com- 
pletion of  projects  begun  in  that  course.  Printed 
an  samples,  using  photo-silk-screen  method  of 
reproduction.  PREREQ:  ART  211,  212,  310,  312, 
and  490,  or  by  special  permission  of  instructor. 
499     Graphic  Design:  Independent  Project  (3) 
Advanced  independent  study.  The  student  com- 
piles a  portfolio  in  graphic  designs  and  prints  for 
professional  employment  or  graduate  study. 

ART  HISTORY 

Symbol:  ARH 

101  Learning  to  Look:  Fine  Arts,  Art  (3)  An 
introduction  to  painting,  sculpture,  architecture, 
and  the  decorative  arts  with  emphasis  on  under- 
standing the  visual  arts  as  universal  human 
expression. 

102  Survey  of  Art  History  (3)  A  general  intro- 
duction to  the  history  of  western  art  from  the 
earliest  cave  paintings  to  the  20th  century. 

103  Art  History  I:  Prehistory  Through  the 
Medieval  (3)  Survey  of  significant  an  and  archi- 
tectural monuments  from  prehistory  through  the 
Middle  Ages. 


104     Art  History  II:  Renaissance  Through  Mod- 
em (3)  Continuation  of  ART  103.  The  Renais- 
sance through  the  20th  century. 
350     "Primitive"  Art  (also  ANT  350)  (3)  Analy- 
sis of  primitive  art  as  determined  through  ritual 
and  myth.  Focus  includes  ethnographic  parallels 
to  prehistory  and  the  concept  of  primitivism  in 
the  West. 

360  Function  of  the  Museum  in  Art  (3)  Role 
and  function  of  the  museum  as  an  educational 
and  cultural  institution.  Main  focus  on  field  trips 
to  local  museums  in  Chester  and  Delaware 
Counties  and  the  Wilmington,  Del.,  area. 

361  Museum  Practice  (3)  Field  experience  in  a 
particular  museum  facility  in  the  West  Chester, 
Wihnington,  or  Philadelphia  area.  PREREQ:  ARH 
360. 

381     Near  Eastern  Art:  Ancient  Antiquity  (3) 
The  art  and  architecture  of  Ancient  Egypt, 
Mesopotamia,  Assyria,  and  Babylonia  from  3000- 
500  B.C. 

"382    Art  of  Classical  Antiquity  (3)  The  art 
and  architecture  of  the  Greeks,  Etruscans,  and 
Romans. 

'383    Art  of  Middle  Ages  (3)  The  art  and  archi- 
tecture of  the  European  medieval  world  and 
their  development  from  Early  Christian  and 
Romanesque  art  into  the  full  flowering  of  the 
Gothic  period. 

"384    Art  of  Renaissance-Baroque  (3)  Study  of 
the  an  forms  of  the  15th  through  17th  centuries 
in  Europe  as  they  affected  social  and  religious 
cross  currents  and  the  rise  of  the  role  of  the  art- 
ist in  society. 

"385     The  Romantic  Rebellion  (3)  From  David 
to  Rodin:  the  rise  and  development  of  the 
Romantic  style  and  its  struggle  with  orthodox 
Classicism. 

386  Modem  Art  Seminar  (3)  Analysis  of  major 
styles  of  20th-century  art  to  mid-century,  includ- 
ing Picasso. 

387  Modem  Masters  (3)  An  independent 
research  project  on  a  major  20th-century  visual 
artist. 

388  Late  Modem  Art  (3)  The  study  of  art 
beyond  1945,  including  the  mainstreams  of  art 
to  the  present  time. 

♦  400    Art  Seminar  (3)  Special  topics  to  be 
announced  for  studio  and  an  history.  Offered 
periodically  as  appropriate.  PREREQ:  Permission 
of  instructor. 

"405     Russian  Art  (3)  A  history  of  the  art  and 
architecture  of  Russia  from  Medieval  beginnings 
through  social  realism  to  socialist  realism. 
408     French  Painting:  Pucelle  to  Picasso  (3) 
Survey  of  French  painting  and  related  arts  from 
the  14th  century  through  World  War  I.  Emphasis 
on  France  as  a  cultural  center  and  on  the  rela- 
tionship of  French  history,  politics,  and  social 
change  to  developments  in  French  painting. 

413  American  Art  (3)  A  survey  of  American 
paintings  and  sculpture  from  Colonial  times  to 
the  present. 

414  Research  and  Methodology  in  Art  (3) 
Introduction  to  basic  research  methods  and  the 
use  of  reference  material  relevant  to  the  study  of 
an  history. 

415  Art  History:  Independent  Study  (3) 
Opportunity  for  the  student  to  pursue  a  particu- 
lar field  of  interest. 

416  American  Architecture:  Colonial  and 
Early  Republic  (3)  An  introduction  to  the  heri- 
tage of  our  early  American  architecture.  These 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
"  Culture  Cluster 


Depanment  of  Biology 


buildings  reveal  tangible  evidence  of  the  life  of 
the  early  colonial  period  and  of  the  republic.  The 
influence  of  the  traditional,  coupled  with  modifi- 
cations because  of  climate,  materials,  and  labor, 
reflect  both  provincialism  and  independence. 
417     Modem  American  Architecture  (3)  Study 
of  architectural  forms  and  styles  in  America 
since  the  early  19th  century,  including  a  thor- 
ough analysis  and  consequent  appreciation  and 
understanding  of  the  social,  stylistic,  and  techno- 
logical sources  for  our  19th-  and  20th-century 
built  environment. 


419  Women  in  Art:  Madoima  or  Model?  (3) 
Traces  the  position  of  women  artists  in  society 
and  its  effects  on  their  work.  What  role  have 
women  played  as  the  subject  of  painting  through 
the  ages?  What  are  women  artists  creating  today? 

420  European  Architecture  (3)  Survey  of 
European  architecture  from  the  Norman  Con- 
quest to  the  20th  century. 

421  Modem  Architecture  (3)  Traces  the  tech- 
nological sources  of  modem  architecture  from  its 
roots  in  the  19th  century  to  the  bte  20th  cen- 
tury. Includes  such  influences  as  the  Chicago 


School,  the  late  Califomians,  and  the  Bauhaus, 
leading  to  new  concepts  of  space,  decoration, 
and  use  of  materials. 

'485     Classical  Archaeology  (3)  A  study  of 
Greek,  Etruscan,  and  Roman  archaeology.  Theo- 
ries of  archaeology  are  given  practical  application 
in  the  field.  The  discovery,  preservation,  and 
analysis  of  finds  from  the  classical  world  are 
studied. 


'Culture  cluster. 


Department  of  Biology 
(See  also  Pre-Medical  Program) 

Martha  Potvin,  Chairperson 

Georgann  CuUen,  Assiscanc  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Eleuterio,  Fish,  Romig,  Waber,  Woodruff 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Benesld,  Bernhardt,  CuUen, 
Fairchild,  Mbuy,  Potvin,  Triano 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Began,  Broitman,  Greenamyer, 

Knabb,  Slusher,  Tiebout,  Vreeland 

ADJUNCT  PROFESSORS:  Bendey,  Ford,  Goddn,  McClean, 
White,  Woods 

The  major  in  biology  centers  on  a  core  of  courses  that 
emphasize  broad  unifying  principles.  Available  electives  pro- 
vide enriching  experiences  in  many  areas  of  biology. 
The  Department  of  Biology  offers  six  undergraduate  degree 
programs: 

1.  The  B.A.  in  BIOLOGY  provides  the  liberal  education  and  the 
special  preparation  required  for  careers  in  university  teaching, 
government  service,  independent  and  industrial  research, 
science-related  sales  and  public  relations,  and  other  areas  of 
business.  This  program  also  prepares  students  for  admission  to 
graduate  and  professional  schools.  The  possibility  of  3 1  semester 
hours  of  free  electives  enables  the  student  to  obtain  a  minor  in 
another  area  of  interest. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY  can  be  individually  tailored  to  provide  the 
skills  that  students  need  to  achieve  their  career  goals.  This 
program  also  provides  the  basic  preparation  needed  for  entry 
into  graduate  or  professional  schools. 

In  addition,  this  degree  offers  a  unique  opportunity  for 
biology  majors  to  enter  the  field  of  medical  technology.  A 
medical  technologist  is  educated  to  perform,  verify,  and  interpret 
a  wide  variety  of  laboratory  analyses  in  hematology,  immunol- 
ogy, and  microbiology.  They  often  supervise  medical  techni- 
cians, and  because  they  have  a  B.S.,  they  can  often  advance  to 
positions  in  management,  research,  and  education. 

Under  special  advisement,  students  complete  all  of  the  neces- 
sary general  education  and  departmental  requirements  of  the 
B.S.  in  biology  program  in  three  years.  The  fourth  year  is  spent 
in  a  medical  technologist  internship  program  at  one  of  several 
affiliated  hospitals.  To  qualify  for  the  internship,  a  student  must 
have  an  overall  GPA  of  2.75,  a  science  GPA  of  2.50,  and 
approval  of  the  Department  of  Biology  and  the  afiiUated  hospital. 
Students  completing  the  internship  graduate  with  a  B.S.  and  the 
preparation  to  take  the  national  Medical  Technologist  Certifica- 
tion Exam.  Affiliated  hospitals  include  Chester  County  Hospital 
and  Medical  College  Hospital.  It  may  also  be  possible  to  complete 


the  internship  at  a  nonaffiliated  hospital.  Students  are  encour- 
aged to  consult  the  medical  technology  adviser  at  regular  inter- 
vals. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  CELL  and  MOLECULAR  BIOLOGY  offers  the  stu- 
dent a  strong  background  in  both  biology  and  chemistry. 
Emphasis  on  lab-oriented  courses  prepares  the  student  to  pursue 
a  career  in  laborator)'  research  in  cell  and  molecular  biology  at 
industrial,  medical,  academic,  and  government  facilities.  This 
program  also  prepares  the  student  for  admission  to  graduate  and 
professional  schools. 

4.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY-MICROBIOLOGY  prepares  students  for 
careers  in  research  laboratories,  industrial  and  academic  research, 
and  government  service  in  the  areas  of  bacteriology,  immunology, 
virology,  mycology,  microbial  ecology,  and  parasitology.  The  pro- 
gram provides  extensive  laboratory  experience  with  the  tech- 
niques that  are  most  usehil  and  important  to  modem  microbio- 
logical science.  This  program  abo  provides  the  basic  preparation 
needed  for  entry  into  graduate  or  professional  schools. 

5.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY-ECOLOGY  provides  an  opponunity  for 
interested  students  to  obtain  a  strong  background  in  field  biology. 
The  required  core  curriculum  and  concentration  electives  provide 
opportunities  for  later  careers  as  biologists  in  state  and  federal 
environmental  agencies,  industry,  environmental  consulting  firms, 
and  similar  organizations.  Internships  are  strongly  recommended 
as  part  of  the  program.  Course  work  emphasizes  skills  obtained  in 
biology,  chemistry,  and  mathematics.  Additional  course  work 
from  other  departments  may  be  recommended  to  fulfill  particular 
career  objectives. 

6.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION-BIOLOGY  is  a  program  designed  to 
prepare  the  student  for  a  career  in  teaching  in  secondary  schools. 
Professional  certification  in  biology  is  awarded  to  the  student  who 
completes  the  program  satisfactorily.  Students  are  strongly  advised 
to  seek  certification  in  a  related  area  to  enhance  their  employment 
potential.  Such  related  areas  include  general  science,  health,  edu- 
cation, athletic  training,  and  environmental  education, 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  BACCALAUREATE 
PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Biology  Requirements* 
BIO  no,  220,  230,  and  490 

3.  Other  Science  Requirements 
CHE  103-104,  231-232,  CRL  103-104,  232, 
and  PHY  130-140 

4.  Mathematics  Requirements 
MAT  121,  one  semester  of  calculus,  and  one 
semester  of  computer  science 

B,A.  IN  BIOLOGY 

1.  Required  Biology  Courses* 
BIO  110,  215,  217,  220,  230,  270,  and  490 

2.  Biology  Electives 


5 1  semester  hours 
10  semester  hours 

27  semester  hours 


10  semester  hours 


19  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


Department  of  Biology 


Selected  under  advisement 
3.   Foreign  Language  Requirement 

B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY 

1.  Required  Biology  Courses* 

BIO  110,  215,  217,  220,  230,  270,  490 

2.  Biology  Electives 
Selected  under  advisement 


B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY- CELL  AND  MOLECULAR 

1 .  Required  Chemistry  Courses 
CHE  345,  471,  491",  and  CRL  471 

2.  Required  Biology  Courses* 
BIO  110,  214,  215  or  217,  220,  230,  421, 
466  or  468,  and  490** 

3.  Biology  or  Chemistry  Electives 
Selected  from  courses  at  or  above  the 
300  level 

B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY-MICROBIOLOGY 

1.  Required  Biology  Courses* 
BIO  110,  214,  215  or  217,  220,  230,  314, 
421,  454  or  452,  456,  464,  465,  and  490 

2.  Biology  Electives 
Selected  under  advisement 

B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY-ECOLOGY 

1 .  Required  Biology  Courses* 
BIO  110,  215,  217,  220,  230,  270,  411, 
470,  and  490 

2.  Biology  Electives 
Selected  under  advisement  from  BIO  275, 
277,  372,  377,  471,  475,  <76,  and  485 

3.  Ecologically  relevant  courses  selected  under 
advisement 

B.S.  IN  EDUCATION-BIOLOGY 

1.  Required  Biology  Courses* 
BIO  110,  150,  215,  217,  220,  230,  270, 
and  490 

2.  Biology  Electives 
Selected  under  advisement 

3.  Required  Education  Courses 


up  to  12  semester  hours 

19  semester  hours 

24  semester  hours 

8-9  semester  hours 
24-25  semester  hours 

13-15  semester  hours 

34  semester  hours 
10-13  semester  hours 

25  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 

20  semester  hours 

1 1  semester  hours 
30  semester  hours 


MEDICAL  TECHNOLOGY  OPTION 

1.  Required  Biology  Courses* 

BIO  110,  214,  215,  217,  220,  230,  270,  465, 
and  490 

2.  BIO  407  and  408  (internship) 
Selected  under  advisement 


27  semester  hours 


32  semester  hours 


Minor  in  Biology 

The  Department  of  Biology  offers  a  minor  in  biology.  The  biology 

minor  requirements  are: 

1.  BIO  110,  General  Biology  (must  be  passed  with  a  C—  or  better), 
or  BIO  100,  Basic  Biological  Science  (must  be  passed  with  a 
grade  of  A). 

2.  BIO  215,  General  Botany  or  BIO  217,  General  Zoology  (must  be 
passed  with  a  C-  or  better). 

3.  After  fuUfillment  of  requirements  1  and  2,  additional  biology 
elective  courses,  for  which  the  student  has  the  appropriate  pre- 
requisites, will  be  selected  under  advisement  with  the  minor 
adviser.  These  courses  will  be  at  the  200  level  or  higher,  and 
8-9  credits  must  be  over  and  above  courses  required  for  the  stu- 
dent's major. 

4.  A  minimum  of  17  credits  and  a  maximum  of  21  credits  must  be 
taken  for  a  minor  in  biology. 

5.  To  graduate  with  a  biology  minor,  students  must  maintain  a  GPA 
of  2.00  in  the  minor  courses,  and  they  must  meet  with  the 
minor  adviser  at  least  once  per  semester. 

NOTE  (transfer  students  only):  In  order  to  receive  a  degree  in  biol- 
ogy from  West  Chester  University,  a  transfer  student  must  success- 
fully complete  a  minimum  of  12  semester  hours  of  biology  courses 
in  the  West  Chester  University  Department  of  Biology. 

Advanced  Placement  Policy 

A  score  of  three  on  the  Biology  Advanced  Placement  Exam  of  the 
Scholastic  Aptitude  Test  (SAT)  will  allow  a  student  to  begin  his  or 
her  studies  without  having  to  take  BIO  110,  General  Biology.  Stu- 
dents who  are  granted  advanced  placement  in  biology  take  an  addi- 
tional three  hours  of  electives  in  biology. 


•Biology  core  courses  must  be  passed  with  a  grade  of  C- 
•*CHE  491  may  be  substituted  for  BIO  490. 


(70)  or  better. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
BIOLOGY 

Symbol:  BIO  unless  otherwise  shown 
(3,2)  represents  three  hours  of  lecture  and 
two  hours  of  lab. 

*100     Basic  Biological  Science  (3)  Basic  princi- 
ples of  biology.  Cell  theory,  metabolism,  genet- 
ics, development,  diversity  of  life  forms,  and 
ecology.  Not  open  to  biology  majors.  (2,2) 

#102     Humans  and  the  Environment  (3)  The 

effects  of  human  population  on  earth's  resources 
are  studied  against  a  background  of  physical, 
biological,  and  health  sciences. 

♦  110     General  Biology  (3)  The  concepts  general 
to  all  living  organisms  such  as  cell  structure  and 
function,  genetics,  evolution,  and  ecology.  This 
course  is  designed  for  majors  in  biology  and 
related  scientific  areas.  (2,3) 

150     Contemporary  Issues  in  Biology  Teaching 
(1)  Secondary  science  curriculum,  professional 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 
#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


organizations,  and  academic  preparation  of  sci- 
ence and  teachers.  (1,1)  May  not  be  taken  as  a 
biology  major  elective. 
172     Field  Ecology  and  Natural  History  (3) 
Class  and  field  work  in  natural  history  and  ecol- 
ogy. Identification  of  local  organisms  and  perti- 
nent ecological  concepts.  Not  counted  toward  a 
biology  major.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
department. 

204     Introductory  Microbiology  (4)  The  biology 
of  medically  important  microorganisms,  their 
structure,  taxonomy,  physiology,  control,  and 
host-parasite  interactions.  (3,2)  PREREQ:  BIO 
100  and  one  semester  of  chemistry.  May  not  be 
taken  as  a  biology  major  elective. 
214     General  Microbiology  (4)  The  biology  of 
microorganisms,  their  structure,  physiology,  and 
control;  the  nature  and  dynamics  of  disease  and 
disease  control;  principles  of  food,  industrial, 
and  environmental  microbiology.  The  laboratory 
will  deal  with  microbiological  techniques,  isola- 
tion and  identification  of  microbes,  and  water 
and  food  analysis.  This  course  is  for  biology 
majors.  (3,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110  and  one  semes- 
ter of  chemistry. 


215     General  Botany  (3)  A  survey  of  plant  and 
plant-like  organisms  from  bacteria  to  and  includ- 
ing the  angiosperms  with  emphasis  on  anatomy, 
physiology,  reproduction,  and  economic  impor- 
tance. (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110. 

217     General  Zoology  (3)  Principles  of  animal 
biology.  Form  and  function  of  vertebrate  and 
invertebrate  animal  types  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO 
110. 

220     Cell  Physiology  (3)  An  introduction  to 
cellular  and  molecular  biology  with  emphasis  on 
cell  morphology,  biochemistry,  and  cell  physiol- 
ogy. (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110  and  CHEM  230  or 
231  (may  be  taken  concurrently). 

230  Genetics  (3)  Nature  of  genetic  material 
and  its  qualitative  and  quantitative  variation: 
recombination;  interaction  of  gene  products; 
regulation  of  genetic  material;  and  its  role  in 
evolution.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110  and  MAT 
121. 

259     Human  Anatomy  and  Physiology  I  (4)  An 
introduction  to  human  structure  and  function. 
Skeletal,  muscular,  and  nervous  systems  are 


j9      Department  of  Biology 


emphasized.  Laboratory  involves  study  of  the 
human  skeleton  and  dissection  of  preserved  cats. 
(3,2)  May  not  be  taken  as  a  biology  major  elec- 
tive. 

269  Human  Anatomy  and  Physiology  II  (4) 
Continuation  of  BIO  259.  Circulatory,  respira- 
tory, digestive,  and  urogenital  systems  empha- 
sized. (3,2)  May  not  be  taken  as  a  biology  major 
elective.  PREREQ:  BIO  259. 

270  General  Ecology  (3)  Relationships  between 
living  organisms  and  their  environment.  (2,3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  110.  Recommended  are  BIO  215, 
217,  MAT  121,  and  one  semester  of  computer 
science. 

275     Field  Botany  (3)  Methods  of  studying 
plants  in  their  natural  surroundings.  Use  of  keys, 
botanical  manuals,  and  illustrated  floras  to  iden- 
tify living  specimens.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  100  or 
215. 

277    Vertebrate  Ecology  (3)  Animal  life  in  the 
surrounding  localities.  Identification,  behavior, 
habitats,  feeding,  and  reproduction.  (2,3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  100  or  217.  Offered  in  fall  of  odd- 
numbered  years. 

307     Pathophysiology  (3)  An  integrated  study 
of  the  processes  involved  in  the  total  body  sys- 
temic complex  as  it  changes  from  the  ordered 
homeostatic  condition  to  the  imbalanced  dis- 
eased state.  The  use  of  disease  models,  with  clin- 
ical considerations,  strengthens  the  concepts.  (3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  259  and  269.  Offered  in  fall.  May 
not  be  taken  as  a  biology  major  elective. 
314     Diagnostic  Bacteriology  (3)  Systematic 
study  of  pathogenic  bacteria  with  extensive  labo- 
ratory experience  in  handling  and  identifying 
these  organisms.  (3,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  214. 
357     Comparative  Vertebrate  Anatomy  (4) 
Comparative  study  of  the  principal  organ  sys- 
tems of  vertebrates  as  to  their  structure,  func- 
tion, and  evolutionary  relationships.  (2,4) 
PREREQ:  BIO  217.  Offered  in  fall. 
367     Physiology  of  Drug  Interaction  (3)  An 
introduction  to  the  mechanism  of  action  of  pro- 
totype drugs.  The  physiological  alterations  pro- 
duced by  various  drugs  as  well  as  interactions 
between  drug  classes  will  be  emphasized.  (3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  269  or  equivalent. 
372     Aquatic  Biology  (3)  A  laboratory  and  field- 
oriented  course  in  the  ecology  and  biota  of 
streams  and  wetlands.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  215, 
217,  270.  Offered  in  fall  of  odd-numbered  years. 
377     Entomology  (3)  The  structure,  function, 
classification,  economic  importance,  and  biologi- 
cal significance  of  insects.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO 
110  or  217.  Offered  every  other  year. 
407  and  408     Internship  in  Medical  Technology 
(16  for  each  semester,  total  of  32)  A  two- 
semester,  work-study  appointment  with  an  affili- 
ated hospital.  The  satisfactory  completion  of  this 
internship  is  accepted  as  the  senior  year's  work 
by  West  Chester  University.  This  internship  will 
prepare  the  student  to  take  the  National  Exam 
for  Medical  Technologists.  PREREQ:  Students 
who  have  completed  all  required  courses  and  96 
credit  hours  in  the  B.S.  biology  general  concen- 
tration may  apply  for  this  internship  in  the 
spring  semester  of  their  junior  year.  Students 
must  have  an  overall  GPA  of  2.75  and  a  GPA  of 
2.50  in  the  sciences  (biology,  chemistry,  and 
physics)  and  approval  from  the  Department  of 
Biology  and  the  affiliated  hospital. 
♦  409     Internship  in  Biological  Sciences  (3-16) 
A  one-semester,  work-study  appointment  with  a 
commercial,  industrial,  or  governmental  agency. 
Students  will  be  supervised  jointly  by  the  profes- 
sional scientist  of  the  agency  and  a  Department 
of  Biology  faculty  member.  A  maximum  of  eight 


combined  credits  from  BIO  409  and  BIO  491 
may  be  applied  to  biology  electives.  PREREQ: 
Senior  standing,  GPA  of  2.50,  and  approval  of 
biology  curriculum  committee. 
411     Biometrics  (3)  The  experimental  design 
and  computer-assisted  statistical  analysis  of  bio- 
logical research  problems.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO 
110  and  MAT  121. 

42 1     Cellular  and  Molecular  Biology  (4)  A  lec- 
ture and  laboratory  course  that  studies  the 
molecular  basis  of  cellular  Iffe  Eukaryotic  cell 
structure  and  function  will  be  emphasized.  (3,3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  110,  215  or  217,  220,  468;  CHE 
103,  104,  231,  232;  CRL  103,  104,  231,  232; 
MAT  121;  and  one  semester  of  calculus. 

428  Animal  Histology  (3)  A  study  of  the 
microscopic  structure  and  function  of  vertebrate 
tissues  and  organs.  (2,2)  PREREQ:  BIO  110  and 
217,  or  permission  of  the  instructor.  Offered  in 
faU. 

429  Microtechnique  (2)  An  introduction  to 
histological  and  histochemical  laboratory  tech- 
niques. (4)  PREREQ:  BIO  428  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

431     Molecular  Genetics  (3)  A  second  course  in 
genetics,  covering  the  molecular  biology  of 
genetic  events.  Emphasis  will  be  on  the  molecu- 
lar details  of  basic  genetic  processes,  such  as 
DNA  replication  and  transcription,  RNA  transla- 
tion and  protein  synthesis,  the  genetic  code, 
molecular  mechanisms  of  gene  regulation,  and 
an  introduction  to  "biotechnology. "  (3)  PREREQ: 
BIO  230  and  CHE  232. 
♦  435-438     Course  Topics  in  Biology  (1-3) 
Courses  in  this  series  are  of  timely  interest  to  the 
student.  Topics  may  include  biological  terminol- 
ogy, laboratory  techniques,  mycology,  etc.  Open 
only  to  junior  and  senior  science  majors. 
448    Animal  Development  (4)  Introduction  to 
principles  of  animal  development  with  laboratory 
study  of  venebrate  embryos.  (3-3)  PREREQ:  BIO 
110,  217,  220,  and  230.  Offered  in  spring. 
452     Parasitology  (3)  Biology  of  the  principal 
parasites  of  man  and  domestic  animals.  Emphasis 
is  on  life  cycles  of  common  parasites,  identifica- 
tion of  diagnostic  forms,  and  understanding  the 
diseases  associated  with  parasites  of  major  eco- 
nomic and  medical  importance.  (3)  PREREQ: 
BIO  204  or  214,  and  217.  Offered  in  spring  of 
even-numbered  years. 
454     Mycology  (3)  An  introductory  course 
including  a  general  study  of  the  biology  of  fungi 
and  a  survey  of  the  field  of  medical  mycology.  (3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  110  plus  another  three-credit-hour 
biology  course. 

456  Virology  (3)  Molecular  biology  of  bacte- 
rial, plant,  and  animal  viruses;  virus  classifica- 
tion, ultrastructure,  mechanisms  of  replication, 
and  effects  of  virus  infection  on  host  cell. 
PREREQ:  One  year  of  organic  chemistry  and  BIO 
230. 

457  Functional  Animal  Morphology  (3)  A 
study  of  the  structure,  form,  and  function  of 
morphological  adaptations  in  animals  as  exam- 
ined through  a  mechanical,  ecological,  and  evo- 
lutionary perspective.  (3)  PREREQ:  BIO  217. 

464  Microbial  Physiology  (3)  Physiology  and 
biochemical  variations  seen  in  prokaryotes  and 
lower  eukaryotes.  (2,4)  PREREQ:  BIO  214  and 
230,  and  CHE  232. 

465  Immunology  (4)  Immunoglobulin  struc- 
ture and  function,  nature  of  antigens,  cell- 
mediated  immunity,  hypersensitivity,  regulation 
of  immunity,  and  immunological  diseases.  Labo- 
ratory experience  in  immunological  techniques. 
(3,3)  PREREQ:  CHE  232. 


466  Plant  Physiology  (3)  Physiological  pro- 
cesses of  plants.  Photosynthesis,  respiration,  inter- 
mediary metabolism,  entrance  of  solutes  into  the 
plant,  water  metabolism,  and  growth  regulators. 
(2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  215  and  CHE  231. 

467  Endocrinology  (3)  An  integrative  look  at 
the  physiology  of  the  mammalian  endocrine  sys- 
tem in  the  regulation  and  maintenance  of 
homeostasis.  The  pathology  associated  with  hor- 
monal imbalance  will  be  included.  (3)  PREREQ: 
BIO  220  and  BIO  468.  Offered  in  spring  of  odd- 
numbered  years. 

468  General  Animal  Physiology  (4)  General 
theoretical  and  applied  principles  of  the  physiol- 
ogy of  various  animal  cells,  tissues,  and  organs 
with  an  emphasis  on  homeostasis  and  mamma- 
lian physiology  (3,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110,  CHE 
232,  and  MAT  161. 

470  Population  Biology  (3)  A  quantitative,  sec- 
ond course  in  ecology,  emphasizing  distribu- 
tional patterns  and  fluctuations  in  abundance  of 
natural  populations.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  270, 
MAT  121,  and  one  semester  of  calculus. 

471  Wetlands  (3)  A  course  designed  to  provide 
practical  experience  in  wetlands'  classification, 
delineation,  regulation,  management,  and  mitiga- 
tion practices.  The  abiotic  and  biotic  characteris- 
tics of  inland  and  coastal  wetlands  are  empha- 
sized. (2,3)  PREREQ:  Eight  hours  of  biology  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

475  Plant  Communities  (3)  A  survey  of  eco- 
logical, morphological,  and  physiological  strate- 
gies of  plants  from  seed  through  adult  stages. 
The  integration  of  these  strategies  to  explain  the 
major  plant  communities  of  North  America  will 
be  covered.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  215. 

476  Limnology  (3)  The  measurement  and  anal- 
ysis of  the  physical,  chemical,  and  biological 
properties  of  lakes.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110  and 
CHE  103-104. 

480     Light  Microscopy  and  the  Living  Cell  (3) 
A  one-semester  lecture  and  lab  course  covering 
the  theory  and  practical  techniques  of  all  types 
of  light  microscopy  and  their  uses  in  investigat- 
ing living  cells.  Also  includes  techniques  such  as 
microinjection,  cell  electrophysiology,  and  oth- 
ers. Strong  emphasis  on  "hands-on"  work  with 
equipment.  (2,2). 

484  Epidemiology  (3)  A  general  study  of 
the  epidemiology  of  both  infectious  and 
noninfectious  diseases,  including  industrial  and 
environmentally  related  health  problems.  (3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  214. 

485  Systematic  Botany  (3)  Principles  of  evolu- 
tion as  illustrated  by  the  principles  of  plant  tax- 
onomy. Modem  concepts  of  biosystematics.  Prac- 
tical experience  in  plant  identification.  (2,3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  215. 

490     Biology  Seminar  (1)  Reports  on  special 
topics  and  current  developments  in  the  biologi- 
cal sciences.  PREREQ:  BIO  110,  215  or  217,  220, 
230,  and  six  hours  of  300-400  level  biology 
courses. 

♦  491  Special  Problems  in  Biology  (1-3)  Tuto- 
rial course  primarily  for  advanced  undergraduate 
biology  majors  capable  of  independent  study  and 
research  on  a  problem  approved  by  the  supervis- 
ing instructor.  A  maximum  of  eight  combined 
credits  from  BIO  409  and  BIO  491  may  be 
applied  to  biology  electives.  PREREQ:  Permission 
of  instructor. 

#SCB  210    The  Origin  of  Ufe  and  the  Uni- 
verse (3)  An  interdisciplinary  course  that  pre- 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Department  of  Chemistry 


sents  the  theory  and  evidence  for  the  first  three 
minutes  of  the  universe  and  formation  of  the 
stars,  galaxies,  planets,  organic  molecules,  and 
the  genetic  basis  of  organic  evolution.  (3)  May 


not  be  taken  as  a  biology  major  elective. 
PREREQ:  High  school  or  college  courses  in  at 
least  two  sciences. 

SCB  350     Science  Education  in  the  Secondary 
School  (3)  A  methods  course  emphasizing 


knowledge  of  curricular  development  and  skill  in 
planning,  involving  the  design  and  execution  of 
learning  activities  for  aU  instructional  modes. 
(2.2) 


Department  of  Chemistry 
(See  also  Pre-Medical  Program) 

Jamal  Ghoroghchian,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Durand,  Fenton,  Goudy,  Magnuson, 
Mangravite,  Moran,  Rudnick,  Torop,  Witonsky 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Ahmad,  Cichowicz, 
Ghoroghchian,  Reid,  Ressner 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Barth,  Frost,  Falcone 

The  Department  of  Chemistry  offers  five  undergraduate 
degree  programs: 

(1)  The  B.S.  in  CHEMISTRY  program  (certified  by  the  American 
Chemical  Society)  enables  students  to  receive  basic  preparation 
required  for  the  careers  in  chemistry  of  their  choice.  Such 
choices  include  positions  as  college  and  university  teachers, 
professional  chemists,  researchers,  and  in  various  services  in 
industry  and  government.  In  all  cases,  the  program  prepares 
students  for  graduate  study  in  the  field  of  chemistry. 

(2)  The  B.S.  in  CHEMISTRY-BIOLOCTi'  (Pre-Medical)  provides  die 
core  courses  required  for  admission  to  schools  of  medicine, 
dentistry,  and  veterinary  medicine.  It  also  enables  the  student 
to  pursue  a  career  in  biochemistry  and  molecular  biology. 

(3)  The  B.S.  in  CLINICAL  CHEMISTRY  is  a  program  diat  trains 
students  for  careers  in  hospitals  or  private,  chnical  chemistry 
laboratories.  A  one-semester  internship  in  a  hospital  clinical 
chemistry  laboratory  is  a  mandatory  part  of  this  program.  Stu- 
dents completing  the  program  are  eligible  for  cenificaaon  as 
clinical  chemistry  technologists  by  the  National  Registry  in 
Clinical  Chemistry. 

(4)  The  B.S.  in  FORENSIC  CHEMISTRY  is  a  program  that  trains 
students  interested  in  working  in  criminalistics  and  toxicology 
laboratories.  The  program  prepares  students  for  graduate  study 
and  specialization  in  these  fields.  A  one-semester  internship  in 
a  police  or  toxicology  forensic-chemistry  laboratory  is  a  manda- 
tory part  of  this  program. 

(5)  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  CHEMISTRY  program  prepares  die 
student  for  a  career  in  teaching  chemistry  in  secondary  schools. 
The  program  gives  the  student  experience  in  the  major 
branches  of  chemistry  so  that,  with  proper  selection  of  elec- 
tives,  graduate  work  in  either  pure  chemistry  or  chemistry  edu- 
cation can  be  pursued.  Sufficient  flexibility  is  provided  so  that 
the  student  may  also  become  certified  in  general  science. 

The  Department  of  Chemistry  is  accredited  by  the  American  Chem- 
istry Society,  which  provides  its  professional  certification  to  gradu- 
ates of  the  B.S.  in  chemistry  program. 

Majors  in  the  five  B.S.  progiams  should  consult  the  Department  of 
Chemistry  handbook  and  their  adviser  for  curtent  requirements.  A 
grade  of  C  —  or  better  is  necessary  in  all  required  science  and  math 
courses. 

Internship  Program 

Although  internships  are  not  a  mandatory  part  of  all  chemistry  pro- 
grams, they  are  available  to  majors  on  a  selective  basis.  Students 
receive  varying  amounts  of  credit  based  on  the  number  of  hours 
spent  in  a  work  situation  and  on  the  nature  of  the  academic  work 


necessary  during  the  internship.  Credit  varies  from  three  to  15 
semester  hours;  each  eight-hour  workday  per  week  is  equivalent  to 
three  semester  hours. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  ALL  DEGREE  PROGRAMS 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Chemistry  Requirements 

CHE  103-104  and  CRL  103-104 

3.  Other  Science  Requirements 
PHY  170-180 

4.  Mathematics  Requirements 
CSC  141  and  MAT  161-162 


51  semester  hours 

10  semester  hours 

8  semester  hours 

1 1  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  CHEMISTRY 

1.  Required  Chemistry  Courses  43  semester  hours 
CHE  231,  232,  233,  321,  341,  342,  411,  418, 

424,  471  and  491;  and  CRL  232,  233,  321,  341, 
342  and  424 

2.  Chemistry  Electives  9  semester  hours 
Selected  from  upper-division  chemistry  courses 

3.  Other  Required  Courses  9  semester  hours 
Foreign  languages,  mathematics,  or 

computer  science  electives 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  CHEMISTRY-BIOLOGY 


1.  Required  Chemistry  Courses 

CHE  231,  232,  321,  345,  471;  CRL  232;  and 
one  fi-om  among  CRL  321,  345,  and  471 

2.  Required  Biology  Courses 

BIO  no,  217,  230,  357,  448,  and  468 

3.  Other  Required  Courses 

MAT  121  and  concentration  elective 


22  semester  hours 


24  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  FORENSIC  CHEMISTRY 

1.  Required  Chemistry  Courses  45  semester  hours 
CHE  231,  232,  321,  345,  371,  418,  450,  471, 

and  479;  and  CRL  232,  321,  345,  371,  and  471 

2.  Other  Required  Courses  14  semester  hours 
BIO  110  and  468;  CRJ  200;  and  MAT  121 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  -  CHEMISTRY 


1 .  Required  Chemistry  Courses 

CHE  231,  232,  321,  341  or  345,  409,  411,  418, 
and  491;  CRL  232,  321,  and  345 


24  semester  hours 


30  semester  hours 


2.  Required  Education  Courses 
EDF  100;  EDM  300;  EDP  250,  351; 
EDS  306,  412;  and  SCE  350 

3.  Chemistry  Electives  5  semester  hours 
Selected  firom  upper-division  chemistry  courses 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  CLINICAL  CHEMISTRY 

1.  Required  Chemistry  Courses  46  semester  hours 

CHE  231,  232,  321,  341  or  345,  381,  418, 
424,  450,  471,  and  491;  CRL  321,  341  or  345, 
381,  424,  and  471 


Other  Required  Courses 
BIO  110,  468;  MAT  121 


11  semester  hours 


Department  of  Chemistry 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
CHEMISTRY 

Symbol:  CHE 

Symbol  for  chemistry  labs:  CRL 
(2,2)  represents  two  hours  lecture  and  two 
hours  lab 

*100     Concepts  of  Chemistry  (3)  A  broad  sur- 
vey course  with  a  laboratory  experience  that 
seeks  to  develop  an  understanding  of  the  field  of 
chemistry  through  inquiry.  Basic  competence  in 
scientific  methods  and  procedures  will  be 
obtained  by  observing  chemical  reactions  and 
studying  the  chemical  and  physical  properties  of 
a  variety  of  compounds.  (2,2) 
101     Fundamentals  of  Chemistry  (3)  A  mathe- 
matically oriented  course  for  students  who 
intend  later  to  take  CHE  103  but  whose  science 
and  mathematics  backgrounds  are  judged  by  a 
pretest  to  need  remediation. 
*102     Essentials  of  Chemistry  (4)  Fundamen- 
tab  of  inorganic,  organic,  and  biological  chemis- 
try as  applied  to  the  contemporary  problems  of 
society.  A  one-semester  course  that  best  serves 
students  pursuing  careers  in  health  and  physical 
education.  (3,1) 

1 103-104     General  ChemUny  I-Il  (3)  (3)  Basic 
laws  and  theories  of  chemistry,  including  atomic 
structure,  chemical  bonding,  oxidation-reduction, 
solutions,  and  ionic  equilibria.  Correlations  of 
chemical  principles  and  their  appUcation  to  mod- 
em descriptive  chemistry.  CHE  103  must  pre- 
cede CHE  104. 

CRL  103-104     Experimenul  General  Chemis- 
try I-Il  (2)  (2)  Basic  laboratory  studies  in  college 
chemistry  utilizing  the  quantitative  approach. 
Semimicro  quahtative  analysis  and  inorganic 
preparations.  CONCURRENT  OR  PREREQ:  CHE 
103-104.  CRL  103  must  precede  CRL  104  (One 
hour  of  recitation  precedes  three  hours  of  lab.) 
t  105-106     General  Chemistry  I-II:  Advanced 
Level  (3)  (3)  These  courses  are  similar  to  CHE 
103-104  but  with  a  presentation  that  is  in  greater 
depth  and  rigor.  PREREQ:  High  school  chemistry 
or  the  equivalent  and  approval  of  the  department 
chairperson.  CHE  105-106  may  be  substituted 
for  CHE  103-104  as  prerequisites  for  advanced- 
level  chemistry  courses. 
CRL  105-106     General  Chemistry  I-Il: 
Advanced-Level  Laboratory  (2)  (2)  These  labora- 
tories are  similar  to  CRL  103-104.  CONCUR- 
RENT OR  PREREQ:  CHE  105-106.  CRL  105 
must  precede  CRL  106. 

#107  General  Chemistry  for  the  Allied  Health 
Sciences  (4)  A  one-semester  treatment  of  the 
fundamentals  of  chemistry,  including  atomic 
structure  and  bonding,  types  of  reactions,  kinet- 
ics, equilibrium,  and  thermodynamics.  May  not 
be  taken  as  a  chemistry  major  elective.  CRL107 
may  be  taken  concurrendy  or  after  CHE  107. 
*CRL  107     General  Chemistry  Lab  for  Allied 
Health  Science  (1)  A  one-semester  laboratory 
course  to  complement  CHE  107.  Basic  laboratory 
techniques,  both  quahtative  and  quantitative,  will 
be  used  to  illustrate  principles  from  the  lecture. 
CHE  107  must  be  taken  concurrendy  or  before 
CRL  107. 

230     Introduction  to  Organic  and  Biological 
Chemistry  (3)  A  terminal  course  in  fundamen- 
tals of  organic  chemistry.  Structural  theory  of 
organic  molecules,  organic  synthesis,  and  biolog- 
ical applications.  PREREQ:  CHE  104. 
231-232-233     Organic  Chemistry  I-II-III  (4) 
(3)  (3)  A  comprehensive  study  of  the  structure 
and  reactions  of  organic  molecules.  CHE  231 
must  precede  232  which  must  precede  233. 
PREREQ:  CHE  104  or  CHE  106. 


CRL  232-233     Experimental  Organic  Chemis- 
try I-II  (2)  (2)  Basic  laboratory  skills  in  organic 
chemistry  including  classical  as  well  as  instru- 
mental techniques.  Organic  synthesis  and  mod- 
em spectrophotometric  methods  of  identification. 
CONCURRENT  OR  PREREQ:  CRL  104  and  CHE 
232-233.  CRL  232  must  precede  CRL  233. 
300     Fundamentals  of  Radioisotope  Techniques 

(3)  (Also  PHY  320)  Biological,  chemical,  envi- 
roiunental,  and  physical  effects  of  nuclear  radia- 
tion. Radiation  detection  instrumentation  and 
radio  tracer  methodology.  (2,2)  PREREQ:  CHE 
104  or  106  and  PHY  140  or  180. 

310     Introductory  Biochemistry  (3)  The  chemi- 
cal nature  of  biological  phenomena  is  presented. 
Particular  emphasis  is  placed  upon  the  metaboUc 
pathways  and  the  enzymes  respor\sible  for  these 
processes  with  appUcations  to  nutrition. 
PREREQ:  CHE  230  or  231.  (Not  for  chemistry 
major.) 

321     Analytical  Chemistry  I  (3)  Fundamental 
principles  of  analytical  chemistry.  Theory  of 
gravimetric  and  volumetric  methods  of  analysis. 
Lab:  CRL  321.  PREREQ:  CHE  104  or  106. 
CRL  321     Analytical  Chemistry  1  (2)  Practical 
experience  in  modem  techniques  of  chemical 
analysis  with  emphasis  on  volumetric  and 
gravimetric  mediods.  CONCURRENT  OR 
PREREQ:  CHE  321. 

sec  327     Electron  Microscopy  I  (3)  (Also  ESL 
327)  An  introductory  lecture/lab  course  in  the- 
ory, operation,  and  appUcations  of  electron  beam 
microscopy.  PREREQ:  One  year  of  physics  and 
one  year  of  chemistry. 

sec  329     Electron  Microscopy  II  (3)  (Also 
ESL  329)  A  one-semester  lecture/laboratory 
course  in  advanced  theories,  operation,  and 
applications  of  electron  microscopy  in  scientific 
research.  Emphasis  on  individual  projects. 
PREREQ:  SCC  327. 
341-342-343     Physical  Chemistry  I-H-III  (3) 

(4)  (3)  The  mathematical  laws  and  theories  of 
chemistry  including  thermodynamics,  reaction 
kinetics,  quantum  and  statistical  mechanics,  and 
the  theory  of  chemical  bonding  and  molecular 
structure.  PREREQ:  CHE  104  or  106,  MAT  142 
or  162,  and  PHY  180. 

CRL  341-342     Experimental  Physical  Chemis- 
try I-II  (2)  (2)  Laboratory  exercises  in  illustrat- 
ing principles  of  thermodynamics,  kinetics,  and 
quantum  mechanics.  CONCURRENT  OR 
PREREQ:  CHE  341-342. 

345     Fundamentals  of  Physical  Chemistry  (3) 
A  survey  of  the  fundamental  topics  in  physical 
chemistry  with  applications  to  biology  and  medi- 
cine. Primarily  for  biology,  chemistry-biology, 
and  preprofessional  majors.  PREREQ:  CHE  232, 
MAT  141  or  161,  and  PHY  140  or  180. 
CRL  345     Basic  Experimental  Physical  Chemis- 
try (2)  Experiments  illustrating  the  laws  of  phys- 
ical chemistry.  Primarily  for  biology,  chemistry- 
biology,  and  preprofessional  majors. 
CONCURRENT  OR  PREREQ:  CHE  345. 

350  Theory  of  Spectroscopy  (1)  An  introduc- 
tion to  the  theoretical  background  of  spectro- 
scopic methods.  Includes  quantum  mechanical 
aspects  and  group  theory.  PREREQ:  CHE  232. 

351  Introduction  to  Infrared  Spectroscopy  (1) 
IR  experimental  methods  including  CW  and  FT 
techniques.  Functional  group  analysis  and  spec- 
tral interpretation.  PREREQ:  CHE  350. 

352  Introduction  to  NMR  Spectroscopy  (1)  An 
introductory  course  in  NMR  spectroscopy  deal- 
ing with  spin  1/2  systems.  Chemical  shift  and 
coupUngs  will  be  discussed.  PREREQ:  CHE  350. 

353  Introduction  to  Mass  Spectrometry  (1) 
Instrumentation  and  experimental  techniques 


(El  and  CI).  Interpretation  of  spectra  and  com- 
puter searching.  PREREQ:  CHE  350. 

354  Introduction  to  Chromatography  (1)  Basic 
theory  of  chromatography  and  a  discussion  of 
GC  analysis.  PREREQ:  CHE  104. 

355  Introduction  to  Liquid  Chromatography  I 
(1)  Theory  equipment  and  methods  of  Uquid 
chromatography-TLC.  PREREQ:  CHE  354. 

356  Introduction  to  Liquid  Chromatography  II 
(1)  HPLC  and  SCF  Uquid  chromatographic  tech- 
nique will  be  discussed.  PREREQ:  CHE  355. 
371     Forensic  Chemistry  (3)  Introduction  to 
criminalistics  (chemical,  forensic,  analytical  tech- 
niques) with  the  role,  functions,  operations,  and 
organization  of  a  scientific  poUce  laboratory. 
PREREQ:  CHE  104  or  106  and  CHE  232. 

CRL  371     Forensic  Chemistry  Lab  (2) 
Identification  and  comparison  of  trace  evidence 
utilizing  modem  instruments  and  classical  wet 
methods  of  chemical  analysis.  CONCURRENT 
OR  PREREQ:  CHE  371. 

381     Clinical  Chemistry  (3)  Analysis  of  biologi- 
cal fluids.  Clinical  significance  of  enzyme,  elec- 
trolyte, protein,  and  carbohydrate  analysis. 
Requires  permission  of  instructor  or  preparation 
in  organic  chemistry  and  quantitative  analysis. 
CONCURRENT  OR  PREREQ:  CHE  471. 
CRL  381     Clinical  Chemistry  Laboratory  (2) 
Practical  experience  in  analysis  of  biological  flu- 
ids for  diagnostic  parameters.  Nature  of  biologi- 
cal sampling,  sample  preservation,  methodology, 
statistics,  and  quality  control.  CONCURRENT 
OR  PREREQ:  CHE  381,  CHE  471,  and  CRL  471. 

403  Chemistry  of  the  Environment  (3)  The 
chemistry  of  the  atmosphere,  hydrosphere,  and 
biosphere;  man's  impact  on  these  areas.  PREREQ: 
CHE  104.  May  also  be  offered  widi  lab  (2,2). 

404  Foundations  of  Nutrition  (3)  Proteins, 
Upids,  fats,  vitamins,  and  minerak  and  their  role 
in  normal  metabolism;  nutrition  and  disease; 
metabolism  and  biochemical  individuality;  cul- 
tural and  poUtical  aspects  of  nutrition.  PREREQ: 
CHE  104  and  230  or  231. 

408  Industrial  Pollution  (3)  AppUcations  of 
elementary  chemical  engineering  to  the  industrial 
complexities  of  the  environmental  processes. 
Emphasis  on  unit  operations  and  unit  processes 
appUcable  to  poUution  control  and  abatement. 
PREREQ:  CHE  104. 

409  Descriptive  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3) 
Emphasis  is  on  the  periodic  properties  of  the 
representative  elements,  the  structure  of  inor- 
ganic solids,  the  chemistry  of  aqueous  and 
nonaqueous  solutions,  and  the  study  of  some 
transition  metals.  Lanthanides  and  actinides  are 
also  studied.  PREREQ:  CHE/CRL  104. 

♦  410    Advanced  Independent  Study  or  Chem- 
ical Research  (3-6)  Taken  under  the  direct 
supervision  of  a  faculty  member.  May  be  taken 
for  two  semesters  for  a  total  of  six  credits. 
PREREQ:  Senior  standing  or  permission  of 
department  chairperson. 

411     Advanced  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3)  Struc- 
ture and  properties  of  the  elements  and  inor- 
ganic compounds  from  a  theoretical  point  of 
view.  Atomic  structure  and  the  periodic  law; 
molecular  structure  and  bonding,  including  sym- 
metry and  MO  theory  structure,  bonding,  and 
reactivity  of  transition-element  compounds  and 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 

t  Approved  twcnsemester  substitute  for  distribu- 
tive requirement. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Communication  Studies 


main  group  compounds;  acid-base  chemistry. 
PREREQ:  CHE  34L  CONCURRENT:  CHE  342. 

417  History  of  Chemistry  (1)  The  history  of 
chemistry  and  its  predecessors  from  earliest 
times  to  the  present  day.  PREREQ:  CHE  104  or 
106. 

418  Literature  of  Chemistry  (1)  Instruction  in 
the  use  of  a  modem  chemical  library,  reference 
and  data  acquisition,  synthetic  procedures,  and 
computer  data  bases.  PREREQ:  CHE  231. 

419  Ethics  and  Human  Values  in  Science  (1) 
A  one-semester  course  for  science  majors  to 
acquaint  students  \vith  potential  ethical  problems 
in  their  professional  careers.  PREREQ:  CHE  104 
or  106. 

424    Analytical  Chemistry  II  (3)  Basic  princi- 
ples of  applied  instrumental  analysis.  Special 
emphasis  on  the  use  of  spectrophotometric  and 
electroanalytical  instrumentation.  PREREQ: 
CHE  321  and  341,  CONCURRENT:  CHE  342. 
CRL  424    Analytical  Chemistry  II  Laboratory 
(2)  Practical  experience  in  the  choice  and  appli- 
cation of  instrumental  methods  of  analysis  to 
chemical  systems.  CONCURRENT  OR  PREREQ: 
CHE  424. 

CRL  435     Qualitative  Organic  Analysis  (5)  The 
use  of  classical  and  instrumental  methods  for 
identification  of  organic  compounds.  PREREQ: 
CRL  233  and  321,  CHE  418,  or  permission  of 
instructor.  CTwo  hours  of  lecture) 

CRL  435     Qualitative  Organic  Analysis  Lab  (0) 

This  laboratory  is  required  of  students  taking 
CHE  435.  Wet  chemical  techniques  for  func- 
tional group  identification  and  derivative  prepa- 
ration are  combined  with  modem  instrumental 
methods  such  as  infrared,  ultraviolet,  and  NMR 
spectroscopy  to  provide  the  methodology  for 
rapid,  efficient  identification  of  unknowns.  Six 
hours  of  lab  per  week. 

436     Polymer  Chemistry  (3)  Polymerization 
kinetics,  theology  of  polymer  melts,  crystalliza- 


tion parameters,  and  monomer  reactivity  in 
copolymenzation.  PREREQ:  CHE  232. 
CRL  436     Polymer  Chemistry  Laboratory  (2) 
Synthesis  of  polymers;  molecular,  physical,  and 
thermal  characterization  of  polymers.  Instrumen- 
tal methods  include  X-rays,  IR,  electron  micros- 
copy, and  thermal  analysis.  CONCURRENT; 
CHE  436. 

♦  450  Internship  in  Chemistry  (3-15)  A  fiill- 
or  part-time  work-study  appointment  in  a  hospi- 
tal, or  a  commercial,  governmental,  or  industrial 
laboratory  supervised  jointly  by  an  on-site  super- 
visor and  Department  of  Chemistry  faculty  mem- 
ber. PREREQ:  Permission  of  department  intern- 
ship committee. 

471     Fundamentals  of  Biochemistry  (3)  Struc- 
ture and  chemistry  of  proteins  and  nucleic  acids; 
molecular  biology,  physio-chemical  methods  for 
biomacromolecules,  enzymes,  and  the  molecular 
basis  for  some  physiological  phenomena. 
PREREQ:  CHE  232  and  CHE  345  or  equivalent 
or  permission  of  instructor. 
CRL  471     Experimental  Biochemistry  (2)  Labo- 
ratory exercises  in  the  fundamenuk  of  biochem- 
istry. CONCURRENT  OR  PREREQ:  CHE  471  or 
476. 

CRL  472     Experimental  Biochemistry  II  (2)  A 
second-semester  laboratory  course  in  biochemistry 
that  stresses  the  use  of  advanced  analytical  instru- 
ments to  characterize  biologically  important  mole- 
cules and  to  elucidate  their  mechanism  of  action. 
PREREQ:  CHE  471  or  476  and  CRL  471. 
476-477     Biochemistry  I-II  (3-3)  A  two- 
semester  course  in  biochemistry.  The  first  part 
shows  how  the  chemistry  of  amino  acids,  pro- 
teins, enzymes,  carbohydrates,  Upids,  and  mem- 
branes enables  living  organisms  to  perform  bio- 
logical functions.  The  second  pan  covers 
biosynthesis  of  diverse  molecules,  DNA  structure 
and  function,  and  molecular  physiology  includ- 
ing immunoglobulins,  hormones,  nutrition,  and 
nerve  action.  Chemistry  will  be  related  to  normal 


and  pathological/biological  function.  PREREQ: 
BIO  110,  CHE  232,  and  CHE  345  or  equivalents. 
CHE  476  must  precede  CHE  477. 
479     Chemical  Toxicology  (3)  A  one-semester 
course  in  the  environmental  and  physiological 
aspects  of  chemical  toxicity.  Special  emphasis 
will  be  placed  on  documentation,  sampling,  and 
verification  of  materials.  PREREQ:  CHE  232. 
CRL  479     Chemical  Toxicology  Laboratory  (2) 
A  one-semester  course  in  the  basic  principles  of 
toxicological  analysis.  CONCURRENT  OR 
PREREQ:  CHE  479. 

♦  480     Introduction  to  Chemical  Research  (2-6) 
The  student  carries  out  an  independent  chemical 
research  project  under  the  direction  of  a  faculty 
member.  The  faculty  member  assigns  the  research 
topic  and  background  literature  readings  and 
works  closely  with  the  student  in  the  research 
laboratory  giving  instruction  in  laboratory  tech- 
niques. The  student  may  be  required  to  write  a 
final  research  repon.  PREREQ:  Senior  standing  or 
permission  of  department  chairperson. 
491     Seminar  in  Chemistry  (1)  Oral  presenta- 
tion of  papers  based  on  laboratory  or  library 
research.  PREREQ:  Permission  of  department 
chairperson. 

see  370     Science  and  Human  Values  (3)  A 
one-semester  course  illusttating  the  impact  of  sci- 
ence on  human  thought,  values,  and  institutions. 
Ethical,  sociological,  and  psychological  aspects  of 
science-mediated  change  are  covered  in  depth. 
#SCB  210     The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Uni- 
verse (3)  An  interdisciplinar)'  course  that  pre- 
sents the  theory  and  evidence  for  the  first  three 
minutes  of  the  universe  and  formation  of  the 
stars,  galaxies,  planets,  organic  molecules,  and 
the  genetic  basis  of  organic  evolution.  (3) 
PREREQ:  High  school  or  college  courses  in  at 
least  two  sciences.  Offered  fall  semester  only. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Department  of  Communication  Studies 

Dennis  R  Klinzing,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Casagrande,  Klinzing,  Orr 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR;  Foeman,  Pearson 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Dean,  Jenks,  McCuUough, 
Martz,  Newell,  Reed,  Remland 

The  Department  of  Communication  Studies  offers  two  pro- 
grams. One  program  leads  to  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  and 
the  other  leads  to  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  COMMUNICATION  STUDIES  focuses  on  oral 
communication  as  the  core  of  a  liberal  education  that  can  be 
applied  to  a  number  of  specializations. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  -  COMMUNICAHON  is  for  students 
who  wish  to  meet  the  state  of  Pennsylvania  requirements  for 
teacher  certification  in  communication. 

Majors  are  expected  to  meet  with  their  advisers  to  plan  a 
course  of  study,  to  select  courses  prior  to  scheduling,  to  dis- 
cuss career  opportunities,  and  to  keep  abreast  of  departmental 
cocurricular  activities.  Handbooks  are  provided  to  help  stu- 
dents be  aware  of  requirements  for  each  program  in  the  de- 
partment. Students  who  wish  to  transfer  into  the  B.A.  Com- 
munication Studies  program  must  have  a  2.50  GPA  or  better. 


Departmental  Student  Activities 

The  Foreiisic  Society  and  the  Communication  Club  are  student 
organizations  that  involve  department  faculty  and  resources.  The 
activities  of  these  organizations  are  open  to  all  students.  For  more 
information  see  the  "Student  Affairs"  section. 
Department  Internships 

Internship  experiences  are  available  in  all  areas  related  to  students' 
vocational  and  academic  interests.  Students  have  been  placed  in 
ofiBces  of  congressmen,  radio  and  television  stations,  and  local 
industries.  Students  and  their  placements  are  screened  to  assure 
mutual  satisfaction  for  all  parties  involved.  For  details,  students 
should  check  with  the  department's  internship  coordinator. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B.A.  AND  B.S.  PROGRAMS 
General  Education  Requirements  51  semester  hours 

See  pages  35-38. 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  COMMUNICATION  STUDIES 


Required  Core  Courses 

A.  Group  One  courses  (to  be  completed 
prior  to  scheduling  Group  Two  courses): 
COM  204,  208',  212,  216,  219,  and  224 

B.  Group  Two  courses  (to  be  preceded  by 
Group  One  courses):  COM  304,  307,  312, 
403,  405,  and  415 


36  semester  hours 


•COM  101  maybe  substituted  for  COM  208  but  requires  approval  of 
department  chair. 


Department  of  Communication  Studies 


Limited  substitutions  may  be  made  to  core 
requirements  with  the  adviser's  written 
consent.  A  grade  of  C  or  better  is 
required  in  each  course  and  a  2.50 
must  be  achieved  in  the  core  requirements 
before  graduation  will  be  recommended. 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement 
See  page  37. 

3.  Applied  Area 

Courses  are  to  be  selected  in  consultation 
with  an  adviser  to  meet  career  objectives. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  - 
COMMUNICATION 


0-15  semester  hours 


27-42  semester  hours 


30  semester  hours 


Core  Requirements 

COM  208,  219,  and  415;  ENG  230,  331,  335 

or  339;  LIT  200  or  201,  202  or  203,  230  or  231; 

English  composition  as  advised 

Emphasis  Area  Requirements  30  semester  hours 

Choose  two  areas 

a.  Communication  Requirements  (15  credits) 


COM  216,  224,  307,  and  405;  THA  102 
Participation  in  forensics  activities  is  required, 

b.  Theatre  Requirements  (15  credits) 
THA  103,  104,  210,  301,  306  or  307, 
and  101  (to  be  taken  as  a  general 
education  arts  requirement). 
Participation  in  theatre  productions  is 
required. 

c.  Media  Requirements  (15  credits) 
COM  202,  212,  320,  and  217  or  317; 
JRN  200 

3    Professional  Education  Requirements 
COM  402,  EOF  100,  EDM  300, 
EDP  250  and  351,  and  EDS  306  and  412 


30  semester  hours 


Minor  in  Comunication  Studies 


18  semester  hours 


This  minor  may  be  uken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies 
general  degree  program   Required  courses  are  COM  204,  208,  212, 
216,  219,  and  224. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMMUNICATION  STUDIES 

Symbol:  COM 

001     Preparatory  Speech  Communication  (1) 

This  preparatory  course  will  introduce  the  con- 
cepts of  listening,  organizing  thoughts,  speaking 
those  thoughts  to  audiences,  and  dealing  with 
conflicts  in  college  through  the  use  of  effective 
oral  communication.  These  concepts  will  be 
taught  through  assigned  reading,  lecturey 
discussion,  and  various  activities.  Emphasis  will 
be  on  the  integration  of  basic  oral  communica- 
tion skills. 

101     Speech  Fundamentals:  Interpersonal 
Communication  (3)  Development  of  competen- 
cies for  purposeful  speech  communication. 
Awareness  of  the  effects  of  language  on  commu- 
nications. Recognition  of  the  types  and  purposes 
of  a  selected  number  of  communications.  Grasp 
of  the  role  of  evidence  and  organization  in  spo- 
ken messages. 

105     Voice  Dynamics  (3)  Training  in  the 
creative-esthetic  production  of  speech;  includes 
respiration,  phonation,  articulation,  and 
resonation. 

200     Communication  Careers  Plaiming  I  (1) 
This  course  is  designed  to  introduce  the  first  of  a 
two-phase,  career-planning  process.  Self- 
assessment  and  exploration  is  provided  through 
assigned  readings,  minilectures.  reflective  exer- 
cises, and  small  group  activities. 
202     Scripts  and  Formats  for  Mass  Media  (3) 
Students  are  required  to  analyze,  evaluate,  and 
produce  scripts  for  a  variety  of  mass  media  for- 
mats. The  course  emphasis  is  on  radio,  televi- 
sion, and  film. 

204     Dyadic  Communication  (3)  One-on-one 
communication  to  give  the  student  a  basic 
understanding  of  the  processes  and  experiences 
of  the  most  basic  type  of  human  communication. 
208     Public  Communication  (3)  Development 
of  skills  necessary  to  understand  the  theory  of 
communication  as  a  problem-solving  tool  in  the 
community.  Special  emphasis  is  on  the  student's 
performance  as  a  sender  and  receiver  of  mes- 
sages directed  at  social  action. 
210     Photo  Communication  I  (3)  A  basic 
course  in  the  use  of  creative  techniques  available 


to  the  begiiming  photographer  for  the  produc- 
tion of  high-quality  slides. 
212     Mass  Communication  (3)  A  survey  course 
designed  to  identify,  analyze,  and  evaluate  the 
pragmatic,  persuasive,  creative,  and  technical 
dimensions  of  mass  media. 

216  Small  Group  Communication  (3)  Intro- 
duction to  and  practice  in  the  structured  small 
group.  Emphasis  on  preparation  for,  analysis  of, 
and  participation  in  problem-solving-oriented 
groups. 

217  Directing  and  Producing  Documentary 
Television  Programs  (3)  Plaiming  and  producing 
the  nondramatic  television  production. 

219  Communication  Concepts  (3)  A  study  of 
human  communication  that  includes  a  historical 
view  of  the  field,  examinations  of  definitions  of 
communication,  analyses  of  the  nature  of  theory 
and  the  process  of  theorizing,  assessment  of  per- 
spectives of  communication,  and  construction  of 
models  of  communication. 

220  Multimedia  Communication  (3)  The  prac- 
tical appUcation  of  communication  theory 
through  experiences  in  photography  and  multi- 
media productions.  The  creative  potential  of 
combining  sound  and  various  photographic  ele- 
ments will  be  explored  with  special  attention 
given  to  photo  journalism  as  used  in  advertising, 
public  relations,  theatre,  and  related  mass  com- 
munication fields. 

221  Photo  Communication  II  (3)  This  course 
will  give  the  student  a  chance  to  develop  a  per- 
sonal photographic  communication  style.  The 
student  will  be  encouraged  to  explore  and 
express  his  or  her  personal  perceptions  through 
photography. 

224    Communication  Research  (3)  An  examina- 
tion of  the  nature  of  inquiry  and  research  in 
communication.  Emphasis  on  understanding  and 
appreciating  the  strengths  and  weaknesses  of 
various  methods  of  research  in  communication. 
230     Business  and  Professional  Speech  Com- 
munication (3)  Practice  in  effective  speaking  and 
listening.  Interpersonal  commimication  in  the 
business  and  professional  setting,  including 
reports  and  sales  presentations,  policy  speeches, 
conference  leadership  techniques,  group  dynam- 
ics, and  speaking. 


23 1     Interviewing  in  Organizations  (3)  An 

introduction  to  the  skills  necessary  for  a  variety 
of  organizational  interview  settings.  Students  will 
act  as  interviewers  and  interviewees  in  many 
types  of  interviews,  work  in  groups,  and  give 
performance  feedback  to  peers. 
300     Communication  Careers  Planning  II  (1) 
This  second  phase  of  the  careers-planning  course 
series  examines  the  initial  steps  required  for 
finding  employment.  Topics  covered  include  the 
jobs-hunting  process,  resume  development,  net- 
working, and  the  transition  from  college  to 
employment. 

303  Modem  Trends  in  Argument  (3)  Study  of 
the  new  thinking  in  argumentation  theoiy. 
De-emphasizes  classic  validity  and  centers  on  the 
building  of  arguments  that  are  acceptable  to  the 
listeners.  Course  focuses  on  the  work  of  Stephen 
Toulmin  and  Chaim  Perelman. 

304  Organizational  Communication  (3)  An  in- 
depth  analysis  of  the  dynamic  process  of  commu- 
nication as  it  occurs  in  organizational  networks. 
307     Nonverbal  Communication  (3)  A  study  of 
the  verbal  and  sensory  messages  we  are  con- 
standy  receiving.  Body  language  and  the  uses  of 
space,  time,  touch,  objects,  and  color  inherent  in 
the  sensory  messages  we  receive. 

309  Advanced  Public  Speaking  (3)  Designing 
personal  strategies,  adapting  delivery  to  large 
audiences,  developing  oral  use  of  language,  and 
speaking  to  live  or  simulated  community  groups. 

310  Field  Experience  in  Photographic  Com- 
munication (3)  This  course  in  slide  photography 
will  build  on  the  student's  previous  experiences 
in  photography.  The  student  will  develop  the 
technical,  visual,  and  photo  communication 
skills  necessary  to  explore,  record,  and  interpret 
his  or  her  surroundings  through  photographic 
essays  and  related  photo  communication 
projects.  These  skills  will  be  achieved  through 
field  experiences  and  classroom  instruction. 
312     Intercultural  Communication  (3)  A  study 
of  factors  that  contribute  to  communication 
breakdowns  between  diverse  cultures  and 
between  fragmented  segments  within  the  same 
society. 

315  Structure  of  Meetings  (3)  This  course  pre- 
pares students  to  plan  formal  agendae,  write  and 
interpret  organizational  by-laws  and  constitu- 


Department  of  English 


tions,  and  participate  in  and  preside  over  meet- 
ings according  to  parliamentary  procedures. 

317  Directing  and  Producing  the  Dramatic 
Television  Program  (3)  Planning  the  program. 
Preparing  the  shooting  script.  Practice  in 
rehearsing  with  actors  and  cameras. 

318  Forensics  (3)  Study  in  the  philosophy  and 
practice  of  forensics.  Initiating,  developing,  and 
administrating  a  forensic  program.  Coaching  and 
judging  debate  and  individual  events. 

320     Communicating  on  Television  and  Radio 
(3)  For  the  student  who,  by  career  or  circum- 
stance, will  be  required  to  be  on  radio  and  tele- 
vision. The  focus  of  the  course  will  be  on  three 
major  areas:  interviewer/interviewee  techniques; 
acting  for  television,  including  working  in  com- 
mercials; and  news  reporting,  including  studio 
and  remote  locations.  PREREQ:  THA  103. 
330     Oral  Communication  for  Technical  Profes- 
sionals (3)  The  student  will  explore  the  oral 
component  of  effective  communication  as  it 
applies  to  the  business  and  professional  world  of 
mathematics,  engineering,  and  science. 
355     Public  Relations  Principles  (3)  An  intro- 
duction to  the  role  of  the  public  relations  practi- 


tioner in  the  formation  of  public  opinion.  Com- 
munications theory  will  be  combined  with 
specific  techniques  for  working  with  the  press, 
producing  printed  material,  and  conducting  spe- 
cial events. 

♦  399     Directed  Studies  in  Speech  Communi- 
cation (1-6)  Research,  creative  projects,  reports, 
and  readings  in  speech  communication.  Students 
must  apply  to  advisers  one  semester  in  advance 
of  registration.  PREREQ;  Approval  of  department 
chairperson.  Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  only. 

♦  400     Internship  in  Speech  Communication 
(3-15)  This  course  provides  a  structured  and 
supervised  work  experience  in  communication. 
Credits  earned  are  based  on  amount  of  time 
spent  on  the  job.  Students  must  apply  to  the 
department  internship  coordinator  and  receive 
approval  of  the  department  internship  faculty 
committee  to  be  admitted. 

402     Teaching  Communications  (3)  Theory  and 
practice  in  teaching  junior  and  senior  high 
school  communication  and  drama  courses,  and 
in  directing  cocurricular  programs  in  junior  and 
senior  high  school. 


403     Persuasion  (3)  Current  theories  of  attitude 
and  attitude  change.  Practice  in  speaking  to 
modify  behavior  through  appeals  to  the  drives 
and  motives  of  die  listener.  PREREQ:  COM  101 
or  permission  of  instructor. 
405    Argumentation  and  Debate  (3)  Functions 
and  principles  of  argumentation  and  debate, 
including  analysis,  evidence,  reasoning,  and  refu- 
tation. Class  debates  on  vital  issues. 
410     Conflict  Resolution  (3)  This  course  ex- 
plores the  means  of  resolving  conflict  through 
argument,  negotiation,  mediation,  and  arbitration. 
415     (also  UN  415)  Language,  Thought,  and 
Behavior  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to  help  stu- 
dents understand  the  way  language  functions  in 
the  communication  process.  To  accomplish  this 
purpose,  various  language  systems  will  be  exam- 
ined and  one  will  be  selected  for  in-depth  analy- 
sis. 

♦  499     Communication  Seminar  (3)  Intensive 
examination  of  a  selected  area  of  study  in  the 
field  of  speech  communication.  Topics  will  be 
announced  in  advance. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  English 

Michael  Peich,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Brooks,  Browne,  Gaunt,  Green,  Kelleher, 
Kent,  McCawley,  McGrath,  Myrsiades,  Trotman,  Weiss 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Buckley,  Fordyce,  Hunsberger, 
Kelly,  Larsen,  Peich,  Prater,  Sabol,  ScheSler,  Shloss,  Ward 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Awuyah,  Bauerlein, 

Echewa,  Fishman,  Fletcher,  Fox,  France,  Godfrey,  JefiErey, 
Johnson,  Maltby,  Micheau,  Molholt,  Myrsiades,  Newcomb, 
Pflieger,  Ramanathan,  Smith,  Sun,  Teutsch 

The  Department  of  English  offers  three  degree  programs:  the 
Bachelor  of  Arts  in  literature,  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  com- 
parative literature  (in  cooperation  with  the  Department  of 
Foreign  Languages),  and  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Educa- 
tion (in  cooperation  with  the  School  of  Education).  Each 
program  is  planned  in  consultation  with  an  adviser. 

1.  The  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  LITERATURE  provides  a  broad 
background  in  English  and  American  literature;  valuable  training 
in  the  critical  skills  of  reading,  interpretation,  and  analysis; 
intensive  practice  in  writing;  and  an  understanding  of  the 
workings  of  the  language.  This  extremely  versatile  degree 
prepares  students  for  graduate  studies  and  law  school,  and 
careers  in  journalism,  radio  and  television,  publishing,  public 
relations,  and  other  professions  in  which  skills  in  reading, 
writing,  and  processing  information  at  a  sophisticated  level  are 
required. 

2.  The  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  COMFARATTVE  LITERATURE  provides  a 
curriculum  option  for  students  with  an  interest  in  international 
studies  by  offering  a  broad  background  in  European  and  non- 
Western  culture  and  literature.  See  Comparative  Literature  Stud- 
ies on  pages  80-8  L 

3.  The  Bachelor  of  Science  in  EDUCATION  in  ENGUSH  prepares 
students  to  teach  in  the  secondary  schools  in  Pennsylvania  under 
an  Instructional  I  Certificate.  These  students  will  in  large  part 


satisfy  the  requirements  for  a  B.A.  in  literature,  deriving  exten- 
sive benefits  fi'om  participation  in  a  carefully  constructed  pro- 
gram that  emphasizes  literature  as  a  cultural  product  and 
students  as  active  learners.  Before  receiving  permission  to 
student  teach,  students  in  this  program  must  satisfy  the 
prerequisites  for  student  teaching  listed  on  pages  117-118  as  well 
as  specific  Department  of  English  requirements  listed  on  this 
page. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  BA./B.S.  ED.  PROGRAMS 


51  semester  hours 

3-12  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 

21  semester  hours 


1.  General  Requirements  (See  pages  35-38.) 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN  UTERATURE 

1.  Foreign  Language  Requirement 

2.  Departmental  Preparatory  Requirement 
LIT  168  (also  a  General  Education 
requirement),  LIT  295,  and  LIT  296 

3.  Departmental  Intermediate  Requirements 
ENG  230;  two  American  hterature  courses, 

one  before  1860  (A)  and  one  after  (B);  two  British 
literature  courses,  one  before  1800  (C)  and  one 
after  (D);  and  two  departmental  electives 

4.  Departmental  Advanced  Requirements  9  semester  hours 
Three  seminars  from  a  selection  focusing  on 

topic,  author,  or  theme  (LIT  400) 

5.  Professional  Electives  or  Minor  0-18  semester  hours 

6.  Additional  Electives  (to  complete  128  semester  hours) 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  IN  ENGUSH 


1. 


30  semester  hours 


Professional  Education  Requirements 

(See  page  112.) 

Departmental  Preparatory  Requirements 

LIT  168  (Gen.  Ed),  LIT  295,  and  LIT  296 

Departmental  Intermediate  Requirements 

ENG  230,  ENG  331,  ENG  335;  two  American 

hterature  courses,  one  before  1860  (A)  and  one  after  (B); 

two  British  literature  courses,  one  before  1800  (C) 

and  one  after  (D);  two  continental  literature  courses. 


6  semester  hours 


27  semester  hours 


Depanment  of  English 


one  through  the  Renaissance  and  one  after 

4.  Departmental  Advanced  Requirements 
Three  seminars  from  a  selection  focusing  on 
topic,  author,  or  theme  (LIT  400) 

5.  Free  electives  (E) 


9  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


This  minor  is  also  listed  in  the  section  on  Comparative  Literature 
Studies. 


Student  Teaching  Prerequisites 

Students  should  apply  during  their  sophomore  year  for  acceptance 
as  candidates  for  teaching  certification.  Transfer  students  should 
apply  as  sophomores  or  after  completing  a  year  at  West  Chester. 

Grades  on  Required  Courses 

Anyone  attempting  to  qualify  for  student  teaching  must  pass  each  of 
the  following  courses  with  a  grade  of  C  or  higher:  CLS  260;  EDF 
100;  EDM  300;  EDP  250  and  351;  EDS  306;  ENG  120,  121,  230, 
331,  335,  and  390;  UT  168,  295,  and  296;  and  PSY  100. 

A  student  receiving  a  grade  of  C-  or  lower  for  any  of  these  courses 
should  retake  the  course  immediately,  before  attempting  courses  in 
the  English  or  education  sequence.  A  student  having  difficulty  with 
several  of  the  courses  listed  above  should  recognize  that  he  or  she 
may  not  be  able  to  meet  the  competency  requirements  for  student 
teaching  and  should  consider  withdrawing  from  the  B.S.  program. 

Grade  Point  Average 

Before  receiving  approval  to  student  teach,  a  student  must  attain  an 
overall  GPA  of  2.50  or  better,  including  a  minimum  GPA  of  2.50  for 
all  courses  attempted  within  the  Department  of  English. 

Competency  Examination 

A  student  must  pass  the  test  of  writing  competency  given  by  the 
Department  of  English  before  the  application  for  approval  to  stu- 
dent teach  will  be  considered.  This  examination  is  scheduled  each 
semester  and  announced  in  advance  by  both  the  Department  of 
English  and  the  Department  of  Secondary  Education.  Students  are 
urged  to  take  the  exam  at  the  end  of  their  sophomore  or  beginning 
of  their  junior  years. 

Minor  Programs 

Students  may  minor  in  any  of  the  five  following  programs.  Elective 

courses  are  selected  in  consultation  with  the  student's  minor  adviser. 


6  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 


Literature  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses 

UT  200  or  201,  and  LIT  230  or  231 

2.  Elective  Courses 

One  in  American  Literature  and  one  in 
English  Literature  (in  a  period  other  than 
those  covered  in  requirement  I),  and  any 
two  other  LIT  courses 

Creative  Writing  Minor 

1.  Required  Course 
CRW  201 

2.  Elective  Courses 

Any  four  courses  selected  from  the  following: 
CRW  202,  203,  301,  302,  303,  304 
305,  307,  400,  490,  and  491 


Film  Criticism  Minor 

1.  Required  Course 
FLM200 

2.  Elective  Courses 
Any  three  courses  selected  from  the 
following  list  with  the  approval  of  the  adviser: 

CLS  304,  363,  364,  368,  369,  370,  400,  and  410;  COM  217  and 
317;  and  ELM  201,  300,  and  301 


3  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


Journalism  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses 

JRN  200,  225,  226,  and  250 
(Minimum  grade  C-) 

2.  Elective  Course 

One  of  die  following:  JRN  312,  315,  325, 
and  355 

3.  An  additional  three  credit  hours  are  to  be 
earned  through  a  supervised  internship 
(ENG  395)  in  the  communications  area  or 
through  a  pracncum  QRN  411)  based  on 
one  semesters  active  service  on  the 
University's  student  newspaper. 


Organizational  and  Technical  Writing  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses  15  semester  hours 
ENG  320,  368,  371,  and  420,  and  diree  credit 

hours  to  be  earned  through  a  supervised 
internship  in  organizational  or  technical 
writing  (ENG  395) 

2.  Elective  Course  3  semester  hours 
Choice  of  COM  330,  ENG  270,  or  computer 

science  course  at  level  CSC  141  or  higher 

Linguistics  Minor 

The  Department  of  English  is  one  of  several  departments  that 
participates  in  the  linguistics  minor.  The  description  of  the 
linguistics  minor  and  its  requirements  are  found  in  the  section 
describing  interdisciplinary  programs  on  pages  81-82. 

The  literature  and  writing  minors  may  be  taken  as  concentrations 
by  students  in  the  Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as 
one  of  the  minors  in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in 
the  liberal  studies  general  degree  program. 

Internships 

A  student  will  be  permitted  to  take  an  internship  under  the  super- 
vision of  the  Department  of  English  only  if  he  or  she  is  enrolled  in 
a  departmental  major  or  minor  program  and  has  met  the  following 
requirements: 

1.  an  accumulation  of  at  least  80  semester  hours 

2.  an  overall  Grade  Point  Average  of  at  least  2.50 

3.  an  overall  Grade  Point  Average  of  at  least  3.00  in  the  major  or 
minor  program 

4.  completion  of  12  semester  hours  in  courses  in  the  major  or 
minor  program  (not  counting  composition  courses) 

5.  a  letter  of  application  to  the  Internship  Committee  of  the 
Department  of  English  accompanied  by  a  resume  and  two  fac- 
ulty references 

6.  a  personal  interview  with  two  members  of  the  Internship 
Committee 

A  student  will  be  hmited  to  15  hours  of  internship  credit.  Students 
who  wish  to  take  more  than  nine  hours  of  internship  credit  in  one 
semester  must  obtain  approval  from  the  full  committee  after  sub- 
mitting an  application  and  an  academic  transcript  in  the  preceding 
semester.  The  Internship  Committee  will  determine  the  number  of 
credits  to  be  earned  during  an  internship  by  applying  a  ratio  of 
40  hours  of  work  for  each  hour  of  academic  credit.  Students  seek- 
ing teaching  certification  may  take  no  more  than  three  semester 
hours  of  internship  credit  within  the  minimum  128-131  semester- 
hour  range  for  the  undergraduate  degree.  The  internship  credits  for 
English  majors  may  be  applied  to  the  student/adviser-designed  pro- 
gram. Only  under  exceptional  circumstances,  and  entirely  at  its  dis- 


cretion,  will  the  Internship  Commitee  consider  applications  from 
students  not  meeting  the  departmental  requirements. 


Department  of  English 


NOTE:  It  is  the  responsibiUty  of  the  student  to  demonstrate  that  he 
or  she  has  met  the  academic  requirements  for  an  internship. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ENGUSH 

Symbol:  ENG 

020     Basic  Writing  (3)  A  preparatory  course  of 
study  emphasizing  the  basic  grammatical,  logical, 
and  rhetorical  skills  that  produce  effective 
themes.  NOTE:  This  course  is  a  prerequisite  to 
ENC  120  for  students  who  have  been  placed  in 
ENG  020.  Credits  earned  in  0-kveI  courses  do  not 
count  toward  the  128  hours  of  credit  needed  for 
graduation. 

030     English  for  Non-Native  Speakers  (3)  Indi- 
vidualized instruction  for  the  non-native  speaker; 
conversational  English,  formal  written  English, 
reading  and  listening  comprehension,  and  gram- 
mar. (Students  should  seek  placement  advice 
from  the  ESL  program  staff  before  registering.) 
Also,  see  note  under  ENG  020. 

120  Effective  Writing  I  (3)  An  intensive  course 
in  writing  that  emphasizes  skill  in  organization 
and  awareness  of  styles  of  writing  and  levels  of 
usage  as  ways  of  expressing  and  communicating 
experiences. 

121  Effective  Writing  II  (3)  Continues  the 
expository  writing  experience  offered  in  Effective 
Writing  I,  and  explores  techniques  of  gathering, 
evaluating,  and  selecting  materials  to  be  used  in 
writing  research  papers. 

130  Effective  Writing  I  for  Non-Native  Speak- 
ers (3)  An  intensive  course  in  writing  for  the 
non-native  speaker  of  English,  emphasizing  skill 
in  organization  and  awareness  of  styles  of  writ- 
ing and  levek  of  usage  as  ways  of  expressing  and 
communicating  experiences.  For  non-native 
speakers  of  English.  ENG  130  is  comparable  to 
ENG  120  for  international  students  only.  (Students 
should  seek  placement  advice  bom  the  ESL  Pro- 
gram staff  before  registering.) 

131  Effective  Writing  II  for  Non-Native 
Speakers  (3)  Continues  the  expository  writing 
experience  offered  to  non-native  speakers  in 
English  130,  and  explores  techniques  of  gather- 
ing, evaluating,  and  selecting  materials  to  be 
used  in  writing  research  papers.  For  non-native 
speakers  of  English.  ENG  131  is  comparable  to 
ENG  121  for  international  students  only.  (Students 
should  seek  placement  advice  bom  the  ESL  Pro- 
gram staff  before  registering.) 

132  Effective  Speaking  I  for  Non-Native 
Speakers  (3)  After  a  brief  introduction  to  the 
differences  between  writing  and  speaking,  this 
course  focuses  on  giving  directions,  explaining 
concepts,  asking  questions,  giving  presentations, 
and  engaging  in  small  talk,  interviewing,  and 
extensive  pronunciation  drills. 

134     Idioms  in  the  Context  of  American  Cul- 
ture (3)  Through  the  use  of  modem  American 
movies,  this  course  helps  students  learn  the 
meanings  of  idioms  in  context.  Students  practice 
using  these  idioms  in  drills  and  exercises. 
200    Writing  Improvement  (3)  A  workshop 
that  provides  intensive  instruction  for  students 
who  experience  difficulty  in  writing.  Not  open  to 
freshmen. 

204  Practical  Prose  Composition  (3)  Writing 
in  various  modes  that  authentically  mirror  real 
situations  in  our  personal  and  professional  lives. 

205  Writing  from  Experience  (3)  Exploration 
of  the  student's  personal  history  and  attitudes 
through  carefully  structured  compositions. 


including  autobiographical  narrative,  memoir, 
and  introspective  analysis. 
230     (Also  UN  230)  Introduction  to  Linguis- 
tics (3)  Basic  concepts  of  language  description, 
classification,  change,  reconstruction,  dialectol- 
ogy, and  sociolinguistics.  (Prerequisite  for  all 
courses  in  English.) 

270  Publishing  (3)  A  practical  examination  of 
the  general  components  of  the  publishing  field 
with  emphasis  on  book  production. 

271  Typography  (3)  This  course  provides  stu- 
dents with  experience  in  production  of  books, 
using  historical  and  modem  methods  of  design. 
PREREQ:  ENG  270. 

275     Literary  Editing  and  Publishing  (3)  Expe- 
rience in  publishing  the  student  literary  maga- 
zine Daedalus:  editing,  proofing,  photographic 
selection  and  layout,  and  printing. 
304    Essay  Workshop  (3)  Experience  in  reading 
and  writing  essays,  with  focus  on  revision,  on 
the  use  of  the  pubhc  "1,"  and  on  appropriate 
voice.  Attention  to  invention. 
#315     Interdisciplinary  Perspectives  on  liter- 
acy (3)  The  historical  and  social  contexts  of 
English  literacy.  Emphasis  on  writing. 
320    Writing  in  the  Professions  (3)  Introduc- 
tion to  document  analysis  and  production,  the 
review  process,  empirical  evaluation,  and  design 
principles. 

330  English  Phonology  (3)  Phonemics  and 
morphophonemics  in  English.  Writing  systems 
and  phonemic-graphemic  relationships  in 
English.  Historical  development  of  English 
sounds.  PREREQ:  ENG  230. 

331  Structure  of  Modem  English  (3)  A 
detailed  analysis  of  the  modem  descriptive 
approach  to  the  study  of  English  grammar  and 
how  it  compares  with  the  traditional  approach. 
PREREQ:  ENG  230. 

335     History  of  the  English  Language  (3) 
Review  of  the  influences  on  the  development  of 
the  English  language.  PREREQ:  ENG  230. 

339  History  and  Dialects  of  American  English 
(3)  Development  of  the  English  language  in 
America  since  colonial  setdement.  American  and 
British  English.  Pronunciation,  vocabulary,  and 
grammar  of  the  regional  and  social  dialects  of 
American  English.  PREREQ:  ENG  230. 

340  Sociolinguistic  Aspects  of  English  (3)  The 
study  of  language  in  its  social  context;  the  eth- 
nography of  communication;  language  and  soci- 
ety, social  classes,  ethnic  groups,  pohtics,  sex, 
and  education.  PREREQ:  ENG  230. 

350     Introduction  to  English  as  a  Second  Lan- 
guage (3)  Exploration  of  the  scope  of  the  field, 
types  of  programs,  and  general  approaches  to 
instruction. 

368    Organizational  Writing  (3)  The  nature  of 
communication  within  organizations.  Theoretical 
basis  and  practical  application. 
371     Technical  Writing  (3)  Instmction  in  the 
forms  and  techniques  of  written,  oral,  and  visual 
communication  currendy  practiced  in  the  scien- 
tific and  technical  professions.  A  series  of  coordi- 
nated assignments  leads  to  a  final  project  in  the 
student's  field  of  professional  study.  PREREQ: 
ENG  121. 

390    Teaching  English  in  Secondary  Schools 
(3)  Review  of  language  arts  requirements  in  sec- 
ondary schools.  Special  reference  to  grade- 
placement  with  adoption  of  materials,  appraisal 
of  results,  and  development  of  programs  of 


study.  PREREQ:  ENG  230,  331,  and  335,  EDM 
300,  EDP  351,  and  EDS  306. 

♦  395     Internship  (3-12)  Intensive  practical 
experience  with  selected  businesses,  media,  and 
pubUc  agencies.  Limited  to  qualified  students 
who  have  earned  a  minimum  of  80  credit  hours. 
See  Handbook  for  English  Majors  for  specific 
requirements. 

397    Writing  Tutoring  (3)  Theory  and  practice 
of  writing  tutoring,  especially  for  those  who  plan 
a  career  in  teaching  or  who  are  focusing  on  the 
remediation  or  development  of  language  and 
writing  skilb. 

♦  410     Independent  Study  (3) 

411-413    Yearbook  Practicum  I,  II,  III  (1)  Prac- 
tical yearbook  production  experience  in  a  closely 
supervised  framework.  PREREQ:  ENG  270  or 
permission  of  the  instructor. 
414    Tutoring  Practicum  (1)  Supervised  experi- 
ence as  an  undergraduate  tutor  for  any  of  the 
English  tutoring  programs  (e.g..  Department  of 
English  or  Academic  Development  Program 
(ADP)  tutoring,  etc.). 

420     Report  and  Proposal  Writing  (3)  Working 
in  writing  groups  and  individually,  students 
complete  proposal  and  report  writing  projects 
that  respond  to  organizational  needs  and  criteria. 
They  learn  to  conceptualize  research  problems 
and  plan,  organize,  and  design  major  projects. 
PREREQ:  ENG  368,  371,  or  graduate  status. 

♦  430     Language  Seminar  (3)  Studies  in 
English  language  and  linguistics.  PREREQ:  ENG 
230  and  at  least  junior  standing. 

445    Women  Writing:  Autobiography  (3)  A 
writing  seminar  directed  toward  the  reading  of 
women's  autobiographies  and  the  writing  of  per- 
sonal autobiographical  narratives.  A  writing- 
emphasis  course. 

♦  450    Prose  Writing  Seminar  (3)  This 
variable-topic  seminar  concentrates  on  problems 
in  advanced  writing,  focusing  on  prose  analysis 
and  its  appUcation  to  student  writing  and  revi- 


UTERATURE 

Symbol:  LIT 

#162     Literature  of  the  Apocalypse  (3)  An 
interdisciplinary  study  of  ancient  reUgions,  apoc- 
alyptic writing,  and  modem  interpretations  of 
that  writing.  An  investigation  of  the  political, 
economic,  moral,  and  artistic  ramifications  of  the 
nuclear  arms  race  on  modem  society. 

*165     Introduction  to  Literature  (3)  A  course 
designed  to  develop  awareness  of  literature  as 
being  central  to  all  the  arts,  to  increase  levels  of 
Uteracy  and  critical  faculties,  and  to  broaden 
understanding  of  the  human  condition.  PREREQ: 
ENG  120  or  permission  of  the  depanment. 

166     Science  Fiction  (3)  A  critical  study  of  the 
science  fiction  novel  focusing  on  the  works  of 
contemporary  writers  such  as  C.S.  Lewis, 
Asimov,  Heinlein,  Zalazny,  Niven,  Anthony, 
Herbert,  LeGuin,  and  Delaney.  (Group  E)' 


#  Approved  interdiscipUnary  course. 

*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 

•  See  the  department  handbook  for  group 
descriptions. 


Department  of  English 


168  Conventions  of  Reading  (3)  An  ino-oduc- 
tion  to  the  study  of  textual  genres  — fiction, 
drama,  poetry,  essay,  autobiography,  and  film  — 
and  to  methodologies  of  reading.  Various  cogni- 
tive and  cultural  influences  on  the  reading  pro- 
cess will  be  analyzed. 

200  American  literature  1  (3)  Survey  of  repre- 
sentative American  writers  from  Colonial  times 
to  1860,  including  Bradstreet,  Taylor,  Franklin, 
Poe,  Thoreau,  Hawthorne,  and  Melville.  (A)' 

201  American  Dterature  II  (3)  A  survey  of 
representative  American  writers  from  1860  to  the 
present,  including  Whitman,  Twain,  James, 
Crane,  Eliot,  Frost.  Hemingway,  and  Faulkner. 
(B)' 

202  Alncan-American  Literature  I  (3)  Survey 
of  African-American  authors  from  the  antebellum 
era  through  the  first  quaner  of  the  20th  century. 
(B)' 

203  African-American  Literature  II  (3)  Contin- 
uation of  LIT  202.  Second  quaner  of  the  20th 
century  to  the  present.  (B)* 

204  Black  Women  Writers  of  America  (3)  Sur- 
vey of  black  women  writers  of  America.  Exam- 
ines themes  and  influences  on  American  and 
African-American  literary  contexts 

230  English  Literature  I  (3)  A  survey  of 
English  literature  from  Anglo-Saxon  writing 
through  the  18th  century.  (C)' 

231  English  Literature  II  (3)  A  survey  of 
English  literature  of  the  19th  and  20th  centuries. 
03)* 

250    Victorian  Attitudes  (3)  A  study  of  19th- 
century  attitudes  toward  social  changes  as 
expressed  in  art,  architecture,  literature,  and 
nonfiction  prose. 

265     Literature  and  Psychology  (3)  An  exami- 
nation of  the  relationships  between  literature  and 
psychology,  with  readings  from  drama 
(Shakespeare,  Ibsen,  and  Aibee),  poetry  (Poe, 
Browning,  and  Eliot),  and  fiction  (Tolstoy,  Joyce, 
Woolf  Mann,  Kafka,  and  Faulkner).  (E)' 
269    The  Literature  of  Roguery  (3)  A  historical 
study  of  the  rogue  in  fiction  with  emphasis  on 
the  satiric  view  of  society.  Among  writers  studied 
are  Defoe,  Thackeray,  Donleavey,  and  Kerouac. 
(E)' 

#  270     Urbanism  and  Modem  Imagination  (3) 
Covers  a  variety  of  responses  of  contemporary 
writers,  anists,  and  plaiuiers  to  the  rise  of  the 
modem  city.  (E)* 

271  New  Drama  (3)  This  course  offers  a  selec- 
tive survey  of  American  and  British  drama  since 
1970.  The  playwrights  studied  will  be  drawn 
from  a  wide  and  expanding  group,  including 
Sam  Shepard,  David  Rabe,  Lanford  Wilson,  Tom 
Stoppard,  Peter  Shaffer,  Caryl  Churchill,  and 
others.  (E)* 

272  New  Fiction  (3)  Fiction  published  in  the 
■last  10  years.  (E)' 

274     Feminist  Poetry  (3)  A  study  of  poetry 
espousing  the  feminist  cause  and  exploring  the 
feminist  response.  Techniques  and  attitudes  of 
such  poets  as  Plath,  Sexton,  Rich,  Morgan. 
Wakoski,  and  Kumin.  (E)* 
295     Historical  Context  (3)  A  study  of  a  repre- 
sentative number  of  literary  texts  and  the  ways 
they  interact  historically,  socially,  intellectually, 
and  politically  with  their  own  cultures  as  well  as 
with  the  culture  of  the  20th-century  reader.  Lit- 
erary and  nonliterary  texts  will  be  studied  as 


•  See  the  depanment  handbook  for  group 
descriptions. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


indicators  of  cultural  and  discursive  shifts  from 
one  historical  moment  to  another. 

296  Theory,  Meaning,  Value  (3)  An  introduc- 
tion to  the  different  theoretical  positions  that 
condition  the  ways  in  which  we  read  a  text  and 
assign  meaning  to  it. 

297  Themes  in  Contemporary  Literature  (3) 
Literary  topic  or  theme  in  contemporary  Ameri- 
can, English,  or  world  Uterature  to  be  aimounced 
each  time  the  course  is  offered.  (E)* 

300     Colonial  and  Revolutionary  American  Lit- 
erature (3)  Writers  of  Colonial  and  Revolution- 
ary America.  (A)' 

302  Development  of  the  American  Novel  (3) 
Beginnings  of  the  American  novel  to  Frank 
Norris.  (A)' 

303  Introduction  to  Multiethnic  American  Lit- 
erature (3)  American  ethnic,  racial,  and  national 
groups  in  American  literature  and  the  contribu- 
tions of  creative  literary  artists  representing  these 
cultures.  (E)* 

304  American  Jewish  Novel  (3)  A  study  of 
major  American  Jewish  novelists:  Cahan,  Singer, 
Roth,  Potok,  Bellow,  Malaraud,  Wallant,  and 
Wiesel.  No  knowledge  of  Yiddish  or  Hebrew 
necessary  (B)* 

305  Modem  American  Drama  (3)  American 
drama  from  the  early  1900's  to  the  present,  with 
emphasis  on  the  development  of  the  American 
theater  as  seen  in  such  major  dramatists  as 
O'Neill,  Odets,  Wilder,  MiUer,  WUliams,  and 
Albee.  (B)' 

306  Modem  American  Novel  (3)  The  novel  in 
America  from  Dreiser  to  the  present.  (B)* 

307  Modem  American  Poetry  (3)  Major  20th- 
century  American  poets.  (B)* 

308  The  Sin  of  Success  (3)  An  investigation  of 
the  rise  of  democratic  capitalism  in  America 
bom  Biblical  influences  in  colonial  times  to  the 
begiimings  of  the  merchant  class  and  the  fall  of 
modem  "big  business."  A  study  of  the  entrepre- 
neur and  the  "robber  baron,"  the  success  ethic, 
and  morality  in  the  large  corporation  through 
history,  economics,  and  Uterature. 

#309     Martin  Luther  King  (3)  Examines  and 
analyzes  the  writings  of  Dr.  King  and  their  rela- 
tionship to  the  themes  he  pursued  and  the  lead- 
ership role  he  achieved. 

335  Shakespeare  I  (3)  Reading,  analysis,  and 
discussion  of  selected  histories  and  tragedies. 
Discussion  of  critical  approaches  to  the  plays  and 
of  the  historical  and  intellectual  climate  of  the 
times.  (O* 

336  Shakespeare  II  (3)  Reading,  analysis,  and 
discussion  of  selected  comedies  and  nondramatic 
poems.  Discussion  of  critical  approaches  to  the 
works  and  of  the  historical  and  intellectual  cli- 
mate of  the  times.  Either  UT  335  or  336  may  be 
taken  first.  (C)* 

337  Literature  of  the  Enlightenment  (3)  A 
critical  consideration  of  the  18th-century  writers, 
exclusive  of  the  dramatists.  (O* 

338  Restoration  and  18th-Century  Drama  (3) 
The  drama  from  the  reopening  of  the  theaters  in 
1660  to  1800.  (O* 

339  18th-century  British  Novel  (3)  The  Brit- 
ish novel  from  Defoe  to  Austen.  (D)* 

340  The  Romantic  Movement  (3)  Wordsworth, 
Coleridge,  Byron,  Shelley,  Keats,  and  their  con- 
temporaries in  the  light  of  social  background  and 
critical  doctrine.  (D)* 

341  19th-century  British  Novel  (3)  The  Brit- 
ish novel  from  Austin  to  Hardy.  (D)' 

342  "Victorian  Literature  (3)  Victorian  thought 
and  culture  in  poetry  and  nonfiction  prose.  (D)* 


343  Modem  British  Drama  (3)  British  drama 
from  Wilde  to  the  present,  with  emphasis  on  the 
rebirth  of  the  British  drama  and  its  major  writ- 
ers. (D)* 

344  Modem  British  Novel  (3)  The  novel  in 
England  from  Conrad  to  the  present.  (D)* 

345  Modem  British  Poetry  (3)  Major  20th- 
century  British  poets.  (D)* 

352     Literature  for  Young  Children  (3)  A  criti- 
cal study  of  the  literature  for  young  children  for 
prospective  specialists  in  early  childhood. 
PREREQ:  UT  165  or  equivalent. 

364  Modem  Irish  Uterature  (3)  Major  literary 
writers  of  Ireland  from  1840  to  the  present: 
George  Moore.  Synge,  Yeats,  Joyce,  Shaw. 
O'Casey,  Beckett,  Behan,  and  Seamus  Heaney. 
(D)' 

365  Short  Fiction  (3)  Analysis  and 
intepretation  of  short  fiction.  (E)' 

366  Criticism  (3)  A  study  of  the  theories  of 
classical  antiquity,  England,  and  the  United 
States,  with  emphasis  on  the  relevance  of  these 
theories  to  English  and  American  literature  of 
the  moment.  (E)' 

369     The  Modem  Greek  Experience  (3)  The 
Greek  heritage  and  its  impact  on  the  Greek- 
American  writer  and  the  Greek  writer  in  exile 
(Petrakis,  Gage,  Haviaras,  Kazantzalds,  Cavafy, 
Seferis,  and  Ritsos). 

395     Children's  Uterature  (3)  A  critical  study 
of  literature  for  children,  setting  standards  for 
evaluation  and  appreciation.  PREREQ:  LIT  165 
or  equivalent. 

♦  400     Uterature  Seminar  (3)  Required  for 
English  majors  in  the  junior  or  senior  year.  Top- 
ics offered  periodically:  Beckett/Joyce,  Byron, 
Dickens,  Donne,  Fitzgerald,  Shaw,  Greek  Com- 
edy, Greek  Tragedy,  Hawthome,  Homer,  Resis- 
tance Poetry,  Shakespeares  Major  Tragedies,  and 
Thomas  Hardy. 

430  Old  English  Language  and  Uterature  (3) 
An  introductory  study  of  the  language  (450-1150 
AD.)  through  a  reading  of  religious  and  secular 
poetry  and  prose.  (C)* 

431  Middle  English  Language  and  Uterature 
(3)  An  introductory  study  of  the  language  (1150- 
1450  A.D.)  through  a  reading  of  selected  Uterary 
texts.  (O* 

432  English  Drama  to  1642  (3)  English  drama 
from  the  early  Uturgical  tropes  to  1642,  exclusive 
of  Shakespeare.  (C)* 

434  Reiuissance  Poetry  and  Prose  (3)  Poetry  and 
prose  of  the  16th  and  early  17th  centuries.  (O* 

435  Chaucer  (3)  An  interpretation  of 
Canterbury  Tales  andTroilus  and  Criseyde.  (C)* 
437     Spenser  (3)  A  study  of  the  The  Faerie 
Queene  and  shorter  poems.  (C)' 

440     Milton  (3)  A  survey  of  his  major  poetry 
and  prose  works.  (C>* 

The  English  department  accepts  certain  humani- 
ties courses  as  major  electives.  Consult  the  Hand- 
book for  English  Majors  for  a  list  of  approved 
humanities  courses. 

JOURNALISM 

Symbol:  JRN 

200  Communications  Media  (3)  An  introduc- 
tion to  the  media  of  communications,  emphasiz- 
ing the  development  and  characteristics  of  print 
and  electronic  media  forms  and  their  impact  on 
American  society. 

225     Newswridng  (3)  A  course  designed  to 
develop  proficiency  in  the  writing  of  news  stories 
for  daily  and  weekly  newspapers.  News  values, 
the  structure  and  style  of  news,  and  the  prepara- 
tion of  copy  in  accordance  with  professional 
standards  wiU  be  stressed. 


Department  of  Foreign  Languages 


226     News  Reporting  (3)  Instruction  and  prac- 
tice in  basic  news  reporting  techniques  coupled 
with  an  introduction  to  newspaper  feature  writ- 
ing. Outside  assignments  will  include  coverage  of 
speeches,  local  government  meetings,  and  the 
courts.  PREREQ:  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 
250     News  Editing  (3)  A  course  designed  to 
acquaint  students  with  the  skills  involved  in  the 
preparation  of  copy  for  publication  in  newspa- 
pers and  magazines.  Instruction  and  practice  in 
the  mechanics  of  copy  editing,  headline  writing, 
layout,  and  photo  editing.  PREREQ:  JRN  225  or 
equivalent. 

312     Sports  Reporting  and  Writing  (3)  Instruc- 
tion and  practice  in  basic  sports  reporting  tech- 
niques, including  live-event  coverage  and  feature 
writing,  as  well  as  an  introduction  to  routine 
duties  associated  with  working  on  the  sports 
desk.  PREREQ:  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 
315     Magazine  Article  Writing  (3)  Practical 
instruction  in  the  skills  required  for  successful 
freelance  magazine  writing  with  emphasis  on 
research,  interviewing,  writing  techniques,  and 
marketing.  Students  will  write  and  submit  for 
publication  short  features  and  a  full-length  maga- 
zine article.  PREREQ:  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 
325     History  of  Journalism  (3)  A  historical  sur- 
vey of  the  American  press  from  Colonial  times  to 
the  present,  with  special  emphasis  on  the  con- 
tinuing struggle  for  press  freedom  and  the  new 
journalistic  environment  created  by  the  emer- 
gence of  mass  media. 

355     Public  Relations  Principles  (3)  An  intro- 
duction to  the  role  of  the  public  relations  practi- 
tioner in  the  formation  of  public  opinion.  Com- 
munications theory  will  be  combined  with 
specific  techniques  for  working  with  the  press, 
producing  printed  material  and  conducting  spe- 
cial events.  PREREQ:  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 


411    Journalism  Practicum  (3)  One  semester  of 
supervised  experience  as  a  member  of  the  edito- 
rial staff  of  the  University's  student  newspaper. 
See  journalism  coordinator  for  specific  require- 
ments. PREREQ:  JRN  225  and  either  JRN  226  or 
JRN  250. 

CREATIVE  WRITING 

Symbol:  CRW 

201     Introduction  to  Creative  Writing  (3) 
Introduction  to  the  craft  of  writing  poetry  and 
fiction.  Basic  discussion  of  terms,  strategies,  and 
professional  models  in  each  genre.  Practice  in 
writing  and  critiquing  each  genre. 

202-203     Creative  Writing  I-II  (3)  (3)  Writing 
experience  in  the  crafts  of  fiction,  poetry,  nonfic- 
tion,  and  drama. 

301-302  Poetry  Workshop  I-II  (3)  (3)  The  the- 
ory and  practice  of  poetry  and  the  exploration  of 
verse  forms.  Practice  in  critical  and  interpretative 
analysis  of  poems  written  by  fellow  students  and 
professional  poets. 

303-304     Short  Story  Workshop  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Crafting  the  modem  short  story  with  reference 
to  American  and  British  models.  The  significance 
of  setting,  atmosphere,  characterization,  and 
theme.  Discussion  and  some  exploration  of 
experimental  ideas  in  the  genre. 
305     Essay  Workshop  (3)  Practice  in  writing 
the  essay.  Conventions  and  techniques  of  this 
literary  form  as  it  appears  in  commercial  and 
quality  magazines. 

307    Playwriting  Workshop  (3)  Writing  the 
play:  possibiUties  and  limitations  of  the  stage. 
Attention  to  sets  and  costuming  where  relevant. 
Characterization  by  action  and  dialogue.  Prob- 
lems of  establishing  motivation.  The  play's  total- 


ity in  theme,  character,  and  action.  Informal 
readings  of  student  work. 
♦  400    Writing  Seminar  (3)  Special  topics, 
such  as  fantasy,  science  fiction,  longer  prose 
works,  or  the  antistory.  To  be  announced. 
490-491     Writing  Seminar  in  the  Novel  I-ll  (3) 
(3)  A  course  in  the  writing  and  preparing  of 
book-length  manuscripts  (novel,  novella,  and  the 
"nonfictional "  novel)  with  the  intention  of  sub- 
mission for  publication.  Also  includes  coverage 
of  fictional  aspects  and  techniques  used  in  writ- 
ing memoirs,  biography,  and  current  history. 

FILM  THEORY  AND  CRITICISM 

Symbol:  FLM 

200  Introduction  to  Film  (3)  A  critical- 
analytical  approach  to  world  cinema  covering 
film  theory  and  the  major  film  movements 
(Soviet  Realism,  German  Expressionism,  Italian 
Neo-Realism,  French  New  Wave,  Cinema  Nuovo, 
New  German  Cinema,  and  Surrealism)  from  the 
beginning  to  present  (E)* 

201  American  Film  (3)  The  function  of  cinema 
in  contemporary  society  as  a  socio-cultural,  eco- 
nomic and  political  object,  as  seen  through  criti- 
cal analysis  of  American  films.  (E)' 

300  Private  Screening  (1)  Eight  to  12  narrative 
film  classics  per  semester  on  a  specific  topic  or 
theme. 

301  Documentary  Film  (3)  Understanding  and 
enjoying  the  social,  philosophic,  economic,  and 
poUtical  aspects  of  documentary  film.  (E)* 

COMPARATIVE  LITERATURE  STUDIES 

See  course  listings  under  Comparative  Lit- 
erature Studies,  pages  80-81. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Foreign  Languages 

Ronald  L.  Gougher,  Chairperson 
Frederick  Patton,  Assistant  Chairperson 

ASSOCLATE  PROFESSORS:  Braidotti,  Escorcia,  Gougher, 
Patton,  Schlau,  Williams 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Brown,  Eisenstadt,  Esplugas, 
Garcia-Barrio,  Gilmour,  Landwehr,  LeBrun-Lanthiez, 
Moscatelli,  Pauly,  Seaver,  Speh,  Varricchio 

INSTRUCTOR:  Rosso 
Programs  Offered 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS:  French,  German,  Latin,  Russian,  and  Spanish 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCL-VTION:  French,  German,  Latin, 
Russian,  and  Spanish 

The  Instructional  1  Certificate  in  a  foreign  language  qualifies  the 
holder  to  teach  his  or  her  major  language  in  the  pubHc  schools 
(kindergarten  through  12th  grade)  of  Pennsylvania. 

Minors:  French,  German,  Italian,  Latin,  Russian,  Spanish,  and 
Translation 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  BA.  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Major  Language  Courses 

FRENCH  -  FRE  101-102*  (or  111-112), 
201-202  (or  211-212),  301,  302,  303,  and 
304.  Additional  courses  to  complete  the  33 
credit  hours,  taken  under  advisement. 


51  semester  hours 
33  semester  hours 


GERMAN  -  GER  101-102*,  201-202,  221, 
303  and/or  304,  305  and/or  306,  307  and/or 
308.  Additional  courses  to  complete  the  33 
credits,  taken  under  advisement. 

LATIN  -  LAT  101-102*,  201,  202,  203,  303, 
and  406.  Additional  courses  to  complete  the 
33  credits,  taken  under  advisement. 

RUSSIAN  -  RUS  101-102*,  201-202,  301- 
302,  303-304,  305-306,  307-308,  and  365. 
Additional  courses  to  complete  the  33  credits, 
taken  under  advisement. 

SPANISH  -  SPA  101-102*,  201-202,  301- 
302,  315,  320  or  321,  330-331,  365,  and  any 
two  400-level  courses.  Additional  courses  to 
complete  the  33  credits,  taken  under  advise- 
ment. 

3.  Two  cognate  courses 

A.  LIN  230 

B.  History,  pohtical  science,  geography* 

4.  Demonstration  of  proficiency  in  a  second 
language  through  the  intermediate  II  level 

5.  Elec  rives 
The  number  of  hours  available  depends  on 
the  student's  level  of  second  language  profi- 


6  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


27-38  semester  hours 


•Foreign  language  majors  receive  no  credit  toward  graduation,  a  major,  or 
certification  for  101  and/or  102  in  their  majors.  If  101  and/or  102  in 
another  language  are  taken  as  free  electives,  they  will  be  credited  towards 
graduation. 


fl9      Department  of  Foreign  Languages 


ciency.  They  may  choose  to  apply  some  of 
these  to  additional  advanced  courses  in  their 
major  area  or  to  continue  second  or  third 
language  study. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B.S.  ED.  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language  Concentration  (specialized    33  semester  hours 
preparation) 

FRENCH  -  FRE  101-102'  (or  111-112), 
201-202  (or  211-212)  301,  302,  303,  and 
304.  Additional  French  courses  to  complete 
the  33  credits. 

GERMAN  -  GER  101-102',  201-202,  303- 
304,  305-306,  307-308,  and  365.  Additional 
German  courses  to  complete  the  33  credits. 

LATIN  -  LAT  101-102',  201,  202,  303,  and 
406.  Additional  Latin  and  Classical  Language 
courses  to  complete  the  33  credits. 
RUSSIAN  -  RUS  101-102',  201-202,  301- 
302,  303-304,  305-306,  307-308,  320-321, 
and  365. 

SRWISH  -  SPA  101-102',  201-202,  301- 
302,  320  or  321,  330-331,  and  365.  Addi- 
tional Spanish  courses  to  complete  the  33 
credits. 

3.  Two  cognate  courses 

A.  LIN  230  3  semester  hours 

B.  Area  studies  3  semester  hours 

4.  Student  must  complete  professional  education 

sequence  30  semester  hours 

5.  Electives  to  complete  128  hours 

The  student  is  advised  to  use  his  or  her  electives  in  areas  that  will 
contribute  to  his  or  her  profession. 

All  students  majoring  in  foreign  languages  and  preparing  to  teach 
must  also  complete  LAN  301,  credited  to  professional  education. 

Minor  in  Language  18  semester  hours 

Minors  are  available  in  French,  German,  Italian, 
Latin,  Spanish,  and  Russian. 

A.  Language  courses  at  levels  201  and  202  are  required. 

B.  Courses  at  the  200,  300,  and  400  levels  in  one  language,  taken 
under  advisement.  Courses  in  English  are  not  acceptable. 

Minor  in  Translation  18  semester  hours 

This  program  of  study  is  open  to  any  student  who  has  a  major  or 
minor  (or  the  equivalent)  in  a  second  language.  A  student  must 
take  the  following  courses:  CLS  309,  LAN  350,  351,  450,  and  460, 
and  LIN  230. 

ADDITIONAL  LANGUAGES 

Greek,  Italian,  Portuguese 

Courses  in  Greek,  Italian,  and  Portuguese  may  be  offered,  but  no 
major  field  is  available. 

Greek  and  Hebrew  —  Classical  and  New  Testament 

Elementary  Greek  I-II  (GRE  101-102)  and  Intermediate  Greek  I-II 
(GRE  101-102).  Part  of  Classical  Language  program. 


Italian 

Elementary  Italian  I-Il  (ITA  101-102),  Intermediate  Italian  I-Il  (ITA 
201-202),  Advanced  Italian  I-ll  (1X\  301-302),  Italian  Culture  (ITA 
321),  Italian  Cinema  (ITA  360),  Survey  of  Italian  Literature  (ITA 
400),  Introduction  to  Dante,  Petrarca,  and  Boccaccio  (ITA  401), 
Contemporary  Italian  Literature  (ITA  402),  Independent  Studies  in 
Italian  Language  and  Literature  (ITA  410),  Seminars  in  Italian  (ITA 
411-412). 

Portuguese 

Elementary  Porraguese  I-Il  (POR  101-102)  and  Intermediate 

Portuguese  I-II  (POR  201-202). 

ADDITIONAL  OFFERINGS 

Selected  critical  or  uncommonly  taught  languages  such  as  Chinese, 
Japanese,  Modem  Greek,  Modem  Hebrew,  Polish,  Portuguese,  and 
Serbo-Croatian,  on  a  conversational  basis  only. 

The  Junior  Year  Abroad  Program 

The  following  courses  in  French  are  offered  at  the  University  of 
Montpellier,  France,  through  the  Junior  Year  Abroad  Program  spon- 
sored by  West  Chester  University.  The  program  is  designed  to  give 
persons  interested  in  France  a  first-hand  acquaintance  with  French 
life  and  enable  them  to  achieve  an  active  command  of  the  language. 

The  program  is  open  to  any  student  enrolled  in  a  college  or  univer- 
sity who  has  completed  the  equivalent  of  two  years  of  college 
French  and  is  able  to  take  lectures  in  French.  During  the  time  the 
student  is  enrolled  in  the  program,  he  or  she  is  a  student  of  West 
Chester  University  and  will  receive  a  minimum  of  30  credits  for  a 
full,  two  semesters  of  University  work  after  successful  completion 
of  the  year  abroad  program  of  study.  Each  course  runs  for  two 
semesters  and  is  conducted  entirely  in  French  by  French  professors. 
Other  types  of  programs  can  be  arranged  for  nonlanguage  majors. 

Montpellier  Course  Offerings 

Advanced  Grammar  and  Composition  (FRE  361-62) 
Advanced  French  Conversation  (FRE  363-64) 
Phonetics  and  Translation  (FRE  365-66) 
Contemporary  French  Civilization  (FRE  367-68) 
Uterary  Studies  (FRE  369-70) 

Foreign  Language  Testing  and  Placement 

The  Department  of  Foreign  Languages  provides  a  testing  service  for 
students  entering  the  University.  Based  on  the  results  of  the  tests 
given  and  an  analysis  of  past  experience,  the  Department  of  Foreign 
Languages  will  suggest  the  level  of  language  a  student  should  enter. 
After  taking  part  in  any  given  course  for  a  short  period  of  time,  a 
student's  placement  could  be  changed  if  consultation  between  the 
student  and  an  adviser  results  in  a  decision  to  change  the  place- 
ment. The  depanment  reserves  the  right  to  withhold  credit  towards 
a  degree  for  a  course  taken  at  a  lower  level  than  was  recommended 
by  the  department. 

If  a  student  wishes  to  take  an  exam  to  complete  the  language 
requirement  or  receive  credit  for  a  course,  he  or  she  must  take  a 
special  exam  other  than  those  given  for  placement.  Arrangements 
can  be  made  with  the  chairperson  of  the  Department  of  Foreign 
Languages. 


Department  of  Foreign  Languages 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

FRENCH 

Symbol:  FRE 

101-102     Elementary  French  I-II  (Traditional) 

(3)  (3)  Fundamencals  of  French  grammar,  syn- 
tax, and  pronunciation  All  four  skills  Gistening, 
speaking,  reading,  and  writing)  are  taught  con- 
comitantly. Taught  in  French.  Language  labora- 
tory work  required. 

111-112     Elementary  French  I-II  (Intensive) 

(4)  (4)  For  linguistically  talented  and  motivated 
beginners.  Course  meets  once  in  plenary  session 
and  three  times  in  small  groups.  All  four  skills 
(listening,  speaking,  reading,  and  writing)  are 
taught  concomitantly.  Language  laboratory  work 
required. 

200     Intermediate  Research  (1)  Special  smdies 
in  French  for  studio  art  majors.  Approval  of 
department  required. 
201-202     Intermediate  French  I-II  (Traditional) 

(3)  (3)  Review  of  grammar  and  syntax.  Readings 
in  French  literature  as  a  basis  for  class  discus- 
sion and  practice  in  composition.  Language  labo- 
ratory drill.  PREREQ;  FRE  102  or  equivalent. 
211-212     Intermediate  French  I-II  (Intensive) 

(4)  (4)  Continuation  of  intensive  first  year. 
Review  of  French  grammar  and  survey  of  con- 
temporary French  culture.  Self-expression  is 
developed  through  compositions  and  discussion 
on  assigned  topics.  Language  laboratory  work 
required.  PREREQ:  FRE  112  or  equivalent. 

301  Advanced  Grammar  and  Stylistics  (3)  The 
more  complex  grammatical  and  syntactical  struc- 
tures of  the  language,  with  particular  attention  to 
stylistics.  Practice  in  the  writing  of  compositions 
on  a  more  sophisticated  and  advanced  level  with 
emphasis  on  correct  usage.  Work  in  language 
laboratory  required.  PREREQ:  FRE  202  or  212  or 
equivalent.  Offered  spring  semester  only. 

302  Advanced  Oral  French  and  Phonetics  (3) 
Intensive  practice  in  spoken  French  to  develop 
skilb  in  pronunciation  and  in  listening  compre- 
hension. Introduction  to  French  phonetics. 

303  French  Civilization  (3)  (In  French)  A  sur- 
vey of  the  social,  political,  economic,  and  educa- 
tional structures  of  France,  along  with  an  intro- 
duction to  the  artistic  contributions  of  the 
French,  particularly  in  the  20th  century. 
PREREQ:  FRE  202,  212,  or  equivalent. 

304  Readings  in  French  Literature  (3)  The 
reading  and  analysis  of  representative  selections 
of  French  prose  (fiction  and  nonfiction),  poetry, 
essays,  and  plays. 

401     Commercial  French  (3)  A  study  of  the 
French  economic  and  business  systems,  and  exten- 
sive practice  in  using  forms  and  expressions  fre- 
quently used  in  French  business  correspondence. 

409  Women  and  Men  in  French  Literature  (3) 
(In  English)  Works  by  women  and  men  novel- 
ists, poets,  or  dramatists  that  present  striking 
images  of  love  and  conflict  between  the  sexes. 
Also  a  women's  studies  course. 

410  French  Theater  to  1900:  In  Context  (3)  A 
study  of  the  French  theater  from  its  beginnings 
to  the  19th  century  in  the  contexts  of  their 
times  Reading  and  analysis  of  representive  plays 
from  the  various  periods. 

411  Modem  French  Literature  in  Context  (3) 
A  study  of  the  evolution  of  modem  literary 
genres,  beginning  with  the  revolt  of  the  genera- 
tion of  1900,  through  Dada  and  Surrealism  and 
the  writers  of  the  absurd  to  the  present. 

412  Narrative  Prose  (3)  An  examination  of  the 
evolution  of  French  prose  in  the  "nouvelle,"  the 
"conte,"  the  "recit "  and  the  novel  from  their  ear- 
liest beginnings  to  the  present. 


413     French  Poetry  (3)  A  history  of  French 
poetry  and  a  study  of  its  versification.  Practice  in 
the  recitation  of  French  poems  and  close  textual 
analysis  and  discussion  of  selected  works. 

♦  420-421-422     Topics  in  French  literature  (3) 
(3)  (3)  Each  topics  course  provides  an  in-depth 
study  of  a  significant  aspect  of  French  culture, 
art,  or  literature,  its  history  and  influences, 
and/or  its  principal  exponents,  creative  artists, 
and  advocates.  Topics  will  be  announced  annu- 
ally by  the  French  faculty. 

Offerings  in  English  (EFR):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture-Cluster  Courses 
■#EFR  220     French  Civilization  (3)  fln 
English)  A  study  of  France's  poUtical  and  educa- 
tional systems  and  economic  and  religious  insti- 
tutions with  emphasis  on  contemporary  aspects. 
FRENCH  JUNIOR  YEAR  ABROAD  PROGRAM 
361-62         Advanced  French  Grammar  and 

Composition  III,  IV  (3)  (3) 
363-64         Advanced  French  Conversation  I,  II 

(3)  (3) 
365-66         French  Phonetics  and  Translation  I, 

II  (3)  (3) 
367-68         Contemporary  French  Civilization 

I,  II  (3)  (3) 

♦  369-70     French  Uterary  Studies  I,  II  (3)  (3) 

GERMAN 

Symbol:  GER 

101-102     Elementary  German  l-II  (3)  (3)  Fun- 
damentals of  German  grammar,  syntax,  and  pro- 
nunciation. Introduction  to  German  culture 
through  easy-reading  texts.  The  audio-lingual 
method  is  employed.  Language  laboratory  drill  is 
required. 

200     Intermediate  Research  (1)  Special  studies 
in  German  for  studio  art  majors.  Approval  of 
department  required. 

201-202     Intermediate  German  l-ll  (3)  (3) 
Review  of  grammar  and  syntax.  Readings  in  Ger- 
man Uterature  as  a  basis  for  class  discussion  in 
German  and  practice  in  composition.  Language 
laboratory  drill  required  for  remedial  work  only. 
PREREQ:  GER  102  or  equivalent. 
NOTE:  All  advanced  literature  and  civilization 
courses  include  lectures  and  discussion  in  the 
foreign  language,  and  all  student  papers  and 
examinations  must  be  written  in  the  foreign  lan- 
guage. 

210  German  for  Business  (1)  Intensive  prac- 
tice in  writing  business  correspondence,  job 
applications,  and  discussions  of  business  prac- 
tices in  Germany. 

211  German  for  Science  (1)  Study  of  basic 
vocabulary  for  reading  documents  related  to  vari- 
ous scientific  fields.  Readings  in  individual  fields 
of  endeavor. 

212  German  for  Travel  (1)  Study  of  major  cit- 
ies and  cultural  sites  in  Germany.  Concentration 
on  contemporary  information  and  travel. 

#221     German  Civilization  (3)  (In  German)  An 
analysis  of  the  major  contributions  of  German 
civilization  to  western  culture  in  the  areas  of  art, 
music,  science,  and  Uterature.  PREREQ:  GER 
202  or  equivalent. 

303-304    Advanced  German  Grammar  and 
Composition  I-II  (3)  (3)  The  more  complex 
grammatical  and  syntactical  structures  of  the  lan- 
guage with  particular  attention  to  stylistics.  Prac- 
tice in  writing  compositions  on  a  more  advanced 
level  with  emphasis  on  correct  usage.  PREREQ: 
GER  202  or  equivalent. 

305     Survey  of  German  Literature  I  (3)  Ger- 
man Uterature  from  its  earUest  beginnings  to 
1800.  PREREQ:  GER  202  or  equivalent. 


306     Survey  of  German  Literature  11  (3)  Ger- 
man Uterature  from  1800  to  the  present. 
PREREQ:  GER  202  or  equivalent. 
307-308    Advanced  Oral  German  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Intensive  driU  in  the  oral  use  of  the  language  to 
develop  proficiency  in  listening  comprehension 
and  speaking.  PREREQ:  GER  203  or  equivalent. 
365     German  Phonetics  (3)  Description  and 
practice  in  the  sounds  of  the  German  language 
and  its  major  dialectical  differences.  Comparative 
analysis  with  English.  PREREQ:  LIN  230. 

400  20th-century  German  Literature  in 
Translation  (3)  (In  English)  A  study  of  selected 
noveb,  shon  stories,  and  plays  from  the  German 
Uterature  of  the  20th  century.  An  introduction  to 
some  of  the  modem  writers  of  the  German- 
speaking  world  from  the  perspective  of  the  social 
and  political  developments  in  modem  Germany. 

401  The  Age  of  Goethe  (3)  German  Uterary 
doctrines  and  masterpieces  of  the  periods  of 
Enlightenment,  Storm  and  Stress,  and  Classi- 
cism. PREREQ:  GER  202  or  equivalent. 

402  Contemporary  German  Literature  (3) 
Works  of  the  principal  German  writers  of  the 
20th  century.  PREREQ:  GER  202  or  equivalent. 

406  German  Literature  in  the  19th  Century 
(3)  German  realism  of  the  19th  Century. 
PREREQ:  GER  206  or  equivalent. 

407  German  Lyric  Poetry  (3)  Modem  German 
poetry  of  pre-  and  post-World  War  II.  PREREQ: 
GER  206  or  equivalent. 

409     German  Literature  of  the  Romantic  Period 
(3)  PREREQ:  GER  206  or  equivalent. 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  German  Lan- 
guage and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for 
advanced  students  only.  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
instructor. 

♦  411     Seminar  in  German  (3)  Independent 
study  and  research  for  upper-division  students. 
Topics  announced  annuaUy  by  the  German  fac- 
ulty. PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412     Seminar  in  German  (3)  Independent 
study  and  research  for  upper-division  students. 
Topic  announced  annually  by  the  German  fac- 
ulty. PREREQ:  Permission  of  instmctor. 

Offerings  in  English  (EFR):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture-Cluster  Courses 
■#EGE  222  German  Civilization  (3)  An  analy- 
sis of  the  major  contributions  of  German  civiliza- 
tion to  western  culture  in  the  areas  of  art,  music, 
science,  and  Uterature.  No  knowledge  of  German 
required. 

■#EGE  323    Austrian  Civilization  1848-1938 
An  interdisciplinary  study  of  Austrian  civiliza- 
tion, focusing  on  Vienna  1848-1938.  The  rela- 
tionship of  selected  cultural  and  inteUectual 
developments  to  their  poUtical  and  social  con- 
texts. This  course  employs  the  perspective  of 
many  disciplines  but  is  specifically  concemed 
with  the  humanitie^and  visual  arts. 

GREEK 

Symbol:  GRE 

101-102     Elementary  Greek  I-II  (3)  (3)  Forms, 

grammar,  and  idioms  of  Attic  and  Koine  Greek. 

Readings  in  Septuagint  and  New  Testament 

Greek 

201     Intermediate  Greek  I  (3)  Readings  in 

Socratic  dialogues  of  Plato. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 
■  Culture  Cluster 


Depanment  of  Foreign  Languages 


202  Intermediate  Greek  11  (3)  Homeric  pros- 
ody and  grammar.  Reading  of  selected  portions 
of  the  Homeric  Poems. 

♦  301-302     Greek  Reading  l-ll  (3)  (3)  Readings 
in  prose  and  verse.  Authors  selected  usually  by 
genre 

HEBREW 

Symbol:  HEB 

101-102     Elementary  Biblical  Hebrew  1-11  (3) 

(3)  Forms,  grammar,  and  idioms  of  Biblical 

Hebrew.  Selected  readings. 

201-202     Intermediate  Bibhcal  Hebrew  l-Il  (3) 

(3)  Readings  in  the  prose  and  poetic  document 

of  the  Biblia  Hebraica. 

1X\L1AN 

Symbol:  ITA 

101-102     Elementary  Italian  l-Il  (3)  (3)  Inten- 
sive drill,  in  class  and  in  the  language  laboratory, 
with  pronunciation,  intonation,  and  basic  lin- 
guistic patterns.  Introduction  to  Italian  culture 
through  basic  dialogues  and  easy-reading  texts. 
201-202     Intermediate  Italian  l-II  (3)  (3) 
Review  of  Italian  grammar  and  syntax.  Introduc- 
tion to  Italian  literature  through  short  readings 
of  intermediate  difficulty.  Composition  and  con- 
versation in  Italian  based  on  reading  assign- 
ments Language  laboratory  for  remedial  drill. 
PREREQ:  ITA  102  or  equivalent. 
301-302    Advanced  Italian  Grammar  and  Con- 
versation I-Il  (3)  (3)  Review  and  mastery  of  Ital- 
ian grammar,  with  special  emphasis  on  syntactic 
structure  and  stylistics,  along  with  intensive  oral 
drills  to  develop  proficiency  in  listening  compre- 
hension and  speaking  ability. 
304     Advanced  Oral  Italian  (3)  Theoretical  and 
practical  approach  to  phonology,  phonetics,  and 
basic  self-expression  in  the  Italian  language. 
321     Italian  Culture  (3)  An  overview  of  Italian 
geography,  history,  and  regional  cultures,  along 
with  its  literary,  philosophical,  scientific,  and 
artistic  manifestations  and  contributions  to  the 
world. 

360     Italian  Cinema  (3)  A  history  of  Italian  cin- 
ema, as  seen  through  representative  works  of 
each  periodymovement. 

400  Survey  of  Italian  Literature  (3)  High 
points  in  Italian  Uterature,  touching  upon  the 
most  important  writers  from  the  beginning  to 
the  present  day. 

401  Introduction  to  Dante,  Petrarca,  and 
Boccaccio  (3)  A  general  discussion  on  the 
importance  and  influence  of  these  writers  on 
Italian  and  European  literature  and  thought,  as 
seen  through  some  of  their  representative  works. 

402  Contemporary  Italian  Uterature  (3)  A 
survey  of  contemporary  Italian  authors  through 
some  representative  selections  of  their  works. 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  Italian  Lan- 
guage and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for 
advanced  students  only.  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
instructor. 

♦  411     Seminar  in  Italian  I  (3)  Independent 
study  and  research  for  upper-division  students. 
Topics  announced  annually  by  the  ItaUan  faculty. 
PB£REQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412     Seminar  in  Italian  11  (3)  Independent 
study  and  research  for  upper-division  students. 
Topics  announced  annually  by  the  Italian  faculty. 
PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 

EIT  221     Italian  Culture  (3)  An  overview  of 
Italian  geography,  history, and  regional  cultures, 
along  with  its  literary,  philosophical,  scientific, 
and  artistic  manifestations  and  contributions  to 
the  world. 


Err  260  Italian  Cinema  (in  English)  (3)  A  his- 
tory of  Italian  cinema,  as  seen  through  represen- 
tative works  of  each  period/movement. 

LATIN 

Symbol:  LAT 

101-102     Elementary  Latin  I-II  (3)  (3)  Forms, 

syntax,  and  idioms  of  classical  Latin.  Selected 

readings 

201  Cicero  (3)  Selections  from  the  orations, 
letters,  and  essays.  PREREQ:  LAT  101  and  102, 
or  two  years  of  secondary  school  Latin. 

202  Vergil  (3)  Readmg  and  analysis  of  cele- 
brated portions  of  the  Aeneid.  The  nature  of 
Latin  epic  poetry.  PREREQ:  LAT  201  or  three 
years  of  secondary  school  Latin 

NOTE:  LAT  202  or  four  years  of  secondary 
school  Latin  is  a  prerequisite  for  all  following 
courses  in  Latin. 

301  Teaching  of  Latin  (3)  Introduction  to  the 
problems,  methods,  and  materials  in  the  teaching 
of  Latin. 

302  The  Latin  Lyric  Poets  (3)  Latin  lyric 
poetry  through  readings  in  Catullus,  the  Odes, 
and  Epodes  of  Horace.  Practice  in  the  composi- 
tion of  lyric  poetry. 

303  Advanced  Latin  Prose  Composition  (3) 
Required  of  Latin  majors;  open  to  other  students 
accepted  by  the  instructor.  The  complex  syntac- 
tical structures  of  Latin  of  classical  style.  Transla- 
tions of  English  into  classical  Latin. 

304  The  Latin  Elegiac  Poets  (3)  Latin  elegiac 
poetry  through  readings  in  Ovid,  TibuUus, 
Lygdamus,  Sulpicia,  and  Propertius.  Practice  in 
the  composition  of  elegiac  poetry. 

♦  305     Reading  Course  in  Latin  (3)  Open  to 
Latin  majors  only.  Area  and  content  to  be  deter- 
mined by  the  students  needs. 
306     Roman  Historians  (3)  Introduction  to 
Roman  historiography.  Readings  in  Livy,  Sallust, 
and  Tacitus 

401  Roman  Drama  (3)  Origins  and  develop- 
ment of  Roman  drama.  Selected  plays  of  Plaulus, 
Terence,  and  Seneca. 

402  Roman  Philosophy  (3)  Introduction  to 
Greek  and  Roman  philosophy.  Readings  in 
Cicero.  Tusculan  Dispuutions,"  and  Lucretius, 
"De  Rerum  Natura." 

403  Roman  Satire  (3)  Origins  and  develop- 
ment of  Roman  satire.  Readings  in  Horace, 
Persius,  and  Juvenal. 

404  The  Latin  Novel  (3)  Readings  in 
Petronius,  Satyricon,  and  Apuleius,  The  Golden 
Ass.  Lectures  and  discussions  of  the  emergence 
of  the  novel  as  a  literary  form. 

405  Medieval  Latin  (3)  Prose  and  poetry  from 
the  fourth  to  the  17th  centuries. 

406  Latin  Tutorial  Course  (3)  Required  of 
majors  in  Latin  or  Classics:  open  to  other  stu- 
dents accepted  by  the  instructor.  Introduction  to 
the  history  of  the  alphabet;  principles  of  histori- 
cal and  comparative  linguistics,  especially  as 
applied  to  Greek  and  Latin;  and  history  of  the 
Latin  language  as  seen  in  ancient  authors  and 
inscriptions. 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  Latin  Language 
and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for  advanced 
students  only.  PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  411     Seminar  in  Latin  (3)  Independent  study 
and  research  for  upper-division  students.  Topics 
armounced  annually  by  the  Latin  faculty. 
PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412     Seminar  in  Latin  (3)  Independent  study 
and  research  for  upper-division  students.  Topics 
announced  annually  by  the  Latin  faculty. 
PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 


PORTUGUESE 

Symbol:  FOR 

101-102     Elementary  Portuguese  I-Il  (3)  (3) 
Fundamentals  of  Portuguese  grammar,  syntax, 
and  pronunciation.  Introduction  to  Brazilian  her- 
itage and  culture  through  graded  reading  selec- 
tions. 

201-202     Intermediate  Portuguese  I-ll  (3)  (3) 
Review  and  continuation  of  basic  Portuguese 
with  emphasis  on  vocabulary  expansion  and  cul- 
tural insights  through  increased  reading.  Intro- 
duction to  selected  Portuguese  and  Brazilian 
authors.  PREREQ:  POR  102. 

RUSSIAN 

Symbol:  RUS 

101-102     Elementary  Russian  I-II  (3)  (3)  Inten- 
sive drill  in  pronunciation,  intonation,  and  basic 
linguistic  patterns  to  develop  fundamental  com- 
municative skills.  Extensive  language  laboratory 
work  is  essential. 

200     Intermediate  Research  (1)  Special  studies 
in  Russian  for  studio  art  majors.  Approval  of 
department  required. 

201-202     Intermediate  Russian  I-Il  (3)  (3) 
Reinforcement  and  refinement  of  communicative 
slolb  through  the  continuing  study  and  review 
of  grammatical  structures.  Composition  and  con- 
versation based  on  writings  of  intermediate  diffi- 
culty by  Soviet  writers.  Students  majoring  in  the 
sciences  or  mathematics  may  elect  readings  per- 
taining to  the  scientific  field  in  the  second 
semester.  Extensive  language  bboratory  work  is 
essential.  PREREQ:  RUS  102. 
NOTE:  All  advanced  literature  and  civilization 
courses  include  lectures  and  discussion  in  the 
foreign  language,  and  all  student  papers  and 
examinations  must  be  written  in  the  foreign  lan- 
guage. 

301-302     Advanced  Russian  Grammar  and 
Composition  I-II  (3)  (3)  The  more  complex 
grammatical  and  syntactical  structures  of  the  lan- 
guage, with  particular  attention  to  stylistics. 
Practice  in  writing  compositions  on  a  more 
advanced  level,  with  emphasis  on  current  usage. 
Regular  use  of  the  tape  program  is  essential. 
PREREQ:  RUS  202  or  equivalent. 
303-304    Advanced  Readings  in  Russian  Litera- 
ture I-II  (3)  (3)  Works  of  Russian  and  Soviet 
literature  are  read  and  analyzed.  PREREQ:  RUS 
202  or  equivalent 

307-308     Advanced  Oral  Russian  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Intensive  drill  in  the  oral  use  of  the  bnguage  to 
develop  proficiency  in  listening  comprehension 
and  speaking.  Regular  use  of  the  tape  program  is 
essential.  PREREQ:  RUS  203  or  equivalent. 
305-306     Russian  Civilization  I-II  (3)  (3)  (In 
Russian)  A  study  of  the  cultural,  philosophical, 
religious,  and  artistic  contributions  of  Russia. 
PREREQ:  RUS  202  or  equivalent. 
310     Russian  Uterature  in  Translation  (3)  Sur- 
vey of  Russian  literature  from  its  origin  to  the 
present.  All  works  read  in  English.  No  knowl- 
edge of  Russian  required. 
365     Russian  Phonetics  (3)  An  overview  of 
Russian  phonetics,  morphophonemics,  and  into- 
nation patterns.  Dialects  and  varieties  of  Russian. 
Phonetics  and  intonation  practice  in  the  lan- 
guage laboratory.  PREREQ:  LIN  230. 
401     The  Russian  Novel  (3)  The  Russian  novel 
and  Uterary  trends  of  the  19th  and  20th  centu- 
ries. PREREQ:  RUS  205  or  equivalent. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Foreign  Languages 


402  The  Russian  Drama  (3)  Works  of  the 
major  dramatists  of  the  19th  and  20th  centuries. 
PREREQ:  RUS  205  or  equivalent. 

403  Russian  Poetry  of  the  20th  Century  (3)  A 
study  of  the  principal  Russian  poets  of  the  20th 
century.  PREREQ:  RUS  205  or  equivalent. 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  Russian  Lan- 
guage and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for 
advanced  students  only.  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
instructor. 

♦  411     Seminar  in  Russian  (3)  Independent 
study  and  research  for  upper-division  students. 
Topics  announced  annually  by  the  Russian  fac- 
ulty, PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412     Seminar  in  Russian  (3)  Independent 
study  and  research  for  upper-division  students. 
Topics  announced  annually  by  the  Russian  fac- 
ulty. PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 

Offerings  in  English  (ERU):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture-Cluster  Courses 

■#ERU  209     Soviet  Russian  Culture  (3)  (In 
English)  An  interdisciplinary  course  designed  to 
acquaint  students  with  Russian  culture  and  life 
in  the  Soviet  Union  today.  No  knowledge  of 
Russian  required. 

SPANISH 

Symbol;  SPA 

101-102     Elementary  Spanish  I-II  (3)  (3)  Fun- 
damentab  of  Spanish  grammar,  syntax,  and  pro- 
nunciation from  the  oral-aural  point  of  view. 
Introduction  to  Spanish  culture  through  easy- 
reading  texts. 

200     Intermediate  Research  (1)  Special  studies 
in  Spanish  for  studio  art  majors.  Approval  of 
department  required. 

201-202     Intermediate  Spanish  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Review  of  Spanish  grammar  and  syntax.  Read- 
ings in  Spanish  literature  as  a  basis  for  class  dis- 
cussion in  Spanish  and  practice  in  composition. 
Language  laboratory  drill  recommended  for 
remedial  work  where  needed.  PREREQ:  SPA  102 
or  equivalent. 

301-302     Advanced  Spanish  Grammar  and 
Conversation  I-II  (3)  (3)  Review  and  mastery  of 
Spanish  grammar,  with  special  emphasis  on  syn- 
tactic structures  and  stylistics,  along  with  inten- 
sive oral  drills  to  develop  proficiency  in  listening 
comprehension  and  speaking  ability.  PREREQ: 
SPA  202  or  equivalent. 

303  Commercial  Spanish  (3)  A  practical 
course  in  learning  how  to  write  business  letters, 
apply  for  jobs,  fill  orders,  and  perform  other 
commercial  transactions  in  Spanish.  PREREQ: 
SPA  301-302  or  permission  of  instructor. 

304  Spanish  for  the  Professional  (3)  Spanish 
for  the  professional  in  public  service  fields  such 
as  law,  safety,  medicine,  and  govemment.  Empha- 
sis on  oral  communication  in  specific,  real-life 
situations.  Translation  of  forms  and  documents 
and  the  writing  of  professional  communications. 
PREREQ:  SPA  301-302  or  permission  of  instructor. 
315    Advanced  Readings  in  Spanish  (3)  Introduc- 
tory readings  of  Spanish  and  Spanish-American 
works  from  a  variety  of  sources,  including  literary 
texts.  Special  attention  to  improvement  of  gram- 
mar, and  oral  and  written  expression.  PREREQ: 
SPA  301-302  or  permission  of  instructor. 

320     Civilization  of  Spain  (3)  Major  contribu- 
tions of  Spain.  Cultural,  geographic,  literary, 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 
'  Culture  Cluster 


philosophical,  and  artistic  manifestations  of  the 
Hispanic  worid.  PREREQ:  SPA  301-302  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

321     Civilization  of  Spanish  America  (3)  Cul- 
tural, geographic,  literary,  philosophical,  and 
artistic  manifestations  of  the  Hispanic-American 
Worid.  PREREQ:  SPA  301-302  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

323     Language  and  Culture  of  Puerto  Rico  (3) 
(In  Spanish)  A  study  of  the  language  and  culture 
of  Puerto  Rico.  Includes  geography,  history, 
immigration,  and  emigration.  Emphasis  on 
Puerto  Rican  Spanish  language  patterns  and  liter- 
ature. Study  of  the  mid-Adantic  Puerto  Rican 
community.  PREREQ:  SPA  301-202  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor. 

330  Survey  of  Spanish  Literature  (3)  Repre- 
sentative selections  of  Spanish  literature  from  its 
beginning  to  the  present.  PREREQ:  SPA  315  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

33 1  Survey  of  Spanish-American  Literature 
(3)  Representative  selections  of  Spanish- 
American  literature  from  1492  to  the  present. 
PREREQ:  SPA  315  or  permission  of  instructor. 
363     Spanish  Phonetics  (3)  Description  and 
practice  in  the  sounds  of  the  Spanish  language 
and  its  major  dilectical  differences.  Comparative 
analysis  with  EngUsh.  PREREQ:  LIN  230  and 
SPA  302. 

400  Spanish  Literature  to  1550  (3)  Spanish 
hterature  of  the  Middle  Ages  and  Renaissance, 
including  epic,  early  lyric,  prose,  and  theater. 
PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 

401  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Golden  Age  (3) 
Spanish  literature  of  the  16th  and  17th  centuries: 
mysticism,  drama,  poetry,  and  the  novel. 
PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 
NOTE:  All  advanced  literature  and  civilization 
courses  include  lectures  and  discussion  in  the 
foreign  language,  and  all  student  papers  and 
examinations  must  be  written  in  the  foreign  lan- 
guage. 

402  Spanish  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age  (3) 
Themes  and  traditions  of  the  comedia.  PREREQ: 
SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 

404  Cervantes  (3)  Study  of  Don  Quixote  and 
Cervantes'  contributions  to  world  literature. 
PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 

405  Modem  Hispanic  Literature  (18th  and 
19th  Centuries)  (3)  Spanish  and  Spanish- 
American  thought,  literature,  and  culture  as 
revealed  in  outstanding  works  from  the  neo- 
classical period  to  the  end  of  the  19th  century. 
PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  331  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

406  The  Generation  of  1898  (3)  A  reading  and 
evaluation  of  the  Uterary  and  philosophical  con- 
tributions of  writers  such  as  Unamuno  and 
Ortega  y  Gasset.  PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor. 

407  Spanish  Literature  Since  the  Civil  War 
Period  (3)  Introduction  to  works  that  represent 
Spanish  literature  from  the  Civil  War  period  to 
the  present.  Authors  studied  include  Arrabal, 
Cela,  Delibes,  Garci  Lorca,  Goytisolo,  Matute, 
Sender,  and  others.  PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

408  Modem  Hispanic  Poetry  (3)  A  survey  of 
major  authors  and  movements  in  Spanish  and 
Spanish-American  poetry  of  the  19th  and  20th 
centuries.  Authors  include  Vicente  Aleixandre, 
Gustavo  Adolfo  B^quer,  Rubin  Dario,  Josi 
Espronceda,  Federico  Garcia  Lorca,  Gabriela  Mis- 
tral, and  Pablo  Neruda.  Movements  include 


Romanticism,  Modernism,  and  the  avant-garde. 
PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  331  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

409  Contemporary  Spanish-American  Litera- 
ture (3)  A  study  of  major  authors  and  literary 
movements  in  contemporary  Spanish  America, 
including  magical  realism  in  prose  fiction,  the- 
ater of  the  absurd,  avant-garde  poetry,  and  mod- 
em essays.  PREREQ:  SPA  331  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

410  Contemporary  Spanish-American  Prose 
Fiction  (3)  A  focus  on  20th-century  prose  fiction 
in  Spanish  America  The  works  of  narratists  such 
as  Borges,  Carpentier,  Cortizar,  Fuentes,  and 
Garcia  Marquez  will  be  examined  closely,  in 
Ught  of  Spanish-American  cultural  and  literary 
modalities.  PREREQ:  SPA  331  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

411  Modem  Spanish-American  Theater  (3)  A 
study  of  the  theater  as  a  reflection  of  social  reali- 
ties including  the  theater  of  the  absurd;  the 
dynamic  of  play  and  audience.  The  Spanish- 
American  stage  will  be  analyzed  through  its  cul- 
tural, historical,  and  religious  contexts.  PREREQ: 
SPA  331  or  permission  of  instructor. 

412  Literature  of  the  Hispanic  Caribbean  (3) 
An  analysis  of  the  hterature  of  the  Hispanic  Car- 
ibbean, placing  it  in  its  historical,  geographical, 
and  cultural  context  through  a  survey  of  major 
authors  and  movements.  PREREQ:  SPA  331  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

413  Hispanic  Women  Writers  (3)  An  examina- 
tion of  the  tradition  of  women  writers  and  their 
works  in  Spain  and  Spanish  America  from  the 
17th  century  to  the  present.  Includes  fiction, 
poetry,  and  theater.  PREREQ:  Spanish  330  or 
331  or  permission  of  instructor. 

414  Tlie  Black  in  Spanish-American  Literature 
(3)  For  undergraduates  who  are  interested  in  the 
characterization  of  blacks  in  Spanish-American 
hterature  and  the  political  and  social  context  of 
their  Uterary  portrayal. 

♦  456-457     Hispanic  Literature  Seminar  I-II 
(3)  (3)  Special  topics  for  advanced  students  only, 
such  as  poUtics  and  literature  in  contemporary 
Latin  America,  the  literature  of  discovery  and 
conquest,  the  novel  of  the  dictator,  and  Spanish 
literature  during  and  after  Franco.  PREREQ:  Per- 
mission of  instructor. 

Offerings  in  English  (ESP):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture-Cluster  Courses 
'#ESP  219     Culture  and  Civilization  of  Spain 
(3)  A  study  of  the  origins  and  evolution  of  Span- 
ish character,  tradition,  and  thought.  The  interre- 
lationship of  its  history  and  arts.  The  scope  of  its 
contribution  to  Western  culture.  No  knowledge 
of  Spanish  is  required. 

"#ESP  222     Culture  and  Civilization  of  Latin 
America  (3)  Cultural,  geographic,  literary,  philo- 
sophical, and  artistic  manifestations  of  the 
Hispanic-American  world.  No  knowledge  of 
Spanish  is  required. 

"ESP/CLS  311     Contemporary  Latin  American 
Narrative  (3)  An  examination  of  Latin  American 
narrative  (short  story,  novella,  novel,  and  testi- 
monial literature).  Spanish-  and  Portuguese- 
language  writers  from  South  and  Central  Amer- 
ica, Mexico,  and  the  Caribbean  will  be  studied, 
from  the  period  of  magical  realism  (1950's  and 
1960's)  through  the  present.  They  may  include 
Isabel  Allende,  Jorge  Amado,  Miguel  Angel 
Asturias,  Jorge  Luis  Borges,  Gabriel  Garcia 
Mirquez,  Clarice  Lispector,  Elena  Poniatowska, 
and  Luis  Rafael  Sanchez. 
#ESP  324     Language  and  Culture  of  Puerto 
Rico  (3)  A  study  of  the  language  and  culture  of 


Depanment  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 


Puerto  Rico.  Includes  geography,  history,  immi- 
gration, and  emigration.  Emphasis  on  Puerto 
Rican  Spanish  language  patterns  and  hterature. 
Study  of  the  mid-Atlantic  Puerto  Rican  commu- 
nity. No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 
#ESP  362     Beyond  Columbus  (3)  The  impact 
the  discovery,  conquest,  and  colonization  of  the 
New  World  had  on  Europe  is  seen  through 
diverse  sources  in  literature,  history,  the  arts, 
and  related  disciplines.  Topics  include  the 
trans-Atlantic  exchange  of  ideas  and  cultures, 
indigenous  religions,  ethic  of  conquest,  evangeli- 
zation, canography,  colonial  science,  changing 
views  of  humanity,  and  nature.  Course  includes 
a  field  trip  and  guest  lecturers. 
ESP  403     Introduction  to  Cervantes  and  Don 
Quixote  (3)  Reading  the  full  text  of  Don  Quixote. 
Important  chapters  and  topics  will  be  analyzed. 
Special  emphasis  given  to  problems  of  transla- 
tion No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 

ADDITIONAL  LANGUAGES 
191-192     Critical  Unguage  I-II  (3)  (3)  Self- 
instructional  program  in  one  of  the  seldom- 
taught  languages:  Arabic,  Chinese,  Dutch,  Finn- 
ish, Gaelic.  Japanese,  Korean,  Modem  Greek, 
Modem  Hebrew,  Polish.  Portuguese.  Serbo- 
Croatian,  Swedish,  and  Vietnamese.  The  student 
works  with  an  integrated  text  and  tape  program, 
and  a  tutor.  By  permission  of  Department  of  For- 
eign Languages.  Not  for  language  requirement. 
193-194     Critical  Language  III-IV  (3)  (3)  Con- 
tinuation of  LAN  191-192. 

COURSES  COMMON  TO  ALL 

LANGUAGES 

LAN  301     Teaching  of  Modem  Languages:  K-12 

(3)  Problems,  methods,  and  materiab  of  teaching 
second  languages  at  all  levels.  Observation  and 
participation  in  second-language  classrooms. 
PREREQ:  Completion  of  language  courses 
through  the  advanced  level  and  LIN  230. 


LAN  303     Second  Languages  in  the  Elementary 
School  (3)  Techniques  and  materials  used  in 
teaching  second  languages  in  the  elementary 
school.  Practice  in  the  application  of  these  tech- 
niques and  observation  of  foreign  language 
classes.  PREREQ:  Completion  of  intermediate 
level  in  the  chosen  foreign  language. 
LAN  305     Introduction  to  Bilingual/Bicultural 
Education  (3)  Introduction  to  the  history,  phi- 
losophy, current  status,  and  future  directions  of 
bilingual/bicultural  education.  Survey  of  materi- 
als, techniques,  instructional  processes,  and 
instructional  patterns.  Overview  of  testing,  place- 
ment, and  pupil  evaluation.  PREREQ:  Intermedi- 
ate level  proficiency  in  a  second  language  and 
LIN  250  or  equivalent. 

LAN  310     Contemporary  Literary  Criticism  (3) 
A  survey  of  the  major  developments  in  European 
literary  criticism  during  the  20th  century  with  an 
emphasis  on  the  developments  of  the  last  20 
years. 

♦  LAN  411     Topical  Seminar  (3)  Specialized 
studies  in  language  and  the  teaching  of  foreign 
languages. 

UN  230  (also  ENG  230)  Introduction  to  Lin- 
guistics (3)  See  ENG  230. 
UN  250     Psycholinguistics  (3)  Introduction  to 
the  study  of  relationships  between  language,  gen- 
erative models,  communication  theory,  and 
learning  theory.  Major  emphasis  on  natural  lan- 
guage development  and  bilingualism. 
#LIN  330  (also  PHI  330)  Introduction  to  Mean- 
ing (3)  See  PHI  330. 

LIN  360  (also  PHI  360)  Philosophy  of  Language 
(3)  See  PHI  360. 

UN  380     Language  and  Culture  (3)  Language 
as  an  aspect  of  culture,  using  linguistic-percep- 
tual-cognitive categories;  social  and  psychological 
aspects  of  language.  PREREQ:  UN  230  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 
UN  406     Meaning  in  Language  (3)  See  PHI  406. 


♦  UN  411-412     Seminar  in  Unguiscics  (3)  (3) 
Specialized  studies  in  linguistics.  Topics 
announced  annually.  PREREQ:  UN  230  or  at 
least  junior  standing. 

UN  415  (also  SPC  415)  General  Semantics  (3) 

See  SPC  415. 

TRANSLATION  COURSES 

Symbol:  LAN 

250    The  Art  of  Translation  (3)  Techniques  of 
translating  Uterary,  journalistic,  and  technical 
and  scientific  texts.  PREREQ:  202  or  equivalent 
in  a  modem  language. 

350  Translation  I  (3)  Introduction  to  transla- 
tion as  a  profession.  A  survey  of  the  history,  lit- 
erature, and  theories  of  translation  and  of  profes- 
sional organizations  and  technical  resources 
available  to  translators. 

351  Translation  II  (3)  Practical  work  in  trans- 
lating a  variety  of  materials  drawn  from  various 
fields,  including  hterature,  business,  government, 
and  the  sciences. 

450    Translation  III  (3)  Practice  translating 
more  advanced  matenals  with  specialization  in 
one  or  two  subject  areas. 

460     Field  Placement  (3)  Internship  under  fac- 
ulty supervision  in  a  translation  agency,  business 
firm,  or  other  organization  or  institution  that  has 
substantial  translation  work  as  part  of  its  opera- 
tion. 

♦  CLS  309     Literature  Translation  Workshop 
(3)  A  writing  workshop  on  the  theory  and  prac- 
tice of  literary  translation. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 

C.  Gil  Wiswall,  Chairperson 
PROFESSORS:  Pritchard,  Reed,  Stolar 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Ehleiter,  Harber,  Johnson, 
Smith,  Wiswall 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Busch,  Srogi 

The  Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy  offers  a  Bachelor 
of  Science  in  earth  science  with  concentrations  available  in 
geology  or  astronomy;  a  Bachelor  of  Science  in  chemistry/ 
geology;  and,  in  cooperation  with  the  School  of  Education,  a 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education  with  an  emphasis  in  earth 
and  space  science. 

1.  The  B.S.  in  EARTH  SCIENCE  is  a  liberal  arts  program  designed 
to  prepare  recipients  for  occupations  in  the  earth  sciences  or  for 
studies  toward  an  advanced  degree.  The  curriculum  involves  an 
overall  science  and  mathematics  exposure  but  allows  for  a 
greater  concentration  in  one  aspect  of  the  earth  or  space 
sciences,  such  as  the  environment,  applied  geology,  astronomy, 
or  oceanography. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  EARTH  SCIENCE  is  a  professional 
degree  program  designed  to  prepare  certified  secondary  school 
teachers  of  earth  science.  The  curriculum  involves  an  overall 
science  exposure  with  a  concentration  in  the  earth  sciences. 


3.  The  B.S.  in  CffEMISTRY/GEOLOGY  is  a  liberal  arts  program 
designed  to  prepare  recipients  for  occupations  in  chemistry 
and/or  geology  as  well  as  for  studies  toward  an  advanced  degree. 
The  curriculum  involves  a  balanced  exposure  in  chemistry  and 
geology. 

A  cooperative  five-year  program  with  Pennsylvania  State 
University  leading  to  a  B.S.  from  West  Chester  University  in 
physics  is  available,  as  well  as  a  B.S.  in  petroleum  and  natu- 
ral gas  engineering  from  Pennsylvania  State  University.  For 
further  information  about  this  program,  refer  to  the  Physics 
and  Pre-Engineering  section  of  this  catalog. 
Regardless  of  which  degree  is  pursued,  all  students  must 
consult  with  their  adviser  regularly  to  avoid  problems.  Those 
in  the  B.S.  in  Education  program  will  have  a  second  adviser 
in  the  School  of  Education  to  help  the  student  meet  the  sec- 
ondary education  requirements. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  ALL  DEGREE  PROGRAMS 


1.  General  Requirements  (see  pages  35-38) 

2.  Science  Cognates 

CUE  103,  CRL  103,  and  CSC  101  or  115 

3.  Earth  Science  Courses 
ESS  101 


42  semester  hours 
8  semester  hours 

3  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE 

1.  Science  Cognates 


EARTH  SCIENCE 


24  semester  hours 


CHE  104;  CRL  104;  MAT  105  or  110,  and 


Department  of  Geology  and  ■Astronomy 


161  and  162;  PHY  130  or  170,  and  140  or 
180 

2.  Earth  Science  Core  Courses  35-36  semester  hours 
ESS  111,  302,  305  or  420,  307,  330,  331 

or  450,  336,  404,  and  478 

3.  Electives  13-15  semester  hours 
COM  101  and  ENG  371  are  strongly 

recommended. 


EARTH  SCIENCE/GEOLOGY 

24  semester  hours 


20-21  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 
16-18  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE 

1.  Science  Cognates 
CHE  104;  CRL  104;  MAT  105  or  110, 
and  161  and  162;  PHY  130  or  170, 
and  140  or  180 

2.  Eanh  Science  Core  Courses 
ESL  201,  and  ESS  302,  305  or  420, 
331  or  450,  404,  and  478 

3.  Earth  Science  Approved  Electives 

4.  Electives 
COM  101  and  ENG  371  are  strongly 
recommended. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  EARTH  SCIENCE/ASTRONOMY 

1.  Science  Cognates  24  semester  hours 
CHE  104;  CRL  104;  MAT  105  or  110, 

and  161  and  162;  PHY  130  or  170, 
and  140  or  180 

2.  Eanh  Science  Core  Courses 
ESL  201,  and  ESS  111,  355,  404,  and  478 

3.  Specialized  Courses  —  any  two 
ESS  293,  353,  354,  362,  and  475 

4.  Other  Courses 
ESS  302,  305  or  420,  307,  331  or 
450,  and  478 

5.  Electives 
COM  101  and  ENG  371  are  strongly 
recommended. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  CHEMISTRY/GEOLOGY 


15  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


17-18  semester  hours 


10-14  semester  hours 


1.  Science  Cognates 

CHE  104,  321,  and  341  or  424;  CRL  104, 
321,  and  341  or  424;  MAT  105  or  110, 
121,  161,  and  162;  and  PHY  130  or  170, 
and  140  or  180 


37  semester  hours 


Earth  Science  Core  Courses 

ESL  327  and  329;  ESS  302,  305,  310, 

313,  404 

Electives 

COM  101  and  ENG  371  are  strongly 

recommended. 


23  semester  hours 


19  semester  hours 


EARTH  AND 


30  semester  hours 


22-23  semester  hours 


21  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  in  EDUCAOON  - 
SPACE  SCIENCE 

1 .  Secondary  Education  Requirements, 
including  SCE  350 

2.  Science  Cognates 
BIO  110;  CHE  104;  CRL  104;  MAT  105  or 
161  and  121;  PHY  130  or  170;  PHY  140 
or  180 

3.  Earth  Science  Core  Courses 
ESL  201,  ESS  111,  330,  332,  355,  370,  and  371 

4.  Electives 
Three  courses  from  this  group: 

ESS  302  or  313,  420  or  450,  336  or  435, 
and  ESS  343  or  331 

Minor  Programs 

Students  may  choose  to  minor  in  any  of  the  follo%ving  programs. 

Courses  are  selected  with  the  approval  of  the  student's  adviser. 

1.  Astronomy 

ESS  111  plus  four  other  astronomy  courses,  selected  with  the 
approval  of  the  student's  minor  adviser 

2.  Earth  Science 

ESS  101  or  203,  and  111,  330  and  340,  plus  one  course 
in  earth  science,  selected  with  the  approval  of  the  student's 
minor  adviser.  ESL  203  and  330  are  optional. 

3.  Geology 

ESS  101  or  203  plus  four  other  geology  courses  selected  with 
the  approval  of  the  student's  minor  adviser 

Any  of  these  minors  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in 
the  Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the 
minors  in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal 
studies  general  degree  program. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
GEOLOGY  AND  ASTRONOMY 

Symbol:  ESS  unless  otherwise  shown 

♦  101     Introduction  to  Geology  (formerly  called 
Earth  Science)  (3)  The  earth's  composition  and 
history:  the  processes  that  occur  on  and  within 
the  earth.  Two  hours  of  lecture  and  two  hours  of 
lab. 

#102     Humans  and  the  Environment  (3)  A 

study  of  the  ability  of  humans  to  survive  and 
maintain  their  life  quality,  considering  the  lim- 
ited resources  and  recycling  capacity  of  planet 
Earth. 

*  11 1     General  Astronomy  (3)  A  descriptive 
course,  including  the  composition  and  evolution 
of  solar  and  stelbr  systems.  Two  hours  of  lecture 
and  t^vo  hours  of  lab. 

115     Fundamental  World  Place  Names  (1)  A 
survey  of  major  countries,  capitals  and  principal 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 
#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


cities,  large  rivers,  water  bodies,  and  geologically 
important  physical  features  through  map  work 
and  lecture 

ESL  151     Graphic  Geology  1  (1)  Introduction 

to  the  preparation  and  use  of  drawings  in  the 
geological  sciences,  including  drawing  tools  and 
standards,  contour  maps,  roadways,  strike  and 
dip  of  a  plane,  plots  of  a  survey,  and  topographic 
maps. 

ESL  201     Fundamentals  of  Techniques  in  Geol- 
ogy (3)  An  introduction  to  the  basic  methods  of 
geologic  data  collection,  analysis,  and  presenta- 
tion; literature  research;  and  report  writing.  One 
weekend  field  trip  is  required.  PREREQ:  ESS 
101. 

203     Physical  Geology  (3)  The  earth's  composi- 
tion (minerals  and  rocks)  and  earth  processes 
(weathering,  erosion,  volcanisra,  and  diastro- 
phism).  Three  hours  of  lecture. 

ESL  203     Physical  Geology  Laboratory  (1)  Two 

hours  (required  with  lecture). 

206     Gemstones  (3)  A  survey  of  gem  formation, 
identification,  fashioning,  and  evaluation.  For  the 


general  student.  Demonstrations,  specimens,  and 
field  trips  complement  lecture  topics.  No  science 
background  is  assumed. 

293     Introduction  to  Space  Science  (3)  Formal 
and  informal  lectures  and  discussions.  Use  of 
current  literature.  In-depth  study  of  a  topic  of 
the  student's  choice. 

302     Mineralogy  (4)  Physico-chemical  princi- 
ples used  in  the  classification,  identification,  and 
origin  of  minerals.  Field  examination  of  local 
minerals. 

305     Petrology  (4)  Principles  of  rock  origin 
identification  and  classification.  Laboratory  and 
field  examination  of  rocks.  PREREQ:  ESS  302. 
307     Geology  of  the  Solar  System  (3)  The  geol- 
ogy, origin,  evolution,  and  properties  of  planets, 
comets,  asteroids,  moons,  and  meteorites. 
310     Intermediate  Mineralogy  (3)  How  the  pet- 
rographic  microscope  and  x-ray  diSraction  are 
used  to  identify  minerals.  PREREQ:  One  course 
in  basic  mineralogy  (ESS  302). 
313     Geochemistry  (3)  The  chemistry  of  the 
earth  and  its  relation  to  geologic  processes. 
323     General  Geologic  Field  Studies  of  South- 
eastern Pennsylvania  (3)  Occurrence,  relation- 


Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 


ships,  and  geologic  history  of  the  rocks,  miner- 
als, and  soils  of  this  area,  studied  at 
representative  locations.  PREREQ:  ESS  302. 
324     History  of  the  Earth  Sciences  (3)  An 
examination  of  the  history  of  scientific  thought 
and  contributions  in  the  area  of  the  earth  sci- 
ences. PREREQ:  Completion  of  core  require- 
ments in  science  and  mathematics. 
326     Economic  Geology  (3)  The  origin,  geo- 
logic and  geographic  distribution,  limits,  and 
production  technology  of  mineral  resources. 
PREREQ:  ESS  101  or  permission  of  instructor. 
328     Engineering  Geology  (3)  The  application 
of  geological  factors  into  the  planning  and  design 
of  engineered  construction,  ground  water  extrac- 
tion, and  waste  disposal.  PREREQ:  ESS  101  or 
permission  of  instructor. 
ESL  327     Electron  Microscopy  I  (3)  A  one- 
semester  lecture/laboratory  course  in  theory 
operation  and  applications  of  electron  beam 
technology  in  scientific  research.  Course  sched- 
uled on  student-demand  basis. 
ESL  329     Electron  Microscopy  II  (3)  A  one- 
semester  lecture/laboratory  course  in  advanced 
theories  of  electron  microscopy  in  scientific 
research.  Emphasis  on  individual  projects. 
PREREQ:  ESS  327.  Course  scheduled  on 
student-demand  basis. 

330  Introduction  to  Oceanography  (3)  A  sur- 
vey of  our  present  knowledge  of  the  waters  and 
floors  of  the  oceans. 

ESL  330  Introduction  to  Oceanography  Labo- 
ratory (1) 

331  Introduction  to  Paleontology  (3) 
Identification  and  study  of  common  fossils  in 
order  to  understand  their  life  processes  and  geo- 
logic significance.  PREREQ:  One  course  in  geol- 
ogy- 

332  Advanced  Oceanography  (3)  An  advanced 
course  in  oceanography  covering  marine 
resources,  oceanographic  literature,  animal- 
sediment  relationships,  field  techniques,  estuar- 
ies, salt  marshes,  sea  level  changes,  and  pollu- 
tion. PREREQ:  ESS  330. 

336     Environmental  Geology  (3)  The  appUca- 
tion  of  geological  information  to  human  prob- 
lems encountered  in  natural  phenomena,  such  as 
flooding,  earthquakes,  coastal  hazartls,  and  man- 
made  concerns,  including  waste  disposal  and 
land  use.  PREREQ:  ESS  101  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

339     Hydrology  (3)  The  factors  that  control  the 
distribution,  occurrence,  and  recoverability  of 
groundwater  techniques  for  locating  and  esti- 
mating recoverable  water,  groundwater  pollution 
and  waste  water  disposal. 

341  Geology  and  Geography  of  Plants  (3)  The 
study  of  paleo  and  modem  spatial  characteristics 
and  distributions  of  vegetation  and  their  relation- 
ship to  the  geologic,  geographic,  climatic,  and 
man-induced  features  of  the  environment. 
PREREQ:  ESS  101  or  GEO  101. 

342  Geophysics  (3)  Gravitational,  magnetic, 
seismic  (refraction  and  reflection),  and  electrical 
properties  of  rocks  and  minerals  in  the  earth. 
Physical  principles  of  the  earth;  geophysics  in 
relation  to  economic  deposits.  PREREQ:  PHY 
140  or  180. 

343  Geomorphology  I  (3)  Constructional  and 
degradational  forces  that  have  shaped  present 
landforms  and  are  constantly  reshaping  and 
modifying  landforms.  Interpretation  of  geologic 
and  topographic  maps;  field  studies.  PREREQ: 
ESS  101  or  GEO  101. 


344     Geomorphology  II  (3)  A  continuation  of 
the  study  of  earth  surface  processes.  Interpreta- 
tion of  topographic  maps  and  air  photos. 
PREREQ:  ESS  343. 

343     Regional  Geomorphology  of  North  Amer- 
ica (3)  A  systematic  analysis  of  surface  configu- 
rations and  landform  regions  of  North  America; 
the  processes  at  work  on  these  configurations  in 
the  past  and  at  present;  human  relationships  to 
these  features  and  processes.  PREREQ:  ESS  343 
346     Geology  of  Petroleum  (3)  The  geology, 
origin,  occurrence,  properties,  development,  and 
exploitation  of  petroleum  and  natural  gas.  Future 
energy  demands  are  also  explored.  PREREQ:  Per- 
mission of  instructor. 

353  Nautical  Astronomy  (Celestial  Naviga- 
tion) (3)  Technical  skills  including  celestial  coor- 
dinates, principles  of  time,  the  navigational  trian- 
gle, lines  of  position,  and  star  identification. 
PREREQ:  ESS  111. 

ESL  353     Nautical  Astronomy  Laboratory  (1) 
Observation  will  be  taken  in  the  real  sky  and 
with  a  water  horizon,  and  data  will  be  reduced 
to  determine  the  position  of  the  observer. 

354  Archeoastronomy  (3)  Astronomical  skills 
of  the  Babylonians,  Egyptians,  Greeks,  Chinese, 
Maya,  Incas,  Aztecs,  and  the  North  American 
Indians.  PREREQ:  ESS  1 1 1  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

355  Intermediate  Astronomy  (3)  An  analytical 
and  quaUtative  analysis  of  selected  astronomical 
phenomena.  Topics  include  telescope  optics 
(including  photographic  and  photoelectric 
attachments),  limar  and  planetary  orbits,  stellar 
motions  and  magnitudes,  galactic  classifications, 
and  distances.  Two  hours  of  lecture  and  two 
hours  of  Ub.  PREREQ:  ESS  111. 

362     History  of  Astronomy  (3)  Development  of 
astronomical  theories  from  the  ancient  Greeks 
until  the  20th  century.  PREREQ:  ESS  111. 

370  Meteorology  I  (3)  A  study  of  the  princi- 
ples governing  the  earth's  atmosphere  and  how 
these  principles  determine  weather  conditions. 

371  Meteorology  II  (3)  A  continuation  of  the 
study  of  the  principles  governing  the  earth's 
atmosphere  and  how  these  principles  determine 
weather  conditions.  PREREQ:  ESS  370. 

394     Geology  of  the  Northwestern  National 
Parks  (4)  Field  course. 
393     Geology  of  the  Southwestern  National 
Parks  (4)  Field  course. 

404  Historical  Geology  (3)  The  geologic  his- 
tory of  the  earth  and  the  evidences  for  this  his- 
tory. 

ESL  404    Historical  Geology  Laboratory  (1) 
Two  hours  (required  with  lecture). 
406     Quaternary  Geology  (3)  An  investigation 
of  the  most  recent  geologic  period,  including  the 
records  of  climate  change,  geomorphology,  gla- 
cial history,  stratigraphy,  sea  level  changes,  and 
faimal  evolution  that  have  accompanied  the  con- 
tinental glaciations  of  the  last  two  million  years. 
Includes  spring  break  field  crip. 

408  Field  Geology  I  (3)  Practical  experience  in 
the  techniques  and  tools  of  the  field  geologist. 
PREREQ:  305. 

409  Field  Geology  II  (3)  Exploration  tech- 
niques involving  inference  methods:  applied 
geophysics,  construction,  and  graphical  represen- 
tation of  complex,  three-dimensional  structures. 
418    Structural  Petrology  (3)  Deformation 
mechanisms  and  theology,  the  theory  of  strain, 
including  formation  and  evolution  of  tectonic 
features. 

420  Structural  Geology  (4)  Deternunation  of 
the  sequential  development  and  the  forces 


involved  in  the  various  structural  features  of  the 
earth.  PREREQ:  ESL  201,  ESS  305. 
425     Tectonics  (3)  To  appreciate  how  the  sur- 
face of  the  planet  evolves;  why  things  are  where 
they  are. 

433     Remote  Sensing  (3)  An  introduction  to 
the  science  and  technology  of  remote  sensing 
and  the  applications  of  remote  sensing  data  to 
geology,  oceanography,  meteorology  and  the 
environment.  Includes  a  discussion  of  the  history 
and  principles  of  remote  sensing;  fundamentals 
of  electromagnetic  radiation;  theory  and  types  of 
active  and  passive  remote  sensing  systems;  fiin- 
damentals  of  image  interpretation;  digital  analy- 
sis of  LANDSAT  and  AVHRR  data;  operation  of 
enviroimiental  satelhtes;  and  future  imaging 
systems. 

450     Sedimentation  and  Stratigraphy  (4)  Devel- 
opment of  the  relative  geological  time,  methods, 
and  techniques  for  the  description  and  evalua- 
tion of  the  total  environment  of  the  time  of  the 
formation  of  stratified  rock. 

♦  460     Internship  (1-18)  Work  with  industry, 
or  local,  state,  or  federal  government  agencies 
under  faculty  supervision. 

475     Introduction  to  the  Planetarium  (3)  Prin- 
ciples and  use  of  the  planetarium  in  a  teaching 
situation.  Specific  projects  are  assigned. 
PREREQ:  ESS  111. 

♦  478     Earth  Science  Seminar  (3)  Reports  on 
special  topics  and  current  development. 

♦  480     Special  Problems  (1-3)  Reports  on  spe- 
cial topics  and  current  developments  in  the  earth 
and  space  sciences   PREREQ:  Permission  of 
instructor 

490     Fundamentals  of  Soil  (3)  The  properties 
of  soils,  edaphology,  and  pedology  chemical, 
physical,  and  biological  factors.  Soil  genesis  and 
classification. 

♦  491     Independent  Study  (1-3) 

#IND  201     Unified  Science  (3)  An  interdiscipli- 
nary course  dealing  with  methodologies  used  by 
all  scientists;  an  analysis  of  the  concepts  that 
find  expression  in  all  of  the  biological  and  physi- 
cal sciences. 

#SCB  210    The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Uni- 
verse (3)  An  interdisciplinary  course  that  pre- 
sents the  theory  and  evidence  of  the  first  three 
minutes  of  the  universe  and  formation  of  the 
stars,  galaxies,  planets,  organic  molecules,  and 
the  genetic  basis  of  organic  evolution.  PREREQ: 
High  school  or  college  courses  in  at  least  two 
sciences. 

SCE  310    Science  for  the  Elementary  Grades 
(3)  A  course  to  prepare  the  elementary  teacher 
for  teaching  science.  Selected  units  or  problems 
that  cut  across  various  fields  of  science.  Methods 
and  processes  of  science  and  available  resources. 
PREREQ:  Completion  of  science  and  mathemat- 
ics general  education  requirements.  Must  reach 
junior  status  by  the  end  of  the  previous  semes- 
ter. 

SCE  350     Science  Education  in  the  Secondary 
School  (3)  Philosophy,  objectives,  and  methods 
of  teaching  science.  Practical  experience  pro- 
vided. PREREQ:  A  major  in  liberal  arts  or  sec- 
ondary education  (sciences). 
SCE  370     Science  and  Human  'Values  (3)  A 
one-semester  course  illustrating  the  impact  of 
science  on  human  thought,  values,  and  institu- 
tions. Ethical,  sociological,  and  psychological 
aspects  of  science-mediated  change  are  covered 
in  depth. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Department  of  History 


Department  of  History 

Ray  Doyle,  Chairperson 

Marita  Boes,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Burgwyn,  Dzamba,  Foster,  Heston,  Johnson, 
Riley,  Shur,  Soldon,  Swan,  Turner,  Webster,  Young 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Doyle,  Peters 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Boes,  Davidson,  Hardy, 
Hewitt,  Jones,  Zimmerman 

The  student  of  history  seeks  to  re-create  the  past  (or,  more 
precisely,  as  much  of  it  as  possible)  in  a  rational  manner,  not 
only  to  explain  and  understand  the  past  for  its  own  sake,  but 
also  to  identify  our  age  with  earlier  times.  The  student  is 
concerned  with  the  origins,  development,  and  relationships 
between  past  people  and  events  and,  from  the  multiplicity  of 
credible  and  sometimes  conflicting  evidence,  renders  judg- 
ments on  causation  and  consequences.  He  or  she  seeks  to 
achieve  a  sense  of  the  past.  Among  the  careers  open  to  his- 
tory majors  are  the  law,  government  service,  teaching, 
research,  journalism,  and  business.  Indeed,  a  strong  prepara- 
tion in  history  can  lead  to  possibilities  in  virtually  every  field 
of  endeavor. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  HISTORY 


51  semester  hours 
15  semester  hours 
33  semester  hours 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language  Requirement 

3.  History  Concentration  Requirements 
HIS  101  taken  under  general  requirements; 
HIS  102,  151,  and  152  (nine  semester  hours); 
HIS  300  (three  semester  hours) 

Group  1  —  American  History  6  semester  hours 

HIS  325,  344,  345,  352,  354,  356,  357,  358,  359, 
360,  361,  362,  364,  365,  366,  370,  373,  451,  455, 
458,  462,  474 

Group  2  —  European  History  6  semester  hours 

HIS  318,  319,  320,  322,  323,  324,  329,  330,  331, 


6  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 


333,  345,  415,  416,  420,  421,  422,  423,  425,  426,  427, 
435,  447 

Group  3  —  World  and  Regional  History 

HIS  301,  302,  305,  306,  308,  311,  312,  315, 
316,  317,  318,  348,  406,  407,  411,  412,  415 

History  Electives 

4.  Cognate  Courses 
Four  cognate  courses  selected  from  literature, 
aic,  or  philosophy 

5.  Additional  free  electives  to  complete  128  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  - 
SOCIAL  STUDIES 
Concentration  in  History 

Students  interested  in  teaching  secondary  social  studies  may  pursue 
concentrations  in  history  while  earning  state  certification  in  social 
studies  and  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  (See  the  description 
under  "Social  Studies:  B.S.  in  Education,"  pages  115-116,  for  com- 
mon requirements.)  In  addition  to  the  history  concentration,  the 
department  offers  concentrations  in  American  culture,  world  cul- 
tures, and  ethnic  studies.  In  all  concentrations,  students  must  com- 
plete HIS  300,  Varieties  of  History;  other  requirements  vary  accord- 
ing to  the  concentration. 

HISTORY  MINOR 

Students  may  obtain  minor  recognition  on  their  transcript  so  that 
their  concentrated  choice  of  free  electives  will  be  recognized. 

1.  Required  Courses  6  semester  hours 
One  course  among  HIS  100,  101,  or  102,  and 

one  course  among  HIS  150,  151,  or  152 

2.  Electives  12  semester  hours 
Chosen  under  advisement  from  three  groups: 

American,  European,  World  and  Regional 
History  (six  semester  hours  in  one  group; 
three  semester  hours  in  each  of  the  others) 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies 
general  degree  program. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
HISTORY 

Symbol:  HIS  unless  otherwise  shown 

*  101     History  of  Civilization  I  (3)  Man's  cul- 
tural elements  and  social  institutions  in  the  West 
and  the  East  from  earliest  times  through  the 
Renaissance.  Offered  every  semester. 

*  102     History  of  Civilization  II  (3)  Develop- 
ments in  civilizations  from  1500  to  the  present, 
with  emphasis  on  Western  civilization  and  its 
interrelationships  with  the  non-Westem  world. 
Offered  every  semester, 

126     History  of  Utopias  (3)  Study  of  the  history 
of  Utopias  and  Utopian  schemes  from  Plato's 
Republic  to  contemporary  American  communes. 
Utopia,  both  as  an  antidote  for  reahty,  and  as  a 
seed-bed  for  social,  political,  and  economic  reform. 

145     The  Jew  in  History  (3)  Review  of  the 
4,000  years  and  five  civilizations  that  have  wel- 


♦Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 
THIS  151-152— Approved  two-semester  substi- 
tute for  distributive  requirement. 
#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


corned  the  Jewish  people.  Emphasis  on  the  Jews 
in  contemporary  society. 
146    The  Holocaust  (3)  Focuses  on  ethnic, 
nationalistic,  economic,  and  religious  causes  of 
the  Holocaust,  including  20th-century  Nazism, 
racism,  and  anti-Semitism;  study  of  the 
Nuremberg  trials. 

*150    The  American  Experience  (3)  The  his- 
tory of  the  United  States,  with  emphasis  on 
major  themes,  ideas,  and  developments  — 
nationalism,  sectionalism,  imperialism,  industri- 
alism, and  others.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 
tl51     History  of  United  States  I  (3)  The  social, 
economic,  political,  and  intellectual  development 
of  the  United  States  from  the  beginning  of  the 
Colonial  period  through  Reconstruction.  Offered 
every  semester. 

tl52     HUtory  of  United  States  II  (3)  The 
social,  economic,  poUtical,  and  intellectual  devel- 
opment of  the  United  States  from  1877  to  the 
present,  with  emphasis  on  the  new  industrialism 
and  on  foreign  affairs.  Offered  every  semester. 
166     20th-century  America  (3)  A  survey  of  the 
United  States  since  1898.  Emergence  of  the 
nation  as  a  world  power  is  stressed. 


300  Varieties  of  History  (3)  Historical  research 
techniques.  Methodology,  historiography,  and 
varieties  of  history.  Required  of  all  history  majors. 
Offered  every  semester. 

301  History  of  South  Asia  (3)  A  historical 
study  of  developments  on  the  Indian  subconti- 
nent (India  and  Pakistan),  the  course  also  con- 
siders those  areas  of  Southeast  Asia  (Burma  and 
Thailand)  that  have  been  traditionally  influenced 
by  the  course  of  Indian  events. 

#302     Modem  India  (3)  Social,  religious,  and 
cultural  underpinnings  of  modem  India  against  a 
backdrop  of  the  subcontinent's  chronological 
development.  Hindu  and  Muslim  traditions  dis- 
cussed in  terms  of  their  own  social,  religious, 
and  historical  dynamics  and  as  examples  of  com- 
plexities of  Third  World  national  integration. 
305     Modem  China  (3)  Survey  of  the  historical 
and  cultural  background  of  China.  Emphasis  is 
given  to  the  significance  of  China's  modem 
period  and  its  impact  on  world  affairs. 
#306     Chinese  Civilization  (3)  Study  of  domi- 
nant cultural,  philosophical,  and  historical  pat- 
terns that  have  influenced  the  development  of 
China  as  it  is  today  and  the  traditional  way  in 
which  Chinese  approach  their  own  history. 


Depanment  of  History 


#308     Introduction  to  the  Islamic  World  (3) 

Study  of  the  religio-cultural  heritage  of  the 
Islamic  world  against  a  historical  background. 
Selected  areas  of  Middle,  South,  and  Southeast 
Asia  will  be  utilized  to  illustrate  the  flowering  of 
Islamic  arts,  architecture,  and  poetry.  Includes 
geography  component.  Offered  in  spring  semes- 
ter. 

311  History  of  Africa  to  1875  (3)  A  survey  of 
African  history  to  1875,  providing  regional  cov- 
erage of  the  entire  continent,  and  an  examination 
of  African  oral  traditions. 

312  History  of  Africa  Since  1875  (3)  A  survey 
of  African  history  since  1875,  focusing  on  Euro- 
pean colonialism,  African  resistance,  and  con- 
temporary developments. 

"315     History  of  Latin  America  to  1825  (3) 
Pre-Columbian  period,  colonial  Latin  America, 
and  movements  for  independence;  Indian,  Euro- 
pean, and  African  backgrounds;  government, 
economy,  society,  religion,  culture,  and  enlight- 
enment. Interaction  of  diverse  cultures  in  the 
New  World.  Offered  every  semester. 
'316     History  of  Ladn  America  Since  1825  (3) 
Latin  America  in  the  19th  and  20th  centuries; 
liberalism,  conservatism,  dictatorship,  revolution, 
socialism,  industrialization,  agranan  reform, 
cultural-intellectual  achievements,  and  interna- 
tional relations.  Topical  approach,  using  individ- 
ual countries  as  case  history  illustrations.  Offered 
every  semester. 

"317     History  of  Mexico  (3)  Mexico  from  Pre- 
Columbian  period  to  present,  including  civiliza- 
tions of  Mayas  and  Aztecs,  Spanish  conquest. 
Colonial  period,  movement  for  independence  era 
of  Santa  Ana,  La  Reforma,  Diaz  dictatorship, 
Mexican  Revolution,  cultural-intellectual  achieve- 
ments, international  relations,  and  modernization 
of  Mexico  since  the  Revolution. 
*318    The  Ancient  World  (3)  Clissical  Greece 
and  Rome  with  consideration  of  economic, 
social,  intellectual,  and  poUtical  history.  Selected 
writings  of  the  ancients. 
'319     Medieval  Europe  (3)  Western  Europe 
from  the  fall  of  Rome  to  approximately  1300. 
Economic,  social,  political,  and  intellectual 
developments  in  the  major  kingc'oms  of  the 
West;  the  history  of  the  Universal  Church. 
Offered  in  spring  semester. 
320     Renaissance  and  Reformation  (3)  Political, 
economic,  social,  and  cultural  forces  that 
emerged  in  Europe  from  1300  to  1650.  The  evo- 
lution of  modem  states  and  the  rise  of  the  mid- 
dle class.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 
322     Family  and  Women  in  Europe:  Renais- 
sance to  Industrial  Revolution  (3)  Focuses  on 
private  and  public  aspects  of  the  family  in  vari- 
ous European  countries,  and  the  role  and  every- 
day life  of  women  of  diverse  social  backgrounds. 
Special  attention  is  given  to  changes  over  time. 
#323     Austrian  Civilization  (3)  An  interdisci- 
plinary study  of  Austrian  civilization,  1848- 
1938.  Emphasis  is  placed  or  fin-de-siede  Vienna, 
not  only  as  its  pivotal  role  in  Austrian  culture 
but  also  as  a  testing  ground  for  modernism  in 
the  West. 

'324     Russian  History  to  1917  (3)  Russian  his- 
tory from  ninth  century  Kiev  to  the  end  of  the 
Imperial  period.  Major  emphasis  on  the  continu- 
ing religious,  economic,  social,  and  poUtical  tra- 
dition peculiar  to  the  Russian  state.  Offered  in 
fall  semester. 

325  History  of  Journalism  (3)  A  historical  sur- 
vey of  the  American  press  from  Colonial  times  to 
the  present,  with  special  emphasis  on  the  con- 


tinuing struggle  for  press  freedom  and  the  new 
journalistic  environment  created  by  the  emer- 
gence of  mass  media. 

#329     Gender  and  Peace  (3)  Examination  of 
the  ways  in  which  social  constructions  of  gender 
intersect  with  perceptions  and  experience  of  war 
and  peace. 

'330     Conflicts  in  Modem  Europe  (3)  Power 
politics  in  Europe;  alliances  and  counteralliances; 
imperialism;  First  World  War  and  Versailles 
peace  setdements;  emergence  of  totalitarian  ide- 
ologies. Offered  in  fall  semester. 
331     20th-century  Europe  (3)  European  fas- 
cism and  communism;  totalitarianism  confronts 
liberalism;  interaction  between  domestic  politics 
and  foreign  pohcy;  polarization  of  European  pol- 
itics; disintegration  of  the  political  institutions  of 
the  traditional  state 

333     European  Economic  History  (3)  European 
demographic  and  technological  change;  trade 
unions;  agriculture;  trade;  the  entrepreneur;  dis- 
tribution of  income  and  welfare  from  the  10th 
century  to  the  present 

344  History  of  Pennsylvania  (3)  The  founding 
and  development  of  Pennsylvania  from  its  Colo- 
nial begiimings  to  the  present  with  emphasis  on 
the  relation  of  the  past  to  the  present. 

345  Oral  History  (3)  An  examination  of  con- 
temporary history  by  making  taped  interviews  of 
the  reminiscences  of  people  involved  in  recent 
political  events,  human  rights  movements,  local 
or  national  issues,  etc. 

"348    The  Bible  in  History  (3)  The  Bible  as  a 
historical  record.  From  the  Pentateuch  through 
the  prophetic  literature,  the  Apocrypha,  the 
Pseudepigrapha,  and  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls  to  the 
New  Testament.  Historical  records  of  the  ancient 
Near  Eastern  civilizations  will  be  compared  with 
Biblical  sources.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 
352     Modem  American  Military  History  (3) 
The  role  of  the  American  military  in  shaping  the 
course  of  the  nation  in  the  20th  century.  Offered 
in  fall  semester. 

354     U.S.  Labor  History  (3)  American  labor 
from  the  colonial  era  to  modem  times.  Examines 
labor  and  government,  labor  and  law,  labor  and 
politics,  bbor  and  women,  children  and  minority 
groups,  labor  and  technology,  real  wages,  and 
labor  theory. 

356  U.S.  Environmental  History  (3)  An  exami- 
nation of  the  transformation  of  the  American 
landscape,  the  history  of  American  environmen- 
tal poUcy,  and  the  development  of  today's  envi- 
ronmental crisis. 

357  Diplomatic  History  of  the  United  Sutes 
(3)  The  theory  and  practice  of  American  diplo- 
macy from  Colonial  times  to  the  present  with 
emphasis  on  the  20th  century.  Offered  in  spring 
semester. 

358  Economic  History  of  the  United  States  (3) 
The  economic  development  of  the  American 
nation  as  it  evolved  from  a  frontier,  agricultural 
country  into  an  urban,  industrial  power.  Offered 
in  fall  semester,  alternate  years. 

359  Depression  Decade  (3)  An  examination  of 
the  causes  and  consequences  of  the  Great 
Depression,  including  business  cycle  theory, 
banking,  technology,  labor  problems,  the  New 
Deal,  and  the  contributions  of  the  decade  to 
modem  American  life. 

360  Technology  and  American  Life  (3)  Prom- 
ises and  practices  of  American  life  in  response  to 
the  interaction  of  American  forms,  values,  and 
scientific-technological  change  from  the  Colonial 
period  to  the  present. 

361  Constitutional  History  of  the  United 
States  (3)  The  development  of  the  Constitution 


of  the  United  States  from  the  Philadelphia  con- 
vention to  the  present  with  emphasis  on  major 
Supreme  Coun  decisions. 
362  Violence  in  America  (3)  A  study  of  vio- 
lence in  American  society  as  an  instrument  of 
change  and  a  method  of  social  control.  Offered 
every  semester. 

364  U.S.  Urban  History  (3)  A  survey  of  the 
rise  of  the  American  city  from  early  Philadelphia 
to  the  modem  metropolis.  The  recurring  themes 
of  growth,  immigration,  social  mobility,  city  poli- 
tics, city  planning,  urbanism.  and  suburbanism. 

365  Popular  Culture  in  20th-century  America 
(3)  A  survey  of  the  history  of  modem  American 
popular  culture  and  arts,  and  their  impact  on 
American  society. 

366  The  Turbulent  Sixties  (3)  Examination  of 
the  stress  and  conflict  in  American  politics,  arts, 
literature,  and  society  of  the  1960's.  Offered  in 
spring  semester. 

370    American  Indians  (3)  A  survey  of  Indian 
civilization  on  the  continent  of  North  A,mehca 
and  the  confrontation  of  this  civilization  with 
white  culture. 

373     Afro-American  History  (3)  The  Afro- 
American:  origins,  period  of  slavery,  industrial- 
ization of  the  South,  migration  to  northem 
urban  centers,  civil  rights  movements,  and  the 
evolution  of  "Black  Power."  Offered  in  fall 
semester. 

♦  399    Topics  in  History  (3)  Topics  may  vary 
each  semester.  Emphasis  on  student  research  and 
discussions. 

♦  400     Seminar  (3)  In-depth  research,  study, 
and  discussion  of  a  selected  historical  topic.  Top- 
ics will  vary.  Recommended  for  seniors.  Offered 
in  spring  semester.  PREREQ:  HIS  300. 

406  20th-century  Japan  (3)  The  course  deab 
with  Japan's  role  in  Asian  and  world  affairs  from 
the  Meiji  Restoration  of  1868  through  the  World 
War  II  period.  Concludes  with  an  assessment  of 
Japan's  post- World  War  II  role  as  an  economic 
power  positioned  to  re-emerge  as  a  major  politi- 
cal entity. 

407  History  of  Brazil  (3)  A  general  survey  of 
Brazil  from  1500  to  the  present.  Emphasis  will 
be  placed  on  economic  and  political  issues, 
slavery  and  race  relations,  literature,  and  current 
ecological  problems  relative  to  the  Amazon 
Basin. 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  History  (1-3) 
Research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  his- 
tory. Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ:  Permission 
of  department  chairperson. 

411  Middle  East  to  1700  (3)  The  historical 
evolution  of  the  Middle  East  from  just  before  the 
time  of  Muhammad  until  1700.  The  course  seeks 
to  promote  an  understanding  of  the  nature  and 
rise  of  the  religion  of  Islam,  the  spread  of  Islamic 
civilization,  and  the  evolution  of  the  Arab  and 
Ottoman  empires.  Offered  in  fall  semester. 

412  Middle  East  Since  1600  (3)  The  historical 
evolution  of  the  Middle  East  from  1600  to  the 
present.  The  course  seeks  to  promote  a  histori- 
cally sound  understanding  of  the  conflicts  and 
differences  between  Western  and  Middle  Eastem 
societies,  as  well  as  the  continuing  interplay  of 
secular  and  reUgious  forces  in  the  history  of  the 
region.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 

415     Science  in  History  (3)  This  course  offers 
an  introduction  to  the  historical  evolution  of 
modem  science.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  life 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 
'  Culture  Cluster 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


American  Studies  Program 


and  achievements  of  noted  scientists  against  the 
backdrop  of  their  time  and  culture.  Consider- 
ation is  abo  given  to  the  impact  of  developing 
science  on  the  shaping  of  Western  values. 
416     Crime  and  Punishment  in  Europe,  1430- 
1789  (3)  Focuses  on  the  historical  development 
of  criminal  law,  criminalization  processes,  court 
procedures,  the  use  of  judicial  torture,  crime 
rates,  personal  characteristics  of  the  sentenced 
criminals,  and  the  punishments  they  received. 
"420     Biography  of  Modem  European  Women 
(3)  A  discussion  of  biography  as  a  form  of  his- 
torical writing  and  writing  about  women. 

421  History  of  England  to  1688  (3)  The  Brit- 
ish people  and  their  mores,  institutions,  and 
achievements  from  the  earliest  times  to  the  Glo- 
rious Revolution. 

422  History  of  England  Since  1688  (3) 
England  as  a  world  leader  during  the  Commer- 
cial and  Industrial  Revolutions,  the  evolution  of 
the  democratic  process,  and  the  emergence  of 
liberalism  followed  by  the  democratic  welfare 
state.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 

"423     Modem  Germany  (3)  Germany  in  the 
19th  and  20th  centuries:  Napoleonic  era,  rise  of 
Prussia,  nationalism  and  unification,  imperialism 


and  World  War  I,  National  Socialism,  World  War 
11,  and  divided  Germany.  Offered  in  fall  semes- 
ter. 

"425     Soviet  Russia  (3)  Its  rise  and  tall  in  light 
of  traditional  Russian  patterns  and  the  commu- 
nist experiment.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 
'426     History  of  Modem  Italy  (3)  A  study  of 
Italian  unification,  the  Era  of  Liberalism,  Fas- 
cism, and  post-World  War  11  developments. 
Offered  in  fall  semester,  alternate  years. 
"427     Modem  France;  1789  to  Present  (3)  The 
French  Revolution;  Napoleon;  Bourgeois  France; 
Third  Republic;  The  Great  War  and  Versailles; 
Nazism  and  the  Popular  Front;  the  collapse  of 
1940;  the  Fourth  Republic;  and  the  DeGauUe 
era.  Offered  in  spring  semester,  alternate  years. 
"435     European  Intellectual  History  Since  1800 
(3)  A  cultural  history  of  ideas  in  19th-  and  early 
20th-century  Europe. 

447    Jesus  and  Marx  (3)  The  relationship 
between  Christianity  and  Mandsm  from  the  con- 
frontation and  contradiction  of  the  19th  century 
to  the  coexistence  and  cooperation  of  the  20th 
"century.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 
♦  450     Intemship  in  History  (1-3) 
451     Women  in  America  (3)  American  women's 
daily  routines,  social  roles,  and  search  for  rights 


and  identity  since  Colonial  days.  Recent  goals, 
values,  and  conflicts.  Offered  in  fall  semester. 
455    American  Intellectual  History  (3)  Political 
and  economic  thought,  theology,  science,  philos- 
ophy, and  literature. 

458     History  of  the  Cold  War  (3)  Origins  and 
evolution  of  the  Cold  War  with  emphasis  on  the 
rationale  for,  and  objectives  of,  American  foreign 
policy  since  1945.  Includes  an  examination  of 
the  historical  interpretations  of  the  era. 
460     Field  Studies  in  History  (3)  A  fully  super- 
vised learning  experience  designed  to  expose 
students  to  the  culture,  artifacts,  and  research 
facilities  of  a  given  country  or  area. 
462    Social  and  Cultural  History  of  the  United 
States  (3)  The  evolution  of  American  society  with 
emphasis  on  the  impact  of  improving  material 
conditions  in  labor,  the  arts,  education,  religion, 
social  mores,  and  family  life.  The  changing  status 
of  women,  blacks,  and  immigrants. 
474    American  Religions  (3)  The  changes  of 
American  religion  from  the  Pilgrims  of  New 
England  to  the  cults  of  CaUfomia.  Offered  in  fall 
semester. 


"Culture  Cluster 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Interdisciplinary  Programs 

Richard  J.  Webster,  Coordinator 

West  Chester  University  offers  two  interdisciphnary  pro- 
grams leading  to  a  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree: 

American  Studies 

Comparative  Literature  Studies 

West  Chester  also  offers  six  interdisciplinary  programs  lead- 
ing to  transcript  recognition: 


Ethnic  Studies 

Latin  American  Studies 

Linguistics 


Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 
Russian  Studies 
Women's  Studies 


These  programs  give  students  the  opportunity  to  develop  a 
synthesis  of  knowledge  from  several  disciplines.  Drawing 
upon  professors  from  across  the  campus,  the  programs  are 
directed  by  a  Committee  of  Interdisciplinary  Programs  under 
the  aegis  of  the  dean  of  the  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  See 
individual  programs  for  course  sequences. 


American  Studies  Program 

AMERICAN  STUDIES  COMMITTEE 

Walter  J.  Fox,  Jr.,  English 

Patricia  C.  Johnson,  History 

Sterling  E.  Murray,  Music  History 

C.  James  Trotman,  English 

Richard  J.  Webster,  History,  Coordinator 

Ruth  I.  Weidner,  Art 

Students  are  introduced  to  a  broad  spectrum  of  American 
culture,  and  are  further  encouraged  to  study  in  depth  and 
to  develop  career  interests  through  concentrations  in 
American  art  history,  black  studies,  historic  preservation, 
environmental  studies,  journalism  and  editing,  and 
museum  studies.  An  optional  intemship  provides  on-the- 
job  experience. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS -AMERICAN  STUDIES 


L  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirements 

3.  Required  Core 
AMS  200  (3) 
LIT  200-201  (6) 


5 1  semester  hours 

15  semester  hours 

21-33  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


HIS  151-152  (6) 
AMS  300  (3) 
AMS  400  (3) 
or  AMS  415  (1-15) 

Elective  Core 

Six  American-topic  courses  are  to  be  taken  in 

anthropology,  art  history,  geography,  history, 

literature,  music  history  and  literature, 

philosophy,  political  science,  and  sociology, 

with  no  more  than  two  courses  from  one 

discipline. 

Elective  Concentration 

Enough  courses  to  insure  that  a  minimum  of 
128  semester  hours  are  taken.  Each  American 
Studies  major  must  submit  for  approval  a 
proposed  course  of  study  at  the  beginning 
of  the  junior  year.  For  guidance  consult 
the  American  Studies  program  coordinator. 


Minor  in  American  Studies  18  semester  hours 

For  transcript  recognition  of  an  American  Studies  minor,  a  student 
must  take  18  semester  hours  allocated  in  the  following  areas: 
American  Studies  (6) 
American  History,  preferably  HIS  151  or  HIS  152  (3) 


^m      Compararive  Literature  Studies  Program 


American  Literature,  preferably  LIT  200  or  LIT  201  (3) 
American  topics:  One  course  from  the  arts,  literature,  or  philoso- 


phy, and  one  course  from  history  or  social  and  behavioral  sciences, 
or  other  courses  approved  by  the  adviser.  (6) 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
AMERICAN  STUDIES 

Symbol:  AMS 

AMS  100     Introduction  to  American  Cultures 

(3)  A  course  designed  for  the  orientation  of  for- 
eign students  and  new  residents  to  life  and  study 
in  the  United  States.  A  study  of  American  higher 
education,  personal  values,  attitudes,  and  cul- 
tural patterns.  Emphasis  is  on  the  diversity  of 
peoples  and  lifestyles.  Not  open  to  U.S.  citizens 
for  graduation  credits, 

#200    American  Civilization  (3)  An  interdisci- 
plinary study  of  the  forces,  forms,  and  values 
that  have  contributed  to  the  making  of  American 
civilization.  Several  academic  disciplines  are 


drawn  upon  in  exploring  the  "Americaness"  of 
American  institutions,  thought,  behavior,  and 
material  culture. 

#210    Mass  Media  and  Popular  Culture  (3)  An 
exploration  of  the  role  of  media  in  the  develop- 
ment of  American  popular  culture.  Particular 
emphasis  will  be  given  to  the  transformations 
brought  about  by  mass  media  after  1880  and  the 
increasing  corporate  involvement  in  mass  media 
during  the  20th  century. 

300    American  Material  Culture  (3)  An  inter- 
disciplinary study  of  American  civilization 
through  the  examination  of  its  man-made  envi- 
ronment, and  crafted  and  manufactured  anifacts 
from  the  Colonial  period  to  the  mid-20th  cen- 
tury. 


305     American  Decorative  Arts  (3)  Study  of 
decorative  and  utilitarian  objects  of  the  American 
household  from  the  Colonial  period  through 
World  War  I. 

400  Senior  Thesis  or  Project  (3)  A  concluding 
"statement"  incorporating  the  interdisciplinary 
generalist  approach. 

401  Independent  Study  (1-3)  An  opportunity 
to  pursue  altemanve  study  projects  outside  the 
classroom;  field  work  in  community  resources, 
etc. 

♦  415  American  Studies  Internship  (1-15) 
Cooperative,  service/learning  experience  at  a 
community  agency,  business,  or  Institution. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course, 

♦  Tbis  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Comparative  Literature  Studies  Program 

Kostas  Myrsiades,  Coordinator 

PROFESSORS:  K.  Myrsiades 

ASSOCL-VTE  PROFESSORS:  Kelly,  Schlau,  StoUer,  Ward 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Awuyah,  Maltby,  L.  Myrsiades, 
Ramanathan 

This  program  provides  a  curriculum  option  for  students  with 
an  interest  in  international  studies  by  offering  a  broad  back- 
ground in  European  and  non-Westem  culture  and  literature. 

This  program  is  responsive  to  recent  developments  in  profes- 
sional business,  law,  and  medical  schools,  which  stress 
admission  of  students  with  humanities  backgrounds  or 
humanities  complements  to  their  scientific  or  technical  back- 
grounds, and  it  reflects  the  growth  of  professional  school 
programs  that  include  more  options  in  the  humanities. 

More  specifically,  this  program  is  designed  to  answer  student 
requests  for  a  program  that  supplies  a  greater  breadth  of  lit- 
erature than  is  commonly  offered  in  a  language  program  and 
a  greater  variety  than  that  offered  in  an  English  department. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  COMPARATIVE  LITERATURE  STUDIES 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language  Requirement 

3.  Related  Course  Requirements 
(Second  language  or  minor) 

4.  Cognate  Requirements 
(Courses  related  to  student's  major  area  of 
concentration) 

5.  Comparative  Literature  Core 
(CLS  200,  261,  310,  367,  and  400) 
(A  Grade  Point  Average  of  3.00  is 
required  for  these  courses.) 

6.  Comparative  Literature  Electives 
Five  electives  that  reflect  a  variety  of  genres, 
periods,  traditions,  approaches,  and  theoretical 
concerns,  selected  from  those  courses  listed 


5 1  semester  hours 

3-12  semester  hours 

18  semester  hours 

12  semester  hours 
15  semester  hours 

15  semester  hours 


below.  Students  wishing  to  take  courses  other 
than  those  courses  listed  below  must  have 
the  written  approval  of  the  Comparative 
Literature  Committee. 

Literature  in  the  Original  Language 

Two  courses  in  the  literature  of  a  language 

other  than  English. 


6  semester  hours 


Minor  in  Comparative  Literature  15  semester  hours 

•Select  ONE  course  in  each  of  the  areas  listed 
below. 

1.  Literature  and  the  other  arts 
(CLS  200,  201,  368,  or  370) 

2.  Theory,  intellectual  history,  or  literary  criticism 
(CLS  310  or  364) 

3.  Theme,  genre,  or  movement 
(CLS  358,  359,  361,  or  362) 

4.  Relationship,  influence,  or  intertextuality 
(CLS  304,  309,  363,  367,  or  400) 

5.  Non-Westem  literature  or  literature  in  a  language 
other  than  English 

(CLS  360,  400,  or  411) 

NOTE:  Not  all  course  numbers  available  for  each  category  above 
are  listed.  Please  check  with  the  Comparative  Literature  Studies 
coordinator  in  Main  Hall  544  (436-2901)  for  other  possible  substi- 
tutions. 


Minor  in  Film  Criticism 

1.  Required  Course 
FLM200 

2.  Elective  Courses 

Any  five  courses  selected  from  the 
following  list  with  approval  of  the  adviser: 
CLS  304,  363,  364,  368,  369,  400,  and  410 
COM  217  and  317 
FLM  201,  300,  and  301 


18  semester  hours 

3  semester  hours 
15  semester  hours 


For  course  descriptions  see  English  and  Foreign  Languages  section  in  this 
catalog.  For  related  courses  in  departments  other  than  English  and  For- 
eign Languages,  consult  the  Handbook  [or  Comparative  Literature  Studies 
available  in  Main  544. 


Ethnic  Studies  Program 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMPARATIVE  UTERATURE  STUDIES 

Symbol:  Cl-S 

*165     Introduction  to  World  Literature  (3) 
This  course  acquaints  students  with  the  "master- 
pieces" of  Western  literature  from  classical  antiq- 
uity to  the  present.  This  course  can  be  taken  as 
an  alternative  to  LIT  165. 
200     Interrelations  of  Comparative  Literature 
(3)  This  course  investigates  the  relationship 
between  literature  and  art.  film,  philosophy,  and 
critical  theory. 

#201     Classical  Mythology  in  the  20th  Cen- 
tury (3)  Classical  myths  and  their  significance  in 
selected  works  of  literature,  film,  and  art. 
203     African  Studies  (3)  This  course  studies 
African  culture  through  literature,  anthropology, 
and  history.  It  focuses  on  the  socio-cultural  and 
historical  contexts  of  African  writing  through  the 
colonial  and  postcolonial  periods. 
t260     Continental  Literature  I  (3)  Literature  of 
continental  Europe  from  classical  times  through 
the  Renaissance. 

t261     Continental  Literature  II  (3)  Literature  of 
continental  Europe  from  Neoclassicism  to  the 
present. 

♦  297     Themes  in  Contemporary  Literature 
Topics  10  be  announced  each  time  course  is 
oflfered, 

304  Women  and  Film  (3)  An  examination  of 
the  role  of  women  in  contemporary  world  cin- 
ema and  the  feminist  film. 

309  Literature  Translation  Workshop  (3)  A 
writing  workshop  on  the  theory  and  practice  of 
literary  translation. 

310  Contemporary  Literary  Criticism  (3)  A 
survey  of  the  major  developments  in  European  liter- 
ary criticism  during  the  20th  century  with  emphasis 
on  the  developments  of  the  last  20  years. 

'311     Contemporary  Latin-American  Narrative 
(3)  An  examination  of  Latin-American  narrative 
(short  story,  novella,  novel,  and  testimonial  Uter- 
ature).  Spanish-  and  Ponugese-language  writers 
from  South  and  Central  America,  Mexico,  and 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 

t  Approved  two-semester  substitute  for  distrib- 
utive requirement. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
'  Culture  Cluster. 

••  See  the  department  handbook  for  group 
descriptions. 


the  Caribbean  will  be  studied,  from  the  period  of 
magical  realism  (1950's  and  1960's)  through  the 
present.  They  may  include  Isabel  Allende,  Jorge 
Amado,  Miguel  Angel  Asturias,  Jorg  Luis  Borges, 
Gabriel  Garcia  M^rquez,  Clarice  Lispector,  Elena 
Poniatowska,  and  Luis  Rafael  Sanchez. 
#329     Gender  and  Peace  (3)  An  examination  of 
the  ways  in  which  social  constructions  of  gender 
intersect  with  perceptions  and  experiences  of 
war  and  peace. 

350  Computer  Applications  In  the  Humanities 
(3)  This  course  is  designed  to  provide  an  introduc- 
tion to  the  computer  and  its  applications  in  a  num- 
ber of  humanistic  disciplines  fliterature,  history,  and 
writing,  but  some  attention  also  will  be  given  to 
foreign  languages,  linguistics,  music,  and  art.) 

351  African  Literature  (3)  A  study  of  the  rep- 
resentation of  Africa  through  the  perspectives  of 
African  and  non-African  writers. 

358  Women  in  Western  Literature  (3)  An 
inquiry  reaching  back  into  classical  antiquity  for 
some  prototypes  of  women  in  the  literature  of 
the  West.  Readings  from  Aeschylus,  Sophocles, 
Aristophanes,  Euripides,  Ovid,  Dante,  Petrarch, 
Shakespeare,  Moliere,  Austen,  Flauben,  James, 
Toktoy,  Shaw,  Gather,  Giraudoux,  and  others. 

359  Women  in  Modem  Fiction  (3)  Readings, 
analysis,  and  discussion  of  works  of  contempo- 
rary fiction  that  present  major  depictions  of 
women  by  authors  such  as  Sarraute,  Duras,  Boll, 
Walker,  Kundera,  Morrison,  Woolf,  etc. 

360  Literature  of  Modem  China  (3)  A  survey 
of  the  Uterature  of  the  People's  RepubUc  of 
China. 

361  Modem  Continental  Drama  (3)  A  consid- 
eration of  the  chief  writers  who  influenced  the 
modem  drama:  Ibsen,  Strindberg,  Chekhov, 
Hauptmann,  Pirandello,  Sartre,  Brecht,  and 
lonesco. 

362  Modem  Continental  Fiction  (3)  Important 
modem  European  writers  in  translation: 
Flaubert,  Dostoevsky,  Unamuno,  Gide,  Mann, 
Kafka,  Camus,  Sartre,  and  Moravia.  Their  aes- 
thetic and  philosophical  contributions  to  modem 
fiction. 

363  Soviet  Literature  and  Film  (3)  A  compara- 
tive approach  to  selected  20th  century  Soviet 
works  of  fiction,  poetry,  drama,  and  film. 

364  Eastem  European  Literature  and  Film  (3) 
A  critical  and  analytical  approach  to  Eastem 
European  literature  and  film  covering  major 
movements  and  theory  since  World  War  11. 


367  Classical  Mythology  (3)  An  examination 
of  Greek  mythology  through  the  works  of 
Homer,  Hesiod,  the  Greek  tragedians,  and  Greek 
lyric  poets. 

368  Literature,  Myth  and  Film  (3)  The  influ- 
ence of  Greek  mythology  on  contemporary  West- 
em  literature  and  film. 

369  Literature  and  Film  (3)  The  interrelation- 
ship between  selected  works  of  world  fiction  and 
their  fihn  adaptations. 

#370     Literature  and  Medicine  (3)  A  course 
treating  the  study  of  Uterary  works,  film,  and 
selected  readings  from  other  areas  Oiistory,  sci- 
ence, fiction,  and  nonfiction)  to  generate  an 
understanding  of  the  relationship  of  human  val- 
ues to  medicine,  illness,  and  issues  of  related 
imponance  to  physicians. 
#371     Law,  Literature,  and  Communication 
(3)  A  look  at  the  presentational  aspects  of  law  — 
legal  writing  and  oral  argument  — its  construc- 
tions in  narrative  —  law  as  literature  and  litera- 
ture as  law  — and  the  relationship  of  law  to 
anthropology,  psychology,  history,  and  sociology. 

♦  400     Comparative  Literature  Seminar  (3) 
Topics  such  as  Beckett/Joyce,  Homer/Joyce, 
Greek  Comedy,  Greek  Tragedy,  myth,  and  film 
are  offered  periodically.  Required  of  comparative 
literature  majors  in  their  junior  or  senior  year. 

♦  410  Independent  Study  in  Comparative  Lit- 
erature (3) 

♦  4 1 1     Foreign  Study  in  Comparative  Litera- 
ture (3) 

FILM  THEORY  AND  CRITICISM 

Symbol:  FLM 

200  Introduction  to  Film  (3)  A  critical  and 
analytical  approach  to  world  cinema  covering 
film  theory  and  the  major  film  movements 
(Soviet  Realism,  German  Expressionism,  Italian 
Neo-Realism,  French  New  Wave,  Cinema  Nuovo, 
New  German  Cinema,  and  Surrealism)  from  the 
beginning  to  present.  (Group  E)** 

201  American  Film  (3)  The  function  of  cinema 
in  contemporary  society  as  a  socio-cultural,  eco- 
nomic, and  political  object  as  seen  through  criti- 
cal analysis  of  American  films.  (Group  E)** 

300  Private  Screening  (1)  Eight  to  12  narrative 
film  classics  per  semester  on  a  specific  topic  or 
theme. 

301  Documentary  Film  (3)  Understanding  and 
enjoying  the  social,  philosophic,  economic,  and 
political  aspects  of  documentary  film.  (Group 
E)" 


Ethnic  Studies  Program 


Bonita  Freeman-Witthoft,  Director 

C.  James  Trotman,  African-American  Coordinator 

Stacey  Schlau,  Hispanic-American  Coordinator 

Ralph  Eisenstadt,  Jewish-American  Interim  Coordinator 

STEERING  COMMITTEE 

Marshall  J.  Becker,  Erminio  Braidotti,  Mary  Crawford, 
Andrew  E.  Dinniman,  Stephen  D.  Gilmour,  William  I.  Guy, 
Mildred  C.  Joyner,  Deborah  Malstedt,  Dimitri  I.  Monos, 
Jerome  M.  WiUiams,  RobenJ.  Young 

The  Ethnic  Smdies  Institute  (ESI)  offers  a  minor  and  a  cer- 
tificate to  any  student,  regardless  of  major,  who  satisfactorily 
completes  18  semester  hours  of  work  in  ethnic  studies. 


Study  may  lead  to  a  general  certificate  in  ethnic  studies  or  to 
a  specialized  certificate  in  one  of  the  following  areas: 

•  African-American  Studies 

•  Hispanic-American  Studies 

•  Jewish-American  Studies 

•  Native  American  Studies 


For  current  requirements  and  a  list  of  approved  courses  in 
each  specialization,  consult  the  director  of  ethnic  studies. 
For  each  option  presently  offered  there  are,  in  addition  to 
the  relevant  ethnic  studies  core  courses,  certain  cognate 
courses.  These  cognate  courses  do  not  necessarily  deal 
direcdy  with  ethnic  group  life  but  give  an  added  dimension 
of  social  and  historical  background. 

As  soon  as  possible,  students  should  register  their  intent  to 
earn  the  minor  with  the  director  of  the  Institute  for  Ethnic 


Linguistics  Program 


Studies.  At  the  end  of  each  semester,  students  should  repon 
the  ethnic-related  courses  completed  during  the  semester  and 
the  courses  planned  for  the  following  semester  to  the  direc- 
tor. An  updated  list  of  courses  approved  for  credit  is  avail- 
able each  semester  from  the  Institute  for  Ethnic  Studies 
before  the  advising  and  scheduling  period.  Students  can  use 
an  approved  ethnic-related  course  toward  the  completion  of 
the  certificate  of  minor  in  Ethnic  Studies  at  the  same  time  it 
is  being  used  to  fulfill  their  major,  minor,  or  elective  require- 
ments. 

Students  are  encouraged  to  attend  at  least  two  cultural  eth- 
nic events  — speakers,  musical  programs,  art  shows,  theatre 
productions,  or  films  — each  year. 


For  advising  in  Ethnic  Studies,  contact  Bonita  Freeman- 
Witthoft,  201  Old  Library. 


Minor  in  Holocaust  Studies 


18  semester  hours 


The  program  in  Holocaust  Studies  deals  not  only  with  historical 
aspects  of  the  Holocaust,  but  also  with  moral  and  political  issues 
involved  in  the  prevention  of  future  holocausts. 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies  gen- 
eral degree  program. 

For  advising  in  Holocaust  Studies,  contact  Dr.  Irene  G.  Shur  in 
Main  Hall. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ETHNIC  STUDIES 

Symbol:  SSC 

#201     Global  Perspectives  (3)  This  course  is 
intended  to  help  students  develop  the  competen- 
cies needed  for  the  understanding  of,  and  mean 


ingful  participation  m,  the  world  issues  of  the 
1990's. 

♦  385     Holocaust  Workshop  (3) 

♦  480     Ethnic  Culmres  Workshop  (3)  This 
workshop  considers  the  history,  traditions,  cus- 
toms, and  contributions  to  American  life  of  vari- 
ous ethnic  groups.  The  lectures  and  special 


programs  are  designed  to  increase  the 
student's  knowledge  of  the  multicultural 
nature  of  American  society.  Projects,  specifically 
tailored  to  individual  needs,  are  directed  by  a 
faculty  member  of  the  Ethnic  Studies  Institute. 


#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Latin-American  Studies  Program 

Erminio  Braidotti  and  Raymond  Doyle  Coordinators 

Any  student  in  the  University,  regardless  of  his  or  her  area 
of  specialization,  may  earn  a  minor  and  a  letter  of  verifica- 
tion in  Latin-American  Studies  after  satisfactory  completion 
of  18  semester  hours  of  work,  distributed  as  follows: 


Minor  in  Latin-American  Studies 
Required:  Either  A  or  B 

A.   1.  Spanish  or  Portuguese 

(Intermediate  level  or  above) 
2.  Latin-American  history 


18  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 


OR 

B.   1.  Latin-American  history  6  semester  hours 

2.  Latin-American  civilization  and  thought  6  semester  hours 

Electives  6  semester  hours 

Selected  under  advisement  from  Latin-American  oriented  courses 
offered  by  the  departments  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology,  Geogra- 
phy and  Planning,  Political  Science,  Economics,  Art,  or  others.  In 
track  A,  one  three-credit  course  must  be  devoted  to  literature,  an 
history,  or  music. 

For  advising,  see  Professor  Braidotti  in  the  Department  of  Foreign 
Languages  or  Professor  Doyle  in  the  Department  of  History. 
A  student  should  maintain  a  2.50  average  in  area-studies  courses  to 
be  recommended  for  graduate  work  in  the  area-studies  concentration. 


Linguistics  Program 

Dennis  L.  Godfrey,  Coordinator 

CONTRIBUTING  FACUUT 

Diane  O.  Casagrande,  Communication  Studies 

W  Stephen  Croddy,  Philosophy 

Stephen  D.  Gilmour,  Foreign  Languages 

Jane  E.  Jeffrey,  English 

John  T.  Kelly,  English 

Cheri  L.  Micheau,  English 

Garrett  G.  Molholt,  English 

Frederick  R.  Patton,  Foreign  Languages 

Paul  A.  Stoller,  Anthropology  and  Sociology 

Andrea  Varricchio,  Foreign  Languages 

Michael  S.  Weiss,  Communicative  Disorders 


The  minor  in  linguistics  is  an  interdisciplinary  program 
offered  by  the  departments  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology, 
Communicative  Disorders,  English,  Foreign  Languages,  Phi- 
losophy, and  Communication  Studies.  Its  purpose  is  to  pro- 
vide the  student  with  a  foundation  in  the  analysis  of  the  var- 
ious aspects  of  language.  Students  wishing  to  enter  the 
program  must  consult  the  program  coordinator.  To  receive 
credit  for  the  minor  in  linguistics,  a  student  must  complete 
18  semester  hours  of  course  work.  The  program  coordinator 
must  approve  all  courses. 

Minor  in  linguistics 

1.  Required  Courses 
ENG/UN  230,  ENG  335  (or  any  other  histor- 
ical linguistics  course),  ENG  331  (or  any 
other  structural  grammar  course) 

2.  Electives 

A.  Choose  one  of  the  following: 
ENG  330,  FRE  365,  GER  365,  RUS  365, 
SPA  365,  SPP  106,  or  any  other  approved 
course  in  phonology  or  phonetics 

B.  Choose  one  of  the  following: 


18  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


Russian  Studies  Program 


ENG  339,  340;  LIN  250;  ANT/LIN  380; 
PHI/LIN  330,  360;  COM/LIN  415;  or  any 
other  approved  comparable  course 
Choose  an  additional  course  from  either 
Group  A  or  B  above,  or  choose  one  of  the 
following; 

COM  307;  ENG  430;  LAN  250;  LIN  411, 
412;  LIT  430,  431;  PHI  190,  436;  PHY 


110;  SPP  107;  or  any  other  approved  lin- 
guistics course 

For  course  descriptions,  see  Anthropology  and  Sociology 
(ANT),  Communicative  Disorders  (SPP),  Communication 
Studies  (COM),  English  (ENG  or  LIT),  Foreign  Languages 
(LIN,  ERE,  GER,  RUS,  or  SPA),  Philosophy  (PHI),  or  Physics 
(PHY). 


Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  Program 

Frederick  R.  Struckmeyer,  Director 

ADVISORY  COMMITTEE:  Charles  Bauerlein,  Roger  Bove, 
Diane  Casagrande,  Louis  Casciato,  Anne  Dzamba,  Ralph 
Eisenstadt,  David  Eldredge,  Robin  Garrett,  Harvey  Greisman, 
Tom  Heston,  Barbara  Kauffman,  Carol  Radich,  Bhim  Sandhu, 
Stacey  Schlau,  William  Seybold,  Irene  Shur 

Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  examines  social  conflict,  conflict 
resolution,  and  cooperation  at  the  group,  national,  and  inter- 
national levels.  This  process  involves  understanding  factors 
that  contribute  to  peace  with  justice,  various  functions  of  con- 
flict, and  processes  by  which  conflict  may  be  managed.  The 
minor  fosters  skills  for  both  study  and  action.  Though  prima- 
rily an  enrichment  to  liberal  education,  this  minor  is  relevant 
to  a  variety  of  careers,  both  traditional  and  emerging.  The 
former  include  law,  communications,  education,  and  govern- 
ment. However,  there  are  also  many  career  opportunities  with 
a  wide  range  of  public  interest  and  advocacy  organizations. 


The  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  minor  consists  of  18  credit 
hours,  some  of  which  may  also  be  used  to  fulfill  other 
degree  requirements.  This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concen- 
tration by  students  in  the  Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies 
program  or  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies  general  degree  pro- 
gram. 


Minor  in  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 


18  semester  hours 


1 .  Required  Course  3  semester  hours 
Introduction  to  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  (3):  SSC  200. 

2.  Electives  15  semester  hours 
These  include  COM  216,  312,  403,  and  410;  GEO  232;  HIS  146 
and  362;  HISAVOS  329;  UT  162  and  309;  PHI  207  and  382; 
PSC  315  and  316;  SOC  341,  371,  and  376;  and  SSC  201.  Other 
courses,  under  advisement,  abo  may  satisfy  pan  of  the  minor.  It 
also  should  be  noted  that  requirements  for  the  minor  are  cur- 
rendy  undergoing  revision  and  are  expected  to  be  in  place  by 
1993-94.  For  further  information,  see  Professor  Struckmeyer, 
Department  of  Philosophy. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTION 

#SSC200     Introduction  to  Peace  and  Conflict 
Studies  (3)  An  interdisciplinary  study  of  the 
causes  and  functions  of  societal  conflict  and  pro- 
cesses of  controlling  conflict. 


#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Russian  Studies  Program 

Frederick  Patton,  Coordinator 

This  program  is  offered  jointly  by  the  faculty  of  Arts  and 
Sciences  and  the  faculty  of  Professional  Studies. 

Any  student  in  the  University,  regardless  of  his  or  her  area 
of  specialization,  may  earn  a  minor  specialization  in  Russian 
Studies  after  satisfactory  completion  of  18  semester  hours  of 
work,  distributed  as  follows: 


Minor  in  Russian  Studies 

Required:  Either  A  or  B 

A.  1.   Russian  language  (intermediate  level 

or  above) 
2.  Russian  history  and/or  politics 
OR 

B.  1.  Russian  history  and/or  pohtics 


18  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 


2.  Russian  civilization,  culture  and/or  politics     6  semester  hours 


To  fulfill  requirements  for  the  Russian  Studies  minor,  students  may 
choose  from  the  following  courses:  ARH  405  (Russian  Art),  CLS 
363  (Soviet  Literature  and  Film),  CLS  364  (Eastern  European  Liter- 
ature and  Film),  ERU  209  (Russian  Culmre  -  Soviet  Period),  GEO 
304  (The  Soviet  Union),  HIS  324  (Russian  History  to  1917),  HIS 
425  (Soviet  Russia),  PSC  246  (Soviet  Politics),  PSC  311  (Soviet 
Foreign  Policy),  PSC  349  (Comparative  Communism),  RUS  201- 
412  (Russian  language  courses),  and  RUS  310  (Russian  Literature 
in  Translation). 

Electives  6  semester  hours 

Selected  under  advisement  from  Russian-oriented  courses  offered  by 

the  departments  of  Political  Science,  Anthropology  and  Sociology, 

English,  Art,  or  other  departments  of  WCU.  In  track  A,  one 

three-credit  course  must  be  devoted  to  literature,  art,  history,  or 

music. 

For  advising,  see  Professor  Patton  in  the  Department  of  Foreign 

Languages. 

A  student  should  maintain  a  3.00  average  in  area-studies  courses  to 

be  recommended  for  graduate  work  in  the  area-studies  concentration. 


Women's  Studies  Program 


Women's  Studies  Program 

Stacey  Schlau,  Coordinator 

STEERING  COMMITTEE 

Helen  Berger,  Maria  Boes,  Emma  Lee  Brown,  Mary  Ann 
Bums-Duffy,  Diane  Casagrande,  Mary  Crawford,  Anne 
Dzamba,  Celia  Esplugas,  Robin  Garrett,  Jane  Jeffrey, 
Patricia  Johnson,  Mary  Keetz,  Elizabeth  Larsen,  Deborah 
Mahlstedt,  Mary  McCullough,  Lynette  McGrath,  Patricia 
Patrick,  Ruth  Porritt,  Geetha  Ramanathan,  Arlene  Rengen, 
Carol  Shloss,  Mary  Stieber,  James  Trotman,  Richard 
Webster 

The  Women's  Studies  Program  consists  of  an  interrelated 
group  of  courses  offered  in  a  wide  variety  of  academic  disci- 
plines. The  program  operates  under  the  supervision  of  the 
Women's  Studies  Steering  Committee.  This  program  is 
envisaged  both  as  an  enrichment  to  liberal  education  and  as 
a  preprofessional  field.  The  social  transformation  that  is  tak- 
ing place  in  society  and  in  intellectual  life  is  making  study  in 
this  area  an  asset  in  many  arenas. 

The  aim  of  the  program  is  to  integrate  the  perception  and 
experience  of  women  into  the  curriculum  and  to  encourage 
inquiry  into  previously  neglected  areas,  such  as  women's 
history,  women's  literature  and  art,  psychology  of  women, 
and  women's  position  in  society. 

Women's  Studies  Courses 


ARH  419 
CLS304 
CLS358 
CLS359 
ECO  303 
HEA/NSG 


109 


Women  in  Art;  Madonna  or  Model? 
Women  and  Film 
Women  in  Western  Literature 
Women  in  Modem  Fiction 
Economic  Role  of  Women 
Health  Issues  of  Women 


HIS/CLS/WOS  329 

HIS  420 

HIS  451 

LIT  204 

LIT  274 

FED  380 

PSC  301 

PSY  365 

SOC  346 

WOS  225 

WOS  315 
WOS  320 
WOS  325 
WOS  400 
WOS/PHl  405 
WOS  410 
WOS  415 


Gender  and  Peace 

Biography  of  Modem  European  Women 

Women  in  America 

Black  Women  Writers  of  America 

Feminist  Poetry 

Women  and  Sport 

Women  in  Politics 

Psychology  of  Women 

Sociology  of  Gender 

Women  Today;  An  Introduction  to  Women's 

Studies 

Third  World  Women 

Independent  Study 

Special  Topics  in  Women's  Studies 

Internship 

Feminist  Theory 

Senior  Colloquium 

Senior  Project 


These  courses  are  open  to  all  students  as  free  electives  under 
general  requirements.  With  the  permission  of  their  departments, 
students  may  also  take  these  courses  as  electives  within  their  major 
or  minor  programs. 

Minor  in  Women's  Studies  18  semester  hours 

A  women's  studies  minor  consists  of  18  credit  hours,  no  more  than 
six  of  which  may  be  taken  in  a  single  depanment.  Two  courses  are 
required  for  the  minor;  WOS  225,  and  either  WOS  405,  410,  or 
415.  Other  courses  may  be  chosen  from  the  list  of  women's  studies 
offerings.  Transcript  recognition  will  be  awarded  upon  completion. 
This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies 
degree  program. 

For  advising  in  Women's  Studies,  contact  Dr.  Stacey  Schlau,  Main 
Hall  211. 

Descriptions  of  WOS  courses  in  Women's  Studies  appear  below. 
See  departmental  listings  for  all  other  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
WOMEN'S  STUDIES 

Symbol;  WOS 

#225     Women  Today:  An  Introduction  to 
Women's  Studies  (3)  An  interdisciplinary  course 
designed  to  enable  students  to  analyze  various 
kinds  of  statements  on  women,  to  question  the 
implications  of  changing  cultural  patterns,  and  to 
sample  first-hand  efforts  for  change.  Satisfies 
interdisciplinary  requirement.  Offered  every 
semester. 

#315    Third-World  Women  (3)  This  course 
will  examine  the  nature  of  women's  lives  in  the 
Third  World,  focusing  on  topics  such  as  family, 
education,  health,  development  policies,  and 
political  change.  Geographic  areas  studied 
include  Africa,  Asia,  Latin  America,  and  the  Mid- 
dle East.  Offered  spring  semester,  odd-numbered 
years. 

♦  320     Independent  Study  (3)  Independent 
research  and  study  for  upper-division  students. 
Topic  to  be  approved  by  supervising  faculty 
member.  PREREQ:  WOS  225.  Offered  as  needed. 


♦  325     Special  Topics  in  Women's  Studies  (3) 
Selected  (and  changing)  topics,  e.g.,  Ethnic 
Women;  Women  in  the  Workplace;  Love,  Mar- 
riage, and  Divorce.  Offered  as  projected  enroll- 
ments warrant, 

#329     Gender  and  Peace  (3)  An  examination  of 
the  ways  in  which  social  constructions  of  gender 
intersect  with  perceptions  and  the  experience  of 
war.  Offered  fall  semesters. 

♦  400     Internship  (3)  This  course  is  designed 
to  allow  students  the  opportunity  to  put  into 
practice,  outside  the  academic  setting,  the 
knowledge  regarding  women's  experiences 
gained  in  other  courses.  Some  possible  sites 
might  be  a  women's  health  clinic,  a  business,  a 
newspaper,  a  social  service  agency,  or  an  elec- 
toral campaign.  There  will  be  both  an  on-site 
and  a  faculty  supervisor.  PREREQ:  WOS  225  and 
two  other  women's  studies  courses.  Offered  as 
needed. 

#405     Feminist  Theory  (3)  Designed  to  intro- 
duce and  discuss  basic  questions  in  contempo- 


rary feminist  theory,  the  course  will  explore  dif- 
ferent philosophies  of  feminism  and  include  such 
issues  as  motherhood,  intersections  with  other 
theories  of  oppression,  and  body  politics.  Offered 
spring  semester,  even-numbered  years  PREREQ: 
WOS  225  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

♦  410    Senior  Colloquium  (3)  This  is  one  of 
the  choices  for  the  final  required  course  for  the 
minor.  Sample  topics  include  global  feminism, 
modiering,  the  experiences  of  women  of  color, 
and  feminist  Utopias.  Offered  as  needed. 

♦  415     Senior  Project  (3)  Preparation  of 
research  in  any  area  of  women's  studies,  to  be 
decided  by  student  and  adviser.  Supervision 
includes  exercises  in  method  and  bibUography. 
Usually,  a  lengthy  research  paper  will  be  the 
final  result.  Offered  as  needed. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Liberal  Studies  Program 


Liberal  Studies  Program 

James  D.  Fabrey,  Director 

In  addition  to  programs  leading  to  baccalaureate  degrees  in 
specific  academic  fields,  the  University  offers  a  degree  in  lib- 
eral studies.  The  program  is  designed  for  either  traditional  or 
nontraditional  students  who  seek  a  general  education,  or 
who  desire  to  build  majors  that  cut  across  traditional  disci- 
plinary lines.  An  Associate  of  Arts  degree  in  liberal  studies  is 
available  to  students  seeking  a  two-year  degree. 

Typically,  the  liberal  studies  student  selects  the  undeclared 
major  program  if  entering  the  University  as  a  freshman.  After 
completing  at  least  32  semester  hours,  and  after  achieving  a 
minimum  Grade  Point  Average  of  2.00,  the  student  may 
request  an  interview  with  the  director  of  liberal  studies  for 
the  purpose  of  planning  a  curriculum  in  one  of  the  three 
available  tracks.  Students  may  enter  the  liberal  studies  pro- 
gram from  other  majors  of  the  University,  or  as  transfers 
from  other  colleges,  by  the  same  process  and  by  meeting  the 
same  requirements.  It  is  University  policy  that  no  student, 
whether  presently  enrolled  at  West  Chester  or  attempting  to 
be  admitted  from  another  university,  is  permitted  to  enroll  in 
the  liberal  studies  program  after  earning  80  semester  hours. 

Three  advisement  tracks  within  two  separate  baccalaureate 
degrees  are  available.  The  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  liberal 
studies  —  arts  and  sciences  track  is  designed  principally  for 
students  who  are  interested  in  a  general  education  with  no 
specific  orientation  toward  career  preparation.  Alternatively, 
either  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  —  career  prepara- 
tion track,  or  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies  — 
science  and  mathematics  emphasis  track  will  be  more  useful 
to  the  student  who  is  seeking  to  construct  a  career-centered 
curriculum  that  is  not  otherwise  available  at  West  Chester 
University. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN  LIBERAL  STUDIES  - 
ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  TRACK 

I.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 
(MAT  105,  121,  or  a  calculus  course) 


51  semester  hours 


0-12  semester  hours 


45  semester  hours 


2.  Foreign  language  (Students  must  show 
competency  through  the  202  level.) 

3.  Liberal  studies  breadth  requirements 
Ganguage  culture  cluster,  natural  and  com- 
puter sciences,  behavioral  and  social  sciences, 
humanities  and  communications,  and  the 
arts) 

4.  Liberal  studies  electives  of  the  student's  20  semester  hours 
choice  at  the  300  and  400  level 

5.  At  least  one  minor  offered  by  the  the  College 
of  Arts  and  Sciences,  the  School  of  Music,  or 
by  the  depanments  of  Economics,  Political 
Science,  or  Geography 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN  LIBERAL  STUDIES  - 
CAREER  PREPARATION  TRACK 

L  General  l^quirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

(MAT  105,  121,  or  a  calculus  course) 


2.  Foreign  language  (Students  must  show 
competency  through  the  202  level.) 

3.  Liberal  studies  breadth  requirements 
(natural  sciences,  behavioral  and  social  sci- 
ences, humanities  and  communications,  and 
the  arts) 

4.  Liberal  Studies  electives  of  the 
student's  choice  at  the  300  and  400  level 

5.  At  least  one  minor  offered  by  a  depanment 
associated  with  the  student's  career  interest 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  LIBERAL  STUDIES  - 
SCIENCE  AND  MATHEMATICS  TRACK 


0-12  semester  hours 


24  semester  hours 


30  semester  hours 


51  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


32  semester  hours 


20  semester  hours 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 
(MAT  105,  121,  or  a  calculus  course) 

2.  Liberal  studies  breadth  requirements 
(behavioral  and  social  sciences,  humanities 
and  communications,  and  the  arts) 

3.  Science  and  mathematics  cognate  require- 
ments. Seven  to  nine  semester  hours  in  any 
four  of  the  following  depanments:  Biology 
(BIO  110  or  above),  Chemistry  (CHE  103  and 
CRL  103  or  above),  Geology/Astronomy 
(above  ESS  111),  Physics  (PHY  130  or 
above),  and  Mathematics  (MAT  110  or  above, 
or  CSC  115  or  above) 

4.  Liberal  studies  electives  of  the  smdent's 
choice  at  the  300  and  400  level 

5.  At  least  one  minor  selected  from  the  depart- 
ments of  Biology,  Geology  and  Astromy, 
Physics,  or  Mathematics  and  Computer  Sci- 
ence 


ASSOCIATE  OF  ARTS  -  LIBERAL  STUDIES 

The  University  offers  a  program  of  studies  leading  to  the  degree  of 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies.  This  program  is  especially  suited 
for  students  who  want  a  solid,  rwo-year  foundation  from  which  to 
move  into  a  wide  variety  of  fields,  including  business,  the  sciences, 
and  public  service.  Many  students  also  have  used  the  associate 
degree  as  a  means  of  introducing  themselves  to  the  university  set- 
ting, and  then  later  building  on  it  toward  the  completion  of  a  bac- 
calaureate degree. 

The  program  consists  of  a  set  of  general  education  courses  and 
15-21  semester  hours  in  an  area  of  concentration.  The  specific 
requirements  and  areas  of  concentration  are  outlined  on  pages 
38-39.  Students  who  elect  one  of  these  areas  of  concentration 
receive  their  academic  advice  from  a  faculty  member  of  the  pro- 
gram or  depanment  responsible  for  that  area  of  concentration  with 
guidance  and  assistance  from  an  adviser  in  the  Office  of  Liberal 
Studies. 

University  policy  prohibits  a  student  from  entering  the  Associate  of 
Arts  degree  after  having  earned  50  semester  hours  of  credit. 

THIS  PROGRAM  IS  BEING  SUSPENDED;  HOWEVER,  STU- 
DENTS CURRENTI.Y  ENROLLED  MAY  CONTINUE  IN  THE 
PROGRAM.  FOR  INFORMATION  CONTACT  THE  DIRECTOR 
OF  LIBERAL  STUDIIiS  AT  436-1096. 

Students  in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  tracks  have  the  option  of  using  up 
to  six  semester  hours  of  their  liberal  electives  as  Senior  Ihesis  (LST 
490)  credits.  Interested  students  should  consult  with  the  program 
director  well  before  earning  80  semester  hours  about  procedures  for 
pursuing  the  senior  thesis. 


Depanment  of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 


COURSE  DESCRPTION 
LIBERAL  STUDIES 

Symbol:  LST 


LST  490     Senior  Thesis  (3-6)  Directed  re- 
search in  an  interdisciplinary  subject  of 
the  arts  and  sciences.  For  students  in  the 


Bachelor  of  Arts  tracks.  PREREQ:  Per- 
mission of  the  director  of  liberal 
studies. 


Department  of  Mathematics  and  Computer 
Science 

John  W.  Weaver,  Chairperson 

Frank  Milliman,  Assiscant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Branton,  Epstein,  Fabrey,  Grosshans,  Koh, 
L'Heureux,  Mandelbaum,  Montemuro,  Szymansld,  Weaver 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Ahlbom,  Gallitano,  Gupta, 
Kerrigan,  Kline,  Milito,  Milliman,  Morgan,  Moser,  Seybold, 
Tan,  Vemo,  Wolfson,  Wyatt 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Edelman,  Horton,  Hoivath, 
Johnston,  Schremmer 

The  Department  of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 
offers  two  programs  leading  to  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  in 
mathematics,  two  programs  leading  to  the  Bachelor  of  Sci- 
ence degree  in  computer  and  informational  sciences,  and  a 
program  leading  to  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  MATHEMATICS  enables  each  student  to  receive  the 
basic  preparation  for  the  career  of  his/her  choice,  such  as  college 
teaching,  research  and  other  service  in  industry  and  government, 
and  computer  programming.  In  all  cases,  the  student  receives  a 
sound  preparation  for  graduate  study  in  the  field  of 
mathematics. 

2.  The  B.A.  in  MATHEMAnCS  -  COMPUTER  SCIENCE  offers  the 
student  interested  in  mathematics  and  computer  science  an 
opportunity  to  study  both  disciphnes. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  COMPUTER  AND  INFORMATION  SCIENCES 
requires  course  work  in  computer  science,  mathematics,  and 
business.  In  addition,  the  student  gains  valuable  experience  on 
the  job  through  an  internship  program  with  local  industry  and 
business.  Normally,  this  program  requires  attendance  during  one 
summer  session  in  addition  to  the  eight  academic  semesters.  The 
information  systems  track  prepares  the  student  to  use  the  com- 
puter as  a  tool  for  management  in  business  and  industry,  leading 
to  a  possible  career  as  a  systems  analyst.  The  computer  systems 
track  prepares  the  student  to  engage  in  the  design,  development, 
and  effective  use  of  computer  systems  through  emphasis  on  soft- 
ware and  computer  system  structure,  leading  to  a  possible  career 
as  a  systems  programmer. 

4.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  MATHEMATICS  focuses  on  a  heavy 
concentration  in  mathematics  while  the  student  earns  state  certi- 
fication to  teach  secondary  school  mathematics. 

Majors  in  all  these  areas  should  consult  the  appropriate 
department  handbook  and  review  with  their  advisers  current 
requirements  listed  on  the  guidance  record  sheets. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  BA.  PROGRAMS 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language  Requirement  (French, 
German,  or  Russian) 

3.  Related  Requirements 
CSC  141;  PHY  170 

4.  Major  Requirements 

MAT  110,  161,  162,  211,  261,  262,  343,  411 
and  421 


51  semester  hours 
0-12  semester  hours 

7  semester  hours 
29  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  MATHEMATICS 

1.  Additional  Major  Requirements 
MAT  232 

2.  Electives  in  Mathematics 

Selected  from  upper-division  mathematics 
courses 

3.  PHY  180 


3  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 

4  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  MATHEMATICS  WITH  COMPUTER 
SCIENCE  CONCENTRATION 


1, 


Additional  Major  Requirements 

CSC  142,  241,  242,  and  490  (CSC 

490  must  be  taken  as  a  three-credit  course); 

MAT  425 

Electives  in  Mathematics 

Electives  in  Computer  Science 


15  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE -COMPUTER  AND  INFORMATION 
SCIENCES 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Core  Curriculum 

Computer  Science  Requirements 

CSC  141,  142,  241,  242,  361,  and  five 

approved  language  labs 

Mathematics  Requirements 

MAT  161,  162,  221,  and  281 

Natural  Science  Requirements 

One  semester  each  of  three  different  natural 

sciences 

Cooperative  Experience 

CSC  300  and  400 

3.  Information  Systems  Track  Requirements 
ACC  201-202;  CSC  321;  ECO  112;  ENG  368; 
MGT  300;  MKT  301;  and  six  semester  hours 
of  approved  electives  in  business,  computer 
science,  or  mathematics 

4.  Computer  Systems  Track  Requirements 
ACC  201;  CSC  331  and  341;  ENG  368;  and 
nine  semester  hours  of  approved  electives  in 
computer  science  and  mathematics 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 


5 1  semester  hours 
20  semester  hours 

15  semester  hours 
9  semester  hours 

13  semester  hours 

27  semester  hours 


21  semester  hours 


51  semester  hours 
38  semester  hours 


Mathematics  Requirements 
MAT  110,  161,  162,  211,  231,  261,  262,  343, 
350,  354  (credited  to  professional  education), 
411,  and  421 

3.  Professional  Education  Requirements 
EDF  100;  EDM  300;  EDP  250 
and  351;  EDS  306  and  411-412 

4.  Related  Requirements 
CSC  141,  and  PHY  170-180 

5.  Electives  in  Mathematics 
Selected  from  upper-division  mathematics 
courses 

Minor  in  Mathematics 

Baccalaureate  students  may  receive  transcript  recognition  for  a 
minor  area  of  study  in  mathematics  by  completing  four  required 
courses  and  two  electives  selected  from  the  approved  list. 
1.   Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 

MAT  105  or  110,  and  161,  162,  and  211 


27  semester  hours 


1 1  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


Department  of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 


2.  Approved  Electives:  Select  two  6  semester  hours 

MAT  232,  343,  411,  or  421 
Minor  in  Computer  Science  19  semester  hours 

Baccalaureate  students  may  receive  transcript  recognition  for  a 
minor  area  of  study  in  computer  science  by  completing  four 
required  courses  and  two  electives  in  computer  science  courses 
numbered  200  or  higher,  including  at  least  one  computer  science 
course  numbered  300  or  higher. 

1.  Required  courses  13  semester  hours 
CSC  141,  142,  241,  and  MAT  161 

2.  Approved  Electives  6  semester  hours 


In  both  of  the  above  minors,  a  student  must  earn  a  minimum  grade 
of  C-  in  each  course  and  have  an  average  of  at  least  2.0  over  all 
the  courses  taken  in  the  minor.  At  least  10  hours  of  the  minor  must 
be  taken  at  West  Chester  University. 
Advanced  Placement  Policy 

A  score  of  three  on  the  Mathematics  Advanced  Placement  Exam  of 
the  College  Boards  will  allow  a  mathematics  major  to  begin  his  or 
her  studies  with  MAT  162.  MAT  110  may  or  may  not  be  taken  at 
the  discretion  of  the  student.  Students  who  are  granted  advanced 
placement  of  4-8  semester  hours  take  4-8  additional  semester  hours 
of  electives  in  mathematics. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MATHEMATICS 

Symbol:  MAT 

MAT  000     Fundamentals  of  Algebra  (3)  A  pre- 
paratory course  to  remediate  basic  arithmetic  and 
algebraic  skills.  Students  scoring  below  450  on 
the  mathematics  section  of  the  Scholastic  Apti- 
tude Test  (SAT)  and  who  do  not  pass  the  mathe- 
matics test  during  their  orientation  program  are 
placed  in  this  course  prior  to  any  other  mathe- 
matics course.  Credits  earned  in  000-level 
courses  do  not  count  towards  the  128  hours  of 
credit  needed  for  graduation.  The  course  must  be 
passed  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better,  or  be 
repeated. 

001     Fundamental  Skills  in  Arithmetic  (3)  A 
course  designed  to  remediate  basic  arithmetic 
skills  and  to  introduce  elementary  algebra.  In 
general,  students  placed  in  MAT  001  have 
scored  below  400  on  the  math  SAT  and  have 
not  taken  high  school  algebra.  Students  are 
being  prepared  to  take  Fundamentals  of  Alge- 
bra (MAT  000)  and  must  earn  at  least  a  C  - 
to  enroll  in  that  course.  A  student  in  MAT 
001  does  not  earn  credit  toward  graduation 
for  this  course.  Elementary  and  special  educa- 
tion majors  in  need  of  algebraic  and/or  arith- 
metic remediation  must  enroll  in  MAT  001. 

101  Mathematics  for  Elementary  Teachers  I 
(3)  Sets;  functions;  logic;  development  of  whole 
numbers,  integers,  and  rationals  (including 
ratios,  proponions,  and  percents);  number  the- 
ory; problem  solving.  For  early  childhood,  ele- 
mentary education,  and  special  education  majors 
only. 

102  Mathematics  for  Elementary  Teachers  II 
(3)  Development  of  real  numbers;  geometry; 
measurement;  probability  and  statistics;  problem 
solving.  For  elementary  education  and  special 
education  majors  only.  PREREQ:  MAT  101. 

103  Introduction  to  Mathematics  (3)  An  intro- 
duction to  the  nature  and  spirit  of  mathematics 
and  its  cultural  significance.  Designed  for  general 
education. 

105     College  Algebra  and  Trigonometry  (3)  A 
unified  course  in  algebra  and  trigonometry. 
PREREQ:  High  school  algebra. 

107  College  Algebra  (3)  A  thorough  treatment 
of  college  algebra.  Topics  covered  include  the 
study  of  polynomial,  exponential,  and  logarith- 
mic functions,  plus  systems  of  linear  equations. 
PREREQ:  SAT  score  of  450  or  above,  or  passing 
a  placement  test,  or  obtaining  at  least  a  C-  in 
MAT  000. 

108  Survey  of  Calculus  for  Business  (3)  An 
intuitive  approach  to  the  calculus  of  one  and  two 
variables  with  emphasis  on  business  applications. 
PREREQ:  MAT  105  or  MAT  107. 


110     Foundations  of  Mathematics  (3)  A 
precalculus  course.  Topics  include  polynomials, 
rational  functions,  inverse  functions,  theory  of 
equations,  circular  functions,  arithmetic  and  geo- 
metric series,  mathematical  induction,  and  com- 
plex numbers. 

121     Statistics  (3)  Basic  concepts  of  statistics. 
Frequency  distributions,  measures  of  central  ten- 
dency and  variability,  probabiUty  and  theroretical 
distribution,  significance  of  differences,  and 
hypothesis  testing.  For  nonmathematics  majors. 
MTL  121     Statistics  Lab  (1)  Introduces  the  stu- 
dent to  using  and  programming  the  computer  to 
solve  statistical  problems  and  to  aid  the  student 
in  understanding  statistical  concepts.  The  BASIC 
language  is  used. 

161  Calculus  1  (4)  Differentia!  and  integral 
calculus  of  real-valued  functions  of  a  single  real 
variable,  with  applications.  PREREQ:  Good 
working  knowledge  of  high  school  algebra  and 
trigonometry  demonstrated  by  a  math  SAT  score 
of  650  or  above,  or  a  C-  or  above  in  MAT  105  or 
MAF  110. 

162  Calculus  II  (4)  Continuation  of  MAT  161 
including  the  study  of  series,  methods  of  integra- 
tion, transcendental  functions,  and  applications 
to  the  sciences.  PREREQ:  MAI  161. 

209     Topics  in  Mathematics  for  the  Elemenury 
Teacher  (3)  Introduction  to  programming  in 
BASIC;  computer  uses  for  the  classroom  teacher; 
descriptive  statistics  with  applications  for  teach- 
ing; and  measurements  of  length,  area,  volume, 
and  temperature  that  focus  on  the  SI  metric  sys- 
tem with  practice  in  the  classroom.  Additional 
topics  in  appUed  mathematics  will  be  considered. 
PREREQ:  MAT  102.  Offered  in  die  fall  semester. 

211  linear  Algebra  (3)  An  introduction  to  lin- 
ear algebra.  Topics  covered  include  matrices,  sys- 
tems of  linear  equations,  vector  spaces,  linear 
transformation,  determinants,  eigenvalues,  spec- 
tral theorem,  and  triangulation. 

212  Algebra  for  Elementary  Teachers  (3)  For- 
mal structure  of  groups,  rings,  and  fields  with 
examples  from  the  elementary  curriculum.  Top- 
ics from  linear  algebra  including  matrices,  deter- 
minants, and  linear  programming.  PREREQ: 
MAF  102. 

221     Applied  Statistics  (3)  Probabilities,  dis- 
crete and  continuous  probabihty  distributions, 
methods  of  estimation,  and  hypothesis  testing. 
PREREQ:  CSC  141  (or  equivalent)  and  MAF  162 
(or  equivalent). 

231  Foundations  of  Geometry  (3)  Geometric 
foundations  from  an  advanced  viewpoint.  Topics 
are  chosen  from  euclidean  and  noneuclidean 
geometries.  Offered  in  the  spring  semester. 

232  Differential  Geometry  (3)  Classical  differ- 
ential geometry  from  a  modem  viewpoint. 


Curves  and  surfaces  and  shape  operators.  Intro- 
duction to  Riemann  geometry.  PREREQ:  MAT 
262. 

233     Geometry  for  Elementary  Teachers  (3) 
Modem  informal  approach  to  two-  and  three- 
dimensional  geometric  figures,  measurement, 
similarity,  congruence,  coordinate  geometry,  and 
the  postulational  method.  PREREQ:  MAT  102. 

261  Calculus  III  (3)  The  calculus  of  several 
variables.  Topics  include  polar  coordinates,  vec- 
tors and  three-dimensional  analytic  geometry, 
differentiation  of  functions  of  several  variables, 
multiple  integrals,  and  line  and  surface  integrals. 
PREREQ:  MAI  161  and  MAI  162. 

262  Calculus  IV  (3)  The  calculus  of  vector- 
valued  functions  of  a  vector  variable.  Derivatives 
and  properties  of  the  derivative  including  the 
chain  rule,  fields  and  conservative  fields,  integra- 
tion, and  Green's,  Stokes',  and  Gauss'  theorems. 
PREREQ:  MAT  261. 

281     Discrete  Mathematics  (4)  This  course  is 
designed  to  provide  a  foundation  for  the  mathe- 
matics used  in  the  theory  and  application  of 
computer  science.  Topics  include  mathematical 
reasoning,  the  notion  of  proof,  logic,  sets,  rela- 
tions and  functions,  counting  techniques,  algo- 
rithmic analysis,  modelling,  cardinality,  recur- 
sions and  induction,  graphs,  and  algebra. 
PREREQ:  MAI  162. 

321     Combinatorics  and  Graph  Theory  (3) 
Introduction  to  set  theory,  graph  theory,  and 
combinatorial  analysis.  Includes  relations, 
cardinality,  elementary  combinatorics,  principles 
of  inclusion  and  exclusion,  recurrence  relations, 
zero-one  matrices,  partitions,  and  Polya's  Theo- 
rem. PREREQ:  CSC  101  or  CSC  141  and  MAT 
262  or  MAI  281. 

343     Differential  Equations  (3)  The  general  the- 
ory of  nth  order,  and  linear  differential  equations 
including  existence  and  uniqueness  criteria  and 
linearity  of  the  solution  space.  General  solution 
techniques  for  variable  coefficient  equations, 
series  solutions  for  variable  coefficient  equations, 
and  study  of  systems  of  linear  equations. 
PREREQ:  MAT  261.  Offered  in  the  spring  semes- 
ter. 

349  Teaching  Mathematics  in  Early  Childhood 
(3)  Concepts,  learning  aids,  syllabi,  texts,  and 
methods  in  early  childhood  mathematical  teach- 
ing. PREREQ:  MAI  101. 

350  Foundations  of  Mathematics  Education 
(3)  Historical  overview  of  mathematics  education 
with  emphasis  on  influential  curricular  pro- 
grams, implications  of  learning  theory,  signifi- 
cance of  research,  identification  of  current  issues, 
organizational  alternatives  for  the  classroom,  and 
evaluation  resources.  PREREQ:  MAT  261. 
Offered  in  the  fall  semester. 

351  Teaching  Mathematics  in  Elementary 
Schools  I  (3)  Concepts,  learning  aids,  syllabi. 


Department  of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 


texts,  and  methods  in  elementary  school  mathe- 
matics. MAT  101-102. 

352    Teaching  Mathematics  in  Elementary 
Schools  II  (3)  Techniques  for  teaching  children 
concepts  such  as  geometry  in  two  and  three 
dimensions,  number  sentences,  graphing,  ratios 
and  percentages,  quantifiers,  etc.  Use  of  labora- 
tory materials  will  be  emphasized.  PREREQ: 
MAT  351.  Offered  in  the  spring  semester 
354    Techniques  of  Teaching  Secondary  School 
Mathematics  (3)  Techniques  used  in  the  presen- 
tation of  specific  mathematical  concepts,  associ- 
ated materiab,  levels  of  questioning,  and  motiva- 
tional devices.  Scope  and  sequence  of  secondary 
mathematics  topics.  Criteria  for  text  evaluation. 
Preview  of  student  teaching.  PREREQ:  MAT  350. 
Usually  offered  in  the  spring  semester. 
357    Teaching  Mathematics  to  the  Handicapped 
(3)  Methods  and  materiab  associated  with  the 
presentation  of  mathematics  to  the  handicapped. 
Emphasis  on  individualization  and  involving 
thinking  skills  at  the  concrete  level.  Evaluative 
and  interpretive  techniques  are  included. 
PREREQ:  MAT  101-102. 

♦  390     Seminar  in  Mathematics  Education  (3) 
Typical  topics  are  remedial  programs,  low 
achiever  programs,  materiab  for  mathematics 
education,  methodology  in  mathematics  educa- 
tion, mathematics  and  the  computer,  theories  of 
mathematics  education,  and  analysis  of  research 
in  mathematics  education.  PREREQ:  MAT  351. 

400  History  of  Mathematics  for  Elementary 
Teachers  (3)  History  and  development  of  ele- 
mentary mathematics  from  primitive  times  to  the 
discovery  of  calculus.  Problems  of  the  period  are 
considered  PREREQ:  MAT  212,  233. 

401  History  of  Mathematics  (3)  Development 
of  mathematics  from  the  Babylonian  era  to  the 
18th  century.  Some  modem  topics  included. 
PREREQ:  MAT  261. 

♦  405     Special  Topics  in  Mathematics  (3)  Top- 
ics announced  at  the  time  of  offering. 
411-412     Algebra  I-Il  (3)  (3)  Abstract  algebra 
Algebraic  systems,  groups,  rings,  integral 
domains,  and  fields.  PREREQ:  MAT  261.  MAT 
411  must  precede  412. 

414    Theory  of  Numbers  (3)  I*roperties  of  inte- 
gers; primes,  factorization,  congruences,  and 
quadratic  reciprocity.  PREREQ:  MAT  262. 
421-422     Mathematical  Statistics  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Probability  theory,  discrete  and  continuous  ran- 
dom variables,  distributions,  and  moment  gener- 
ating functions.  Statistical  sampling  theory,  joint 
and  interval  estimation,  test  of  hypothesis, 
regression,  and  correlation.  PREREQ:  MAT  262. 
MAT  421  must  be  taken  before  422. 
425     Numerical  Analysis  (3)  Numerical  meth- 
ods for  the  approximate  solution  of  applied 
problems.  Interpolation  theory,  curve  fitting, 
approximate  integration,  and  numerical  solution 
of  differential  equations.  PREREQ:  CSC  115  or 
141  and  MAT  262. 

427     Introduction  to  Optimization  Techniques 
(3)  Nature  of  optimization  problems:  determinis- 
tic and  stochastic,  and  discrete  and  continuous. 
Computer  methods  of  solution,  systematic  and 
random  search,  linear  quadratic,  dynamic  pro- 
gramming, and  others.  PREREQ:  CSC  115  or 
141  and  MAT  262. 

432    Topology  (3)  Elements  of  point  set  topol- 
og)'.  Separation  axioms.  Connectedness,  com- 
pactness, and  metrizability.  PREREQ:  MAT  262. 
441-442     Advanced  Calculus  I-II  (3)  (3)  A  rig- 
orous treatment  of  the  calculus  of  a  single  real 
variable.  Topics  in  several  real  variables  and  an 
introduction  to  Lebesque  integration.  PREREQ: 
MAT  262.  MAT  441  must  be  taken  before  442. 


443-444    Applied  Analysis  I-II  (3)  (3)  The 
techniques  of  analysb  applied  to  problems  in  the 
physical  sciences.  Topics  include  partial  differen- 
tial equations,  orthogonal  fimctions.  complex 
integration,  and  conformal  mapping.  PREREQ: 
MAT  262.  MAT  443  must  be  taken  before  444. 
445     Complex  Variables  (3)  Introduction  to 
functions  of  a  complex  variable.  Analytic  func- 
tions, mappings,  differentiation  and  integration, 
power  series,  and  conformal  mappings.  PREREQ: 
MAT  262. 

♦  490     Seminar  in  Mathematics  (3)  Topics  in 
mathematics  selected  for  their  significance  and 
student-instructor  interest.  Independent  study 
and  student  reports,  oral  and  written.  PREREQ: 
Senior  standing  and  consent  of  department 
chairperson. 

493     Mathematical  Modeling  (3)  The  idea  of  a 
mathematical  model  of  a  real  situation.  Tech- 
niques and  rationales  of  model  building.  Exam- 
ples from  the  life,  physical,  and  social  sciences. 
PREREQ:  MAT  262,  343. 

COMPUTER  SCIENCE 
Symbol:  CSC 

*101     Introducbon  to  Computers  (nonmajors) 
(3)  A  course  for  nonmajors  dealing  with  what 
computers  are,  what  they  can  do,  and  how  they 
are  used.  A  brief  history  of  computers  and  the 
societal  implications  of  computer  usage.  A  brief 
introduction  to  a  programming  language  is  pro- 
vided along  with  hands-on  experience  using 
word  processing,  database,  and  spreadsheet  pro- 
grams. 

*115     Introduction  to  Computer  Programming 
(nonmajors)  (3)  The  an  and  science  of  comput- 
ing are  introduced  with  an  emphasis  on  struc- 
tured programming.  Topics  include  looping, 
branching,  arrays,  and  program  development. 
*141     Introduction  to  Computer  Science  (3) 
Introduction  to  the  art  and  science  of  computing 
and  its  appUcations.  Topics  include  structured 
programming,  algorithmic  development,  deci- 
sions, loops,  procedures,  functions,  parameter 
passing,  arrays,  and  files.  Several  programs  are 
written  by  each  student.  At  present,  Pascal  is  the 
language  used.  PREREQ:  Two  years  of  high 
school  algebra. 

142  Apphed  Software  (3)  Techniques  of  pro- 
gram design,  documentation,  and  implementa- 
tion are  studied  using  the  structured  language  in 
CSC  141.  Topics  include  the  number  system, 
internal  data  storage,  recursion,  sets,  strings, 
pointers,  and  different  types  of  files.  PREREQ: 
CSC  141. 

143  Applied  Object-Oriented  Programming  (3) 
A  study  of  the  object-oriented  programming  par- 
adigm using  C  +  -I-  for  students  having  an  intro- 
ductory knowledge  of  C-l-  + .  PREREQ:  CSC 
141.  142,  and  an  introductory  knowledge  of 
C++. 

202  Programming  Language  Lab  —  BASIC  (1) 
Introduction  to  BASIC  with  an  emphasis  on  pro- 
gramming. PREREQ:  CSC  141  and  MAT  161. 
Offered  in  fall  of  even-numbered  years. 

203  Programming  Language  Lab  —  APL  (1) 
Introduction  to  APL  with  an  emphasis  on  pro- 
gramming. PREREQ:  CSC  141  and  MAT  161. 
Offered  in  spring  of  even-numbered  years. 

204  Programming  Language  Lab  —  FORTRAN 
(1)  Introduction  to  FORTRAN  with  an  emphasis 
on  programming.  PREREQ:  CSC  141.  Offered  in 
fall  of  odd-numbered  years. 

206     Progranmiing  Language  Lab  —  MODULA- 
2  (1)  Introduction  to  the  MODULA-2  program- 
ming language.  PREREQ:  CSC  141  and  142. 
Offered  as  needed. 


207  Programming  Language  Lab  —  C  (1) 
Introduction  to  the  C  programming  language. 
PREREQ:  CSC  141,  142,  and  241  (CSC  242  rec- 
ommended). Offered  in  the  fall  semester. 

208  Programming  Language  Lab-Forth  (1) 
Introduction  to  the  Forth  programming  lan- 
guage. PREREQ:  CSC  141.  Offered  as  needed. 

209  Programming  Language  Lab  —  List  Pro- 
cessing (1)  Programmmg  skilb  are  developed  in 
a  list  processing  language  such  as  LOGO  and/or 
USP.  PREREQ:  CSC  141,  142.  Offered  in  spring 
of  odd-numbered  years. 

210  Programming  Language  Lab  —  Software 
Packages  (1)  Skilb  are  developed  in  the  use  of 
various  software  packages,  e.g.,  spreadsheet, 
database,  and  graphing.  PREREQ:  CSC  141. 
Offered  in  the  spring  semester. 

211  Programming  Language  Lab  —  COBOL 
(1)  Programming  skilb  are  developed  in  the 
COBOL  language.  PREREQ:  CSC  141  or  115. 
Offered  as  needed. 

212  Programming  Language  Lab  —  Advanced 
COBOL  (1)  Continuation  of  CSC  211.  PREREQ: 
CSC  211.  Offered  as  needed. 

215  Programming  Language  Lab  -  PROLOG 
(1)  Introduction  to  logic  programming  using 
PROLOG.  PREREQ:  CSC  141  and  142.  Offered 
as  needed. 

216  Programming  Language  Lab  —  MODEL 
204  (1)  Introduction  to  programming  in  a  data 
base  environment  using  Model  204  DBMS. 
PREREQ:  CSC  241  and  321.  Offered  as  needed. 

241  Data  Structures  (3)  A  study  of  data  struc- 
tures and  algorithms  for  their  manipulation 
using  Pascal.  Topics  include  stacks,  queues, 
linked  lists,  trees,  graphs,  muldway  search  trees, 
B-trees,  sorting,  and  searching.  PREREQ:  CSC 

141,  142,  and  MAT  161  (MAT  281  is  recom- 
mended). 

242  Computer  Organization  (3)  Study  of  the 
architecture  of  a  computer  system  and  its  native 
language.  Use  of  assembler  language  and  inter- 
facing with  higher  level  languages  is  included. 
PREREQ:  CSC  141,  142,  and  MAT  161  (CSC 
241  recommended),  or  permission  of  instructor. 
300     Cooperative  Programming  (4)  The  student 
works  in  the  application  programming  section  of 
an  information  systems  group  as  a  junior  pro- 
grammer to  gain  experience  in  programming  and 
implementing  small  projects  of  use  to  the  com- 
pany. PREREQ:  Written  approval  of  the  com- 
puter science  internship  supervisor;  CSC  141, 

142,  241,  and  242;  MAT  161  and  162;  at  least 
two  programming  language  labs;  a  2.50  in  CSC; 
and  a  2.00  in  MAT  (WCU  classroom  courses). 
Offered  summer  pre-session  only. 

311     Object-Oriented  Programming  (3)  A  study 
of  the  object-oriented  paradigm.  An  object- 
oriented  language,  usually  C  +  +  .  b  studied  in 
detail.  Object-oriented  design  methods  are  dis- 
cussed and  applied.  PREREQ:  CSC  141.  142.  242 
(or  a  working  knowledge  of  C). 
321     Database  Management  Systems  (3)  Char- 
acteristics of  generalized  data  management  sys- 
tems; survey  of  widely  used  systems;  techniques 
for  improving  the  interface  between  a  manager 
and  information  needed  to  make  decbions 
through  easy-to-use,  generalized,  reporting  sys- 
tems. PREREQ:  CSC  142,  241.  Offered  in  fall 
and  spring  semesters. 

331     Operating  Systems  I  (3)  Operating  systems 
and  their  user  characteristics.  Maintenance  of  a 
complex  operating  system  with  emphasb  on 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

*  Approved  dbtributive  requirement  course. 


Department  of  Philosophy 


important  tradeoffs  made  in  tuning  the  system. 
Core  and  file  management,  systems  accounting 
and  security,  and  other  user-related  services. 
PREREQ:  MAT  221  and  281;  CSC  241,  242,  and 
361. 

332     Operating  Systems  II  (3)  A  modularly 
constructed  UNIX  operating  system  that  uses  the 
object-oriented  programming  techniques  of  mes- 
sage passing  is  studied.  Topics  covered  are  pro- 
cess control  and  management,  memory  manage- 
ment, file  management,  systems  accounting,  and 
systems  security.  PREREQ:  CSC  331. 

335  Data  Communications  I  (3)  An  overview 
of  the  various  aspects  of  modem  data  and  tele- 
communications. Discussion  of  the  hardware  and 
software  facets  of  the  transmission  of  informa- 
tion m  the  forms  of  voice,  data,  text,  and  image. 
Topics  include  communication  protocob,  trans- 
mission technologies,  analog/digital  transmis- 
sions, communications  media,  public  data  net- 
works, LANS,  and  ISDN.  PREREQ:  CSC  141, 
142,  and  241. 

336  Data  Communications  II  (3)     An  in-depth 
study  of  some  aspects  of  modem  data  communi- 
cation systems.  Discussion  of  the  network  imple- 
mentation and  design,  serial  port  communica- 
tions, and  user  interfaces.  Topics  include  nd 
image,  topics  queuing  theory,  PC  serial  pon 
hardware  and  software,  interrupt  programming, 
PC  communication  protocob,  and  user  interface 
design.  PREREQ;  CSC  335. 

341  Compiler  I  (3)  Translation,  loading,  and 
execution  of  a  higher  level  language.  Syntax 
analysis  of  simple  expressions  and  statements. 
Organization  of  a  compiler,  and  design  and 
implementation  of  a  simple  compiler.  PREREQ: 
CSC  241  and  242,  and  MAT  281. 

342  Compiler  II  (3)  An  in-depth  study  of  syn- 
tax directed  analysb,  error  recovery,  and  code 
optimization.  Compiler  language  features. 
PREREQ;  CSC  341. 


343     Formal  Languages  (3)  A  study  of  the  vari- 
ous types  of  automata  and  their  associated  lan- 
guages. Thb  course  b  designed  to  give  a  student 
an  understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  pro- 
duction system  for  languages  and  their  relation- 
ship to  automata.  PREREQ:  CSC  241  and  242, 
and  MAT  221  and  281.  Offered  in  fall  of  even- 
numbered  years. 

330     Computers  in  Education  (3)  (nonmajors) 
Technical  knowledge  and  skilb  for  successful  use 
of  the  computer  as  a  supportive  tool  for  education 
in  elementary  and  secondary  school  classes. 
Includes  hands-on  experience  using  word  process- 
ing, database,  spreadsheet,  and  elementary  desk- 
top publishing.  Software  evaluation  techniques  are 
learned  using  both  utility  and  subject-matter  soft- 
ware. Usually  offered  in  summer  sessions. 
361     Simulation  (3)  Computer  simulation  using 
logical  and  numerical  modeling  to  represent  sys- 
tems. Use  of  special  languages  to  simulate  actual 
systems.  PREREQ:  CSC  241,  MAT  281  (or  MAT 
262),  and  MAT  221  (or  equivalent). 
371     Computer  Graphics  (3)  Construction  and 
manipulation  of  prototypes  for  graphical  display 
purposes.  PREREQ:  CSC  241,  MAT  281  (or  MAT 
262),  MAT  211  (or  permission  of  instructor). 
Offered  in  spring  semester. 
381     Artificial  Intelligence  (3)  Thorough  study 
and  analysis  of  the  USP  language  in  its  applica- 
tion to  non-numeric  problems  and  symbol  manip- 
ulations. Application  to  gaming,  scene  analysb 
and  pattern  recognition,  lingubtic  analysb  and 
semantic  representation,  image  analysis  and  solu- 
tion spaces,  and  problem  solving  and  attention 
control.  Each  student  b  required  to  take  one  sub- 
stantial problem  and  solve  it  using  the  LISP  lan- 
guage and  the  techniques  of  artificial  intelligence. 
PREREQ:  CSC  241  and  242,  and  MAT  162  and 
281.  Offered  in  fall  of  odd-numbered  years. 
385     Expert  Systems  (3)  Using  the  techniques 
of  artificial  intelligence  and  formal  logic,  meth- 


ods are  developed  to  establish  knowledge  bases 
and  to  extract  inferences.  Topics  covered  are 
backward  and  forward  chaining,  search  methods, 
and  frames  and  slots.  PREREQ:  CSC  core  and 
MAT  281. 

400     Cooperative  Specialty  (9)  Working  for  an 
organization  in  his  or  her  concentration  area,  the 
student  applies  hb  or  her  background  to  real 
problems.  PREREQ:  Written  permbsion  from 
computer  science  internship  supervisor,  a  2.50  in 
CSC,  a  2.00  in  MAT  (in  WCU  classroom 
courses),  five  programming  languages  labs,  and 
completion  of  degree  requirements  during  semes- 
ter of  regbtration. 

402     Software  Engineering  (3)  The  purpose  of 
thb  course  b  to  introduce  students  to  problems 
associated  with  programming  large  projects. 
Emphasb  b  on  project  planning,  requirement 
analysb,  software  quality  assurance,  testing,  and 
maintenance.  Students  work  in  groups  on  a  large 
project.  PREREQ:  CSC  core  and  CSC  300. 

490     Independent  Project  in  Computer  Science 
(1-5)  The  student  designs  and  implements  a  soft- 
ware system.  Project  problems  are  drawn  from 
local  industry  and  university  departments.  A 
computer  science  faculty  member  supervbes 
each  project.  PREREQ:  Permbsion  of  instructor. 

♦  495     Topics  in  Computer  Science  (3) 
Announced  at  time  of  offering.  PREREQ:  Permis- 
sion of  instructor.  Offered  as  needed. 

499     Independent  Study  in  Computer  Science 
(1-4)  In  conjunction  with  the  instructor,  the  stu- 
dent selects  study  topics  via  Uterature  search. 
PREREQ:  Permbsion  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Philosophy 

George  S.  Claghom,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Claghom,  Croddy,  Piatt,  Riukas,  Streveler, 
Struckmeyer 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Banyacski,  Williams 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Ho£&nan,  Porritt 

The  Department  of  Philosophy  offers  two  programs  leading 
to  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  and,  in  cooperation  with  the 
faculty  of  teacher  education,  a  program  leading  to  the  Bache- 
lor of  Science  in  Education. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  PHILOSOPHY  surveys  the  history  of  philosophy, 
explores  its  major  disciplines,  and  focuses  on  selected  topics  of 
perennial  interest.  The  purpose  of  the  program  is  to  develop  the 
organizational,  analytic,  and  expressive  skills  required  for  law 
school,  the  seminary,  graduate  work  in  philosophy,  and  the  wide 
range  of  careers  in  government,  business,  and  industry. 

2.  The  BA.  in  PHILOSOPHY -RELIGIOUS  STUDIES  is  designed  for 
students  planning  on  religious  vocations,  or  as  a  foundation  for 
graduate  work  in  religion  or  cross-cultural  studies.  The  emphasis 
is  on  individual  and  social  expression  of  religion.  Western  and 
non-Westem,  philosophic  implications,  and  fine  arts  applications. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  SOCL^L  STUDIES  is  for 
students  interested  in  pursuing  a  concentration  in  philosophy 


while  earning  state  certification  to  teach  secondary  school  social 
studies. 

Majors  in  the  two  B.A.  programs  should  consult  the  depart- 
ment handbook  and  their  adviser  for  current  requirements. 

During  the  freshman  year,  students  planning  to  pursue  the 
B.S.  in  Education  in  social  studies  should  consult  vdxh  their 
adviser  in  this  department  and  their  professional  studies 
adviser  in  secondary  education. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  BA.  PROGRAMS 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement 

3.  Major  Requirements 

4.  Free  Electives 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  PHILOSOPHY 

1.  Required  Core  Courses 

(PHI  180,  190,  270,  272,  and  499) 

2.  Philosophy  Electives 


44-51  semester  hours 

0-15  semester  hours 

24  semester  hours 

38-60  semester  hours 

15  semester  hours 
9  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS- PHILOSOPHY -REUGIOUS  STUDIES 

1.  Required  Courses  2 1  semester  hours 
(PHI  102,  202,  203,  204,  271,  349,  and 

SOC  344) 

2.  Elective  in  Religious  Studies  3  semester  hours 
As  advised 


Department  of  Philosophy 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCARON  -  SOCIAL  STUDIES: 
CONCENTRATION  E^  PHILOSOPHY 

Students  interested  in  teaching  secondary  school  may  pursue  a  con- 
centration in  philosophy  while  earning  state  certification  and  the 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education.  See  description  under  "Social 
Studies:  B.S.  in  Education,"  pages  115-116. 

Minor  Programs 

Students  may  minor  in  either  philosophy  or  rehgious  studies.  A 
minimum  of  18  semester  hours  is  required.  Elective  courses  are 
selected  in  consultation  with  the  student's  minor  adviser.  Either  of 
these  minors  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 


in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  or  Science  in  bberal  studies 
general  degree  program, 

PhUosophy  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses 
(PHI  101,  150  or  190,  174  or  180,  and  270, 
271,  or  272) 

2.  Philosophy  Electives,  under  advisement 

Religious  Studies  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses 
(PHI  102,  202  or  203,  204  or  205,  and  349) 

2.  Religious  Studies  Electives,  under  advisement     6  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 

18  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
PHILOSOPHY 

Symbol:  PHI 

NOTE:  Only  PHI  412,  436,  and  499  have 
prerequisites.  All  other  philosophy  courses 
are  nonsequential  and  open  to  all  students. 
Not  all  courses  will  be  offered  every  year. 

INTRODUCTORY  COURSES  IN 
PHILOSOPHY  AND  REUGION 

*101     Introduction  to  Philosophy  (3)  The  chief 
problems  and  methods  of  philosophic  thought, 
with  a  survey  of  some  typical  solutions.  The 
place  and  influence  of  philosophy  in  life  today. 
Offered  every  semester. 
#102     Introduction  to  Religious  Studies  (3) 
The  role  of  religion  in  human  life.  Illustrations 
drawn  from  various  traditions,  rituals,  and  belief 
patterns,  both  ancient  and  modem. 
150     Critical  Thinking  and  Problem  Solving  (3) 
Introduction  to  the  principles  of  valid  inference 
and  effective  thinking.  Problem  solving;  puzzles; 
games;  decision  making;  the  syllogism;  probabil- 
ity; logical  fallacies;  and  creative  thinking. 
#174     Principles  of  the  Arts  (3)  Contrasting 
systems  for  the  analysis  and  evaluation  for  works 
of  an  —  literature,  the  visual  arts,  and  music. 
*180     Introduction  to  Ethics  (3)  Great  ethical 
systems  of  history  and  their  application  to  per- 
sonal and  social  life.  The  right  and  the  good;  the 
nature  of  values;  and  critical  ethical  dilemmas. 
207     Philosophies  of  Nonviolence  (3)  The  the- 
ory and  practice  of  nonviolent  action.  Gandhi, 
Tolstoy,  and  King  are  studied,  along  with  lesser- 
known  figures  such  as  Gene  Sharp,  Thomas 
Merton,  and  A.J.  Muste. 

#SSC  200     Introduction  to  Peace  and  Conflict 
Studies  (3)  An  interdisciplinary  study  of  the 
causes  and  functions  of  societal  confhct  and  pro- 
cesses of  controlling  conflict. 

COURSES  IN  THE  HISTORY  OF 
PHILOSOPHY 

"270     History  of  Ancient  Philosophy  (3)  A  sur- 
vey of  the  major  figures  of  ancient  philosophy, 
from  the  pre-Socratic  period  through  Plato, 
Aristode,  the  Epicureans,  and  Stoics,  to  the 
Skeptics  and  Neo-Platonists.  Offered  in  fall 
semester. 

271     History  of  Medieval  Philosophy  (3)  The 
history  of  philosophy  from  the  early  Church 
fathers  to  the  late  Middle  Ages.  St.  Augustine,  St. 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 
'  Culture  Cluster. 


Thomas,  mysticism,  Jewish  and  Mohammedan 
influences,  humanism,  and  the  nse  of  science. 
"272     History  of  Modem  Philosophy  (3)  From 
Descartes  to  Hegel.  The  social,  political,  and  sci- 
entific impact  of  the  philosophers.  Offered  in 
spring  semester. 

"273     19th-century  Philosophy  (3)  Hegel  and 
German  Idealism;  decisive  influences  on  Euro- 
pean and  American  literature  and  thought.  Sur- 
vey of  the  chief  themes  of  Schopenhauer,  Comte. 
Mill,  Spencer.  Marx,  Kierkegaard,  Darwin,  and 
Nietzsche. 

274     Contemporary  Analytic  Philosophy  (3) 
Philosophic  trends  since  1850,  including  the  pro- 
cess philosophy.  Pragmatism,  Positivism,  Exis- 
tentialism, and  the  Analytic  School. 
284    American  Philosophy  (3)  Leaders  in  sci- 
ence, literature,  religion,  and  government  who  have 
shaped  American  thought.  Philosophers  of  Puritan- 
ism, the  Revolution.  Transcendentalism,  and  native 
schoob  of  Realism.  Idealism,  and  Pragmatism. 
"415     Existentialism  (3)  The  rise  and  develop- 
ment of  Existentialism;  chief  exponents,  views  of 
man;  and  influence  on  ethics,  Uterature,  and 
social  action. 

COURSES  ON  OTHER  PHILOSOPHICAL 
TOPICS 

190     Logic  (3)  Introduction  to  symboUc  logic. 
The  nature  of  logical  arguments;  truth-functional 
propositions;  validity,  natural  deduction;  and 
simple  quantification.  Offered  every  semester. 
♦  201     Contemporary  Issues  (3)  Discussion 
and  analysis  of  contemporary  philosophical 
issues  of  particular  concern  to  students.  The 
topic  varies  from  semester  to  semester. 
#330  (also  UN  330)  Introduction  to  Meaning 
(3)  Relationship  between  linguistics  and  philoso- 
phy with  emphasis  on  meaning  in  language. 
Some  issues  in  the  theory  of  meaning  from  both 
linguistics  and  philosophy:  materials  from  each 
field  to  help  solve  these  issues. 
360  (also  LIN  360)  Philosophy  of  Language  (3) 
Questions  of  meaning  in  communication. 
Emphasis  on  contemporary  discussions  of  theo- 
ries of  natural  language. 

#370     Biomedical  Ethics  (3)  A  survey  of  basic 
ethical  theories  with  application  to  contemporary 
ethical  issues.  Rights  and  responsibiUties;  the 
definition  of  Ufe;  and  biomedical  research. 
380    Environmental  Ethics  (3)     Ethical  issues 
and  duties  relating  to  the  natural  environment; 
animal  rights;  and  community  issues,  including 
overpopulation,  pollution,  and  distribution  of 
resources. 

382     Social  Philosophy  (3)  The  relation 
between  man  and  the  state,  especially  as  seen  by 
recent  thinkers.  Justice,  natural  rights,  poUtical 
obUgation,  freedom,  and  equaUty. 


#405     Feminist  Theory  (3)  Designed  to  intro- 
duce and  discuss  basic  questions  in  contempo- 
rary feminist  theory,  the  course  will  explore  dif- 
ferent philosophies  of  feminism,  including  such 
issues  as  motherhood,  intersections  with  other 
theories  of  oppression,  and  body  poUtics. 
PREREQ:  WOS  225  or  permission  of  instructor. 

412  Ethical  Theories  (3)  Advanced  course  in 
ethical  theory,  stressing  applications.  PREREQ: 
PHI  180  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

413  Aesthetic  Theories  (3)  Interpretation  of 
beauty  and  art.  Effects  of  motivation,  and  prob- 
lems in  media  and  in  goals.  A  background  of 
meaning  for  the  evaluation  of  specific  works  of 
painting,  sculpture,  music,  and  architecture. 

414  Philosophy  of  Religion  (3)  Religion  and 
the  rehgious  experience  as  viewed  by  major 
Western  thinkers.  The  existence  of  God.  immor- 
tality, rehgious  knowledge,  evil,  miracles,  and 
science  and  rehgion. 

422     Philosophy  of  Science  (3)  The  nature  of 
scientific  method  and  scientific  theory,  with  ref- 
erence to  presuppositions,  inference,  explanation, 
prediction,  applications,  and  verification. 
436     Symbolic  Logic  (3)  Principles  and  methods 
of  symbolic  logic.  Practice  in  determining  vaUd- 
ity  of  sentential  and  quantificational  arguments. 
The  algebra  of  classes.  PREREQ:  PHI  190  or  per- 
mission of  the  instructor. 

483     Philosophy  of  History  (3)  Classic  philoso- 
phies of  history,  including  those  of  Augustine, 
Vico,  Hegel,  Marx.  Spengler,  Toynbee,  and 
Collingwood.  Definitions  of  civilization,  norms 
of  progress  and  decadence,  determinism  and 
indeterminism,  causality,  and  pattern. 

COURSES  IN  REUGION 

202  Religions  of  the  West  I  (3)  A  survey  of 
the  thought  of  Christianity  and  Judaism  to  the 
year  500. 

203  Religions  of  the  West  II  (3)  A  survey  of 
the  thought  of  Christianity,  Islam,  and  Judaism, 
from  the  year  500  to  the  present.  Emphasis  on 
theological  development,  with  attention  to  social, 
economic,  and  historical  factors. 

204  Philosophies  and  Religions  of  India  (3) 
The  rehgious  and  philosophical  heritage  of  India, 
from  Vedic  times  to  the  present.  Examination  of 
major  classics,  such  as  Rig  Veda,  Upanishads, 
Bhagavad-Gita,  and  Yoga-sutras;  recent  writers 
such  as  Tagore,  Gandhi,  and  Radhakrishnan. 

205  Philosophies  and  Religions  of  the  Far 
East  (3)  A  survey  of  Far  Eastern  philosophy, 
rehgion,  and  scientific  thought.  Confucianism, 
Taoism,  and  the  various  schools  of  Mahayana 
Buddhism,  including  Zen,  are  given  primary 
emphasis. 


Department  of  Physics  and  Pre-Engineering  Program 


349     Ideas  of  the  Bible  (3)  An  introduction  to 
Biblical  concepts  of  revelation,  God,  man,  nature, 
and  redemption  in  light  of  Hebrew  and  Greek 
thought. 

414    Philosophy  of  Religion  (3)  See  "Courses  in 
Philosophical  Topics,"  above. 


INDEPENDENT  STUDIES  AND 
SEMINARS 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  (1-3) 

♦  499     Philosophic  Concepts  and  Systems  (3) 
An  intensive  study  of  the  major  works  of  one 
philosopher,  stressing  themes  and  comparison 


with  other  views.  Required  of  all  philosophy 
majors.  PREREQ:  Six  hours  of  philosophy  and 
senior  standing,  or  permission  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Physics  and 
Pre-Engineering  Program 

Harold  L.  Skelton,  Chairperson 
PROFESSORS:  Smith 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Hawkes,  Kaplan,  Martens, 
Nicastro,  Skelton 

INSTRUCTOR:  Holder 

The  Department  of  Physics  offers  three  undergraduate  degree 
programs:  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  physics,  the  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Education,  and  a  cooperative  five-year  engineering 
program  with  Pennsylvania  State  University. 
For  admission  to  the  physics  program,  most  students  should 
have  completed,  in  addition  to  the  general  University 
requirements,  one  year  each  of  high  school  chemistry  and 
physics,  and  a  minimum  of  three  years  of  mathematics, 
including  algebra  and  trigonometry.  Any  student  with  a  defi- 
ciency must  complete  ENG  120  and  MAT  161  with  grades  of 
C-  or  better  to  be  admitted  to  the  program. 
West  Chester  has  a  chapter  of  the  national  physics  honor 
society,  Sigma  Pi  Sigma. 
A  minor  program  in  physics  also  is  available. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE -PHYSICS 

This  program  is  designed  as  preparation  for  graduate  school  or 
careers  in  government  or  industry.  The  curriculum  includes  a 
strong  foundation  in  mathematics  and  the  humanities.  A  wide 
choice  of  elecrives  in  the  program  provides  the  flexibility  to  develop 
a  minor  in  an  area  of  interest. 

Requirements 

A.  PffYSICS:  PffY  170,  180,  240,  300,  310,  320,  330, 

350,  420,  and  430;  an  additional  six  credits  in  physics  must 
be  chosen  from  available  electives  at  or  above  tbe  300  level 

B.  MATHEMATICS:  CSC  141;  MAT  161,  162,  261,  262,  and  343 

C.  CHEMISTRY:  CHE  103  and  104;  CRL  103  and  104 
Candidates  for  the  B.S.  in  physics  must  satisfy  a  foreign  language 
requirement  at  the  102  level.  In  physics,  the  recommended  lan- 
guages are  French,  German,  or  Russian. 

Students  must  maintain  a  GPA  of  2.00  or  greater  in  their  physics 
courses.  Transfer  students  must  take  15  or  more  physics  credits  at 
West  Chester  at  the  300  level  and  above  for  graduation. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  -  PHYSICS 

The  B.S.  program  in  physics  education  provides  a  solid  background 
in  physics,  mathematics,  and  related  science  for  a  teaching  career  at 
the  secondary  level  and  leads  to  certification  to  teach  physics  in  the 
public  schoob  of  Pennsylvania. 
1.  Physics  Concentration  Requirements 

A.  PHYSICS:  PHY  170,  180,  240,  300,  310,  320,  330,  and  410 
or  430 

B.  MATHEMATICS:  MAT  161,  162,  261,  and  MAT  343  or  PHY 
370 


C  SCIENCES:  CHE  103  and  104;  CRL  103  and  104;  SCB  350; 
and  an  elective  in  astronomy,  biology,  and  computer  science 
2.  Professional  Education  Requirements  (See  page  112.) 

Students  must  maintain  a  GPA  of  2.00  or  greater  in  their  physics 
courses.  Transfer  students  must  take  nine  or  more  physics  credits  at 
West  Chester  at  the  300  level  and  above  for  graduation. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE -PHYSICS/BACHELOR  OF 
SCIENCE  -  ENGINEERING 

The  Department  of  Physics  offers  a  cooperative  engineering  program 
with  Pennsylvania  State  University,  requiring  three  years  at  West 
Chester  University  plus  nvo  years  at  Permsylvania  State  University 
for  study  in  engineering.  At  the  end  of  this  period,  the  student 
receives  two  baccalaureate  degrees:  a  B.S.  in  physics  from  West 
Chester  and  a  B.S.  in  engineering  from  Penn  State. 
Admission  to  Pennsylvania  State  University  is  contingent  on  a  rec- 
ommendation from  the  Department  of  Physics  and  the  student  hav- 
ing maintained  the  overall  average  for  the  specific  engineering 
major. 

Students  who  have  completed  a  bachelor's  degree  are  not  eligible 
for  transfer  to  Penn  State  in  this  program. 
Areas  of  study  in  engineering  are: 


Aerospace  Engineering 
Agricultural  Engineering 
Ceramic  Science 
Chemical  Engineering 
Civil  Engineering 
Electrical  Engineering 
Engineering  Science 
Environmental  Engineering 


Industrial  Engineering 
Mechanical  Engineering 
Metallurgy 
Mining  Engineering 
Nuclear  Engineering 
Petroleum  and  Natural  Gas 
Engineering 


Physics  Concentration  Requirements 

A.  PHYSICS:  PHY  115,  116,  170,  180,  240,  260,  300,  310,  320; 
an  additional  six  credits  in  physics  at  or  above  the  300  level 
must  be  chosen,  depending  on  the  engineering  area  selected 

B.  MATHEMATICS:  CSC  141;  MAT  161,  162,  261,  262,  and  343 

C.  CHEMISTRY:  CHE  103  and  104;  CRL  103  and  104 

In  addition,  students  intending  to  enroll  in  chemical  engineering 
must  have  CHE  231  and  232;  in  mining  engineering,  ESL  201,  and 
ESS  101  and  302;  and  in  petroleum  and  natural  gas  engineering, 
ESL  201,  and  ESS  101  and  203.  Students  intending  to  enroll  in 
aerospace,  electrical,  or  nuclear  engineering  must  take  PHY  370  and 
PHY  420. 

Minor  in  Physics  19  semester  hours 

The  program  can  be  used  as  technical  preparation  to  complement 
work  in  other  scientific  or  nonscientific  areas,  e.g.,  business  majors 
interested  in  careers  in  technologically  oriented  industries,  majors 
interested  in  technical  or  scientific  sales,  English  majors  interested 
in  technical  writing,  or  social  science  majors  interested  in  the  area 
of  energy  and  the  environment. 

Required:  PHY  130  and  140,  or  PHY  170  and  180;  also  PHY  240.  In 
addition,  students  must  select  eight  credits  of  physics  courses  at  the 
300  level  or  above,  chosen  under  advisement  with  the  Department 
of  Physics.  Transfer  students  must  take  a  minimum  of  six  credits  at 
West  Chester  at  the  300  level  or  above.  A  2.00  GPA  or  better  must 
be  maintained  in  all  physics  courses. 


Pre-Medical  Program 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
PHYSICS 

Symbol:  PHY 

(3,2)  represents  three  hours  of  lecture  and  two 

hours  of  lab. 

♦  100     Elements  of  Physical  Science  (3)  A  study 

of  motion,  energy,  light,  and  some  aspects  of 

modem  physics. 

110    Acoustics  for  Speech  and  Hearing  (3) 

Nontechnical  introduction  to  acoustics.  Waves 

and  acoustical  wave  propagation,  wave 

superposition,  the  acoustical  spectrum,  human 

voice  tract  as  a  sound  source,  and  the  human  ear 

as  a  receptor 

115  Engineering  Graphics  I  (1)  Use  and  prepa- 
ration of  engineering  drawings.  Topics  include 
the  use  of  instruments,  linework,  geometric  con- 
struction, lettering,  four  types  of  projections, 
dimensioning,  and  sections. 

116  Engineering  Graphics  II  (1)  A  continua- 
tion of  PHY  115,  to  include  topics  such  as  lay- 
out, detail,  and  assembly  drawings,  develop- 
ments, auxiliary  drawings,  various  types  of 
drafting,  machine  tool  processes,  and  computer 
drafting  PREREQ   PHY  115. 

tl30     General  Physics  I  (4)  An  introductory, 
noncalculus,  physics  course.  Mechanics  of  solids 
and  fluids,  wave  motion,  heat  and  temperature, 
thermodynamics,  and  kinetic  theory.  (3,2) 
PREREQ:  Algebra  and  trigonometry. 
tl40     General  Physics  II  (4)  An  extension  of 
PHY  130.  Electricity  and  magnetism,  geometrical 
and  physical  optics,  and  modem  physics.  (3,2) 
PREREQ:  PHY  130. 

tl70     Physics  I  (4)  An  introductory  course. 
Mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids,  heat,  tempera- 
ture, thermodynamics,  the  kinetic  theory,  and 
wave  motion.  (3,2,  one-hour  recitation) 
PREREQ:  MAT  161. 

tl80    Physics  U  (4)  An  extension  of  PHY  170.  Elec- 
tricity and  magnetism,  geometrical  and  physical 
optics,  and  modem  physics.  (3,2,  one-hour  recita- 
tion) PREREQ:  PHY  170.  CONCURRENT:  MAT  162. 
240     Introduction  to  Modem  Physics  (3)  An 
atomic  view  of  electricity  and  radiation,  atomic 
theory,  special  relativity  theory.  X-rays,  radioac- 
tivity, nuclear  fission,  and  introductory  quantum 
mechanics.  PREREQ:  PHY  140  or  180,  MAT  162. 


260     Engineering  Statics  (3)  Composition  and 
resolution  of  forces,  equivalent  force  systems, 
equilibrium  of  particles  and  rigid  bodies, 
centroids  and  center  of  gravity,  analysis  of  sim- 
ple structures,  internal  forces  in  beams,  friction, 
moments  and  products  in  inertia,  and  methods 
of  virtual  work  PREREQ:  PHY  130  or  170,  and 
MAT  162. 

300     Mechanics  (3)  Particle  kinematics,  dynam- 
ics, energy,  and  momentum  consideranons;  oscil- 
lations; central  force  motion;  accelerated  reference 
frames;  rigid  body  mechanics;  Lagrangian  me- 
chanics. PREREQ:  PHY  140  or  180,  and  MAT 
162. 

310     Intermediate  Physics  Laboratory  I  (2)  A 
course  to  familiarize  students  with  laboratory 
equipment  and  methods.  PREREQ:  PHY  240. 
320     Intermediate  Physics  Laboratory  11  (2)  A 
continuation  of  PHY  310.  PREREQ:  PHY  310. 
330     Electronics  I  (3)  Emphasis  is  divided 
between  theory  and  experiment.  The  course 
begins  with  a  brief  review  of  resisnve  and  RC  volt- 
age dividers.  Electronic  circuits  studied  include 
basic  operational  amplifiers,  timers,  instrumentation 
amplifiers,  logic  circuits,  flip  flops,  counters,  and 
timers.  (2,2)  PREREQ:  PHY  140  or  180  and  MAT 
161,  or  permission  of  instructor 
340     Fundamentals  of  Radioisotope  Techniques 
(3)  Biological,  chemical,  environmental,  and  phys- 
ical effects  of  nuclear  radiation  Radiation  detec- 
tion instrumentation  and  radio  tracer  methodol- 
ogy (2,2)  PREREQ  CHE  104.  and  PHY  140  or  180. 
350     Heat  and  Thermodynamics  (3)  Equations 
of  state,  first  and  second  laws  of  thermodynam- 
ics, ideal  and  real  gases,  entropy,  and  statistical 
mechanics.  PREREQ  OR  CONCURRENT:  PHY 
240  and  MAT  262. 

370     Mathematical  Physics  (3)  Selected  topics 
in  mathematics  applied  to  problems  in  physics, 
ordinary  differential  equations,  vector  calculus, 
Fourier  analysis,  matrix  algebra,  and  eigenvalue 
problems.  PREREQ:  MAT  261,  and  PHY  140  or  180. 
400    Analytical  Dynamics  (3)  Wave  propaga- 
tion, Lagrange's  equations  and  Hamilton's  prin- 
ciple, rigid  body  motion,  and  special  relativity. 
PREREQ:  PHY  300  and  MAT  343. 
410     Optics  (3)  Geometrical  and  physical 
optics.  Reflection  and  refraction  at  surfaces, 
lenses,  interference  and  di&action,  and  polariza- 


tion. PREREQ:  PHY  140  or  180.  PREREQ  OR 
CONCURRENT:  MAT  262. 
420    Atomic  Physics  and  Quantum  Mechanics 
(3)  Fundamental  concepts  of  quantum  mechan- 
ics with  application  to  atomic  physics.  Topics 
covered  are  Bohr  model,  Schrodinger  equation 
with  appUcations,  perturbation  theory,  helium 
atom,  and  scattering  theory.  PREREQ:  PHY  240 
and  300,  and  MAT  343  or  PHY  370. 
430     Electricity  and  Magnetism  (3)  Electrostatics 
of  point  charges  and  extended  charge  distribu- 
tions, fields  in  dielectrics,  and  magnetic  fields  due 
to  steady  currents.  Ampere's  Law  and  induced 
emfs.  Topics  in  electromagnetic  waves  as  time 
permits.  PREREQ:  PHY  300,  MAT  343,  or  ?m  370. 
440     Microcomputer  Electronics  (3)  Laboratory 
study  of  special  circuits,  integrated  circuits, 
microcomputers,  and  microcomputer  interface 
applications.  PREREQ:  PHY  330. 
430    Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  I  (1)  A 
course  to  familiarize  students  with  contemporary 
laboratory  equipment  and  methods. 
460    Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  II  (1)  A 
continuation  of  PHY  450. 
470     Seminar  in  Physics  (1)  Oral  and  written 
reports  on  approved  topics.  Variation  in  topics 
from  year  to  year,  depending  on  the  interest  and 
needs  of  students. 

♦  480     Special  Topics  (1-3)  Topics  of  special 
interest  to  be  presented  once  or  twice.  PREREQ: 
To  be  specified  by  the  instructor.  Course  may  be 
repeated  by  student  for  credit  any  number  of 
times  when  different  topics  are  presented. 
490     Introduction  to  Research  (1-9)  Specific 
problems  in  consultation  with  the  faculty 
adviser.  PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor. 
#SCB  210    The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Universe 
(3)  An  interdisciplinary  course  that  presents  the 
theory  and  evidence  for  the  first  three  minutes  of 
the  universe,  and  formation  of  the  stars,  galaxies, 
planets,  organic  molecules,  and  the  genetic  basis  of 
organic  evolution.  PREREQ:  High  school  or  coUege 
courses  in  at  least  two  sciences. 


♦  Approved  distributive  requirement  course, 
t  PHY  170-180  and  PHY  130-140:  Approved 

two-semester  requirement  substitutes. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

♦  Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Pre-Medical  Program 

Philip  Rudnick,  Director 
Elise  Triano,  Assistant  Director 

COMMITTEE  MEMBERS 

Melissa  Cichowicz,  Chemistry 
Marianne  Eleuterio,  Biology 
Andrea  Fishman,  English 
Michael  Moran,  Chemistry 
Anthony  Nicastro,  Physics 
Philip  Rudnick,  Chemistry 
Paul  Streveler,  Philosophy 
Elise  Triano,  Biology 
Ralph  Vemo,  Mathematics 

The  pre-medical  program  prepares  students  for  application  to 
the  health  professional  schools  of  medicine,  dentistry,  and 


veterinary  medicine,  and  for  careers  in  biomedical  research. 
Supervised  by  a  Pre-Medical  Committee,  the  program  con- 
sists of  an  indi'vidualized  selection  of  course  work,  personal 
counseling  beginning  in  the  freshman  year,  and  junior-year 
biomedical  research  at  an  outside  research  institute.  Students 
with  majors  other  than  chemistry-biology  (pre-medical)  are 
required  to  have  two  ad'visers  —  one  from  their  major  field 
and  one  from  the  Pre-Medical  Committee. 
Because  of  the  intense  competition  for  health  professional 
school  admission,  only  academically  talented  and  highly  moti- 
vated students  should  apply  to  the  pre-medical  program.  Appli- 
cants are  selected  on  the  basis  of  their  potential  for  achievement 
in  the  program.  Students  in  the  program  must  maintain  a  mini- 
mum 3.00  Grade  Point  Average  and  the  high  standards  of  per- 
formance necessary  for  health  professional  school  admission. 

It  is  essential  for  incoming  students  contemplating  a  medical 
career  to  register  with  the  Pre-Medical  OfiSce  immediately  upon 
matriculation  at  the  University.  Similarly,  it  is  essential  for  sru- 


Department  of  Ps>cholog)- 


dents  who  at  some  later  time  develop  an  interest  in  a  medical 
career  to  register  with  the  Pre-Medical  OfiSce.  Students  who  fail 
to  consult  with  the  Pre-Medical  Office  prior  to  taking  the  Medi- 
cal College  Admissions  Test  (MCAT)  or  who  fail  to  report  the 
results  of  any  MCAT  exam  to  the  Pre-Medical  Office  forfeit  the 
privilege  of  receiving  a  Pre-Medical  Committee  letter  of  evalua- 
tion when  they  apply  to  medical  school. 

All  West  Chester  students  who  wish  to  apply  to  a  health  pro- 
fessional school  should  ask  their  professors  to  forward  letters 
of  evaluation  to  the  Pre-Medical  Committee  and  should  pro- 
cess their  applications  through  the  committee.  The  committee 
will  send  a  composite  letter  of  evaluation  to  the  professional 
school.  Except  for  special  circumstances,  no  letters  of  recom- 
mendation should  be  sent  directly  to  professional  schools. 
Further  information  is  available  in  the  Pre-Medical  Ofifice, 
Room  161  Schmucker  Science  Center. 

CONCENTRATION  AND  CORE  REQUIREMENTS  FOR 
CHEMISTRY-BIOLOGY  (PRE-MEDICAL)  CURRICULUM 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  CHEMISTRY-BIOLOGY  (PRE- 
MEDICAD 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  29  semester  hours 
Includes  six  semester  hours  of  EngHsh  composition 

2.  Biology  24  semester  hours 
BIO  110,  217,  230,  357,  448,  and  468 

3.  Chemistry  30  semester  hours 
CHE  103,  104,  231,  232,  321,  345,  and  471 

CRL  103,  104,  232,  and  321  or  471 

4.  Concentration  Elective,  Biology  or  Chemistry     3  semester  hours 

5.  Mathem'itics  13-14  semester  hours 
CSC  115,  141  or  equi\'alent 

MAT  121,  161 

MAT  162 

(Students  who  start  with  MAT  105  and  participate 

in  a  full-time,  one-semester  research  internship  may 

substitute  MAF  105  and  161  for  MAT  161  and  162.) 

8  semester  hours 


6.  Physics 
PHY  130  or  170 
PHY  140  or  180 

7.  Free  Electives 
See  ako  Chemistry. 


20-21  semester  hours 


Department  of  Psychology 

Edward  Pollak,  Chairperson 

Philip  Duncan,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Crawford,  Duncan,  Kumar,  Means,  Moore, 
Morse,  Pollak,  J.  Poner,  L.  Porter,  Sands,  Smith, 
Treadwell 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Shinehouse 

ASSISX\NT  PROFESSORS:  Bloom,  Bonifazi,  DeSantis, 
Mahlstedt,  McConatha,  Renner 

ADJUNCT  PROFESSOR  Pekala 

The  Department  of  Psychology  offers  bachelor's  degrees  in  three 
areas  of  concentration. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  PSYCHOLOGY  prepares  the  student  to  understand 
those  variables,  such  as  heredit)',  learning,  and  the  environment, 
which  shape  and  change  behavior.  Careers  are  possible  in  clinics, 
guidance  centers,  industry,  hospitals,  schools,  and  government.  Stu- 
dents should  consult  their  advisers  concerning  recommended  prepa- 
rations for  specific  career  goals.  This  program  will  also  prepare  the 
student  for  postgraduate  study. 

2.  The  B.A.  in  PSYCHOLOGY:  COGNITIVE  REHAB E-ITATI ON 
CONCENTRATION  provides  training  for  cognitive  rehabilitation 
therapists.  Such  therapists  work  with  patients  who  have  suffered 
brain  trauma  following  an  accident  or  stroke.  The  therapist  will 
carry  out  a  treatment  program  designed  to  facilitate  the  recovery  of 
cognitive  functions  such  as  memory,  reasoning,  judgment,  etc.  The 
cognitive  rehabilitation  therapist  typically  works  under  the  supervi- 
sion of  a  doctoral-level  clinical  neuropsychologist.  This  program 
also  will  prepare  the  student  for  postgraduate  study. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  program  prepares  students  to  teach  the 
social  sciences  in  the  secondary  schools. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  PSYCHOLOGY 

1.  General  Education  Requirements,  see 

pages  35-38.  47-51  semester  hours 

Includes  PSY  100.  MAT  103  is  required.  BIO 
100  and  CSC  101  are  strongly  recommended 
for  partial  completion  of  the  science  require- 
ment. 


2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement,  see 

pages  37-38.  0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Department  Requirements  36  semester  hours 

A.  Required  Ps>'chology  Courses  (21  semester  hours) 
PSY  245,  246,  and  400.  Students  must 

choose  two  courses  from  Group  I  and  two 
courses  from  Group  II. 
Group  I 

PSY  254,  257,  or  375 
Group  II 

PSY  363,  464,  or  470 

B.  Psychology  Electives  (15  semester  hours) 
These  may  be  selected  from  among  any 
of  the  departmental  offerings. 

4.  Department  Free  Electives  29-48  semester  hours 
These  electives  are  in  addition  to  the  nine 

semester  hours  of  electives  listed  under  the 
General  Education  Requirements  and  may  be 
selected  from  among  any  of  the  University 
course  offerings. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  PSYCHOLOGY:  COGNITIVE 
REHABILITAnON  CONCENTRATION 

1.  General  Education  Requirements  47-51  semester  hours 
Includes  PSY  100.  MAT  103  or  a  higher 

MAT  course  is  required.  BIO  100  and  CSC 
101  are  strongly  recommended  for  partial 
completion  of  the  science  requirement. 

2.  Foreign  Language'Culture  Requirement  0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Departmental  Requirements  39  semester  hours 
PSY  245,  246,  254,  257,  363,  375,  400,  441, 

442,  464,  470,  475,  and  480 

4.  Department  of  Special  Education  Requirements  6  semester  hours 
EDA  101  Psychology  of  the  Mentally  Handicapped 

EDA  102  Psychology  of  the  Physically  Handicapped 

5.  The  following  special  education  courses  are 
not  required;  however,  it  is  strongly  recom- 
mended that  the  student  consider  them  when 
selecting  free  electives. 

EDA  220  Behavior  Management 

EDA  350  Life  Curriculum  and  Methods 


Department  of  Psychology 


EDA  360  Diagnostic  and  Prescriptive  Teaching 
SPP  340  Development  and  Disorders  of  Language 

Free  Electives 

These  electives  are  in  addition  to  the  nine 

semester  hours  of  electives  listed  under  the 

General  Education  Requirements  (see  pages 

35-38  in  the  catalog)  and  may  be  selected 

from  among  any  of  the  University  course 

offerings. 


17-36  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCAnON- SOCIAL 
STUDIES;  PSYCHOLOGY 

Psychology  Requirements  18  semester  hours 

PSY  245,  254,  257,  375,  400,  and  464 

See  description  under  "Social  Studies:  B.S.  in  Education, " 

pages  115-116. 

Minor  in  Psychology  18  semester  hours 

After  taking  PSY  100,  the  student  will  choose  15  additional  hours 
in  consultation  with  the  Department  of  Psj'chology's  minor  adviser. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS  PSYCHOLOGY 

Symbol:  PSY 

*100     Introduction  to  Psychology  (3)  Introduc- 
tion to  the  scientific  study  of  behavior.  The  mul- 
tiple bases  of  human  behavior  with  emphasis  on 
the  learning  process.  Basic  concepts,  principles, 
and  methodology.  Students  may  be  required  to 
become  familiar  with  an  ongoing  research  study 
in  psychology  as  an  out-of-class  assignment. 
Offered  fall  and  spring  semesters. 
210     Developmental  Psychology.  Lifespan  (3) 
A  survey  of  research  findings  and  theoretical 
issues  related  to  developmental  processes  from 
the  prenatal  phase  to  senescence.  PREREQ:  PSY 
100.  Majors  are  advised  to  take  PSY  382  and/or 
PSY  384  rather  than  PSY  210. 

245  Research  Methods  and  Statistics  I  (3) 
Experiments  on  selected  problems  with  emphasis 
on  techniques  in  the  design  and  execution  of 
experiments,  and  on  the  application  of  elemen- 
tary techniques  to  the  collection,  analysis,  and 
interpretation  of  data.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 
Offered  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

246  Research  Methods  and  Statistics  II  (3) 
Continuation  of  PSY  245  with  emphasis  on  more 
advanced  experimental  designs  and  statistical 
techniques.  RECOMMENDED  PREREQ:  PSY 
245.  Offered  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

254    Social  Psychology  (3)  The  study  of  the 
ways  in  which  the  individual  is  affected  by  the 
actual,  imagined,  or  implied  presence  of  others. 
PREREQ:  PSY  100.  Offered  fall  and  spring 
semesters. 

256  Study  of  Personality  C3)  An  introduction 
to  the  dynamics  of  personality  functioning.  Top- 
ics such  as  seff-esteem,  stress,  conflict,  frustra- 
tion, and  defense  will  be  explored.  PREREQ:  PSY 
100. 

257  Theories  of  Personality  (3)  A  course  in 
personaUty  that  examines  the  theories  and  writ- 
ings of  Freud,  Jung,  Adler,  Fromm,  Erikson, 
Rogers,  and  other  major  personality  theorists. 
PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

265     IndustrialyOrganizational  Psychology  (3) 
A  basic  course  for  business  majors  and  others 
interested  in  the  psychology  of  the  workplace. 
Emphasis  on  the  theoretical  developments  in 
psychology  as  these  relate  to  the  study  of  people 
in  organizations  and  industry.  Offered  fall  and 
spring  semesters. 

291     Psychological  Techniques  (3)  A  survey  of 
a  variety  of  psychological  techniques  that  are 
applied  in  the  process  of  observing,  diagnosing, 
and  changing  problematic  human  behavior. 
PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

325     Psychological  Testing  and  Measurement 
(3)  Principles  of  psychological  measurement 
including  standardization,  scale  transformation. 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 


reliability,  vaUdity,  and  item  analysis.  Use  of 
tests  for  the  solution  of  problems  in  industrial, 
clinical,  and  educational  settings.  PREREQ:  PSY 
100. 

327     Behavior  Modification  (3)  A  survey  of  the 
principles  and  practices  employed  in  inducing 
behavioral  changes  in  clinic,  institution,  agency, 
and  school  settings.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 
335     Animal  Behavior  (3)  The  evolution  and 
adaptiveness  of  behavior.  Emphasis  on  physio- 
logical, genetic,  and  learning  processes  underly- 
ing animal  behavior.  PREREQ:  PSY  100,  or  BIO 
100  or  110,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
350     Motivation  (3)  A  study  of  drives,  motives, 
and  emotions  as  determinants  of  behavior.  Physi- 
ological and  social  aspects  of  motivation  will  be 
explored  with  some  attention  given  to  pathologi- 
cal factors.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

362  History  and  Systems  of  Psychology  (3)  An 
integrated  overview  of  the  history  of  psychology 
as  well  as  the  systems,  theories,  and  fundamental 
issues  with  which  psychologists  have  concerned 
themselves  in  the  past,  recent,  and  current  stages 
of  the  science.  PREREQ:  PSY  100;  PHI  101  rec- 
ommended. 

363  Psychology  of  Learning  (3)  Basic  laws  and 
theories  of  learning.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

365     Psychology  of  Women  (3)  A  study  of  the 
behavior  and  experience  of  women.  Biological, 
cultural,  interpersonal,  and  intrapersonal  deter- 
minants of  women  s  actions,  thoughts,  and  feel- 
ings will  be  explored.  PREREQ:  PSY  100.  Offered 
fall  and  spring  semesters. 

375    Abnormal  Psychology  (3)  The  nature  and 
manifestations  of  normaUty  and  abnormality, 
mental  mechanisms  and  symptoms,  psycho- 
neuroses,  psychoses,  the  psychopathic  personal- 
ity, and  mental  deficiency.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 
Junior  or  senior  standing  recommended.  Offered 
fall  and  spring  semesters. 

382     Developmental  Psychology  of  Infancy, 
Childhood  and  Adolescence  (3)  Study  of  the 
normal  child  from  conception  to  puberty. 
Emphasis  on  current  theoretical  issues  involved 
in  the  effects  of  early  experience  and  environ- 
ment. PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

384     Developmental  Psychology  of  Adulthood 
and  Aging  (3)  Study  of  psychological  develop- 
ment during  the  mature  years  up  to  and  includ- 
ing death  and  dying.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 
390     Principles  of  Counseling  and  Psychother- 
apy (3)  A  review  of  theoretical  assumptions 
underpinning  various  approaches  to  counseling 
and  psychotherapy  with  particular  reference  to 
comparative  outcome  data.  PREREQ:  PSY  256, 
or  PSY  257,  or  PSY  375. 
400     Senior  Seminar  in  Psychology  (3) 
Advanced  topics  in  psychology.  A  written  and/or 
oral  presentation  describing  and  analyzing  cur- 


rent issues  in  psychology.  Required  of  all  psy- 
chology majors.  Offered  fall  and  spring  semes- 
ters. 

♦  410     Research  in  Psychology  (1-3)  Special 
research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  psy- 
chology. Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ:  Permis- 
sion of  department  chairperson.  Offered  fall  and 
spring  semesters. 

413  Psychodrama  I  (3)  This  class  is  designed 
as  an  introductory  course,  integrating  theory  and 
practice  of  psychodrama  as  a  psychotherapeutic 
modality.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  understanding 
the  basic  psychodramatic  and  sociometric  tech- 
niques from  a  theoretical  perspective  %vith 
emphasis  placed  on  how  to  use  these  basic  tech- 
niques in  appUed  situations.  PREREQ:  Permis- 
sion of  instructor. 

414  Psychodrama  H  (3)  Continuation  of  PSY 
413  at  an  advanced  level.  Integrating  cUnical 
sociometry,  auxiliary  ego  techniques,  the  social 
atom  concept,  warm-up  techniques,  role  training, 
and  student  directing.  Instruction  will  be  both 
didactic  and  experiential,  integrating  the  theoret- 
ical and  applied  components  of  psychodrama 
and  sociometry  as  a  therapeutic  modality. 
PREREQ:  PSY  413. 

430     Human  Sexual  Behavior  (3)  An  mtensive 
study  of  those  variables  under  which  human  sex- 
ual behavior  functions.  Research  from  sociologi- 
cal and  medical  studies  is  integrated  with  psy- 
chological knowledge.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 
Offered  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

441  Field  Experience  in  Psychology  I  (3)  A 
work-study  program  in  an  educational  or  mental 
health  facility  under  joint  supervision  of  the 
instructor  and  the  staff  psychologist  of  the  field 
institution.  Offered  fall  and  spring  semesters. 
Permission  of  instructor  required. 

442  Field  Experience  in  Psychology  II  (3) 
Continuation  of  PSY  441. 

443  Psychology  of  Group  Processes  (3)  An 
exploration  of  the  dynamics  of  interpersonal 
behavior  in  small  groups.  Theory  applied  to 
practice  in  class.  PREREQ:  PSY  100;  permission 
of  instructor  recommended. 

445     Organizational  Development  (3)  The 
study  of  human  behavior  in  task  group  and  orga- 
nizational contexts.  PREREQ:  PSY  100;  PSY  254 
or  PSY  265  recorrunended. 
447     Human  Intimacy  (3)  A  study  of  processes 
and  factors  in  establishing,  maintaining,  and  ter- 
minating relationships  via  the  use  of  group 
methods. 

464     Physiological  Psychology  (3)  Anatomical, 
endocrinological,  and  physiological  processes 
underlying  behavior,  including  motivation,  emo- 
tion, learning,  and  memory.  Special  attention  is 
given  to  the  biological  bases  and  treatments  of 
mental  ilbiess.  PREREQ:  PSY  100,  or  BIO  100  or 
110  recommended.  Offered  fall  and  spring 
semesters. 


Department  of  Theatre  Arts 


470     Sensory  and  Perceptual  Processes  (3)  A 
study  of  how  we  process  sensory  information 
and  perceive  our  environments.  PREREQ:  PSY 
100. 

475     Cognitive  Psychology  (3)  Basic  research 
and  application  in  memory  and  information  pro- 
cessing. PREREQ:  PSY  100;  PSY  363  recom- 
mended. 

480     Neuropsychological  Rehabilitation  (3)  The 
theory  and  practice  of  cognitive  rehabilitation  in 


patients  with  brain  injury  and  disease.  Topics 
include  findings  from  both  basic  and  clinical 
research.  Methods  of  cognitive  rehabilitation  are 
presented  with  an  emphasis  on  operant  proce- 
dures. PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor  or  chair- 
person. 

♦  490    Topical  Seminar  in  Psychology  (1-3)  Spe- 
cial topics  in  psychology  not  offered  under  exist- 


ing, regularly  offered  courses.  PREREQ:  Consent  of 
instructor  or  chairperson  recommended. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  with  the 
approval  of  the  Department  of  Psychology  chair- 
person. 


Department  of  Theatre  Arts 

Harvey  Rovine,  Interim  Chairperson 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Berkowitz,  Bytnar,  Hashimoto- 
Sinclair,  Jacobson,  Rovine 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Hall 

INSTRUCTOR:  Saddoris 

The  Department  of  Theatre  Arts  offers  a  Bachelor  of  Arts 
program  which  combines  the  foundation  of  a  liberal  arts 
education  with  the  creative  skills  needed  by  the  developing 
theatre  artist.  In  addition,  the  department  cooperates  with 
the  Department  of  Communication  Studies  in  its  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Education  which  qualifies  graduates  to  meet  the 
state  of  Pennsylvania  requirements  for  teacher  certification  in 
communication.  Students  who  are  majors  in  the  program 
may  choose  a  minor  in  theatre  to  meet  the  certification 
requirements. 

Students  with  an  academic  major  or  minor  in  the  depart- 
ment are  required  to  meet  with  a  departmental  faculty 
adviser  to  develop  their  curricular  plans,  select  courses  prior 
to  scheduling,  discuss  career  options,  and  to  be  aware  of 
cocurricular  opportunities.  Handbooks  are  provided  to  enter- 
ing students  for  their  use  as  a  guide  to  the  development  of 
their  academic  programs. 

Departmental  Student  Activities 

University  Theatre,  United  States  Institute  for  Theatre  Technology, 

and  Alpha  Psi  Omega  are  student  organizations  which  involve  stu- 


46  semester  hours 


16  semester  hours 


dents,  majors,  and  nonmajors  in  theatre-related  activities.  For  more 
information  see  the  "Student  Affairs"  section  of  the  catalog. 

Department  Apprenticeships 

Although  not  required,  professional  apprenticeship  experiences  are 
available  to  qualified  theatre  majors.  Students  and  their  placements 
are  screened  by  the  department  to  assure  mutual  satisfaction  for  all 
parries  involved.  For  details,  students  should  see  the  department 
chairperson. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN  THEATRE 

1.  General  Education  Requirements,  51  semester  hours 
see  pages  35-38. 

2.  Core  Requirements  (all  concentrations) 
(See  department  handbook  for  course 
requirements.) 

3.  Concentration  Requirements 

a.  General  Theatre 

b.  Acting 

c.  Directing 

d.  Musical  Theatre 

e.  Technical  Production 

(See  department  handbook  for  course  requirements.) 

4.  Foreign  Language  Options,  0-15  semester  hours 
see  pages  37-38. 

Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education:  Theatre  Emphasis 

(See  catalog  under  Department  of  Communication  Studies.) 

Minor  in  Theatre  Arts  18  semester  hours 

THA  103,  104,  113,  210,  215  or  216,  and  301 

ASSOCL\TE  OF  ARTS  DEGREE 

(See  catalog  under  Requirements  for  Degree  of  Associate  of  Arts, 

pages  38-39.) 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
THEATRE 

Symbol:  THA 

♦  100    Theatre  Practice  (1  credit  for  theatre 
majors)  Laboratory  experience  in  technical 
aspects  of  play  production. 

100  Theatre  Practice  (3  credits  for  nonmajors) 

Laboratory  experience  in  technical  aspects  of 
play  productions.  Open  to  all  students. 

101  Introduction  to  Theatre  (3)  A  survey  of 
theatre  as  a  humanity  by  exploring  how  theatre 
reflects  its  time  and  country.  This  course  teaches 
the  student  what  to  listen  for  and  what  to  look 
for  when  attending  a  live  theatre  performance. 
Will  fulfill  general  education  arts  requirement. 

102  (also  SPC  102)  Oral  Interpretation  I  (3) 

Theory  and  practice  of  oral  presentation  of  vari- 
ous types  of  hterature  to  an  audience. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


103  Acting  I  (3)  The  first  part  of  a  one-year 
course  designed  to  introduce  the  basic  skills  and 
techniques  needed  by  the  developing  actor  to 
create  successfully  a  character  for  performance 
on  stage.  Will  fulfill  general  education  arts 
requirement. 

104  Stagecraft  (3)  Planning,  construction, 
painting,  rigging,  and  shifting  of  scenery.  Man- 
agement of  all  operations  backstage.  Laboratory 
required. 

113     Script  Analysis  (3)  To  promote  the  devel- 
opment of  the  student's  analytical  faculties  in  the 
research  and  preparation  of  the  play  script  for  a 
staged  production.  Will  fulfill  general  education 
arts  requirement. 

202  Oral  Interpretation  II  (3)  Advanced  work 
in  oral  presentation  of  literature  with  emphasis 
on  the  theory  and  technique  of  readers  theatre. 
PREREQ:  THA  102. 

203  Acting  II  (3)  Second  part  of  a  course 
designed  to  introduce  the  basic  skills  and  tech- 


niques needed  to  create  a  role  on  the  stage. 
Emphasis  on  character  development. 
207     Children's  Theatre  (3)  Production  of  chil- 
dren's theatre  for  stage  and  television.  Course 
elements  will  include  script  analysis  and  produc- 
tion values,  publicity,  and  tour  preparation.  Stu- 
dents enrolled  in  the  course  will  create  a  com- 
plete production. 

209  Creative  Drama  (3)  Theory  and  practice  in 
creative  techniques  of  expression  and  dramatic 
forms  to  be  used  as  a  teaching  and  recreational 
device  for  children  and  adults. 

210  Stage  Makeup  I  (3)  Theory  and  practice  in 
design  and  application  of  various  types  of  make- 
up for  the  stage.  Laboratory  required. 

215     Costume  Construction  (3)  Theory  and 
practice  in  theatrical  costuming  including  organi- 
zation, construction,  drafting,  dyeing,  painting, 
and  wardrobe  management.  Laboratory  required. 
316     Costume  History  and  Design  (3)  The  his- 
tory of  European  and  American  costume  and  its 
application  to  the  period  production.  Process  of 


Department  of  Theatre  Ans 


designing  costumes  in  various  styles  will  be 
explored.  Students  are  required  to  design  cos- 
tumes for  periods  studied.  Laboratory  required. 
THA  215  is  not  a  prerequisite. 

301  Directing  I  (3)  An  introduction  of  the  the- 
ories and  techniques  of  stage  direction  with 
emphasis  on  prerehearsal  planning,  play  selec- 
tion, script  analysis  and  promptbooks,  casting 
and  blocking.  PREREQ:  THA  103,  104,  and  U3. 

302  Scene  Construction  and  Rigging  (3)  This 
course  develops  a  famiUarity  with  scenic  con- 
struction techniques  and  materials.  Practical 
solutions  to  technical  problems  are  discussed. 
Other  topics  include  theatre  safety,  technical 
drawing,  and  budgeting. 

303  Acting  III  (3)  A  course  for  the  advanced 
student  actor  who  wishes  in-depth  work  and 
study  in  character  building  and  analysis. 
Extended  scene  work  and  audition  materials  also 
wiU  be  stressed.  PREREQ:  THA  203 

304  Scene  Design  and  Painting  (3)  This  course 
identifies  and  explores  the  processes  involved  in 
creating  a  scenic  space  that  is  both  practical  and 
expressive.  Skills  in  set  design,  representational 
painting,  scenic  drafting,  and  script  interpreta- 
tion are  developed. 

305  Stage  Lighting  (3)  Exploration  of  Ughting 
as  a  means  of  artistic  communication  in  the  the- 
atre. The  course  covers  the  aesthetics,  tools, 
technology,  and  the  graphic  methods  used  to 
light  a  play.  Special  topics  in  lighting  for  other 
performing  arts  will  be  discussed. 


306  History  of  Theatre  I  (3)  The  development 
of  theatre  from  the  ancient  Greeks  to  the  17th 
century.  Writing  emphasis. 

307  History  of  Theatre  II  (3)  The  development 
of  theatre  from  the  17th  to  the  20th  centuries. 
Writing  emphasis.  THA  306  is  not  a  prerequisite. 

308  Graphics  for  the  Stage  (3)  An  exploration 
of  graphic  solutions  used  in  the  various  stages  of 
planning  and  executing  a  setting  for  the  theatre. 
Scenic  design,  stage  technician  drafting  tech- 
niques, and  perspective  techniques  used  exclu- 
sively in  the  theatre. 

309  Trends  in  Contemporary  Theatre  (3)  The 
theatre  artists,  structures,  and  social  milieu 
whose  collective  interaction  can  be  referred  to  as 
contemporary  theatre.  The  creative  work  being 
done  in  America,  England,  Poland,  South  Africa, 
and  other  nations  will  form  the  core  of  the 
course. 

310  Stage  Makeup  11  (3)  Theory,  development, 
and  application  of  theatrical  makeup  according  to 
the  play,  its  period,  the  style  of  production,  the 
actor,  and  the  character.  Students  must  have  pre- 
vious knowledge  of  the  basic  two-  and  three- 
dimensional  makeup  devices  PREREQ:  THA  210 

♦  399     Directed  Studies  in  Theatre  (1-6) 
Research,  creative  projects,  reports,  and  readings 
in  theatre.  Students  must  apply  to  advisers  one 
semester  in  advance  of  registration.  PREREQ: 
THA  102,  103,  104,  and  113  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

♦  400     Professional  Apprenticeship  (3-15)  This 
course  provides  a  structured  and  supervised 


work  experience  in  theatre.  Students  must  sub- 
mit an  application  to  the  department  chairperson 
for  permission. 

401     Directing  II  (3)  Play  direction  as  a  creative 
aspect  of  stage  production  with  emphasis  on 
exploration  of  concept,  techniques  of  rehearsing  a 
play  and  working  with  actors,  and  the  role  and 
function  of  the  stage  manager.  PREREQ;  THA 
301. 

403  Acting  IV  (3)  Study  and  scene  work  in  a 
variety  of  period  styles.  Greek,  Restoration,  Eliz- 
abethan, and  Commedia  will  be  stressed.  Stu- 
dents will  focus  on  the  physical,  intellectual,  and 
emotional  demands  inherent  in  premodem  texts. 
PREREQ:  THA  303. 

404  Advanced  Scenic  and  Lighting  Design  (3) 
Analysis  of  excellent  scene  designs  of  the  past. 
Practice  in  maximizing  the  visual  impact  of  stage 
scenery  and  lightmg.  Design  projects  for 
selected,  visually  challenging  plays.  Students 
design  for  both  student-directed  and  major  pro- 
ductions on  campus.  One  hour  of  lab.  PREREQ: 
THA  304. 

405  Advanced  Costume  and  Makeup  (3)  In- 
depth  study  of  costuming  and  stage  makeup  for 
productions.  Various  styles  and  periods  of  pro- 
ductions will  be  studied.  Students  prepare  a  pro- 
fessional portfoUo.  PREREQ:  THA  210  or  310, 
and  THA  215  or  316.  Laboratory  required. 

♦  499  Theatre  Seminar  (3)  Intensive  examina- 
tion of  a  selected  area  of  study  in  theatre.  Topics 
will  be  announced  in  advance. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Christopher  M.  Fiorentino,  Dean 


Department  of  Accounting 

Clyde  J.  Galbraith,  Chairperson 
PROFESSORS:  Mott,  A.  Naggar 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR:  Hassler 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Galbraith,  Smith 

The  Department  of  Accounting  offers  a  full  program  of 
accounting  courses  designed  to  prepare  a  student  for 
entrance  into  the  fields  of  public,  private,  or  governmental 
accounting.  Students  successfully  completing  the  curriculum 
should  be  adequately  prepared  to  take  the  Certified  Public 
Accountant  (CPA)  and  Certified  Management  Accountant 
examinations. 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  ACCOUNTING 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 
(includes  ECO  111;  see  appropriate 
curriculum  guidance  sheet) 

2.  Business  and  Economics  Core 

ACC  201,  202;  BLA  201;  ECO  112,  251,  252, 
335;  FIN  325;  MGT  300,  341,  499;  MKT  301, 
327 


51  semester  hours 


39  semester  hours 


3.  Other  courses  required  by  the  business  pro- 
gram: CSC  101  and  MAT  107.  These  courses 
satisfy,  and  are  included  under,  general 
requirements. 

4.  Other  course  required:  MAT  108 

5.  Accounting  Major:  ACC  301,  302,  303, 
304,  305,  401,  403,  405 

6.  Economics  or  Business  Electives 

7.  Free  Electives 

NOTE:  A  minimum  grade  of  C  must  be 
achieved  in  all  accounting  courses,  and  all 
prerequisites. 

Accounting  Minor 

1.  Required 

ACC  201,  202,  and  301;  ECO  111 

2.  Electives 

Any  two  of  the  following  courses:  ACC  302, 
303,  304,  305,  403,  404,  and  407 


3  semester  hours 
24  semester  hours 

3  semester  hours 
9  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ACCOUNTING 

Symbol:  ACC 

The  objective  of  the  accounting  concentration  is 
to  prepare  students  for  accounting  careers  in 
business,  for  the  CPA  examination,  and  for  the 
private  practice  of  accounting. 

201  Principles  of  Accounting  I  (3)  Introduc- 
tion to  financial  accounting.  A  conceptual 
approach  to  recording,  financial  summarizing, 
and  presentation  and  evaluation  of  the  financial 
affairs  of  a  business  firm. 

202  Principles  of  Accounting  II  (3)  Introduc- 
tion to  management  accounting.  Accumulating, 
processing,  and  interpreting  financial  data  to  be 
used  as  a  basis  for  making  managerial  decisions 
in  a  business  firm.  PREREQ:  ACC  201. 

301     Intermediate  Accounting  I  (3)  Analysis 
and  evaluation  of  assets,  liability,  and  capiul 
account.  Problems  of  income  measurement  and 
recognition.  PREREQ:  ACC  202. 


302  Intermediate  Accounting  II  (3)  Continua- 
tion of  ACC  301.  PREREQ:  ACC  301. 

303  Cost  Accounting  I  (3)  Techniques  of  prod- 
uct unit  cost  determination  and  uses  of  cost  data 
in  managerial  decisions.  PREREQ:  ACC  202. 

304  Cost  Accounting  II  (3)  Continuation  of 
ACC  303.  PREREQ:  ACC  303. 

305  Intermediate  Accounting  III  (3)  Continua- 
tion of  ACC  302.  PREREQ:  ACC  302. 

400  Accounting  Internship  (3-6)  The  business 
internship  for  students  in  accounting  enhances 
the  student's  educational  experience  by  provid- 
ing a  substantive  work  experience  in  the  busi- 
ness world.  PREREQ:  Intemship  program  coordi- 
nator's approval. 

401  Auditing  (3)  Introduction  to  auditing  as  a 
tool  for  verification  of  the  fair  representation  of 
financial  statements.  PREREQ:  ACC  302. 

403     Federal  Taxation  I  (3)  A  study  of  individ- 
ual and  federal  income  taxes,  with  some  business 
application.  Emphasis  on  tax  plaiming  for  mini- 
mization of  tax  hability.  PREREQ:  ACC  202. 


404  Federal  Taxation  II  (3)  A  study  of  the 
principles  of  federal  income  taxation  on  corpora- 
tions and  corporate  distributions,  partnerships, 
estates,  and  trusts.  Emphasis  is  on  tax  planning 
and  researching  complex  problems.  PREREQ: 
ACC  403. 

405  Advanced  Accounting  (3)  In-depth  study 
of  business  combinations  and  consoUdations, 
government  accounting,  and  other  specialized 
topics.  PREREQ:  ACC  302. 

407     Not-for-Profit  and  Governmental  Account- 
ing (3)  A  study  of  accounting  principles  and 
procedures  of  not-for-profit  and  governmental 
organizations.  The  course  includes  accounting 
for  the  local,  state,  and  federal  government,  hos- 
pitals, colleges  and  universities,  public  schoob, 
and  charities.  PREREQ:  ACC  202. 

410     Directed  Studies  in  Accounting  (1-3)  Spe- 
cial research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in 
accounting.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ:  Per- 
mission of  instructor. 


Depanment  of  Criminal  Justice 


Department  of  Criminal  Justice 

Saul  H.  Greenberg,  Chairperson 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Greenberg,  Metz,  Nestlerode 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Nealy,  Zumpetta 

West  Chester's  criminal  justice  curriculum  is  a  broad-based, 
interdisciplinary  program  combining  theoretical  concepts 
with  practical  aspects.  It  has  been  designed  to  fulfill  the 
needs  of  four  categories  of  students: 

1.  Those  who  wish  to  undertake  a  four-year  program  of 
study  to  prepare  for  careers  in  criminal  justice 

2.  Graduates  of  nvo-year  colleges  who  desire  to  continue 
their  educations  and  obtain  bachelor's  degrees 

3.  In-service  personnel  who  would  like  to  increase  their  pro- 
fessional competence  by  strengthening  their  educational 
background 

4.  Those  who  wish  to  pursue  a  master's  or  law  degree 

The  program  provides  the  competencies,  understanding,  and 
philosophy  necessary  for  professional  performance  in  the 
various  fields  of  criminal  justice.  It  is  not  designed  to 
develop  specialists  in  any  one  specific  area;  however,  stu- 
dents may:  1)  choose  an  associate  degree  in  criminal  justice, 
2)  develop  areas  of  special  interest  through  the  selection  of 
electives,  or  3)  choose  a  minor  program  from  complementary 
disciplines.  The  successful  student  should  master  and  retain 
career  skills  immediately  useful  in  the  criminal  justice  sys- 
tem, as  well  as  possess  the  overall  intellectual  grasp  of  the 
situation  where  those  skills  would  be  appropriate. 


An  important  feature  of  the  program  is  the  one-semester 
practicum  served  at  a  criminal  justice  agency.  Designed  to 
give  personal,  direct  experience,  it  affords  the  student  the 
chance  to  put  his  or  her  theoretical  knowledge  to  work. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE -CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

2.  Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 
CRJ  110,  210,  300,  and  400 

NOTE:  A  minimum  grade  of  C-  is  required  in  each  course. 

3.  Criminal  Justice  Electives  21  semester  hours 

4.  Practicum  12  semester  hours 
CRJ  490 

NOTE:  A  minimum  grade  of  C-  is  required  in  this  course. 

5.  Related  Areas  (minor  or  electives  taken  32  semester  hours 
under  advisement) 

Enrollment  in  CRJ  110  and  210  is  open  to  all  students.  However, 
enrollment  in  other  criminal  justice  courses  may  be  limited  to 
criminal  justice  majors  and  to  other  students  approved  by  the 
department. 


Minor  in  Criminal  Justice 

1.  Required  Courses 

CRJ  110,  210,  300,  and  400 


18  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 


2.  Criminal  Justice  Electives 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies  gen- 
eral degree  program. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

S>TObol:  CRJ 

110     Introduction  to  the  Criminal  Justice  Sys- 
tem (3)  A  course  designed  to  describe  the  crimi- 
nal justice  system  from  arrest  through  trial, 
appeal,  sentencing,  correction,  and  parole.  The 
object  of  this  course  is  to  provide  the  student 
with  a  procedural  framework  of  the  criminal  jus- 
tice process. 

210    Theories  in  Criminal  Justice  (3)  This 
course  is  a  survey  of  the  historical  and  contem- 
porary attempts  to  explain  the  phenomena  of 
crime  and  criminal  behavior  from  the  perspec- 
tives of  sociology,  psychology,  economics,  biol- 
ogy, and  law.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  con- 
temporary theory  and  the  analysis  of  evidence 
supportive  of  various  theoretical  positions. 
214     Organized  Crime  (3)  Organized  crime  is 
examined  as  an  American  phenomenon,  then 
compared  to  organized  criminal  activity  in 
Europe  and  Asia.  The  student  will  place  in  per- 
spective the  current  organizations  in  the  U.S. 
and  their  historical  development  here  over  the 
last  century.  European  groupings  are  examined 
as  precursors/models  of  U.S.  transplants  with 
insights  into  the  proliferation  of  such  groups  in 
the  Far  East. 

220     Corrections  (3)  The  purpose  of  this  course 
is  to  provide  the  student  with  a  survey  and  anal- 
ysis of  the  correctional  system  and  its  processes 
from  both  a  historical  and  geographical  perspec- 
tive. Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  relating  this 
survey  and  analysis  to  contemporary  practice  and 
future  trends  in  the  area  of  corrections. 


230     Probation  and  Parole  (3)  The  intent  of 
this  course  is  to  provide  the  student  with  an 
introduction  to,  and  survey  of,  probation  and 
parole  practices  from  a  historical  perspective. 
Assumptions  and  theories  about  human  behav- 
ior, upon  which  such  practices  are  based,  and 
contemporary  and  fiiture  trends  in  the  field  also 
will  be  examined. 

250  Scientific  Crime  Detection  (3)  This  course 
will  engender  an  appreciation  of  what  is  entailed 
for  an  individual  to  imderstand  current  scientific 
methods  of  detection  in  the  criminal  justice  sys- 
tem. 

255     Criminalistics  (3)  To  familiarize  the  stu- 
dent with  the  recognition,  collection,  and  pro- 
cessing of  physical  evidence  at  the  criminalistics 
laboratory.  Course  enrollment  is  Umited. 
300     Criminal  Law  (3)  This  course  will  cover 
the  principles  of  criminal  responsibihty,  the  pur- 
poses and  limitations  of  criminal  law,  and  the 
elements  of  various  criminal  offenses.  Substan- 
tive criminal  law  will  cover  the  conduct,  acts, 
and  omissions  that  have  been  designated  as 
crimes.  These  acts  (or  omissions)  plus  the  men- 
tal state  and  other  essential  elements  that  make 
up  criminal  action  will  be  examined. 
304     History  and  Philosophy  of  Law  and  Jus- 
tice (3)  This  course  is  intended  to  aid  the  begin- 
ning student  in  understanding  the  historical  and 
philosophical  influences  on  the  American  crimi- 
nal justice  system;  introduce  the  student  to  a 
broad  range  of  individuals  who,  over  a  period  of 
2.000  years,  have  made  significant  contributions 
to  the  formulation  and  process  of  justice;  and 
analyze  various  other  systems  of  criminal  justice 
found  in  dissimilar  cultures. 


310    Juvenile  Justice  Administration  (3)  A  sur- 
vey of  both  the  formal  (police/courts/corrections) 
and  the  informal  (diversion)  means  of  dealing 
with  the  problem  of  juvenile  crime.  Emphasis  is 
not  on  the  behavior  but  on  society's  response  to 
it.  Emphasis  also  will  be  placed  on  the  legal 
rights  of  juveniles. 

312     White-CoUar  Crime  (3)  This  course  ana- 
lyzes the  usually  nonviolent  criminal  conduct 
described  as  official  corruption,  systematic  crime, 
or  violations  of  trust  that  are  characterized  by 
calculation,  deceit,  and  personal  enrichment.  The 
influence  of  organized  crime  also  is  explored. 
330     Criminal  Behavior  (3)  This  course  exposes 
students  to  broad,  theoretical  positions  on  crime 
and  to  observable  criminal  offenses.  Students  will 
learn  to  avoid  oversimplified,  dogmatic  answers. 
Research  findings  on  understanding  and  control- 
ling crime  will  be  discussed.  The  course  will 
help  a  student  appreciate  the  need  to  integrate 
contemporary  psychology  into  an  understanding 
of  criminal  behavior. 

340    Victimless  Crimes  (3)  This  course  is 
designed  to  familiarize  the  student  with  the  ram- 
ifications of  vice  control.  It  will  cover  such  top- 
ics as  prostitution,  homosexuality,  pornography, 
gambling,  and  bookmaldng,  as  well  as  historical 
perspectives,  statutes  and  interpretations,  a  com- 
parison of  illegal  operations,  enforcement  tech- 
niques, and  legalization  efforts. 
368     Private  Security  (3)  This  course  will  pro- 
vide an  in-depth  examination  of  the  various  fac- 
ets and  interests  of  the  private  sector  of  security. 
A  review  of  the  history,  organization,  manage- 
ment, and  safety  issues  pertaining  to  the  private 
security  profession  will  be  addressed.  Emphasis 


Department  of  Economics 


is  placed  on  policy  and  decision  making,  person- 
nel, and  budgeting,  as  well  as  an  examination  of 
security  programming  that  responds  to  the  pri- 
vate sector. 

400     Criminal  Procedure  (3)  This  course  is  an 
examination  of  the  theory  and  appUcation  of  the 
law  and  rules  of  evidence  for  the  criminal  justice 
student.  It  will  develop  an  understanding  of  the 
reasons  for  the  rules  of  evidence  and  a  grasp  of 
the  application  of  the  rules  in  case  investigation 
and  for  presentation  in  coun  through  a  study  of 
selected  cases,  statutes,  and  the  analysis  of  hypo- 
thetical cases  and  situations. 
♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  Criminal  Jus- 
tice (1-3)  Research  projects,  reports,  and  read- 
ings m  criminal  justice.  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
department  chairperson. 
420     Criminal  Investigations  (3)  Criminal 
investigation  functions  of  police  involving  crimes 
of  violence,  crimes  against  property,  and  orga- 
nized crime.  Police  operational  techniques  and 
applicable  court  decisions  in  the  areas  of  inter- 
view, search,  seizure,  and  arrest. 
430     Interviewing  and  Counseling  the  Offender 
(3)  Techniques  of  interviewing  and  counseling 
applicable  to  law  enforcement  and  corrections 
officers.  Areas  of  study  include  the  initial  inter- 
view, interrogation,  informant-handling  tech- 
niques, manipulative  behavior  of  offenders,  and 
exit  interviews.  Role  playing  and  sociodrama  are 
used. 

432     Correctional  Law  (3)  A  course  designed  to 
provide  those  involved  in  the  correctional  process 
with  a  basic  introduction  to  the  emerging  field  of 
law  in  this  area.  It  encourages  understanding  of 
rights  and  responsibilides  of  the  incarcerated 
offender  and  of  the  administrative  staff. 
435    Assessment  of  the  Offender  (3)  This 
course  will  develop  students'  abihties  to 
describe,  recognize,  and  understand  psychomet- 
ric measures  on  adult  and  juvenile  offenders. 
Topics  include  understanding  the  selection  of 
ps>'chometric  measurements,  observing  and 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


drawing  from  life  histories,  and  understanding 
how  violent  behavior  may  be  predicted. 
440    Violent  Crime  (3)  This  course  seeks  to 
survey  the  incidence  of  violent  crime,  to  analyze 
the  violent  criminal,  and  to  study  the  variety  of 
means  that  have  been  developed  to  control  crim- 
inal violence. 

455    Topical  Seminar  in  Criminal  Justice  (3) 
Intensive  examination  of  a  selected  area  of  study 
in  the  field  of  criminal  justice.  Topics  will  be 
aimounced  at  the  time  of  offering.  Course  may 
be  taken  more  than  once  when  different  topics 
are  presented.  PREREQ:  Junior  or  senior  CRJ 
major  or  with  permission  of  instructor. 

460  Evidence  and  Trial  Advocacy  (3)  This 
course  moves  a  step  beyond  basic  criminal  law 
and  criminal  procedure  studies  and  takes  the 
student  into  the  courtroom.  The  student  will 
learn  basic  rules  of  evidence  presentation  and 
court  procedure  and  discover  how  the  trial  pro- 
cess works  by  actively  participating  in  it.  The 
student  will  leam  how  to  distill  the  issues,  and 
to  present  concise,  well-reasoned  arguments  sup- 
porting a  given  position.  It  is  in  this  manner  that 
the  student  will  leam  critical  analysis  and  practi- 
cal presentation.  (This  course  is  designed  for 
those  students  who  have  completed  CRJ  300  and 
CRJ  400.) 

461  Notable  Criminal  Cases  (3)  Selected  fac- 
tual accounts  of  criminality  and  criminal  behav- 
ior over  the  past  75  years  are  analyzed.  Selection 
is  based  on  notoriety  and  continued  dispute. 
Course  is  designed  to  illuminate,  through  read- 
ing and  class  analysis,  a  wide  spectrum  of  crimi- 
nal conduct  and  the  related  investigative  and 
judicial  response. 

462  Management  Problems  and  Phractices  (3) 
This  course  is  intended  to  aid  in  the  instruction 
of  students  who  are  potential  candidates  for 
administrative  positions.  Its  objective  is  neither 
to  present  a  new  approach  to  the  field  nor  to 
support  an  existing  one;  rather,  it  is  to  provide 
the  student  with  a  well-rounded  view  of  the  sub- 
ject and  to  lay  the  groundwork  for  further  study. 
This  is  done  by  bringing  together  the  most 
appropriate  concepts  and  practices  in  managing 


an  organizadon;  e.g.,  purpose  defining,  planning, 
decision  making,  staffing,  motivating,  communi- 
cating, coUecDve  bargaining,  and  controlling. 
470     Interpersonal  Relations  (3)  This  course  is 
designed  to  aid  a  student's  self  analysis  in  terms 
of  behavior  patterns  or  changes  affecting  his  or 
her  life.  This  self  knowledge  often  leads  to 
understanding  relationships  with  others,  which 
can  assist  students  in  relating  to  other  persons  in 
their  personal,  social,  and  professional  lives. 
482     Contemporary  Legal  Issues  (3)  This 
course  encompasses  a  brief  review  of  the  general 
principles  of  law  and  procedure,  followed  by  an 
in-depth  study  of  the  more  controversial  legal 
dilemmas  facing  today's  criminal  justice  system. 
The  course  is  designed  to  shed  light  on  each  side 
of  the  issue,  to  enable  the  student  to  see  beyond 
the  superficial  aspects  of  the  conflict,  and  to 
understand  its  more  profound  nature. 
487     Ethical  Issues  in  Criminal  Justice  (3)  This 
course  is  designed  to  identify*  and  examine  ethi- 
cal issues  among  practitioners  and  students  in 
the  criminal  justice  field.  Such  issues  may 
include  the  discretionary  power  of  arrest,  the  use 
of  deadly  force,  the  decision  to  prosecute,  partic- 
ipation in  plea  bargaining,  representation  of  the 
guilty,  and  the  imposition  of  punishment.  Such  a 
course  will  promote  inquiry  that  combines  ethi- 
cal analysis  with  a  practical  awareness  of  the 
realities  of  the  criminal  justice  system. 
490     Practicum  (12)  Independent  study  based 
on  a  vocational  placement  in  a  criminal  justice 
agency:  police,  courts,  defense,  or  corrections. 
The  design  of  each  placement  depends  on  the 
student's  previous  experience  and  area  of  inter- 
est. Written,  biweekly  reports  and  a  major  paper 
are  required.  For  seniors  only. 
496     Criminal  Justice  Planning  (3)  This  course 
is  intended  to  aid  in  the  instruction  of  under- 
graduate students  who  are  potential  candidates 
for  planning,  evaluation,  or  administrative  posi- 
tions. Given  the  recent  development  of  the  field 
of  criminal  justice  planning,  this  course  repre- 
sents a  beginning  effort  at  a  comprehensive  dis- 
cussion and  review  of  justice  system  planning 
and  evaluation. 


Department  of  Economics 

Roger  Bove,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  DeMoss,  Sylvester,  T.  Naggar 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Benzing,  Bove,  Fiorentino, 

Mohan 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Dunleavy,  Tolin 

The  primary  objective  of  the  Department  of  Economics  is  to 
provide  a  learning  experience  that  ■will  permit  each  student 
to  achieve  maximum  intellectual  development  in  his  or  her 
chosen  area  of  study  and  to  prepare  for  a  satisfying  career  in 
that  field. 

As  an  aid  to  the  achievement  of  this  purpose,  the  Depart- 
ment of  Economics  strives: 

(1)  To  assist  students  in  acquiring  a  fundamental  knowledge 
and  understanding  of  the  fi-amework  within  which  our 
business  and  industrial  system  operates 

(2)  To  acquaint  students  with  the  modem  techniques  used 
by  business  and  industry  that  enables  them  to  deal  effec- 
tively with  the  changing  environment 


(3)  To  encourage  students  in  developing  the  ability  to  ana- 
lyze situations,  to  relate  and  classify  pertinent  factors, 
and  to  derive  alternatives  for  solving  problems 

The  Department  of  Economics  coordinates  its  courses  with 
the  departments  of  Accounting,  Management,  and  Marketing. 

Majors  in  the  department  must  consult  the  departmental 
handbook  and  their  adviser  annually  for  current  require- 
ments. 

Two  degree  programs  are  offered: 

1.  The  B.S.  in  ECONOMICS  focuses  on  a  business  orientation  of 
economic  analysis 

2.  The  B.A.  in  ECONOMICS  provides  a  societal  orientation  to  eco- 
nomic analysis 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE -ECONOMICS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

(Includes  CSC  101,  ECO  112*,  and  MAT  107 
See  appropriate  curriculum  guidance  sheet.) 


Ijllj      Department  of  Economics 


251, 
and 


Business  and  Economics  Core 
ACC  201',  202*;  BLA  201*;  ECO  112*. 
252,  and  335;  FIN  325;  MGT  300*,  341, 
499;  and  MKT  301*  and  327 
(*A  minimum  grade  of  C  —  must  be  attained 
in  each  of  these  courses.) 
Other  courses  required  by  the  business  pro- 
gram: CSC  101  and  MAT  107.  These  courses 
satisfy  and  are  included  under  general 
requirements. 

Other  course  required  — MAT  108 
Economics  Major*  —  ECO  340  and  348  and 
three  additional  300-level  or  above  courses  in 
economics  or  finance 
Economics  or  Business  Electives 
Free  Electives 

Includes  nine  semester  hours  for  general 
requirements 


39  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 
1 5  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 
2 1  semester  hours 


•A  minimum  of  grade  C  -  must  be  attained  in  each  of  these  courses. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  ECONOMICS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language  Requirement 

3.  Social  Science  Electives 

4.  Economics  Major  Requirement 
ECO  111-112,  251-252,  335,  340,  and  348; 
MAT  107-108;  and  additional  departmental 
courses 

5.  Electives 
Six  semester  hours  of  electives  may  be 
economics  courses.  See  department  adviser. 

Minor  in  Economics 

Students  may  minor  in  economics.  Course  requirements  are  ECO 
111,  112,  340,  and  348,  plus  two  economics  electives  selected 
under  departmental  advisement.  (MAT  107  and  108  are  prerequi- 
sites for  ECO  340  and  348.  A  minimum  grade  of  C-  must  be 
earned  in  each  of  these  courses.) 


51  semester  hours 

0-15  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 

36  semester  hours 


5-20  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ECONOMICS 

Symbol:  ECO 

*101     Principles  of  Economics  —  Survey  (3) 
Basic  principles  underlying  production  and  con- 
sumption activities  in  our  modified,  capitalistic 
economic  system,  from  the  aggregate  as  well  as 
individual  and  sectoral  standpoints.  Issues 
include  competition,  unemployment,  inflation, 
economic  growth,  and  alternative  systems. 
Till     Principles  of  Economics  I  (Macro)  (3) 
National  income  and  its  measurement.  The 
determination  of  price  levels,  output,  and 
employment.  Money  and  credit,  expenditures, 
and  economic  stability.  Government  fiscal  and 
monetary  policy  PREREQ:  Working  knowledge 
of  high  school  mathematics  is  required. 
tll2     Principles  of  Economics  II  (Micro)  (3) 
Principles  underlying  use  and  allocation  of 
scarce  productive  resources.  Consumption  and 
production  activities.  Value,  price,  and  income 
distribution.  Considerations  of  economic  effi- 
ciency and  welfare.  PREREQ:  Working  knowl- 
edge of  high  school  mathematics  and  ECO  101 
or  111. 

231  Quantitative  Business  Analysis  I  (3)  Con- 
siders the  fundamental  ideas  of  statistical  theory 
that  are  appropriate  for  solving  problems  in  the 
fields  of  business  and  economics.  Topics  include 
descriptive  statistics,  probability  theory,  sampling 
and  estimation,  and  hypothesis  testing.  PREREQ: 
MAT  107. 

252     Quantitative  Business  Analysis  II  (3) 
Continuation  of  ECO  251.  Topics  include 
hypothesis  testing,  simple  multiple  regression 
analysis,  and  Bayesian  inference.  PREREQ:  ECO 
251  and  MAT  108. 

303     Economic  Role  of  Women  (3)  Statistical 
information  pertaining  to  one  of  the  most  impor- 
tant changes  in  the  American  economy  in  this 
century  —  the  increase  in  the  number  of  working 
women.  Job-related  aspects,  such  as  the  histori- 
cal pattern,  labor  force  participation,  education, 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 

t  ECO  111-112:  Approved  two-semester  substi- 
tute for  distributive  requirement. 

#  Approved  interdiscipUnary  course. 


earnings,  labor  supply,  and  sex  discrimination. 
PREREQ:  Junior-level  standing  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

333  Consumer  Economics  (3)  Major  lands  of 
economic  decisions  required  of  consumers.  Eval- 
uation of  the  social  and  economic  consequences 
of  those  decisions. 

334  Labor  Economics  (3)  Application  of  eco- 
nomic theory  to  the  operation  of  labor  markets 
and  the  collective  bargaining  process.  Consider- 
ation is  given  to  the  development  of  the  labor 
movement  and  public  poUcy  toward  labor  and 
employment.  PREREQ:  ECO  112. 

335  Money  and  Banking  (3)  A  survey  of 
money,  credit,  and  prices,  emphasizing  their 
effects  on  economic  stabihty.  The  Federal 
Reserve  System  and  its  effect  on  credit  control. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112. 

336  Regulation  of  Competition  (3)  Back- 
ground and  development  of  public  policies  that 
direcdy  modify  the  free  enterprise  economy  of 
the  United  States.  Evaluation  of  policies  that 
change  the  nature  and  extent  of  competition. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112. 

337  Economic  Growth  and  Development  (3)  A 
survey  and  critical  evaluation  of  alternative  theo- 
ries of  capitalist  economic  development.  Analysis 
and  comparison  of  altemative  public  poUcies 
applicable  to  underdeveloped  countries  and 
regions.  PREREQ:  ECO  112. 

338  International  Economics  (3)  A  descriptive, 
analytical  examination  of  international  trade, 
finance,  and  other  economic  relationships.  The 
effects  of  pubUc  policies  on  these  relationships. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112. 

340  Intermediate  Microeconomics  (3)  A  con- 
tinuation and  extension  of  the  price-system  anal- 
ysis in  ECO  112.  Emphasis  on  the  need  for  effi- 
ciency in  the  economy's  use  of  scarce  productive 
resources.  PREREQ:  ECO  112  and  MAT  108. 

341  Public  Finance  (3)  Government's  influ- 
ence on  stability  of  national  income.  Nature  of 
taxes  and  expenditures  at  the  various  levels  of 
government  and  their  effect  on  the  allocation  of 
resources  and  the  distribution  of  income. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112. 

343     Comparative  Economic  Systems  (3)  Basic 
ideas  and  economic  institutions  of  socialism, 
communism,  and  capitalism  in  the  20th  century. 


Problems  created  by  the  emergence  of  competing 
systems.  PREREQ:  ECO  112. 
#344    American  Economic  Experience  (3)  This 
course  examines  the  U.S.  economy  from  the 
Civil  War  to  the  present  with  emphasis  on  eco- 
nomic theory  and  analysis.  The  sociological  ram- 
ifications of  economic  conditions  will  be  exam- 
ined through  the  literature  of  the  era. 
345     History  of  Economic  Thought  (3)  Origins 
of  economic  thought  and  comparison  of  the 
major  schools  of  economic  doctrine.  Current 
economic  and  socio-political  factors.  PREREQ: 
ECO  112. 

347  Managerial  Economics  (3)  A  course  that 
seeks  to  develop  managerial  judgment.  The 
premise  is  that  technical  application,  to  be  suc- 
cessful, must  proceed  from  economic  feasibility. 
One  plan  is  weighed  against  another  in  terms  of 
comparative  costs  and  revenues,  return  on 
investment,  plant-replacement  problems,  obsoles- 
cence, and  depreciation.  PREREQ:  ECO  112  and 
252,  ACC  202,  and  MAT  108. 

348  Intermediate  Macroeconomics  (3)  Intro- 
duction to  the  theory  of  income,  employment, 
and  growth.  Provides  the  analytic  toob  necessary 
for  dealing  with  aggregate  economic  problems. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112  and  MAT  108. 

350     Urban  Economics  (3)  Economic  aspects  of 
such  urban  problems  as  poverty,  housing,  taxa- 
tion, income  distribution,  and  discrimination. 
Analysis  of  economic  aspects  of  various  proposed 
remedies,  including  urban  renewal,  family  allow- 
ances, cooperatives,  and  others.  PREREQ:  ECO 
112. 

383     Environmental  and  Resource  Economics 
(3)  The  role  of  the  environment  in  an  economic 
system.  Topics  include  energy  economics,  the 
economics  of  renewable  and  nonrenewable 
resources,  and  the  economics  of  pollution. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112  and  MAT  108. 
401     Introduction  to  Econometrics  (3)  Statisti- 
cal and  mathematical  techniques  appUed  to  eco- 
nomic situations.  Use  of  empirical  data  in  eco- 
nomic analysis.  PREREQ:  ECO  1 12  and  252,  and 
MAT  108. 

410     Independent  Studies  in  Economics  (1-3) 
Special  research  projects,  reports,  and  readings 
in  economics.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ: 
Permission  of  instructor. 


Department  of  Geography  and  Planning      WV 


♦  411-412     Internship  (3  or  6)  The  internship 
is  open  to  majors  in  economics  only.  Ic  is 
intended  to  enhance  the  student's  educational 
experience  by  providing  substantive,  professional 
work  experience.  PREREQ:  Permission  of  the 
Department  of  Economics  chairperson. 

FINANCE 

S>'mbol:  HN 

315     Financial  Markets  and  Institutions  (3) 
Covers  a  variet>'  of  domestic  and  international 
financial  markets  and  institutions.  Analysis  is 
provided  for  the  structure,  operation,  and 
mechanics  of  these  markets  and  tnstitucions, 
along  with  the  financial  instruments  traded 
therein.  PREREQ:  ECO  112  and  335. 
325     Corporation  Finance  (3)  The  organization 
and  financing  of  the  modem  corporation.  Pro- 
motion, capitalization,  shon-term  financing,  cap- 
ital budgeting,  distribution  of  earnings,  expan- 
sion, consoUdanon,  failure,  and  reorganization. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112  and  251,  and  ACC  202. 


326     Intermediate  Financial  Management  (3)  A 
second  course  in  managerial  finance.  Emphasis  is 
distributed  between  theory  and  practice.  Once 
understood,  good  theory  is  common  sense,  and 
solving  problems  reinforces  the  practical  appUca- 
tions.  PREREQ:  FIN  325  and  CSC  101. 
330     Principles  of  Insurance  (3)  The  nature 
and  types  of  risk  management  and  insurance 
coverage  are  considered.  Conceptual  analysis  and 
the  impact  of  financial  deregulation  on  personal 
and  business  risk  management  and  insurance  are 
covered.  PREREQ:  ECO  112  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

332     Real  Estate  Finance  (3)  This  course  pro- 
vides a  basic  orientation  to  the  financial  instru- 
ments and  institutional  structures  and  policies  of 
real  estate  finance.  PREREQ:  ECO  112  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

344     Investments  (3)  Problems  and  procedures 
of  investment  management;  types  of  investment 
risks;  security  analysis:  investment  problems  of 
the  individual  as  well  as  the  corporation. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112  and  251,  and  ACC  202. 


350     Investment  Analysis  and  Portfoho  Man- 
agement (3)  A  second  look  at  investment  oppor- 
tunities. This  course  assumes  a  basic  understand- 
ing of  the  existence  and  ftinction  of  financial 
assets.  Each  categor)'  of  assets  is  studied  from  a 
theoretical  perspective.  Theories  are  then  appUed 
to  the  study  of  trading  strategies.  Problem  solv- 
ing is  emphasized.  PREREQ:  FIN  344. 

370    Problems  in  Financial  Management  (3) 
Case  problems  in  corporate  financial  manage- 
ment. Includes  cases  on  managing  current  assets, 
obtaining  short-term  loans,  raising  long-term 
capital,  budgeting  capital,  and  handling  divided 
poUcy.  PREREQ:  FIN  325. 

Symbol:  INB 

401     International  Finance  (3)  Development  of 
financial  managerial  knowledge  and  skills  to 
understand  the  working  of  the  corporate  financial 
function  in  a  global  setting.  PREREQ:  FIN  325. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit 


Department  of  Geography  and  Planning 

Arlene  C.  Rengen,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Rengert,  Tachovsky,  Thomas 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Bielski,  Grassel 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Fasic,  Lewandowsld,  Welch 

Geography  and  Planning  is  an  academic  discipline  that 
bridges  the  ph^'sical  and  social  sciences.  Students  study  the 
patterns  and  processes  of  human  and  physical  phenomena  in 
relationship  to  each  other.  Students  gain  knowledge  that  can 
be  applied  to  solving  societal  problems  and  to  planning  for 
the  future,  whether  they  are  taking  general  education  or 
elective  courses,  acquiring  specialized  preparation  needed  for 
working  in  geography  and  planning  and  related  fields,  or 
meeting  particular  needs  in  combination  with  other  majors 
in  arts  and  sciences  or  professional  fields. 

The  field  of  geography  assists  students  in  comprehending  the 
broad  scope  of  the  physical,  cultural,  and  economic  environ- 
ments on  local,  national,  and  global  scales.  Geography 
courses  develop  skills  and  organize  knowledge  from  various 
disciplines,  and  enable  students  to  examine  the  integrated 
whole  of  a  people  with  reference  to  habitat  and  interspatial 
relationships.  Specialized  skills,  such  as  geographic  informa- 
tion systems  technology  and  computer  cartography  provide 
saleable  skills  for  students  interested  in  technical  careers, 
and  complement  courses  that  teach  knowledge  of  environ- 
mental and  human  situations  and  problems. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  GEOGRAPHY 

The  Bachelor  of  Arts  in  geography  offers  a  choice  of  three  emphases 
(called  "cracks "):  traditional  geography  (cultural  and  economic 
geography  from  an  international  perspective),  geographic  analysis, 
and  urban/regional  planning.  The  geographic  analysis  and  urban/ 
regional  planning  areas  emphasize  skill  development;  internships 
are  available  and  are  recommended  for  qualified  students. 
Geography  majors,  as  part  of  their  general  education  requirements, 
must  take  GEO  101  or  103  and  achieve  a  grade  of  2.0  or  better. 
They  also  must  pass  ENG  120  and  121  with  a  grade  of  2.0  or 
better. 


51  semester  hours 

0-15  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 

33  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement 

3.  Additional  Social  Science  Courses 

4.  Geography  Core  Requirements 
Required:  GEO  102,  225,  310,  326,  400, 
and  404  (18  credits) 

Track  requirements  taken  under  advisement 
For  geography  "track:"  five  courses 

from  specified  groups,  selected 
under  ad\'isement  (15  credits)  OR 

For  urban/regional  plannmg  track 

GEO  214,  320,  and  322,  and  an  additional 

two  courses  from  a  specified  list, 

selected  under  ad\'isement  (15  credits)  OR 

For  geographic  anal>'sis  track: 

GEO  324,  328,  and  330,  plus  two  courses 
from  specified  lists  of  courses, 
selected  under  ad\'isement  (15  credits) 

5.  Cognate  Courses 
Courses  (taken  under  advisement)  that  are 
specifically  related  to  identified  career  aspira- 
tions, and  chosen  outside  General  Require- 
ments, or  Geography  Core 

Required  of  all  majors: 

COM  101,  216,  or  315  and 
ENG  368,  371,  or  420 

Required  for  urban,  regional  planning  crack: 
Two  of  these  three:  PAD  361,  364,  374, 
plus  one  CSC  course  (101  level  or  above) 

Required  of  geographic  analj'sis  track: 

CSC  115,  141,  or  142,  and  one  course  from 
the  foUowing:  ECO  251;  MAT  121,  421, 
422;  and  PHI  150,  422 

6.  Free  Electives  4-19  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION - 
GEOGRAPHY  CONCENTRAOON 

This  is  a  professional  degree  program  designed  to  prepare  certified 
secondary  school  teachers  of  social  studies.  The  curriculum  involves 
an  overall  social  studies  exposure  with  a  concentration  in  geogra- 
phy. See  the  program  description  under  "Social  Studies:  B.S.  in 


JM      Department  of  Geography  and  Planning 


Education,"  pages  115-116.  All  students  in  the  geography  concen- 
tration must  complete  seven  courses  from  a  specified  list  of  physical 
and  human  geography  courses. 

Minor  in  Geography  18  semester  hours 

The  geography  minor  provides  a  flexible  geography  focus  that  com- 
bines well  with  other  majors. 

1.  Required  Course:  GEO  101  or  102  or  103  3  credits 

2.  Elective  Courses,  taken  under  advisement  from  15  credits 
the  department 

Any  two  of  the  following:  GEO  200,  204,  212,  220,  225.  310,  and 
three  other  GEO  courses,  no  more  than  one  of  which  may  be  a 
100-level  course.  This  flexibility  allows  the  student  interested  in 
environmental  courses  to  build  a  sequence  of  those,  the  student 
interested  in  international  courses  to  build  knowledge  of  regions  of 
the  world,  the  student  interested  in  urban  issues  to  concentrate  on 


courses  in  urban  geography,  and  the  student  interested  in  geo- 
graphic techniques  of  analysis  to  study  computer  cartography,  geo- 
graphic information  systems,  etc. 

Minor  in  Planning  18  semester  hours 

The  minor  program  in  planning  allows  students  from  other  majors 
to  acquire  geography  and  planning  skills  and  to  expand  their  career 
possibUities  to  include  such  areas  as  land  planning  and  manage- 
ment, conservation  of  resources,  location  of  commerce  and  indus- 
try, and  county  or  other  local  government. 

1.  Required  Course:  GEO  214  3  credits 

2.  Elective  Courses  taken  under  advisement  from  15  credits 
the  department 

GEO  212  or  320,  216,  225  or  401,  310,  322,  324  or  326  or  330, 
328,  402,  403,  and  415 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
GEOGRAPHY 

Symbol:  GEO 

*101     World  Geography  (3)  The  scope  of  geog- 
raphy and  its  special  place  in  the  cultural  spec- 
trum. Human  society  is  examined  in  a  frame  of 
spatial,  environmental,  and  resource  factors. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  developing  skills  in  the 
use  of  the  "toob"  of  geography. 
102     Physical  Geography  (3)  The  study  of  basic 
principles  of  physical  geography  and  of  relation- 
ships between  components  of  the  total  earth 
environment. 

*I03     Human  Geography  (3)  An  inquiry  into 
the  theoretical  and  applied  approaches  to  the 
study  of  human  spatial  behavior  and  the  distri- 
bution of  social  problems. 

200     Patterns  of  World  Cultures  (3)  An  exami- 
nation of  selected,  non-Westem  areas,  represent- 
ing different  stages  of  development,  in  the  con- 
temporaneous world.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
cultural  adaptation,  iiuiovation,  and  achievement 
of  human  occupants  of  these  areas.  PREREQ: 
ANT  102. 

#204     Introduction  to  Urban  Studies  (3)  An 
examination  of  the  breadth  of  urban  studies  from 
the  perspectives  of  many  social  science  disci- 
plines. Philadelphia  is  emphasized  as  an  object  of 
perception,  as  a  place  of  life  and  Uvelihood,  and 
as  an  example  of  continual  change  in  the  urban 
environment.  PREREQ:  ENG  121.  Usually 
offered  spring  semester  and  summer. 
205     Geographic  Influences  in  American  His- 
tory (3)  Geographic  characteristics  that  figure 
prominendy  in  the  discovery  and  colonization  of 
America,  and  on  the  progressive  development  of 
the  United  States  up  to  the  20th  century. 
214     Introduction  to  Planning  (3)  The  method 
of  anal)^ing  problems  of  urban  and  regional 
planning.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  systems  of 
housing,  recreation,  transportation,  industry,  and 
commerce. 

216     Planning  for  PubUc  Service  (3)  A  study  of 
the  quality  of  individual  life.  Analysis  of  geo- 
graphic variation  in  social  well  being,  problems 
of  social  systems  monitoring,  and  social  indica- 
tors used  in  plaiuiing. 

220     Economic  Geography  (3)  This  course  is 
concerned  with  the  spatial  patterns  of  economic 
activities,  including  production,  consumption, 
and  setdement.  It  provides  an  understanding  of 
their  location  and  the  processes  of  change.  The 
course  is  international  in  scope,  with  an  empha- 
sis on  the  global  economy. 


225     Map  and  Aerial  Photo  Interpretation  (3)  A 
laboratory  course  designed  to  develop  skills  in 
and  promote  an  understanding  of  maps  and 
aerial  photos.  Offered  in  fall  semester. 
230     Conservation  of  Natural  Resources  (3)  An 
inquiry  into  the  type,  size,  and  distribution  of 
natural  resources,  and  into  the  problems  of 
resource  management.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the 
United  States. 

232     Environmental  Crises  (3)  The  nature  and 
dimensions  of  environmental  problems  with  an 
emphasis  on  endangered  life-support  systems. 
Aspects  of  natural  and  social  environment  sys- 
tems and  their  mutual  interrelationships. 
236     Climatology  (3)  Climatic  variations  on  the 
earth  and  their  classification  into  regional  types. 
Relationships  of  plants,  soils,  and  cultures  to 
types  of  climate.  PREREQ:  GEO  102  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor 

252     Macro  Political  Geography  (3)  A  study  of 
selected  major  themes  in  political  geography  at 
the  regional  and  international  levels. 
301     United  States  and  Canada  (3)  An  exami- 
nation of  the  complexity  and  diversity  of  the 
physical  and  human  landscapes  of  the  U.S.  and 
Canada.  Both  rural  and  urban  geography  are 
studied  with  an  emphasis  on  recent  geographic 
changes  of  influence  —  such  as  the  shift  from  an 
emphasis  on  production  to  one  on  service  and 
consumption,  the  growing  importance  of  cities, 
and  increasing  racial  and  ethnic  diversity. 
"302     Latin  America  (3)  Central  and  South 
America  are  studied  with  emphasis  on  under- 
standing the  major  sources  of  change  in  recent 
times.  The  course  focuses  on  up  to  four  coun- 
tries in  addition  to  presentation  of  the  region  as 
a  whole.  Usually  offered  spring  semester  and 
summer. 

"303     Europe  (3)  A  regional  study  of  Europe, 
excluding  the  USSR  and  its  sateUites.  Includes 
a  macrostudy  of  the  continent  and  sequential 
microstudies  of  culturalized  landscapes.  Usually 
offered  spring  semester  and  summer.  PREREQ: 
GEO  101  or  permission  of  instructor. 
"304    The  Soviet  Union  (3)  A  regional  study  of 
European  and  Asiatic  U.S.S.R  with  analysis  of 
geographic  factors  that  contribute  to  its  strengths 
and  weaknesses  as  a  major  world  power. 
PREREQ:  GEO  101  or  permission  of  instructor. 
310     Population  Problems  (3)  The  dynamic 
processes  of  population  change  (fertility,  mortal- 
ity, and  migration)  and  the  resultant  changes  in 
population  distribution  and  composition.  In 
addition  to  a  substantive  study  of  these  topics, 
students  are  introduced  to  the  use  of  primary 


data  sources  for  demographic  description  and 
poUcy  recommendation.  Usually  offered  spring 
semester. 

312     Urban  Geography  (3)  Analysis  of  patterns, 
processes,  and  consequences  of  urban  growth 
and  development.  Theory  of  systems,  size,  spac- 
ing, and  functions  of  cities.  Students  will  con- 
duct outside  analysis  using  real  dau. 
320     Land  Use  Planning  (3)  An  inquiry  into  the 
development  of  comprehensive  land  use  studies 
by  governmental  and  private  agencies,  emphasiz- 
ing the  development  of  skills  in  problem  identifi- 
cation and  resolution.  PREREQ:  GEO  214  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

322     Land  Development  Controb  (3)  An 

insight  into  the  "why"  and  "how"  of  land  develop- 
ment, emphasizing  the  role  of  local  government 
in  zoning,  subdivision  regulation,  and  other  land 
regulations.  PREREQ:  GEO  214  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

324     Introduction  to  Geographic  Information 
Systems  (3)  Data  sources  and  analysis  tech- 
niques used  in  the  planning  process,  with 
emphasis  on  appropriate  applications.  Students 
receive  considerable  experience  in  using  geo- 
graphic information  systems  technology  to  solve 
real-world  problems.  PREREQ:  GEO  214  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

326     Geographical  Analysis  (3)  Applications  of 
basic  statistical  techniques  to  problems  of  spatial 
significance,  emphasizing  the  adaptation  of  tech- 
nique to  problem,  and  the  understanding  and 
interpretation  of  specific  analytical  methods  as 
applied  to  real-world  situations.  PREREQ:  MAT 
103  or  higher  level  mathematics  course  must  be 
passed  with  a  2.0  or  better  prior  to  enrollment  in 
GEO  326. 

328     Computer  Graphics  (3)  Structured  to 
develop  skills  in  the  design  and  use  of  analytical 
and  computer-mapping  systems,  the  course 
emphasizes  the  techniques  of  spatial  problem 
resolution  and  display.  PREREQ:  GEO  225  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

"330     Population  Analysis  (3)  A  course 
designed  to  develop  skills  in  demographic 
research,  emphasizing  interrelationships  of  popu- 
lation processes,  use  and  limitation  of  data 
sources,  and  the  understanding  and  interpreta- 


♦Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 
#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 
"  Culture  Cluster. 


Department  of  Management      lli 


tion  of  specific  demographic  and  related  analyt- 
ical methods.  PREREQ:  GEO  310  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

338     Computer  Applications  in  Social  Research 
(3)  The  use  of  existing  and  student-generated 
programming  software  in  the  design  and  execu- 
tion of  social  research. 

400  Senior  Seminar  in  Geography  (3)  The 
study  of  historical  and  contemporary  trends  in 
geography;  the  design,  preparation,  and  defense 
of  a  research  proposal.  Offered  in  fall  semester. 

401  Cartography  (4)  A  laboratory  course  to 
develop  proficiency  in  the  design,  construction, 
and  appropriate  application  of  maps  and  map- 
related  graphics.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 
PREREQ;  GEO  225  or  permission  of  instructor. 
♦  402     Topical  Seminar  in  Geography  (3) 
Intensive  examination  of  a  selected  area  of  study 


in  the  field  of  geography.  Topics  will  be 
aimounced  at  the  time  of  offering.  Course  may 
be  taken  more  than  once  when  different  topics 
are  presented.  PREREQ;  Junior  or  senior  geogra- 
phy major  or  consent  of  instructor. 

403  Presenting  Planning  Information  (3) 
Selected  experiences  designed  to  assist  the  stu- 
dent (either  as  an  individual  or  as  a  member 
of  a  group)  in  developing  proficiency  in 
information-providing  techniques. 

404  Senior  Project  in  Geography  (3)  The  exe- 
cution of  the  research  proposal  (designed  in 
GEO  400)  as  an  acceptable  departmental  senior 
research  paper.  Offered  in  spring  semester. 
PREREQ;  GEO  400. 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  Geography  (3) 
Research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  geogra- 
phy. PREREQ;  Permission  of  department  chaiipereon. 


♦  415     Internship  in  Geography  and  Planning 
(3-15)  Practical  job  experience  in  applying  geo- 
graphic theory,  executing  substantive  research, 
and  engaging  in  community  service  in  selected 
off-campus  situations.  Open  only  to  upper- 
division  BA.  majors  and  minors  in  geography/ 
planning  with  permission  of  department  chair- 
person. 

424     Geographic  Information  Systems  Applica- 
tions (3)  A  course  to  advance  the  student's 
knowledge  of  the  design  and  implementation  of 
geographic  information  systems.  PREREQ;  GEO 
324  or  permission  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Management 

Rani  G.  Selvanathan,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Chu,  Paden 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Selvanathan,  McGee,  Snow 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Hamilton,  Leach,  Murphy 

The  primary  objective  of  the  Depariiment  of  Management  is 
to  provide  students  with  the  skills  required  to  manage  busi- 
ness and  public  organizations  efifectively. 
To  accomplish  this  objective,  the  faculty  of  the  Department 
of  Management  will  strive: 

(1)  to  inculcate  in  the  student  the  ability  to  reason  analyti- 
cally and  critically 

(2)  to  make  the  student  sensitive  to  the  human  relations 
aspect  of  managing  others 

(3)  to  increase  the  student's  awareness  of  the  concepts  and 
terms  used  in  current  managerial  practice 

(4)  to  increase  the  student's  awareness  of  the  international 
dimension  of  business 

(5)  to  increase  the  student's  skills  in  written  and  verbal 
communication 

(6)  to  foster  the  student's  ability  to  synthesize  the  knowl- 
edge acquired  from  various  disciplines  in  order  to  focus 
on  managerial  problems 


The  Department  of  Management  offers  a  B.S.  in  business 
management,  which  focuses  on  fianctions  required  to  make  a 
group  of  people  work  effectively  together  as  a  unit.  These 
functions  include  planning,  organizing,  stafiing,  directing, 
and  controlling. 


DEGREE  REQUIREMENTS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 
(Includes  ECO  111*.  See  appropriate  curricu- 
lum guidance  sheet.) 

2.  Business  and  Economics  Core 

ACC  201*,  202*;  BLA  201*  or  MGT  313; 
ECO  112*,  251,  252,  and  335;  FIN  325;  MGT 
300*,  341,  and  499;  and  MKT  301*  and  327 
(*A  minimum  grade  of  C  must  be  attained  in 
each  of  these  courses.) 

3.  Other  courses  required  by  business  programs; 
CSC  101  and  MAT  107.  These  courses  satisfy 
and  are  included  under  general  requirements. 

4.  Other  course  required:  MAT  108 

5.  Major  concentration 

MGT  313,  321,  431,  441,  and  498 

6.  Economics  or  Business  Electives 

7.  Free  Electives 


51  semester  hours 


39  semester  hours 


3  semester 
15  semester 

9  semester 
12  semester 


hours 
hours 

hours 
hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MANAGEMENT 
Symbol;  MGT 

100  (formerly  101)     Introduction  to  Business 
(3)  Survey  of  the  structure  and  fvmction  of  the 
American  business  system.  Topics  covered 
include  forms  of  business  organization,  funda- 
mentab  of  management,  fundamentals  of  market- 
ing, basic  accounting  principles  and  practices, 
elements  of  finance,  money  and  banking,  busi- 
ness and  government,  and  careers  in  business. 
Open  to  nonbusiness  majors. 

300  (formerly  301)  Principles  of  Management 
(3)  Introduction  to  the  principles  and  functions 
of  management.  Examines  the  management  pro- 
cess, organizational  theory,  planning,  decision 
making,  motivation,  and  leadership  in  supervi- 
sory contexts.  PREREQ:  ECO  111  and  112,  and 
ACC  201. 


313  (formerly  408/411)     Business  and  Society 
(3)  An  analysis  of  the  social,  pohtical,  legal, 
environmental,  and  ethical  problems  faced  by 
business  firms.  PREREQ;  MGT  300. 
321  (formerly  402)     Organization  Theory  and 
Behavior  (3)  Study  of  the  theoretical  foundations 
of  organization  and  management.  The  system  of 
roles  and  functional  relationships.  Practical 
application  of  the  theory  through  case  analysis. 
PREREQ;  MGT  300. 

333  (formerly  334)     Labor  Relations  (3)  Rise  of 
the  American  labor  movement.  Labor  legislation. 
Collective  bargaining  arrangements.  Procedures 
in  setding  labor  disputes.  Organized  labor's  poli- 
cies and  practices.  PREREQ;  MGT  300. 

341  (formerly  303)     Production  and  Opera- 
tions Management  (3)  Methods  analysis,  work 
measurement,  and  wage  incentives.  Production 
process  and  system  design.  Plant  location,  lay- 
out, sales  forecasting,  inventory,  production,  and 


quality  control,  to  include  statistical  aspects  of 
tolerances,  acceptance  sampling,  development  of 
control  charts,  PERT,  and  cost  factors.  PREREQ; 
CSC  101  or  equivalent,  MAT  107  and  108,  MGT 
300.  ECO  111,  112,251,252. 

431  (formerly  302/331)     Human  Resource 
Administration  (3)  Study  of  a  well-plannedr 
properly  executed,  and  efficiendy  evaluated 
approach  to  manpower  recruitment,  screening, 
usage,  and  development.  Case  analysis  and/or 
experiential  exercises  to  illustrate  the  concepts 
used.  PREREQ;  MGT  300  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

441  (formerly  406)     Introduction  to  Manage- 
ment Science  (3)  Business  problems  in  produc- 
tion, inventory,  finance,  marketing,  and  transpor- 
tation translated  into  application  of  scientific 
methods,  techniques,  and  tools  to  provide  those 
in  control  of  the  system  with  optimum  solutions. 
PREREQ;  MGT  341  or  permission  of  instructor 


I£l      Department  of  Marketing 


451  (formerly  407)     Systems  Management  (3) 
Application  of  systems  theory  and  principles  to 
the  operation  of  contemporary  organizations 
with  emphasis  on  nonquantitatlve  methods  of 
analysis.  PREREQ:  MGT  321. 
471  (formerly  401)     Entrepreneurship  (3) 
Organization  of  a  business  venture  with  empha- 
sis on  risk,  requirements,  roles,  and  rewards. 
Students  develop  a  simulated  venture,  with  oral 
and  written  repon.  PREREQ:  ACC  201  and  202, 
FIN  325,  MGT  300,  MKT  301,  or  permUsion  of 
instructor. 

♦  483  (formerly  450-451)     Management 
Internship  (3)  The  management  internship  is 
designed  to  enhance  the  student's  educational 
experience  by  providing  a  substantive  work 
expenence  in  the  business  world.  PREREQ: 
Internship  program  coordinator's  approval. 

486  Management  Internship  (6)  The  manage- 
ment internship  is  designed  to  enhance  the  stu- 
dent's educational  experience  by  providing  a  sub- 
stantive work  experience  in  the  business  world. 
PREREQ:  Internship  program  coordinator's 
approval. 

487  (formerly  490)     Special  Topics  in  Manage- 
ment (3)  This  course  deals  with  current  concepts 
in  management  not  covered  by  existing  courses. 
The  course  content  is  determined  at  the  begin- 
ning of  each  semester.  PREREQ:  MGT  300. 

♦  488  (formerly  410)     Independent  Studies  in 
Management  (1-3)  Special  research  projects, 
reports,  and  readings  in  management.  Open  to 
seniors  only.  PREREQ:  Instructor's  approval. 


498  (formerly  400)     Senior  Seminar  in  Man- 
agement (3)  Students  are  engaged  in  reading  and 
research  on  current  developments  in  manage- 
ment. Research  project  is  required  to  help 
expand  and  deepen  the  horizorts  of  the  partici- 
pants. PREREQ:  Senior  standing,  MGT  300. 
Seniors  eUgible  for  graduation  at  the  end  of  the 
coming  semester  take  priority  for  registration 
during  the  preregistration  period. 

499  (formerly  405)     Business  Strategy  (3)  A 
capstone  course  for  all  business  majors,  requiring 
students  to  integrate  and  apply  multidisciplinary 
knowledge  and  skills  in  actively  formulating 
improved  business  strategies  and  plans.  Case 
method  predominates.  Written  reports.  PREREQ: 
Senior  standing  in  ACC,  ECO,  FIN,  MKT,  or 
MGT  major;  prior  completion  of  all  courses  in 
Business  and  Economics  Core  except  ECO  335. 
Seniors  eligible  for  graduation  at  the  end  of  the 
coming  semester  take  priority  for  registration 
during  the  preregistration  period. 

MANAGEMENT  INFORMATION 
SYSTEMS 

Symbol:  MIS 

300  (formerly  200)     Introduction  to  Manage- 
ment Information  Systems  (3)  A  comprehensive 
introduction  to  the  role  of  information  systems  in 
an  oiganizadonal  environment  This  course 
focuses  on  transforming  manual  and  automated 
data  into  useful  information  for  managerial  deci- 
sion making.  PREREQ:  MGT  300. 


451  (formerly  350)     Systems  Analysis  and 
Design  (3)  The  course  develops  the  necessary 
skills  for  analysis  of  organizational  environments 
in  light  of  information  system  needs,  as  well  as 
the  skill  to  design  such  systems. 
PREREQ:  MIS  300. 

453  (formerly  360)     Decision  Support  Systems 
(3)  This  course  is  an  advanced  presentation  of 
the  role  of  management  information  systems  in 
the  special  suppon  needs  of  managers  for  aiding 
decision  making.  PREREQ:  MIS  300,  451,  and 
MGT  441. 

INTERNATIONAL  BUSINESS 

Symbol:  INB 

300  (formerly  301)     Introduction  to  International 
Business  (3)  Analysis  of  international  business 
transactions  in  large  and  small  businesses,  multina- 
tional and  domestic.  Functional  emphasis  on  mul- 
tinational enviroimient,  managerial  processes,  and 
business  strategies.  PREREQ:  MGT  300. 

469  (formerly  402)     International  Management 
Seminar  (3)  Study  of  issues  confronting  execu- 
tives as  they  plan,  organize,  staff,  and  control  a 
multinational  organization.  Lectures,  case  analy- 
ses, and  outside  projects  with  local  firms 
engaged  in,  or  entering,  international  business 
wUl  be  utilized.  PREREQ:  INB  300  and  MGT 
300. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Marketing 

John  Redington,  Chairperson 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Foutz,  Morgan,  Redington 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR:  Gault 

The  piimary  objective  of  the  Department  of  Marketing  is  to 
prepare  students  for  careers  in  business  and  government. 
To  accomplish  this,  the  faculty  of  the  Department  of  Market- 
ing will  strive: 

(1)  to  create  an  understanding  of  the  role  that  marketing 
plays  in  the  American  and  foreign  social  and  economic 
systems 

(2)  to  create  an  understanding  of  the  scope  and  content  of 
marketing  as  an  apparatus  of  the  mind  used  to  reconcile 
company  profitability  with  customer  satisfaction  and 
social  responsibility 

(3)  to  assist  students  in  acquiring  skills  required  for  a  suc- 
cessful marketing  career  in  business  in  the  United  States 
as  well  as  in  foreign  countries 

(4)  to  offer  students  the  opportunity  to  leam  and  use  mod- 
em management  technologies 

(5)  to  understand  the  legal  and  ethical  framework  of  compe- 
tition and  business  conduct 


The  B.S.  in  MARKETING  focuses  on  acti'vities  required  to 
get  goods  and  services  from  producers  to  consumers. 
Emphasis  is  on  understanding  consumers'  needs  and  design- 
ing strategies  to  meet  these  needs. 


51  semester  hours 


39  semester  hours 


DEGREE  REQUIREMENTS: 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 
(Include  ECO  111*.  See  appropriate  curricu 
lum  guidance  sheet.) 

2.  Business  and  Economics  Core 
ACC  201',  202*;  BLA  201*;  ECO  112*,  251, 
252,  and  335;  FIN  325;  MGT  300*,  341,  and 
499;  and  MKT  301*  and  327 

(* A  minimum  grade  of  C  -  must  be  attained 
in  each  of  these  courses.) 

3.  Other  courses  required  by  the  business  program: 
CSC  101  and  MAT  107.  These  courses  satisfy 
and  are  included  under  the  general  require- 
ments. 

4.  Other  course  required:  MAT  108  3  semester 

5.  Major  concentration  courses:  15  semester 
MKT  303,  320  or  321  or  322,  400,  404,  and  408 

6.  Economics  or  Business  Electives  9  semester 

7.  Free  Electives  12  semester 


hours 
hours 

hours 
hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
LAW 

Symbol:  BLA 

201     American  Legal  System  (3)  Examines  the 
enforcement  of  social  goals  on  business  organiza- 
tions through  law.  The  constitutional  basis  for 


administrative  regulation  of  businesses,  the  prac- 
tice and  nature  of  administrative  regulation  and 
administrative  procedure,  and  the  principal  sub- 
jects of  current  administrative  regulation  will  be 
surveyed. 

202     Special  Subjects  in  Business  Law  (3) 
In-depth  coverage  of  the  legal  topics  of  contracts 


and  sales.  It  is  intended  as  a  partial  preparation 
for  the  uniform  Certified  PubUc  Accountant 
(CPA)  examination  and  thus  provides  students 
with  an  adequate  knowledge  of  the  most  widely 
examined  subjects.  Provides  marketing  students 
with  a  detailed  knowledge  of  the  legal  topics  that 
they  will  use  in  their  careers  and  covers  basic 


Department  of  Political  Science 


legal  topics  highly  useful  to  management  majors 
and  all  persons  engaged  in  business. 
♦  303     L£gal  Problems  in  Business  (3)  Special 
legal  problems  in  business  will  be  considered  at 
length,  such  as  consumer  credit  regulation, 
insurance,  personal  law  relating  to  decedent's 
estates  and  Social  Security,  preparation  for  the 
CPA  examination,  etc.  This  course  may  be  taken 
more  than  once  (but  not  more  than  three  times) 
for  credit  if  the  subject  matter  of  the  course  is 
not  duplicated. 

INTERNAnONAL  BUSINESS 

Symbol:  INB 

302  International  Legal  Environment  (3)  Study 
of  laws  governing  mtemational  economic  activi- 
ties, and  public  and  private  law  (conflicts  of 
laws).  Basic  differences  between  American  and 
foreign  legal  systems  will  be  analyzed.  Differ- 
ences in  organizing  companies,  securities  laws, 
antitrust  laws,  and  trade  regulations  also  are 
studied. 

MARKETING 

Symbol:  MKT 

301     Principles  of  Marketing  (3)  A  study  of 
marketing  in  our  consumer-oriented  society  and 
the  management  of  marketing  activities,  includ- 
ing buying,  selling,  promotion,  ph>'sical  distribu- 
tion, product  planning,  and  consumer  behavior. 
PREREQ:  ECO  112. 

303  Consumer  Behavior  (3)  Foundations  of 
consumer  behavior.  Market  structure  and  con- 
sumer behavior,  purchase  strategy  and  tactics, 
determinants  and  patterns  of  consumer  behavior. 
An  integrated  theory  of  consumer  behavior  is 
sought.  PREREQ:  MKT  301. 


320  Managing  Sales  (3)  Source,  technique,  and 
theories  appUed  to  problems  encountered  in 
managing  a  sales  force  in  the  areas  of  administra- 
tion, pohcy,  organizational  structure,  persoiuiel 
selection  and  evaluation,  sales  training,  compen- 
sation, forecasting,  establishing  territories  and 
quotas,  and  sales  analysis.  Emphasis  on  case 
studies.  PREREQ:  MKT  301. 

321  Salesmanship  (3)  Analysis  of  the  selling 
process  applied  to  sales  calls  and  sales  strategies, 
communication,  persuasion,  motivation,  ethics, 
interpersonal  relationships,  negotiations,  and 
professionalism.  Emphasis  on  case  studies. 
PREREQ:  MKT  301. 

322  Advertising  and  Sales  Promotion  (3)  A 

study  of  advertising  and  sales  promotion  man- 
agement with  a  major  focus  on  organization, 
media,  strategy,  campaigns,  legal  control,  con- 
sumer behavior,  budgeting,  and  the  coordination 
of  these  activities  with  overall  marketing  pro- 
grams. PREREQ:  MKT  301. 

327     Marketing  Management  (3)  Study  of  pol- 
icy decision  making.  Organization  and  analysis 
of  marketing  opportunities.  Policy  decisions 
regarding  product,  price,  marketing  channels, 
physical  distribution,  advertising,  and  sales  mar- 
keting models  and  systems.  PREREQ:  MKT  301. 

400     Senior  Seminar  in  Marketing  (3)  A 
capstone  course  designed  to  offer  the  student 
practical  experience  in  the  practices  and  poUcies 
of  the  American  marketing  system.  A  deeper 
understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  marketing 
executive's  effort  to  balance  the  firm's  objectives 
with  existing  or  potential  market  opportunities. 
The  class  works  in  groups.  Emphasis  on  field 
work,  consulting,  computer  simulations,  and 


case  development.  PREREQ;  Senior  standing  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

401     Marketing  Channels  (3)  Distribution  strat- 
egies, including  efiBcient  planning  of  space,  time, 
and  distribution  costs  to  meet  consumer 
demand;  alternatives  in  charmel  structure,  poU- 
cies, management,  and  leadership;  methods  for 
improving  channel  performance;  channel  strategy 
in  the  future.  PREREQ:  MKT  301. 
404     International  Marketing  (3)  Historical  and 
theoretical  background  of  foreign  trade,  world 
marketing  environment  and  world  market  pat- 
terns, marketing  organization  in  its  international 
setting,  and  international  marketing  manage- 
ment. PREREQ:  MKT  301. 
408     Marketing  Research  (3)  Systematic  defini- 
tion of  marketing  problems,  strategies  for  data 
collection,  model  building,  and  interpretation  of 
results  to  improve  marketing  decision  making 
and  control.  PREREQ:  ECO  251  and  252,  and 
MKT  301. 

410     Independent  Studies  in  Marketing  (1-3) 
Special  research  projects,  reports,  and  readings 
in  marketing.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ: 
Permission  of  instructor. 

450-45 1     Marketing  Internship  (3-6)  The  mar- 
keting internship  is  designed  to  enhance  the  stu- 
dent's educational  experience  by  providing  a  sub- 
stantive work  experience  in  the  business  world. 
PREREQ:  Permission  of  internship  program 
coordinator. 

490    Special  Topics  in  Marketing  (3)  Special 
topics  in  marketing  not  covered  under  existing, 
regularly  offered  courses.  PREREQ:  MKT  301 
and  permission  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Political  Science 

Louis  F.  Weislogel,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Marbach,  Milne,  Shea 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Bums,  Bunon,  Eldredge, 
lacono,  Sandhu,  Smith,  Weislogel 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Polsky,  Schnell 

The  department  offers  a  variety  of  programs  tailored  to  stu- 
dents' career  goals  and  allows  a  ■wide  range  of  options  fol- 
lowing graduation. 

Bachelor  of  Arts  —  Political  Science  is  a  general  liberal  arts 
program  exposing  the  student  to  the  broad  areas  of  political 
science,  including  American  government,  international  rela- 
tions, comparative  government,  public  administration,  politi- 
cal behavior,  and  political  theory. 

Bachelor  of  Arts  —  Political  Science/Public  Administration  is 
for  students  who  plan  a  career  in  public  service.  It  includes 
relevant  courses  from  the  geography  and  planning  area. 
Bachelor  of  Arts  —  Political  Science/International  Relations 
is  for  students  with  a  primary  interest  in  international  affairs 
and  includes  relevant  cognates  in  several  disciplines. 
All  three  Bachelor  of  Arts  programs  are  intended  for  students 
with  an  interest  in  government  and  public  service,  journal- 
ism, and  the  law. 

Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education  —  Social  Studies  offers 
concentrations  in  general  social  studies,  geography,  and 
polirical  science. 


51  semester  hours 

0-15  semester  hours 

12  semester  hours 


33  semester  hours 


The  department  also  sponsors  pre-law  advising,  the  Law 
Society,  and  the  Political  Science  Club. 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  POUTICAL  SCIENCE 

The  B_A.  in  political  science  is  designed  for  those  having  an  interest 
in  understanding  their  society  and  the  world.  It  has  the  same  broad 
relevance  as  other  liberal  arts  degrees  and  special  relevance  for 
careers  in  such  fields  as  pre-law,  politics,  public  relations,  and  jour- 
nalism. Internships  may  be  arranged. 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirements 

3.  Additional  Social  Science  Courses  in  each 
of  three  disciplines  not  selected  under  Gen- 
eral Requirements,  plus  HIS  152 

4.  Political  Science  Requirements 

A.  American  Government  and  Politics  (PSC 
100)  and  Foundations  of  Political  Science 
(PSC  200) 

B.  One  course  in  each  of  the  following  six 
fields:  international  relations,  political 
behavior,  political  theory,  comparative 
government,  American  government,  and 
public  administration 

C.  Political  Science  Symposium  (PSC  399)  or 
approved  substitute  elective 

D.  Senior  Project  (PSC  401) 

E.  Two  additional  political  science  courses 
above  the  100  level 

5.  Additional  Free  Electives  up  to  30  semester  hours 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  INTERNAHONAL  RELATIONS 

The  international  relations  concentration  is  intended  for  the  student 
who  wishes  to  deepen  his  or  her  understanding  of  world  affairs.  It 


Department  of  Political  Science 


is  appropriate  for  students  planning  careers  in  areas  related  to  inter- 
national affairs  as  well  as  pre-law,  politics,  and  journalism. 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  5 1  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language,  intermediate  level  0-12  semester  hours 

3.  Political  Science  Requirements  18  semester  hours 

A.  Core;  PSC  100  or  121,  200,  213,  217,  359 
or  399,  and  401  or  402 

B.  Required  Cognate:  HIS  330  or  357  3  semester  hours 

C.  Additional  International  Cluster  (two  of        6  semester  hours 
the  following):  PSC  256,  311,  315,  316, 

317,319,  and  414 

D.  Related  Political  Science  (three  of  the  9  semester  hours 
following):  PSC  240,  246,  340,  341,  342,  343, 

348,  and  349 


4.  Related  Cognates  (See  guidance  sheet.)  15  semester  hours 

5.  Additional  Free  Electives  up  to  30  semester  hours 

Minor  in  Political  Science  18  semester  hours 

Students  may  minor  in  general  political  science  or  in  one  of  the 
subfields  such  as  international  relations.  Students  take  PSC  100 
plus  five  courses  in  a  concentrated  area,  or  (at  least  two)  areas 
under  departmental  advisement. 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies  gen- 
eral degree  program. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Symbol:  PSC,  unless  otherwise  indicated 

♦  100     American  Government  and  Politics  (3) 
Devoted  to  understanding  how  the  system 
works:  political  action,  elections,  interest  groups, 
civil  liberties,  Congress,  the  presidency,  and  the 
courts  are  among  the  topics  considered.  Seeks  to 
provide  a  framework  in  terms  of  which  process 
and  current  issues  become  meaningful.  Offered 
each  semester. 

*121     Introduction  to  Government  and  Politics 
(3)  Survey  of  fundamental  concepts  in  political 
science  Considers  nature  of  the  state,  freedom, 
sovereignty,  equality,  theories  of  representation, 
and  other  areas.  Offered  each  semester. 
Nonmajors  only. 

200     Foundations  of  Political  Science  (3)  Incor- 
porates techniques  for  analyzing  political  ques- 
tions logically  and  systematically,  and  introduces 
basic  research  design  and  methodological  and 
library  usage  skills  appropriate  to  the  political 
science  discipline.  Required  course  for  BA. 
majors  in  political  science,  public  administration 
and  international  relations  and  the  B.S.  in  Edu- 
cation with  a  political  science  concentration. 
Optional  course  for  minors  in  political  science, 
public  administration,  and  international  rela- 
tions PREREQ:  PSC  100.  Cannot  be  used  to 
meet  University  general  education  requirements. 
Offered  each  semester. 

#204     Introduction  to  Urban  Studies  (3)  An 
examination  of  the  breadth  of  urban  studies  from 
the  perspectives  of  many  social  science  disci- 
plines. Philadelphia  is  emphasized  as  an  object  of 
perception,  as  a  place  of  life  and  liveUhood,  and 
as  an  example  of  continual  change  in  the  urban 
environment.  PREREQ:  ENG  121. 
*213     International  Relations  (3)  Politics 
among  nations,  including  politics  carried  on 
through  international  organizations.  Examines 
power  poUtics,  techniques  of  diplomacy,  and 
methods  of  current  international  organizations. 
Special  attention  to  U.S.  interests  and  policies. 
Offered  each  semester. 

217    American  Foreign  Policy  (3)  Cultural, 
political,  economic,  and  psychological  influences 
on  policy;  process  of  decision  making.  Special 
attention  to  a  few  policy  areas  such  as  relations 
with  allied,  underdeveloped,  revolutionary,  or 
Communist  countries.  Possible  response  to 


*  Approved  distributive  requirement  course. 
#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 
'  Culture  Cluster 


threats  of  war.  population  growth,  resource 
shortages,  and  pollution  may  be  examined. 
240     Introduction  to  Comparative  Politics  (3) 
An  introduction  to  the  comparative  study  of 
political  systems  at  various  stages  of  cultural, 
social,  economic,  and  political  development. 
"246     Soviet  Politics  (3)  Mandsm-Leninism,  the 
functioning  of  the  poUtical  system,  and  its  domi- 
nation of  all  areas  of  Soviet  life.  Some  brief 
attention  to  the  conduct  of  Soviet  foreign  policy. 
232     Civil  liberties  and  Civil  Rights  (3)  A  sur- 
vey of  the  sources  of  civil  liberties  and  civil 
rights  in  the  United  Slates  with  an  inquiry  into 
contemporary  problems  and  their  solutions 
through  statutory  and  constitutional  develop- 
ments. 

256     Energy  and  the  Political  Process  (3) 
Stresses  the  process  of  poUcy  making  and  imple- 
mentation in  the  field  of  energy.  Emphasis  also 
is  given  to  foreign  poUcy  and  natural  security 
implications. 

301     Women  in  Politics  (3)  The  role  of  women 
in  politics  is  surveyed.  Considerations  include 
the  relationship  between  the  sexes  as  it  impacts 
politics. 

311     Soviet  Foreign  PoUcy  (3)  Emphasis  on 
Soviet-American  relations  since  1945  and  a  com- 
parison of  the  two  societies.  Topics  treated 
include  the  influence  of  Marxism,  Great  Russian 
nationalism,  and  historical  experience  on  Soviet 
foreign  relations.  PREREQ:  PSC  213  or  246  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

315  War  or  Survival  (3)  Examines  the  use  of 
miUtary  force,  and  the  economic,  social,  and 
political  impact  of  mihtarization  and  nuclear 
weapons  strategy.  Considers  arms  control  and 
disarmament,  alternative  security  systems,  and 
the  citizen's  role. 

316  World  Order:  Problems,  Approaches,  and 
Prospects  (3)  Examines  global  interdependence, 
conflict,  and  cooperation  regarding  contemporary 
and  future  world  problems,  such  as  nationalism, 
resources,  etc.  Considers  alternative  approaches 
to  cooperation  and  means  of  bringing  about 
change. 

317  Contemporary  International  Relations  (3) 
Recent  issues  and  problems  with  special  empha- 
sis on  superpower  behavior  around  the  world. 
Also,  third  world  revolutions,  international  ter- 
rorism, human  rights,  international  law  and  the 
United  Nations,  and  the  changing  international 
economic  order. 

319     Middle  Eastern  Politics  (3)  Topics  include 
the  Arab-IsraeU  conflict,  the  poUtics  of  the  Per- 
sian Gulf,  the  role  of  OPEC,  and  the  superpower 
conflict  in  the  region. 


322  Public  Opinion,  Propaganda,  and  Political 
Behavior  (3)  The  dynamics  of  opinion  formation 
and  change  and  the  role  of  public  opinion  in 
policy  formation.  Political  socialization,  survey 
research  and  political  socialization,  survey 
research,  and  propaganda  techniques  are  also 
considered. 

323  Racial  and  Ethnic  Politics  (3)  This  course 
examines  the  relationship  between  racial  and 
ethnic  groups'  political  behavior  and  the  Ameri- 
can political  system's  response  to  them  in  terms 
of  its  pubUc  poUcies. 

324  American  Political  Parties  (3)  Patterns, 
functions,  and  history  of  the  American  political 
party  system  at  national,  state,  and  local  levels. 
Theoretical  and  empirical  studies  of  political 
interest  groups,  public  opinion,  and  voting 
behavior. 

329    Judicial  Behavior  (3)  A  behavioral 
approach  to  the  law,  with  specific  reference  to 
conceptual,  methodological,  and  ideological  con- 
siderations. Depending  on  the  availabihty  of 
information,  role-playing  simulations  will  be 
used  with  students  portraying  judges  and  attor- 
neys. 

338  Introduction  to  Political  Thought  (3) 
Great  political  thinkers  of  Western  civilization 
from  Plato  to  the  present.  Historical  background 
of  Western  thought  and  its  relevance  to  the 
present  poUtical  world. 

339  Contemporary  Political  Thought  (3)  Con- 
sideration of  major  poUtical  thinkers  since  Marx. 
Includes  \vritings  and  poUtical  significance  of 
Marcuse.  Fromm.  Lenin.  Trotsky,  and  the  Demo- 
cratic Socialists. 

'340     Latin-American  Culture  and  PoUtics  (3) 
Comparative  analysis  of  contemporary  Latin- 
American  systems.  PoUtical  cultures,  decision 
making,  ideologies,  and  poUtical  processes. 
Emphasis  is  on  Mexico  and  Central  America. 
Offered  each  semester. 

341     Politics  of  Non-Western  Areas  (3)  Empha- 
sis on  the  general  problems  of  nation  building, 
poUtical  participation,  and  elite-mass  relation- 
ships in  less-developed  nations.  African  nations, 
Latin  America,  or  Asia  may  be  emphasized. 
PREREQ:  PSC  100  or  equivalent. 
"342     Government  and  Cultures  of  Western 
Europe  (3)  Primary  attention  focuses  on  France, 
West  Germany,  and  Great  Britain;  secondary 
attention  is  on  other  European  systems.  PoUtical 
cultures,  popular  participation,  political  parties, 
and  formal  institutions  of  government.  PREREQ: 
PSC  100  or  equivalent. 

343     Culture  and  PoUtics  of  Asia  (3)  Study  of 
cultural,  philosophical,  and  poUtical  systems  of 


Political  Science/Public  Administration  Programs 


modem  Asia  with  special  emphasis  on  China, 
Japan,  and  India. 

348  African  Culture  and  Politics  (3)  The  polit- 
ical nature  and  practices  of  individuals,  organiza- 
tions, and  governments  of  Black  Africa  are  exam- 
ined in  the  cultural  context  of  the  contemporary 
independent  period.  PREREQ:  PSC  100  or  equiv- 
alent. 

349  Comparative  Communism  (3)  Compara- 
tive analysis  of  the  ideological,  political,  social, 
and  economic  systems  of  Communist  nations. 
Concentration  is  on  comparisons  between  the 
Soviet  Union  and  Communist  China,  but  other 
Communist  systems  also  are  considered. 
PREREQ:  PSC  100  or  equivalent. 

350  American  Constitutional  Law  (3)  The 
development  of  the  American  constitutional  sys- 
tem as  reflected  in  leading  decisions  of  the 
United  States  Supreme  Coun.  Emphasis  on 
national  powers,  federalism,  and  the  Bill  of 
Rights.  PREREQ:  PSC  100  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

355     Congressional  Politics  (3)  Deab  with  the 
internal  and  external  factors  that  influence  Con- 
gressional behavior,  including  the  roles  of  con- 
stituents, pressure  groups,  parties,  the  committee 
system,  rules,  and  the  leadership.  Their  relation- 
ships to  the  president  and  court  structure  and 
their  impact  on  electoral  politics  are  abo  consid- 
ered. Comparisons  with  state  legislatures. 


356    American  Public  Policy  (3)  Policy  forma- 
tion and  execution.  Policy  areas  considered  vary 
from  semester  to  semester.  May  include  role- 
playing.  PREREQ:  PSC  100  or  101  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

359    The  American  Presidency  (3)  In-depth 
analysis  of  the  nature  and  significance  of  the 
American  presidency,  including  constitutional 
development,  presidential  roles  and  customs,  the 
recruitment  process,  the  executive  branch,  and 
the  pohtics  of  the  presidency.  PREREQ:  At  least 
a  C  in  PSC  100  and  junior  level  status,  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

399  Political  Science  Symposium  (3)  Nature  of 
research  in  political  science.  Construction  of  a 
research  design.  Extensive  reading  in  an  area  of 
political  science.  Offered  each  semester. 

HBI  400,  401,  402  Harrisburg  Internship  Sem- 
inar (15)  A  full-semester  internship  in  Pennsyl- 
vania state  government.  Student  intern  is  placed 
in  cabinet-level  or  legislative  office.  Placement  (9 
cr);  Pohcy  Research  Project  (3  cr.);  Policy  Semi- 
nar (3  cr).  The  internship  is  open  to  any  junior 
or  senior  student,  regardless  of  major,  who  has  a 
minimum  GPA  of  3.50.  Stipend  involved. 

400  Senior  Seminar  in  Political  Science  (3) 
Research  in  political  science.  Methodology,  bibli- 
ography, and  presentation,  both  oral  and  written. 
The  research  paper  for  the  seminar  must  be 


acceptable  as  a  required  departmental  senior 
research  paper. 

401  Senior  Project  in  Polidcal  Science  (3) 
Execution  of  the  research  design  constructed  in 
PSC  399.  Involves  completion  of  a  major  senior 
paper  under  supervision  of  a  staff  member. 
Extensive  independent  effort.  PREREQ:  PSC  399. 
Offered  each  semester. 

402  Seminar  in  International  Relations  (3) 
Theme  centered  with  capstone  paper.  Senior  I.R. 
majors  only. 

410     Independent  Studies  in  Political  Science 
(1-3)  Research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in 
pohtical  science.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ: 
Permission  of  instructor. 
♦  412     Internship  in  Political  Science  (3-15) 
Upper-level  student  field  placement  learning. 
Short-term,  3-  to  6-hour  experiences  in  political 
settings  under  faculty  advisement;  and  9-  to 
15-hour  placements  in  state,  federal,  local  gov- 
ernment or  pubhc  service  agencies.  Learning 
contracts  and  faculty  advisement  create  a  whole 
experience  from  exposure  to  government  admin- 
istration and  pohtics.  Offered  each  semester 
414     International  Theory  (3)  General  theory 
appUed  to  specific  case  studies.  Advanced  read- 
ings. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Political  Science/Public  Administration 
Programs 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  POUTICAL  SCIENCE/ 
PUBLIC  ADMINISTRATION 

The  B.A.  in  political  science  with  a  concentration  in  public  admin- 
istration is  interdisciplinary  and  intended  to  prepare  students  for  a 
variety  of  possible  alternatives  in  state,  local,  and  federal  govern- 
ment as  well  as  with  private  interest  groups.  The  program  features 
internship  experiences  with  participating  agencies. 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirements      0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Additional  Social  Science  Courses  9  semester  hours 
In  each  of  two  disciplines  not  selected  under 

General  Requirements,  plus  HIS  152 

4.  Public  Administration  Concentration  21-27  semester  hours 
GEO  214;  PAD  361  or  363,  364,  375  or 

376,  377,  and  378;  PSC  356  or  PAD  374, 


plus  two  additional  geography  and 
planning  courses  taken  under  advisement 

5.  PAD  412  Internship 

6.  Political  Science  Symposium  (PSC  399) 
or  approved  substitute  elective 

7.  Senior  Project  (PSC  401) 

8.  PSC  100,  200,  and  one  additional  course 
at  200  or  300  level 

9.  Cognate  Requirements 
COM  208  or  230,  and  MAT  103  or  121 

10.  Additional  Free  Electives  up  to  24  semester  hours 

Minor  in  Public  Administration  21  semester  hours 

Students  take  PAD  364  and  PSC  100  plus  five  additional  courses  in 
public  administration  under  departmental  advisement.  This  minor 
may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the  Associate  of 
Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  Bach- 
elor of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  hberal  studies  general  degree 
program. 


0-15  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
POLITICAL  SCIENCE/PUBLIC 
ADMINISTRATION 

Symbol:  PAD 

361     State  and  Local  Government  (3)  Examina- 
tion of  the  organization,  functions,  and  politics 
of  state  and  local  government,  including  analysis 
of  politics  in  states,  counties,  cities,  and  towns  in 
urban,  suburban,  and  rural  areas.  Intergovern- 
mental relations  in  education,  transportation, 
and  welfare  policy  are  examined. 
363     Urban  Government  (3)  Structures  and 
processes  of  central  city  and  suburban  govern- 
ment are  considered.  Examines  patterns  and 
trends  in  governmental  organization  and  admin- 
istration as  well  as  sources  of  conflict  in  urban 
decision  making,  e.g.,  the  urbanization  process. 


race  and  class  antagonism,  and  city-suburban 
perspectives. 

364     Elements  of  Public  Administration  (3) 

Considers  public  administration  in  the  United 
States  as  a  process  of  implementing  public  pol- 
icy. Uses  case  studies  and  projects  with  texts 
focusing  on  organizational  theory,  human  behav- 
ior and  motivation,  budgeting,  personnel,  and 
administrative  responsibility.  Offered  each 
semester. 

369     Politics  of  Bureaucracy  and  Administra- 
tive Behavior  (3)  In-depth  examination  of  the 
fourth  branch  of  government.  Impact  of  the 
administration  apparatus  (bureaucracy)  on  pubhc 
policy  formulation  and  implementation.  Case 
studies  and  student  projects. 


373  American  Intergovernmental  Relations  (3) 

Designed  to  famiUarize  students  with  the  com- 
plex network  of  conflict,  cooperation,  and  inter- 
dependence among  national,  state,  and  local  gov- 
ernment units.  Topic  areas,  among  others, 
include  an  analysis  of  the  continuing  evolution 
of  American  federalism,  an  examination  of  this 
relationship  from  state  and  city  government 
perspectives,  and  a  description  of  specific 
intergovernmental  fiscal  programs  and  policies. 

374  Municipal  and  Administrative  Law  (3)  An 

in-depth  examination  of  the  impact  of  municipal 
law  and  local  regulation  and  its  social,  economic, 
and  pohtical  impact.  Attention  to  areas  such  as 
zoning. 

375  Government  Finance  (3)  Policy  choices 
for  public  sector  economic  activity.  National, 


Department  of  Social  Work 


state,  and  local  activities  in  allocation,  distnbu- 
tion,  and  stabilization  functions;  grants-in-aid; 
taxation.  Student  projects  in  revenue  studies. 
PREREQ;  PAD  364,  and  ECO  101  or  111. 

376     Government  Budgeting  (3)  Institutions 
and  processes  of  budget  formulation,  authoriza- 
tion, and  implementation  at  national,  state,  and 
local  levels.  Varying  formats  for  budgets,  line- 
items,  PPBS,  zero-base,  and  PDS  will  be  devel- 
oped by  students  for  some  unit  of  government. 
PREREQ:  PAD  364,  and  ECO  101  or  111. 


377  Government  Personnel  and  Management 
(3)  Examination  of  governmental  recruitment 
practices,  including  current  personnel  classifica- 
tion and  compensation  policies,  as  well  as  gov- 
ernment selection,  recruitment,  and  promotion 
procedures  Managerial  functions  of  oversight, 
supervision,  and  motivation  are  heavily  empha- 
sized. PREREQ:  PAD  364  is  recommended. 

378  Public  Organizations:  Theory  and  Practice 
(3)  Nature  of  public  organizations  such  as  gov- 
ernment agencies.  The  environment  of  their 


operations,  relations  to  public  and  private  orga- 
nizations, and  theories  of  their  structure  and 
behaviors,  stressing  the  public  setting  and  politi- 
cal processes  that  provide  their  functioning  envi- 
ronment. 

♦  412     Internship  in  Public  Administration 
(3-15)  Same  as  PSC  412,  but  for  students  with 
pubUc  administration  concentration.  PREREQ; 
PAD  364.  Offered  each  semester. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Social  Studies  With  Concentrations 
in  Political  Science 

Students  interested  in  teaching  secondary  school  social  studies  may 
pursue  a  concentration  in  poUncal  science  while  earning  state 


cernficadon  and  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education  degree.  See 
the  description  of  the  Social  Studies  section  on  pages  115-116. 


Department  of  Social  Work 

Mildred  C.  Joyner,  Chairperson 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Bartlett,  Ross,  Siegel 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Hodgins,  Joyner,  McCutcheon 

The  social  work  program  is  accredited  on  the  baccalaureate 
level  as  a  professional  degree  in  social  work  by  the  Council 
on  Social  Work  Education. 

The  social  work  program's  field  of  study  focuses  on  a  gener- 
alist  model  using  the  problem-solving  method  to  develop  a 
solid  foundation  of  knowledge,  values,  and  skills  leading  to 
competency  for  the  entry  level  of  social  work  practice.  The 
student  applies  theory  to  practice  in  varied  field  experiences 
in  the  sophomore,  junior,  and  senior  years. 

Students  interested  in  majoring  in  social  work  should  take 
Introduction  to  Social  Welfare  I  (SWO  200)  and  Develop- 
ment of  Professional  Self  (SWO  220)  during  the  fall  and 
spring  semesters  of  their  freshman  year.  Students  are 
required  to  maintain  a  GPA  of  2.25  for  up  to  64  earned  cred- 
its and  a  2.50  for  65  or  more  earned  credits  in  order  to  con- 
tinue in  the  social  work  program.  Students  also  are  expected 
to  demonstrate  attitudes  and  behavior  consistent  with  the 
values  and  ethics  of  professional  social  work  and  the  social 
work  code  of  ethics.  A  student  needs  a  2.75  overall  GPA  to 
be  eligible  for  certification  upon  graduation  by  the  Council 
of  Social  Work  Education. 

Policy  for  Social  Work  Majors 

Majors  are  required  to  meet  with  their  social  work  adviser  to  plan 
an  integrative  course  of  study,  to  select  courses  prior  to  scheduling, 
to  discuss  career  opportunities,  and  to  keep  abreast  of  departmental 
activities.  Handbooks  are  provided  to  help  students  be  aware  of 
requirements  and  procedures  in  the  department. 

Academic  Promotion  Policy 

Social  work  students  who  have  a  grade  of  I  (Incomplete),  D,  or  F 
in  required  courses  must  repeat  these  courses  and  achieve  a  satis- 
factory grade  before  entering  the  junior  field  placement.  Not  achiev- 
ing at  least  a  C  -  in  social  work  required  courses  is  considered 
grounds  for  dismissal  from  the  social  work  program. 


Department-Related  Activities 

The  honor  society  and  the  Social  Work  Club  are  student  organiza- 
tions that  involve  department  faculty  and  resources.  The  activities 
of  these  organizations  are  open  to  all  students.  For  more  informa- 
tion, see  the  Student  Activities  section  of  the  catalog. 
Transfer  credit  will  be  granted  for  freshman-  and  sophomore-level 
courses  if  (a)  the  course  descriptions  are  equivalent  and  (b)  the 
grades  are  C  or  above  in  social  work  related  courses.  All  required 
courses  in  professional  social  work  education  that  are  required  by 
the  Council  on  Social  Work  Education  must  be  taken  in  the  accred- 
ited program.  (^Exception:  students  transferring  from  a  social  work 
program  that  is  accredited  by  C.S.W.E.)  Transfer  students  can  be 
admitted  in  September  or  January. 

INTERNAL  TRANSFER  STUDENTS  (undeclared  majors  and  change 
of  majors)  who  desire  admission  to  the  Department  of  Social  Work 
may  apply  after  meeting  with  the  department  chairperson.  Students 
must  have  a  cumulative  GPA  of  2.25  for  up  to  64  earned  credits, 
and  a  2.50  for  65  or  more  earned  credits,  plus  an  interview  and 
completion  of  a  change  of  major  form  to  gain  admittance  into  the 
program. 

STUDENTS  TRANSFERRING  FROM  VARIOUS  COLLEGES  AND 
UNIVFRSITIES  who  desire  admission  to  the  Department  of  Social 
Work  may  apply  only  with  a  GPA  of  2.25  for  up  to  64  earned  cred- 
its, and  a  2.50  for  65  or  more  earned  credits. 

Department  Field  Placements  and  Volunteer  Experiences 

Social  work  students  do  volunteer  experience  in  the  freshman  year. 
During  the  second  semester  of  the  junior  year  and  in  both  semes- 
ters of  the  senior  year,  students  will  be  placed  in  various  social 
work  agencies  (see  partial  listing  of  social  work  field  placements). 
Students  must  have  completed  SWO  200,  220,  300,  320,  350,  and 
351  before  they  register  to  take  the  Junior  Field  Placement  in  the 
spring  semester. 

INSURANCE.  Students  are  required  to  carry  liability  insurance  cover- 
age in  the  amount  of  $1,000,000/3,000,000  during  the  second  semes- 
ter of  their  junior  and  the  entire  senior  year  at  a  yearly  cost  of 
approximately  $30.00.  Students  may  join  the  National  Association  of 
Social  Workers  to  receive  liability  insurance  at  a  reduced  rate. 

Social  Work  Field  Placements 

Students  have  been  placed  with  the  following  organizations  to  fulfill 
their  field  experience  requirements: 
Juvenile  Court  of  Delaware  County 
Brandywine  Hospital 
Women's  Alternatives 


Department  of  Social  Work 


Chester  County  Board  of  Assistance 
Chester  County  Children's  Services 
Crozer  Chester  Medical  Center 
Delaware  County  Children  and  Youth 
Delaware  County  Intermediate  Unit 
Help  Counseling  Drug  and  Alcohol  Program 
Family  Service-Mental  Health  Centers 

of  Chester  County 
United  Cerebral  Palsy  of  Chester  County 
Travelers  Aid  Society 
West  Chester  Area  Schools 
A.I.  DuPont  Institute 
Ronald  MacDonald  House 
Planned  Parenthood 
Chester  County  Services  for  Seniors 
Eagleville  Hospital 
Delaware  County  Juvenile  Court 
Haverford  State  Hospital 
First  Step  of  Chester  County 
Paoh  Hospital 
Pathway  School 
Philadelphia  Psychiatric  Center 
Veteran's  Administration 
Domestic  Relations  Coun 


51  semester  hours 
3-15  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 
57  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS -SOCIAL  WORK 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Foreign  Language/Cluster  Requirements 
(second  half  of  the  intermediate  year) 

3.  Social  Science  Cognates 

4.  Social  Work  Concentration 
SWO  200,  201,  220,  225,  300,  320-321, 
350-351,  375,  395,  431,  432,  450-451, 
and  495-496 

5.  Cognates  (Psycho-Social  Foundation)  3  semester  hours 

6.  Electives  6  semester  hours 
Social  work  majors  should  choose,  with  help  from  their  advisers, 
interdisciplinary  electives  geared  to  their  learning  needs  and  profes- 
sional interests. 

Minor  in  Social  Work  18  semester  hours 

A  minor  in  social  work  offers  students  (1)  an  understanding  of  the 
purposefiilness  of  human  behavior,  (2)  a  professional  method  with 
which  to  deal  effectively  with  that  behavior,  and  (3)  knowledge  of 
the  varied  fields  of  practice  of  social  work  and  how  they  relate  to 
the  student's  chosen  major  field.  Students  will  not  be  permitted  to 
take  social  work  field  practice  courses.  In  some  instances  a  collabo- 
rative field  internship  with  the  student's  major  discipline  will  be 
designed. 

Students  take  SWO  200,  201,  225,  300,  320,  and  321  and  an  elec- 
tive social  work  course.  Other  courses  may  be  selected  under 
advisement. 

To  declare  a  minor,  students  must  see  the  minor  adviser  and  com- 
plete the  declare  of  minor  forms. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
SOCL\L  WORK 

Symbol:  SWO 

PRIMARILY  FOR  FRESHMEN  AND 
SOPHOMORES 

200  Introduction  to  Social  Welfare  (3)  Current 
social  problems  and  the  influence  of  societal  val- 
ues on  their  definition  and  the  structures  devised 
to  meet  them.  Two  hours  per  week  of  volunteer 
experience  in  a  social  agency  is  required. 

220    The  Development  of  a  Professional  Self 
(3)  Students  are  provided  background  knowl- 
edge and  skills  to  function  professionally  in  soci- 
ety. The  course  adopts  the  psychological  per- 
spective that  links  self-concept  and  its 
development  with  group  behavior,  the  function 
of  social  reality,  and  social  role.  Offered  in  the 
spring  semester  only. 

222     Human  Service  Professionals  and  the  Law 
(3)  A  study  of  legislation  and  case  law  affecting 
social  welfare  programs  for  the  development  of 
an  understanding  of  legal  reasoning  and  key 
areas  of  legal  knowledge. 

225     Race  Relations  (3)  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
racial  awareness  by  examining  racial,  ethnic,  and 
cultural  differences  of  minority  groups  in  the 
United  States.  Offered  in  the  fall  and  spring 
semesters. 

B.A.  COURSES  FOR  SOCIAL  WORK 
MAJORS  AND  OTHER  UPPERCLASSMEN 

201  Advanced  Social  Welfare  Policies  (3)  The 

history  of  social  welfare  in  the  United  States,  and 


an  overview  of  major  fields  of  social  work  prac- 
tice with  emphasis  on  legislation  and  poUcy  for- 
mulation. 

300     Family  Systems  I  (3)  Introduction  to 
selected  items  in  systems  analysis,  emphasizing 
application  to  understanding  family  systems  and 
the  organizational  framework  of  human  behav- 
ior, offered  in  the  fall  semester  only. 

320  Principles  and  Methods  of  Social  Work 
Practice  I  (3)  The  integration  and  appUcation  of 
the  general  list  model  to  the  problem-solving 
method  of  social  work.  Offered  in  the  fall  semes- 
ter only. 

321  Principles  and  Methods  of  Social  Work 
Practice  II  (3)  A  continuation  of  SWO  320. 
Offered  in  the  spring  semester  only. 

330     Psycho-Social  Foundations  of  Human 
Behavior  I  (3)  Examination  of  life  stages  of  early 
childhood  through  adolescence.  Offered  in  the 
fall  semester  only. 

351     Psycho-Social  Foundations  of  Human 
Behavior  II  (3)  Continuation  of  SWO  350.  Focus 
on  middle  adulthood  to  aging.  Offered  in  the 
spring  semester  only. 

375     Field  Placement  (3)  Junior-year  field  expe- 
rience for  the  social  work  major.  Offered  in  the 
spring  semester  only. 
395    Junior  Seminar.  A  practice  seminar 
designed  to  relate  to  the  student's  field  place- 
ment. Offered  in  spring  semester  only. 
42 1     Mental  Health  and  Social  Work  Practice 
(3)  The  scope  of  mental  health  services  and  spe- 
cific practice  skills  for  social  work  with  mentally 
disturbed  or  retarded  clients  only. 
423     Special  Skills  in  Child  Protective  Services 
(3)  Emphasis  is  placed  on  understanding  child 


abuse  and  neglect,  assessment  of  persons  in  cri- 
ses, and  treatment  for  the  abused  and  neglected 
child  in  today's  society. 

431  Methods  of  Social  Inquiry  (3)  Fundamen- 
tab  of  problem  identification,  research  design, 
sampling,  observation,  data  collection  and  reduc- 
tion, and  nonstatistical  analysis.  Offered  in  the 
spring  semester  only. 

432  Advanced  Social  Welfare  Policies  (3)  A 
theoretical  framework  for  the  analysis,  formula- 
tion, implementation,  and  change  of  social  pol- 
icy, governmental  guidelines,  and  social  legisla- 
tion. Offered  in  the  fall  semester  only. 

COURSES  FOR  SOCIAL  WORK  MAJORS 
ONLY 

♦  410     Independent  Studies  in  Social  Work 
(1-3)  Special  research  projects  or  practices  in 
social  work  Juniors  and  seniors  only.  PREREQ: 
Permission  of  department  chairperson.  Offered  in 
the  fall,  spring,  and  summer  semesters. 

♦  450-451  Field  Experience  I-II  (6)  (6)  Super- 
vised work  experience  in  a  social  agency.  Seniors 
only.  Offered  in  the  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

♦  495     Senior  Seminar  in  Social  Work  (3)  Inte- 
gration of  field  and  classroom  experiences  in  dis- 
cussing the  application  of  the  generalist  model  to 
the  helping  process.  Offered  in  the  fall  semester. 
496     Social  Work  Process  Seminar  (3)  Seminar 
on  the  social  work  process  designed  to  relate  to 
the  second  semester  field  experience.  Offered  in 
the  spring  semester. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Education 


Michael  Hanes,  Dean 


Department  of  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

Robert  J.  Szabo,  Chairperson 

K.  Eleanor  Christensen,  Assistant  Chairperson 

Elizabeth  A.  Hasson,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Christensen,  Grasty-Gaines,  Keetz,  Maxim, 
Radich,  Ziegler 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Adams,  Dunlap,  Hasson, 
Maggitti,  Peters,  Szabo,  Zimmerman 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Baloche,  Beeghly,  BoUin,  Brown, 
Darigan,  Drobnak,  Egan,  Gibson,  Khouiy,  Kletzien,  Piatt, 
Prudhoe 

The  Department  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading  certifies 
teachers  for  elementary  education  (K-6)  and  early  childhood 
education  (NK-3). 

The  B.S.  Ed.  in  ELEMENTARY  EDUCAnON  curriculum  is 
designed  to  provide  a  broad  background  of  general  education,  an 
understanding  of  children,  and  the  knowledge  and  skills  needed  to 
teach  all  aspects  of  the  elementary  school  program.  Upon 
satisfactory  completion  of  the  approved  program,  the  student  will 
qualify  for  a  Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  Certificate,  vaUd  for  six 
years  of  teaching  in  Idnderganen  and  grades  one  through  six. 
The  B.S.  Ed.  in  EARLY  CHILDHOOD  EDUCAHON  curriculum  is 
designed  to  provide  both  the  liberal  education  and  special  prepara- 
tion required  for  careers  in  public  and  private  school  teaching  and 
directorship  and  supervisory  work  in  early  childhood  programs 
other  than  those  under  the  auspices  of  the  public  schools.  Upon 
satisfactory  completion  of  the  program,  the  student  will  qualify  for 
a  Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  Teaching  Certificate  valid  for  six 
years  of  teaching  in  preschool,  kindergarten,  and  grades  one 
through  three. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  BOTH  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Requirements:  see  pages  35-38 
Includes  MAT  101  and  requirements  in  an, 
literature,  philosophy,  psychology,  and 
computer  literacy 

2.  Professional  Education 
EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250  and  351* 


51  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCAHON  -  ELEMENTARY 

EDUCATION 

(Curriculum  K-6) 

1.  Specialized  Preparation  61  semester  hours 
EDE  200,  251-",  310*,  311*,  312*,  332*. 

352*,  401*,  406*.  410*,  and  411*;  HEA 
301;  LIT  395;  MAT  102*  and  351*  *;  MUE 
231;  PED  200;  and  SCE  310* 

2.  Elective  Area  6  semester  hours 

NOTE:  Music  and  physical  education  courses  may  count  toward  the 
general  requirements. 


*  Courses  requiring  prerequisites  —  check  catalog. 
*  *  Prerequisites  are  MAT  101  and  MAT  102  (unless  waived  by  examina- 
tion). 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  -  EARLY 

CHILDHOOD  EDUCAnON 

(Curriculum  NK-3) 

Specialized  Preparation  70  semester  hours 

ECE  100,  221*,  225*,  231*,  232,  306,  307, 

310,  320,  321*.  325*,  405*,  410*.  411*;  HEA 

211;  UT352;  MAT  349*;  MUE  232;  and  PED  449 

NOTE:  Music  and  physical  education  courses  may  count  toward  the 
general  requirements. 

Application  and  Approval  for  Student  Teachiiig 
Students  must  apply  through  the  depanment  for  approval  for  stu- 
dent teaching  in  early  childhood  education  (ECE  410  and  411)  and 
in  elementary  education  (EDE  410  and  411).  To  apply,  the  student 
must  complete  96  semester  hours  with  a  cumulative  GPA  of  2.50 
prior  to  the  student  teaching  semester.  As  pan  of  the  96  credits,  the 
student  must  complete  all  professional  education  courses  and  all 
specialized  preparation  courses  with  a  GPA  of  2.50.  (See  abo  stu- 
dent teaching,  pages  117-118.) 

An  application  for  student  teaching  must  be  filed  in  February  prior 
to  the  academic  year  in  which  student  teaching  is  to  be  scheduled. 
Application  meetings  will  be  announced  at  the  beginning  of  the 
spring  semester  each  year.  Scheduling  student  teaching  is  done  as 
for  other  courses. 

Field  Placement  in  Schools 

West  Chester  University  does  not  place  students  at  religiously  affili- 
ated schools  when  that  placement  results  in  the  students'  receiving 
academic  credit  (e.g.,  student  teaching).  In  addition,  the  University 
will  make  every  attempt  to  first  place  students  into  public  (vs.  pri- 
%^te)  schools  for  student  teaching  and  related  activities.  Further, 
students  will  not  be  assigned  student  teaching  or  other  related 
duties  at  nonsectarian  private  schools  or  agencies  unless  they  spe- 
cifically request  such  placement.  Each  request  will  be  considered 
individually  to  ensure  that  the  private  entity  does  not  receive  spe- 
cial benefit  from  the  arrangement  that  outweighs  the  benefit  to  the 
University  and  its  students. 

The  following  policies  apply  to  all  students  entering  the 
Department  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading. 
INTERNAL  TRANSFER  STUDENTS  (undeclared  majors  and  change 
of  majors)  who  desire  admission  to  the  Depanment  of  Childhood 
Studies  and  Reading  may  apply  after  the  completion  of  30  semester 
hours  at  West  Chester  University.  A  cumulative  Grade  Point  Aver- 
age of  2.25  for  students  who  have  earned  up  to  64  credits  and  a 
2.50  for  students  who  have  earned  65  or  more  credits,  plus  an 
interview  are  prerequisites  for  acceptance  to  the  program. 
STUDENTS  TRANSFERRING  FROM  COMMUNITY'  COLLEGES 
AND  JUNIOR  COLLEGES  who  desire  admission  to  the  Department 
of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading  may  apply  only  with  a  Grade 
Point  Average  of  2.25  for  up  to  63  earned  credits  and  a  2.50  for  64 
or  more  earned  credits.  Transfer  credit  will  be  granted  for 
fireshman-  and  sophomore-level  courses  if  the  course  descriptions 
are  equivalent  and  in  accordance  with  University  policy.  All  other 
required  courses  in  the  professional  education  and  specialized  prep- 
aration areas  will  be  evaluated  and  approved  on  an  individual  basis. 

MINOR  FIELDS  OF  STUDY  IN  DEPARTMENT  OF  CFRLDHOOD 
STUDIES  AND  READING 

A  Early  Childhood  Education  15  semester  hours 

ECE  231  or  EDE  251,  ECE  232  (six  credits, 
class  and  field  experience),  324,  405 


Department  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 


B.  Elementary  Education  18  semester  hours 
EDE  251,  310,  311,  401,  406,  and 

EDE  elective  approved  by  the  department 

C.  Reading  21-24  semester  hours 
Required  courses  for  all  students:  EDE  311  or 

ECE  310,  EDE  312  or  ECE  325,  EDE  422  or 
458,  EDR321,  EDR  420 


Electives  3-6  semester  hours 

For  all  students:  COM  307,  415;  EDE  401; 
LIN  250,  380;  PSY  475;  SPP  101 

Students  in  this  department  are  required  to  supply  their  own  trans- 
portation to  field  experiences. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
CHILDHOOD  STUDIES  AND  READING 

Symbol:  ECE 

•••100     Orientation  to  Early  Childhood  (3)  An 
introduction  to  the  history  and  philosophy  of 
early  childhood  education.  Field  observations  in 
a  variety  of  settings  provide  the  student  with  an 
opportunity  for  career  decision  making. 
••♦221     Child  Development  (0-2  years)  (3) 
Physical,  social,  emotional,  and  intellectual 
development  of  children  from  birth  to  two  years 
of  age.  Paralleb  are  drawn  from  this  phase  of 
child  development  to  students'  self-development. 
This  course  must  be  taken  the  same  semester 
with  ECE  225.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 
•••225     Infant  Learning  Environment  and  Field 
Experience  (6)  The  study  and  use  of  develop- 
mental tests  for  the  diagnosis  of  infant  needs. 
The  relationship  of  the  developmental  level  to 
the  structuring  of  learning  environment  is  fos- 
tered as  students  interact  with  infants  in  school 
and  home  settings  for  three  hours  per  week.  This 
course  must  be  taken  the  same  semester  with 
ECE  221. 

•231     Child  Development  (2-5  years)  (3)  Phys- 
ical, social,  emotional,  intellectual,  and  moral 
development  of  the  child,  2-5  years  of  age.  Paral- 
lels are  drawn  from  this  phase  of  child  develop- 
ment to  students'  self-development.  PREREQ: 
PSY  100. 

•232     Preschool  Learning  Environment  (3-6) 
Methods  and  materials  for  structuring  the  class- 
room environment  for  the  child  2-5  years  of  age. 
Readiness  sldlk  and  concepts  in  all  curricular 
areas  are  addressed. 

•••306     Child's  Social  Environment  (3)  A  con- 
sideration of  methods  of  instruction  that  best 
generate  a  social  education  meaningful  to  pri- 
mary grade  children.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  pro- 
viding a  learning  environment  that  paralleb  the 
maturation  of  the  young  child. 
•••307     Child's  Physical  Environment  (3)  A 
consideration  of  methods  of  instruction  that  best 
enhance  a  child's  knowledge  of  the  physical 
world  in  terms  that  are  meaningful  to  primary 
grade  children.  Strategies  for  cognitive  skilb  and 
affective  growth  in  these  areas  are  stressed. 
•310     Introduction  to  the  Language  Arts 
(3)  The  areas  of  Ibtening,  speaking,  and  writing 
are  studied  in  depth.  Knowledge,  teaching,  and 
evaluative  techniques  are  addressed.  Introduction 
to  the  reading  process  and  the  relationship  of 
language  to  reading  abo  will  be  studied. 
•••320     Creative  Arts  for  the  Young  Child  (3) 
Workshop,  seminar,  and  field  experiences  pro- 
vide opportunities  for  students  to  explore, 
manipulate,  and  analyze  a  wide  variety  of  media 
and  techniques  appropriate  for  use  with  young 
children.  Activities  are  aimed  at  encouraging  the 
development  of  the  young  child's  creative  poten- 
tial through  the  arts. 

•••321  Middle  Childhood  and  Adolescent 
Development  (5-8  years)  (3)  Physical,  social, 
emotional,  intellectual,  and  moral  development 


of  the  child  5-8  years  of  age.  Paralleb  are  drawn 
from  thb  phase  of  child  development  to  stu- 
dents' self-development.  PREREQ;  PSY  100. 
•324     Early  Childhood  Programs  (3)  Study  of 
contemporary  program  modeb  in  early  child- 
hood education.  Major  trends  in  the  education  of 
young  children  are  defined. 
•325    Teaching  Reading  and  Field  Experience 
(Primary  Grades)  (6)  The  teaching  of  reading 
and  its  mastery  is  the  focus  of  thb  course.  Stu- 
dents apply  knowledge  of  theories  and  practices 
in  supervised  field  placements  in  schoob  with 
children  5-8  years  of  age.  Tutoring  of  individual 
children  and  small  groups  is  integrated  with 
planning  and  evaluation  of  lessons  and  activities 
as  well  as  remediation.  PREREQ:  ECE  310. 
•405    Administration  and  Supervision  of  Early 
Childhood  Programs  (3)  Principles  of  adminb- 
traaon  and  supervision  of  programs  for  young 
children.  Includes  parent  education  and  commu- 
nity relations.  PREREQ:  ECE  232. 
•••410    Student  Teaching  (6)  (First  half  of 
semester) 

•••411     Student  Teaching  (6)  (Second  half  of 
semester)  Two  separate  student  teaching  experi- 
ences are  required:  one  in  nursery  or  kindergar- 
ten and  one  in  grades  1-3.  Weekly  practicum 
sessions  are  required.  PREREQ:  See  "AppUcation 
and  Approval  for  Student  Teaching "  earlier  in 
thb  section. 

♦  498    Workshop  in  Early  Childhood  Educa- 
tion (3)  Offers  wide  variety  of  experiences  to 
help  prepare  students  to  provide  an  environment 
for  optimal  growth  of  children  in  preschool  and 
primary  grades. 

Symbol:  EDE 

•200    Theory  and  Field  Experiences  in  Ele- 
mentary Education  (3)  Orientation  to  the  curric- 
ula, processes,  and  structures  of  elementary  edu- 
cation today.  Field  experiences  related  to  course 
topics. 

•251     Child  Development  and  Behavior  (3) 
Emotional,  social,  mental,  moral,  physical,  and 
self  factors  shaping  human  behavior  with  empha- 
sb  on  child  and  early  adolescent  development. 
Specific  appUcation  to  classroom  settings. 
PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

253  Human  Development  and  Behavior  (3) 
Physical,  mental,  emotional,  social,  moral,  and 
self  factors  shaping  human  behavior  throughout 
the  life  cycle;  specific  application  to  work  with 
individuab  and  groups  in  educational  settings. 
PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

254  Development  in  the  Middle  School  Child 
(3)  Characteristic  development  and  behavior  of 
children  between  10  and  15  years  of  age;  under- 
standing and  working  with  these  children  in 
educational  settings.  PREREQ:  EDE  251  and  253 
or  their  equivalent. 

•310     Communication  Skills  in  the  Elementary 
School  (3)  Study  of  teaching  language  sldlb  in 
the  elementary  school:  Ibtening,  speaking,  and 
writing.  PREREQ:  EDE  251. 


•311     Introduction  to  Reading  Instruction  (3) 

An  exploratory  course  investigating  the  reading 
process,  language  and  learning  theories,  and 
their  relation  to  reading.  Hbtorical  scope  and 
various  programs  of  reading  are  studied  and 
evaluated.  PREREQ:  EDE  251  and  310. 
•312     Reading  Instruction  and  Practicum  (6) 
Focus  b  on  mastery  of  the  teaching  of  develop- 
mental reading,  early  reading,  and  prereading 
experiences.  The  students  leam  how  to  plan, 
teach,  and  evaluate  reading/thinking  skilb  related 
to  the  instruction  of  reading  in  the  elementary 
classroom.  Students  work  in  the  public  schoob 
with  small  and  large  reading  groups  teaching 
various  aspects  of  the  reading  lesson.  Students 
abo  leam  how  to  evaluate  pupil  performance 
and  remediate  minor  reading  problems. 
PREREQ:  ECE  311. 

315     Developmental  Reading  for  the  Handi- 
capped Child  (3)  The  focus  of  thb  course  is  the 
study  of  the  nature  of  the  reading  process  and  its 
relation  to  language  development,  motivation 
and  methodology  for  developmental  reading 
skilb,  reading  programs  and  materiab,  problems 
in  dealing  with  handicapped  children,  and 
practicum  in  reading  instruction.  Special  educa- 
tion majors  only. 

330     Instructional  Programs  and  Strategies  (3) 
Introduction  to  principles  underlying  the  devel- 
opment of  instructional  programs  in  the  schoob. 
Strategies  include  cognitive  and  skill  learning, 
and  modes  of  teaching. 

•332    Teaching  Social  Studies  in  the  Elemen- 
tary School  (3)  Methods  of  teaching  social  stud- 
ies and  geography  in  the  elementary  curriculum. 
Techniques,  current  research  projects,  reading 
materiab,  audio  visual  aids,  resource  persons, 
and  field  trips  used  as  toob  of  learning.  The 
organization,  development,  and  use  of  resource 
units  are  stressed.  PREREQ:  EDE  200  and  251. 
•352     Self  and  Group  Processes  in  the  Class- 
room (3)  Analysis  of  self  processes  influencing 
teacher-student  classroom  interactions.  Role  of 
needs,  defenses,  motives,  emotions,  and  early 
learning  experiences  as  they  shape  the  prospec- 
tive teacher's  responses  to  elementary  children. 
Application  of  social  leaming  and  interpersonal 
theory.  PREREQ:  EDE  251. 
•401     Creativity  in  the  Classroom  (3)  Explora- 
tion of  materiab  and  processes  of  children's  per- 
ceptions and  behavior,  aimed  at  encouraging  the 
development  of  their  critical  and  creative  poten- 
tiab.  PREREQ:  EDE  312. 
•406     Classroom  Management  (3)  Detailed 
investigation  of  the  elementary  teacher's  role  in 
classroom  management.  Teacher  influence,  per- 
sonality, and  class  interaction;  class  roles  and 
expectation;  seating  plans;  dbcipline;  referral; 


•Open  to  early  childhood  and  elementary  edu- 
cation majors. 
••Open  to  elementary  education  majors  only. 
•••Open  to  early  childhood  majors  only. 
♦   Thb  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 


and  the  teacher's  role  in  evaluating  and  identify- 
ing potential  problems  in  children.  PREREQ: 
EDE312. 

409     Independent  Study  (1-3)  Special  topics  or 
projects  initiated  by  the  student  that  will  enable 
her  or  him  to  do  extensive  and  intensive  study 
in  an  area  of  elementary  education.  PREREQ: 
Permission  of  department  chairperson. 
••410    Student  Teaching  (6)  (First  half  of 
semester) 

••41 1     Student  Teaching  (6)  (Second  half  of 
semester)  Two  separate  student  teaching  experi- 
ences are  required:  one  in  grades  K-3  and  one  in 
grades  4-6.  Weekly  practicum  sessions  are 
required.  PREREQ:  See  "Apphcation  and 
Approval  for  Student  Teaching "  earUer  in  this 
section. 

••412  Work-Study  in  the  Elementary  School 
(6)  Limited  practicum  for  preservice  teachers 
who  have  taken  EDE  200,  251,  311,  312,  and 
406.  Students  work  for  a  full  term  in  one  school 
district  under  supervision.  Six  credits  may  be 
granted  toward  student  teaching  requirements 
(EDE  411)  PREREQ:  Permission  of  department. 

•  421     Seminar  in  Elementary  Education  (3) 
An  intensive  study  of  some  current,  major  devel- 
opments in  elementary  education.  Topics 
announced  in  advance.  PREREQ:  Senior  standing 
and  permission  of  instructor 

•  ♦  422     Seminar  in  Reading  (3)  Intensive  study 
of  some  current,  major  developments  in  reading 
related  to  elementary  education.  Topics 
announced  in  advance.  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
instructor. 

•  ♦  423     Seminar  in  Communications  Skills  (3) 
Intensive  study  of  some  current,  major  develop- 
ments in  communications  skills  (language  arts) 
related  to  elementary  education.  Topics 
announced  in  advance.  PREREQ:  Permission  of 
instructor. 

•458     Language  Arts/Reading  for  the  Unique 
Child  (3)  An  open-ended  course  to  help  students 
understand  and  plan  instructional  programs  for 


the  linguistically  different,  the  gifted,  and  those 
with  special  needs  (mainstreaming).  The  stu- 
dents will  examine  various  strategies,  techniques, 
management,  and  viable  programs  for  teaching 
these  children  language  arts  and  reading. 
•481     Constructing  Activity-Oriented  Teaching 
Materials  (3)  A  workshop  experience  for  stu- 
dents interested  in  exploring  the  many  facets  of 
making  activity-oriented  learning  materials  for 
the  elementary  school  classroom.  PREREQ: 
EDM  300, 

489    Teaching  Skills  to  Combat  Sexism  (3) 
This  course  is  offered  to  create  awareness  in  pro- 
spective teachers  of  the  extent  and  consequences 
of  sex  role  stereotyping  at  all  levels  of  educa- 
tional experience.  It  will  develop  specific  skills, 
behaviors,  and  classroom  strategies  that  can 
eUminate  effects  of  sexism  in  classrooms  and  on 
students.  Teaches  how  to  deal  effectively  with  the 
emotion-laden  issue  of  combating  sex-role  ste- 
reotypes. 

♦  498    Workshop  in  Elementary  Education  (3) 
Offers  a  wide  variety  of  experiences  to  help  pre- 
pare students  in  providing  an  environment  for 
optimal  growth  of  children  in  grades  K-6 

Symbol:  EDR 

010     Developmental  Reading  and  Study  Skills 
(1)  A  course  designed  to  improve  vocabulary  and 
study  skills.  Major  attention  is  given  to  vocabu- 
lary expansion,  textbook  reading,  test  taking,  and 
methods  of  organizing  information. 
020     Intermediate  Level  Reading  (1)  The  inter- 
mediate level  workshop  will  emphasize  the 
development  and  improvement  of  college-level 
reading  competencies  The  course  is  designed  to 
help  the  students  improve  their  reading  compre- 
hension as  well  as  effective  study  techniques  and 
strategies.  Additionally,  vocabulary  development, 
flexible  reading  rate,  and  critical  reading  will  be 
taught  in  this  course. 

100     College  Reading  and  Study  Skills  (3)  An 
individualized  course  to  develop  reading  and 


study  skills  such  as  comprehension,  vocabulary, 
speed,  remembering,  concentration,  taking  notes, 
mastering  a  text  assignment,  and  preparing  for 
and  taking  examinations. 

110     Developing  Learning  Skills  (1)  A  course 
that  reviews  and  develops  specialized  learning 
skills  such  as  concentrating  when  studying,  read- 
ing a  textbook  assignment,  taking  notes,  and 
preparing  for  and  taking  examinations.  Students 
who  wish  to  review  their  study  habits  or  who 
have  special  needs  in  the  area  of  study  skills 
should  enroll  in  this  course. 
313     Reading  Instruction  and  Practicum  in  the 
Secondary  Schoob  (6)  Focus  is  on  the  mastery 
of  teaching  reading  in  the  middle  and  secondary 
schoob.  Students  will  study  the  role  of  the 
teacher  as  well  as  learn  how  to  sequence  both 
developmental  and  content  area  readmgs. 
321     Diagnosis  and  Remediation  of  Reading 
Problems  (3)  Identifying  the  nature  and  causes 
of  reading  disabilities;  experience  in  helping  a 
child  with  reading  problems.  PREREQ:  EDE  311 
or  permission  of  instructor.  Special  education 
majors  and  reading  minors  only. 
323     Reading  for  the  Handicapped:  Diagnosis 
and  Remediation  (3)  Readmg  materials,  pro- 
grams, evaluations,  and  teaching  strategies  for 
the  mentally  or  physically  handicapped  are 
examined  and  discussed.  Students  develop  and 
utilize  reading  materiab  in  a  classroom  situation. 
PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor.  Special  edu- 
cation majors  and  reading  minors  only. 
420     Reading  in  the  Content  Areas  (3)  Under- 
standing the  reading  process  and  the  need  for 
reading  instruction  at  the  middle  and  secondary 
school  levels.  Specific  skill  development,  reading 
in  the  content  areas,  readability,  and  evaluation. 


•  Open  to  early  childhood  and  elementary  edu- 
cation majors. 

••Open  to  elementary  education  majors  only. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and 
Professional  Education 

Wallace  J.  Kahn,  Chairperson 

Harry  H.  Deischer,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Deischer,  Gadaleto,  C.  Gooci,  Hsu,  Kahn, 
S.  Walters 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  D.  Brown,  Holingjak,  Parsons, 
Rahn,  Silverman 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Bolton,  Haggard,  Hinson, 
Hynes,  Kurzinsky,  Napierkowski,  Socoski,  Welsh 

The  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education,  which  prepares  the 
student  for  teaching  in  the  secondary  schools,  may  be  earned 
with  an  academic  specialization  in  biology,  chemistry,  com- 
munication, earth  and  space  science,  English,  French,  gen- 
eral science,  German,  Latin,  mathematics,  physics,  Russian, 
Spanish,  or  social  studies  (which  includes  concentrations  in 
anthropology,  economics,  geography,  political  science,  phi- 
losophy, psychology,  history,  and  sociology). 
Satisfactory  completion  of  a  secondary  curriculum  also  will 
qualify  the  student  for  a  Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  Certifi- 


cate, which  is  valid  for  six  years  of  teaching  the  specified 
subject  in  approved  secondary  schools  in  Pennsylvania.  The 
student  must  choose  one  academic  field  of  specialization. 


51  semester  hours 
30  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCAHON 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Professional  Education  Requirements 
Secondary  Education 

EDE  100';  EDP  250*  and  351';  EDM  300'; 
and  EDS  306*  and  411-412 
Teaching  Skills/Methods* 

3.  Specialization  for  Secondary  Teaching  (See  appropriate  page  for 
each  field  of  specialization.) 

Specialization  in  one  of  the  teaching  fields  listed  below  is 
required  for  graduation  in  secondary  education.  The  minimum 
semester  hours  that  West  Chester  requires  for  each  field  will 
satisfy  the  teacher  certification  requirements  in  Pennsylvania. 
The  minimum  for  each  field  of  specialization  noted  in  the  partic- 
ular B.S.  in  Education  program  given  is  under  the  heading  of  the 
department. 


•The  student  must  have  a  2.50  GPA  in  professional  education  courses  with 
at  least  a  C  (2.00)  in  the  asterisked  courses  in  order  to  be  admitted  to  EDS 
411-412,  Snident  Teaching.  (Also  see  Student  Teaching,  pages  117-118.) 


Department  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 


Secondary  Areas  of  Certification 

Biology 

Chemistry 

Communication 

Earth  and  Space  Science 

English 


French 

General  Science 
German 
Latin 
Mathematics 


Physics 
Russian 
Social  Studies 
Spanish 


Students  in  the  secondary  education  program  must  confer 
regularly  with  their  professional  studies  adviser  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education,  as 
well  as  with  the  academic  adviser  assigned  by  their  respective 
academic  department.  The  certification  of  all  students  whose 
goal  is  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education  is  the  responsibil- 
ity of  the  certification  officer  of  the  School  of  Education. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COUNSELOR  EDUCATION 

Symbol:  EDC 

462     Essentials  of  the  Helping  Relationship  (3) 

This  course  surveys  the  concepts  and  skills 
involved  in  helping  others  through  individual 
interviewing,  problem  solving,  decision  making, 
and  systematic  behavior  change. 
♦  498     Counselor  Education  Workshop  (3) 
499     Peer  Helper  Workshop  (1-3)  A  workshop 
that  focuses  on  acquisition  of  specific  knowledge 
and  skilb  necessary  for  working  in  a  college  set- 
ting. 

FOUNDAnONS 

Symbol;  EDF 

100    School  and  Society  (3)  An  introduction  to 
the  nature,  function,  scope,  organization,  admin- 
istration, and  support  of  the  public  school  in 
American  society.  Offered  every  semester. 
350    The  Professional  and  Student  Personnel 
Services  (3)  An  introduction  to  nonadjunctive 
services  in  education.  PREREQ:  EDP  250. 
360    The  Learner  in  Nonschool  Settings  (3) 
Emphasis  in  the  course  will  be  placed  upon 
intra-  and  interpersonal  development,  facilitative 
growth  and  adjustment,  and  dysfunction  as  they 
may  impact  the  nonschool  educator  or  trainer. 
364    Systems-Based  Educational  Services  (3) 
This  course  introduces  the  student  to  general 
systems  (social)  theory,  focusing  on  the  ele- 
ments, dynamics,  and  operations  of  a  system  that 
must  be  considered  in  developing  educational 
activities  and  programs  for  that  system.  The  stu- 
dent will  leam  strategies  of  systems  analysis  and 
intervention  through  the  investigation  of  such 


topics  as  needs  assessment,  objective-based  pro- 
gramming, organizational  development,  and  pro- 
gram evaluation. 

412     Internship  in  Noiischool  Settings  (3)  The 
internship  experience  is  designed  for  upper-level 
education  students  who  are  interested  in  using 
and  transferring  existing  discipline  and  pedagogi- 
cal skills  in  nonschool  settings.  A  regularly  sched- 
uled practicum  will  be  held  for  all  internships. 
498    Workshop  in  Educational  Foundations  (3) 

EDUCAnONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

Symbol:  EDP 

249  Adolescent  Development  (3)  This  course 
focuses  on  the  emotional,  social,  intellectual, 
moral,  physical,  and  self-concept  factors  shaping 
human  behavior  with  emphasis  on  adolescent 
behavior.  Offered  in  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

250  Educational  Psychology  (3)  A  study  of 
learning  in  relation  to  the  physical,  social,  emo- 
tional, and  intellectual  aspects  of  personaHty. 
Offered  every  semester. 

351     Evaluation  and  Measurement  (3)  A  survey 
of  testing  materials  and  procedures  with  empha- 
sis on  interpretation  and  appUcation  of  results 
for  pupil  guidance  purposes.  PREREQ:  EDP  250. 
Offered  every  semester. 
467     Group  Dynamics  (3)  A  group  process 
course  designed  to  help  students  develop  their 
personal  effectiveness  in  group  situations. 

SECONDARY  EDUCATION 
Symbol:  EDS 

306     Principles  of  Teaching  and  Field  Experi- 
ence in  Secondary  Education  (3)  Methods  and 


strategies  of  teaching  in  secondary  schools  will 
be  the  core  of  the  course.  Implications  of  class- 
room management,  learning,  and  other  related 
problems  will  be  discussed.  Students  will  observe 
in  a  classroom  for  nine  weeks.  PREREQ:  EDF 
100.  Offered  in  fall  and  spring  semesters. 

410     Independent  Study  (1-3)  Special  topics  or 
projects  initiated  by  the  students  that  will  enable 
them  to  do  extensive  and  intensive  study  in  an 
area  of  secondary  education.  PREREQ:  Permis- 
sion of  department  chairperson. 

411-412     Student  Teaching  (6)  (6)  Observation 
and  participation  in  teaching  and  all  other  activi- 
ties related  to  the  teacher's  work  in  the  area  of 
the  student's  specialization.  PREREQ:  96  semes- 
ter hours  including  all  professional  education 
courses.  Students  must  have  at  least  a  2.50 
cumulative  average  and  at  least  a  grade  of  C 
(2.00)  in  all  secondary  education  and  profes- 
sional education  courses.  Offered  in  fall  and 
spring  semesters. 

SECONDARY  EDUCAHON/SPECL^ 
EDUCAnON 

Symbol:  EDX 

306     Principles  of  Teaching  and  Field  Experi- 
ence in  Special  Education  (3)  Methods  and 
strategies  of  teaching  in  public  education.  Impli- 
cations of  classroom  management,  learning,  and 
other  related  problems  will  be  discussed.  Stu- 
dents will  observe  in  a  classroom  for  nine  weeks. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Environmental  Education  Program 

John  HoUngjak,  Coordinator 

Certification  Program 

This  interdisciplinary  program  enables  teacher-education  majors 
to  secure  certification  to  teach  environmental  education.  The 
course  sequences  in  the  program  are  drawn  from  existing  curric- 
ula in  the  natural  sciences,  social  and  behavioral  sciences,  and 
health  and  physical  education,  and  permit  students  to  graduate 
with  dual  certification.  That  is,  their  teaching  certificates  will  be 
valid  for  environmental  education  as  well  as  for  their  major  area 
of  study.  For  the  additional  certification  in  en'vironmental  educa- 
tion, students  are  required  to  complete  four  core  courses  and 
two  elective  courses  chosen  from  one  of  the  following  areas  of 
concentration:  natural  sciences,  recreation  centered,  man  cen- 
tered, or  curriculum  centered.  Smdents  wishing  to  explore  this 
program  should  consult  with  the  coordinator  of  en'vironmental 
education. 


CERTIFICATION  PROGRAM 

1.  Required  Core  Courses 

BIO  172*  and  201*;  EDO  420;  and  GEO  230 

2.  Elecrives  —  two  courses  from  one  of  these 
areas: 

Group  A— Natural  Sciences 

BIO  275,  277,  377,  and  378;  ESS  101,  HI, 

201,  and  230 

Group  B  — Human  Centered 

ANT  102,  310,  and  346;  GEO  210,  212,  214, 

and  232;  SOC  200  and  342 

Group  C  — Recreation  Centered 

FED  250,  367,  370,  and  467 

Group  D  — Curriculum  Centered 

EDO  405,  410,  411,  415,  and  425 


12  semester  hours 


6-8  semester  hours 


•Biology  majors  must  substitute  biology  courses  from  Group  A  with  the 
approval  of  their  advisers. 


Department  of  Instructional  Media 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ENVIRONMENTAL  EDUCATION 

Symbol:  EDO 

405     Conservation  Education  Curriculum  (K-12) 
(3)  Conservation  education  as  it  exists  in  the 
present  school  curriculum  and  ways  to  integrate 
conservation  into  elementary  and  secondary  school 
disciplines.  Characteristics,  interrelationships,  and 
uses  of  our  natural  resources;  problems  and  policies 
of  industrial  management  in  conservation  as  they 
are  related  to  the  school  curriculum. 
410     Methods  in  Conservation  Education  (3) 
Basic  concepts  and  practices  of  conservation  and 
outdoor  education  and  their  role  in  the  school 
program. 


411     Environmental  Education  Workshop  (3) 
Each  year  the  workshop  is  conducted  at  different 
geographic  locations,  such  as  Alaska  and  Colo- 
rado. A  field-centered  learning  experience,  the 
workshop  includes  camping  trips,  studies  of  flora 
and  fauna,  and  field  investigations.  There  is 
interaction  with  various  governmental  agencies 
as  well  as  informal  investigations  of  environmen- 
tal problems. 

415     History  of  Conservation  (3)  Development 
of  the  conservation  movement  in  the  U.S.  with 
emphasis  on  the  progressive  adaptation  of  con- 
servation to  our  changing  social  and  economic 
order. 


420     Organization  and  Administration  of  Out- 
door Education  (3)  Basic  concepts  of  outdoor 
education,  the  role  of  outdoor  education  in  the 
school  program,  and  the  initiation  and  adminis- 
tration of  outdoor  education. 

425     Independent  Studies  in  Environmental 
Education  (3)  Special  research  projects,  reports, 
and  readings  in  conservation  and  outdoor  educa- 
tion. Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ:  Permission 
of  instructor. 

498    Workshop  in  Environmental  Education  (3) 


Department  of  Instructional  Media 

Joseph  M.  Spiecker,  Chairperson 

PROFESSOR:  Spiecker 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR:  Redmond 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Reis,  Rumfield 


APPUED  MEDIA  TECHNOLOGY  PROGRAM  IN 
INSTRUCTIONAL  MEDL\ 

The  AppUed  Media  Technology  Program,  which  results  in  an  Asso- 
ciate of  Science  degree,  is  a  two-year  program  consisting  of  an 
interrelated  series  of  courses  in  computers,  photography,  filmmak- 
ing, television,  multi-image,  sound  recording,  design,  and  graphic 
production  of  visual  materials. 

The  student  will  develop  a  specific  roster  of  skills  that  is  employ- 
able in  almost  every  segment  of  our  society,  including  education, 
business,  government,  medicine,  law  enforcement,  and  indtistry. 
Students  must  meet  general  academic  requirements  of  the  Univer- 
sity for  admission  and  must  satisfiactorily  complete  64  credit  hours 
of  required  and  elective  courses. 


ASSOCL\rE  OF  SCIENCE  -  APPUED  MEDIA  TECHNOLOGY 
1.  General  Requirements  18  semester  hours 

COM  101;  CSC  101,  or  115,  or  141;  ENG  120; 

MAT  103;  PSY  100  or  265  and  a  course  in  fine  arts 


40  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 
1 8  semester  hours 


2.  Required  Courses 
EDM  202,  213,  223,  225,  226,  228,  230, 
231,  233,  234,  275,  and  290 

3.  Electives 

Minor  in  Instructional  Media 

Current  trends  have  increased  the  need  for  trained  personnel  in  the 
field  of  instructional  technology.  Students  who  are  trained  in  this 
field  have  several  career  options,  in  industry,  with  either  the  train- 
ing and  development  center  or  the  public  relations  department,  and 
in  education,  with  the  instructional  media  department. 

Students  in  the  instructional  media  program  will  be  required  to 
develop  a  broad  range  of  skills  and  knowledge  in  the  use  of  media 
and  technology.  Associate  students  pursuing  a  B.A.  in  liberal  stud- 
ies may  satisfy  requirements  with  a  minor  or  associate's  degree  in 
instructional  media  along  with  other  requirements. 

Students  selecting  a  minor  in  instructional  media  must  complete 
the  following  18  credit  hours  of  required  courses:  402,  423,  425, 
430,  433,  and  475.  Interviews  will  be  conducted  on  request. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
INSTRUCTIONAL  MEDIA 

Symbol:  EDM 

200     Level  courses  for  associate  degree  stu- 
dents only. 

202  Selection  and  Effective  Utilization  of 
Media  (3)  This  course  uses  a  systems  approach 
in  the  design  of  training  packages,  emphasizing 
the  criteria  for  the  selection  of  media  that  will 
effectively  fulfill  training  objectives.  It  will  also 
involve  the  most  effective  ways  to  utilize  the 
media  selection  For  associate  degree  students. 

203  Mediated  Programs  (3)  This  course  will 
explore  the  area  of  visual  communication  materi- 
als. Through  the  use  of  research  materials,  dem- 
onstrations, and  various  production  techniques, 
the  student  will  be  able  to  design  and  produce 
visual  instructional  materiak.  The  materials  pro- 
duced will  be  relevant  to  either  the  group  or 
individualized  instructional  process  reflected  in 
current  trends  and  methods  of  curriculum 
design. 

213     Production  of  Multi-Image  Programs  (3) 
The  multi-image  presentation,  perhaps  more 
than  any  other  means  of  communication,  offers 
endless  possibilities  for  creative  expression.  This 


course  will  attempt  to  acquaint  the  student  with 
the  "how"  and  "why"  of  multi-image  presenta- 
tions. The  student,  through  hands-on  experience, 
will  research,  design,  and  produce  several  pro- 
grams that  use  multi-image  techniques.  For  asso- 
ciate degree  students.  PREREQ:  Basic  photogra- 
phy. 

223     Design  and  Production  of  Visual  Materi- 
als (3)  This  course  will  explore  the  areas  of 
design  as  they  relate  to  the  production  of  visual 
instructional  materials  to  be  utilized  as  an  inte- 
gral pan  of  the  curriculum.  Discussion  of,  and 
hands-on  experience  with,  the  phases  of  percep- 
tion, communication,  and  learning  theories  for 
determining  advantages,  limitations,  and  the  use 
of  various  visual  media.  For  associate  degree  stu- 
dents. 

225  Basic  Photography  (3)  A  course  dealing 
with  the  photographic  process.  The  course  will 
cover  camera  handling,  film  and  print  process- 
ing, and  application  of  photography  to  media 
production  and  the  development  of  training 
packages.  For  associate  degree  students.  Student 
must  supply  adjustable  35mm  camera  plus  devel- 
oping and  printing  materials. 

226  Intermediate  Photography  (3)  A  course 
for  those  who  have  had  a  basic  photography 


class  or  previous  photographic  experience.  The 

course  will  stress  technical  and  creative 
approaches  to  black-and-white  and  color  photog- 
raphy with  small  format  cameras  and  will 
involve  advanced  techniques  of  exposure,  light- 
ing composition,  macro  photography,  and  film 
and  print  processing  For  associate  degree  stu- 
dents. Student  must  supply  adjustable  35mm 
camera  plus  developing  and  printing  materials. 
PREREQ:  Basic  photography. 
228     Advanced  Photography  (3)  Course 
designed  for  students  interested  in  learning  pro- 
fessional techniques  of  black-and-white  and  color 
photography.  General  areas  considered  will  be 
large  and  medium  format  cameras.  Specific  con- 
sideration will  be  given  to  camera  equipment, 
lenses,  filters,  retouching,  available  hght  and 
electronic  flash  photography,  composition,  and 
advanced  darkroom  techniques.  For  associate 
degree  students.  PREREQ.  Basic  and  intermedi- 
ate photography. 

230  Motion  Picture  Production  I  (3)  A  work- 
shop in  scripting  and  shooting  of  16mm  films. 
For  associate  degree  students. 

231  Motion  Picture  Production  II  (3)  Particu- 
lar attention  is  paid  to  16mmMdeo  equipment, 
editing,  sound  recording,  laboratory  and  process- 


Social  Studies  Program 


ing  procedure,  color,  and  television  application. 
For  associate  degree  students. 

233  Basic  TV  Production  I  (3)  This  course 
deals  with  the  history  and  development  of  com- 
mercial and  instructional  television  in  the  United 
States.  It  will  include  a  study  of  closed  circuit 
systems  and  the  equipment  and  practices  to 
operate  such  a  system.  The  student  wall  gain 
experience  in  planning  and  producing  instruc- 
tional or  promotional  television  programs.  For 
associate  degree  students. 

234  TV  Production  II  (3)  A  television  studio 
production  course  emphasizing  the  practical 
work  of  all  aspects  of  closed  circuit  television.  It 
will  include  the  presentation  of  scripts,  graphics, 
animation,  photos,  film,  slides,  sound  recordings, 
lighting,  staging,  and  electronic  technical  infor- 
mation. For  associate  degree  students. 

235  Instructional  TV  Production  III  (3)  A 
course  designed  for  the  advanced  undergraduate 
student  in  television  production.  The  10-minute 
television  productions  are  basic  requirements  of 
the  course.  The  student  will  use  the  television 
production  facilities  of  West  Chester  University 
to  complete  the  basic  TV  production  require- 
ments. For  associate  degree  students. 

275     Sound  Reproduction  in  Instructional 
Communication  (3)  A  combination  theory  and 
workshop  course  that  will  teach  the  theory  of 
sound  and  its  application  in  instruction.  For 
associate  degree  students. 

290     Internship  (4-15)  Internship/Field  Experi- 
ence will  give  students  an  opportunity  to  gain 
practical  experience  in  the  field  of  media  tech- 
nology at  their  level.  Areas  where  students  might 
be  placed  are  schoob,  two-  and  four-year  col- 
leges, industry,  TV  stations,  photo  labs,  etc. 
300     Introduction  to  Instructional  Communica- 
tions (3)  Techniques,  materials,  and  equipment, 
and  the  development  of  skills  needed  for  teach- 
ing. 

402     Selection  and  Effective  Utilization  of 
Instructional  Media  (3)  This  course  will  engage 
the  student  in  a  systems  approach  to  course 
development,  emphasizing  the  criteria  used  in 
the  selection  of  media  appropriate  to  the  effective 
fulfillment  of  course  objectives.  It  will  also 
involve  the  most  effective  ways  to  utilize  the 
media  selected. 


403     Developing  Mediated  Individualized 
Instructional  Programs  (3)  Involves  the  develop- 
ment by  students  of  individualized  instructional 
packages  utilizing  various  forms  of  media.  The 
packages  will  be  developed  using  a  systems 
approach  and  emphasis  will  be  on  interactive 
video  and  computer-assisted  instruction. 

405    Theory  of  Motion  Picture  Production  (3) 
Lecture  integrated  with  extensive  use  of  films  to 
teach  the  basic  functions  of  the  educational  film 
and  attempt  to  cite  results  to  demonstrate  the 
eflfective  use  of  films. 

413     Production  of  Multi-Image  Production  (3) 

The  multi-image  presentation,  perhaps  more 
than  any  other  means  of  communication,  offers 
endless  possibilities  for  creative  expression.  This 
course  will  attempt  to  acquaint  the  student  with 
the  "how"  and  "why"  of  multi-image  presenta- 
tions. The  student,  through  hands-on  experi- 
ences, will  research,  design,  and  produce  several 
programs  that  use  multi-image  techniques. 
PREREQ:  Basic  photography. 

423     Design  and  Production  of  Visual  Materi- 
als (3)  This  course  will  explore  the  areas  of 
design  as  they  relate  to  the  production  of  visual 
instructional  materiab  to  be  utilized  as  an  inte- 
gral part  of  the  curriculum.  The  phases  of  per- 
ception, communication,  and  learning  theories 
are  discussed,  along  with  hands-on  experience, 
for  determining  advantages,  limitations,  and  the 
use  of  various  media. 

425  Basic  Photography  (3)  A  course  dealing 
with  photographic  processing,  camera  handling, 
and  film  and  print  processing.  Students  must 
have  a  complex  camera  and  must  purchase  per- 
sonal supplies. 

426  Intermediate  Photography  (3)  A  course 
designed  for  students  who  have  had  the  basic 
photography  course  and  wish  to  sharpen  previ- 
ously learned  skills  and  acquire  more  advanced 
skills  in  picture  taking,  film  and  print  process- 
ing, and  print  finishing.  PREREQ:  Basic  photog- 
raphy. 

428    Advanced  Photography  (3)  Course 
designed  for  students  interested  in  learning  pro- 
fessional techniques  regarding  black-and-white 


and  color  photography.  General  areas  considered 
will  be  large,  medium,  and  35mm  format  cam- 
eras. Specific  consideration  will  be  camera  equip- 
ment, lenses,  filters,  retouching,  available  light 
and  electronic  flash,  composition,  and  advanced 
darkroom  techniques.  PREREQ:  Basic  and  inter- 
mediate photography. 

430  Motion  Picture  Production  I  (3)  Scripting 
and  shooting  of  16mra  films  and  videos  includ- 
ing magnetic  sound  recording  and  reproduction. 

431  Motion  Picture  Production  II  (3)  Course 
geared  for  the  advanced  filmmaker/video  pro- 
ducer interested  in  learning  the  professional 
techniques  for  producing  16mmMdeo  produc- 
tion. 

433  Basic  TV  Production  I  (3)  This  course 
deals  with  the  history  and  development  of  com- 
mercial and  instructional  television  in  the  United 
States.  It  will  include  a  study  of  closed  circuit 
systems  and  the  equipment  and  practices  to 
operate  such  systems.  The  student  will  gain 
experience  in  planning  and  producing  instruc- 
tional or  promotional  television  programs. 

434  Instructional  TV  Production  II  (3)  A  lec- 
ture, demonstration,  and  workshop  course  that 
stresses  planning,  writing,  producing,  and  evalu- 
ating instructional  television.  Emphasis  is  placed 
on  student  involvement  in  the  television  produc- 
tion process. 

435  Instructional  TV  Production  III  (3)  This  is 
a  course  designed  for  the  advanced  undergradu- 
ate student  in  television  production.  It  will  allow 
students  to  produce  three,  15-minute  television 
productions  on  topics  of  their  own  choice.  The 
student  will  assume  the  role  of  a  TV  director  and 
producer  and  will  accept  independent  responsi- 
bility for  the  TV  productions. 

463     Field  Study  of  Media  Programs  (3)  A 

scheduled  group  or  individual  tour,  foreign  or 
domestic,  in  which  students  investigate  notable 
installations  or  projects  in  educational  media. 

475     Sound  Reproduction  in  Instructional 
Communications  (3)  A  combination  theory  and 
workshop  course  that  will  teach  the  theory  of 
sound  and  its  application  in  instruction. 

498    Workshop  in  Instructional  Media  (3  or  6) 


Social  Studies  Program 

David  S.  Eldredge  and  John  J.  Turner,  Coordinators 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCAOON- 
COMPREHENSrVE  SOCIAL  STUDIES 

The  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  grants  a  comprehen- 
sive social  studies  certificate  entitling  the  holder  to  teach 
social  studies  in  public  school.  Preparation  combines  an 
introduction  to  all  of  the  social  science  disciplines  with 
either  a  concentration  in  one  discipline,  or  an  interdisci- 
plinary concentration.  For  information  and  specific  course 
requirements,  contact  the  chairpersons  of  the  departments 
participating  in  this  program:  Mr.  Eldredge,  Department 
of  Political  Science;  or  Dr.  Turner,  Depanment  of 
History. 

COMMON  REQUIREMENTS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

2.  Professional  Education,  see  page  112  30  semester  hours 


B. 


Social  Science  Requirements;  ANT  102;  ECO 

101  or  111  and  112;  GEO  101;  HIS  101,  102, 

151,  and  152;  PSC  100;  PSY  100;  SOC  200; 

plus  6-9  semester  hours  and  a  concentration 

chosen  from  A,  B,  C,  or  D  below.  NOTE: 

Some  of  the  requirements  in  concentrations 

B,  C,  and  D  may  be  met  by  courses  that  fulfill 

the  social  science  requirements. 

Concentration  in  a  Social  Science  Discipline     21  semester  hours 

In  the  discipline  of  the  student's  choice: 

anthropology,  economics,  geography,  history, 

philosophy,  political  science,  psychology,  or 

sociology.  See  department  of  concentration 

for  advising. 

Concentration  in  American  Culture 
See  Department  of  History  for  advising. 

American  Studies  Core 

American  Studies  Electives  and 

Social  Science  Requirements 
Concentration  in  World  Cultures 


33  semester  hours 

24  semester  hours 
9  semester  hours 


30  semester  hours 


Consult  with  any  of  the  following  departments 


Department  of  Special  Education 


for  advising:  Anthropology  and  Sociology, 

Polincal  Science,  or  History. 

Seminar  3  semester  hours 

European  Tradition  9  semester  hours 

Non-European  Tradition  9  semester  hours 

Topical  and  Thematic  Approaches  9  semester  hours 


D.  Concentration  in  Ethnic  Studies 

See  the  Department  of  History  for  advising. 
History  Courses 

Social  Science  Electives  and  Requirements 
Humanities  Electives 


30  semester  hours 

15  semester  hours 
9  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 


A  2.50  cumulative  average  in  the  social  sciences  and  a  2.50  overall 
average  is  a  prerequisite  for  student  teaching. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMPREHENSIVE  SOCIAL  STUDIES 
SSC  331     Teaching  Social  Studies  in  Secondary 
Sciiools  (3)  Methods  and  materials  of  teaching 


social  studies  for  prospective  secondary  school 
teachers.  Emphasis  is  on  combining  educational 
theory  with  social  studies  content  for  effective 


teaching.  Exercises  and  practical  application. 
Normally  taken  the  semester  immediately  prior 
to  EDS  411/412. 


Department  of  Special  Education 

Deborah  A.  Nickles,  Chairperson 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR:  Finkel,  Zlotowsld 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  LaCoste,  Nickles,  Quigney 

Degree  Program  to  Teach  the  Mentally  and/or  Physically 
Handicapped 

The  object  of  the  program  in  special  education  is  to  provide 
relevant  and  comprehensive  training  for  those  seeking  certifi- 
cation in  the  teaching  of  those  people  who  are  mentally  or 
physically  handicapped,  or  both. 

The  special  education  curriculum  is  designed  to  produce  a 
teacher  who  is  clinically  oriented  with  a  foundation  in  nor- 
mal growth  and  development  and  educational  practices.  Dur- 
ing their  course  of  study,  students  will  be  exposed  to  chil- 
dren between  the  ages  of  3  and  2 1  with  mental  and  physical 
handicaps,  ranging  from  mild  to  severe,  but  will  not  neces- 
sarily be  equally  proficient  in  all  areas.  Personal  characteris- 
tics essential  for  adequate  preparation  and  performance  will 
include  a  high  level  of  flexibility,  receptivity,  intellectual 
ability,  physical  stamina,  and  a  focus  on  professional  and 
realistic  expectations. 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  -  SPECIAL 
EDUCATION 

1 .  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 
Introduction  to  Psychology  is  required. 
Electives  selected  under  advisement  (See 
department  handbook.) 


51  semester  hours 


2.  Professional  Education 

Required:  EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250 

and  351,  and  student  teaching 
•3.  Special  Education 

Required:  EDA  101,  102,  200,  220,  301, 

302,  349,  350,  360,  and  403 
•4.  Required  Supporting  Courses 

EDE  315,  EDR  323,  HEA  206,  MAT  357, 

PED  252,  and  SPP  340 


24  semester  hours 


30  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


Minor  in  Developmental  Disabilities  18  semester  hours 

Current  trends,  enforced  by  recent  litigation,  have  increased  the 
need  for  a  general  understanding  of  the  handicapped  individual  in 
our  culture. 

The  program  is  designed  to  introduce  students  to  exceptionalities 
through  course  work  and  field  practicums.  A  life  programming 
approach  is  used. 

1.  Developmental  Disabilities  15  semester  hours 
Required:  EDA  100,  200,  220,  349,  and  350 

2.  Free  Elective  3  semester  hours 
Selected  with  approval  of  special  education  adviser 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the 
minors  in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal 
studies  general  degree  program.  The  minor  does  not  lead  to 
Level  II  teacher  certification. 


•Minimum  grade  of  C-  required  In  these  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
SPECIAL  EDUCAnON 

Symbol:  EDA 

100  Mainstreaming  for  Exceptional  Students 
(1)  This  course  is  designed  to  acquaint  the  class- 
room teacher  with  exceptional  students  who  may 
be  spending  some  portion  of  the  day  in  the  regu- 
lar setting.  Current  regulations  covering  those 
placements  will  be  reviewed.  Emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  adequately  meeting  special  educational 
needs. 

101  Psychology  of  the  Mentally  Handicapped 
(3)  An  introduction  to  the  range  of  exceptional 
children  from  a  historical  perspective  with  an 
in-depth  study  of  mental  retardation  and  emo- 
tional disturbance.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 


102     Psychology  of  the  Physically  Handicapped 
(3)  An  in-depth  study  of  the  physically  handi- 
capped and  the  learning  disabled/brain  damaged 
with  an  overview  of  psychological  and  societal 
implications  and  multiple-handicapped  condi- 
tions. PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

200    Practicum  (3)  Field  experience  in  an  inte- 
grated educational  environment,  consisting  of 
collaborative  training  with  regular  and  special 
educators. 

220     Behavior  Management  (3)  An  exploration 
of  current  practices  in  management  of  behavior 
with  emphasis  on  teacher-deUvered  systems. 
PREREQ:  EDA  101  or  102.  Offered  fall  semester 
only. 

241     Psychology  of  Exceptional  Children  (3) 
Psychology  of  children  who  are  either  mentally 


gifted  or  retarded,  or  who  have  vision,  hearing, 
speech,  or  orthopedic  handicaps,  or  emotional  or 
social  problems.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 
245     Introduction  to  Learning  Disabihties  (3) 
Identification,  education,  and  treatment  of  the 
child  labeled  as  "learning  disabled."  Emphasis 
given  to  the  specific  learning  and  emotional 
needs  such  a  child  presents.  An  overview  of  the 
historical  development  and  current  status  of  this 
field  is  included. 

280  Integrating  the  Arts  (3)  Fine  art,  music, 
puppetry,  and  dance  are  combined  as  creative 
processes  to  be  adapted  for  use  with  children. 
301  Field  Experience  and  Seminar:  Mentally 
Handicapped  (3)  A  weekly,  diree-hour 
practicum  and  one  and  one  half-hour  seminar 
devoted  to  field  experience  with  mentally  handi- 


Teaching  Certification  Programs 


capped  students.  Class  analysis  of  observed 
needs  and  methods  of  teacher  responses. 
PREREQ;  EDA  101. 

302     Field  Experience  and  Seminar:  Physically 
Handicapped  (3)  A  weekly,  three-hour  practicum 
and  one  and  one-half  hour  hour  seminar  devoted  to 
field  experience  with  physically  handicapped  stu- 
dents. Class  analysis  of  observed  needs  and  adjust- 
ment factors.  PREREQ:  EDA  102. 
330    The  Academically  Superior  Child  (3  )  The 
gifted  child  and  means  of  providing  an  effective 
educational  program  for  him  or  her. 

349  Programmed  Environments  (3)  An  overview 
of  curriculum  preparation  including  the  study  of 
methods,  materials,  equipment,  and  areas  uniquely 
designed  to  meet  the  needs  of  handicapped  learners. 

350  Life  Curriculum  and  Methods:  Handi- 
capped Learners  (3)  Preparation  to  assist  handi- 
capped students  achieve  adaptive  levels  of  behav- 
ior through  the  view  of  total  life  preparation. 
PREREQ:  EDA  349. 


360     Diagnostic  and  Prescriptive  Teaching  (3) 
An  introduction  to  diagnostic  procedures  and  the 
conversion  of  these  findings  into  relevant  educa- 
tional plans  and  instructional  strategies. 
PREREQ:  EDA  350. 

403    Senior  Seminar:  Current  Trends  (3) 
Exploration  of  emerging  concepts,  problems,  and 
trends  in  a  seminar  format  with  emphasis  on 
individual  preparation.  PREREQ:  EDA  360. 

♦  410     Independent  Study  (1-3)  Special  topics 
or  projects  initiated  by  the  student  that  will 
enable  her  or  him  to  do  extensive  and  intensive 
study  in  an  area  of  special  education.  PREREQ: 
Permission  of  chairperson. 
416    Student  Teaching  and  Direction  of  Activi- 
ties, Including  Practicum:  Emotionally  Dis- 
turbed (6)  Participation  in  teaching  and  all  other 
activities  in  the  student  teaching  role  related  to 
the  teacher's  work.  PREREQ:  96  semester  hours 
including  all  professional  education  courses  and 


all  specialized  preparation  courses  with  standards 
as  shown  above  (*). 

417  Student  Teaching  and  Direction  of  Activi- 
ties, Including  Practicum:  Learning  Disabled  (6) 

See  EDA  416  for  description  and  requirements. 

418  Student  Teaching  and  Direction  of  Activi- 
ties, Including  Practicum:  Mentally  Retarded 
(6)  See  EDA  416  for  description  and  require- 
ments. 

419  Student  Teaching  and  Direction  of  Activi- 
ties, Including  Practicum:  Physically  Handi- 
capped (6)  See  EDA  416  for  description  and 
requirements. 

443     Psychology  of  the  Mentally  Retarded  (3) 

Etiology,  diagnosis,  and  various  treatment 
approaches  to  the  mentally  retarded.  PREREQ: 
EDA  241. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Teaching  Certification  Programs 

West  Chester  University  ofifers  20  undergraduate  certification 
programs  and  two  endoriement  areas  for  students  who  wish 
to  prepare  themselves  to  be  certified  teachers.  These  pro- 
grams, which  are  described  more  fially  in  the  departmental 
listings,  include: 


Department 
Anthropology-Sociology 


Biology 

Chemistry 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

Communication  Studies 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Profes- 
sional Education 
English 
Foreign  Languages 


Geology  and  Astronomy 
Geography  and  Planning 

Health 

History 


Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 
Music  Education 


BSED: 

BSED: 
BSED: 
BSED: 

BSED: 


BSED 
BSED 


BSED 
BSED 

BS: 
BS: 
BSED 


BSED 
BS: 


Program  and  Degree 
Social  Studies— Anthropol- 
ogy 
Social  Studies— Sociology 

Biology 

Chemistry 

Elementary  Education 

Early  Childhood  Education 

Communication 

Endorsement  Certification: 

Environmental  Education 

English 

French 

German 

Latin 

Russian 

Spanish 

Earth-Space  Science 

Social  Studies  — 

Geography 

Health  Education 

Dental  Hygiene 

Social  Studies  — 

History 

American  Cultures 

Ethnic  Studies 

Human  Heritages 

World  Cultures 

Mathematics 

Music  Education:  Vocal, 

Choral,  General, 

Instrumental 


Philosophy 
Physical  Education 

Physics 
Pohtical  Science 

Psychology 
Special  Education 


BSED:  Social  Studies - 
Philosophy 

BS:       Health  and  Physical  Educa- 
tion 

Endorsement  Certification: 
Driver  Education 

BSED:  Physics 

BSED:  Social  Studies - 
Political  Science 

BSED:  Social  Studies - 
Psychology 

BSED:  Special  Education 


ADMISSION  TO  TEACHER  EDUCAOON 

All  candidates  for  teacher  certification  must  meet  the  teacher 
education  requirements  as  well  as  satisfy  the  requirements  of 
their  respective  departments.  The  following  teacher  educa- 
tion requirements  must  be  satisfied  prior  to  student  teaching: 

1.  Maintain  a  cumulative  GPA  of  2.50 

2.  Maintain  an  overall  GPA  of  2.25  for  the  following  required 
courses:  EDF  100,  ED?  250,  ENG  120  (if  required),  ENG  121, 
three  credits  of  MAT  103  (or  course  required  by  major  depart- 
ment), PSY  100 

3.  Demonstrate  writing  competency  by  successfully  completing 
ENG  121 

4.  Completion  of  a  speech  screening  test  and  hearing  screening  test 

5.  Successfully  pass  a  reading  screening  test 

6.  Demonstrate  computer  literacy  competencies  by: 

a.  Successfully  completing  a  computer  literacy  course  (may  be 
part  of  general  education  science  distribution  requirement)  or 

b.  Passing  a  computer  literacy  test  administered  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 

7.  Provide  evidence  of  30  clock  hours  of  field  experience  by  main- 
taining a  portfolio  on  file  in  the  student's  major  department. 
Such  evidence  must  meet  the  standards  of  the  specific  certifica- 
tion program. 

STUDENT  TEACHING 

Student  teaching  is  to  be  taken  in  the  seventh  or  eighth 
semester  and  normally  culminates  the  professional  experi- 
ence in  preservice  preparation  for  teaching.  Students  are 
required  to  file  applications  for  student  teaching  with  their 


Teaching  Certification  Programs 


individual  departments.  Since  each  department's  regulations 
differ,  students  are  urged  to  check  with  departments  so  the 
proper  procedure  may  be  followed. 

Students  must  do  their  teaching  in  area  schools  where  the 
University  holds  a  contract  for  student  teachers. 

To  be  eligible  for  student  teaching,  candidates  must  have 
senior  standing  (96  semester  hours)  with  a  cumulative  index 
of  2.50  or  higher,  show  that  all  required  course  work  in  at 
least  the  first  six  semesters  has  been  completed,  and  have 
satisfied  the  requirements  for  full  admission  to  teacher  edu- 
cation. Criteria  for  student  teaching  approval  occasionally 
change.  Students  should  contact  departments  for  require- 
ments. A  student  must  earn  grades  of  C  or  better  to  qualify 
for  the  certificate.  Students  receiving  a  grade  of  C-  or  lower 
will  not  be  recommended  for  certification. 

TEACHE^JG  CERTIFICAFES 

It  is  the  student's  responsibility  to  apply  for  a  Pennsylvania 
Certificate  through  the  University's  Certification  Office.  It  is 
recommended  that  students  apply  as  soon  as  requirements 
have  been  met. 

Applicants  for  certification  must  meet  the  requirements  in 

effect  at  the  time  of  application. 

Applicants  for  the  certificate  generally  must  be  citizens  of  the 
United  States.  A  noncitizen  must  have  declared  the  intent  to 
become  a  citizen  of  the  United  States.  For  more  information, 
contact  the  University's  Certification  Office. 

Application  forms  and  information  about  certification  are 
available  from  the  Certification  Office  in  the  School  of 
Education. 

Postbaccalaureate  students  who  wish  to  obtain  teaching  cer- 
tification should  consult  with  the  School  of  Education. 


NATIONAL  TEACHER  EXAMINATION 

Applicants  for  an  initial  Pennsylvania  Instructional  Level  I 
Certificate  must  pass  the  National  Teachers  Examination  in 
communication  skills,  including  listening,  writing,  and  read- 
ing; general  knowledge,  including  social  sciences,  literature 
and  fine  arts,  math,  and  science;  professional  knowledge;  and 
a  major  subject  specialization  area.  The  professional  knowl- 
edge and  major  specialization  area  tests  should  be  taken  near 
the  end  of  the  senior  year  after  all  requirements  have  been 
completed.  West  Chester  University  has  been  designated  as  a 
test  center.  Tests  will  be  administered  three  times  a  year. 

INSTRUCTIONAL  I  CERTIFICATE 

A  student  who  completes  one  of  the  University's  teacher 
education  curricula  receives  his  or  her  degree  from  the  Uni- 
versity and  may  qualify  for  an  Instructional  I  Certificate, 
which  is  issued  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Educa- 
tion. This  certificate  is  valid  for  six  years  of  teaching  in 
Pennsylvania.  Recommendation  for  the  certificate  is  made  by 
the  certifying  officer  of  the  University. 

INSTRUCTIONAL  II  CERTIFICATE 

This  certificate  requires  three  years  of  successful  teaching  in 
Pennsylvania  under  the  Instructional  I  Certificate,  successful 
completion  of  an  Induction  Plan  approved  by  the  Pennsyl- 
vania Department  of  Education,  and  the  satisfactory  comple- 
tion of  24  semester  hours  of  additional  work  completed  at  a 
baccalaureate  granting  institution,  after  issuance  of  the  bac- 
calaureate degree.  This  certificate  is  a  permanent  license  to 
teach  in  Pennsylvania. 

All  or  part  of  the  educational  requirements  for  this  credential 
may  be  obtained  through  approved,  in-service  programs. 
Additional  subject  areas  may  be  obtained  by  completing 
requirements  for  that  area.  Students  should  consult  the 
department  in  which  they  seek  certification  for  information 
and  an  evaluation  of  their  credits. 


School  of  Health  Sciences 

Roger  W.  Mustalish,  Interim  Dean 


Department  of  Communicative  Disorders 

John  L.  Eberhart,  Chairperson 

PROFESSOR:  Weiss 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Koenig,  Maxwell,  Stigora, 
Stratton 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Eberhan,  Stuart 

The  Department  of  Communicative  Disorders  offers  two  pro- 
grams leading  to  the  bachelor's  degree. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  COMMUNICATIVE  DISORDERS  is  a  preprofessional 
program  that  provides  students  with  basic  knowledge  of  human 
communication  and  communication  disorders  in  preparation  for 
graduate  study  in  audiology,  speech-language  pathology,  speech 
and  hearing  science,  or  related  health  science  or  communication 
fields. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCAHON  in  SPEECH  CORRECTION  provides 
students  with  basic  knowledge  of  human  communication  and 
communication  disorders  that  qualifies  them  for  the  Pennsylva- 
nia Instructional  I  Certificate  and  prepares  them  for  graduate 
study. 

The  B.S.Ed,  program  has  been  suspended.  The  teacher  cer- 
tification may  be  moved  to  the  graduate  level. 

Both  degree  programs  provide  the  student  with  the  opportu- 
nity to  complete  much  of  the  undergraduate  preparation  that 
is  applicable  to  fulfilling  the  requirements  for  the  Certificate 
of  Clinical  Competence  (CCC)  fi-om  the  American  Speech- 
Language-Hearing  Association  (ASHA). 

The  department  operates  a  Speech  and  Hearing  Clinic  that 
serves  as  a  teaching  and  training  facility  for  the  academic 
program.  The  clinic  provides  diagnostic  and  therapeutic  ser- 
vices for  children  and  adults  -with  speech  and  hearing  prob- 
lems. These  services  are  available  to  individuals  from  the 
University  as  well  as  firom  the  surrounding  communities. 


Academic  Policies 

1.  Grades  of  "D"  or  "F"  earned  in  major  (SPP)  courses  must  be 
raised  to  "C"  or  better.  A  failed  major  course  must  be  repeated 
the  next  time  the  course  is  offered. 

2.  A  minimum  2.50  cumulative  GPA  and  2.50  major  average  is 
required  for  all  communicative  disorders  majors  in  order  to  com- 
plete the  degree  programs. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  COMMUNICATIVE  DISORDERS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38  51  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language  and  Culture  9-15  semester  hours 

3.  Related  Areas  24  semester  hours 
These  courses  are  to  be  selected  under 

advisement  fi-om  a  department-approved  list. 


Communicative  Disorders  Concentration 
SPP  101,  106,  163,  166,  203,  204,  206, 
263,  323,  333,  346,  350,  363,  366, 
451,  and  463 
Electives 


33  semester  hours 


6-21  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCAnON  -  SPEECH 
CORRECTION 

Each  student  must  complete  the  following  requirements: 


1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38 

2.  Cognate  Courses  and  Electives 
These  courses  are  to  be  selected  under 
advisement  from  a  department-approved  list. 

3.  Professional  Education 

EDA  241,  EDF  100,  EDP  250,  PSY  325 
and  375,  SPP  411-412  and  470 

4.  Specialized  Preparation 

PHY  110,  SPP  101,  106,  107,  203,  223,  236, 
323,  343,  346,  350,  351,  352,  and  471 

5.  Teacher  Education  Requirements 


51  semester  hours 
6  semester  hours 

30  semester  hours 

42  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMMUNICATIVE  DISORDERS 

Symbol:  SPP 

101     Introduction  to  Communicative  Disorders 
(3)  An  introductory  survey  of  normal  processes 
and  disorders  of  speech,  language,  and  hearing. 
Suitable  for  nonmajors. 

106    Anatomy  of  Speech  and  Hearing  Mechan- 
isms (3)  A  study  of  embryology,  normal  devel- 
opment, neurology,  and  physiology  of  anatomical 
structures  of  the  speech  and  hearing  mechan- 
isms. PREREQ:  SPP  101. 
163     Seminar  I  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(.5)  The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  information.  The 
seminar  will  focus  on  career/professional  aware- 
ness, orientation  to  the  deparmient,  and  individ- 
ual studies. 

166    Seminar  II  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(.5)  The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  information.  The 
seminar  will  focus  on  personal  adjustment, 
assertiveness,  and  active  listening. 


203  Speech  and  Hearing  Science  (3)  This 
course  presents  students  with  the  fundamental 
knowledge  of  acoustics  related  to  speech  produc- 
tion and  speech  perception.  It  abo  provides  an 
opportunity  for  students  to  engage  in  laboratory 
experiences  related  to  acoustic  and 
psychoacoustic  measurement. 

204  Speech  and  Language  Development  (3) 
Examination  of  normal  communication  develop- 
ment: biological,  cognitive,  social  and  ecological 
bases  of  language.  Developmental  milestones 
from  prelinguistic  communication  to  oral  lan- 
guage and  literacy.  Normal  variations  in  develop- 
ment associated  with  cultural  diversity  and  bilin- 
gualism.  PREREQ:  SPP  101,  ENGA-IN  230. 

206    Articulation  Disorders  and  Clinical  Pho- 
nology (3)  The  symptomatology,  etiology,  assess- 
ment, and  remediation  of  articulatory  and  pho- 
nological disorders.  Includes  study  of  standard 
and  variant  sounds  of  the  English  language,  and 
development  of  skilk  in  their  recognition,  pro- 
duction, and  transcription.  PREREQ:  SPP  101, 
106,  203,  204;  ENG/UN  230. 


263     Seminar  III  in  Communicative  Disorders 

(.5)  The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  information.  The 
seminar  will  focus  on  implications  of  disabilities 
and  on  cultural  diversity. 

323     Fluency  and  Voice  Disorders  (3)  The 
symptomatology,  etiology,  diagnosis,  and  treat- 
ment of  communicative  disorders  associated  with 
fluency  and  voice. 

333     Language  Disorders  (3)  Clinical  manage- 
ment issues  associated  with  developmental  and 
acquired  language  disorders  in  children  and 
adults.  Linguistic  patterns  observed  in  the  perfor- 
mance of  individuals  with  various  etiological 
conditions  (e.g.,  mental  retardation,  autism, 
hearing  loss,  neurological  impairment, 
craniofacial  anomalies,  learning  disability).  Fac- 
tors indicating  risk  for  and  maintenance  of  lan- 
guage disorders.  Protocols  for  evaluation  and 
treatment  indicated  by  developmental  theories, 
processing  modeb,  and  sensitivity  to  normal 
variations  among  culturally  diverse  populations. 
PREREQ:  SPP  204. 


ll      Department  of  Health 


340    Developmental  and  Disorders  of  Language 

(3)  An  examination  of  normal  language  develop- 
ment and  its  psycholinguistic,  neurological,  and 
social  dimensions.  Special  education  consider- 
ations for  children  with  language  disorders. 
PREREQ;  EDA  101  or  102  is  required;  SPP  101 
is  recommended. 

346     Hearing  Disorders  (3)  An  introduction  to 
audiology  and  its  relationship  to  other  medical 
and  educational  fields  concerned  with  hearing 
impairments  Developmental,  medical,  social, 
physical,  and  psychological  properties  of  hearing 
and  sound  are  explored.  Evaluative  techniques 
are  introduced  with  opportunity  for  limited  prac- 
tical experience.  PREREQ:  SPP  106  and  203. 

350     Clinical  Principles  in  Communicative 
Disorders  (3)  A  study  of  evaluative  and  thera- 
peutic materials  and  methods  applicable  to  the 
professional  setting.  PREREQ:  SPP  206,  323, 
and  333. 


363     Seminar  IV  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(.5)  The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  information,  focusing 
on  principles  and  applications  of  counseling. 
366    Seminar  V  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(.5)  The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  information,  focusing 
on  professional  resources  and  the  legal,  ethical, 
and  poUtical  responsibihties  of  the  professional. 
♦  410     Independent  Study  (1-3)  Research,  cre- 
ative projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  speech 
pathology  and  audiology.  Application  must  be 
made  to  advisers  by  students  one  semester  in 
advance  of  registration.  Open  to  juniors  and 
seniors  only.  PREREQ:  Approval  of  department 
chairperson.  Offered  on  demand. 

451     Clinical  Practicum  in  Communicative  Dis- 
orders (3)  Supervised  practice  in  the  Speech  and 
Hearing  Clinic.  Designed  to  prepare  students  to 
evaluate  and  provide  therapy  for  children  and 


adults  who  have  communication  problems.  Must 
be  repeated  if  performance  is  not  satisfactory. 
PREREQ:  Permission  of  instructor  and  2.50  aver- 
age in  major  SPP  courses. 
463     Seminar  VI  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(.5)  The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  information,  focusing 
on  employment  opportunities  and  graduate  edu- 
cation. 

469     Clinical  Instrumentation  (3)  Evaluation, 
selection,  use,  and  maintenance  of  electronic  aids 
for  the  speech  and  hearing  cUnician.  Emphasis 
on  demonstrations  and  practical  experience. 
Open  to  speech  pathology  and  audiology  stu- 
dents with  senior  standing.  Also  offered  as  SPP 
569  for  graduate  credit. 

♦  498    Workshop  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(3) 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Health 

Sheila  M.  Patterson,  Chairperson 
Robert  P.  Nye,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Lemcke,  Mustalish,  Nye,  Young 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Cinelli,  Fisher,  Goetz,  Harris, 
McConatha,  Sheehan 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Boyle,  Carson,  Patterson, 

Sankaran,  Shorten 

ADJUNCT  PROFESSORS:  Albright,  Evans,  Fellows,  Furio, 
LeRoy,  Robbins,  Therkauf,  Wix 

The  Department  of  Health  offers  three  programs  leading  to  a 
Bachelor  of  Science  degree  and  also  offers  an  Associate  of 
Science  degree  in  respiratory  care. 

1.  The  B.S.  in  HEALTH  EDUCATION  prepares  an  individual  to 
leach  in  grades  K  through  12.  Upon  completion  of  129  credits, 
the  students  take  the  mandated  examination  to  certify 
teachers  in  Pennsylvania.  Students  passing  the  exam  will 
receive  an  Instructional  Level  I  Certificate  to  teach  health 
education. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  PUBLIC  HEALTH  is  designed  to  provide  students 
with  the  competencies  needed  for  a  career  in  public  health.  Stu- 
dents selecting  this  program  will  take  a  public  health  core  of 
courses  and  select  one  of  the  concentrations  fi"om  the  following: 

a.  PUBLIC  HEALTH-HEALTH  PROMOTION.  Prepares  snidents 
for  a  career  as  a  pubhc  health  practinoner  in  hospitals,  health 
departments,  health  agencies,  and  industry.  The  program 
provides  a  comprehensive  basic  science  background  as  well  as 
a  strong  public  health  foundation.  This  is  an  accredited 
program  by  SOPHE/AAHE. 

b.  PUBLIC  HEALTH-ENVIRONMENTAL  HEALTH.  Prepares 
students  for  careers  as  environmental  health  scientists  in 
industry,  consulting  firms,  government,  and  academia.  The 
program  synthesizes  a  rigorous  general  scientific  preparation 
with  specialized  applied  courses  in  a  wide  range  of  environ- 
mental health  science  disciplines,  such  as  industrial  hygiene, 
hazardous  waste  management,  and  water  quality. 

c.  PUBUC  HEALTH-NUTRmON.  Prepares  students  for  careers 
in  nutrition,  working  in  schools,  industry,  and  hospitals. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  HEALTH  SCIENCE  is  for  students  who  have  com- 
pleted a  certificate  or  associate's  degree  program  in  such  health 
science  areas  as  dental  hygiene,  respiratory  therapy,  occupational 


therapy,  medical  technology,  and  cardiovascular  technology.  The 
program  gives  professionals  the  chance  to  build  on  their  techni- 
cal education  already  received  and  to  develop  academic  compe- 
tency in  a  related  field.  A  school  dental  hygiene  certification 
concentration  of  18  credits  is  offered  under  this  degree. 
4.  The  AS.  in  RESPIRATORY  CARE  is  offered  in  association  with 
Bryn  Mawr  Hospital.  Graduation  from  the  program  satisfies  the 
entrance  requirement  for  the  Written  Registry  Examination  and 
the  Clinical  Simulation  Examination  given  by  the  National  Board 
for  Respiratory  Care.  Successful  completion  of  these  examina- 
tions qualifies  the  candidate  as  a  registered  respiratory  therapist. 
Most  respiratory  therapists  are  employed  by  hospitals  and  home 
health  care  agencies. 

Academic  Policies 

1.  Repeating  Courses 

Department  of  Health  majors  who  earn  less  than  a  C 
(2.00)  in  selected  program  requirements  may  be  required 
to  repeat  such  courses.  Students  should  discuss  these 
requirements  with  their  advisers. 

2.  Overall  GPAs  for  student  teaching,  internships,  and  field 
experiences 

A.  A  minimum  2.50  cumulative  GPA  is  required  of  all 
school  health  education  majors  for  student  teaching 
assignments. 

B.  A  minimum  2.30  cumulative  GPA  is  required  of  all 
public  health  Giealth  promotion,  environmental 
health,  and  nutrition)  majors  for  internships  or  field 
experience  assignments. 

For  students  not  meeting  these  requirements,  supplemen- 
tary course  work  will  be  advised. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B.S.  PROGRAMS 

General  Education  Requirements,  51  semester  hours 

see  pages  35-38 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  HEALTH  EDUCAHON 

1.  Health  Education  Core  52  semester  hours 
HEA  100,  103,  204,  206,  242,  303,  304,  306, 

308,  330,  341,  342,  404,  405,  410,  and  440 

2.  Professional  Education  Requirements  18  semester  hours 
EDA  100  and  406,  EDF  100, 

EDM  300,  and  EDP  250  and  351 


•  These  required  courses  abo  satisfy  general  education  requirements. 


Department  of  Health 


3.  Cognate  Requirements 


1 1  semester  hours 


2.  Cognate  Requirements: 


49  semester  hours 


BIO  100',  259,  and  269;  CHE  102*,  COM  101, 
CSC  101*,  PHI  180*,  PSY  100*,  and  SOC  200* 


27  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  PUBUC  HEALTH 

1 .  Required  of  ALL  public  health  students 
BIO  110*  and  204,  CHE  103*  and  104*, 
CRL  103*  and  104*,  CSC  101,  HEA  341, 
and  MAT  121 

2.  All  public  health  students  are  required  to 
complete  one  of  three  concentrations: 

A.  Public  Health  —  Health  Promotion 

1.  Required:  ENV  350,  HEA  100,  103, 
204,  241,  242,  303,  306,  330,  342,  402, 
410,  420,  and  421 

2.  Cognate  Requirements:  BIO  259  and  269 
COM  101,  SOC  200,  and  SWO  200 

3.  Electives:  Selected  under  advisement 

B.  Public  Health  —  Environmental  Health 

1.  Required:  ENV  350,  451,  455,  456  21  semester 

2.  Elective  Environment  Health  Track  14  semester 
Select  from  one  of  the  following: 

a.  Environmental  Quality/Public  Sector 
ENV  360,  435,  450,  461,  462, 

and  463 

b.  Environmental  Quality/Occupational  Sector 
ENV  435,  452,  453,  459,  and  460 

c.  General:  Any  combination  of  the  above 
courses  taken  under  advisement 

3.  Cognate  Requirements 
BIO  270,  CHE  231-232,  CRL  232, 
ESL  101,  ESS  101,  MAT  161,  and 
PHY  130-140 


39  semester  hours 

1 1  semester  hours 
4  semester  hours 


hours 
hours 


28-29  semester  hours 


C.  Public  Health  -  Nutrition 

1.  Required:  HEA  241,  242,  303,  306, 
311,  341,  342,  411,  412,  413,  414, 
420,  and  421 


48  semester  hours 


BIO  110,  204,  259,  and  269;  CHE  103,  104, 
230,  and  310;  CSC  101;  ECO  101;  MAT  121; 
MGT  300;  PSY  100*;  and  SOC  200* 
3.  Other  courses  selected  under  advisement 
to  meet  a  total  of  130  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  HEALTH  SCIENCE 

1.  Satisfactory  completion  of  an  allied  health  certificate,  diploma, 
or  AS.  degree  program 

2.  Satisfactory  completion  of  128  semester  hours,  including 

a.  51  semester  hours  of  general  education 

b.  Complete  a  minimum  of  six  coordinated  courses  or  18 
semester  hours  approved  by  an  adviser.  Suggested  concentra- 
tions include  community  health,  advanced  respiratory 

care  course  work,  health  management,  school  dental 
hygiene  certification,  or  health  science  course  work. 


ASSOCMTE  OF  SCIENCE  -  RESPIRATORY  CARE 


1 


19  semester  hours 


44  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


General  Requirements 

COM  101,  ENG  120,  MAT  107,  PHI  180, 

PSY  100,  and  the  arts 

2.  Respiratory  Care  Requirements 
HEA  249,  250,  251,  252,  253,  254,  255,  256, 
257,  258,  259,  260,  261,  262,  263,  264,  265, 
and  266 

3.  Cognate  Requirements 
BIO  204,  259,  and  269,  and  CHE  100 

4.  Grade  Requirements 

a.  All  HEA  courses,  "C"  or  better 

b.  All  other  WCU  courses,  "C-"  or  better 

Minor  in  Health  Sciences  18  semester  hours 

Required  course  HEA  100  and  15  hours  of  other  health  courses 
selected  under  advisement.  Nine  credits  must  be  at  the  300  and  400 
level.  A  grade  of  C-  or  better  is  required  in  each  course. 


'  These  required  courses  also  satisfy  general  education  requirements. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ENVIRONMENTAL 

Symbol:  ENV 

#102     Humans  and  the  Environment  (3)  A 
study  of  the  ability  of  humans  to  survive  and 
maintain  their  life  quality  considering  the  limited 
resources  and  recycling  capacity  of  planet  Earth. 
350     Environmental  Health  (3)  Methods  of  pro- 
moting health  by  controlling  environmental  fac- 
tors relating  to  air,  water,  wastes,  housing,  radia- 
tion, and  industrial  hygiene.  PREREQ:  CHE  104 
and  BIO  110,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
360    Air  Quality  and  Health  (4)  A  con- 
sideration of  the  types  and  amounts  of  air  con- 
taminants, the  atmospheric  processes  that  trans- 
pon  them,  and  the  role  of  air  quality  in  human 
health.  PREREQ:  HEA  350,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

430     Hazardous  and  Solid  Wastes  (3)  Sources, 
characteristics,  and  amounts  of  soUd  and  hazard- 
ous wastes  and  their  implications  for  human 
health.  Methods  of  collection,  handling,  disposal, 
and  recycling.  PREREQ:  HEA  350,  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

451  Toxic  Substances  (3)  An  investigation  of 
the  health  problems  caused  by  toxic  substances 
in  the  workplace  and  in  the  general  environ- 
ment. PREREQ:  BIO  204,  CHE  231  (concurrent), 
HEA  350,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

452  Industrial  Hygiene  (3)  A  study  of  the 
anticipation,  recognition,  evaluation,  and  control 


of  health  hazards  in  the  work  environment. 
PREREQ:  HEA  350,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
453     Occupational  Safety  (3)  A  study  of  the 
recognition,  evaluation,  and  control  of  safety 
hazards  in  the  work  environment.  PREREQ:  HEA 
350,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
455     Environmental  Health  Seminar  (3) 
In-depth  investigation  and  discussions  on  topics 
of  particular  concern  or  significance  to  the  envi- 
ronmental health  field.  Topics  will  be  varied 
from  year  to  year.  PREREQ:  Senior  environmen- 
tal health  major. 

436     Environmental  Health  Internship  (12) 
Field  placement  with  an  environmental  health 
department  in  an  industry,  consulting  firm,  or 
government  agency.  PREREQ:  Senior  environ- 
mental health  major. 

459  Industrial  Health  Engineering  (3)  Stu- 
dents will  leam  various  environmental  health 
control  strategies  and  theoretical  bases  for  them. 
Students  also  will  improve  their  quantitative 
skilk  solving  problems  concerning  the  control  of 
environmental  health  and  safety  hazards.  Cost 
effectiveness  as  well  as  technical  effectiveness 
will  be  discussed.  PREREQ:  HEA  350,  452,  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

460  Industrial  Hygiene  Techniques  (3)  Stu- 
dents will  leam  evaluation  techniques  for  moni- 
toring the  industrial  environment  in  a  laboratory 
setting  as  well  as  in  the  field,  such  as  checking 
air  quaUty,  air  flow,  noise,  heat  stress,  and  radia- 


tion. Evaluation  of  personal  protective  equip- 
ment, and  pulmonary  function  and  audiometric 
testing  also  will  be  investigated.  PREREQ:  HEA 
350,  452,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

461  Introduction  to  Watersheds  (3)  An  intro- 
duction to  the  concept  of  watersheds  and  a  dis- 
cussion on  how  waterbome  disease  agents  are 
distributed  within  a  drainage  basin.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  methods  of  assessing  pollution  of 
water  resources. 

462  Water  Quality  and  Health  (4)  An  exami- 
nation of  the  quality  and  quantity  requirements 
of  surface  and  subsurface  water  resources  used 
for  drinking  water  supplies.  Laboratory  included. 
PREREQ:  HEA  350,  or  permission  of  instructor 

463  Wastewater  Systems  (4)  An  evaluation  of 
the  human  health  implications  of  liquid  wastes; 
sources,  waste  characteristics,  treatment,  and 
disposal  will  be  considered.  Laboratory  included. 
PREREQ:  HEA  350,  HEA  452,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

HEALTH 

Symbol:  HEA 

100     Dimensions  of  Wellness  (3)  Fundamental 
concepts  of  health  and  wellness  exploring  several 
health-related  areas  with  an  opportunity  for  per- 
sonal lifestyle  change  conducive  to  better  health. 


# Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Department  of  Health 


103  Addictives  (3)  Thorough  study  of  all 
addictives  in  relation  to  the  individual  and 
society. 

104  Human  Sexuality  (3)  Study  of  sexuality 
as  it  relates  to  self;  the  interrelationships  with 
people. 

105  Consumer  Issues  (3)  Study  of  consumer 
issues  today  that  relate  to  the  field  of  health. 

106  Death  and  Dying  (3)  Current  controversial 
issues  concerning  death  and  dying.  How 
involved  persons  cope  with  death. 

107  Parenthood  Education  (3)  Examining  the 
role  of  the  parent;  improvement  of  parent-child 
relationships. 

109  Health  Issues  of  Women  (3)  The  needs  and 
concerns  of  women  as  consumers  in  our  present 
health  care  system.  Various  biological,  psychologi- 
cal, and  social  topics  will  be  discussed. 

1 10  Transcultural  Health:  Principles  and  Prac- 
tices (3)  This  course  examines  the  health  beliefe 
and  practices  of  a  variety  of  subcultural  groups 
in  the  U.S.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  application 
of  multicultural  health  beliefs  to  the  caring  pro- 
cess. It  utilizes  the  cross-cultural  approach  in 
meeting  the  health  needs  of  cUents  and  famihes. 
It  is  open  to  all  college  students,  regardless  of 
major,  as  an  elective. 

201  Health  Education  I  (3)  Fundamental 
knowledge  of  major  health  content. 

202  Health  Education  II  (3)  Fundamental 
knowledge  of  major  health  content. 

204    First  Aid  for  Health  Professionals  (3)  Pre- 
pares students  entering  the  professional  field  of 
health  to  meet  emergencies  requiring  first-aid 
procedures. 

206     Human  Development  (3)  A  lifespan 
approach  to  the  study  of  human  development  in 
the  physical,  cognitive,  and  psychosocial 
domains. 

211     First-Aid  for  Children  (1)  Safety  and 
Cardiopulmonary  Resuscitation  (CPR)  for  early 
childhood  or  elementary  education  majors. 

241  Introduction  to  Public  Health  (3)  A  study 
of  the  components,  functions,  and  interrelation- 
ships that  are  part  of  any  program  or  organiza- 
tion in  public  health. 

242  Community  Health  (3)  Community  health 
problems  and  services  considered  on  the  local, 
national,  and  international  levels.  Includes  prac- 
tical experience.  PREREQ:  HEA  241. 

249  Respiratory  Therapy  Equipment  (3)  Study 
of  the  equipment  utilized  in  the  delivery  of  res- 
piratory care. 

250  Bronchopulmonary  Hygiene  (3)  An  in- 
depth  study  of  respiratory  care  modalities  uti- 
lized in  the  maintenance  of  bronchopulmonary 
hygiene,  including  humidity  and  aerosol  therapy, 
sustained  maximal  inspiration,  IPPB  therapy, 
chest  physical  therapy,  and  airway  maintenance. 

251  Oxygen  Therapy  (2)  An  overview  of  basic 
science  relevant  to  respiratory  therapy  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  study  of  the  manufacture,  storage, 
and  transpon  of  medical  gases,  regulators,  and 
metering  devices,  oxygen  therapy,  and  oxygen 
analysis. 

252  Medical  Terminology  (1)  An  introduction 
to  medical  terminology  using  a  programmed 
instruction,  self-learning  technique.  Includes 
chart  format,  word  parts,  pulmonary  terminology 
abbreviations,  and  an  overview  of  respiratory 
anatomy. 

253  Aspects  of  Respiratory  Therapy  I  (2)  A 
discussion  of  topics  essential  to  the  provision  of 
comprehensive  respiratory  therapy.  Topics 
include  patient  care,  CPR,  and  psychosocial 
issues. 


254  Clinical  Practice  I  (2)  An  introduction  to 
clinical  respiratory  care  consisting  of  rotations 
through  patient  care  areas  followed  by  discussion 
of  experiences  and  correlation  to  didactic  work. 

255  Pulmonary  Function  Evaluation  (2)  A 
comprehensive  study  of  various  pulmonary  func- 
tion evaluation  techniques.  Includes  broncho- 
scopy and  arterial  blood  gas  analysis 

256  Mechanical  Ventilation  (3)  A  comprehen- 
sive study  of  mechanical  ventilation,  including 
the  physiology  of  positive  pressure  breathing, 
techniques  of  ventilation,  characteristics  of  com- 
monly used  ventilators,  and  monitoring  of  the 
ventilator-patient  system. 

257  Respiratory  Physiology  (2)  An  in-depth 
study  of  breathing  mechanics,  pulmonary  circu- 
lation, ventilaaon/perfusion  ratios,  regulation  of 
ventilation,  and  gas  transport. 

258  Aspects  of  Respiratory  Therapy  11  (2)  A 
continuation  of  HEA  253.  Topics  include  rehabil- 
itation, home  care,  adminstration  and  organiza- 
tion, respiratory  pharmacology,  and  infection- 
control  techniques. 

259  Clinical  Practice  II  (4)  An  intensive  expo- 
sure to  noncritical  patient  care  areas.  Perfor- 
mance evaluation  of  basic  therapies  to  include 
humidity,  aerosol,  oxygen,  chest  inflation  tech- 
niques, suctioning,  and  chest  physical  therapy. 

260  Cardiopulmonary  Diseases  (2)  A  compre- 
hensive study  of  cardiopulmonary  diseases  and 
treatment.  Includes  pulmonary  diagnostic  proce- 
dures. 

261  Respiratory  Therapy  Seminar  I  (2) 
Includes  critical,  written  analysis,  and  discussion 
of  pertinent  respiratory-  care  literature  as  well  as 
elements  of  research  relevant  to  the  respiratory 
care  profession.  The  students  culminate  their 
study  of  respiratory  care  by  designing  and  imple- 
menting a  miniresearch  project. 

262  Clinical  Practice  III  (2)  An  introduction  to 
critical  and  specialized  respiratory  care  areas  fol- 
lowed by  discussions  and  correlation  to  didactic 
work. 

263  Cardiopulmonary  Evaluation  (3)  An 
in-depth  study  of  monitoring  and  evaluation  tech- 
niques including  modules  on  cardiopuhnonary 
physiology,  electrocardiographic  monitoring,  and 
hemodynamic  monitoring.  Interpretation  and 
appUcation  data  is  emphasized.  Appropriate  lab 
experience  is  included. 

264  Clinical  Practice  FV  (5)  An  intensive  expo- 
sure to  critical  care  and  specialized  areas  of  respi- 
ratory care.  Performance  evaluation  of  therapies 
and  procedures  to  include  mechanical  ventilator 
set-up,  and  evaluation,  neonatal  ventilator  set-up, 
pulmonary  function  assessment,  anerial  line  set- 
up, and  arterial  line  blood  withdrawal. 

265  Pediatric/Neonatal  Respiratory  Care  (2)  A 
comprehensive  study  of  neonatal  and  pediatric 
respiratory  care,  including  fetal  lung  develop- 
ment, pathophysiology  of  the  neonate  and  pedi- 
atric patient,  and  related  respiratory  care  proce- 
dures. 

266  Pharmacology  (2)  An  in-depth  study  of 
various  drug  categories  including  drug-dose 
response  and  principles  of  absorption,  distribu- 
tion, metabolism,  and  excretion. 

301     Health  for  the  Elementary  Grades 

(3)  Principles  and  procedures  for  meeting  the 

health  needs  of  the  child. 

303  Introductory  Principles  of  Human  Nutri- 
tion (3)  Practical  approach  to  the  role  nutrition 
and  dietetics  play  in  improving  the  quality  of  our 
hves— socially,  physically,  mentally,  and  emo- 
tionally. Dispelling  of  fads  and  fallacies. 

304  Family  Life  and  Sex  Education  (3)  Basic 
concepts  and  objectives  of  such  a  program  for 


students  at  different  age  levels.  Organizing, 
launching,  and  evaluating  the  program. 

305  Contraceptive  Technology  and  Health 
Issues  (3)  The  course  will  teach  contraceptive 
methods,  reasons  for  a  society's  acceptance  or 
rejection  of  certain  methods,  and  the  effect  on 
the  health  care  delivery  system. 

306  Preparation  for  Classroom  Teaching  (3)  A 
comprehensive  study  of  the  materials  available  in 
health  education  and  the  techniques  for  their 
implementation. 

♦  308     Field  Experience  in  Health  Education 
(1)  Opportunities  for  observation  and  field  expe- 
rience in  health  science  settings. 

310  Love  and  Marriage  (3)  Defines  love  and 
marriage  for  the  student  and  teaches  the  skills 
essential  to  fulfilling  those  needs. 

311  Applied  Nutrition  (3)  A  study  of  methods 
of  nutritional  assessment,  community  aspects  of 
nutrition,  nutrition  and  the  lifecycle,  and  con- 
cepts of  meal  plarming.  PREREQ:  HEA  303. 

312  Food  Science  (4)  A  study  of  the  chemical, 
physical,  and  biological  effects  of  processing, 
storage,  and  preservation  on  the  structure,  com- 
position, palatability,  and  nutritive  value  of  food. 
(Includes  a  lab) 

313  Food  Service  Systems  Management 

(4)  A  study  of  the  organization  and  administra- 
tion of  food  service  systems  and  the  functions 
and  responsibilities  specific  to  this  management. 
Personnel,  food  cost,  accounting,  production, 
and  service  facility  planning  and  environmental 
design  will  be  examined.  Quantity  food  produc- 
tion abo  will  be  studied. 
320     Positive  Aspects  of  Aging  (3)  Describes 
past,  present,  and  projected  information  concern- 
ing the  aging  process  in  normal  human  develop- 
ment. 

325     Stress  Management  (3)  Comprehensive 
survey  of  stress  concepts,  theories,  and  manage- 
ment techniques.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  personal 
application. 

330  Health  Behavior  (3)  Individual  and  group 
health  behavior  of  children  and  adults  at  different 
levels  of  wellness  and  in  various  settings.  Past  and 
current  theories  of  health  behavior  with  methods 
of  apphcation  by  health  professiorials  will  be 
included.  PREREQ:  HEA  100,  241,  and  242. 

331  Health  Promotion  in  the  Workplace  (3)  A 
study  of  current  health  promotion  efforts  and 
programs  for  employees  and  management  per- 
sonnel at  the  worksite. 

341  Chronic  and  Communicable  Diseases 
(3)  A  study  of  the  disease  process,  including 
causes,  effects,  and  control  of  selected  diseases 
with  an  emphasis  on  disease  prevention  and 
health  promotion.  PREREQ:  HEA  241  and  242. 

342  Program  Planning  and  Evaluation  (3)  Pro- 
vides an  in-depth  study  of  the  program  planning 
process  and  evaluation  methods.  Needed  skills 
are  developed  and  experience  given  in  writing 
programs  from  assessment  through  evaluation 
with  both  hypothetical  and  real  populations. 
PREREQ:  HEA  341. 

400  Advances  in  Dental  Health  I  (3)  A  com- 
prehensive examination  and  investigation  of 
recent  advances  in  dental  health  designed  for  the 
registered  dental  hygienist  and  certified  dental 
assistant. 

401  Seminar  in  Health  (3)  A  study  of  current 
critical  and  controversial  health  issues, 

402  Blood  Pressure  Measurement  (I)  The 
course  will  teach  the  technique  for  accurate 
blood  pressure  measurement,  proper  referring 
and  recording  procedures,  and  the  necessary 
communication  skills  with  clients. 


Department  of  Nursing 


4CM    Student  Teaching:  Middle  School  (6)  Prac- 
tical classroom  experience  in  teaching  health  edu- 
cation. PREREQ:  HEA  303,  304,  306,  and  308. 
405     Student  Teaching:  Secondary  School 
(6)  Practical  classroom  experience  in  teaching 
health  education.  PREREQ:  HEA  404. 
408     Dental  Hygiene  Field  Experience  (6)  Field 
experience  for  dental  hygienists  who  are  working 
towards  certification  as  public  school  dental 
hygienists,  or  are  preparing  to  teach  in  a  school 
of  dental  hygiene. 

410  Mental  Health  (3)  Designed  to  aid  persoits 
in  improving  their  understanding  of  themselves 
and  others.  Emphasis  on  ways  to  recognize  men- 
tal health  problems. 

411  Advanced  Human  Nutrition  I  (3)  In-depth 
examination  of  the  digestion,  transport,  and 
metabolism  of  carbohydrates,  lipids,  and  pro- 
teins. Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  metaboUc 
interrelationships  and  hormonal  control  of  the 
three  processes  mentioned  above.  PREREQ:  BIO 
110,  259,  269;  CHE  230,  404;  HEA  303. 

412  Advanced  Human  Nutrition  II  (3) 
In-depth  examination  of  the  digestion,  transport, 
and  metabolism  of  vitamins,  minerals,  and  water. 


Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  digestive  and  met- 
abolic interrelationships  and  hormonal  control. 
PREREQ:  BIO  110,  259,  269;  CHE  230,  404; 
HEA  303. 

413  Nutritional  Aspects  of  Disease  I  (3)  This 
course  covers  nutritional  assessment,  drug- 
nutrient  interactions,  nutritional  therapy  in  dis- 
eases of  infancy  and  childhood,  gastrointestinal 
diseases,  diseases  of  the  Uver  and  gallbladder, 
and  surgery.  PREREQ:  BIO  110,  259,  269;  CHE 
230,  404;  HEA  303,  311. 

414  Nucridonal  Aspects  of  Disease  II  (3)  This 
course  covers  nutritional  therapy  in  coronary 
heart  disease  and  hypertension,  diabetes  meUitus, 
renal  disease,  cancer,  and  disabling  diseases. 
PREREQ:  BIO  110,  259,  269;  CHE  230,  404; 
HEA  303,  311. 

420  Preparation  for  Internship  (3)  A  compre- 
hensive study  and  integration  of  the  areas  of 
responsibihty  for  the  public  health  major  and 
their  corresponding  functions  and  skilb  essential 
for  a  successful  internship.  PREREQ:  HEA  342. 

421  Public  Health  Internship  (12)  A  practical, 
full-time  work  experience  in  a  hospital,  public 
health  agency,  or  company,  jointly  supervised  by 


an  on-site  supervisor  and  a  pubhc  health  faculty 
member.  PREREQ:  HEA  420. 

♦  425  Independent  Study  (1-3)  The  student 
will  initiate  a  health-related  research  study  or 
project  under  facult)-  supervision. 

♦  435     Health  Workshop  (1-6)  Special  work- 
shops on  contemporary  health  problems  and 
issues.  Topics  announced  at  time  of  offering. 
440     School  Health  Program  (3)  School  health 
services,  environment,  and  instruction,  and  orga- 
nization and  administration  of  a  school  health 
program. 

470  Advances  in  Respiratory  Therapy  I  (3)  A 
comprehensive  examination  and  investigation  of 
recent  advances  in  respiratory  therapy  designed 
for  the  registered  or  registry-eligible  therapist, 

471  Individualized  Study  in  Respiratory  Care 
(3)  A  course  to  gain  didactic  knowledge  through 
independent  readings  and  research  in  a  chosen 
subspecialty.  Practical  application  is  stressed 
through  a  minimum  of  112  hours  of  field  experi- 
ence in  an  appropriate  setting. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Nursing 

Ann  Coghlan  Stowe,  Chairperson 

Kathleen  Devlin-Kelly,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSOR:  Slaninka 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Haus,  Hickman,  Michelmore, 

Perciful 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Brown,  Conroy,  Coghlan  Stowe, 
Devlin-Kelly,  Garrett,  Knauss,  Matz,  Nester 

INSTRUCTOR:  Tucker 

The  Department  of  Nursing  is  accredited  by  the  National 
League  for  Nursing  and  approved  by  the  State  Board  of 
Nursing  of  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 

Admission  Criteria 

Applicants  for  nursing  must  have  completed  work  equal  to  a 
standard  high  school  course,  including  a  minimum  of  1 6 
units:  four  units  of  English,  three  units  of  social  studies,  two 
units  of  mathematics  (one  of  which  must  be  algebra),  and  two 
units  of  science  with  a  related  laboratory  course  or  the  equiva- 
lent. A  combined  score  of  1000  is  expected  on  the  SAT. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  NURSING 

The  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  program  in  nursing  is  offered  by  the 
Department  of  Nursing,  which  is  an  integral  part  of  the  School  of 
Health  Sciences.  The  family-centered  program  is  based  on  the  con- 
cept that  the  person  is  a  biopsychosocial  being  with  basic  health 
needs.  The  Department  of  Nursing  believes  that  high-quality  health 
care  is  a  basic  right  of  all  people  and  that  health  care  needs  can  be 
met  through  the  practice  of  the  professional  nurse  who  has  com- 
pleted a  systematic  program  of  courses  in  the  social  and  natural 
sciences,  humanities,  and  the  nursing  major. 
Characteristics  of  the  graduate  include:  1)  an  awareness  of,  and 
sense  of  responsibilit)'  for,  contemporary  health  and  social  issues; 
2)  advocacy  for  health  care  improvement  in  society  through  pro- 
fessional citizen  activities  at  various  adaptational  levels  and  devel- 
opmental stages  in  a  variety  of  settings;  3)  accountability  and 
competency  in  utilizing  the  nursing  process  to  assist  clients;  4)  col- 
laboration, coordination,  and  consultation  as  a  colleague  in  the 


interdisciplinary  health  team;  5)  belief  in  learning  as  a  Ufe-long  pro- 
cess; 6)  participation  in  the  change  process  by  collection  of  data 
applying  to  nursing  theories  and  practice. 

DEGREE  REQUIREMENTS 

1.  Core  Requirements* 

BIO  100,  204,  259,  269,  and  307;  CHE  103-104  and  CRL  103- 
104  or  CHE  107  and  CRL  107;  CHE  230,  and  404;  ENG  120 
and  121;  MAT  121;  PSY  100,  210,  and  375;  and  SOC  200  and 
240 

2.  Nursing  Concentration  Requirements 

NSG  212,  311-312,  and  411-412,  NSL  212,  311-312,  411-412, 
and  one  nursing  elective. 
A  total  of  130  credits  is  required  for  graduation. 

Special  Requirements 

Generic  nursing  candidates  are  admitted  once  a  year,  in  September. 
Transfer  students  can  be  admitted  in  spring  and  fall. 
Nursing  students  are  required  to  supply  their  own  transportation  to 
clinical  facilities. 

Insurance.  Students  are  required  to  carry  liabilit)'  insurance  cover- 
age in  the  amount  of  $1,000,000/$3,000,000  during  the  junior  and 
senior  year  at  a  yearly  cost  of  approximately  $30.  Students  also  are 
required  to  carry  health  insurance. 

Uniforms.  Students  are  required  to  wear  white  uniforms  to  some  of 
the  clinical  experiences  during  the  junior  and  senior  years.  Uniform 
policies  are  presented  in  detail  in  the  current  issue  of  the  depart- 
ment handbook. 

CPR  Certification.  Students  enrolled  in  nursing  courses  with  a  clini- 
cal component  are  required  to  be  currendy  certified  by  the  American 
Red  Cross,  American  Heart  Association,  or  other  acceptable  resource 
in  Life  Support  (two-person)  Cardiopulmonary  Resuscitation.  The 
CPR  course  must  include  resuscitation  of  children  and  infants. 
Calculations  exam.  Competenc)'  in  calculation  of  dosages  is  a  pre- 
requisite to  NSG/NSL  311.  The  student  is  required  to  have  attained 
100%  proficiency  in  calculating  dosages  as  measured  by  a  paper  and 
pencil  test.  The  nursing  laboratory  coordinator  administers  the  cal- 
culations exam  in  the  spring  semester  immediately  prior  to  enroll- 
ing in  the  clinical  courses. 


'Some  of  these  courses  may  be  used  to  satisfy  distributive  requirements. 


Department  of  Nursing 


Mosby  Assess  Test.  All  senior  students  must  complete  the  Mosby 
Assess  Test  prior  to  graduation.  Cost  is  assumed  by  the  student. 

Health  Requirements 

Nursing  candidates  must  meet  the  general  health  requirements  of 
all  students  at  West  Chester  University  for  the  freshman  and  sopho- 
more years.  Candidates  must  meet  the  following  health  require- 
ments during  the  summer  prior  to  the  junior  and  senior  years; 
inoculations  against  diphtheria,  typhoid,  tetanus,  measles,  poliomy- 
elitis (a  series  of  four),  and  Hepatitis  B;  a  complete  physical  exami- 
nation that  must  include  a  complete  blood  count,  blood  serology, 
TB  skin  test,  urinalysis,  dental  and  eye  examinations,  and  any  other 
diagnostic  tests  deemed  necessary. 

Academic  Promotion  Policy 
Incompletes,  Failures,  and  D  Grades 

All  nursing  students  who  have  a  grade  of  1  (Incomplete),  D,  or  F  in 
required  courses  during  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years  must  repeat 
these  courses  and  achieve  a  satisfactory  grade  (C  -  or  above)  before 
entering  the  junior-level  nursing  major  courses.  Nursing  students  must 
have  a  2.00  GPA  before  entering  the  clinical  courses  at  the  junior  year. 
A  student  must  achieve  a  grade  of  C  —  or  better  in  the  nursing  major 
in  the  junior  year  for  promotion  to  the  senior  year  and  achieve  at 
least  a  C  -  in  the  senior  year  for  graduation.  Students  also  must 
achieve  at  least  a  C-  in  BIO  307,  MAT  121,  and  PSY  375. 
If  a  student  must  repeat  a  nursing  course,  a  grade  of  C  —  or  better  in 
both  the  theory  and  laboratory  (clinical  practicum)  components  must 
be  achieved.  The  theory  and  cUnical  portions  of  a  nursing  course 
must  be  taken  concurrendy.  Not  achieving  at  least  a  C  —  in  such 
cases  is  considered  grounds  for  dismissal  from  the  nursing  major. 
Other  policies  are  explained  in  detail  in  the  current  issue  of  the 
department  handbook. 

Nursing  Laboratory 

The  nursing  laboratory  in  the  basement  of  the  Old  Library  building 
is  available  as  a  resource  to  help  the  nursing  student  in  the  learning 
process.  There  are  two  sections  of  the  laboratory.  One  area  houses  a 
variety  of  equipment  that  allows  the  student  to  view  audio-visual 
material  such  as  filmstrips,  shdes,  and  videocassettes  related  to 
psychomotor  skills  involved  in  nursing.  This  equipment  can  be  used 
individually  or  in  small  groups.  The  other  section  contains  equip- 
ment that  allows  the  student  to  practice  these  skills.  Computers  are 
available  in  the  labs  for  use  with  various  software  packages. 
Every  student  is  required  to  use  the  learning  laboratory  at  specified 
rimes.  In  addition,  students  are  expected  to  spend  time  utilizing  this 
resource  for  independent  learning  based  on  their  individual  needs.  The 
laboratory  is  staffed  by  a  full-time  nursing  laboratory  coordinator  who 
is  a  registered  nurse.  The  hours  when  the  lab  is  open  will  be  posted. 

Transfer  Policy 

Transfer  students  are  accepted  into  the  nursing  major.  The  number 

will  be  limited  annually  to  the  number  that  the  department  can 

accommodate  in  a  sound  educational  experience. 

Students  currently  enrolled  at  West  Chester  University  who  wish  to 

transfer  in  to  the  Department  of  Nursing  must  attend  a  transfer 


information  session  to  begin  the  process  and  subsequendy  submit 

an  application  packet  to  the  department.  All  application  procedures 

must  be  completed  by  the  deadlines  established  by  the  Department 

of  Nursing  in  order  for  the  candidate  to  be  considered  for  entrance 

into  the  nursing  major. 

All  students  who  wish  to  transfer  into  the  Department  of  Nursing 

must: 

1.  have  a  cumulative  Grade  Point  Average  of  2.50  or  better. 

2.  show  evidence  of  satisfactory  completion  (70%  or  better)  in  BIO 
100  or  259,  CHE  103  and  CRL  103,  or  CHE  107  and  CRL  107, 
and  PSY  100  or  SOC  200 

3.  meet  with  the  adviser  in  the  Department  of  Nursing  to  sign  an 
individualized  "agreement"  that  reserves  placement  in  clinical 
nursing  courses  during  the  academic  year  identified. 

Degree  Program  for  Registered  Nurses 

The  department  also  offers  a  program  for  registered  nurses  who 
wish  to  earn  a  baccalaureate  degree  in  nursing.  The  registered  nurse 
is  required  to  complete  a  series  of  nursing  examinations  to  demon- 
strate current  nursing  knowledge  and  determine  placement  in  the 
nursing  major.  Detailed  information  about  this  program  may  be 
obtained  from  the  Office  of  Admissions  or  the  department  office. 

Licensing  Eligibility  in  Pennsylvania 

In  order  to  be  employed  in  professional  nursing,  students  must  apply 
for  a  temporary  practice  permit  through  the  State  Board  of  Nursing. 
Students  must  meet  all  program  requirements  to  be  eligible  for  the 
NCLEX  Examination  upon  graduation.  Passing  this  examination 
designates  Registered  Nurse  (RN)  status.  In  accordance  with  the 
January  1,  1986,  Professional  Nursing  Law  (P.L.  317,  No.  69),  felo- 
nious acts  prohibit  licensing  in  Pennsylvania  in  accordance  with  the 
following  guidelines: 

The  State  Board  of  Nursing  in  Pennsylvania  shall  not  issue  a 
Ucense  of  certificate  to  an  appUcant  who  has  been: 

1.  Convicted**  of  a  felonious  act  prohibited  by  the  act  of 
April  14,  1972  (PL.  233,  No.  64),  known  as  "The  Con- 
trolled Substance,  Drug,  Device  and  Cosmetic  Act",  or 

2.  Convicted**  of  a  felony  relating  to  a  controlled  substance 
in  a  court  of  law  of  the  United  States  or  any  other  state, 
territory,  or  country  unless: 

a.  At  least  10  years  have  elapsed  from  the  date  of  the  convicaon; 

b.  The  applicant  satisfactorily  demonstrates  to  the  board 
significant  progress  in  personal  rehabilitation  since  the 
conviction  such  that  licensure  should  not  create  a  sub- 
stantial risk  of  further  violations;  and 

c.  The  applicant  otherwise  satisfies  the  qualifications  con- 
tained in  this  act. 

A  person  convicted  of  any  felonious  act  may  be  prohibited 
fr'om  licensure  by  the  Board  of  Nursing  at  any  time. 


•  'Convicted  includes  a  judgment,  an  admission  of  guilt,  or  a  plea  of  nolo 
contendere. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

NURSING 

Symbol:  NSG 

109    Health  Issues  of  Women  (3)  (Offered 
joindy  with  Department  of  Health,  as  NSG/HEA 
109)  This  course  encompasses  the  needs  and 
concerns  of  women  as  consumers  in  our  present 
healdi  care  system.  It  examines  various  biologi- 
cal, psychological,  and  social  topics  related  to 
women's  health  care,  including  medical  abuses, 
sexuality,  sex  roles,  and  women's  health  in  the 


workplace.  This  course  is  an  enrichment  to  lib- 
eral education,  encouraging  inquiry  into  previ- 
ously neglected  areas  of  women  and  health.  It  is 
offered  in  the  Women's  Studies  Program  and  is 
open  to  all  University  students,  regardless  of 
major,  as  an  elective. 

1 10    Transcultural  Health:  Principles  and 
Practices  (3)  (Offered  joindy  with  Department 
of  Health,  as  NSG/HEA  110)  This  course  exam- 
ines the  health  beliefs  and  practices  of  a  variety 
of  subcultural  groups  in  the  U.S.  Emphasis  is 


placed  on  the  appUcation  of  multicultural 
health  beliefe  to  the  caring  process.  It  utilizes  the 
cross-cultural  approach  in  meeting  the  health 
needs  of  cUents  and  families.  It  is  open  to  all 
University  students,  regardless  of  major,  as  an 
elective. 

212     Nursing  Theories  and  Concepts  (4)  Taken 
in  the  sophomore  year.  Nursing  theories  and 
concepts,  conceptual  frameworks,  theories  from 
other  disciplines  that  may  apply  to  nursing,  and 
the  nursing  process  are  studied  in  this  course. 
PREREQ:  Sophomore  standing. 


Department  of  Physical  Education 


NSL  212     Nursing  Theories  and  Concepts 
Lab  (2)  (Must  be  taken  with  NSG  212) 
This  chnical  experience  includes  inter- 
viewing skills,  physical  and  psychosocial  assess- 
ment, vital  signs  measurement,  basic  hygienic 
practices,  body  mechanics,  and  infection 
control. 

214     Proseminar:  Nursing  Theories  and  Con- 
cepts (3)  The  student  examines  various  nursing 
theories  and  concepts;  conceptual  frameworks; 
theories  from  other  disciplines  that  apply  to 
nursing;  nursing  history;  nursing  education;  pro- 
fessionalism in  nursing;  the  nursing  process;  the 
ethical,  legal,  and  poUtical  aspects  of  nursing; 
and  current  issues  in  nursing.  This  course  is  a 
prerequisite  for  upper-division  nursing  courses 
and  serves  as  a  transition  to  subsequent  nursing 
courses.  There  is  no  chnical  practicum  associated 
with  NSG  214.  PREREQ:  RN  licensure. 

216  Adaptations  in  the  Aged  (3)  The  student 
will  have  the  opportunity  to  form  a  relationship 
with  a  healthy,  elderly  individual.  Students  will 
utilize  communication  skills  through  interaction 
on  a  one-to-one  basis  with  senior  citizens  in  a 
private  home  setting.  Students  will  become 
acquainted  with  the  problems  of  day-to-day  liv- 
ing and  the  crises  that  face  this  population  along 
with  the  adaptive  strengths  and  resources  that 
are  an  essential  part  of  the  healthy  older  per- 
son's personality. 

217  Loss  and  Grieving:  What  to  Say,  What  to 
Do  (3)  Loss,  grief,  and/or  depression  are  univer- 
sal experiences.  Concrete  measures  to  help  one- 
self and  peers  better  cope  with  these  experiences 
are  presented.  Barriers  that  make  providing  com- 
fort and  suppon  to  others  difficult  or  uncomfort- 
able are  identified  and  discussed.  Effective  mea- 
sures for  talking  with  and  helping  those  who  are 
grieving,  depressed,  or  suicidal  are  presented, 
and  each  student  is  assisted  to  develop  his  or  her 
own  style  in  comfortably  using  selected 
approaches.  Classes  will  be  participatory  with 
minimal  lecture. 

218  Concepts  in  Caring  (3)  The  emphasis  of 
this  course  is  that  caring  is  a  universal  concept 
that  can  be  viewed  from  many  disciplines. 
Nurses,  professionals  in  the  caring  business, 
serve  as  the  guides  in  a  creative  journey  connect- 
ing human  caring  and  the  various  disciplines. 
311     Adaptation  I  (5)  Must  be  taken  during  junior 
year,  fall  semester.  The  emphasis  of  this  course  is 
on  the  prevention  of  illness  and  promotion  of  health 
by  assessment  of  the  health  status,  appropriate  inter- 


vention, and  evaluation  of  the  health  promotion 
plan.  The  nursing  process  provides  the  framework 
for  promotion  of  wellness  in  a  variety  of  settings 
with  clients  of  any  age  group. 
NSL  311     Adaptation  I  Laboratory  (5)  Clinical 
experiences  are  provided  in  agencies  where  rela- 
tively well  populations  have  been  identified,  such 
as  schools,  nursery  schools,  well  baby  clinics, 
and  health  maintenance  clinics.  NSG  311  and 
NSL  311  always  must  be  taken  concurrently. 
PREREQ:  BIO  100,  204,  259,  and  269;  CHE  103- 
104  and  CRL  103-104  or  CHE  107  and  CRI   107, 
CHE  230,  and  404;  ENG  120  and  121;  NSG  212 
and  NSL  212;  PSY  100  and  210;  and  SOC  200 
and  240. 

312    Adaptation  II  (5)  Must  be  taken  during 
junior  year,  spring  semester.  The  emphasis  of 
this  course  is  on  the  maintenance  of  health  and 
promotion  of  adaptive  responses  in  clients  with 
chronic  health  problems.  The  nursing  process  is 
used  to  assist  these  chents  to  adapt  to  stressors 
through  supportive  therapeutic,  palliative,  and 
preventive  measures. 

NSL  312    Adaptation  II  Laboratory  (5)  Clinical 
experience  is  provided  in  settings  where  clients 
with  chronic  health  problems  have  been  identi- 
fied. These  settings  include  rehabilitation  centers, 
a  child  development  center,  nursing  homes,  and 
acute  care  settings.  These  environments  provide 
flexibility  for  students  to  implement  changes  for 
cUents  and  acquire  skills  that  will  be  utilized  in 
other  nursing  courses.  NSG  312  and  NSL  312 
always  must  be  taken  concurrently.  PREREQ: 
BIO  307,  NSG  311,  and  NSL  311. 
314     Internship  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to 
provide  nursing  students  with  the  opportunity  to 
enhance  knowledge  and  skills  acquired  in  NSG/ 
NSL  311-312.  Students  will  have  the  opportunity 
to  participate  in  the  care  of  a  group  of  clients 
over  a  consecutive  span  of  days  and  to  increase 
their  awareness  of  the  professional  role. 
PREREQ:  Successftil  completion  of  NSG/NSL 
311-312. 

316     Coping  with  Cancer  (3)  The  emphasis  of 
this  course  is  on  coping  with  clients  who  have 
cancer.  Various  physiological  and  psychosocial 
effects  this  disease  has  on  clients  and  their  fami- 
Ues  will  be  examined.  The  course  will  allow  stu- 
dents to  explore  their  own  feelings  related  to 
cancer  and  assist  them  in  their  contacts  with 
cancer  clients.  Topics  that  will  be  discussed 
include  dealing  with  loss,  pain,  pain  manage- 
ment, hospice  care,  and  communication  with  the 
cancer  client.  This  course  is  open  to  all  students. 


367     Nursing  Implications  of  Drug  Interactions 
(1)  The  student  will  be  introduced  to  essential 
pharmacological  principles  and  concepts.  The 
nursing  process  will  provide  the  framework  by 
which  students  will  apply  theoretical  knowledge 
in  BIO  367  to  situations  in  a  variety  of  health- 
care settings.  To  be  taken  in  conjunction  with 
BIO  367,  or  after,  with  permission  of  instructor. 

♦  410  Independent  Study  in  Nursing  (2)  The 
student  produces  an  independent,  research- 
oriented  project  under  close  faculty  advisement 
on  a  nursing  topic  of  special  interest  to  the  stu- 
dent. Participation  in  a  selected  field  experience 
is  optional.  PREREQ:  Permission  of  department 
chairperson. 

411     Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  I  (5) 

Must  be  taken  during  senior  year,  fall  semester. 
The  emphasis  of  this  course  is  on  the  study  of 
adaptive  responses  that  create  new  stresses, 
requiring  additional  adaptations  and  frequently 
interrupting  an  individual's  mode  of  functioning. 
The  nursing  process  is  used  to  assist  clients  in 
crises. 

NSL  411     Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  I 
Laboratory  (3)  Clinical  experience  is  provided  in 
acute  care  settings,  in  psychiatric  in-patient  set- 
tings, and  in  community  health  settings.  NSG 

411  and  NSL  411  always  must  be  taken  concur- 
rently. PREREQ:  MAT  121,  NSG  312,  NSL  312, 
and  PSY  375. 

412  Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  II 
(6)  Must  be  taken  during  senior  year,  spring 
semester.  NSG  412  is  a  continuation  of  NSG  411 
with  the  emphasis  on  the  subconcepts  of 
decision  making  and  advocacy.  The  nursing 
process  is  utilized  interdependently  in 
approaching  multihealth  care  problems  of 
clients.  Special  attention  is  given  to  inquiry  as 
the  student  correlates  nursing  theories  and  con- 
cepts with  identifiable  research  problems 

in  varied  environments.  Opportunity  is  provided 
in  this  semester  to  develop  organization  and 
management  skills. 

NSL  412    Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  II 
Laboratory  (5)  Clinical  experience  is  provided  in 
acute  care  settings,  psychiatric  inpatient  settings, 
and  community  health  settings.  NSG  412  and 
NSL  412  always  must  be  taken  concurrendy. 
PREREQ:  NSG  411  and  NSL  411. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Physical  Education 

Monita  Lank,  Chairperson 

John  Helion,  Assistant  Chairperson  —  Physical  Education  Sport 
and  Safety,  Coordinator  Field  Experience 

Sue  Lubking,  Assistant  Chairperson  —  Student  Designed  Con- 
centration 

Paul  Smith,  Assistant  Chairperson  —  Exercise  Science  and 
Graduate  Studies 

Susan  Parkinson,  Coordinator  of  Required  Physical  Education 
Program 

Barbara  Lappano,  Coordinator— Recreation,  Leisure,  and  Dance 

PROFESSORS:  Lank,  Yoder 

ASSOCLYTE  PROFESSORS:  Bonsall,  Goodwin,  Karas, 
Lepore,  Lubking,  Parkinson,  Smidi,  WiUiams,  Wintermute 


ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Caldwell,  Helion,  Jones, 

Koehler,  Lappano,  Lauletta,  Pagano,  Ray,  Remley,  Stevens, 
Thielz,  Todd,  Tmka,  'Volkwein 

The  Department  of  Physical  Education  offers  three  programs 
leading  to  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree. 

L  The  B.S.  in  HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION - 

TEACHER  CERTIFICATION  is  for  students  interested  in  earning 
state  teaching  cernficadon. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  HEALTH  AND  FffYSICAL  EDUCATION -STUDENT 
DESIGNED  concentration  is  for  students  interested  in  preparing 
for  a  specific  career  that  is  related  to  health  and  physical  educa- 
tion but  does  not  require  teacher  certification. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  ffEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION  -  PHYSICAL 
FITNESS  is  designed  for  students  interested  in  the  exercise  sci- 
ences. This  program  provides  academic  preparation  for  individu- 


«      Department  of  Physical  Education 


als  who  seek  to  plan  and  conduct  physical  fitness  programs  for 
healthy  adults. 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION -TEACHER  CERTIHCATION 

1 .  General  Education  Requirements, 
see  pages  35-38 

2.  Physical  Education  Theory 
PED  100,  243,  251,  257,  271,  310,  350, 
351,  352,  353,  361,  451,  453,  489,  490, 
and  492 


51  semester  hours 


47  semester  hours 


24  semester  hours 
202. 


10  semester  hours 


112,  113,  140,  141, 

209,  210,  211,  212, 

5n 

6  semester  hours 

3.  Related  Requirements 
COM  101,  EOF  100,  EDP  250,  HEA  100,  201 
HEA  206  or  PED  385,  HEA  306 

4.  Related  Requirements  that  also  satisfy  the 
General  Education  Requirements 
BIO  259  and  269,  CHE  100  and  102, 
and  PSY  100 

5.  Required  Activities 
PED  109,  110,  111 
142,  143,  144,  208 
213.  214,  and  242 

6.  Area  of  Concentration 
Students  who  elect  an  area  of  concentration 
must  select  any  six  hours  of  courses  fi-om 
those  listed  under  all  areas  of  concentration. 

7.  Three  extracurricular  experiences  prior  to 
student  teaching 

8.  GPA  Requirement 

Must  have  a  GPA  of  2.50  before  taking  PED 
489,  490,  and  492 

9.  Certification  granted  when  Pennsylvania 
requirements  are  met 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION -STUDENT-DESIGNED  CONCENTRATION 


10. 


General  Education  Requirements, 
see  pages  35-38 
Physical  Education  Theory 
PED  100,  251,  257,  271,  352,  451,  and  453 
Related  Requirements 

COM  101,  HEA  100  or  HEA  201,  HEA  202, 
HEA  206  or  PED  385 
Related  Requirements  that  also  satisfy  the 
General  Education  Requirements 
BIO  259  and  269,  CHE  102,  and  PSY  100 
Physical  Education  Activities 
Student-Designed  Curriculum 
Intern  Experience 
Three  Extracurricular  Experiences 
Prephysical  therapy  and  preoccupational 
therapy  students  need  a  2.50  GPA  before 
submitting  a  final  proposal. 
Students  must  have  a  2.00  GPA  for  applica- 
tion to  the  student-designed  curriculum. 


51  semester  hours 
19  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 


6  semester 
34  semester 
12  semester 


hours 
hours 
hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SQENCE  -  HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCAHON 
PHYSICAL  FITNESS  SPECIAUST 

1.  General  Education  Requirements, 
see  pages  35-38 

2.  Physical  Education  Theory 
PED  100,  251,  257,  271,  352.  385.  451. 
and  453 

3.  Related  Requirements 
COM  101,  HEA  100,  HEA  202  or  elective, 
HEA  303,  and  MGT  300 


51  semester  hours 


22  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


4.  Related  Requirements  that  also  satisfy  the 
General  Education  Requirements 

BIO  259  and  269,  CHE  102,  CSC  101, 
and  PSY  100 

5.  Physical  Fitness  Specialist  Program 
PED  361,  429,  431,  432,  434,  453,  and 
454,  and  PED  433  or  HEA  325 

6.  Physical  Education  Activities 

7.  Intern  Experience 

8.  Extracurricular  Experience 

9.  Grade  requirement  of  at  least  a  C- 
in  concentration  courses 

10.  Student  must  have  a  2.00  GPA  for  internal 
transfer  and  a  2.50  before  submitting  final 
proposal. 

AREAS  OF  SPECL\LlZATION 

Elementary  Physical  Education 

Students  may  select  from  the  following  courses: 
PED  340,  354,  440,  449,  and  453 


18  semester  hours 

22  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 


105,  106,  301,  305,  401,  410,  and 


Secondary  Health  Education 
Required:  BIO  203,  HEA  103, 
SOC  250 
Secondary  Physical  Education 

Students  may  select  from  the  following  courses: 

PED  310,  311,  314,  316,  318,  319,  320,  321,  322,  323,  324,  326, 

327,  328,  331,  430,  452,  453,  and  454 

Special  Physical  Education 

Required:  PED  360,  362,  379.  and  457,  and  PEL  362 

Driver-Safety  Education  12  semester  hours 

(State  Certification) 

West  Chester  offers  certification  in  Driver  Education  and  Safe  Liv- 
ing (Highway  Safety  and  General  Safety  Education). 
Completion  of  the  following  program  will  enable  teachers  to 
endorse  their  teaching  certificates  with  this  area.  Students  must 
apply  for  the  endorsement  through  the  ofSce  of  the  dean  of  the 
School  of  Education. 

The  program  may  be  taken  in  whole  or  in  part  during  summer  ses- 
sions. Some  of  the  courses  also  are  offered  in  the  spring  and  fall 
semesters. 

Required:  Accident  Causation  and  Prevention  (PED  355),  Critical 
Problems  Within  the  Highway  Transportation  System  (PED  356), 
High  School  Driver  Education  Program  Management  (PED  450), 
and  Introduction  to  the  Driving  Tasks  (PED  456).  NOTE:  This  pro- 
gram meets  state  certification  requirements  for  driver-safety  educa- 
tion. 

Recreation  and/or  Outdoor  Education 

This  is  a  rwo-track  program.  The  student  may,  under  advisement, 
select  courses  in  recreational  services  andyor  outdoor  education 
from  the  following  list:  Arts  and  Crafts  (PED  367),  Leadership  in 
Recreation  (PED  368),  Principles  of  ROPE  (PED  369),  Camp  Coun- 
seling (PED  370),  Wilderness  Adventure  1  (PED  371),  Wilderness 
Adventure  11  (PED  372),  Outdoor  Recreation  (PED  375),  Intramural 
and  Recreation  Sports  (PED  377),  Planning  Facilities  for  Athletics, 
Physical  Education  and  Recreation  (PED  430),  Supervised  Camp 
Leadership  (PED  467),  and  Leadership  in  Recreational  Outdoor  Pur- 
suits (PED  470). 

Minor  in  Coaching  15-18  semester  hours 

Those  students  who  successfully  complete  the  program  at  West 
Chester  earn  a  transcript  and  written  endorsement  from  the  School 
of  Health  Sciences  attesting  to  school  administrators  that  recipients 


Department  of  Physical  Education 


have  attained  basic  preparation  for  coaching.  Students  pursuing  the 
B.S.  in  health  and  physical  education  automatically  achieve  coach- 
ing certification. 

Certification  requires  competencies  equivalent  to  15-18  hours  of 
course  work.  Behavioral  competencies  in  the  theoretical  foundations 
of  coaching,  skill  acquisition,  and  management  techniques  also  are 
required.  Course  offerings  at  the  undergraduate  and  graduate  levels 
are  available.  The  program  is  open  to  any  person  who  applied  for 
admission  through  the  program  adviser,  Ms.  Thielz.  Applicants 
should  direct  inquiries  to  that  office  for  a  coaching  minor  brochure. 

Minor  in  Dance  21  semester  hours 

Required  Core:  History  of  Dance  (PED  344),  Dance  Composition 
and  Choreographic  Techniques  (PED  441),  and  Independent  Study. 
This  is  a  two-track  program.  Beyond  the  required  core  courses,  the 
student  may  select  course(s)  under  educational  concentration  or 
theatrical  performance  concentration.  Other  program  requirements 
include  assisting  in  teaching,  under  the  direction  of  a  faculty  mem- 
ber, and  a  minimum  of  two  semesters  of  performance  or  work  for  a 
production.  Application  for  this  program  can  be  obtained  from  Bar- 
bara Lappano,  dance  coordinator. 

Facilities 

Facilities  to  support  the  programs  of  the  department  have  kept  pace 
with  a  rapid  increase  in  students  and  faculty.  The  Health  and  Physi- 


cal Education  Center  and  field  complex,  located  on  South  Campus, 
provide  the  University  with  one  of  the  nation's  outstanding  facili- 
ties for  education  and  research  in  health  and  physical  education. 
Among  the  center's  notable  components  are  its  research  facilities, 
its  multipurpose  teaching  stations,  and  a  one-acre  gymnasium  that 
can  be  divided  into  six,  separate,  pneumatically  sealed  gymnasiums. 
A  vast  complex  of  tennis  courts  and  baseball,  lacrosse,  field  hockey, 
soccer,  and  football  fields  also  are  located  on  the  South  Campus. 

NOTE:  Students  who  choose  to  fulfill  their  art  requirement 
through  the  dance  curriculum  must  do  so  as  follows: 
Two  Credits  Course  Selections 

PED  344  History  of  Dance 

PED  345  Dance  Production  Workshop 

PED  441  Choreography 

PED  446  Repertory  Performance 
One  Credit  Course  Selections 


PEA  132 
PEA  133 
PEA  134 
PEA  135 
PEA  233 
PEA  234 
PEA  334 


Modem  Dance  I 
Jazz  Dance  I 
Ballet  I 
Tap  Dance  I 
Jazz  Dance  II 
Tap  Dance  II 
Ballet  III 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

PHYSICAL  EDUCAnON  ACTIVITY 

COURSES 

Symbol:  PEA  (2)  (1)  These  courses  meet 

the  Physical  Education  Activity  General 

Education  requirement  except  for  students 

whose  majors  have  obtained  University 

approval  for  PED  courses. 

The  first  number  in  parentheses  shows  the 

number  of  class  meetings  per  week;  the  second 

one  shows  the  semester  hours  of  credit. 

A  program  of  selected  activities  for  nonphysical 

education  students.  (Formerly  designated  PED 

101-102) 

100  Basic  Swimming  (for  nonswimraers) 

101  Swimming  Styles  (strokes) 

102  Springboard  Diving 

104  Skin  and  Scuba  Diving* 

105  Sailing* 

106  Canoeing 

107  Orienteering 

108  Rock  Climbing  and  RappeUlng 

109  Backpacking  and  Camping 

1 10  Cycle  Touring 

111  Cross  Country  Skiing* 

112  Horsemanship* 

113  Angling 

114  Downhill  Skiing* 

♦  115  Physical  Conditioning 

116  Personal  Defense 

117  Karate* 

♦  118  Ice  Skating* 

119  Archery 

120  Badminton 

121  Bowling* 

122  Fencing 

123  Golf 

124  Gymnastics/Men 

125  GymnasticsAVomen 

126  Handball/Racquetball* 

127  Squash 


*  Additional  fee  required. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


128  Tennis 

129  Basketball 

130  Softball 

131  VoIIeybaU 

132  Modem  Dance  I 

133  Jazz  Dance  I 

134  BaUet  I 

135  Tap  Dancing 

136  Fimess  for  life  (Theory  and  Lab) 
♦  140  Aerobic  Dance  —  Fitness 

141  Water  Fitness 

190  General  Activity 

201  Power  and  Competitive  Swimming 

212  Advanced  Horsemanship* 

214  Advanced  Siding* 

226  Advanced  Racquetball* 

228  Advanced  Tennis 

231  Advanced  Volleyball 

233  Jazz  Dance  II 

234  Ballet  II 

235  Tap  II 

334  Ballet  III- Pointe 

236  Developing  Personal  Fitness  Programs  (2) 
This  course  is  designed  to  provide  the  student 
with  a  basic  understanding  of  the  scientific  basis 
of  physical  fitness.  The  course  is  intended  to 
help  each  student  in  developing  a  personal  fit- 
ness profile  and  subsequent  program  of  physical 
activity  that  will  result  in  healthful  living.  The 
course  will  make  use  of  practical  experience  and 
actual  participation  in  fimess  activities.  Individ- 
ual programs  will  be  emphasized. 

PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 
Symbols:  PED;  PEL  indicates  lab  course. 
These  courses  do  not  meet  the  Physical 
Activity  General  Education  requirement 
except  for  students  whose  majors  have 
obtained  University  approval  for  such 
courses.  These  courses  are  for  physical 
education  majors  only,  with  the  following 
exceptions:  elementary  education  majors, 
early  childhood  education  majors,  music 
majors,  and  sports  medicine  majors. 


The  first  number  in  parentheses  shows  the 
number  of  class  meetings  per  week;  the  second 
one  shows  the  semester  hours  of  credit. 
100     Foundations  of  Physical  Education  and 
Sport  (2)  (2)  An  introduction  to  the  discipline 
and  profession  of  physical  education  and  sport, 
with  an  emphasis  on  career  guidance.  The  his- 
tory and  tradition  of  the  field  will  be  traced  to 
provide  perspective  for  student  choices  during 
their  undergraduate  education.  Field  experiences 
and  advice  will  expose  students  to  the  current 
opportunities  and  methods  for  achieving  per- 
sonal goals. 

107     Music  and  Movement  (2)  (1)  A  course 
that  examines  and  develops  the  concept  of  music 
and  rhythm  through  movement  skills. 

109  Wrestling  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (V2)  The 
teaching  of  the  basic  skilb  of  the  sport  of  wres- 
ding.  Fundamental  skills,  tactics,  rules,  and  com- 
bative, lead-up  activities  for  presentation  to 
physical  education  classes  in  the  public  schools. 

110  Soccer  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (V2)  The  teaching 
of  the  basic  skills  of  the  sport  of  soccer.  Funda- 
mental skills,  tactics,  rules,  and  lead-up  games 
are  presented  for  all  school  ages. 

111  Basketball  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (V2)  Emphasis 
is  placed  on  fundamental  skills,  rules,  and  tactics 
of  the  sport,  accomplished  through  drilb  and 
game  situations. 

112  Gymnastics  I  (3)  (1)  Apparatus  skilb, 
stunts,  tumbling,  and  pyramids  for  teaching  all 
age  leveb. 

113  Physical  Conditioning  (nine  weeks) 
(3)  (Vi)  The  teaching  of  activities  to  help 
develop  total  health,  especially  physical  fitness. 
Circuits  of  exercises,  weight  training,  running, 
and  rope  jumping  are  included  for  all  ages. 

140  Aquatic  Fundamentab  and  Emergency 
Water  Safety  (3)  (1)  Review  of  basic  aquatic 
skilb.  Emphasb  on  lifesaving  practices,  safety, 
and  survival  techniques.  Successful  completion 
of  thb  course  may  lead  to  advanced  lifesaving 
certification  by  the  American  Red  Cross. 

141  Fundamental  Movement  (3)  (1)  Funda- 
mental locomotor  and  axial  movement;  music 


jl      Department  of  Physical  Education 


and  rhythm  in  relationship.  Rhythmical  activities 
for  the  elementary  program  with  suggested 
teaching  methods. 

142  Tennis  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi)  An  explana- 
tion of  the  mechanics  and  specific  skilb  of  ten- 
nis. Emphasis  is  placed  on  conceptual  under- 
standing and  teaching  progressions  and  methods. 

143  Golf  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi)  The  teaching  of 
the  basic  skills  of  golf  Class  management,  tech- 
niques, rules,  and  safety  procedures  to  present  to 
physical  education  classes. 

144  Archery/Badminton  (nine  weeks) 
(3)  C/j)  The  teaching  of  the  basic  sldlb  of 
archery  and  badminton.  Class  management,  tech- 
niques, rules,  and  safety  procedures  to  present  to 
physical  education  classes. 

200     Elementary  School  Physical  Education  (3) 

(2)  Theoretical  and  practical  approach  for  the 
teaching  of  physical  activities  to  elementary 
school  children  by  the  classroom  teacher. 

208  Self  Defense  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi)  The 
teaching  of  the  basic  skilb  of  self  defense.  Fun- 
damental skills,  tactics,  and  methods  of  presenta- 
tion to  school-age  groups. 

209  Track  and  Field  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi) 
Principles  of  running,  throwing,  and  jumping. 
Modification  needed  for  physical  education 
classes.  Self-testing. 

210  Softball/Baseball  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi) 
The  teaching  of  the  basic  skills  of  Softball  and 
baseball.  Fundamental  skills,  tactics,  rules,  and 
lead-up  games  for  presentation  to  all  ages. 

211  Hockey  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vj)  Basic  funda- 
menuls,  tactics,  and  rules.  Modified  active 
games.  Geared  to  teaching  physical  education 
classes. 

212  Football  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi)  The  teach- 
ing of  basic  football  skills.  Fundamental  skills, 
tactics,  rules,  and  lead-up  games  for  all  school 
ages. 

213  Lacrosse  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi)  Basic  funda- 
mentab,  tactics,  and  women's  rules.  Modified 
active  games.  Geared  to  teaching  physical  educa- 
tion classes. 

214  Volleyball  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (Vi)  The 
leaching  of  the  basic  sldlb  of  volleyball.  Funda- 
mental skilb,  tactics,  rules,  and  lead-up  games 
for  all  school  ages. 

215  Preparation  for  Teaching  Dance  Technique 

(3)  (1)  Basic  course  offering  methods  and  mate- 
riab  for  teaching  dance  technique. 

242  Methods  and  Skills  of  Dance  in  Educa- 
tion (3)  (1)  To  provide  the  student  with  a  gener- 
alized coverage  of  various  dance  forms  that 
could  be  taught  within  the  educational  field, 
such  as  social  dance,  folk  dance,  square  dance, 
aerobics,  or  jazzercize. 

243  Preparation  for  Teaching  Activities 

(3)  (1)  Methods  of  teaching  in  all  areas  of  physi- 
cal education  and  the  development  of  appropri- 
ate lesson  plans  for  all  ages.  PREREQ.  Four 
activity  courses. 

244  Software  Applications  in  Physical  Educa- 
tion (3)  Students  apply  word  processing  and 
graphics  software  to  produce  knowledge  tests, 
worksheets,  skill  checklbts,  certificates  of  merit, 
and  public  relations  handouts.  Spreadsheet  soft- 
ware will  be  applied  to  budget  and  inventory 
projects.  Grading,  crossword  puzzle,  computer- 
assbted  instruction,  and  physical  fitness  assess- 
ment software  abo  will  be  applied.  Students  abo 
will  leam  E-Mail. 

245  Lifetime  Fitness  Concepts  (3)  (3) 
Designed  to  provide  an  interdbciplinary  under- 
standing of  the  relationship  between  lifestyle, 
physical  fitness,  and  health  and  well-being. 


251  Physical  Activity  for  Special  Children  (3) 
(3)  A  course  of  adapted  physical  education. 
Common  childhood  dbabiUties  are  studied  with 
emphasb  on  problems  of  a  chronic  nature.  Abo 
screening  and  practical  training  and  working 
with  physically  and  mentally  handicapped  chil- 
dren. 

PEL  251  Physical  Education  for  Special  Chil- 
dren (LAB)  (0)  A  practical  working  experience 
with  chddren  and  adults  who  have  dbabiUties. 

252  Classroom  Activities  for  the  Special  Child 
(3)  (3)  To  acquaint  special  education  teachers 
with  physical  education  activities  useful  in  the 
classroom.  PREREQ:  BIO  209. 

257     Principles  and  Practices  of  Recreation 
(3)  The  basic  principles  of  planning,  adminbter- 
ing,  and  evaluating  recreational  programs  for  all 
ages  in  a  variety  of  settings  and  participating  in 
suitable  recreational  activities. 
271     First-Aid  and  Athletic  Training  (3)  (2)  A 
course  designed  to  qualify  students  in  American 
Red  Cross  first-aid  and  CPR,  and  to  introduce 
the  principles  of  athletic  injury  prevention  and 
management.  Offered  in  fall  and  spring 
semesters. 

275     lifeguarding  (3)  (2)  Theory  and  tech- 
niques relative  to  preventive  lifeguarding,  emer- 
gencies in  and  around  water,  water  rescues, 
search  and  recovery  operations,  types  and  uses  of 
equipment,  records  and  reports,  health  and  sani- 
tation, and  supervbion  of  waterfront  areas. 

310  Preparation  for  Teaching  Secondary  Physi- 
cal Education  (3)  (2)  Each  student  develops  a 
physical  education  activity  unit  and  teaches  one 
lesson  from  that  unit.  Further  opportunities  for 
familiarization  with  various  teaching  methods 
and  styles  through  observation,  demonstration 
lessons,  and  actual  practice. 

311  Coaching  Racquet  Sports  (3)  (3) 
Advanced  coaching  and  teaching  techniques  for 
the  racquet  sports,  including  tennb,  badminton, 
racquetball,  and  squash. 

314    Track  and  Field  II  (3)  (2) 

PREREQ:  PED  209. 

316     Basketball  II  (3)  (2)  PREREQ:  PED  111. 

318  Lacrosse  II  (women's  equipment)  (3)  (2) 

319  Lacrosse  11  (men's  equipment)  (3)  (2) 

321  VoUcybaU  II  (3)  (2)  PREREQ:  PED  214. 

322  Soccer  II  (3)  (2)  PREREQ:  PED  110. 

323  Field  Hockey  11  (3)  (2)  Individual  and 
team  tactics  and  special  situations.  Basic  knowl- 
edge needed  for  coaching  hockey.  PREREQ:  PED 
211. 

324  Football  II  (3)  (2) 

326  Wrestling  11  (3)  (2)  PREREQ:  PED  109. 

327  Gymnastics  II  (women's  equipment)  (3) 
(2)  Teaching  and  coaching  techniques  for  appa- 
ratus stunts,  tumbling,  and  pyramids.  PREREQ: 
PED  113. 

328  Gymnastics  II  (men's  equipment)  (3) 
(2)  Advanced  work  on  gymnastics  apparatus, 
including  trampoline,  with  emphasb  on  teaching 
progression,  spotting  techniques,  and  class 
safety.  PREREQ:  PED  112. 

331     Water  Safety  Instruction  (3)  (2)  Leader- 
ship procedure  in  aquatics  activities  for  schoob 
and  school  camps.  Swimming  strokes  and  life- 
saving  techniques  are  analyzed.  Opportunity  to 
qualify  as  a  waterfront  safety  instructor. 
340    Self-Testing  Activities  in  Elemenury 
School  Physical  Education  (2)  (2)  Theory  and 
methods  to  present  activities  to  children  on  an 
individualized,  self-testing  basb.  The  opportunity 
b  provided  for  direct  contact  with  children  to  try 
out  the  self-testing  activities  and  prepare  individ- 
ualized programs. 


343  Modem  Dance  II  (3)  (1)  Emphasb  is 
placed  on  longer  combinations  and  more  com- 
plex, problem-solving  themes.  PREREQ:  PED 
215. 

344  Hbtory  of  Dance  (3)  (2)  Evaluation  of 
dance  as  an  art  form  in  relation  to  man  and  hb 
society.  Physiological,  sociological,  and  psycho- 
logical implications;  dance  forms  and  types.  Film 
and  other  materiab  focus  on  parallel  develop- 
ments in  related  arts. 

♦  345     Dance  Production  Workshop  (3)  (2) 
Study  of  the  various  elements  of  performance 
and  dance  production.  All  are  integrated  into  a 
final  performance  that  b  created  and  directed  by 
the  students.  Admittance  b  through  auditions 
during  the  fall  semester. 

348  Instructional  Skilb  for  Aerobic  Dance  Fit- 
ness (2)  (1)  The  purpose  of  thb  course  b  to 
teach  various  dance  exercbes,  dance  movements, 
and  aerobic  dance  routines  to  music  with  the 
intent  of  promoting  cardiovascular  fitness  and 
endurance,  and  improving  muscle  tone  and  coor- 
dination. 

349  Advanced  Social/Folk/Square  Dance  (3) 

(2)  Thb  course  b  designed  to  continue  beyond 
the  beginner  level. 

350  Teaching  Physical  Education  in  the  Ele- 
menury Grades  (6)  (3)  Students  receive  class- 
room theoretical  and  practical  information  and 
are  assigned  to  elementary  schoob  for  teaching 
and  observation  with  cooperating  teachers  and 
college  supervisors.  PREREQ:  PED  100  and  243. 

351  Evaluation  in  Health  and  Physical  Educa- 
tion (3)  (3)  Selecting,  adminbtering,  scoring, 
and  evaluating  tests  of  physical  fitness,  general 
motor  abiUty,  motor  educability,  and  skill  and 
knowledge. 

352  Applied  Exerdse  Physiology  (3)  (3)  The 
application  of  physiological  principles  to  physical 
education,  exercbe,  and  sport.  PREREQ:  BIO 
259-269. 

353  Organization  and  Adminbtration  of  Phys- 
ical Education,  Health,  and  Athletics  (3) 

(3)  Principles  of  program  building  in  curricular 
and  extracurricular  programs;  organizing,  admin- 
btering, and  supervbing  physical  education, 
health,  intramural,  and  interscholastic  programs. 

354  Elementary  Physical  Education  Curricu- 
lum (3)  (3)  Constructing  and  evaluating  the 
curriculum  in  elementary  physical  education. 
Progression  and  continuity  along  with  develop- 
mental needs  and  interest  of  children  are  consid- 
ered. 

355  Accident  Causation  and  Prevention  (3) 
(3)  Survey  of  safety  education.  Hbtory,  philoso- 
phy, and  psychology  of  accident  prevention. 

356  Critical  Problems  in  the  Highway  Trans- 
portation System  (3)  (3)  Techniques  of  assessing 
the  knowledge,  skill,  and  psycho-physical  char- 
acteristics of  a  beginning  driver;  the  relation  of 
these  to  the  safe  operation  of  a  motor  vehicle. 

360  Pathology  of  Special  Physical  Education 
and  Therapeutic  Recreation  (2)  (2)  Consider- 
ations of  the  commonly  seen  dbabling  condi- 
tions with  regard  to  anatomical  and  physiological 
changes. 

361  Kinesiology  (3)  (3)  Basic  fundamentab  of 
movement,  articulation,  and  muscular  actions; 
analysis  of  the  related  principles  of  mechanics. 
PREREQ:  BIO  259-269. 

362  Therapeutics  for  Special  Physical  Educa- 
tion and  Therapeutic  Recreation  (3)  (3)  For  stu- 
dents who  want  to  specialize  in  adapted  physical 
education  or  therapeutic  recreation.  To  improve 


♦  Thb  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Physical  Education 


the  students'  understanding  of  evaluation  and 
programming  in  the  psychomotor  domain  for 
special  populations.  Principles  of  therapeutic 
exercise,  and  guidelines  for  exercise  programs  for 
those  disabihties  commonly  seen  in  schools  are 
presented.  PREREQ:  BIO  259  and  269,  HEA  206, 
FED  251,  352,  and  361,  and  PSY  100.  Taken 
concurrently  with  PEL  362. 
PEL  362     Therapeutics  for  Special  Physical 
Education  and  Therapeutic  Recreation  Lab  (3) 

(2)  A  course  designed  to  give  those  students 
practical  experience  in  those  topics  presented  in 
PED  362.  Taken  concurrently  with  PED  362. 

367  Arts  and  Crafts  in  Recreation  (3)  (3)  The- 
oretical and  practical  applications  of  arts  and 
crafts  as  recreational  outlets  for  all  age  groups. 
Arts  and  crafts  materiab  customarily  found  in 
school,  camp,  and  community  recreation  pro- 
grams are  used. 

368  Leadership  in  Recreation  (3)  (3)  Basic 
concepts  and  leadership  techniques  are  studied 
in  various  recreational  settings.  Opportunities  for 
students  to  practice  and  develop  their  own  tech- 
niques through  work  in  community  recreation 
agencies. 

369  Principles  of  Recreational  Outdoor  Pur- 
suits Education  (3)  (3)  History,  philosophical 
background,  objectives,  educational  strategies, 
curriculum,  safety  considerations,  and  adminis- 
tration of  an  adventure-based,  outdoor  pursuits 
program. 

370  Camp  Counseling  (3)  (3)  Theory  and 
practice  in  camping  and  outing  programs, 
approached  from  viewpoints  of  the  camper, 
counselor,  supervisor,  specialists,  and  director. 
371*     Wilderness  Adventure  I  (2)  A  course 
designed  to  provide  the  participant  with  a  wil- 
derness backpacking  experience.  This  program 
utilizes  the  environment  and  adventure  activities 
to  develop  self-confidence,  camping  and  back- 
packing skills,  concern  for  others,  and  a  better 
understanding  of  the  environment. 

372*     Wilderness  Adventure  II  (2)  This  course 
is  designed  to  provide  the  participant  with  an 
experiential  outdoor  pursuit  with  the  bicycle  as 
the  primary  mode  of  transportation.  Students 
will  tour  through  rural  country  learning  biking 
and  camping  skilb  as  they  travel. 
373*     Wilderness  Adventure  III  (2)  This  pro- 
gram is  designed  to  offer  adventure  and  learning 
in  the  white  water  river  environment.  The  course 
is  designed  to  instruct  students  in  camping,  and 
basic  and  white  water  canoe  skills,  and  will  cul- 
minate with  a  day  wilderness  river  trip. 

375  Outdoor  Recreation  (3)  (3)  The  purpose 
of  this  course  is  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the 
role  outdoor  recreation  plays  in  today's  society. 
The  student  will  develop  an  appreciation  for  the 
outdoors  through  participation  in  outdoor  recre- 
ation programs  and  learning  skills  necessary  to 
participate  in  the  program. 

376  Recreational  Games  (3)  (2)  This  course  is 
designed  to  provide  the  student  with  the  skills, 
techniques,  and  available  resources  involved  in 
planning  and  directing  recreational  games. 
Instruction  includes  selection  of  games,  activi- 
ties, and  opportunities  for  practical  appUcation 
of  interested  students. 

377  Intramural  and  Recreational  Sports  (3) 

(3)  A  study  of  the  basic  ingredients  required  for 
administering  successful  intramural  programs. 
The  student  serves  in  the  intramural  office  and 
program  as  a  student  leader  and  supervisor.  In 


*  Additional  fee  required. 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


addition,  the  student  will  study  the  rules,  regula- 
tions, and  policies  of  community  sports  with 
national  headquarters  and  leadership. 
♦  378     Field  Experience  (3)  (3)  Practical  expe- 
rience for  the  student-designed  concentration. 
Students  must  soUcit  approval  of  the  appropriate 
agency,  develop  a  proposal  for  the  on-site  experi- 
ence, and  secure  agreement  from  the  faculty 
adviser. 

379  Therapeutic  Recreation  (3)  (3)  This 
course  is  designed  to  familiarize  the  student  with 
that  segment  of  the  population  having  special 
needs.  The  course  will  combine  lecture  and 
hands-on  experiences  with  as  many  of  the  differ- 
ent groups  as  possible  in  the  settings  they  are 
found  in  the  community.  PREREQ:  PED  251  and 
PED  257  or  permission  of  instructor. 

380  Women  and  Sport  (3)  (3)  An  examination 
of  women's  participation  in  sport  from  historical, 
cultural,  psychological,  physical,  and  legal  per- 
spectives; emphasis  placed  on  women  in  sport  in 
American  society  today. 

385     Exercise,  Play,  and  Development  (3)  (3) 
To  understand  human  development  throughout 
the  lifespan  from  a  physical,  mental,  social,  and 
emotional  viewpoint.  To  understand  the  role  that 
exercise  and  play  have  in  the  development  of  the 
individual. 

429  Electrocardiography  and  Stress  Testing 
(3)  Designed  to  prepare  the  prospective  fitness 
instructor  in  exercise  testing  protocols  as  well  as 
how  to  record,  label,  and  calculate  data  with 
stress-testing  exercise  equipment  and  a  standard, 
12-lead  eleco-ocardiogram.  PREREQ:  BIO  259- 
269  and  PED  352. 

430  Planning  Facilities  for  Athletics,  Physical 
Education,  and  Recreation  (3)  (3)  Management 
and  planning  of  the  faciUties  for  athletics,  school 
physical  education,  and  recreational  programs, 
playfields,  playgrounds,  buildings,  and  auxiliary 
structures  as  well  as  the  maintenance  of  these 
facilities. 

431  Physical  Fitness  Assessment  and  Exercise 
Program  (3)  (3)  Designed  to  prepare  students  to 
assess  the  physical  fitness  levels  of  healthy  but 
sedentary  adults  and  prescribe  individualized 
exercise  programs.  PREREQ:  BIO  259  and  269, 
PED  351  and  352. 

432  Exercise  TechniquesA"heory  and  Practice 
(3)  (3)  Analysis  of  various  exercise  techniques, 
and  devices  and  systems  emphasizing  their  use 
and  safety.  Clinical  experience  in  strength  and 
Range  of  Morion  (ROM)  testing  and  prescription. 
PREREQ:  BIO  259  and  PED  361. 

433  Exercise  and  Stress  Management  (3)  (3) 
Focuses  on  the  use  of  exercise  in  the  manage- 
ment of  stress.  The  course  includes  exercise 
techniques  that  may  be  useful  in  alleviating 
stress. 

434  Organization  and  Management  of  Adult 
Fitness  Programs  Clinic/Seminar  (3)  (3) 
Designed  to  provide  students  with  practical 
experience  in  organizing  and  managing  physical 
fitness  programs  for  adults.  PREREQ:  BIO  259 
and  269,  PED  352,  361,  431,  and  433. 

433     Physical  Fitness  Specialist  Intentship  (12) 
(6)  (6)  Experience  working  in  a  cardiovascular 
rehabilatory  center  or  similar  clinical  setting 
under  the  supervision  of  qualified  personnel  for 
one-half  semester.  Practical  experience  in  an 
adult  physical  fitness  center  under  the  supervi- 
sion of  qualified  personnel  for  one-half  semester. 
PREREQ:  BIO  259  and  269,  PED  352,  361,  431, 
and  433. 

440     Movement  Education  in  Elementary  Phys- 
ical Education  (2)  (2)  Teaching  techniques  and 
subject  matter  for  a  program  of  movement  edu- 


cation suitable  for  children.  Designed  to  help 
children  develop  awareness  of  body  and  space  in 
order  to  develop  effective  movement  patterns. 
441     Principles  of  Choreography  (3)  (I)  The 
an  of  dance  composition.  Basic  elements  of 
space,  rhythms,  and  motion  dynamics.  Students 
design  original  movement,  progressing  from  sim- 
ple to  complex  solo  and  group  forms.  PREREQ: 
PED  215. 

443  Modem  Dance  III  (3)  (2)  Advanced-level 
modem  dance  techniques  with  emphasis  on  all 
aspects  of  production:  accompaniments,  costume, 
sets,  and  lighting. 

444  Organization  and  Management  of  Aquatic 
Facilities  (3)  (3)  A  study  of  the  organization  and 
administration  of  aquatic  recreational  areas, 
including  ocean,  natural  fresh  water,  and  man- 
made  facilities.  The  student  will  acquire  the 
skilb  and  understandings  necessary  to  develop 
aquatic  programs  and  manage  aquatic  facilities. 
Offered  spring  semester  only. 

445  Dance/Movement  for  Special  Groups  (2) 
(2)  Adaptation  of  dance  movement  with  empha- 
sis on  methods,  techniques,  and  activities  suit- 
able for  special  groups  (elderly,  disabled,  men- 
tally retarded,  and  special  groups). 

446  Repertory  Performance  (2)  The  purpose  of 
this  course  is  to  offer  dance  students  invaluable 
experience  that  can  only  be  gained  from  perfor- 
mance. To  ensure  maximum  benefit,  the  objec- 
tives are  thorough  studio  rehearsal  of  dances, 
thorough  lighting  and  staging  rehearsals,  and 
well-directed  performances. 

449  Learning  on  the  Move  (3)  (3)  A  combina- 
tion of  movement  education  and  perceptual 
motor  theory  and  activities  to  help  teachers  and 
parents  guide  the  children  to  maximum  develop- 
mental potential.  Preschool,  nursery,  and  Idnder- 
ganen  ages. 

450  High  School  Driver  Education  Program 
Management  (3)  (3)  A  study  of  the  total  safety 
program  with  emphasis  on  the  teaching  of  safety. 
Each  student  prepares  a  practice  lesson. 

451  History  and  Philosophy  of  Health  and 
Physical  Education  (2)  (2)  A  study  of  past  and 
present  concepts  of  physical  education;  philoso- 
phy and  principles  of  modem  physical  education 
programs. 

452  Principles  of  Coaching  (2)  (2)  Principles 
and  methods  of  coaching  sports  in  the  school 
program. 

453  Motor  Leaming  (3)  (3)  A  study  of  the  the- 
ories of  leaming  in  relation  to  the  acquisition  of 
motor  skills. 

456  Introduction  to  the  Driving  Tasks  (3)  (3) 
An  advanced  course  to  prepare  students  to  teach 
driver  education  in  the  secondary  schools. 

457  Psychosocial  Aspects  of  Physical  Disabil- 
ity (3)  (3)  A  study  of  the  psychological  and 
social  imphcations  of  physical  disabilities. 
PREREQ:  PSY  100  or  equivalent,  plus  any  basic 
course  about  the  disabled  person. 

458  Physical  Disabilities  of  Childhood  (2) 
(2)  A  course  designed  for  students  in  special 
education.  Common  orthopedic  and  neurological 
disabilities  of  childhood,  especially  chronic  devi- 
ations. Emphasis  is  on  understanding  the  medi- 
cal aspects  and  problems  of  rehabilitation. 

465     Mechanical  Analysis  of  Motor  Skills  (3)  A 
problem-solving  approach  to  skill  analysis  using 
qualitative  and  quantitative  video  and 
amematographic  analysis  as  well  as  elementary 
force-time  and  accelerometry  techniques.  Useful 
for  teachers,  trainers,  coaches,  and  exercise  pro- 
fessionals. 

470     Leadership  in  Recreational  Outdoor  Pur- 
suits (3)  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to  provide 


Department  of  Sports  Medicine 


instruction  that  would  help  persons  desiring  a 
career  in  recreational  outdoor  pursuits  education, 
or  develop  an  outdoor  education  or  physical 
education  program  using  activities,  processes, 
and  educational  methodology  in  a  safe  and 
meaningful  manner. 

473     Independent  Study  and  Special  Projects 
(1-3)  Provide  an  opportunity  for  selected  stu- 
dents to  pursue  areas  of  special  interest  and  tal- 
ent or  to  take  advantage  of  special  conferences 
or  seminars.  PREREQ:  Permission  of  department 
chairperson 

475     Mental  Training  in  Sport  (3)  (3)  Tech- 
niques of  mental  training  for  sport  and  physical 
activity,  including  relaxation  training,  concentra- 
tion skills,  breathing  regulation,  positive  imag- 
ery, autogenic  training,  and  meditation. 


489  Student  Teaching  (6)  Observation  and  par- 
ticipation in  teaching  situations  in  elementary, 
junior,  and  senior  high  schoob  under  qualified 
cooperating  teachers  and  college  supervisors. 
PREREQ:  PED  243,  350,  353,  HEA  206,  306, 
extracurricular  requirement,  and  updated  medi- 
cal examination. 

490  Student  Teaching  (6)  Observation  and  par- 
ticipation in  teaching  situations  in  elementary, 
junior,  and  senior  high  schools  under  qualified 
cooperating  teachers  and  college  supervisors. 
PREREQ:  PED  243,  350,  353,  HEA  206,  306, 
extracurricular  requirement,  and  updated  medi- 
cal examination. 

491  Internship  (3-12)  Interns  will  perform  a 
variety  of  services  to  the  agency.  It  is  expected 


that  interns  will  be  involved  in  meaningful  work 
projects  during  the  placement  with  adequate 
time  to  interact  with  their  work  supervisors  for 
questions,  answers,  and  knowledge  sharing. 
PREREQ:  Acceptance  of  final  student-designed 
concentration  proposal. 

492     Principles  and  Practices  of  Teaching 

(2)  Deals  with  the  professional  preparation  of 
the  health  and  physical  education  teacher  certifi- 
cation student.  It  is  offered  concurrently  with  the 
student  teaching  experience  and  is  designed  to 
assist  the  student  in  the  public  school  setting.  An 
examination  of  current  problems  and  issues  in 
the  profession  and  in  the  schools  leads  to  discus- 
sion of  problem  prevention  and  solution.  Lec- 
tures on  job  procurement  skills  are  included. 


Department  of  Sports  Medicine 

Joseph  Godek,  Chairperson 

Bruce  Norris,  Coordinator  of  Athletic  Training  Education 

Sandra  Fowkes,  Coordinator  of  Sports  Medicine  Services 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Godek,  Taylor 

INSTRUCTORS:  Fowkes,  Norris 

ADJUN(rr  PROFESSOR:  Ziegler 

The  Department  of  Sports  Medicine  offers  three  programs  of 
study  for  students  interested  in  careers  in  athletic  training. 

1 .  The  B.S.  in  ATHLEnC  TRAINING  prepares  students  to  achieve 
certification  from  the  National  Athletic  Trainers  Association 
Board  of  Certification,  Inc.  Students  completing  this  major  also 
are  eligible  for  graduate  study  in  such  fields  as  physical  therapy, 
exercise  physiology,  and  biomechanics. 

2.  The  AREA  of  SPECIAUZATION  is  designed  for  students 
enrolled  in  other  programs  of  study,  such  as  teacher 
certification.  These  students  will  complete  courses  in  subjects 
fundamental  to  athletic  training  and  will  be  eUgible  for 
certification  by  the  National  Athletic  Trainers  Association  Board 
of  Certification,  Inc. 

3.  The  SUMMER  PROGRAM  in  ATHLETIC  TRjMNING  is  designed 
for  students  who  are  undergraduates  at  institutions  that  do  not 
have  an  approved  athletic  training  education  program  or  post- 
graduate students  seeking  certification  as  an  athletic  trainer. 
Students  in  this  program  complete  13  credits  of  course  work 
fundamental  to  the  profession  of  athletic  training  during  a 
nine-week  summer  session. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE -ATHUETIC  TRAINING 

1.  General  Education  Requirements,  51  semester  hours 
see  pages  35-38 

2.  Athletic  Training  courses  30  semester  hours 
PED  271.  SMD  272,  410,  411,  412,  413,  414, 

415,  416,  417,  418,  454,  and  SML  361, 
410,  and  411 

3.  Related  Requirements  43  semester  hours 
BIO  259  and  269;  COM  101;  HEA  201,  202, 

and  303;  HEA  206  or  PED  385;  PED  352, 

361,  452,  and  453 

An  advanced  psychology  and  advanced  biology 

elective  and  three  credit  hours  of  physical  activity 

4.  Related  Requirements  that  also  satisfy  the  27  semester  hours 
General  Education  Requirement 

BIO  110,  CHE  103  and  104,  CRL  103  and  104, 
MAT  105  or  121,  PHY  103  and  104,  and  PSY  100 


47  semester  hours 


Other  courses  in  chemistry,  physics,  mathe- 
matics, and  biology  may  be  substituted  with 
approval  of  program  director. 
5.  Clinical  Experience 

Clinical  experiences  are  provided  in  a  number 
of  high  school,  college,  and  university  set- 
tings. Students  are  assigned  to  assist  faculty 
athletic  trainers.  Due  to  potential  scheduling 
confUcts,  athletic  training  students  may  be 
excluded  from  playing  varsity  sports  during 
their  four  semesters  of  clinical  experience. 

AREA  OF  SPECIALIZATION  IN 

ATHLETIC  TRAINING 

(Leads  to  eligibility  for  NAIA  certification) 

Required:  HEA  303,  PED  271,  SMD  272,  410,  411, 

412.  413,  414,  415,  416,  417,  418,  and  454, 

and  SML  410  and  411 


Summer  Course  Work  in  Athletic  Training 

Many  students  take  the  summer  courses  that  are  a  pan  of  the  ath- 
letic training  education  program.  The  students  are  either  undergrad- 
uates at  colleges  where  there  is  no  approved  education  program  in 
athletic  training,  or  they  are  graduate  students  seeking  to  qualify  for 
the  national  certification  exam.  The  course  work  offered  in  the 
summer  will  consist  of  those  subjects  that  are  fundamental  to  the 
profession  of  athletic  training,  i.e.,  SMD  410  and  SML  410,  SMD 
411,  412,  and  413.  A  total  of  13  credits  in  a  nine-week  block  will 
be  offered. 

Students  interested  in  taking  the  summer  session  block  of  courses 
should  contact  the  Coordinator  of  Athletic  Training  Education, 
West  Chester  University,  West  Chester,  PA  19383. 

SUMMER  PROGRAM  IN  ATHLETIC  TRAINING 

SMD  410,  411,  412,  413  and  SML  410,  411  13  semester  hours 

Facilities 

Offices,  classrooms,  and  laboratories  for  the  Department  of  Sports 
Medicine  are  housed  in  the  Health  and  Ph^fsical  Education  com- 
plex. Clinical  experience  is  offered  in  two  athletic  training  rooms 
on  campus,  one  located  in  Holhnger  Fieldhouse  and  the  recendy 
expanded  facility  located  in  the  Health  and  Physical  Education 
building.  The  athletic  training  rooms  offer  students  the  opportunity 
to  work  with  state-of-the-art  equipment,  including  numerous  elec- 
tronic modalities,  a  cybex  isokinetic  dynamometer,  a  Kincom,  and 
the  latest  in  proprioreceptive  apparatus.  In  addition,  the  department 
maintains  a  close  working  relationship  with  the  Human  Perfor- 
mance Laboratory  of  the  Department  of  Physical  Education. 


Department  of  Sports  Medicine 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

COURSE  SYMBOLS:  SMD;  SML  indicates  a 
lab  course.  The  first  number  in  parentheses 
is  the  number  of  class  hours  per  week;  the 
second  number  indicates  hours  of  credit. 
272     Athletic  Training  Techniques  (3)  (2)  A 
course  designed  to  develop  athletic  training  skills 
for  beginning  athletic  training  students.  Offered 
in  fall  and  spring  semesters.  PREREQ:  PED  271. 
SML  361     Surface  Anatomy  Laboratory  (2)  (1) 
Orientation  to  major  anatomical  landmarks  and 
underlying  structures.  Required  of  athletic  train- 
ing majors.  Offered  in  fall  and  spring  semesters. 
PREREQ:  BIO  259-269. 

410  Therapeutic  Modalities  for  Athletic  Train- 
ing (3)  (3)  Physical  agents  used  in  athletic  train- 
ing are  presented  with  regard  to  the  physics, 
physiological  effects,  indications,  contra- 
indications, and  progression.  Offered  in  the 
spring  and  summer  semesters  only.  PREREQ: 
PED  352  and  361. 

SML  410    Therapeutic  Modalities  for  Athletic 
Training  Lab  (2)  (1)  Lab  experiences  in  the 
application  of  physical  agents  presented  in  SMD 
410.  Offered  in  the  spring  and  summer  semesters 
only.  PREREQ:  SMD  410,  or  concurrently  with 
SMD  410. 

411  Therapeutic  Exercise  for  Athletic  Training 
(3)  (3)  The  principles,  objectives,  indications, 
contraindications,  and  progression  of  various 


exercise  programs  used  in  the  rehabilitation  of 
athletic  injuries  are  presented.  Offered  in  the 
summer  and  fall  semesters  only.  PREREQ:  PED 
352  and  361, 

SML  411     Therapeutic  Exercise  for  Athletic 
Training  Lab  (2)  (1)  Lab  experiences  in  the 
application  of  exercises  presented  in  SMD  411. 
Offered  in  the  summer  and  fall  semesters  only. 
PREREQ:  SMD  411,  or  concurrently  with  SMD 
411. 

412  Pathology  and  Evaluation  of  Athletic 
Injury/Illness  I  (3)  (3)  A  presentation  of  the 
pathology  of  injuries  to  the  extremities  com- 
monly seen  in  athletics  and  the  techniques  for 
their  evaluation.  Offered  in  summer  and  fall 
semesters  only.  PREREQ:  PED  352  and  361. 

413  Pathology  and  Evaluation  of  Athletic 
Injury/Illness  II  (3)  (2)  A  continuation  of  SMD 
412  with  emphasis  upon  the  head,  neck,  and 
tnmk.  PREREQ:  SMD  412.  Offered  in  summer 
and  fall  semesters  only. 

414  History,  Organization,  and  Administration 
of  Athletic  Training  (2)  (2)  A  presentation  of 
the  historical  and  current  perspectives  of  athletic 
training,  incjluding  techniques  for  organizing  and 
administering  athletic  training  programs.  Offered 
in  the  fall  semester  only. 

415  Athletic  Injury  Management  I  (2) 

(2)  Clinical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours 
virith  specific  behavioral  objectives  in  the  man- 


agement of  illness,  injuries  of  the  lower  extrem- 
ity, and  equipment  fit.  Offered  in  the  fall  semes- 
ter only.  PREREQ:  SMD  411  and  412  and  SML 
411. 

416  Athletic  Injury  Management  II  (2) 

(2)  Clinical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours 
with  specific  behavioral  objectives  in  the  man- 
agement of  injuries  to  the  shoulder  girdle  and 
upper  extremity.  Offered  in  the  spring  semester 
only.  PREREQ:  SMD  410  and  413  and  SML  410. 

417  Athletic  Injury  Management  III  (2) 
(2)  CUnical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours 
plus  specific  behavioral  objectives  for  the  man- 
agement of  neurological  conditions  and  condi- 
tions of  the  head,  neck,  spine,  and  trunk. 
Offered  in  the  fall  semester  only.  PREREQ:  SMD 
410,  411,  413,  and  416;  and  SML  410  and  411. 

418  Athletic  Injury  Management  IV  (2) 
(2)  Clinical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours 
plus  specific  behavioral  objectives  for  the  man- 
agement of  conditions  of  the  internal  organs, 
systemic  disorders,  and  the  skin.  Offered  in  the 
spring  semester  only.  PREREQ:  SMD  410,  411, 
412,  and  413;  and  SML  410  and  411. 

454    Theories  and  Practices  of  Conditioning 
and  Training  (2)  (2)  A  course  to  help  equip  the 
student  to  design  and  manage  year-round  condi- 
tioning programs  for  athletes.  PREREQ:  PED  352 
and  361. 


School  of  Music 

Sterling  E.  Murray,  Interim  Dean 


PROFESSORS:  Barrow,  Belmain,  Friday,  Laudermilch, 
McVoy,  Murray,  Nelson,  Pennington,  Schick,  Schmidt, 
Sullivan,  Veleta,  Voois 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Ahramjian,  Aliferis,  Alt, 

Bedford,  Burton,  Dorminy,  Guidetti,  Hegvik,  Klein,  Lucas, 
Ludeker,  Newbold,  Pandel,  Price,  Southall,  Sprenkle, 
Vandever,  Wagner 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Baldiazar,  Blair,  Briselli, 
Chilcote,  Grabb,  Hershey,  Lyons,  Mackay,  Maggie, 
Markey,  McHugh,  Metcalf,  Nally,  Papovic,  Pippart, 
Richmond,  Richter,  Winters,  Wyss 

INSTRUCTORS:  Adkins,  Brill,  CuUen,  Galante,  Gangwisch, 
Gardiner,  Goebel,  Kreider,  lineburger,  McKenna,  Paulsen, 
Spielberg,  Turk,  Villella 

MUSIC  TESTS  -  BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  MUSIC 
EDUCAnON 

1.  Each  candidate  must  demonstrate  skill  in  at  least  one  performing 
medium  in  which  he  or  she  excels:  piano,  organ,  voice,  guitar, 
or  a  band  or  orchestra  instrument.  It  is  preferable,  although  not 
required,  for  pianists  and  vocalists  to  perform  at  least  part  of 
their  audition  from  memory. 

2.  All  candidates  are  tested  in  voice  and  piano. 

3.  Piano,  organ,  or  voice  majors  with  band  or  orchestra  instrument 
experience  are  urged  to  demonstrate  their  abihty  on  their  instru- 
ments. 

NOTE:  All  candidates  must  bring  music  for  the  vocal,  piano,  and 
instrumental  compositions  they  intend  to  perform,  and  should 
come  prepared  with  a  song  that  will  demonstrate  vocal  range  and 
quality. 

MUSIC  TESTS  -  BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC 

Each  candidate  in  performance  must  demonstrate  an  advanced  level 
of  proficiency  in  the  major  area  of  performance  as  evidenced  by  the 
ability  to  perform  compositions  representing  a  variety  of  musical 
periods  and  must  show  potential  as  a  professional  performer.  Mem- 
orization is  required  for  pianists  and  vocalists.  Each  candidate  in 
theory  and  music  history  must  demonstrate  an  acceptable  back- 
ground in  a  major  performing  area.  Candidates  in  composition 
must  take  a  sight-singing  test  in  addition  to  the  piano  and  voice 
tests  and  demonstrate  an  acceptable  background  in  a  major  per- 
forming medium;  they  also  must  present  scores  of  completed  com- 
positions. 

NOTE:  Candidates  for  the  B.M.  degree  will  also  take  all  of  the  tests 
required  for  admission  to  the  B.S.  program.  Depending  on  the  out- 
come of  the  aural  perception  tests  (required  of  all  candidates),  stu- 
dents in  any  music  degree  program  may  be  required  to  take  a  reme- 
dial course  in  ear  training  (MTC  014),  which  must  be  passed  with 
a  grade  of  C  or  better.  Refer  to  "Repeat  Pohcy  on  Remedial 
Courses." 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  ALL  MUSIC  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Requirements,  see  pages  35-38        38-50  semester  hours 

2.  Theory  Requirements  20  semester  hours 
MTC  112,  113,  114,  115,  212, 

213,  214,  and  215 

3.  Music  History  Requirements  6  semester  hours 
MHL  221  and  222 

4.  Recital  Attendance 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE -MUSIC  EDUCATION 

The  B.S.  in  MUSIC  EDUCATION  is  a  balanced  program  of  general, 
specialized,  and  professional  courses  leading  to  qualification  for  a 
Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  Certificate  to  teach  music  in  the  ele- 
mentary and  secondary  schools  of  Pennsyl%^nia.  Three  teaching 
concentration  programs  —  general,  instrumental,  and  vocal-choral  — 
are  provided.  The  "Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  — 
Undergraduate  Division"  should  be  consulted  for  the  current  gen- 
eral, music,  and  concentration  requirements. 
1 .  Required  Music  Education  Courses  20-23  semester  hours 

MUE  331,  332  (333,  335,  337  depending  on 

area  of  concentration),  431,  and  432 


2.  Other  Music  Requirements 


46-59  semester  hours 


Major  performing  instrument,  applied  music 
courses,  conducting,  music  organizations, 
MTC  450,  and  music  electives 
3,  Education  Courses 
EDF  100  and  EDP  250 


6  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC 

There  are  five  concentrations  available  in  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in 
Music  —  compositions,  theory,  music  history,  performance  (instru- 
mental, keyboard,  or  vocal),  and  jazz  studies  and  contemporary 
media.  The  requirements  for  each  concentration  are  listed  below. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  B.M.  PROGRAMS 

Foreign  Language  6-12  semester  hours 

The  B.M.  in  COMPOSITION  offers  comprehensive  theory  and  com- 
position courses  designed  to  develop  creative  skills  enabling  the 
student  to  write  in  an  acceptable  contemporary  idiom  and  to 
develop  an  individual  style.  The  "Handbook  for  Students  in 
Music  —  Undergraduate  Division"  should  be  consulted  for  the  cur- 
rent general  and  music  requirements. 

1.  Required  Composition  Courses  24  semester  hours 
MTC  312,  313,  341,  344,  412,  413,  417;  and 

342  or  346 

2.  Other  Music  Requirements  38  semester  hours 
MHL  elective,  conducting,  music  organiza- 
tion, music  electives,  performance  area,  and 

MTC  450 

The  B.M.  in  THEORY  offers  extensive  training  to  develop  analytical 
skills  leading  to  the  comprehension  of  the  structure  and  form  of 
music  of  all  styles  and  periods,  and  to  develop  acceptable  writing 
skills.  The  "Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  —  Undergraduate  Divi- 
sion" should  be  consulted  for  the  current  general  and  music 
requirements. 

1.  Required  Theory  Courses  21  semester  hours 
MTC  312,  341,  342,  344,  346,  417,  and  479 

2.  Other  Music  Requirements  38  semester  hours 
MTC  450,  MHL  elective,  conducting,  perfor- 
mance area,  music  organizations,  and  music 

electives 

The  B.M.  in  MUSIC  HISTORY  prepares  the  student  for  graduate 
studies  in  music  history  and  literature,  and  musicology.  The 
required  courses  provide  a  broad  foundation  in  the  major  field.  The 
wide  choice  of  music  electives  permits  the  student  to  structure  a 
program  compatible  with  his  or  her  particular  career  goals  and 
interests.  The  "Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  —  Undergraduate 
Division"  should  be  consulted  for  the  current  general  and  music 
requirements. 


School  of  Music 


1.  Required  Music  History  Courses  15  semester  hours 
MHL  440,  441,  442,  443,  444,  445  (select 

four  of  the  six),  and  MHL  470 

2.  Music  History  Electives  12  semester  hours 

3.  Music  Electives  12  semester  hours 

4.  Other  Music  Requirements  13  semester  hours 
MTC  342,  applied  music,  conducting,  music  organization 

The  B.M.  in  PERFORMANCE  is  for  students  who  demonstrate  a 
high  degree  of  ability  on  their  chosen  instrument  and  who  desire  to 
concentrate  on  developing  that  ability.  Majors  in  the  program 
should  consult  the  "Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  — 
Undergraduate  Division"  for  the  current  general  and  music  require- 
ments. 

1.  BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC  -  INSTRUMENTAL  PERFORMANCE 
Required  Instrumental  Courses  38-40  semester  hours 
Major  instrument  141,  142,  241,  242,  341, 

342,  441,  442;  AIC  311,  312;  band/orchestra; 

and  master  class/ensemble 

Other  Music  Requirements  29  semester  hours 

MTC  341,  344,  and  450,  secondary  applied 

music,  major  literature  course,  and  music  electives 

2.  BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC  -  KEYBOARD  PERFORMANCE 
Optional  1  (Performance) 

Required  Keyboard  Courses  40  semester  hours 

PL\  141,  142,  241,  242,  341,  342,  405,  406, 
425,  426,  441,  442,  and  450  or  452 

Other  Required  Music  Courses  29  semester  hours 

MTC  344,  MHL  electives,  conducting,  sec- 
ondary performance  area,  music  organiza- 
tions, music  electives,  and  master  class/ 
ensemble 

Option  2  (Performance  with  Pedagogy  emphasis) 
Required  Keyboard  Courses  48  semester  hours 

PL\  141,  142,  241,  242,  341,  342,  405,  406, 
425,  426,  441,  442,  450,  452,  and  451  or  453 
Other  Required  Music  Courses  20  semester  hours 

MHL  or  MTC  elective,  supportive  elective, 
conducting,  secondary  performance  area, 
music  organizations,  and  master  class/ 
ensemble 

3.  BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC  -  VOCAL  PERFORMANCE 
Required  Vocal  Courses  44  semester  hours 
vol  141,  142,  241,  242,  329,  341,  342,  411, 

412,  413,  414,  424,  441,  and  442;  vocal  liter- 
ature course;  VOC  311  and  312 

Other  Music  Requirements  24  semester  hours 

MTC  344  and  450;  keyboard  courses;  music 
electives;  chorus 

The  B.M.  in  JAZZ  STUDIES  AND  CONTEMPORARY  MEDIA  is 

designed  for  students  who  want  to  develop  their  performance 
abilities  in  today's  rapidly  changing  musical  scene.  The  program  is 


thoroughly  rooted  in  traditional  music.  Consult  the  "Handbook  for 
Students  in  Music  —  Undergraduate  Division"  for  the  current  general 
and  music  requirements. 

1.  Required  Jazz  Courses  27  semester  hours 
AJZ  321,  331,  361,  362,  365;  MHL  322;  MTC 

261,  271,  341,  361,  362 

2.  Major  Instrument  16  semester  hours 

3.  Other  Music  Requirements  15  semester  hours 
Conducting,  music  electives,  music  organi- 
zations, jazz  ensembles,  and  jazz  electives 

Minor  in  Music  18-21  semester  hours 

This  program  is  geared  toward  liberal  arts  students  with  an  interest 
in  music.  The  "Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  —  Undergraduate 
Division"  should  be  consulted  for  current  requirements. 

1.  Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 
MTC  112  and  114,  MHL  course,  music  orga- 
nization, and  PIA  191  and  192 

2.  Music  Electives  6-9  semester  hours 
This  minor  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students  in  the 
Associate  of  Arts  in  liberal  studies  program  or  as  one  of  the  minors 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  in  liberal  studies  gen- 
eral degree  program. 

Minor  in  Jazz  Studies  18-21  semester  hours 

This  program  is  designed  primarily  for  students  currently  enrolled 
in  a  music  degree  program.  Students  in  other  degree  programs  will 
be  admitted  if  qualified.  Students  must  have  the  permission  of  both 
their  major  adviser  and  the  chairperson  of  the  Instrumental  Depart- 
ment. The  "Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  —  Undergraduate  Divi- 
sion" should  be  consulted  for  current  requirements. 


1.  Required  Courses 

AES  151,  152;  AJZ  361,  362,  365;  MHL  322; 
MTC  361,  362 

2.  Music  Electives 
ACP  193;  AEO  121;  AES  151,  152 


18  semester  hours 


0-3  semester  hours 


Minor  in  Music  History  18  semester  hours 

This  program  is  designed  primarily  for  students  currently  enrolled 
in  a  music  degree  program.  Students  in  other  degree  programs  will 
be  admitted  if  they  qualify.  Students  must  have  the  permission  of 
both  their  major  adviser  and  the  chairperson  of  the  Department  of 
Music  History.  The  "Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  — Under- 
graduate Division"  should  be  consulted  for  current  requirements. 

Required  Courses 

Any  three  of  the  following  six  courses  — MHL  440,  441,  442,  443, 

444,  and  445 

Any  two  of  the  following  genre  or  composer  courses  —  MHL 

320,  322,  451,  454,  455,  456,  457,  458,  460,  461,  462;  and  MTC 

342 


Department  of  Music  History 


Department  of  Music  Education 

Carol  A.  Belmain,  Chairperson 

FACUUY:  Burton,  Lineburger,  Ludeker,  Markey,  Pippart,  Richmond,  Villella 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MUSIC  EDUCAnON 

Symbol:  MUE 

231  Music  for  the  Classroom  Teacher  (3) 
Designed  to  equip  the  elementary  classroom 
teacher  to  participate  in  a  music  program. 
Emphasis  on  teaching  procedures  and  materials. 

232  Music  in  Early  Childhood  (3)  Designed  to 
equip  the  teacher  of  early  childhood  to  develop 
specific  concepts  utilizing  singing,  rhythmic,  and 
melodic  activities.  Emphasis  on  listening  and 
movement  to  music. 

233  Handbells  (1)  Selection  of  music;  care  of 
bells;  maintenance  of  Ubrary,  programming; 
styles;  history  of  bells;  bell  assignments;  perfor- 
mance practice;  performance. 

331  The  Music  Curriculum,  K-6:  Methods  and 
Materials  (3)  The  study  of  music  and  the  learn- 
ing process  at  the  elementary  level.  The  listening 
program,  pedagogy  for  the  elementary  music 
program,  and  materiab.  See  note  below. 

332  The  Music  Curriculum,  7-12:  Methods 
and  Materials  (3)  The  study  of  music  and  the 
learning  process  at  the  secondary  level.  The  lis- 
tening program,  the  middle  and  junior  high 
school  general  music  programs,  ethnomusic,  pro- 
grams and  performances,  basics  of  administra- 
tion, related  arts,  the  music  major  program,  and 
evaluative  techniques.  See  note  below. 

333  Instrumental  Methods  (3)  Fundamentab 
underlying  the  development  of  instrumental  pro- 
grams in  the  public  schools.  Emphasis  on  pro- 
gram organization  and  administration,  teaching 
procedures,  and  materials. 

NOTE:  MUE  331  must  be  completed  successfully 
before  MUE  332.  The  sequence  for  these 
REQUIRED  music  educatioti  courses  is  consecutive 
semesters:  MUE  331  followed  by  MUE  332  and 
then  MUE  431/432  the  following  semester.  Enroll- 


ment for  these  courses  is  limited  on  a  yearly  basis 
and  is  planned  at  a  meeting  for  sophomores  in  the 
spring  semester  SEE  DEPARTMENT  CHAIRPER- 
SON. MUE  333  is  scheduled  during  the  semester 
with  MUE  332. 

335     Choral  Materials  and  Practices  (2) 
Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  a  variety 
of  choral  music  suitable  for  school  use.  Program 
building  and  rehearsal  techniques  are  demon- 
strated. Offered  in  fall  semester  only. 

337  Instrumental  Techniques  and  Materials 
(2)  For  juniors  and  seniors  who  desire  to  spe- 
cialize in  instrumental  music.  Considers 
rehearsal  procedures,  effective  materials,  minor 
repairs  of  instruments,  competitions  and  festi- 
vals, and  marching  band  procedures.  Offered  in 
spring  semester  only.  PREREQ:  MUE  333. 

338  Comprehensive  Musicianship/Leadership 
Training  in  Music  Education  (2)  A  course 
designed  to  help  future  professionals  develop 
leadership  qu^dities  and  pragmatic  instructional 
skills.  Motivational  strategies  as  advocated  by 
leading  authorities  will  be  emphasized.  Content 
includes  visionary  leadership,  time  management, 
and  principles  in  self-discipline,  self-confidence, 
and  problem  solving.  Teaching  assignments  will 
include  methodologies  in  comprehensive  musi- 
cianship and  a  variety  of  teacher/leader  concepts. 
412    Teaching  Music  Listening  at  the  Elemen- 
tary Level  (3)  The  teaching  of  the  elements  of 
music,  musical  concepts,  and  the  development  of 
aesthetic  sensitivity  through  listening. 

422  Music  in  the  Middle  School  (3)  Review 
and  critical  analysis  of  music  education  in  the 
middle  school:  philosophies,  curriculum,  prac- 
tices, and  personnel. 

423  Elementary  Orff  Techniques  (3)  Basic  Orff 
melodic  and  rhythmic  techniques  for  the  elemen- 


tary classroom.  Emphasis  on  developing  concepts 
for  individual  teaching  situations.  PREREQ:  MUE 
331  and  332. 

425     Elementary  Kodaly  Techniques  (3)  Basic 
Kodaly  techniques.  Adaptation  of  teaching  proce- 
dures for  elementary  school:  rhythm,  melody, 
movement,  and  improvisation. 
428     Music  in  Special  Education  (3)  Character- 
istics of  special  pupils;  adaptation  of  teaching 
techniques,  materials,  and  curriculum.  PREREQ: 
MUE  231,  232,  or  331. 

430  Related  Arts  Pedagogy  in  Music  Educa- 
tion (3)  Principles  of  related-arts  teaching  appli- 
cable to  musical  elements,  an,  and  creative 
movement,  with  appropriate  teaching  techniques 
at  specified  grade  levels  Materials  for  school 
music  programs;  basal  music  series,  other  texts 
and  hterature,  and  resources  in  related  arts. 
Demonstration  lessons  and  unit  planning. 

431  Student  Teaching  (Elementary)  (6)  Obser- 
vation and  participation  in  teaching  vocal  and 
instrumental  music  at  the  elementary  level. 
Undertaken  in  conjunction  with  qualified  coop- 
erative teachers.  Professional  conferences  and 
visitations  are  an  integral  pan  of  the  experience. 
PREREQ:  See  432. 

432  Student  Teaching  (Secondary)  (6)  Obser- 
vation and  teaching  general,  vocal,  and/or  instru- 
mental music  at  the  secondary  level.  Professional 
conferences  and  visitations  are  an  integral  pan  of 
the  experience.  PREREQ  for  431/432:  Satisfy 
requirements  under  "Admission  to  Teacher  Edu- 
cation." GPA  2.50.  Grades  of  C  or  better  in 
required  methods  classes  and  final  required  key- 
board minor  and  voice  minor.  Complete  music 
theory  and  aurals,  music  history,  conducting, 
and  all  instrument  classes.  Completion  of  96 
semester  hours  including  the  required  music  the- 
ory, aural  activities,  music  history,  conducting, 
and  all  professional  education  courses. 


Department  of  Music  History 

Liselotte  M.  Schmidt,  Chairperson 
FACULTY:  Balthazar,  Murray,  Price,  Winters 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MUSIC  HISTORY 

Symbol:  MHL 

121     Fine  Arts  (Music)  (3)  Designed  for  the 
general  requirements.  An  introductory  course  in 
the  history  and  appreciation  of  music  from  the 
Middle  Ages  through  the  contemporary  period. 
Not  open  to  music  majors. 
NOTE:  Other  courses  are  available  to  the  nonmusic 
major  for  general  requirements.  Particularly  suit- 
able are  MHL  125  and  126.  Additional  courses 
may  also  be  taken  for  the  same  purpose,  with  con- 
sent of  department  chairperson. 


125  Perspectives  in  Jazz  (3)  For  nonmusic 
majors.  Guided  listening  to  improve  understand- 
ing and  enjoyment  of  jazz  with  emphasis  on  jazz 
heritages,  chronological  development,  and  socio- 
logical considerations,  culminating  in  an  analysis 
of  the  eclectic  styles  of  the  1960's  and  1970's. 
Not  open  to  music  majors. 

126  Folk  and  Traditional  Music  of  the  West- 
em  World  (3)  Introductory  survey  of  music  and 
musical  styles  of  folk  and  traditional  music  in 
the  Western  world.  Analysis  of  styles,  forms,  aes- 
thetic and  cultural  concepts,  and  practices  sur- 
veyed as  they  relate  to  folk  music  and  the  main- 
stream of  art  music.  Not  open  to  music  majors. 


♦  1 79     Special  Subjects  Seminar  (3)  Significant 
topics  in  music  history  and  literature  presented 
by  faculty  members  and/or  visiting  lecturers. 
Designed  for  the  nonmusic  major  who  has  had 
Uttle  or  no  previous  musical  experience.  Fulfills 
the  general  requirements.  Not  open  to  music 
majors. 

#201     Form  and  Style  in  the  Arts  (3)  Relation- 
ships between  the  arts  (music,  hterature,  fine 
arts,  and  dance)  stressed  through  common  prin- 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
#Approved  interdisciplinary  course. 


Department  of  Instrumental  Music 


ciples  of  form  and  style.  Concentration  on  the 
development  of  skills  of  critical  perception 
through  practical  application  with  reference  to 
various  arts.  Fulfills  the  interdisciplinary  require- 
ment. 

221  Music  History  I  (3)  A  history  of  music 
from  earliest  known  times  through  the  Baroque 
Period.  Analysis  of  styles,  forms,  aesthetic  con- 
cepts, and  practices.  PREREQ  for  music  majors: 
MTC  113.  For  nonmusic  majors:  permission  of 
instructor. 

222  Music  History  II  (3)  A  history  of  music 
from  Classical  through  Contemporary  Periods. 
Analysis  of  styles,  forms,  aesthetic  concepts,  and 
practices.  PREREQ  for  music  majors:  MTC  113. 
For  nonmusic  majors:  permission  of  instructor. 
♦  310     Collegium  Musicum  (1)  A  chamber 
ensemble  specializing  in  the  use  of  authentic 
instruments  and  performance  techniques  in  the 
music  of  the  Medieval,  Renaissance,  and  Baroque 
eras.  Membership  by  audition. 

320    World  Music  (3)  An  introduction  to  the 
study  of  tribal,  folk,  popular,  and  oriental  music 
and  ethnomusicology  methodology.  Open  to 
music  majors  and  nonmusic  majors  without  pre- 
requisites. 

322     History  of  Jazz  (3)  A  survey  of  the  history 
of  jazz,  including  representative  performers  and 
their  music.  PREREQ:  MHL  221  and  222,  or  per- 
mission of  the  instructor. 

440  Medieval  Music  (3)  Development  of  plain- 
song  and  secular  monody  and  beginnings  of 
early  history  of  polyphony  through  the  14th  cen- 
tury. Consideration  of  trends  in  the  visual  arts, 
history,  and  literature.  PREREQ:  MHL  221  and 
222,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

441  Renaissance  Music  (3)  Sacred  and  secular 
music  in  the  age  of  Dufay;  changing  forms  and 
styles  through  the  music  of  Franco-Flemish 
groups;  the  frottola  and  related  forms;  Palestrina 
and  his  contemporaries,  with  a  brief  consider- 
ation of  trends  in  the  visual  arts,  history,  and 
literature.  PREREQ:  MHL  221  and  222,  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 


442  Baroque  Music  (3)  Styles  and  forms  of 
Baroque  repertoire;  contributions  of  the  major 
Baroque  composers;  role  of  music  and  musicians 
in  the  society  of  the  period.  PREREQ:  MHL  221 
and  222,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

443  Late  ISth-Century  Music  (3)  Changing 
styles  and  forms  by  the  sons  of  J.S.  Bach;  the 
Viennese  preclassicists;  the  Mannheim  school; 
opera;  Joseph  and  Michael  Haydn,  Mozart,  and 
their  contemporaries;  the  early  works  of 
Beethoven.  PREREQ:  MHL  221  and  222,  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

444  19th-century  Music  (3)  Historical  devel- 
opments during  the  Romantic  Period  (ca.  1800- 
1900).  Analysis  of  changes  and  trends;  compara- 
tive aspects  of  new  forms.  PREREQ:  MHL  221 
and  222,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

445  20th-century  Music  (3)  Trends  in  modem 
music  from  about  1900  to  the  present.  Analysis 
and  listening  experience.  PREREQ:  MHL  221 
and  222,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

451     Music  in  the  United  States  (3)  Survey  of 
the  development  of  music  and  musical  styles 
from  1620  to  the  present.  Analysis  of  styles, 
forms,  aesthetic  concepts,  and  practices. 
PREREQ:  MHL  221  and  222,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

454  History  of  Opera  (3)  A  basic  course  in  the 
origin  and  development  of  opera  and  its  dissemi- 
nation throughout  the  Western  world.  PREREQ: 
MHL  221  and  222,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

455  History  of  Orchestral  Music  (3)  A  study 
of  representative  orchestral  works:  symphonies, 
concerti,  suites,  overtures,  and  others,  from  the 
Baroque  Period  to  the  present.  PREREQ:  MHL 
221  and  222,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

456  History  of  Musical  Instruments  (3)  The 
development  of  musical  instruments  from  antiq- 
uity to  the  present.  A  world  view  of  instruments 
will  include  function  and  performance  practice. 
458     Performance  Practices  (3)  A  consideration 
of  the  special  problems  encountered  in  the  stylis- 
tic realization  and  performance  of  music  from 
the  Medieval  through  the  Romantic  eras.  Particu- 
lar attention  will  be  focused  on  original  sources. 


period  instruments,  and  performance  practices. 
PREREQ:  MHL  221-222,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

460  Bach  and  HU  Works  (3)  The  Ufe  of  J.S. 
Bach;  works  for  organ,  keyboard,  and  other 
instruments;  cantatas  and  larger  choral  works. 
PREREQ:  MHL  221  and  222,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

461  Beethoven  and  His  Works  (3)  The  life  and 
times  of  Ludwig  van  Beethoven;  consideration  of 
orchestral,  chamber,  and  vocal  music,  emphasiz- 
ing chronological  stylistic  development;  consider- 
ation of  Beethoven's  influence  on  the  later  19th 
century.  PREREQ:  MHL  221  and  222,  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor. 

462  Mozart  and  His  Works  (3)  A  study  of  the 
Ufe  and  music  of  Wolfgang  A.  Mozart  with  spe- 
cial reference  to  the  period  in  which  he  lived. 
PREREQ:  MHL  221  and  222,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

470     Research  in  Music  History  (3)  Basic  bib- 
liographical material,  library  resources,  and 
research  techniques,  applicable  to  undergraduate 
study  in  music  history  and  literature.  Required 
of  B.M.  majors  in  music  history.  Open  to  others 
with  permission  of  instructor  and  department 
chairperson. 

♦  479    Seminar  in  Music  History  I  (1-3) 
Significant  topics  presented  by  faculty  members 
and/or  visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  spe- 
cific needs  of  undergraduate  music  majors. 

♦  480     Seminar  in  Music  History  II  (1-3) 
Significant  topics  presented  by  faculty  members 
and/or  visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  spe- 
cific needs  of  undergraduate  music  majors. 

♦  481     Independent  Study  (1) 

♦  482     Independent  Study  (2) 

♦  483     Independent  Study  (3) 

MHW  401-410      Workshops  in  Music  History 
(1-3)  Participation-oriented  workshops  designed 
to  meet  specific  needs  in  music  history  and  to 
develop  skills  for  practical  appUcation  in  teach- 
ing and  professional  settings. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Instrumental  Music 

Edward  A.  Barrow,  Chairperson 

FACUUY:  Ahramjian,  Briselli,  Cullen,  Galante,  Goebel, 
Grabb,  Guidetti,  Hegvik,  Klein,  Laudermilch,  Lyons, 
McKenna,  Metcalf,  Newbold,  Paulsen,  Richter, 
Southall,  Villella 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
INSTRUMENTAL  MUSIC 

NUMBERING  SYSTEM 
Private  and  class  lessons  given  by  Depart- 
ment of  Instrumental  Music  are  shown  by 
the  following  numbers,  together  with  the 
appropriate  prefix: 
BAR         Baritone 
BAS  Bass 

BSN  Bassoon 

CLT         Clarinet 
FLU         Flute 


FRH 

French  Horn 

GTR 

Guitar 

HRP 

Harp 

JBR 

Jazz  Brass 

JPR 

Ja77  Pernission 

JST 

Jazz  Strings 

JWW 

Jazz  Woodwinds 

OBO 

Oboe 

PER 

Percussion 

SAX 

Saxophone 

TBA 

Tuba 

TPT 

Trumpet 

TRB  Trombone 

VCL  Cello 

VLA  Viola 

VLN  Violin 

101-402     Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area  (1) 

111-412     Private  instruction  in  major  perfor- 
mance area  (2) 

141-442     Private  instruction  in  advanced  per- 
formance area,  B.M.  Program  (3) 

INS  471-474    Advanced  Instrumental  Lesson 
(2)  (Elective) 


a      Depanment  of  Keyboard  Music 


AIM  311     Marching  Band  Techniques  (1)  A 
survey  of  the  function  of  the  total  marching 
band  and  of  each  component  within  it. 
AJZ  321     Recording  Techniques  (2)  A  study  of 
the  technology  of  the  modem  recording  sound 
studio. 

AJZ  331     Electronic  Instruments  (2)  A  study  of 
the  MIDI  implementation  of  synthesizers,  sam- 
plers, sequencers,  signal  processors,  and  rhythm 
processors  as  related  to  real-time  performance. 
AJZ  361     Jazz  Musicianship  and  Improvisation 

I  (3)  A  basic  course  in  jazz  improvisation  that 
emphasizes  the  learning  and  discovery  of  impro- 
visational  techniques  through  playing  and  listen- 
ing. 

AJZ  362    Jazz  Musicianship  and  Improvisation 

II  (3)  A  continuation  of  AJZ  361. 

AJZ  365    Jazz  Ensemble  Techniques  (1)  Tech- 
niques and  methods  for  organizing,  rehearsing, 
programming,  and  operating  jazz  ensembles. 
♦  AIM  429     Special  Subjects  Seminar  — 
Instrumental  (1-2-3)  Topics  in  the  area  of 
instrumental  music  presented  by  faculty  mem- 
bers and/or  visiting  specialists. 

ALC    A  literature  Class  A  historical  survey  of 
the  music  written  for  instrumental  solo  and 
ensemble,  including  current  teaching  materials. 
ALC  311     Brass  Uterature  (3) 
ALC  331     String  Literature  (3) 
ALC  336     Guitar  Literature  (1) 
ALC  337     Guitar  Literature  II  (1) 
ALC  341     Woodwind  literature  (3) 

AMC    A  Master  Class    Solo  and  ensemble 


instrumental  repertoire  is  performed  and  cri- 
tiqued by  the  teacher  and  students. 

♦  AMC  311-314     Master  Class  Brass  (1) 

♦  AMC  321-324     Master  Class  Percussion  (1) 

♦  AMC  331-334     Master  Class  Strings  (1) 

♦  AMC  341-344     Master  Class  Woodwinds  (1) 

ACB     A  Class  in  Brass  (at  the  beginning  level) 
ACB  191     Trumpet  Class  (Vi) 
ACB  192     French  Horn  Class  iV^) 
ACB  193     Trombone  Class  O/z) 
ACB  194     Brass  Class  (Vj) 

ACP    A  Class  in  Percussion  (at  the  begiiming 

level) 

ACP  191     Percussion  Class  (Drums)  C/i) 

ACP  192     Percussion  Class  (Mallets)  C/i) 

ACP  193     Drum  Set  Class  (Vi) 

ACS    A  Class  in  Strings  (at  the  beginning 

level) 

ACS  191  Violin  Class  I  (1) 

ACS  192  VioUn  Class  II  (1) 

ACS  193  Viola  Class  iVi) 

ACS  194  Cello  Class  (Vi) 

ACS  195  Bass  Class  (Vi) 

ACS  196  Guitar  Class  (Vi) 

ACW    A  Class  in  Woodwinds  (at  the  beginning 

level) 

ACW  191     Clarinet  Class  (Vi) 


ACW  192     Flute  Class  (Vi) 
ACW  193     Double  Reed  Class  (Vi) 
ACW  194    Woodwind  Class  (Vi) 

AEB     An  Ensemble:  Band 

♦  AEB  101  Elementary  Band  (Va) 

♦  AEB  112  Marching  Band  Front  (1) 

♦  AEB  311  Marching  Band  (1) 

♦  AEB  321  Concert  Band  (1) 

♦  AEB  331  Symphonic  Band  (1) 

♦  AEB  341  Wind  Ensemble  (1) 

AEO    An  Ensemble:  Orchestra 

♦  AEO  101     Elementary  Orchestra  (Vi) 

♦  AEO  111     Chamber  Orchestra  (Vi) 

♦  AEO  121     Studio/Pit  Orchestra  (Vi) 

♦  AEO  331     Chamber  Orchestra  (1) 

♦  AEO  341     Symphony  Orchestra  (1) 

AES     An  Ensemble:  Small 

♦  AES  1 1 1  Brass  Ensemble  (Vi) 

♦  AES  121  Percussion  Ensemble  (Vi) 

♦  AES  131  Soring  Ensemble 

♦  AES  141  Woodwind  Ensemble  (Vi) 

♦  AES  151  Jazz  Ensemble  (Criterions)  (Vi) 
♦AES  152  Jazz  Ensemble  (Combo)  (Vi) 

AlC    A  Class  in  Instrumental  Conducting 
AIC  311     Instrumental  Conducting  I  (2) 
AIC  312     Instrumental  Conducting  II  (2) 
PREREQ:  VOC  311  or  AIC  311 


♦  This  course  may  be  uken  again  for  credit 


Department  of  Keyboard  Music 

Shirley  Pethes  Aliferis,  Chairperson 

FACULTY:  Bedford,  Blair,  Lucas,  Pandel,  Pennington, 
Schick,  Veleta,  Voois 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
DEPARTMENT  OF  KEYBOARD  MUSIC 

NUMBERING  SYSTEM 
Private  and  class  lessons  given  by  the 
Department  of  Keyboard  Music  are  shown 
by  the  following  numbers,  together  with 
the  appropriate  prefix:  HAR  —  Harpsi- 
chord, PIA  -  Piano,  ORG  -  Organ 

191-192     Class  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area  (1) 

♦  100     Private  elective  instruction  (1) 
101-402     Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area  (1) 

103-104     Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area,  B.  M.  in  history  program  (1) 
105-106     Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area,  elementary  education  students  with 
a  concentration  in  music  (I) 
107-109     Private  instruction  in  a  major  perfor- 
mance area,  elementary  education  students  with 
a  concentration  in  music  (1) 
111-412     Private  instruction  in  major  perfor- 
mance area,  music  education  program  (2) 
413     Elective  credit  for  senior  recital,  accompa- 
nying, or  other  participation  in  concerts  or 


recitals,  or  extra  study  of  literature.  Available 
to  music  education  seniors  only  during  the  non- 
student-teaching  semester  by  permission  of  the 
department  (I) 

141-442     Private  instruction  in  advanced  per- 
formance area,  B.M.  program  (3) 
471-474    Advanced  Keyboard  Lesson  (2)  (Elec- 
tive) 

PIA  403     Harpsichord  and  Condnuo  Realiza- 
tion (1)  An  introduction  to  harpsichord  playing 
and  the  principles  of  continuo  accompaniment  as 
a  Baroque  style. 

♦  MAK  311-314     Master  Class  (Keyboard) 
(1)  For  keyboard  majors.  Experience  in  perform- 
ing memorized  Uterature.  Class  members  also 
play  two  piano  compositions  and  ensemble 
music  for  piano  and  other  instruments. 
ORG  351     Organ  literature  I  (3)  A  survey  of 
literature  for  the  organ  from  the  13th  century  to 
the  Baroque  period;  influence  of  the  organ  on 
the  literature. 

ORG  352     Organ  Literature  II  (3)  A  survey  of 
Uterature  for  the  organ  from  J.  S.  Bach  to  the 
present;  influence  of  the  organ  on  the  Uterature. 
Recordings  and  performances  by  organ  majors 
wiU  be  evaluated. 


ORG  451     Accompanying  (3)  Performance  of 
the  vocal  and  instrumental  accompanying  Utera- 
ture for  organ  from  aU  periods;  performance  and 
reading  sessions. 

ORG  452     Service  Playing  (3)  A  study  of  prob- 
lems in  service  playing  for  the  organist.  Included 
will  be  hymn  accompaniment,  improvisation, 
conducting  from  the  organ,  and  literature  for  the 
service. 

♦  PIA  213     Studio  Lessons  in  Accompanying 
(1)  Studio  instruction  in  accompanying  for  pia- 
nists in  any  music  program. 

♦  PIA  250    Accompanying,  Ensemble,  and 
Sight  Reading  (1)  Class  instruction  in  accompa- 
nying, ensembles,  and  sight  reading. 

PIA  404    Transposition  and  Score  Reading  (2) 
Emphasizing  the  needs  of  the  keyboard  accom- 
panist, techniques  include  clef  reading,  harmonic 
analysis,  interval  transposition,  solfege  steps,  and 
enharmonic  changes. 

PIA  405  Accompanying— Vocal  (3)  Performance 
of  the  vocal  accompanying  Uterature  from  all  peri- 
ods; performance  and  reading  sessions  in  class. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Music  Theory  and  Composition 


PIA  406     Accompanying— Instrumental  (3)  Per- 
formance of  the  instrumental  accompanying  liter- 
ature from  all  periods;  emphasis  on  the  sonata 
literature;  performance  and  reading  sessions  in 
class. 

PIA  410     Independent  Studies  in  Keyboard 
Music  (1-3)  Special  research  projects,  reports,  or 
readings  in  keyboard  music.  Permission  of 
department  chairperson  required. 
PIA  425     Keyboard  Literature  I  (3)  A  survey  of 
literature  for  keyboard  instruments  from  the 
Baroque  Period  through  the  late  Classical  Period. 
The  various  styles  in  solo  and  ensemble  litera- 
ture are  illustrated  by  recordings  and  perfor- 
mance by  keyboard  majors. 
PIA  426     Keyboard  Literature  II  (3)  A  continua- 
tion of  PIA  425.  Performance  by  keyboard  majors 
and  recordings.  Literature  from  the  Romandc 
through  the  Impressionist  Period  is  studied. 


PIA  427    The  Concerto  (3)  A  chronological 
presentation  of  the  development  of  the  piano 
concerto  emphasizing  performance  practices  and 
problems.  PREREQ:  MTC  213. 
PIA  429     Special  Subjects  Seminar  (1-3) 
Significant  topics  presented  by  faculty  members 
and/or  visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  the 
specific  needs  of  undergraduate  keyboard  majors. 
PIA  450     Group  Piano  Pedagogy  I  (4)  Proce- 
dures and  materiab  for  group  piano  instruction 
from  preschool  through  beginning  leveb. 
Emphasis  on  developing  musical  literacy  and 
creativity  through  peer  learning  and  group  inter- 
actions. Includes  practicing  in  group  piano 
instruction. 

PIA  451     Group  Piano  Pedagogy  II  (4)  Proce- 
dures and  materials  for  group  instruction  from 
the  intermediate  through  advanced  levels. 
Emphasis  on  developing  comprehensive  musi- 


cianship through  an  interwoven  study  of  Utera- 
ture,  musical  analysis,  technique,  improvisation, 
ear  training,  harmony,  transposition,  and  sight 
reading.  Includes  practicum  in  group  piano 
instruction.  PREREQ:  PL\  450. 

PIA  452     Piano  Pedagogy  I  (4)  An  in-depth 
study  of  repertoire  and  materials  available  to  the 
studio  piano  teacher  for  the  beginning  and  inter- 
mediate levels.  Discussions  of  related  concerns 
such  as  memorization,  practice  techniques, 
developing  technique  through  literature,  princi- 
ples of  fingering,  and  sight  reading.  Includes 
practicum  in  individual  instruction. 

PIA  453     Selected  Topics  in  Piano  Pedagogy 

(4)  Further  exploration  of  the  goals  and  objec- 
tives of  piano  study  through  presentation  of 
selected  topics  and  continued  practicum  in  indi- 
vidual instrucdon. 


Department  of  Music  Theory  and 
Composition 

James  McVoy,  Chairperson 

FACULTY:  Hershey,  Maggio,  Nelson,  Popovic,  Sullivan 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

MUSIC  THEORY  AND  COMPOSITION 

Symbol:  MTC 

014    Basic  Dictauon  and  Sight  Singing  (2)  A 
preparatory  course  for  music  majors  emphasizing 
basic  aural  perception  and  sight-singing  skills 
needed  for  effective  music  study.  A  final  grade  of 
C  or  better  is  a  prerequisite  for  taking  MTC  114. 
110     Fundamentals  of  Music  (3)  A  study  of 
basic  elements  of  music  for  those  without  previ- 
ous musical  experience.  For  nonmusic  majors 
only. 

112  Theory  of  Music  I  (3)  Introduction  to 
music  theory,  music  writing,  and  keyboard  har- 
mony. Elements  of  musical  form;  binary  and  ter- 
nary forms.  Primary  triads  and  their  inversions. 
Analysis  and  creative  activity. 

1 13  Theory  of  Music  II  (3)  Supertonic  and 
other  secondary  triads  and  their  inversions;  dia- 
tonic seventh  chords;  moduladon;  compound 
ternary,  rondo,  and  variation  forms.  Analysis  and 
creative  activity.  PREREQ:  MTC  112. 

114  Aural  Activities  1  (2)  Development  of 
basic  hearing  skills,  chiefly  through  sight  singing 
and  dictation  activities  based  on  the  subject  mat- 
ter of  MTC  112. 

115  Aural  Activities  II  (2)  Continued  develop- 
ment of  basic  hearing  skills.  PREREQ:  MTC  114. 

212  Theory  of  Music  III  (3)  Diatonic  and 
chromatic  seventh  chords  and  their  inversions. 
Modulation.  Invention  and  fugue,  sonata-allegro 
forms.  Analysis  and  creative  activity.  PREREQ: 
MTC  113. 

213  Theory  of  Music  FV  (3)  Harmonic  and 
contrapuntal  techniques  of  the  20th  century. 
Form  in  contemporary  music.  Analysis  and  cre- 
ative activity.  PREREQ:  MTC  212. 

214  Aural  Activities  III  (2)  Material  of 
advanced  difficulty  involving  chromatic  alter- 
ation, foreign  moduladon,  and  intricate  rhythms. 
PREREQ:  MTC  115. 


215    Aural  Activities  IV  (2)  Continuation  of 
MTC  214  and  activities  involving  nontonal 
music.  PREREQ:  MTC  214. 
261     Fundamentals  of  Jazz  (2)  A  basic  course 
in  jazz  theory. 

271     Radio  and  Television  Music  (2)  Tech- 
niques used  in  composing  and  arranging  music 
for  radio  and  television;  practical  writing  experi- 
ence. 

312  Composition  I  (3)  Creative  writing  in  the 
forms,  styles,  and  media  best  suited  to  the  capa- 
bilities and  needs  of  the  student.  PREREQ:  MTC 
212. 

313  Composition  II  (3)  Further  application  of 
MTC  312,  stressing  contemporary  techniques. 
PREREQ:  MTC  312. 

341  Orchestration  (3)  The  orchestra;  use  of 
instruments  individually  and  in  combination. 
PREREQ:  MTC  212. 

342  Musical  Form  (3)  The  standard  forms  of 
tonal  and  contemporary  music.  PREREQ:  MTC 
212. 

344  Counterpoint  I  (3)  The  contrapuntal  tech- 
niques of  tonal  music.  Chorale  prelude  and 
invention.  PREREQ:  MTC  212. 

345  Counterpoint  II  (3)  Advanced  contrapun- 
tal forms  including  canon  and  fugue.  PREREQ: 
MTC  344. 

346  Techniques  of  Early  20th-century  Music 
(3)  A  study  of  compositional  techniques  in  rep- 
resentative vocal  and  instrumental  works  of  the 
first  two  decades  of  the  century. 

361  Jazz  Harmony  and  Arranging  I  (3)  A  basic 
course  in  jazz/popular  harmony  and  arranging 
techniques,  including  contemporary  chord  sym- 
bols and  terminology,  and  basic  voicing  for 
brass,  reed,  and  rhythm  sections. 

362  Jazz  Harmony  and  Arranging  II  (3)  An 
intermediate  course  in  jazz/popular  harmony  and 
arranging  techniques,  including  more  advanced 
harmonic  techniques.  Writing  for  strings,  wood- 
winds, and  electronic  instruments  is  introduced. 


364     Performance  Practices  in  Contemporary 
Music  (3)  Technical  problems  of  understanding 
new  notation  (e.g.,  graphic,  proportional, 
multiphonics,  microtones,  metric  modulation, 
asymmetrical  rhythm  groupings,  prose  scores, 
etc.)  and  facility  in  performing  scores  that 
include  these  techniques.  PREREQ:  MTC  213  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

412  Composition  III  (3)  Composition  in  larger 
forms.  Open  to  composition  majors  only. 
PREREQ:  ^'CIC  313. 

413  Composition  IV  (3)  Advanced  composition 
invoNing  major  projects  in  a  contemporary 
idiom.  PREREQ:  MTC  412. 

415  Serialism  and  Atonality  (3)  Compositional 
procedures  and  theoretical  concepts  in  atonal 
and  serial  works  of  Schoenberg,  Berg,  Webem, 
Bartok,  Stravinsky,  and  more  recent  composers. 
PREREQ:  MTC  213. 

416  Jazz  Practices  (2-3)  Jazz  history,  writing, 
and  performance.  Survey  of  basic  jazz  literature; 
fundamental  techniques  in  arranging  and  impro- 
vising. PREREQ:  MTC  213  or  equivalent. 

417  Electronic  Music  (3)  Materials  and  tech- 
niques of  electronic  music  and  their  use  in  com- 
position. Laboratory  experience  in  the  composi- 
tion of  electronic  music.  PREREQ:  MTC  312  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

450     Acoustics  of  Music  (3)  The  study  of 
sound;  its  production,  transmission,  and  recep- 
tion. Musical  instruments,  the  acoustics  of 
rooms,  and  the  physical  basis  of  scales. 

♦  MTC  479     Seminar  in  Music  Theory  (3)  Spe- 
cial topics  seminar  designed  to  meet  specific 
needs  of  undergraduate  music  majors. 

♦  MTC  481     Independent  Study  (I) 

♦  MTC  482     Independent  Study  (2) 

♦  MTC  483     Independent  Snidy  (3) 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 


Department  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

David  Sprenkle,  Chairperson 

FACULTY:  Alt,  Chilcote,  Dorminy,  Friday,  Nally, 
Wagner,  Wyss 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
VOCAL  AND  CHORAL  MUSIC 

NUMBERING  SYSTEM 

Private  lessons  given  by  the  Department  of 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music  are  shown  by  the 

following  numbers,  together  with  this 

prefix: 

VOI-Voice 

♦  100     Private  instruction  for  nonmusic 
majors.  Permission  of  the  chairperson 
required  (1) 

101-402  Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area  (1) 

111-412     Private  instruction  in  major  perfor- 
mance area,  Music  Education  program  (2) 
141-442     Private  instruction  in  advanced  per- 
formance area,  B.M.  program  (3) 
471-474    Advanced  Voice  Lesson  (2)  (Elective) 
151-452     Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area,  BA.  Theatre:  Musical  Theatre  (1) 
161-462     Private  instruction  in  major  perfor- 
mance area,  B.A.  Theatre  (2) 

♦  CHO  1 12  University  Chorale  (1)  A  chorus 
presenting  a  wide  selection  of  choral  music  for 
mixed  voices.  Open  to  all  students. 

♦  CHO  211     Men's  Chorus  (1)  A  chorus  pre- 
senting the  choral  literature  for  male  voices. 
Open  to  men  in  all  curricula.  Not  regularly 
offered. 

♦  CHO  212    Women's  Chorus  (1)  A  chorus 
presenting  the  choral  literature  for  female  voices. 
Open  to  women  in  all  curricula.  Not  regularly 
offered. 

♦  CHO  311     Masterworks  Chorus  (1)  A  chorus 
presenting  oratorios,  masses,  and  the  more  diffi- 
cult mixed  chorus  literature.  Open  to  students  in 
other  curricula  through  audition. 

♦  CHO  410     Opera  Chorus  (1)  An  elective 
course  devoted  to  the  training  of  a  choral  group 
that  participates  in  opera  or  operetta  produc- 


tions. May  not  be  used  to  satisfy  choral  require- 
ments. Membership  by  audition. 

♦  CHO  41 1     Chamber  Choir  (1)  Small  group 
of  singers  specializing  in  the  performance  of 
Renaissance/Baroque,  sacred,  and  secular  litera- 
ture. Membership  by  audition. 

♦  CHO  412     Concert  Choir  (1)  Devoted  to 
acquiring  a  fine  technique  in  choral  singing 
through  the  preparation  of  programs  for  perfor- 
mance. Membership  by  audition. 

VOC  111     Madrigal  Class  (1)  A  survey  of  mad- 
rigal Uterature  through  records,  tapes,  and  class 
performance  with  emphasis  on  materials  suiuble 
for  use  in  secondary  schoob.  PREREQ:  MHL  221 
or  permission  of  the  instructor.  Offered  in  fall 
semester  of  odd-numbered  years. 

♦  VOC  112     Performance  Preparation  I  (3)  A 
course  designed  to  teach  the  student  performer 
how  to  prepare  a  dramatic  vocal  score   PREREQ: 
MTC  1 10  or  equivalent. 

♦  VOC  113     Performance  Preparation  11  (3)  A 
continuation  of  Performance  E*reparanon  1  with 
emphasis  on  advanced  literature  and  interrelative 
techniques  PREREQ  VOC  112 

VOC  227     Literature  of  the  Musical  Theater 
(3)  The  Uterature  of  the  musical  theatre  from 
Singspiel  to  Broadway  musical.  Changes  in  style 
are  observed  and  analyzed. 
VOC  311     Choral  Conducting  I  (2)  A  practical 
application  of  conducting  and  vocal  techniques 
in  choral  direction  through  practice  in  conduct- 
ing a  choral  group. 

VOC  312     Choral  Conducting  II  (2)  Continued 
development  of  the  conducting  techniques  with 
stress  on  conducting  of  polyphonic  choral  music 
and  on  the  musical  styles  of  the  various  choral 
periods.  PREREQ:  VOC  311. 
VOC  329    Art  Song  (3)  Origins  and  develop- 
ment of  the  art  song. 

VOC  411     Master  Class  (Voice):  Baroque 
Period  (1) 


VOC  412    Master  Class  (Voice):  German 
Ued  (1) 

VOC  413     Master  Class  (Voice):  French 
Melodic  (1) 

VOC  414     Master  Class  (Voice):  20th-century 
Art  Song  (1) 

VOC  415     EngUsh-ltalian  Diction  (3)  EngUsh, 
Italian,  and  Latin  diction  for  singers.  Use  of  pho- 
netics with  application  to  singing  of  selected 
songs. 

VOC  416     French-German  Diction  (3)  French 
and  German  diction  for  singers.  Use  of  phonetics 
with  application  to  singing  of  selected  songs. 

♦  VOC  421  Opera  Workshop  (2)  The  prepara- 
tion of  a  musical  production;  coaching  of  scenes, 
stage  movement,  and  costuming. 

♦  VOC  424     Musico-Dramatic  Production 
(1-3)  Major  roles  and/or  major  responsibilities  in 
extended  productions.  By  audition. 

VOC  426  Choral  Literanire  (3)  The  develop- 
ment and  performance  style  of  the  choral  reper- 
toire. 

♦  VOC  429    Special  Subjects  Seminar  (1-3) 
Significant  topics  presented  by  faculty  members 
and/or  visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  the 
specific  needs  of  undergraduate  music  majors. 

♦  VOC  436    Vocal-Choral  Music  Workshop 
(1-3)  Specialized  workshops  in  the  area  of  vocal 
and/or  choral  music.  Subject  to  be  announced  at 
the  time  of  the  offering. 

vol  191     Voice  Class  (1)  Class  instruction  in  a 
minor  performance  area.  Open  to  nonmusic 
majors  with  permission  of  the  department  chair- 
person. 

VOI  192    Voice  Class  (1)  Continuation  of  VOl 
191.  PREREQ:  VOI  191. 
VOI  413     Elective  credit  for  senior  recital. 
(1)  Available  to  music  education  seniors  only 
during  the  nonstudent  teaching  semester  by  per- 
mission of  the  department. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Academic  Services  Division 

Vivian  Nix-Early,  Assistant  Vice-President  for  Academic  Affairs 


Department  of  Educational  Services 

Ron  Jenkins,  Chaiqjeison 

PROFESSORS:  Dinniman,  Egan,  Lide 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Blair,  Butcher,  Casiato, 

Giangiulio,  Jenldns,  Kyper,  Lee,  Ryder,  Schuette,  Steinberg 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Corbett,  Grice,  Patrick 
INSTRUCTORS:  Breunig,  Guy,  McCoach 

The  Department  of  Educational  Services  is  an  amalgam  of 
University  faculty  who  have  specific  and  specialized  adminis- 
trative and/or  teaching  assignments  at  the  University.  While 
much  of  the  assigned  responsibility  is  to  facilitate  students' 
out-of-class  learning,  regular  classroom  teaching  is  still 
included.  Areas  within  the  Department  of  Educational  Ser- 
vices include  academic  and  career  advising,  athletic  and  aca- 
demic administration,  tutoring,  and  other  articulated  teach- 
ing and/or  administrative  assignments. 


The  department  administers  the  following  credit-bearing 
courses  and  special  programs. 

UNIVERSITY  101:     The  Student  and  the  University  (1)  This 
course  is  taken  as  part  of  the  New  Student  Orientation  Program, 
which  begins  in  summer.  The  academic  year  course  begins  with 
Freshman  Convocation  and  continues  through  the  first  semester  in 
small  section  classes.  Graded  on  a  pass/fail  basis,  this  course  is 
required  of  all  new  freshmen  and  all  new  transfer  students  who 
transfer  fewer  than  33  credits.  The  course  assists  students  to  obtain 
the  skills  necessary  for  successful  college  adjustment  and  for 
development  as  a  whole  person  and  a  citizen  beyond  the  college 
years.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  increasing  the  student's  awareness  of 
the  world  around  him/her. 

WCJ  100    Introduction  to  American  Culture  (3)  A  course 
designed  for  the  orientation  of  foreign  students  and  new  residents 
to  life  and  study  in  the  United  States.  A  study  of  American  higher 
education,  personal  values,  attitudes,  and  cultural  patterns.  Empha- 
sis is  on  the  diversity  of  peoples  and  lifestyles.  Not  open  to  U.S. 
citizens  for  graduation  credits. 


Military  Science  (Army  ROTC) 

West  Chester  University  students  are  eligible  to  participate  in 
the  Army  Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps  (ROTC)  Program 
through  a  formal  cross-enrollment  agreement  with  the  Wide- 
ner  University  Department  of  Military  Science.  Army  ROTC 
offers  University  students  the  opportunity  to  graduate  with  a 
college  degree  and  a  commission  in  the  United  States  Army, 
Army  National  Guard,  or  United  States  Army  Reserve.  All 
Army  ROTC  classes  are  conducted  on  the  Widener  campus. 

The  Army  ROTC  Program  consists  of  a  basic  course  taken 
during  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years,  and  an  advanced 
course  taken  during  junior  and  senior  years.  Successftil  com- 
pletion of  the  basic  course  is  required  before  placement  in 
the  advanced  course.  Students  who  participated  in  Junior 
ROTC  in  high  school  or  who  have  prior  military  service  may 
receive  placement  in  the  advanced  courses,  which  is  deter- 
mined by  the  army  professor  of  military  science.  The  basic 
course  requirement  also  may  be  satisfied  through  attendance 
at  a  six-week  Army  ROTC  Basic  Camp  at  the  end  of  the 
sophomore  or  junior  years.  Students  enrolled  in  the 
advanced  course  receive  a  stipend  of  $100  per  month.  Guar- 
anteed National  Guard  and  Reserve  Forces  options  also  are 
available. 

Nursing  students  who  complete  the  four-year  or  two-year 
program,  obtain  their  nursing  degree,  and  pass  their  Nursing 
Board  Examinations  are  commissioned  into  the  Army  Nurse 
Corps. 

Two-year  Oimited)  and  three-year  Army  ROTC  scholarships 
are  available  on  a  competitive  basis.  These  scholarships  pay 
80%  of  the  student's  tuition  or  $7,000  (whichever  is  greater) 
and  include  payment  of  certain  University  fees,  a  book  and 
school  supplies  subsidy,  and  a  $100.00  per  month  stipend 
(up  to  $1,000  per  year). 


Application  for  two-  and  three-year  Army  ROTC  scholarships 
must  be  submitted  early  in  the  spring  semester  of  the  fresh- 
man or  sophomore  year  (respectively).  Applications  for 
attendance  at  the  Army  ROTC  Basic  Camp  must  be  submit- 
ted early  in  the  spring  semester  of  the  sophomore  year. 
Military  science  students  also  participate  in  orientation  and 
field  training  activities  as  part  of  the  military  science  curricu- 
lum. These  activities  are  explorations  of  historical,  organiza- 
tional, and  functional  activities  of  the  U.S.  Army,  conducted 
in  conjunction  with  the  Army  OfiBcer  Education  Program, 
and  are  recognized  as  a  part  of  the  process  for  preparation  of 
cadets  for  commissioning. 

Activities  are  conducted  on  and  off  campus  through  tours, 
field  trips,  laboratory  sessions,  and  practical  field  applica- 
tions. Practical  field  application  activities  include  marksman- 
ship, land  navigation,  small  boat  operations,  small  units 
operations,  rappelling,  skiing,  mountaineering,  water  sur- 
vival, color  guard,  drill  team,  rifle  team,  organized  athletics, 
and  other  military  skills.  Varying  degrees  of  health  and  body 
risk  are  involved  in  these  activities.  Participants  are  required 
to  show  proof  of  personal  medical  insurance  coverage  and  to 
sign  waivers  of  liability.  The  government  of  the  United 
States,  the  state  of  Pennsylvania,  West  Chester  University,  its 
officers,  trustees,  employees,  agents,  or  students  assume  no 
liability  for  any  injury  caused  during  the  above  activities. 

Individuals  not  registered  in  military  science  courses  may 
participate  in  these  activities  if  they  meet  the  following  addi- 
tional prerequisities:  (1)  be  a  bona  fide  student,  faculty, 
administrator,  or  staff  member  of  the  University,  (2)  have 
the  prerequisite  level  of  physical  conditioning,  and  (3)  have 
permission  from  the  program  director. 

For  further  information  on  scholarship  and  career  opportuni- 
ties, contact  the  professor  of  military  science,  Widener  Uni- 
versity, Chester,  PA  19013  (215)  876-2446. 


Air  Force  ROTC 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MILITARY  SCIENCE 

Symbol:  MSI 

101  Introduction  to  ROTC  I  (IV2)  This  introduc- 
tory course  is  a  study  of  American  military  history 
from  the  earliest  times  to  present.  Other  topics 
include  the  organization  and  history  of  ROTC;  the 
organization  of  the  Army,  and  its  military  customs, 
traditions,  and  courtesies;  the  role  of  the  Army  in 
national  security,  ethics,  and  emphasis  on  the  eval- 
uation of  mihtary  leadership  as  viewed  from  the 
knowledge  of  the  historically  tested  principles  of 
war  PREREQ:  Full-time  undergraduate  student. 

102  Fundamenuls  of  Leadership  (IV2)  Contin- 
ued study  of  the  organization  and  history  of  ROTC 
and  the  evolution  of  military  leadership  as  reviewed 
from  the  knowledge  of  the  historically  tested  prin- 
ciples of  war  PREREQ:  Full-time  undergraduate 
student. 

201     Methods  of  Instruction  (Vj)  Practical 
approach  to  mediods  and  techniques  of  instruction. 


Includes  characteristics  and  principles  of  instruc- 
tion, instructor  preparation,  speech  techniques,  use 
of  instructional  aids,  and  instruction  evaluation 
through  student  presentations.  Offered  first  half  of 
semester.  PREREQ:  MSI  101  and  MSI  102,  or  per- 
mission of  instructor  of  mihtary  science. 
202     Theory  and  Dynamics  of  the  Organization 
(IV2)  Introductory  course  covering  broad  concepts 
of  mihtary  science,  including  branches  and  mission, 
the  structure  and  functions  of  the  defense  establish- 
ment, and  the  military  as  a  profession.  PREREQ: 
MSI  101,  102,  and  201,  or  permission  of  instructor 
of  military  science. 

301-302    Contemporary  Military  Principles  and 
Group  Dynamics  (3)  (3)  A  study  of  leadership  and 
management  principles  and  their  universality  in  the 
mihtary-civilian  environment.  Examination  of  tradi- 
tional and  behavioral  management  concepts,  struc- 
ture, and  the  interaction  of  organizations  and  sub- 
systems. Practical  approach  to  methods  and 
techniques  of  communication  and  instruction. 


PREREQ:  Army  ROTC  advanced  course  standing  or 
permission  of  instructor  of  military  science. 
401-402     Military  Organization  and  Management 
(2)  (2)  A  continued  study  of  leadership  and  man- 
agement, emphasizing  apphcations  in  military  oper- 
ations, an  analysis  of  staff  organizations  and  proce- 
dures, resources  allocations,  the  theory  and 
apphcation  of  miUtary  law,  examination  of  the  role 
of  the  military  structure  in  the  execution  of 
national  security  policy,  and  case  study  investiga- 
tions of  the  duties,  obligations,  and  responsibilities 
of  a  commissioned  officer.  PREREQ:  Army  ROTC 
advanced  course  standing  or  permission  of  instruc- 
tor of  mihtary  science. 

Additional  Requirements.  Students  enrolled  in  the 
Army  ROTC  Program  are  required  to  complete 
written  communications,  human  behavior,  math 
reasoning,  computer  literacy,  and  mihtary  history 
courses  prior  to  commissioning.  Scholarship  stu- 
dents are  required  to  take  one  semester  of  a  foreign 
language. 


Air  Force  ROTC 

West  Chester  University  students  are  eligible  to  participate  in 
the  Air  Force  Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps  (AFROTC) 
through  a  cross-enrollment  agreement  with  Saint  Joseph's  Uni- 
versity. All  aerospace  studies  courses  will  be  held  on  the  Saint 
Joseph's  campus.  The  AFROTC  program  enables  a  college  stu- 
dent to  earn  a  commission  as  an  Air  Force  officer  while  concur- 
rently satisfying  requirements  for  his  or  her  baccalaureate 
degree. 

The  program  of  aerospace  studies  at  Saint  Joseph's  University 
offers  both  two-year  and  four-year  curricula  leading  to  a  com- 
mission as  a  second  lieutenant  in  the  Air  Force.  In  the  four- 
year  curriculum,  a  student  takes  the  General  Mihtary  Course 
(CMC)  during  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years,  attends  a 
four-week  summer  training  program,  and  then  takes  the  Profes- 
sional Officer  Course  (POO  in  the  junior  and  senior  years.  A 
student  is  under  no  contractual  obligation  to  the  Air  Force 
until  entering  the  POC  or  accepting  an  Air  Force  scholarship. 
In  the  two-year  curriculum,  a  student  attends  a  six-week  sum- 
mer training  program  and  then  enters  the  POC  in  the  junior 
year.  Students  opting  for  the  two-year  curriculum  must  apply 
for  acceptance  to  the  POC  by  the  end  of  the  first  semester  or 
quarter  of  their  sophomore  year. 


The  subject  matter  of  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years  is 
developed  from  a  historical  perspective  and  focuses  on  the 
scope,  structure,  and  history  of  military  power  with  the  empha- 
sis on  the  development  of  air  power.  During  the  junior  and 
senior  years,  the  curriculum  concentrates  on  the  concepts  and 
practices  of  leadership  and  management,  and  the  role  of 
national  security  forces  in  contemporary  American  society. 

In  addition  to  the  academic  portion  of  the  curricula,  each  stu- 
dent participates  in  an  hour-and-a-half  leadership  laboratory 
each  week.  During  this  period,  the  day-to-day  skills  and  work- 
ing environment  of  the  Air  Force  are  discussed  and  explained. 
The  leadership  lab  uses  a  student  organization  that  allows  stu- 
dents to  practice  leadership  and  management  techniques. 

Air  Force  ROTC  offers  2-,  Vh-,  3-,  and  3V2-year  scholarships 
on  a  competitive  basis  to  qualified  applicants.  All  scholarships 
cover  tuition,  lab  fees,  reimbursement  for  books,  plus  a  $100 
tax-free  monthly  stipend.  All  members  of  the  POC,  regardless 
of  scholarship  status,  receive  the  $100  tax-free  monthly  sti- 
pend. 

For  further  information  on  the  cross-enrollment  program, 
scholarships,  and  career  opportunities,  contact  the  professor  of 
aerospace  studies,  AFROTC  Det  750,  Saint  Joseph's  University, 
Philadelphia,  PA  19131  (215)  660-1190. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
AEROSPACE  STUDIES 

Symbol:  AER 

101  Air  Force  Today  I  (1)  Introductory  course 
exploring  the  mihtary  as  a  profession,  including 
dviUan  control  of  the  U.S.  Armed  Forces,  function 
and  organization  of  the  U.S.  Air  Force,  and  organi- 
zation and  operation  of  U.S.  strategic  offensive 
forces. 

102  Air  Force  Today  II  (1)  Introductory  course 
exploring  U.S.  general  purpose  and  defensive  forces 
including  mission  and  organization  of  the  major 
U.S.  Air  Force  Commands  and  separate  operating 
agencies,  major  functions,  and  conduct  of  joint  ser- 
vice military  operations.  Discusses  air  defense, 
detection  systems,  close  air  support,  and  air  superi- 
ority. 

201    Development  of  Air  Power  1  (1)  A  study  of 
the  development  of  aerospace  power  from  balloons 


and  dirigibles  through  the  employment  of  U.S.  air 
power  in  World  War  II.  The  course  includes  the 
mihtary  theory  of  aerospace  power  employment. 

202    Development  of  Air  Power  II  (1)  A  continua- 
tion course  studying  the  employment  of  U.S.  air 
power  in  the  Korean  confhct,  reUef  missions  and 
civic  action  programs  in  the  late  1960's,  and  the 
war  in  Southeast  Asia.  Research  is  conducted  into 
the  mihtary  theory  of  aerospace  force  employment. 

311  Management  and  Leadership  I  (IV2)  A  snjdy 
of  managerial  theory,  concepts,  and  techniques  of 
decision  making,  and  the  basic  functions  of  man- 
agement with  particular  emphasis  on  apphcations 
for  Air  Force  officers. 

312  Management  and  Leadership  II  (IVi)  An 
interdisciplinary  approach  to  leadership,  which 
includes  the  study  of  human  behavior  and  relation- 
ships, motivation,  professional  ethics,  and  leader- 


ship styles.  Communication  skills  are  stressed 
through  written  and  oral  assignments. 

431  National  Security  Forces  I  (IVi)  A  focus  on 
the  Armed  Forces  as  an  integral  and  inseparable 
element  of  society.  Primary  emphasis  is  placed  on 
the  overall  national  security  process  and  the  factors 
that  comprise  it.  The  impact  of  a  nation's  military, 
economic,  psychological,  and  technical  components 
on  national  security  pohcy  is  examined.  Other  top- 
ics include  major  geopohtical  hotspots  and  the  ori- 
gin of  arras  races. 

432  National  Security  Forces  II  (IV2)  A  continu- 
ation course  studying  civihan-mihtary  relations. 
Topics  include  civilian  control  of  the  military,  con- 
fhct control,  military  professionahsm,  and  military 
justice.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  reciprocal 
responsibihties  of  civilians  and  the  mihtary  in  a 
democratic  society. 


Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 

Robert  P.  Casey,  Governor 

State  System  of  Higher  Education 

James  H.  McCormick,  Chancellor 


F.  Eugene  Dixon,  Jr.,  Chair 
Julia  B.  Ansill,  Vice-Chair 
Muriel  Berman 
Donald  Carroll,  Jr. 
Jefifrey  W.  Coy 
Rebecca  F.  Gross 
IrvinJ.  Hartman,  Jr. 


Board  of  Governors 

James  A.  Hughes 

James  L.  Larson,  Vice-Chair 

F.  Joseph  Loeper 

Floyd  M.  Mains 

Janice  L.  Michaud 

Joseph  M.  Nespoli 

R.  David  Myers 


Robert  J.  0'Hara,Jr. 
Philip  D.  Rowe,  Jr. 
J  ere  W.  Schuler 
Patrick  J.  Stapleton 
Julius  Uehlein 
Stephen  E.  Whitby 


Bernard  J.  Carrozza,  Chair Newtown  Square 

John  F.  Unruh,  Vice-Chair Media 

Johanna  K.  Havlick,  Secretary West  Chester 

Martha  Carson-Gentry West  Chester 

Alice  Chambers West  Chester 

Anthony  D'Angelo West  Chester 


West  Chester  University  Council  of  Trustees 

James  H.  McCormick,  Ex  OEBcio 

Barry  Dozor Broomall 

Edward  Feierstein Merion  Station 

William  E.  Hughes West  Chester 

J.  Curtis  Joyner West  Chester 

James  L.  Larson Devon 


Board  of  Directors 
West  Chester  University  Foundation 


Dr.  Alexander  Antonowich,  Executive  Director 

Dr.  Donald  J.  Diffenbaugh  34,  President 

Charles  E.  Swope,  Vice  President 

Mrs.  Emilie  K.  Asplundh  '27,  Secretary 

David  L.  Peirce,  Treasurer 

William  H.  Boucher 

Mrs.  Guy  Fry 


Mrs.  John  B.  Hannum 
James  Latta,  Jr. 
W  E.  MuUestein 
Whitman  A.  Rice  '39 
Mrs.  Theodore  O.  Rogers 
Leslie  B.  Schramm 


WCU  Alumni  Association  Board  of  Directors 


Dorothy  A.  Avington 
Edward  C.  Bitner 
Gerald  W  Brittain 
Rose  P.  Conley 
Linda  HoEFmann-Delack 
Janice  W  Etshied 
Edward  T.  Feierstein 
Brian  H.  Fillipo,  M.D. 
Harry  Gilbert 


Louise  Santo  Giunta 
Jamie  W.  Goncharoff 
Johanna  K.  Havlick 
Karl  Helicher 
Rosemary  L.  Hill 
Mildred  K.  Kahley 
Karl  A.  Kaminski 
Herbert  Lee 
Roben  L.  McCardell 


Richard  D.  Merion 
Teri  Flounders  Mosteller 
John  F.  Murphy 
Edward  C.  Orwell 
Dr.  Luther  B.  Sowers 
Paul  Thome,  Jr. 
Joseph  P.  Wade,  Jr. 
Ruthann  W.  Waldie 
Glenn  L.  Yacono 


Administration 


President Dr.  Madeleine  Wing  Adler 

Executive  Assistant  to  the  President Mr.  Lawrence  A.  Dowdy 

Director,  Research  and  Planning    Dr.  Martin  J.  Higgins 

Director,  Affirmative  Action Dr.  Franklin  Simpson 

Vice  President  for  Advancement  (Interim)     Mrs.  Joanne  L.  Matika 

Director,  University  Relations Mrs.  Joanne  L.  Matika 

Director,  Development  and  Alumni  Relations Ms.  Sheryl  M.  Brust 

Director,  Annual  Fund    Ms.  Jan  Buzbee 

Director,  Alumni  Relations Vacant 

Director,  Publications Ms.  Cynthia  A.  Bednar 

Communications  Editor    Mr.  Nevin  E.  Morris 

Director,  News  and  Communications  Services Ms.  Mary  Anderson 

Director,  Sports  Information Mr.  Thomas  Di  Camillo 

Manager,  Graphics  and  Printing    Mr.  W  Tyson  Cooper 

Provost  and  Vice  President  for  Academic  Affairs    Dr.  Stanley  J.  Yarosewick 

Dean,  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences    Dr.  Richard  H.  Wells 

Associate  Dean,  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences Dr.  Jennie  Skerl 

Dean,  School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs Dr.  Christopher  M.  Fiorentino 

Dean,  School  of  Education Dr.  Michael  L.  Hanes 

Dean,  School  of  Health  Sciences  (Interim) Dr.  Roger  W.  Mustalish 

Dean,  School  of  Music  (Interim) Dr.  SterUng  E.  Murray 

Associate  Provost Dr.  Francine  G.  McNairy 

Director,  Admissions     Ms.  Marsha  L.  Haug 

Registrar Mr.  Roben  A.  Kubat 

Director,  Financial  Aid Mr.  Dana  C.  Parker 

Associate  Vice  President  for  Information  Services     Mr.  Wesley  Fasnacht 

Executive  Director,  Academic  Computing  Services Mr.  Adel  Baramani 

Director,  Administrative  Computing Mr.  Fran  DiSanti 

Executive  Director,  Computing  Facilities Dr.  Thomas  A.  Egan 

Dean,  Graduate  Studies  and  Sponsored  Research Dr.  Anne  S.  Williams 

Assistant  Dean,  Graduate  Studies  (Interim)    Dr.  Douglas  P.  McConatha 

Dean,  University  College Dr.  Eugene  J.  Kray 

Assistant  Dean,  University  College Ms.  Rhoda  Todd 

Assistant  Vice  President  for  Academic  ASairs Dr.  Vivian  Nix-Early 

Director,  Library  Services     Mr.  Frank  Q.  Helms 

Director,  Academic  Advising  Center Mr.  Theodore  H.  Butcher 

Director,  Academic  Development  Program Dr.  Peter  Kyper 

Vice  President  for  Administrative  and  Fiscal  Affairs Mr.  Joseph  D.  Hamel 

Director,  Personnel     Mr.  William  H.  Schweitzer 

Executive  Director,  Facilities  Administration Mr.  Stephen  Quigley 

Director,  Physical  Plant Mr.  Moshen  Malek 

Director,  Suppon  Services Mr.  Ro>'ston  Gathings 

Director,  Facilities  Planning Mr.  Terry  Gebhard 

Director,  Environmental  Health  and  Safety Ms.  Gail  Fellows 

Director,  Space  Management  and  Calendar Ms.  Elaine  Hughes 

Director,  Public  Safety    Mr.  Michael  Bicking 

Director,  Fiscal  Affairs     Ms.  Amy  Winston 

Director,  University  Services Mr.  William  Peoples 

Chief  Accountant Mr.  John  Taylor 

Bursar Ms.  Frances  H.  Riesmeyer 

Director,  Budget  (Interim) Mr.  Richard  Griffing 

Internal  Auditor    Mr.  Richard  Griffing 

Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs  (Interim)    Dr.  Matthew  Bricketto 

Assistant  Vice  President  for  Student  ASairs  (Interim) Ms.  Diane  DeVestem 

Associate  Dean  (Interim),  Director,  Residence  Life  and  Housing Mr.  Thomas  Puree 

Director,  Alcohol  and  Drug  Education    Ms.  Jacqueline  Hodes 

Director,  Athletics  (Interim) Dr.  William  E.  Lide 

Director,  Career  Development  Center '. Ms.  Elizabeth  Giangiulio 

Director,  Children's  Center     Ms.  Sandra  Jones 

Director,  Counseling  and  Psychological  Services  Department Dr.  Thomas  Spierling 

Director,  Greek  Life  and  Student  Organizations ' Mr.  Charles  Warner 

Director,  Health  Center Dr.  Joseph  Battaglia 

Director,  Minority  Student  Affairs    Mr.  Jerome  Hutson 

Director,  Off-Campus  and  Commuter  Life Mrs.  Margaret  Vanim 

Director,  Orientation  and  Parent  Relations Mr.  Philip  Tripp 

Director,  Recreational  Services    Dr.  Stephen  Gambino 

Director,  Student  Standards,  Assistant  to  the  Dean  (Interim)    Mrs.  Margaret  Tripp 

Director,  Sykes  Union Mr.  David  Timmann 

Director,  Women's  Center Ms.  Robin  Garrett 


Faculty 


Faculty 

Spring  1993 


MADELEINE  WING  ADLER  (1992)  President 
BA..  Nonhwestem  University,  MA.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wisconsin 

STANLEY  J.  YAROSEWICK  (1969)  Provost  and 
Vice  President  for  Academic  Affairs 
B.S.,  University  of  New  Hampshire;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
Clarkson  College  of  Technology 

JOSEPH  D.  HAMEL  (1985)  Vice  President  for 

Administrative  and  Fiscal  Affairs 

B.B.A.,  LeMoyne  College;  M,B.A.,  Syracuse 

University 

MATTHEWJ.  BRICKETTO  (1986)  Interim  Vice 
President  for  Student  Affairs 
B.S.,  Seton  Hall  University;  M.Ed.,  Ohio 
University;  M.BA.,  Fairleigh  Dickinson 
University,  Ed.D.,  Rutgers  — The  State  University 

JOANNE  L.  MATIKA  (1985)  Interim  Vice 
President  for  Advancement 


BA.,  MA.,  Kent  State  University 

RICHARD  H.  WELLS  (1988)  Dean.  College  of 
Arts  and  Sciences 

BA.,  Wilham  Penn  College;  MA.,  University  of 
Arkansas;  Ph.D.,  Texas  A  &  M  University 

CHRISTOPHER  M.  FIORENTINO  (1985)  Dean, 
School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 
BA.,  MA,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

MICHAEL  L.  HANES  (1987)  Dean.  School  of 

Education 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana  University 

ROGER  W  MUSTALISH  (1978)  Interim  Dean, 

School  of  Health  Sciences 

AB.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.S.,  Michigan 

State  University;  M.P.H.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Minnesota 


STERLING  E.  MURRAY  (1972)  Interim  Dean, 

School  of  Music 

B.Mus.,  University  of  Maryland;  A.M.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Michigan 

FRANCINE  G.  McNAlRY  (1988)  Associate 

Provost 

BA.,  M.S.W,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

WESLEY  FASNACHT  (1967)  Associate  Vice 

President  for  Information  Services 

B.S.,  Millersville  University;  B.S.,  State  University 

of  New  York  at  Buffalo 

ANNE  S.  WILLL\MS  (1991)  Dean,  Graduate 

Studies  and  Sponsored  Research 

BA,  MA.,  University  of  Montana;  Ph.D., 

Cornell  University 

EUGENE  J.  KRAY  (1985)  Dean.  University 

College 

B.S.,  St.  Peter's  College;  M.BA.,  Seton  Hall 

University;  Ed.D.,  Nova  University 


DENNIS  M.  ADAMS  (1992)  Associate  Professor 
of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
BA.,  California  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wisconsin 

THOMAS  J.  AHLBORN  (1967)  Associate 

Professor  of  Computer  Science 

B.S.,  California  University;  M.A.,  Kent  State 

University 

NASEER  AHMAD  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  D.Sc,  Aligarh  University 

SYLVIA  MOSS  AHRAMJIAN  (1976)  Associate 
Professor  of  Instrumental  Music 
B.Mus.,  Juilliard  School  of  Music;  M.Mus., 
Indiana  University,  Bloomington 

SHIRLEY  T  AUFERIS  (1968)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Keyboard  Music;  Associate  Professor 
A.RC.T,  Royal  Conservatory  of  Music  of 
Toronto;  Artist,  Diploma,  University  of  Toronto; 
M.Mus.,  Indiana  University 

LOIS  W  AU  (1966)  Chairperson,  Department  of 
Vocal  and  Choral  Music;  Associate  Professor  of 
Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

B.S.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania;  B.Mus., 
M.Mus.,  University  of  Michigan 

CHRISTIAN  K  AWUiAH  (1989)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

B.A,  University  of  Ghana;  M.A.,  University  of 
Guelph;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Alberta 

JOHN  H.  BAKER  (1974)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Art 

BA,  West  Chester  University 

LYNDA  A.  BALOCHE  (1989)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

BA  ,  Trenton  State  College;  Ed.D.,  Temple 

University 

scon  BALTHAZAR  (1991)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Music  History 

BA,  Amherst  College;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 


PAUL  A  BANYACSKI  (1965)  Associate  Professor 

of  Philosophy 

BA.,  Eastern  College 

JUDITH  BARON  (1974)  Psychologist,  Counseling 
Center,  Professor 

BA,  MA,  University  of  Michigan;  Ph.D.,  York 
University,  Toronto 

EDWARD  A  BARROW  (1956)  Professor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.Mus.,  Eastman  School  of  Music; 
Ph.D.,  West  Virginia  University 

ROGER  BARTH  (1985)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

BA,  LaSalle;  MA,  Ph.D.,  Johns  Hopkins 

University 

CHARLOTTE  E.  BARTLETT  (1972)  Associate 
Professor  of  Social  Work 
BA,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.S.S.,  Bryn 
Mawr  College 

CHARLES  R.  BAUERLEIN  (1988)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

BA.,  Loyola  University  of  the  South;  MA., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

MARSHALL  J.  BECKER  (1968)  Professor  of 

Anthropology 

BA,  MA.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ROBERT  M.  BEDFORD  (1966)  Associate 
Professor  of  Keyboard  Music 
B.Mus.,  M.S.,  The  Juilliard  School;  D.M.A., 
Catholic  University  of  America 

DENA  G.  BEEGHLY  (1992)  Asszstanf  Professor  of 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B.S.,  S.  Cormecticut  State  University;  M.Ed., 
Ed.D.,  University  of  Georgia 

SHARON  BEGAN  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  M.S.,  East  Tennessee 

State  University;  Ph.D.,  Southern  IlUnois 

University  at  Carbondale 


CAROL  A.  BELMAIN  (1971)  Chairperson,  Music 
Education,  Professor  of  Music  Education 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Ithaca  College;  D.MA,  Temple 
University 

JOHN  T.  BENESKI  (1986)  Associate  Professor  of 

Biology 

AA,  Southwestern  College;  BA,  MA., 

Humboldt  State  University;  Ph.D.,  Washington 

State  University 

CYNTHIA  D.  BENZING  (1988)  Associate 
Professor  of  Economics 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.BA., 
Ph.D.,  Drexel  University 

HELEN  A.  BERGER  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Anthropology  and  Sociology 
B.A.,  Brooklyn  College;  MA.,  Sussex  University 
(England);  Ph.D.,  New  York  University 

JAY  H.  BERKOWITZ  (1969)  Associate  Professor 

of  Theatre  Arts 

B.S.,  MA.,  Temple  University 

ROBERT  W  BERNHARDT  (1965)  Associate 

Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Syracuse  University 

F.  ROBERT  BIELSKl  (1961)  Associate  Professor 

of  Geography 

B.S.,  Indiana  State  University;  MA.,  University  of 

Illinois 

TIMOTHY  V.  BLAIR  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Keyboard  Music 

B.  Mus.,  Susquehanna  University,  The  New 
England  Conservatory  of  Music;  D.MA., 
Catholic  University  of  America 

WALTER  R.  BLAIR  (1966)  Associate  Professor, 

School  of  Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Ed.,  Temple 

University 

RICHARD  E.  BLAKE  (1975)  Assistant  Professor 

of  An 

B.FA.,  Tyler  School  of  Fine  Arts 


Faculty 


ARVIDJ.  BLOOM  (1988)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Psychology 

BA..  Wesleyan  University,  M.S..  Ph.D.,  Colorado 

State  University 

MARIA  R.  BOES  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

History 

BA,  MA.,  Hunter  College;  Ph.D.,  City 

University  of  New  York 

GAIL  G.  K  BOLLLN  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
BA.,  St.  Bonaventure  University;  MA,  Purdue 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

DAVID  L.  BOLTON  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
BA,  Seminar  Marionhoehe  (W.  Germany);  MA, 
Andrews  University,  Ph.D.,  Florida  State 
Universit\' 

DALE  R.  BONSALL  (1969)  Associate  Professor  of 
Physical  Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Ed.,  Western 
Maryland  College 

ROGER  E.  BOVE  (1984)  Associate  Professor  of 

Economics 

BA.,  Harvard  College;  MA,  Ph  D.,  Harvard 

University 

BETTT  FINCH  BOYLE  (1972)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Health,  Assistant  Professor 

B.S.,  Ball  State  University,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 

University 

ERMINIO  BRAIDOm  (1978)  Associate  Professor 

of  Foreign  Languages 

B.A..  Youngstown  State  University;  MA, 

Middlebury  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

RICHARD  G.  BRANTON  (1962)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  M.S.,  University  of 

Delaware;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

LLNDA  S.  BREUNIG  (1978)  Instructor, 

Educational  Services 

B.S.,  MA.,  West  Chester  University 

STEVEN  L.  BROITMAN  (1987)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Stony 
Brook;  M.Ed.,  University  of  Massachusetts;  M.D., 
Princeton  University;  Ph.D..  Princeton  University 

MICHAEL  W.  BROOKS  (1971)  Professor  of 

English 

BA.,  Antioch  College;  MA,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Toronto 

BARBARA  S.  BROWN  (1983)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  University  of  Permsylvania;  M.S.,  Oxford 

University  (U.K.);  M.S.N.,  University  of 

Penns>'lvania 

DEBORAH  S.  BROWN  (1992)  Associate  Professor 

of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  MA,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Delaware 

DA\TD  F.  BROWN  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B.S.,  M.S..  Northern  Illinois  University,  Ed.D., 
University  of  Tennessee 

EM^L^  LEE  BROWN  (1969)  Associate  Professor 

of  Library  Services 

A.B.,  Fairmont  State  College;  M.S.L.S.,  Drexel 

University 


FRANCELINE  H.  BROWN  (1984)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Library  Services 

BA,  linderwood  College;  M.S.L.S.,  Drexel 

University 

ROGER  J.  BROWN  (1968)  i4ssistant  Professor  of 

Foreign  Languages 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University 

JOSEPH  BROWNE  (1966)  Professor  of  English 
Diplome  En  Philosophie,  St.  Jerome's  College 
(University  of  Ottawa);  B.S.,  St.  Joseph's 
University  (Pa);  MA,  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

CHRISTOPHER  BUCKLEY  (1987)  Associate 

Professor  of  English 

BA,  St.  Mary's  College  of  California;  MA,  San 

Diego  State  University,  M.FA,  University  of 

Califomia-lrvine 

H.JAMES  BURGWYN  (1968)  Professor  of 

History 

BA,  Swarthmore  College;  MA,  University  of 

Pennsylvania;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

WILUAM  F.  BURNS  (1964)  Associate  Professor 
of  Political  Science 

BA,  Allegheny  College,  MA,  Case  Western 
Reserve  University 

MARY  ANNE  BURNS-DUFFY  (1969)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Library  Services 

A.B.,  Immaculata  College;  M  S.L.S.,  Drexel 

University 

A  WAYNE  BURTON  (1965)  Associate  Professor 
of  Political  Science 

BA,  Brigham  Young  University,  MA,  University 
of  Pennsylvania 

J.  BRIAN  BURTON  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 
Music  Education 

B.M.,  West  Texas  State  University  MA,  Western 
State  College  of  Colorado;  D.M.E.,  University  of 
Southern  Mississippi 

RICHARD  M.  BUSCH  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Geology 

AB.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College;  MA, 

Temple  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 

THEODORE  H.  BUTCHER  (1970)  Director, 
Academic  Advising  Center,  Associate  Professor, 
Educational  Services 

BA,  Lincoln  University,  M.BA,  Drexel 
University.  MS  .  West  Chester  University 

ROBERT  E.  BYTNAR  (1975)  Associate  Professor 

of  Theatre  Arts 

B.S.  Ed.,  California  University.  MA,  West 

Virginia  University,  M.FA,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 

LYNN  CARSON  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Health 

BA,  Neumann  College;  M.S.,  St.  Josephs 

University,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

DIANE  O.  CASAGRANDE  (1968)  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 
AB.,  Wayne  State  University  MA,  Temple 
University,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

LOUIS  A  CASCL«"0  (1963)  Associate  Professor 

of  Earth  Sciences 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  CoUege  (Pa.);  M.S.,  Villanova 

University 

CONRAD  E.  CHAUCK  (1962)  Psychologist, 
Counseling  Center,  Professor 
BA,  Pennsylvania  Military  College;  MA, 
Villanova  University,  Ed.D.,  Nova  University 


KATHRYN  S.  CHILCOTE  (1989)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 
BA,  MM.,  University  of  the  Pacific;  D.MA, 
University  of  Oregon 

K.  ELEANOR  CHRISTENSEN  (1972)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading;  [^lessor 

BA,  MA,  Michigan  State  University  Ph.D., 
University  of  Delaware 

HUNG  M.  CHU  (1976)  Professor  of  Management 
B.S.,  St. Joseph's  College  (Ind);  MBA, 
Northern  Illinois  University;  Ph  D.,  Louisiana 
State  University 

MELISSA  CICHOWICZ  (1986)  Associate 

Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Maryland 

BETHANN  CINELU  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of 

Health 

B.S.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.Ed., 

Temple  University;  D.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

GEORGE  S.  CLAGHORN  (1963)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Philosophy,  Professor 
BA.,  University  of  Chattanooga;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

ANN  COGHLAN-STOWE  (1984)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  M.S.N.,  University  of  Pennsylvania; 
Diploma  in  Nursing,  Thomas  Jefferson  University 

KATHERINE  A  CONROY  (1983)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.,  Rutgers-The  State  University;  M.S.,  Boston 

University 

IDNA  CORBETT  (1992)  .4isistant  Professor  of 

Educational  Services 

BA,  Goshen  College;  MA,  Michigan  State 

University 

JON  A  COWEN  (1967)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Sociology 

BA,  University  of  Massachusetts;  AM., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

MARY  E.  CRAWFORD  (1978)  Professor  of 
Psychology  and  Women 's  Studies 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  MA,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Delaware 

W  STEPHEN  CRODDY  (1969)  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

BA,  University  of  Southern  California;  MA, 

Temple  University,  Ph.D.,  Brown  University 

DAVID  CULLEN  (1993)  Instructor  of  Instrumental 

Music 

B.M.,  Hartford  School  of  Music 

GEORGANN  CULLEN  (1964)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Biology,  Associate 

Professor 

B.S.,  MA,  Kent  State  University 

DANIEL  DARIGAN  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Northern  Illinois  University,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Oregon 

LAWRENCE  R.  DAVIDSON  (1989)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  History,  Assistant 

Professor 

BA,  Rutgers  — The  State  University;  MA, 

Georgetown  University,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Alberta 

KEVIN  W  DEAN  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Communication  Studies 

B.S.,  Bowling  Green  University  MA.,  Miami 

University  of  Ohio;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Maryland 


Faculty 


HARRY  H.  DEISCHER  (1966)  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
B.S.,  M.A.,  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

PHE.IP  M.  DeMOSS  (1972)  Chairperson. 

Department  of  Economics:  Professor 

BA.,  Park  College;  M.A..  Ph  D  ,  Kansas  State 

University 

DARLENE  DeSANTlS  (1987)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Psychology 

A.B.,  Vassar  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Connecticut 

KATHLEEN  DEVLIN-KELLY  (1976)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Nursing;  Assistant 

Professor 

B.S.N. ,  Georgetown  University;  M.S.N.,  Boston 

University 

ANDREW  E.  DINNIMAN  (1972)  Professor  of 

Educational  Services 

B.A.,  University  of  Connecticut;  M.A.,  University 

of  Maryland;  Ed.D.,  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

W  LARRY  DORMINY  (1972)  Associate  Pwfessor 

of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

B.Mus., Jacksonville  University;  MM.,  Florida 

State  University;  D.M.,  Indiana  University 

RAYMOND  A.  DOYLE  (1963)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  History:  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.S.,  West  Chester  University 

MARTHA  DROBNAK  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
A.B.,  Grove  City  College;  M.Ed.,  University  of 
Pittsburgh;  Ed.D.,  Nova  University 

PHILLIP  K  DUNCAN  (1983)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Psychology;  Professor 
of  Psychology 

BA.,  Wittenberg  University,  MA.,  Western 
Michigan  University  Ph.D.,  University  of  Florida 

A.  SCOTT  DUNLAP  (1967)  Associate  Professor  of 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
BA..  King's  College  (N.Y.);  M.Div.,  Eastern 
Baptist  Theological  Seminary 

KEVIN  C.  DUNLEAVY  (1979)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Economics 

BA.,  University  of  Delaware;  Ph.D.,  Duke 

University 

MARC  L.  DURAND  (1968)  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  Holy  Cross  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

New  Hampshire 

ANNE  DZAMBA  (1968)  Professor  of  History  and 

Women 's  Studies 

B.A.,  Swarthmore  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Delaware 

JOHN  L.  EBERHART  (1969)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Communicative  Disorders;  Assistant 

Professor 

B.S.,  Bloomsburg  University;  M.A.,  Syracuse 

University 

T.  OBINKARAM  ECHEWA  (1986)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

B.S.,  University  of  Notre  Dame;  M.S.,  Columbia 
University;  M.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania; 
Ph.D.,  S>Tacuse  University 


HOWARD  EDELMAN  (1981)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Mathematical  Sciences 

B.Ch.E.,  City  University  of  New  York;  M.S.,  C.S., 
University  of  Delaware 

JAMES  EGAN  (1989)  Assistanf  Professor  of 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ed.D.,  Syracuse  University 

THOMAS  EGAN  (1968)  Executive  Director  of 

Computing  Facilities;  Professor  of  Educational 

Services 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University;  Ed.D., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

JOHN  E.  EHLEITER  (1969)  Associate  Professor  of 

Geology 

A.B.,  MA.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College;  MA., 

Wesleyan  University;  D.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

RALPH  A.  EISENST^DT  (1965)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
BA.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.A, 
University  of  Illinois 

DAVID  S.  ELDREDGE  (1967)  Associate  Professor 

of  Political  Science 

BA..  Yale  University,  MA.T.,  CA.S.,  Harvard 

University 

MAIUANNE  ELEUTERIO  (1973)  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  Michigan  State  University  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Delaware 

PAUL  R.  EMMONS  (1985)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Library  Services 

B.  Mus.,  Lawrence  University  of  Wisconsin; 
M.M.,  M.S.,  University  of  Illinois 

RICHARD  G.  EPSTEIN  (1991)  Professor  of 

Mathematical  Sciences 

BA.,  George  Washington  University  M.S.E., 

University  of  Pennsylvania;  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

JORGE  ESCORCL\  (1968)  Associate  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

Lie,  Universidad  Pedagogica  del  Caribe;  MA., 
Boston  University 

CELIA  ESPLUGAS  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

BA.,  Teacher's  College,  Argentina;  M.Ed., 
Bowling  Green  State  University,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Toledo 

JAMES  D.  FABREY  (1975)  Director  of  Academic 
Computing;  Professor  of  Mathematics 
AB.,  Cornell  University;  Ph.D.,  Massachusetts 
Institute  of  Technology 

G.  'WINFIELD  FAIRCHILD  (1983)  Associate 
Professor  of  Biology 

BA.,  Hamilton  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Michigan 

JAMES  S.  FALCONE  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Delaware 

GEORGE  FASIC  (1988)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Geography  and  Planning 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  M.S.. 
Columbia  University 

JOHN  J.  FENTON  (1980)  Professor  of  Chemistry 
BA,  Catholic  University  of  America;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Minnesota 


ROSE  L.  FICKNER  (1979)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Nursing 

Diploma,  Hazleton  State  General  Hospital  School 

of  Nursing;  B.S.,  West  Chester  University; 

M.S.N. ,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

JUDITH  S.  FINKEL  (1968)  Associate  Professor  of 
Special  Education 

B.S.,  Temple  University,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 
University  Ph.D.,  Union  Graduate  School 

CHRISTOPHER  M.  FIORENTINO  (1985) 
Associate  Professor  of  Economics 
BA,  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

FRANK  E.  FISH  (1980)  Professor  of  Biology 
BA.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Oswego; 
M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Michigan  State  University 

JOSEPH  T  FISHER  (1968)  Associate  Professor  of 

Health 

B.S.,  Slippery  Rock  University;  M.S.,  University 

of  Illinois 

ANDREA  R.  FISHMAN  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 
of  English 

BA,  Dickinson  College;  M.Ed.,  Shippensburg 
University  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ROBERT  P.  FLETCHER  (1992)  Assistant 

Professor  of  English 

BA..  University  of  California;  MA.,  University  of 

California 

ANIX\  K  FOEMAN  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

Communication  Studies 

B.H.,  Defiance  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

WnUAM  D.  FORDYCE  (1968)  Associate 

Professor  of  English 

AB.,  AM.T,  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard  University 

CLAUDE  R.  FOSTER,  JR.  (1967)  Professor  of 
History 

BA.,  Eastern  College;  B.D.,  The  Reformed 
Episcopal  Seminary,  MA.,  University  of 
Delaware;  Th.M.,  Crozer  Theological  Seminary, 
Zeugnis  fuer  deutsche  Sprache  und  Kultur, 
University  of  Freiburg;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

KENT  L.  FOUTZ  (1992)  Associate  Professor  of 

Marketing 

B.S.,  M.BA.,  University  of  Utah;  D.B.A., 

Mississippi  State  University 

WALTER  J.  FOX,  JR.  (1983)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  English;  Assistant 

Professor 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  University;  M.S.,  Columbia 

University 

ALAN  W.  FRANCE  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

BA.,  Troy  State  University;  M.A.,  Stephen  F. 

Austin  State  University;  Ph.D.,  Rice  University; 

Ph.D.,  Texas  Christian  University 

BONIX\  FREEMAN-'WITTHOFT  (1974) 
Associate  Professor  of  Anthropology 
BA.,  University  of  Maine;  MA.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

RAYMOND  FRIDAY  (1969)  Professor  of  Vocal  and 
Choral  Music 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University  M.Mus.,  Oberlin 
College;  Diploma,  Academy  of  Vocal  Arts;  Ph.D., 
New  York  University 

BLAISE  F.  FROST  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

BA..  Yankton  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

South  Dakota 


Faculty 


ANGELO  F.  GADALETO  (1986)  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
B.A.,  Rider  College;  M.Ed.,  University  of 
Delaware;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 

GLORIA  GALANTE  (1993)  Instructor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University 

CLYDE  J  GALBRAITH  (1974)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Accounting:  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.,  M.BA.,  Drexel  University;  C.PA... 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 

GAIL  M.  GALLITANO  (1992)  Associate  Professor 
of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 
B.S..  Monmouth  College;  M.S.  Farleigh 
Dickinson  University,  M.A.,  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 
Columbia  University 

CONSTANCE  GARCL^-BARRIO  (1990)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
B-A.,  West  Chester  University;  MA.,  Temple 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ROBIN  GARRETT  (1978)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.N.,  Case  Western  Reserve  University;  M.S.N. , 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

JOHN  GAULT  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Marketing 

B.S.,  U.S.  Naval  Academy;  M.BA.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

JOHN  L.  GAUNT  (1970)  Professor  of  English 
BA,  MA.,  Tulane  University;  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Maryland 

JAMAL  GHOROGHCFUAN  (1986)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Chemistry,  Associate 

Professor 

B.S.,  University  of  Moshad  (Iran);  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Southampton  (U.K.) 

ELIZABETH  A.  GL«lNGIUL10  (1972)  Director. 
Career  Development  Center 

B.S..  West  Chester  University,  M.Ed.,  University 
of  Arizona 

MARGARET  GIBSON  (1991)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B.S.,  Temple  University  M.S.,  Trenton  State 
University;  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  University 

STEPHEN  D.  GILMOUR  (1979)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
BA,  MA.,  Indiana  University,  MA,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Minnesota 

JOSEPH  J.  GODEK  111  (1972)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Sports  Medicine;  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.S.,  West  Chester 
University 

DENNIS  GODFREY  (1987)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

BA,  University  of  Northern  Iowa;  MA.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Michigan 

JOSEPH  A.  GOEBEL.JR  (1968)  Instructor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.S..  Millersville  University 

PHYLLIS  A.  GOETZ  (1975)  Associate  Professor  of 

Health 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Maryland;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Maryland 

CHARLES  W  GOOD  (1966)  Professor  of 
Counselor.  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
BA,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  M.A., 
University  of  Pennsylvania;  Ed.D.,  Temple 
University 


HENRY  E.  GOODWIN  (1960)  Associate  Professor 
of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Lock  Haven  University  M.S.,  Pennsylvania 
State  University 

ANDREW  J.  GOUDY  (1977)  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

RONALD  L.  GOUGHER  (1969)  Chairperson. 

Department  of  Foreign  Languages:  Associate 

Professor 

BA.,  Muhlenberg  College;  MA,  Lehigh 

University 

HENRY  GRABB  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

BA,  University  of  Central  Florida;  M.M., 
Northwestern  University  of  Illinois;  D.M., 
Florida  Sute  University 

CHARLES  W  GRASSEL  (1968)  Associate 

Professor  of  Geography 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  M.S.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

PATRICL\  E.  GRASTY-GAINES  (1970)  Professor 
of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  M.Ed.,  Temple 
University;  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

PAUL  D.  GREEN  (1971)  Professor  of  English 
AB.,  Temple  University,  AM.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard 
University 

JUDITH  J.  GREENAMYER  (1988)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Biology 

M.S.,  University  of  California;  D.VM.,  Ohio  State 

University 

SAUL  H.  GREENBERG  (1963)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Criminal  Justice:  Associate  Professor 
of  Criminal  Justice 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  J. D., 
University  of  Baltimore 

HARVEY  C.  GREISMAN  (1979)  Professor  of 

Sociology 

BA.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  New  Paltz; 

MA.,  Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 

SHIRLEY  R  GRICE  (1972)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Educational  Services 

B  S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

FRANK  GROSSHANS  (1975)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  University  of  Illinois;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Chicago 

TERRY  E.  GUIDETn  (1966)  Associate  Professor 

of  Instrumental  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.Mus.,  Northwestern  University 

SHIV  K.  GUPTA  (1985)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematical  Sciences 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Delhi  University,  M.S.,  University  of 

Wisconsin;  Ph.D.,  Case  Western  Reserve 

University 

WEXL\M  1.  GUY  (1974)  Instructor  of 
Educational  Services 
A.B.,  Temple  University 

CYNTTOA  S.  HAGGARD  (1990)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

BA-,  MA.,  Ed.  D.,  Indiana  University 

SAUNDRA  M.  HALL  (1964)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Theatre  Arts  and  Women  s  Studies 
BA.,  MA,  Ohio  State  University 


JAMES  W  HAMILTON  (1989)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Management 

B.S  ,  University  of  Wisconsin;  M.B.A.,  North- 
eastern University 

HUBERT  E.  HARBER  (1970)  Associate  Professor 
of  Astronomy  • 

B.S  ,  Louisiana  State  University,  M.B.S., 
University  of  Colorado;  MAT,  Brown  University 

CHARLES  A.  HARDY  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 

of  History 

BA.,  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

JEFFREY  E.  HARRIS  (1983)  Associate  Professor 
of  Health 

BA.,  University  of  California  at  San  Diego; 
D.H.Sc.,  M.P.H.,  Loma  Linda  University 

RICHARD  HARRIS  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  in 

Marketing 

B.S.,  University  of  Utah;  MBA.,  Harvard 

University 

YOKO  HASHIMOTO-SINCIAIR  (1969)  Associafe 
Professor  of  Theatre  Arts 

BA.,  MA.,  Aoyama  Gakuin  University  0apan); 
MA.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Michigan 

EUGENE  C.  HASSLER  (1969)  Associate  Professor 
of  Accounting 

B.S.,  Albright  College;  MBA.,  Indiana 
University,  C.PA.,  State  of  Indiana 

ELIZABETH  A.  HASSON  (1970)  Associate 
Professor  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B  S.,  M  Ed.,  West  Chester  University;  Ed.D., 
Temple  University 

BARBARA  F.  HAUS  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.N. .  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.S.N., 

University  of  Kentucky;  Ed.D.,  Lehigh  University 

SYLVIA  HAVTLAND  (1988)  Instructor  of 

Philosophy 

BA.,  Goddard  College;  M.A,  West  Chester 

University 

ROBERT  W  HAWKES  (1962)  ^Usociafe  Professor 
of  Physics 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  M.S.,  Pennsylvania 
State  University 

ARTHUR  T  HEGVIK  (1975)  Associate  Professor 

of  Instrumental  Music 

B.M.,  MM.,  University  of  Michigan 

JOHN  G.  HELION  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Physical  Education 

B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York;  MA,  Ed.M., 
Ed.D.,  Columbia  University 

FRANK  Q.  HELMS  (1966)  Director,  Ubrary 
Services:  Associate  Professor 
BA,  University  of  Delaware;  M.L.S.,  Rutgers  — 
The  State  University 

SHARON  L.  HERSHEY  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Music  Theory  and  Composition 
B.M.,  University  of  Michigan;  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania 

THOMAS  J.  HESTON  (1975)  Professor  of  History 
AB.,  Gettysburg  College;  M.A,  Ph.D.,  Case 
Western  Reserve  University 

WILLLUvl  L.  HEWITT  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 
of  History 

BA,  MA.,  Adams  State  College;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wyoming 


Faculty 


JANET  HICKMAN  (1992)  Associate  Professor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  University  of  Bridgeport;  M.S.N., 

Northern  Illinois  University;  Ed.D.,  Temple 

University 

MARTIN  J.  HIGGINS  (1967)  Director,  Research 
and  Planning:  Professor 
B.S.,  University  of  Dayton;  MA.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Maryland 

STEPHANIE  L.  HINSON  (1992)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

A.B.,  Princeton  University;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 

University  of  Virginia 

CHERYL  HODGINS  (1979)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Social  Work 

BJ\.,  University  of  New  Hampshire;  M.S.W., 
University  of  Texas 

FRANK  J.  HOFFMAN  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Philosophy 

A.B.,  University  of  Missouri;  MA..,  University  of 
Hawaii;  Ph.D.,  University  of  London 

THOMAS  L.  HOLDER  (1986)  Instrvctorof 

Physics 

B.S.Ed.,  California  State  University;  M.Ed., 

Mlllersvllle  University 

JOHN  HOLINGJAK  JR  (1965)  Associate 

Professor  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  Ed.M.,  Temple 

University 

BELLE  HOLLON  (1987)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Art 

B.F.A.,  Philadelphia  College  of  Art;  M.FA, 

University  of  Wisconsin 

CLARK  D.  HORTON  (1989)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Mathematical  Sciences 
B.S.,  M.S.,  North  Carolina  State  University; 
Ph.D.,  Indiana  University 

JOZSEF  HORVATH  (1988)  Assisfanr  Professor  of 
Mathematical  Sciences 

B.Sc,  Tel  Aviv  University;  M.Sc,  University  of 
British  Columbia;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University 

Yl-MING  HSU  (1975)  Professor  of  Secondary 
Education  and  Educational  Psychology 
B.A.  National  Taiwan  University;  MA., 
University  of  Oregon;  D.Ed.,  University  of 
Georgia 

CLAUDE  HUNSBERGER  (1967)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  English;  Associate  Professor 
BA.,  Temple  University;  M.A.,  Michigan  State 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin 

JOHN  L.  HYNES  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Albany, 
M.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at 
Binghamton;  Ed.D.,  State  University  of  New  York 
at  Albany 

LAWRENCE  V  L\CONO  (1966)  Associate 
Professor  of  Political  Science 
B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  College  (Pa.);  M.Ed.,  West 
Chester  University 

CAROL  ISAACSON-BRISELLI  (1988)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Instrumental  Music 
B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York;  M.M., 
Temple  University 


WILLIAM  J.  JACOBSON  (1988)  Associate 

Professor  of  Theatre  Arts 

BA,  Eckerd  College;  M.FA.,  Brandeis  University 

JANE  E.  JEFFREY  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

BA.,  Memphis  State;  MA.,  Ph.D..  University  of 

Iowa 

RONN  M.  JENKINS  (1972)  Advising  Center; 
Associate  Professor 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  Bucknell 
University;  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ElAINE  B.  JENKS  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 
BA.,  University  of  Maryland;  MA,  Gannon 
University,  Ph.D.,  Peimsylvania  State  University 

ALLEN  H.  JOHNSON  (1974)  Associate  Professor 
of  Geology 

B.S.,  University  of  Illinois;  M.S.,  University  of 
Arizona;  Ph.D.,  Case  Western  Reserve  University 

DEIDRE  ANN  JOHNSON  (1991)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

BA.,  Knox  College;  MA.,  Eastern  Michigan; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Miimesota 

PATRICIA  C.  JOHNSON  (1966)  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  Chestnut  Hill  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Rochester 

CUFFORD  A.  JOHNSTON  (1992)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 
B.S.E.,  Mansfield  University  of  Peimsylvania; 
MA.,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

EMLYN  H.  JONES  (1968)  Assistant  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Physical  Education;  Assistant 

Professor 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

JAMES  A.  JONES  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 

History 

B.S.,  MA.,  University  of  Delaware 

MILDRED  C.  JOYNER  (1981)  Chaiiperson, 
Department  of  Social  Work;  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.W.,  Central  State  University;  M.S.W.,  Howard 
University 

WALLACE  J.  KAHN  (1977)  C/iaiiperson, 

Department  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and 

Professional  Education;  Professor  of  Counselor 

Education 

B.S.,  Bloomsburg  University;  M.Ed.,  A.G.S., 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Maryland 

BRENT  KAPLAN  (1968)  Associate  Professor  of 

Physics 

B.M.E.,  M.M.E.,  New  York  University 

BARBARA  L.  KARAS  (1966)  Associate  Professor 

of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  M.Ed.,  Temple 

University 

BARBARA  A.  KAUFFMAN  (1987)  Instructor  of 
Criminal  Justice 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S., 
University  of  Pennsylvania;  J.D.,  Temple 
University  School  of  Law 

MARY  A.  KEETZ  (1973)  Director,  Women's 

Institute;  Professor  of  Childhood  Studies  and 

Reading 

B.S.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

NELSON  W.  KEITH  (1989)  Professor  of  Sociology 
MA.,  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  — The  State  University 


JAMES  T  KELLEHER  (1968)  Professor  of  English 
BA.,  Widener  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

JOHN  T.  KELLY  (1969)  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

B.S.,  St.  Louis  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Oklahoma 

JOHN  P.  KENT  (1972)  Professor  of  English 
BA.,  Southampton  University  (U.K);  M.A., 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Illinois 

JOHN  J.  KERRIGAN  (1972)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  M.A.,  Villanova 

University,  D.Ed.,  Temple  University 

ROSE  ANN  KHOURY  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

BA,  MA.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  South  Carolina 

EUGENE  KLEIN  (1967)  Associate  Professor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.M.E.,  Temple  University;  M.M.E.,  Indiana 

University 

SHARON  B.  KLETZIEN  (1991)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
BA.,  West  Texas  State  University;  MA., 
American  University,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

ROBERT  M.  KLINE  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematical  Sciences 

BA.,  Millersville  University;  Ph.D.,  Washington 

University 

DENNIS  R  KLINZING  (1976)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Communication  Studies:  Professor 
B.S.,  Clarion  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Penn- 
sylvania State  University 

MAUREEN  T  KNABB  (1986)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Biology 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Virginia 

LISA  KERR  KNAUSS  (1991)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.N., 
Villanova  University 

KAREN  M.  KOEHLER  (1987)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  The  King's  College;  M.A.,  Northern 

Michigan  University  Ed.D.,  University  of  North 

Carolina-Greensboro 

MAREEi  A.  KOENIG  (1990)  Associate  Professor 
of  Communicative  Disorders 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Southern  Illinois  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Illinois 

SEBASTIAN  S.  KOH  (1970)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  National  Taiwan  University,  M.A,  Wayne 

State  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  California 

V  KRISHNA  KUMAR  (1977)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.S.,  Osraania  University  (India);  M.S.,  Indian 

Agricultural  Research  Institute;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Wisconsin 

ROBERT  S.  KURZINSKY  (1970)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

B.S.,  Bloomsburg  University;  M.Ed.,  West 

Chester  University;  Ed.D.,  Nova  University 

PETER  T.  KYPER  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of 

Educational  Services 

BA.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  Ph.D.,  Auburn 

University 


Faculty 


MARY  B.  LACOSTE  (1985)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Special  Education 

BA,  Loyola  University;  M.Ed,,  Louisiana  State 
University;  Ed.D.,  University  of  New  Orleans 

MARGARETE  J.  LANDWEHR  (1992)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
B.S.,  Georgetown  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Harvard  University 

MONITA  LANK  (1970)  Chairperson.  Department 
of  Physical  Education:  Professor 
A.B.,  MA.,  Wichita  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Iowa 

BARBARA  J.  lAPPANO  (1970)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.Ed  ,  West  Chester  University 

ELIZABETH  LARSEN  (1984)  Associate  Professor 
of  English 

B.A.,  University  of  Minnesota;  MA,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wisconsin-Milwaukee 

VICTOR  LASUCHIN  (1970)  Associate  Professor 

of  Art 

B  FA,  M.FA.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

KENNETH  L.  LAUDERMILCH  (1968)  Professor 
of  Instrumental  Music 

B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College;  M.Mus.,  New 
England  Conservatory  of  Music;  D.MA, 
Catholic  University  of  America 

JOSEPH  C.  LAULETIA  (1973)  Assistant  Prvfessor 

of  Physical  Education 

B.S  ,  University  of  Delaware;  M.Ed.,  Boston 

University 

EVAN  A.  LEACH  (1993)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Management 

B.A,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  MA,  West 

Chester  University;  M-A.,  Yale  University 

HERBERT  LEE  (1968)  Chairperson,  Educational 

Senices:  Associate  Professor 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

F.  WnUAM  LEEDS  (1963)  Associate  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
A.B.,  Temple  University;  MA.,  University  of 
Peniisylvania 

JOHN  D.  LEMCKE  (1963)  Professor  of  Health 
B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Brockport; 
M.Ed..  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

MONICA  P.  LEPORE  (1983)  Associate  Professor 

of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  College  of  Mount  Saint  Vincent;  M.S., 

University  of  Wisconsin;  Ed.D.,  New  York 

University 

JAMES  P.  LEWANDOWSKI  (1991)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Geography  and  Planning 
B.A.,  M.A.,  University  of  Toledo;  Ph.D.,  Ohio 
State  University 

JAMES  E.  L'HEUREUX  (1969)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D..  Louisiana  State  University 

MARGARET  S.  LIVINGSTON  (1990)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Art 

B.FA.,  Kutztown  University;  M.FA,  Syracuse 

University 

SUSAN  W.  LUBKING  (1978)  Associate  Professor 

of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.Ed.,  Temple  University 

ROBERT  C.  LUCAS  (1975)  Associate  Professor  of 

Keyboard  Music 

B.M.,  Oberlin  College;  MM.,  University  of 

Michigan;  Ed.D..  Columbia  University 


PATRICK  W.  LUCK  (1973)  Associate  Prvfessor  of 

Sociology 

BA,  University  of  Vermont;  MA,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Connecticut 

COLLEEN  T  LUDEKER  (1990)  Associate 

Professor  of  Music  Education 

B.M.E  .  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania; 

MM..  DePauw  University;  Ed.D  .  West  Virginia 

University 

GLENN  LYONS  (1984)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

BA..  Harpur  College;  M.  Mus..  Peabody  Institute 
of  Johns  Hopkiris  University 

ROBERT  C.  MAGGIO  (1991)  Assistant  Profes'or 

of  Music  Theory  and  Composition 

BA.  Yale  University;  MA.  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

MARY  ANN  O.  MAGGim  (1970)  Associate 
Professor  of  Childhood  Studies  and  fieading 
BA,  Emmanuel  College;  M.S.,  Central 
Connecticut  State  College;  Ph.D.,  Temple 
University 

VIRGIL  E.  MAGNUSON  (1975)  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

BA,  Monmouth  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

New  Hampshire 

JOHN  P.  MAHER  (1986)  Instructor  of  Health 
B.S.,  St.  Peter's  College;  M.P.H.,  Harvard 
University;  M.D..  State  University  of  New  York, 
Downstate  Medical  Center 

DEBORAH  MAHLSTEDT  (1988)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Psychology 

B.S.,  Sute  University  of  New  York  at  Rockport; 
M.Ed..  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

PAUL  L  MALFBY  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

BA,  Thames  Polytechnic;  MA,  London 

University;  Ph.D.,  Sussex  University 

ELI  M.  MANDELBAUM  (1964)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

BA,  Temple  University;  M.A,  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Pennsylvania 

JOHN  A  MANGRAVITE  (1976)  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  St.  Peter's  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of  New 

Hampshire 

ROBERT  J.  MARBACH  (1976)  Professor  of 

Political  Science 

BA.  LaSalle  College;  MA,  Ph.D..  Temple 

University 

KAREN  L  MARKEY  (1983)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music  Education 

B.S.,  M.Mus.Ed..  West  Chester  University 

MICHAEL  F.  MARTENS  (1985)  Associate 
Professor  of  Physics 

BA,  Gettysburg  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Delaware 

AMY  E.  MARTZ  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 
BA,  Miami  University;  MA,  Ph  D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

CAROL  R.  MATZ  (1973)  Assistant  Prvfessor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.,  Albright  College;  M.S.,  University  of 

Maryland 

GEORGE  W  MAXIM  (1972)  Professor  of 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Mansfield  University;  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 


SUSAN  MAXWELL  (1969)  Associate  Professor  of 

Communicative  Disorders 

BA,  Whittier  College;  MA,  Ohio  University 

GUSTAVE  N.  MBUY  (1985)  Associate  Professor  of 

Biology 

BA,  University  of  California;  M.M.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Cincinnati 

ALBERTA  M.  MAFEE  (1970)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Library  Services 

B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  M.S.L.S.,  Drexel 

University 

CHRISTINA  W.  McCAWLEY  (1971)  Associate 

Professor  of  Library  Services 

BA,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University;  M.S.L.S., 

CathoUc  University  of  America;  Ph.D.,  Drexel 

University 

DWIGHT  L.  McCAWLEY  (1971)  Prvfessor  of 

English 

BA,  MA,  University  of  Tennessee;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Illinois 

RUTH  L  McCOACH  (1969)  Instructor  of 

Educational  Services 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University 

DOUGLAS  P.  McCONATHA  (1988)  Associate 

Professor  of  Health 

B.S.,  University  of  Alabama;  MA,  University  of 

Atlanta;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Utah;  M.P.H.,  Yale 

University 

JASMIN  T  McCONATHA  (1990)  Associate 
Professor  of  Psychology 

BA,  University  of  Utah;  M.S.,  Jacksonville  Slate 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Georgia 

MARY  McCULLOUGH  (1977)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Communication  Studies 

BA,  B.S.,  Millersville  University,  M.S.W.. 

University  of  North  Carolina;  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

BANNArmE  McCUTCHEON  (1974)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Social  Work 

BA,  Upsala  College;  M.S.W,  Rutgers  School  of 
Social  Work 

CHARLES  H.  McGEE  (1987)  Associate  Professor 
of  Management 

BA,  University  of  California  at  Santa  Barbara; 
MA.,  University  of  Southern  California;  Ph.D., 
Northwestern  University 

LYNETTE  F.  McGRATH  (1968)  Professor  of 
English  and  Women 's  Studies 
BA,  University  of  Sydney;  B.A.,  MA,  Ph.D.. 
University  of  Illinois 

LARRY  McKENNA  (1986)  Instructor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

JAMES  E.  McVOY  (1979)  Chairperson,  Music 
Theory  and  Composition:  Professor 
B.M.,  Syracuse  University;  MM..  Ph.D..  Eastman 
School  of  Music 

ROBERTS.  MEANS  (1971)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

BA,  MA,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Alabama 

LISBETH  MERZ  (1985)  Associate  Professor, 
Counseling  Center 

BA,  Chestnut  Hill  College;  MA,  Villanova 
University;  Psy.D.,  Hahnemann  University 

OWEN  METCALF  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music 

B.M.,  M.M.,  University  of  Colorado;  D.M., 

Indiana  University 


Faculty 


HAROLD  W.  METZ  (1977)  Associate  Professor  of 
Criminal  Justice 

A.B.,  Glenville  State  College;  M.Ed.,  Ohio 
University;  Ed.D.,  West  Virginia  University 

CHERYL  L.  MICHEAU  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 
of  English 

B.S.E.D.,  Millersville  University;  MA, 
Middlebury  College;  M-A.,  University  of 
Pittsburgh;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ELLEN  LOUISE  MICHELMORE  (1986)  Associate 
Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.N.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  Ed.M., 
Temple  University;  M.S.N.,  Villanova  University; 
Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

ELAINE  R  MILITO  (1981)  Assistant  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science; 

Associate  Professor 

B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Stony 

Brook;  MA.,  City  University  of  New  York 

Queens  College;  Ph.D.,  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

FRANK  E.  MILLIMAN  (1960)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Mathematics  and 
Computer  Science;  Associate  Professor 
B.N.S.,  College  of  Holy  Cross;  A.B.,  Hobart 
College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

JAMES  S.  MILNE  (1969)  Professor  of  Political 

Science 

B.S.,  Kutztown  University,  M.A.,  Villanova 

University;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

JOAN  MIMS  (1986)  Instructor  of  English 
BA.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Columbia 
College 

DANIEL  MOHAN  (1980)  Associate  Professor  of 

Economics 

B.S.,  B.A.,  Monmouth  College;  M.BA.,  Bucknell 

University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  —  The  State 

University 

GARRETT  G.  MOLHOIT  (1987)  Assistant 

Professor  of  English 

BA.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Wisconsin-Madison 

ROBERT  MOMYER  (1986)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Itistructional  Media 

B.S.,  Philadelphia  College  of  Art;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh 

University 

MICHAEL  MONTEMURO  (1965)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  LaSalle  College;  M.A.,  Ed.D.,  Temple 

University 

SAMUEL  F.  MOORE  (1979)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  Youngstown  State  College;  MA.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Cincinnati 

EDMUNDO  MORALES  (1989)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Sociology 

BA,  Richmond  College;  MA.,  New  York 
University;  Ph.D.,  City  University  of  New  York 

MICHAELJ.  MORAN  (1981)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Chemistry;  Professor  of  Chemistry 
B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

JOHN  R  MORGAN  (1984)  Associate  Professor  of 

Marketing 

B.A.,  Hampton  Institute;  M.B.A.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

RONNIE  L.  MORGAN  (1973)  Associate  Professor 
of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Southwest  Missouri  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Missouri 


WALENA  C.  MORSE  (1968)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

A.B.,  Duke  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Bryn  Mawr 

College 

ANNE-MARIE  L.  MOSCATELU  (1991)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
BA.,  Fordham  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Bryn 
Mawr  College 

JOSEPH  G.  MOSER  (1966)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  Rose  Polytechnic  Institute;  M.S.,  Purdue 

University 

CHARLES  A.  MOTT  (1988)  Professor  of 

Accounting 

B.S.,  University  of  Connecticut;  M.BA., 

University  of  Hartford;  Ph.D.,  American 

University 

RENATE  MUENDEL  (1986)  Instructor  of  English 
MA.  (German),  Columbia  University;  MA. 
(English),  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

ANNE  P.  MURPHY  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Management 

BA.,  Fordham  University;  M.BA.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

MARTIN  P.  MURPHY  (1966)  Associate  Professor 

of  Anthropology 

A.B.,  A.M.,  University  of  Michigan 

STERLING  E.  MURRAY  (1972)  Professor  of 
Music  History 

B.Mus.,  University  of  Maryland;  A.M.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Michigan 

ROGER  W.  MUSTALISH  (1978)  Professor  of 

Health 

A.B.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.S.,  Michigan 

State  University,  M.P.H.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Minnesota 

KOSTAS  MYRSL\DES  (1969)  Professor  of  English 
BA.,  University  of  Iowa;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana 
University 

LINDA  S.  MYRSLy)ES  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 

of  English 

BA.,  Beaver  College;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana 

University 

ALI  NAGGAR  (1977)  Professor  of  Accounting 
B.Com.,  Cairo  University,  M.BA.,  Long  Island 
University,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Oklahoma 

TAHANY  NAGGAR  (1977)  Professor  of 
Economics  and  Women  s  Studies 
B.Com.,  Rigadh  University;  MA.,  Long  Island 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Oklahoma 

DONALD  NALLY  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

B.M.,  MM.,  Westminster  Choir  College 

CAROL  M.  NAPIERKOWSKl  (1989)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

BA.,  Temple  University;  MA.,  Villanova 

University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Connecticut 

REGINALD  NEALY  (1986)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Criminal  Justice 

AA.,  Pennsylvania  State  Police  Academy;  B.S., 

Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S.,  Lincoln 

University 

MARY  E.  NEHLIG  (1967)  Assistant  Director, 

Library  Services;  Associate  Professor 

A.B.,  Wilson  College;  M.S.L.S.,  Drexel  University 


lARRYA  NELSON  (1971)  Professor  o/' Mtisic 

Theory  and  Composition 

B.Mus.,  University  of  Denver;  M.Mus.,  Southern 

Illinois  University;  Ph.D.,  Michigan  State 

University 

PATRICLA.  A.  NESTER  (1984)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  M.S.N.,  Medical  School  of  Georgia; 
Diploma  in  Nursing,  Gastonia  Memorial  Hospital 

JANA  L,  NESTLERODE  (1986)  Associate 
Professor  of  Criminal  Justice 
BA.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  J. D., 
Widener  University 

EMILY  T.  NEWBOLD  (1970)  Associate  Professor 
of  Instrumental  Music 

B.Mus.,  Eastman  School  of  Music;  M.Mus., 
Temple  University;  D.M.A.,  Combs  College 

JOHN  T  NEWCOMB  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 

of  English 

A.B.,  Davidson  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Duke 

University 

SARA  E.  NEWELL  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 

AA.,  Clark  College;  BA.,  Western  Washington 
University;  M.S.,  University  of  Wyoming;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Utah 

ANTHONY  J.  NICASTRO  (1990)  Associate 

Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

DEBORAH  NICKLES  (1969)  C/iaiiperson, 

Department  of  Special  Education;  Assistant 

Professor 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  Syracuse 

University 

ELIZABETH  NOLLEN  (1986)  Instructor  of 

English 

B.A.,  Ohio  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana 

University 

ISAAC  B.  NORRIS  (1986)  Instructor  of  Physical 

Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  University 

of  Maryland 

ROBERT  P.  NYE  (1968)  Professor  of  Health 
A.B.,  Gettysburg  College;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 
University,  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

C.  JACK  ORR  (1986)  Professor  of  Communication 

Studies 

B.A.,  Messiah  College;  B.D.,  Eastern  Baptist 

Theological  Seminary;  M.A.,  Northwestern 

University;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

DAVID  L.  PADEN  (1988)  Professor  of 

Management 

B.S.,  Miami  University,  M.BA.,  D.BA.,  Indiana 

University 

CHARLES  W  PAGANO  (1967)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Ed.,  Ohio 

University 

PRAXITELES  PANDEL  (1972)  Associate  Professor 

of  Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.S.,  The  Juilliard  School 

SUSAN  B.  PARKINSON  (1968)  Associate 
Professor  of  Physical  Education 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.Ed.,  West 
Chester  University 


11      Faculty 


RICHARD  D.  PARSONS  (1990)  Associate 

Professor  of  Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

BA.,  Villanova  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

PATRICIA  PATRICK  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Education  Senices 

B.A.,  M.A.,  M.S.,  Indiana  University 

SHEILA  PATTERSON  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Health 

B.S.,  Mankato  State;  M.S.,  Southern  Illinois 
University;  Ph.D.,  Southern  Illinois  University 

FREDERICK  R  PATTON  (1981)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Foreign  Languages; 
Associate  Professor 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  Temple  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

PETER  PAULSON  (1989)  Instructor  of  Music 
B.M.,  West  Chester  University 

REBECCA  PAULY  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

B.A.,  Smith  College;  M.A.,  University  of 
California  at  Berkeley;  Ph.D.,  Middlebury  College 

MICHAEL  V.  PEARSON  (1988)  Associate 
Professor  of  Communication  Studies 
B.A.,  lona  College;  M.A.,  William  Patterson 
College;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

MICHAEL  A.  PEICH  (1968)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  English:  Associate 

Professor 

BA.,  Wanburg  College;  MA..,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

ROBERT  E.  PENNINGTON  (1966)  Professor  of 

Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.Mus.,  D  Mus.,  Northwestern 

University 

EILEEN  G.  PERCIFUL  (1990)  Associate  Professor 

of  Nursing 

A.S.N. ,  B.S.N.,  G\vynedd  Mercy  College;  M.S.N., 

University  of  Pennsylvania;  D.N.Sc.,  Widener 

University 

JULIE  A,  PERONE  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Counseling 

B.S.,  M.A.,  M.PA  ,  Ohio  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Maryland 

G.  KING  PERRY  (1983)  Instructor  of 

Mathematical  Sciences 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Bloomsburg  University 

RUBY  A.  PETERS  (1988)  Associate  Professor  of 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

B.S.,  Cheyney  University;  M.S.Ed.,  Temple 

University 

W  BENNETT  PETERS  (1973)  Associate  Professor 
of  History 

B.A,  Pomona  College;  M.A.,  California  State 
University,  San  Francisco;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
California.  Santa  Barbara 

PATRICIA.  A.  PFLIEGER  (1988)  Assistant 

Professor  of  English 

BA.,  University  of  Missouri;  MA.,  Eastern 

Michigan  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Minnesota 

JANE  T  PIPPART  (1987)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Music  Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Ed.,  Holy 
Names  College 

THOMAS  J.  PLATT  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 


THOMAS  W  PLAIT  (1968)  Pivfessor  of 

Philosophy 

B.A.,  Washington  and  Jefiferson  College;  MA., 

University  of  Pittsburgh;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

JOAN  POLKA  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Counseling  Services 

B.A.,  Holy  Family  College;  M.A.,  West  Chester 

University 

EDWARD  I.  POLLAK  (1977)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Psychology:  Professor 
BA.,  State  University  of  New  York  at 
Binghamton;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Connecticut 

YURY  POLSKY  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Political  Science 

BA.,  MA.,  University  of  Moscow;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Michigan 

IGOR  POPOVIC  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Music  Theory  and  Composition 
M.  Phil.,  Ph.D.,  Yale  University 

RUTH  PORRITT  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

B.A.,  John  Carroll  University;  Ph.D.,  Purdue 

University 

JACK  PORTER  (1968)  Professor  of  Psychology 
B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

LOUIS  H.  PORTER  (1974)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

BA.,  Ohio  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Howard 

University 

MARTHA  A.  POTVTN  (1985)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Biology;  Associate  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  University  of  Connecticut;  M.S.,  Michigan 

State  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Nebraska 

WILLJAM  G.  PRATER  (1969)  Associate  Professor 

of  English 

B.S.,  East  Stroudsburg  University;  M.A., 

Pennsylvania  Sute  University;  Ph.D.,  Ohio 

University 

CHARLES  PRICE  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 

Music  History 

B.A.,  MA.,  PhD  ,  Stanford  University 

SANDRA  F.  PRITCHARD  (1967)  Professor  of 

Geology 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Oregon 

CATHERINE  M.  PRUDOE  (1992)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B.S.,  MS,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Delaware 

THERESA  A.  QUIGNEY  (1992)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Special  Education 
BA.,  Notre  Dame  College;  M.Ed.,  Cleveland 
State  University;  Ph.D.,  Kent  State  University 

CAROL  A.  RADICH  (1972)  Professor  of 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
BA,,  Glassboro  State  College;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Maryland 

WILLIAM  J.  RAHN  (1965)  Associate  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
B.S.,  Villanova  University;  M.Ed.,  Temple 
University 

GEETHA  RAMANATHAN  (1987)  Assistant 

Professor  of  English 

MA.,  University  of  Bombay;  A.M.,  University  of 

Illinois;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Illinois  at 

Urbana-Champaign 


JUDITH  D.  RAY  (1978)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Physical  Education 

A.B.E.  of  Harris  Teachers  College;  M.A.Ed.. 
Washington  University 

JOHN  T  REDINGTON  (1992)  Interim 
Chairperson,  Marketing:  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.B.A.,  Temple  University;  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

DAVID  L.  REDMOND  (1963)  Associate  Professor 

of  Instructional  Media 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  Syracuse 

University 

GEORGE  F,  REED  (1966)  Professor  of  Astronomy 
B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  College  (Pa);  M.S.,  Ed.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

THOMAS  G.  REED  (1967)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  Ph.D.,  Union  of 
Experimental  Colleges  and  Universities 

HELEN  R  REID  (1975)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.A.,  B.S.,  Texas  Woman's  University;  Ph.D., 

University  of  New  Orleans 

RUSSELL  E.  REIS,  JR.  (1967)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Instructional  Media 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

MARY  ANN  REISS  (1969)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Foreign  Languages 

BA.,  Temple  University;  MA.,  Villanova 

University 

MARTIN  S.  REMLAND  (1991)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Communication  Studies 

B.A.,  Western  Illinois  University;  MA.,  Central 

Michigan  University;  Ph.D.,  Southern  Illinois 

University 

BARRY  G.  REMLEY  (1968)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

ARLENE  C.  RENGERT  (1976)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Geography  and  Planning:  Professor 
of  Geography  and  Women  s  Studies 
A.B.,  University  of  Indiana;  MA,  The  Ohio  State 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

MICHAEL  J.  RENNER  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Psychology 

BA.,  Boise  State  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Oklahoma;  Ph.D.,  University  of  California, 

Berkeley 

JOEL  M.  RESSNER  (1984)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S..  Lehigh  University;  M.Sc,  University  of 

Sussex;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh  University 

C  FLOYD  RICHMOND  (1989)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Music  Education 
BA,  M.M.,  Delta  State  University 

JANE  RICHTER  (1986)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music 

B.S.,  MM.,  Temple  University;  D.M.A.,  Combs 

College 

DONN  C.  RILEY  (1966)  Professor  of  History 
A.B.,  MA.,  Ph.D.,  St.  Louis  University 

STANLEY  RIUKAS  (1968)  Professor  of  Philosophy 
A.B.,  Classical  Gymnasium  (Lithuania);  Ph.B., 
Ph.L.,  Loyola  University;  Ph.D.,  New  York 
University 

RONALD  F.  ROMIG  (1967)  Professor  of  Biology 
B.S.,  Bloomsburg  University;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D.. 
University  of  Delaware 


Faculty 


WILLIAM  D.  ROSENZWEIG  (1989)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  St.  Johns  University;  M.S.,  Long  Island 
University;  Ph.D.,  New  York  University 

SALLY  A  ROSS  (1988)  Associate  Professor  of 
Social  Work 

B_A,  Central  State  University;  M.S.W.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania 

JOHN  P  ROSSO  (1975)  Instructor  of  Foreign 

Languages 

BA.,  Haverford  College;  MA.,  University  of 

Peiinsylvania 

HARVEY  ROVINE  (1992)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Theatre  Arts:  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  Towson  State  University;  MA.,  University 
of  Central  Florida;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Illinois 

PHILIP  B.  RUDNICK  (1968)  Director. 
Pre-Medical  Progratn;  Professor  of  Chemistry 
BA.,  Yeshiva  University;  BA.,  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  — 
The  State  University 

MICHAEL  RUFFINI  (1989)  Instructor  of 
Instructional  Media 

BA  Glassboro  State  College;  B.S.,  M.S.,  West 
Chester  University 

NANCY  J.  RUMFIELD  (1986)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Instructional  Media 

B.F.A.,  Moore  College  of  An;  M.S..  West  Chester 

University 

CYNTHLA  E.  RYDER  (1990)  Associate  Professor 
of  Educational  Services 

B.S.,  Wheaton  College;  M.S.P.E.,  University  of 
North  Carolina;  Ed.D.,  University  of  Georgia 

C.  RUTH  SABOL  (1986)  Assistant  Chairperson. 
Department  of  English:  Associate  Professor 
B.Ed.,  M.Ed.,  Seattle  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wisconsin 

ELBERT  M.  SADDLER  (1985)  Associate  Professor 
of  Counseling  Center 

AB.,  Rutgers  -  The  State  University;  M.Ed., 
Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

JANE  WESTON  SADDORIS  (1971)  Instructor  of 
Theatre  Arts 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  MA.  in 
Education,  Villanova  University 

BHIM  SANDHU  (1978)  Associate  Professor  of 
Political  Science 

BA,  Punjab  University  Ondia);  MA.,  University 
of  Texas;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Missouri 

HAROLD  R  SANDS  (1969)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

BA,  Rutgers  —  The  State  University;  M.Ed., 

Temple  University;  Ph.D.,  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

GOPAL  SANKARAN  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Health 

B.S.,  MB.,  Maulanaazad  Medical  College, 

(India);  M.D.,  All  India  Institute  of  Medical 

Sciences;  M.P.H.,  Dr.  PH.  University  of 

California 

FRANK  SAUERS  (1986)  Instructor  of  English 
BA,  Villanova  University;  MA.,  Purdue 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Colorado 

JUDITH  A.  SCHEFFLER  (1985)  Associate 

Professor  of  English 

AB.,  Muhlenburg  College;  MA.,  Purdue 

University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 


ROBERT  SCHICK  (1961)  Professor  of  Keyboard 

Music 

BA.,  Swarthmore  College;  MA.,  Columbia 

University;  AMus.D.,  Eastman  School  of  Music 

MARGARET  SCHIFF  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Art 

B.FA,  Kutztown  University;  M.FA.,  Syracuse 

University 

STACEY  SCHIAU  (1985)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

BA.,  MA.,  Queens  College;  Ph.D  ,  City 
University  of  New  York 

LISELOTTE  M.  SCHMIDT  (1970)  Chairperson. 

Department  of  Music  History  and  Literature: 

Professor 

B.Mus.,  Converse  College;  MA.,  New  York 

University;  M.Mus.,  Manhattan  School  of  Music; 

Ed.D.,  Columbia  University;  Fulbright  Scholar 

(University  of  Munich,  Germany,  1957-58) 

FRAUKE  1.  SCHNELL  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Political  Science 

BA.,  University  of  Tuebingen,  Germany;  MA., 

Ph.D.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Stony 

Brook 

R.  GERALD  SCHOELKOPF  (1969)  Chairperson, 

Library  Services:  Assistant  Professor 

BA.,  Villanova  University;  M.S.L.S.,  McGill 

University 

FRANCOISE  E.  SCHREMMER  (1979)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Mathematics 
Propedeuitque  de  Mathemadque,  Maitrise  de 
Mathematique,  D.E.S.,  University  of  Paris;  MA, 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

LEROY  SCHUETTE  (1973)  Adviser,  Center  for 
Academic  Advising:  Associate  Professor, 
Educational  Services 

BA,  Yankton  College;  MA.,  University  of 
Michigan;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Utah 

PAUL  SEAVER  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

B.S.,  Kent  State  University;  MA,  University  of 
Connecticut;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Maryland 

RANI  G.  SELVANATHAN  (1986)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Management:  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D..  University  of  Delhi  (India); 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Paris 

GUS  V.  SERMAS  (1971)  Professor  of  Art 
BA.,  Baylor  University;  B.FA.,  B.S.,  University 
of  Texas;  M  FA.,  University  of  Wisconsin 

WILLIAM  H.  SEYBOLD,  JR.  (1967)  Associate 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Temple  University;  MA,  Northwestern 

University 

LEIGH  S.  SHAFFER  (1980)  Chairperson. 
Anthropology  and  Sociology:  Professor 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Wichita  State  University;  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

JOHN  C.  SHEA  (1967)  Professor  of  Political 

Science 

BA.  Allegheny  College;  MA..  University  of 

Pennsylvania;  Ph.D..  University  of  Pittsburgh 

MAURA  J.  SHEEHAN  (1980)  Associate  Professor 

of  Health 

B.S.,  Lowell  Technological  Institute;  M.S., 

University  of  Lowell;  Sc.D.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 

ROBERT  R  SHINEHOUSE  (1966)  Associate 

Professor  of  Psychology 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  MA.,  Temple  University 


CAROL  SHLOSS  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

BA.,  Swarthmore  College;  MA.T.,  Harvard 

University;  Ph.D.,  Brandeis  University 

CHARLES  V.  SHORTEN  (1989)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Health 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute  and 
State  University;  Ph.D.,  Clemson  University 

IRENE  G.  SHUR  (1956)  Professor  of  History 
B.S.,  Ohio  State  University;  M.Ed.,  University  of 
Delaware;  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

DAVID  I.  SIEGEL  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 
Social  Work 

BA,  Brooklyn  College;  M.S.W.,  University  of 
Michigan;  D.S.W,  Columbia  University 

JAY  SILVERMAN  (1977)  Associate  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
AB.,  University  of  Chicago;  Ph.D.,  New  York 
University 

CAROLYN  G.  SIMMENDINGER  (1958)  Associate 
Professor  of  Art 

B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  M.FA,  Tyler  School 
of  Fine  Arts 

ELEANOR  B.  SINCLAIR  (1970)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Library  Services 
BA.,  University  of  Debware;  M.LS.,  Rutgers  — 
The  State  Universit>' 

ANN  R  SKEATH  (1983)  Instructor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  MA,  University  of  Illinois 

HAROLD  L.  SKELTON  (1968)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Physics:  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  Case  Institute  of  Technology;  M.S., 
University  of  Delaware;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Delaware 

SUSAN  C.  SLANINKA  (1975)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Nursing:  Professor 
B.S.N. ,  Villanova  University;  M.S.N.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania;  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

LESUE  B.  SLUSHER  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  North  Carolina  State  University;  Ph.D., 

Pennsylvania  State  University 

.ARTHUR  R  SMITH  (1984)  Associate  Professor  of 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

AB.,  M.S.,  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

CARL  M.  SMITH  (1971)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Accounting 

B.BA.,  M.BA.,  Temple  University;  C.PA., 

Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 

EDWARD  D.  SMITH  (1972)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.S.,  Shippensburg  University,  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 

Pennsylvania  State  University 

FRANK  A.  SMITH  (1954)  Professor  of  Physics 
B.S.,  Villanova  University;  MA.,  Ed.D  ,  Temple 
University 

JAMES  G.  SMITH  (1980)  Associate  Professor  of 
Political  Science 

BA,  Oklahoma  State  University;  MA,, 
University  of  California;  Ph.D.,  Indiana 
University  at  Bloomington 

LUANNE  SMITH  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

BA.,  University  of  Kentucky;  MA,  Murray  State 

University;  M.FA.,  Pennsylvania  State  University 


Faculty 


PAUL  K.  SMITH  (1985)  Associate  Pnfessor  of 
Physical  Education 

B.S..  M.S..  Flonda  State  Universicy,  Ph.D., 
Southern  Illinois  University 

ROBERTA  SNOW  (1989)  Associate  Professor  of 

Management 

B-A,  MA...  Syracuse  University,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

PATRICK  M.  SOCOSKl  (1990)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Counselor.  Secondary,  and  Professional 

Education 

BA.,  MA.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Pittsburgh 

NORBERT  C.  SOLDON  (1963)  Professor  of 

History 

BA,  MA.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Delaware 

H.  LEE  SOUTHALL  (1967)  Assocjafe  Professor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University  MA.,  Trenton 
State  College 

ALICE  J.  SPEH  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Foreign  Languages 

A.B.,  Brown  University,  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Bryn  Mawr 

College 

JOSEPH  M  SPIECKER  (1968)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Instructional  Media;  Professor 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University,  Ed.M.,  Temple 
University,  Ed.D.,  Nova  University 

THOMAS  W  SPIERLING  (1972)  Psychologist, 

Counseling  Center  Professor 

BA.  MA..  Ph.D.,  Michigan  State  University 

DAVID  A.  SPRENKLE  (1987)  Chair,  Department 
of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music;  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  MM.,  West  Chester  University  DMA., 
University  of  Maryland  at  College  Park 

ELIZABETH  LEE  ANN  SROGl  (1991)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 
B.S.,  Yale  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

JACK  STEINBERG  (1978)  Associate  Professor  of 

Educational  Services 

B.A.,  MA.,  Temple  University 

W  CRAIG  STEVENS  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Physical  Education 

BA,  Johns  Hopkins  University,  M.S.,  Springfield 

College;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

LESUE  STEVENSON.  JR.  (1972)  Psychologist, 
Counseling  Center,  Associate  Professor 
B.S..  M.S.,  University  of  Utah 

MARY  C  STIEBER  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Art 

B.FA,  Carnegie  Mellon  University,  MA., 

University  of  Pittsburgh;  MA,  Ph.D.,  Princeton 

University 

JOSEPH  A  STIGORA  (1973)  Associate  Professor 
of  Communicative  Disorders 
B.S.,  Bloomsburg  University;  MA,  Ph.D., 
Bowling  Green  University 

JOHN  STOIAR  (1988)  Professor  of  Geology  and 

Astronomy 

B.S.,  Shippensburg  University,  M.Ed.,  West 

Chester  University;  D.Ed..  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

PAUL  STOLLER  (1980)  Professor  of  Anthropology 
and  Sociology 

BA,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.S.,  Georgetown 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 


CLEAVONNE  STRATTON  (1983)  Associate 
Professor  of  Communicative  Disorders 
BA,  Miles  College;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State 
University 

PAUL  A  STREVELER  (1970)  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

BA.,  St.  John's  University  (Minn.);  Ph.D., 

University  of  Wisconsin 

FREDERICK  R.  STRUCKMEYER  (1966) 

Professor  of  Philosophy 

BA,  Kings  College  (N.Y);  AM..  PhD  ,  Boston 

University 

ELENA  F.  STUART  (1977)  Assistant  Pnfessor  of 

Communicative  Disorders 

BA.,  Emerson  College;  M.S.,  Purdue  University 

JAMES  D.  SULUVAN  (1967)  Professor  of  Music 
Theory  and  Composition 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University.  MA.,  Ph.D., 
Eastman  School  of  Music 

LULU  C.  H.  SUN  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

MA.,  University  of  Toronto;  MA.  Ph.D., 

University  of  Michigan 

JANE  B.  SWAN  (1965)  Professor  of  History  and 
Women  s  Studies 

BA.,  Swarthmore  College;  MA,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Permsylvania 

PATRICK  J.M.  SYLVESTER  (1968)  Professor  of 

Economics 

BA,  St.  Francis  Xavier  University  (Canada); 

MA.,  University  of  New  Brunswick  (Canada); 

MA.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  Ph.D.,  Bryn 

Mawr  College 

ROBERT  J.  SZABO  (1974)  Associate  Professor  of 

Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 

B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D.,  Lehigh 

University 

WACLAW  SZYMANSKI  (1985)  Professor  of 
Mathematical  Sciences 

M A.,  Jagiellonian  University  (Poland);  Ph.D., 
DSC  Polish  Academy  of  Sciences 

JOHN  C.  TACHOVSKY  (1970)  Professor  of 

Geography 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University.  Ph.D., 

University  of  Cincinnati 

LIN  TAN  (1989)  Associate  Professor  of 
Mathematical  Sciences 

B.S..  MA,  Zhejian  University,  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  California  at  Los  Angeles 

BRADLEY  E.  TAYLOR  (1973)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Temple  University 

CHRISTOPHER  J.  TEUTSCH  (1989)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

MA,  Jagiellonian  University  (Poland);  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wisconsin 

SANDRA  J.  THIELZ  (1973)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Southern  Connecticut  State  College;  M.Ed., 
West  Chester  University 

WESLEY  W  THOMAS  (1979)  Professor  of 

Geography 

B.S.,  University  of  Maine;  M.S.,  West  Chester 

University,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Cincinnati 

SANDRA  TTCKNOR-FOWKES  (1991)  Instructor 
of  Physical  Education 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  M.S., 
University  of  Colorado 


HARRY  TIEBOUT  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Biology 

BA.,  University  of  Illinois;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Florida 

MIKEL  K  TODD  (1990)  Assistant  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Physical  Education;  Assistant 

Professor 

AA.,  Brevard  College;  B.S.,  M.S.Ed.,  James 

Madison  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  North 

Carolina 

THOMAS  W  TOUN  (1992)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Economics 

BA,  University  of  Southwestern  Louisiana; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Houston 

W1LLL«lM  TOROP  (1971)  Professor  of  Chemistry 
A.B.,  M.S..  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

THOMAS  TREADWELL  (1968)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

BA.,  Morris  Harvey  College;  M.S.,  University  of 

Bridgeport;  Moreno  Institute,  New  York; 

(Certified  Psychodramatist,  T.E.P.);  Ed.D., 

Temple  University 

ELISE  A  TTUANO  (1985)  Associate  Professor  of 

Biology 

BA,  Gettysburg  University,  Ph.D.,  Thomas 

Jefferson  University 

MOAN  TRNKA  (1962)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Physical  Education 

A.B.,  Syracuse  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Illinois 

C.  JAMES  TROTMAN  (1979)  Associate  Professor 
of  English 

BA,  M.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State  University, 
Ed.D.,  Columbia  University 

MICHELLE  L.  TUCKER  (1988)  Instructor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.,  Michigan  State  University;  M.S.N., 

University  of  Michigan 

JOHN  J.  TURNER,  JR.  (1965)  Professor  of  History 
A.B.,  Muhlenberg  College;  MA,  University  of 
Rhode  bland;  Ph.D.,  Columbia  University 

DONNA  L.  USHER  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Art 

B.FA,  B.S.,  Moore  College  of  Art;  M.F.A., 

University  of  Delaware 

JOY  VANDEVER  (1964)  Associate  Professor  of 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

ANDREA  VARRICCHIO  (1986)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
BA.,  Chestnut  Hill  College;  M.A.,  Middlebury 
College;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

RICHARD  K  VELETA  (1965)  Professor  of 

Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.Mus.,  D.Mus.,  Northwestern 

University 

C  RALPH  VERNO  (1966)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

BA.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.Div., 

Westminster  Theological  Seminary;  M.S.  in  Ed., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

JOHN  VTLLELLA  (1986)  Instructor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.S.,  M.M..  West  Chester  University 

KARIN  A.E.  VOLKWEIN  (1992)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Physical  Education 
Staatsexamen,  University  of  Marburg,  Germany, 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Tennessee 


Faculty 


JACQUES  C.  VOOIS  (1969)  Professor  of 
Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  Oberlin  College;  M.Mus.,  Manhattan 
School  of  Music;  D. MA..  Johns  Hopkins 
University/Peabody  Conservatory 

RUSSELL  H.  VREELAND  (1989)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Biology 

B.S..  M.S.,  Rutgers  — The  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Nebraska 

JACK  WABER  (1976)  Professor  of  Biology 

BA...  Hope  College  (Mich.);  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Hawaii 

G.  ALAN  WAGNER  (1967)  Associafe  Professor  of 
Vocal  and  Choral  Music 
B.Mus.,  Northwestern  University,  M.FA., 
Carnegie  Mellon  University 

SHIRLEY  ANN  WAITERS  (1963)  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
B.S.,  Millersville  University;  MA.,  University  of 
Michigan;  D.Ed.,  Temple  University 

JOHN  W.  WARD  (1961)  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

AB.,  MA,  Miami  University;  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Dela\vare 

JOHN  W  WEAVER  (1973)  Chairperson. 

Department  of  Mathematics  and  Computer  Science; 

Professor 

BA.,  Eastern  Mennonite  College;  MA., 

University  of  Delaware;  Ph.D.,  Johns  Hopkins 

University 

RICHARD  J.  WEBSTER  (1967)  Professor  of 
History,  American  Studies,  and  Women  s  Studies 
A.B.,  Lafayette  College;  MA.,  University  of 
Delaware;  A.M.,  University  of  Pennsylvania; 
Ph  D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

RUTH  L  WEIDNER  (1967)  Professor  of  Art 
BA.,  Hood  College;  M.S.L.S.,  Drexel  University; 
MA,  University  of  Delaware;  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Delaware 

LOUIS  F.  WEISLOGEL  (1970)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Political  Science,  Associate  Professor 
of  Political  Science 

A.B.,  Gettysburg  College;  M.S.,  Rutgers  —  The 
State  University;  M.A.  Villanova  University; 
Ed.D.,  Nova  University 

MICHAEL  S.  WEISS  (1978)  Professor  of 

Communicative  Disorders 

BA,  Long  Island  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Purdue 

University 

ROBERT  H.  WEISS  (1967)  Professor  of  English 
A.B.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  AM.,  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 

JOAN  M.  WELCH  (1990)  Assistanf  Professor  of 
Geography  and  Planning 
BA,  St  Cloud  State  University;  MA.,  Ph.D., 
Boston  University 


LESLEY  A  WELSH  (1991)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Counselor,  Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
BA.,  Eastern  Connecticut  State  University;  MA., 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Connecticut 

UNWOODJ.  WHITE  (1968)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Art:  Associate  Professor 
B.FA.,  Mar)-land  Institute  College  of  Art;  M.F.A, 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

WILUAM  WHITEHILL  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Sports  Medicine 

AB.,  M.A.,  Morehead  State  University;  Ed.D., 
The  University  of  Alabama 

SUSANNE  WIEDER  (1988)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Social  Work 

AA,  Potomac  State  College;  BA.,  Fairmont 
State  College;  M.S.W.,  Smith  College 

EDWIN  L  WILLIAMS  (1968)  Associate  Professor 

of  Philosophy 

BA.,  West  Chester  University 

JEROME  M.  WILLIAMS  (1985)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Foreign  Languages; 
Associate  Professor 

BA,  Haverford  College;  MA.,  M.PhiL,  Ph.D., 
Yale  University 

JOHN  G.  WnUAMS  (1992)  Associate  Professor 
of  Physical  Education 

B.Ed.,  University  of  Nottingham,  UK;  M.Ed., 
University  of  Bath,  UK;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
London,  UK 

JOHN  M.  WINTERMUTE  (1966)  Associate 
Professor  of  Physical  Education 
B.S.,  Ithaca  College;  Ed.M.,  State  University  of 
New  York  at  Buffalo 

THOMAS  WINTERS  (1988)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Music  History 

BA.,  Bucknell  University;  MA.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Permsylvania 

C.  GIL  WISWALL  (1985)  Chairperson, 

Depaartment  of  Geology  and  Astronomy;  Associate 

Professor 

BA,  Colgate  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Montana 

PHILIP  WTTONSKY  (1974)  Professor  of  Chemistry 
B.S.,  Queens  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Minnesota 

MICHELE  B.  WOLFE  (1983)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Library  Services 

B.S.,  University  of  Connecticut;  M.L.S.,  Southern 
Connecticut  State  College 

PAUL  WOLFSON  (1978)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

AB.,  Columbia  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Chicago 

RICHARD  I.  WOODRUFF  (1966)  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 

University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 


FRANCES  H.  WREN  (1989)  Assistant  Professor 
of  English 

BA-,  West  Chester  University;  MA.,  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 

RICHARD  W.  WYATT  (1989)  Associate  Professor 
of  Mathematical  Sciences 
B.S.,  MA.,  University  of  Melbourne;  Ph.D., 
University  of  California  at  Berkley;  M.Sc,  State 
University  of  New  York 

JOHN  WYUE  (1986)  Instructor  of  Music 

Education 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

JANE  A  WYSS  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

B.M.,  MM.,  DMA,  University  of  Texas 

URSULE  YATES  (1986)  Instructor  of  English 
BA,  Rutgers  — The  State  University;  MA.,  Ph.D., 
Bryn  Mawr  College 

DANIEL  J.  YEH  (1968)  Associate  Professor  of 
Library  Services 

BA.,  National  Taiwan  University;  M.S.LS., 
Drexel  University 

RICHARD  B.  YODER  (1962)  Professor  of  Physical 

Education 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  MA,  Villanova 

University 

FRANKLIN  YOUNG  (1985)  Professor  of  Health 
AB.,  Mercer  University;  B.SA.,  MAgr.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Florida 

ROBERT  J.  YOUNG  (1965)  Professor  of  History 
B.S.,  Temple  University;  MA.,  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania 

CARLOS  R.  ZIEGLER  (1969)  Professor  of 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
AB.,  Elizabethtown  College;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 
Temple  University 

JOHNATHAN  L.  ZIMMERMAN  (1992)  Assistant 

Professor  of  History 

BA.,  Columbia  University;  MA,  Johns  Hopkins 

University 

CORNELLS  A  ZIMMERMANN  (1977)  Associate 
Professor  of  Childhood  Studies  and  Reading 
B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D.,  Lehigh 
University 

MARTIN  ZLOTOWSKI  (1973)  Associate 
Professor  of  Special  Education 
AB.,  New  York  University;  MA.,  Ph.D., 
Michigan  State  University 

DEANNE  L  ZOTTER-BONIFAZI  (1991) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 
BA.,  Bloomsburg  University;  MA,  Ph.D.,  Kent 
State  University 

ANTHONY  W  ZUMPETTA  (1988)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Criminal  Justice 
BA.,  Edinboro  University;  MA,  Ed.D.,  Indiana 
University  of  Pennsylvania 


Adjunct  Faculty 

DOUGLAS  ALBRIGHT  Department  of  Health 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University 

EUGENE  A  BENTLEY  Department  of  Biology 
BA,  Swarthmore  College;  MA.,  Hahnemann 
Medical  College 


DAVID  K.  COHOON  Department  of  Mathematics 

and  Computer  Science 

B.S.,  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology; 

M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Purdue  University;  David  Ross 

Research  Associateship  at  Institut  Henri 

Poincare 


MICHAEL  H.  COX  Department  of  Physical 

Education 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Southern  Illinois  University;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Toronto 

BARRY  M.  EVANS  Department  of  Health 
B  S.,  Ohio  State  University;  M.E.P.C, 
Pennsylvania  State  University 


Faculty 


GAIL  M.  FELLOWS  Depanmem  of  Health 
B.S.,  University  of  Arizona;  M.S.,  West  Chester 
University 

CHRISTINE  FORD  Depanmem  of  Biology 
B.S.,  Arkansas  Polytechnic  University;  MSA, 
West  Chester  University 

PHYLLIS  GOTKIN  Department  of  Biology 
B.S,.  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.Ed., 
Beaver  College;  Ph.D.,  Pacific  Western 
University 

N.  BLMR  LEROY  Department  of  Health 

B.A,  Yale  University;  M.D.,  Cornell  University 

Medical  College 

EDWIN  T.  LURCOTT  Department  of  Geology  and 

Astronomy 

B.S  ,  Syracuse  University 

HELEN  E.  MARTIN  Department  of  Counselor, 
Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
BA,  Kings  College,  N.Y;  MA,  West  Chester 
University 


RICHARD  A.  McCLEAN  Department  of  Biology 
B.S.,  Iowa  Wesleyan;  MA.,  Harvard  University, 
Ph.D.,  Bryn  Mawr  College 

DANIEL  S.  MILES  Department  of  Physical 

Education 

BA,  University  of  New  Hampshire;  MA,  Ph.D., 

Southern  Illinois  University 

C.  DANIEL  MOSER  Department  of  Physical 

Education 

B.S.,  MA.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  Ph.D., 

Temple  University 

RONALD  J.  PEKALA  Department  of  Psychology 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University,  Ph.D., 
Michigan  State  University 

YVONNE  JO  ROBBINS  Department  of  Health 
M.Ed.,  Cabrini  College;  AS  ,  Hahnemann 
Medical  College;  B.S.W,  Temple  University 

EDWARD  THERKAUF  Department  of  Health 
B.S.,  Princeton  University;  M.D.,  Columbia 
College  of  Physicians  and  Surgeons 


TONY  J.  VERDE  Department  of  Physical 

Education 

B.S.,  Brock  University;  MS.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Toronto 

JACK  C.  WHITE  Department  of  Biology 
B.S.,  M.D.,  University  of  Vermont,  FA.C.S. 

SUSAN  WIX  Department  of  Health 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University 

GAIL  LYNN  WOODS  Department  of  Biology 
B.S.,  Beloit  College;  M.D.,  Indiana  University 

RICHARD  W  ZIEGLER  Department  of  Sports 

Medicine 

BA,  Princeton  University;  M.D.,  Jefferson 

Medical  College,  Thomas  Jefferson 

University 


Emeriti 


'ALEXANDER  ANTONOWICH,  Music  Education 

'ELEANOR  ASHKENAZ,  Chemistry 

DOROTHY  D.  BAILEY,  English 

'HAROLD  W  BENDA.  Education 

BERN  ICE  BERNATZ,  Dean  of  Women  Emerita 

'JAMES  A.  BINNEY,  English 

MARY  M.  BUSS,  Biology 

JUSTO  B.  BRAVO,  Chemistry 

WALTER  E.  BUECHELE,  JR.  Counselor. 
Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 

ROBERT  E.  CARLSON,  History 

'PAUL  E.  CARSON,  Music 

NONA  E.  CHERN,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

'MARY  E.  CLEARY,  Education 

'JOHN  W  CLOKEY,  Dean  of  Arts  and  Utters 
Emeritus 

BARBARA  J.  COATES,  Physical  Education 

BERNARD  B.  COHEN,  Psychology 

'FAYE  A.  COLLICOTT,  Ubrarian 

GERALDINE  C.  CONBEER.  Ubrarian 

EDWIN  B.  COTTRELL,  Health  and  Physical 
Education 

'GEORGE  R.  CRESSMAN,  Educauon 

'KATHERINE  M.  DENSWORTH,  Educafion 

'MARK  M.  EVANS,  Director  of  Student  Teaching 

'MARION  FARNHAM,  Art 

RUTH  FELDMAN,  Psychology 

BYRON  Y  FLECK  Dean  of  Social  Sciences 
Emeritus 

'THOMAS  J.  FRANCELIA  Criminal  Justice 

CHARLOTTE  M.  GOOD,  Education 

'ROBERT  B.  GORDON,  Sciences 

'ANNE  M.  GOSHEN,  Psychology 


'Deceased 


MIRL^M  S.  GOTTLIEB,  Music 

'THELMAJ.  GREENWOOD,  Biology 

MADELYN  GUTWIRTH,  Foreign  Languages 

H.  THEODORE  HALLMAN,  Art 

JOAN  HASSELQUIST,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

JACK  GARDNER  HAWTHORNE,  Art 

'CHARLES  W  HEATHCOTE,  Social  Sciences 

'THOMAS  J.  HEIM,  Social  Sciences 

WAITER  J.  HIPPLE,  Philosophy 

PHILIP  P.  HOGGARD.  Education 

PAMELA  JUDSON-RHODES  (HEMPHILL),  Art 

CAROLYN  B.  KEEFE,  Communication  Studies 

'W  GLENN  KILLINGER,  Dean  of  Men  Emeritus 

CHARLOTTE  E.  KING,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

MARY  L.  KLINE,  Nursing 

'CARRIE  C.  KULP,  Education 

'GEORGE  lANGDON,  Geography  and  Planning 

'MURIEL  LEACH,  Health  and  Physical 
Education 

MELVIN  M.  LORBACK,  Physical  Educauon 

'GRACE  D.  MCCARTHY,  English 

'EMIL  H.  MESSIKOMER,  Dean  Emeritus 

'LLOYD  C.  MTTCHELL,  Dean  of  Music  Emeritus 

DOROTHY  R.  NOWACK,  Health 

BERNARD  S.  OLDSEY,  English 

WILUAM  R  OVERLEASE.  Biology 

JACK  A.  OWENS,  Health  and  Physical 
Education 

RUTH  PETKOFSKY,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

'DOROTHY  RAMSEY,  English 

N.  RUTH  REED,  Health 

RUSSELL  K  RICKERT  Physics 

WALTER  NATHANIEL  RIDLEY,  Education 


ALBERT  ROBERTS,  Foreign  Languages 

B.  PAUL  ROSS,  Education 

'HELEN  RUSSELL,  Ubrary  Science 

GLENN  W  SAMUELSON,  Anthropology  and 
Sociology 

'GERTRUDE  K  SCHMIDT  Music 

JANE  E.  SHEPPARD,  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

W.  CLYDE  SKTllFN,  Biology 

'KENNETH  C.  SLAGLE,  Dean  of  Arts  and 
Sciences  Emeritus 

'CHARLES  A.  SPRENKLE,  Dean  of  Music 
Emeritus 

RUTH  S.  SXVJLEY,  Mathematical  Sciences 

R.  GODFREY  STUDENMUND,  Education 

RUSSELL  L.  STURZEBECKER,  Health  and 
Physical  Education 

ROY  D  SWEET,  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

'EARL  F  SYKES,  President  Emeritus 

ELINOR  Z.  TAYLOR,  Physical  Education 

'JOSEPH  M.  THORSON,  Business 
Administration 

'WILLARD  J.  TREZISE,  Biology 

'EDWARD  T  TWARDOWSKl,  Health  and 
Physical  Education 

'S.  ELIZABETH  TYSON,  English 

'EARLE  C.  WATERS,  Health  and  Physical 

Education 

SOL  WEISS,  Mathematical  Sciences 

THEODORA  L.  WEST,  English 

ARDIS  M.  WILLL^MS,  CAemJsfiy 

'JOSEPHINE  E.  WILSON,  English 

JAMES  J.  WRIGHT,  Music  Theory  and  Composition 

EDWIN  L.  YOUMANS,  Health  and  Physical 
Education 

'EDWARD  ZIMMER,  Music 


Faculty 


Trustees  Achievement  Awards 


1985 

FRANK  GROSSHANS 

CHARLES  C.  SOUFAS.JR. 

1986 

RICHARD  W.  FIELDS 


1987 

MARSHALL  J.  BECKER 

WACLAW  SZYMANSKl 

1989 

CHRISTOPHER  BUCKLEY 

LARRY  A.  NELSON 


1990 

PAUL  STOLLER 


1992 

MARY  E.  CRAWFORD 


Distinguished  Teaching  Chairs 


1982-1983 
FRANK  A.  SMITH 
JANE  B.  SWAN 


Merit  Awards 

1982-1983 

DIANE  O  CASAGRANDE 
MARY  A.  KEETZ 
JANE  E.  SHEPPARD 
CHARLES  H.  STUART 

1983-1984 

ELIZABETH  A.  GLV^GIUUO 
KOSTAS  MYRSL\DES 
LOIS  WILLIAMS 


1984-1985 

FRANK  E.  MnilMAN 

RUTH  I.  WEIDNER 

1986-1987 

G.  WINFIELD  FAIRCHIID 

KOSTAS  MYRSL\DES 

1987-1988 
WALLACE  J.  KAHN 
STERLING  E.  MURRAY 
ARLENE  C.  RENGERT 


1988-1989 
PAMELA  HEMPHILL 

1989-1990 

MADELYN  GUTWIRTH 

JOAN  HASSELQUIST 

1990-1991 
BENJAMIN  WHTTTEN 

1991-1992 
CHRISTOPHER  BUCKLEY 


Irving  Hersch  Cohen  Faculty  Merit  Award 


1990 

DOROTHY  NOWACK 


1991 

GEORGE  CLAGHORN 


Distinguished  Faculty  Awards 


1974-1975 

THOMAS  A.  EGAN,  Teaching 
E.  RILEY  HOLMAN,  Teaching 
MICHAEL  A.  PEICH,  Teaching 

1975-1976 

WALTER  E.  BUECHELE,  JR.,  Service 
CARMELA  L.  CINQUINA,  Service 
PHILLIP  B.  DONLEY,  Service 
GEORGE  W  MAXIM,  Teaching 
EDWARD  N.  NORRIS,  Semce 
PHILIP  D.  SMITH,  JR.,  Teaching 
WnjJAM  TOROP,  Teaching 

1976-1977 

ROBERT  E.  BYTNAR,  Semce 


ANDREW  E.  DINNIMAN,  Service 

IRENE  G.  SHUR,  Teaching 

RUSSELL  L.  STURZEBECKER,  Service 


1977-1978 

MARC  L  DURAND  and  ROBERT  F. 

Ooint  Project).  Service 
BERNARD  S.  OLDSEY,  Semce 
GEORGE  F.  REED,  Teaching 
RICHARD  1.  WOODRUFF,  Teaching 

1978-1979 

ROBERT  E.  CARLSON,  Semce 
JOHN  J.  TURNER,  JR.,  Teaching 
C.  RALPH  VERNO,  Teaching 


FOERY 


ROBERT  H.  WEISS,  Semce 

1979-1980 

CAROLYN  B.  KEEFE,  Teaching 
JOHN  A.  MANGRAVITE,  Teaching 
PHILIP  D.  SMITH,  JR,  Semce 
NORBERT  C.  SOLDON,  Ser\ice 

1980-1981 

LOUIS  A.  CASCL\TO,  Teaching 
PHILIP  B.  RUDNICK,  Semce 
FRANK  A.  SMITH,  JR,  Teaching 
JANE  B.  SWAN,  Teaching 
JOSEPH  M.  THORSON,  Semce 


ACADEMIC  CALENDAR  1993-94 


September  6 
September  7 
September  8 
September  16 
September  25 
November  24 
November  29 
December  17-23 
December  19 
December  23 
December  24 


FALL  SEMESTER  1993 

Labor  Day— residence  halls  open 

Faculty  Meetings  —  per  departmental  announcements;  Late  Registration 

Classes  begin  —  8  a.m. 

Rosh  Hashanah* 

Yom  Kippur' 

Thanksgiving  Recess  begins  —  8  a.m. 

Thanksgiving  Recess  ends  —  8  a.m. 

Examination  Period 

Commencement 

Fall  Semester  ends 

Legal  Holiday 


January  17 
January  18 
March  11 
March  21 
April  1 
April  4 
May  7-13 
May  14 
May  14 


SPRING  SEMESTER  1994 

Martin  Luther  King  Day— (no  classes)  Late  Registration 

Classes  begin  —  8  a.m. 

Spring  Break  begins  —  5  p.m. 

Spring  Break  ends  —  8  a.m. 

Easter  Break  begins  —  8  a.m. 

Easter  Break  ends  —  4  p.m. 

Examination  Period 

Commencement 

Spring  Semester  ends 


June  6— June  24 
June  27  — August  5 
August  8  — August  26 


SUMMER  SESSIONS  1994 

Pre  Session 
Regular  Session 
Post  Session 


*  Although  the  University  will  be  in  session,  no  examinations  are  to  be  administered  on  these  major  Jewish  Holy  Days. 


University  Policy  for  Storm  Closings 

When  storm  conditions  affect  the  operation  of  the  University, 
announcements  are  made  over  local  radio  and  TV  stations  via  a 
system  of  code  numbers  keyed  to  affected  schools.  Prefixes 
indicate  whether  the  school  will  be  closed  or  open  later  than 
usual.  West  Chester's  numbers  and  applicable  prefixes  are: 

853  —  University  Number;  this  number  with  no  prefix  indi- 
cates classes  will  be  cancelled  for  the  day. 
2853  — Evening  classes  will  be  cancelled. 


5853  — School  will  open  one  hour  late. 
6853  —  School  will  open  two  hours  late. 

On  Tuesday  or  Thursday,  either  a  two-hour  delay  or  class 
cancellation  will  be  called.  Two-hour  delays  on  these  days  will 
mean  that  8  a.m.  classes  are  cancelled  and  the  class  normally 
starting  at  9:30  a.m.  will  start  at  10  a.m.  and  continue  to  11  a.m. 

On  Monday,  Wednesday,  or  Friday,  a  one-hour  delay  means  that 
the  8  a.m.  class  is  cancelled.  A  rwo-hour  delay  means  that  both  the 
8  a.m.  and  9  a.m.  classes  are  cancelled. 


Campus  Map 


FACULTY/STAFF  * 

FACULTY/STAFF/STUDENT  * 

BOROUGH  OF  WEST  CHESTER 
PARKING  PERMIT  OR  METER 

Viol    I   UM  'oslticiioos  <»et^«i»0  By 

po&IM  Signs,  iitucti  lAke 
p(«CO(Mric«  Ov«t  putMU^M 

26;  EMERGENCY  PHONES    ™-'C 

anro(cam*ni  subjecl  lo 
change  aa  poMM 

A  sspa'ale  mop  tMsagnating 
partiinq  rot  me  hvxiK«ppM  -s 
ava-iatMe  m  PuOi<  S«le^  >"  ir« 
Pso9»a&  I^UintanAnc*  Buildtng 


Borough  of  West  Chester 


Chester  County 


Index 


-A- 
Absence  Policy,  42 
Academic 

Advising,  39 

Advising  Center,  31 

Affairs,  29-34 

Calendar,  156 

Classification,  39 

Development  FYogram,  31 

Level  Requirements  for 
FLS/PLUS/FSLS,  12 

Policies,  Exemption  from,  48 

Policies  and  Procedures,  39-49 

Services  Division,  139-140 

Standards,  45 
Academic/Professional  and  Special  Interest 

Organizations,  25 
Acceptance  Fee,  10 
Accounting,  Department  of,  97 
Accreditation,  ii 

American  College  Testing  Program  (ACT),  6 
Adding  a  Course,  40 
Adjunct  Faculty.  153-154 
Administration,  142 
Admission 

Requirements,  6-8 

to  Teacher  Education,  117 

to  West  Chester,  6-8 
Admissions  Staff,  8 
Adult  and  Continuing  Education,  See 

University  College 
Advanced  Placement  Program,  46 
Affirmative  Action  Policy,  ii 
African-American  Studies,  See  Ethnic 

Studies 
Air  Force  ROTC,  33,  140 
Alumni  Association,  28 
American  Studies  Program,  79-80 
Anthropology  and  Sociology,  Depanment 

of,  53-55 
Appeals  to  Fee  and  Refund  Policies,  10 
Application 

Fee,  10 

for  Admission,  6 
Applied  Media  Technology,  See 

Instructional  Media 
Armed  Services  Programs,  33 
Armed  Services  Reserve  Officer  Candidate 

Program  (ROC),  33 
Army  ROTC,  33.  139-140 
Art 

Collections,  6 
Depanment  of,  55-58 
Arts  and  Sciences,  College  of,  53-96 
Associate 

Degrees.  38-39 
of  Arts,  38-39 
of  Science.  39 

See  also  Health  and  Instructional  Media 
Astronomy.  See  Geology  and  Astronomy 
Athlete  Absence  Policy.  42 
Athletic  Training.  See  Sports  Medicine 
Athletics.  28 


Audit  Fee,  10 

Auditing  Privileges,  41 

Awards,  See  Scholarships  and  Awards 

-B- 
Baccalaureate  Degree  Requirements,  34-38 
Biology,  Department  of,  58-61 
Board  of 

Directors,  West  Chester  University 
Foundation,  141 

Governors,  141 
Bookstore,  20 

Bus  Transportation  on  Campus,  20 
Business  and  Public  Affairs,  School  of, 

97-109 

-C- 

Calendar,  Academic,  156 
Campus 

and  Facilities,  4-6 

description  of.  4-5 

Map,  157 
Career  Planning  and  Placement  Services,  20 
Center 

for  Academic  Excellence,  30-31 

for  Business,  Industry  and 
Government  (CBIG).  32-33 

for  Community  Education.  33 

for  Governmental  and  Community 
Affairs.  6 

of  Adult,  Evening  and  Alternative 
Studies,  32 
Certification 

Admission  for,  8 

Teaching,  117-118 
Changing  Majors,  40 
Chemistry,  Department  of,  61-63 
Chemistry-Biology,  See  Biology,  Chemistry, 

Pre-Medical  Program 
Chemistry-Geology,  See  Geology  and 

Astronomy 
Chester  County  Map,  159 
Childhood  Studies  and  Reading, 

Depanment  of,  110-112 
Children's  Center,  20 
Class  Load,  40 
Classification 

Academic,  39 

by  University  Program,  39 

of  Students,  19 
CLEP,  46-47 

Closing,  Storm,  Policy  for,  156 
Coaching,  See  Physical  Education 
College  Level  Examination  Program 

(CLEP),  46-47 
College  Literature,  34 
Commencement  Fee,  11 
Communication  Studies.  63-65 
Communications  Directory,  ii 
Communicative  Disorders,  Department  of, 

119-120 
Community  Center  Fee,  8 
Commuters,  See  Off-Campus  Students 
Comparative  Literature  Studies  Program, 

80-81,  See  also  English 


Computer  Science,  See  Mathematics  and 

Computer  Science 
Computing  Services,  See  Information 

Services 
Continuing  Education  Programs,  See 

University  College 
Correspondence  Courses  Policy,  46 
Council  of  Trustees,  141 
Counseling  and  Psychological  Services 

Department,  20-21 
Counseling  Center,  20 
Counselor,  Secondary',  and  Professional 

Education,  Department  of,  112-114 
Course 

Audit  Fee,  10 

Prefixes,  Guide  to,  52 
Creative  Writing,  See  English 
Credit  By  Examination,  41 

Fee,  10 
Criminal  Justice,  Depanment  of,  98-99 
Cumulative  Grade  Point  Average,  43 

Required  for  Graduation,  47 
Cut  Policy,  42 

-D- 
Damage  Fee,  10 
Dance,  See  Physical  Education 
Daycare,  See  Children's  Center 
Darlington  Herbarium,  5 
Deadline  for  AppHcation,  6 
Dean's  list,  44 
Deferred  Payment  Policy,  10 
Degree  Programs, 

Graduate,  33-34 

Undergraduate,  51 
Degree  Requirements,  34-39 

See  also  Individual  Program  Listings 
Dental  Hygiene,  See  Health 
Description  of  the  Campus,  4-5 
Dining  Accommodations,  19-20.  See  abo 

Meals  Fee 
Directions  to  the  University,  4 
Directory  Information  -  Rights  to  Privacy 

Act  of  1974,  47 
Disabilities,  Offices  of  Special  Services  for 

Students  with,  31 
Dismissal,  Academic,  45 
Distributive  Requirements,  36 
Double  Major,  39 

Driver  Education,  See  Physical  Education 
Dropping  a  Course,  40 
Dual  Degrees,  39 

-E- 

Early  Admission,  7 

Early  Childhood,  See  Childhood  Studies 

and  Reading 
Earth  Science,  See  Geology  and  Astronomy 
Economics,  Department  of,  99-101 
Education,  School  of,  110-118 
Educational  Services 

Department  of,  139 

Fee,  8-9 


Index 


Elementary  Education,  See  Childhood 

Studies  and  Reading 
Emeriti,  154 
Engineering,  See  Physics 
English,  Depanment  of,  65-69 
Enrollment,  3 
Environmental 

Education  Program,  113-114 

Health,  See  Health 

Programs,  30 
Ethnic  Studies  Program,  81-82 
Evening  Studies,  See  University  College 
Exemption 

from  Academic  Policies,  48 

from  Final  Examinations,  42 


Faculty,  143-154 

Faculty  Awards,  155 

Family  Educational  Rights  and  F*rivacy  Act, 

48-49 
Federal 

Parent  Loan  for  Undergraduate  Students, 

13 

Pell  Grant,  14 

Perkins  Loan  Program,  13 

Stafford  Loan  Program,  13 

Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity 
Grant,  14 

Supplemental  Loans  for  Students,  13-14 

Title  IV  Financial  Aid,  12 

Work  Study  Program,  13 
Fees 

and  Expenses,  8-11 

for  Health  and  Physical  Education 

Majors,  11 
Field  Placement  in  Schools,  39 
Film  Theory  and  Criticism,  See 

Comparative  Literature 
Final  Examination,  Exemption  from,  42 
Finance,  See  Economics 
Financial  Aid,  11-18 
Foreign 

Culture  Clusters,  37-38 

Language  and  Culture  Requirements, 
37 

Languages,  Department  of,  69-74 

Students,  See  International  Students 
Former  Students,  Readmission  of,  8 
Francis  Harvey  Green  Library,  5-6 
Fraternities,  24 
Frederick  Douglass  Society,  3 
French,  See  Foreign  Languages 

-G- 

GI  Bill,  32 

General  Education  Requirements,  35-39 

Geography  and  Planning,  Department  of, 

101-103 
German,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Geology  and  Astronomy,  Department  of, 

74-76 
Governmental  and  Community  Affairs, 

Center  for,  6 
GPA,  43 
Grade 

Appeals,  43-44 

Changes,  43 


Reports,  42 
Grading  System,  42-43 
Graduate 

Credit  for  Undergraduates,  41 

Studies,  33-34 
Graduation 

Fee,  See  Commencement  Fee 

Honors,  47 

Requirements,  47 
Grants,  14 
Greek 

Letter  Organizations,  24 

Life,  21 

See  Foreign  Languages 
Green  Library,  5-6 
Guaranteed  Student  Loan,  See  Stafford  Loan 

Program 

-H- 
Health 

and  Physical  Education,  See 
Physical  Education 

and  Physical  Education  Majors  Fee,  1 1 

Center  Fee,  8 

Department  of,  120-123 

Sciences,  School  of,  119-131 

Services,  21 
Hebrew,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Hispanic-American  Studies,  See  Ethnic 

Studies 
Historical  Properties,  6 
History 

Department  of,  77-79 

of  the  University,  3-4 
Honor  Societies,  24-25 
Honors 

Graduation,  47 

Program,  29 
Housing 

Deposit,  10 

Fee,  9 

Off-Campus,  20 

On-Campus,  19 

Refunds,  10 
How  to  Reach  West  Chester,  4 

-I- 
Identification  Card  Fee,  10 
Independent  Study,  41 
Individualized  Instruction,  41 
Infirmary,  See  Health  Services 
Information  Science,  See  Mathematics  and 

Computer  Science 
Information  Services,  5 
Institute  for  Women,  3 
Instructional 

I  Certificate,  118 

II  Certificate,  118 

Media,  Department  of,  114-115 
Instrument  Rental  Fee,  1 1 
Instrumental  Music,  Department  of, 

135-136 
Insurance  Requirements  for  International 

Students,  7 
Insurance  Programs,  21 
Intention  to  Graduate,  Required  Notice,  47 
Intercollegiate  Athletic  Program,  28 
Interdisciplinary 

Programs,  79-84 


Requirement,  36-37 
International  Education,  29 
International  Students,  7 

Insurance  Requirements,  7 

Services  Fee,  9 
Internships,  32 

Introducing  West  Chester,  3-4 
Italian,  See  Foreign  Languages 

-J- 
Jewish-American  Studies,  See  Ethnic 

Studies 
Journalism,  See  English 
Junior  Year  Abroad  F*rogram,  70,  See  also 

International  Education 

-K- 
Keyboard  Music,  Department  of,  136-137 

-L- 
Languages,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Late  Registration  Fee,  10 
Latin,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Latin-American  Studies  Program,  82 
Liability  Insurance  Requirement  for  Studies 

in  Nursing,  21,  123 
Liberal  Studies  Program,  85-86 
Library,  Francis  Harvey  Green,  5-6 
Library,  Music,  6 
Linguistics  Program,  82-83 
Literature,  See  English 
Loans,  13-14 

Location  of  the  University,  4 
Lost  Key  Replacement  Fee,  1 1 

-M- 
Mail  Service,  21-22 
Majors,  Changing,  38 

See  Programs 
Management,  Department  of,  103-104 
Map  of 

Chester  County,  159 

the  Campus,  157 

West  Chester  Borough,  158 
Marketing,  Department  of,  104-105 
Mathematics  and  Computer  Science 

Department  of,  86-89 
Married  Students  (Housing),  19 
Meal 

Fee,  9 

Plans,  See  Dining  Accommodations 

Refunds,  10 

See  Dining  Accommodations 
Media  Organizations,  Student,  26 
Military  Science,  139-140 
Minor  Fields  of  Study,  39-40 
Minority  ASairs,  22 
Missions  of  the  University,  3 
Music 

Education,  Department  of,  134 

History,  Department  of,  134-135 

Instrumental,  Department  of,  135-136 

Keyboard,  Department  of,  136-137 

Library,  6 

School  of,  132-138 

Theory  and  Composition,  Department  of, 
137 

Vocal  and  Choral,  Department  of,  138 
Musical  Organizations,  26-27 


Index 


-N- 
National 

Student  Exchange  Program,  29-30 

Teacher  Examination,  118 
Native-American  Studies,  5ee  Ethnic 

Studies 
Noncredit  Courses,  See  University  College 
Nondegree  Student  Application  Fee,  10 
Nondegree  Students,  39,  See  also  University 

College 
Nondiscrimination  Policy,  ii 
Notice  of  Intention  to  Graduate,  47 
Nursing,  Department  of,  123-125 

-O- 
OfT-Campus 

Housing,  20 

Student  Association  (OCSA),  19 

Students,  19 
Office  of 

Off-Campus  and  Commuter  Life,  20 

Services  for  Students  with  Disabilities,  31 
On-Campus  Housing,  19 
Orientation  and  Parent  Relations,  22 

See  also  UNI  101,  The  Student  and  the 

University 
Outdoor  Education,  See  Physical  Education 
Overloads,  40 
Overnight  Guests,  19 
Overseas  Study,  See  International  Education 

-P- 

Parent  Loan  for  Undergraduate  Students, 

Federal  (PLUS),  13 
Parking 

Decal,  See  Vehicle  Regulations 

Fees,  10-11 
Pass/Fail  Policy,  41 
Payment  of  Fees,  9-10 
Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  Program,  83 
Pell  Grant,  Federal,  13 
Pennsylvania  State  System 

Visiting  Student  Program,  30 
Perkins  Loan  Program,  Federal,  14 
Philosophy,  Department  of,  89-91 
Physical 

Education,  Depanment  of,  125-130 

Education  Uniforms,  11 

Examinations,  8,  21 

Fitness,  See  Physical  Education 
Physics,  Department  of,  91-92 
Placement,  20 

Credentials  Fee,  11 
Planning,  See  Geography  and  Planning 
Political 

Science,  Department  of,  105-107 

Science/P^iblic  Administration  Programs, 
107-108 
PortfoUo  Assessment  Fee,  10 
Portuguese,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Post  Office,  See  Mail  Service 
Pre-Engineering,  30,  91 
Pre-Law,  30,  105 
Pre-Medical  Program,  30,  92-93 
Pre-Professional  Study  and  Advising,  30 
Pre-Theology,  30,  89 
P  R.I.D.E.  Student  Development  Resource 

Center,  22 
Probation,  Academic,  45 


{Professional 

Education  Requirement,  112 

Organizations,  23-24,  25 
Programs 

Graduate,  33-34 

of  Study  and  Course  Offerings,  52 

Undergraduate,  51 
Psychology,  Department  of,  93-95 
Public 

Administration,  107-108 

Health,  See  Health 

Safety,  22 
F*ubUcations,  Student,  26 


-Q- 


The  QUAD,  26 


-R- 

Radio  Station,  See  Station  WCUR 
Reading,  See  Childhood  Studies  and 

Reading 
Readmission 

of  Dismissed  Students,  45 

of  Former  Students,  8 
Recreation  and/or  Outdoor  Education,  See 

Physical  Education 
Recreational  Services,  28 
Refund  Policy,  10 
Religion,  See  Philosophy 
Religious  Organizations,  24,  25 
Repeating  Courses,  45-46 
Requirements 

for  Admission,  6 

for  Graduation,  47 
Residence  Life  and  Housing,  19 
Resident 

Credit  Requirement,  47 

Students.  19 
Respiratory  Therapy,  See  Health 
Rights  to  Privacy  Act,  47 
Roben  B.  Gordon  Natural  Area  for 

Environmental  Studies,  5 
ROTC  Programs,  33,  139-140 
Russian,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Russian  Studies  Program,  83 

-S- 
Safety  Education,  See  Physical  Education 
SAT,  6 
Satisfattory  Academic  Progress  for 

Financial  Aid,  11-12 
Scholarly  Publications,  34 
Scholarships  and  Awards,  14-18 
School  Health,  See  Health 
Second  Degree,  8,  39 
Secondary  Education,  See  Counselor, 

Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 
Security,  See  Public  Safety 
Serpentine,  The,  26 
Service  Organizations,  24,  26 
Sexual  Harassment  Policy,  ii 
Short-Term  Emergency  Loan,  14 
Snow  Days,  See  Storm  Closing  Policy 
Social  Studies 

Program,  115-116 

With  Concentrations  in  Political 
Science,  108 
Social  Work,  Department  of,  108-109 
Sociology,  See  Anthropology  and  Sociology 
Sororities,  See  Greek  Letter  Organizations 


Spanish,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Special  Collections,  See  Francis  Harvey 

Green  Library 
Special  Education,  Department  of,  116-117 
Speech 

and  Hearing  Clinic,  6 

Pathology,  See  Communicative 
Disorders 
Sports,  See  Athletics 

Sports  Medicine,  Department  of,  130-131 
SSI,  22 

Fee,  8 
Stafford  Loan  Program,  Federal,  13 
State 

Grants,  14 

System  of  Higher  Education,  141 
Station  WCUR,  26 
Storm  Closing  Policy,  156 
Structure  of  the  University,  50 
Student 

Absence  Policy,  42 

Activities,  23-28 

Affairs,  18-28 

Athlete  Absence  Policy,  42 

Class  Load,  40 

Consumer  Rights  and  Responsibilities, 
12-13 

Governing  Organizations,  23,  25 

Government,  See  SSI 

Name  Changes,  47 

Newspaper,  See  The  QUAD 

Organizations,  23-25 

Services,  Incorporated  (SSI),  22 
Fee,  8 

Standards,  22-23 

Teaching,  117-118 

Union  Expansion  Fee,  9 
Students  With  Disabilities,  OESce  of,  31 
Study  Skilk  Project,  31 
Summer  Sessions,  32 
Supplemental 

Education  Opportunity  Grant,  Federal, 
14 

Loans  for  Students,  Federal,  13 
Supplementary  General  Education 

Requirements,  37 
Sykes  Union  Building,  23 

-T- 

Taldng  Courses 

Off  Campus,  46 

Out  of  Sequence,  40-41 
Teacher  Education,  Admission  to,  117 
Teaching 

Certificates,  118 

Certification  Programs,  117 
Theatre  Arts,  95-96 
Toxicology,  See  Chemistry 
Transfer 

of  Credit,  46 

Students,  7 
Transcript  Fee,  1 1 
Transcripts,  47 
Tuition,  8 
Tutoring  Center,  31 

-U- 
Uncollectible  Check  Policy,  10 
Undeclared  Major  Program,  30-31 


Index 


Undergraduate  Programs,  51 

UNI  101,  The  Student  and  the  University, 

35 
United  States  Marine  Corps  Platoon 

Leaders  Class,  33 
University 

Ambassadors,  26 

College,  32-33 

-V- 
Vehicle  Registration,  22 
Veterans  AlEairs,  33 


Vocal  and  Choral  Music,  Department  of, 
138 


-W- 
WCUR,  26 

West  Chester  Borough,  Map  of,  158 
West  Chester,  How  to  Reach,  4 
Withdrawal/Enrollment  Change  and 

Aid,  12 
Withdrawal  from  the  University,  40 
Withdrawing  from  a  Course,  40 


Women's 

Center,  23 

Studies  Program,  84 
Work  Study  Program,  Federal,  13 
Writing,  See  English 
Writing 

Emphasis  Courses,  36 

Program,  31-32 

-X-Y-Z- 
Yearbook,  See  The  Serpentine 


Departmental  Telephone  Numbers 


College  of  Arts 

and  Sciences    (215)  436-3521 

Anthropology/Sociology 

436-3500 

Art 

436-2755 

Biology 

436-2538 

Chemistry 

436-2631 

Communication  Studies 

436-2500 

English 

436-2822 

Foreign  Languages 

436-2700 

Geology  and 

Astronomy 

436-2727 

History 

436-2201 

Mathematics  and 

Computer  Science 

436-2440 

Philosophy 

436-2841 

Physics 

436-2497 

Psychology 

436-2945 

Theatre  Arts 

436-2500 

School  of  Business 

and  Public  Affairs  436-2824 

Accounting  436-2236 

Criminal  Justice  436-2647 

Economics  436-2134 
Geography  and  Planning  436-2343 

Management  436-2304 

Marketing  436-2304 

Pohtical  Science  436-2343 

Social  Work  436-2527 

School 

of  Education  436-2321 

Childhood  Studies 

and  Reading  436-2944 
Counselor/Secondary/ 

Professional  Education   436-2958 

Instructional  Media  436-2233 

Special  Education  436-2579 

School  of  Health 

Sciences  436-2938 

Communicative 

Disorders  436-3401 

Health  436-2931 

Nursing  436-2219 

Physical  Education  436-2260 

Sports  Medicine  436-3293 

School  of  Music  436-2739 

History/Literature  436-2739 

Instrumental  Music  436-2739 

Keyboard  Music  436-2739 

Music  Education  436-2739 
Theory  and 

Composition  436-2739 

Vocal  and  Choral  436-2739 


NOTES 


?.  - 


'.■,1 


*.  ? 


■T 


t      • «'     s 


I